Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutR2020-084 2020-05-04 RESOLUTION NO. R2020-84 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract for the Southdown Ground Storage Water Tank Replacement Project, to W. W. Payton Corporation, in the amount of $1,672,000.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for construction of the Southdown Ground Storage Water Tank Replacement Project have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards the bid to W. W. Payton Corporation, in the amount of$1,672,000.00. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the Southdown Ground Storage Water Tank Replacement Project. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 4th day of May, A.D., 2020. PSt_4-61. TOM REID MAYOR ATTE T: RLAN CRY' AL ROAN, TRMC, CMC �PO CITY SECRETARY , �Q A . v APPROVED AS TO FORM: =v ' DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY Project Manual .,10 for: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement CI P WA 1904 PE A.014 1 44! v 92 v PEARLMD TEX AS 1110 tit S T. i S Bid No . : 0220-25 P�E�.OF`°rF ,'o/ .Fc•).•• * •••1:J‘lo KEITH A. O'CONNOR March 2020 ,-o' 98334• : •G '�o�'` '•e/CENS • �� Prepared By: i°ee/ONA „ ?\\Clltrnv a� -'J 1 Kofs . V EngineersITPr•Plannerses•Constructionionals,Managers 2000 W Sam Houston Parkway S Suite 1400.Houston,Texas 77042 Phone:(713)783-8700 Fax(713)783-8747 Challongrng Challonges... TBPE Firm Registration No 1.4991 t.i March 2020 City of Pearland Table of Contents Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (11h. DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00100 Invitation to Bid 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal 00300A Bid Pricing Form 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien 00700 General Conditions of Agreement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings III01350 Submittals 01380 Construction Photographs 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Observation Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exits 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs 01600 Material and Equipment 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01720 Field Surveying 01750 Starting Systems 11) Page i City of Pearland Table of Contents Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout 01782 Operations and Maintenance Data DIVISION 2-SITE WORK 02220 Site Demolition 02226 Compacted Sand Fill Under Tank Floor Plate 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials 02316 Excavation and Backfill for Roadways 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02335 Subgrade 02510 Water Mains 02512 Polyethylene Wrap 02534 PVC Pipe 02541 Water and Wastewater Line Valves 02603 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 02630 Storm Sewers 02631 Precast Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls 02632 Cast-in-Place Inlets, Headwalls, and Wingwalls 02633 Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, and Valve Boxes 02634 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings 02636 Polyurethane Coating on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 02751 Concrete Pavement 02771 Concrete Sidewalks 02910 Topsoil 02921 Hydromulch Seeding 02922 Sodding 02980 Pavement Repair and Resurfacing DIVISION 3-CONCRETE 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 03310 Structural Concrete DIVISION 5-METALS () O() Metal Fabrications DIVISION 9-FINISHES 09900 Painting 09971 Painting and Protective Coatings for Potable Water Storage Tanks DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13203 Tank Cleanup and Disinfection 13205 Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Page ii City of Pearland Table of Contents Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 13300 Instrumentation and Controls(I&C) General Provisions 1111 13302 I&C—Testing 13303 I&C—Training 13305 I&C—Control Descriptions 13330 I&C—Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment 13342 I&C—Level Devices DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15051 Buried Piping Installation 15052 Exposed Piping Installation 15054 Steel Process Pipe 15062 Ductile Iron Pipe 15100 Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 15140 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints 15261 Pipe Insulation, Water and Chemical Service 15500 Process Valves DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16000 Electrical General Provisions 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16015 Electrical System Analysis 16060 Electrical Demolition 16110 Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Support • 16120 Wires and Cables (600-Volt) 16141 Wiring Devices 16165 Disconnect Switches 16191 Miscellaneous Equipment 16195 Electrical Identification 16200 Emergency Standby Generator Set 16470 Panelboards 16481 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Modifications 16482 Variable Frequency Drive Controllers 16492 Automatic Transfer Switch 16502 Lightning Protection System 16510 Lighting Fixtures 16600 Underground System 16610 Cathodic Protection Systems for Steel Water Tanks 16660 Grounding System �._._... __ ...._........._...._..._.....-..._.......-... - - .._...._..._....................._.. — Page iii City of Pearland Table of Contents Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11401 — --- Page iv ............... . CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 11) INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer,City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, April 2., 2020. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened"and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Council Chambers at 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581 at 10:30 a.m. on March 24,2020. The project will entail the rehabilitation of the Southdown Groundwater Plant including removal ® of abandoned ground storage tank and existing hydro-pneumatic tanks,installation of new 400,000 gallon welded steel ground storage tank, new variable frequency drives for booster pumps, new 2-2020 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID 450 mW natural gas generator, and related civil, mechanical, structural, electrical and instrumentation improvements. • Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals,BFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City,its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832)613-0201 111 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston,TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to"day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall • be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581. 2-2020 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID • The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%)of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland,Texas as Obligee. Additionally,the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- ", Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise(DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been"opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Crystal Roan City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date March 11.2020 2-2020 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Second Publication date March 18, 2020 ,y 3 2-2020 00100-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (LRB) 1. Defined Terms I.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City". Both terms are synonymous and refer to the City of Pearland and may be used inter-changeably. 1.2 The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid Proposal directly to Owner,as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the Lowest Responsible Bidder to whom the Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bid Documents" includes the Invitation to Bidders,Instructions to Bidders,the Bid Proposal, and the proposed Contract Documents(plans and specifications including all Addenda issued prior to bid opening). 1.3 The term "E-bid System"refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web- based system (Ion Wave) that provides all Bid Documents electronically to interested parties (potential Bidders and forms the pathway for Bidders to submit bids in response to The Invitation to Bid. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Bidders' electronic response submitted on the electronic Bid Proposal with all required attachments to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or"e-bid" are used inter-changeably to describe the above bid submittal process to submit a bid to the City in response to an Invitation to Bidders. 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web-based contract administration and construction records management software used by the contracting parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized project information hub for communications and document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for accessing this system will be issued to the successful Bidder at the pre-Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Bidding Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1.7 The term"Alternate(s)"or"Add Alternate(s)"as used here inter-changeably are defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based on the Owner's sole acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor,material, equipment and overhead costs to perform the work as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate work item shall be added to the Base Bid price and made a part of the Contract price. 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner's E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Bid documents can be viewed by simply selecting a • specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Interested Bidders MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on 08-2018 00200- 1 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade(New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Bidder's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of future bid opportunities. Downloading any project bid data will automatically place the bidder's contact information on the list of plan holders and the E-bid System will automatically send anv and all updates, addenda, changes or additional information associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Bid Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Bidder's use, but the Bid Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to: ebids@pearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Bidding Documents 3.1 Complete sets of "electronic" Bidding Documents are available for download to registered Bidders at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: • https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Interested Bidders must register as a"Supplier"on this site in order to receive the Bid Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Bid Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Bidder accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Bid Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications,addenda or additional information from the City or its Engineer. 3.3 Copies of Bidding Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Bidders. It is recommended that all interested Bidders,whether bidding directly to the Owner or Sub-bidders/Vendors providing pricing to a Bidder, register as a Supplier and download all of the project Bid Documents. 3.4 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bid Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents including,but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 3.5 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bid Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. • 08-2018 00200-2 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4. Qualifications of Bidders ® 4.1 In determining to whom to award a contract, the City of Pearland may consider, in addition to the other selection criteria identified in section 16 of these Instructions to Bidders, the following Qualifications of Bidder, and each Bidder must be prepared to submit within two (2)days of Owner's request any or all of such Qualifications requested. Failure to provide this information within the specified time frame may be cause for rejection of the Bid. 1) A brief narrative of previous experience of the Bidder with projects of a similar nature and scope; specifically including a list of 5 representative projects completed by the Bidder of a similar nature and scope to the work covered by this proposed Contract. The references for the projects provided must include the cost of the project,Owner's name,Engineer or prime contact and telephone number; 2) A list, including owner name and project location, of on-going projects and contracts for construction of projects of the Bidder which are not yet substantially complete including total contract value and current percent complete by payment; 3) A list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers for the project being bid and the total value of work awarded to subcontractors as shown on the Subcontractors List Bid Form; 4)A list of names, address and telephone number of references for other projects completed by Bidder; and 5)A Financial Statement of Bidder,consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Bidder for the Bidder's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The ® Financial Statement of Bidder shall be used to determine a Bidder's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. A Bidder's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Bidder's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being bid. The Bidder's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Bidder. 5. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 5.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid Proposal, to (a) examine the Bidding Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost,progress,performance or furnishing of the Work, (c)consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work,(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents,and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents,(f)to recognize and plan for use of the City's"Pro-Trak"software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 5.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Bidders for review,but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Bidder may not and should not • rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein,or the completeness thereof, for the purposes of bidding or construction. 08-2018 00200-3 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities (ID or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 5.4 Before submitting a Bid Proposal, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations,investigations,explorations,tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid Proposal. Prospective Bidders shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 5.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 5.7 The submission of a Bid Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by • Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4,that without exception the Bid Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 6. Interpretations and Addenda 6.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Bidders in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five(5) days prior to the date for opening of Bid Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Bidders that have downloaded Bid Documents from the City's E-bid System. • 08-2018 00200-4 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 7. Bid Security ® 7.1 Each Bid Proposal must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid Proposal price, in the form of a certified check,cashier's check or a Bid Bond ("Bid Security"). 7.2 Bidders submitting bids through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of their Bid Security(sealed Bid Bond,Certified Check or Cashier's Check)as an attachment to their electronic bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581. 7.3 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such time as Bidder has executed the Standard Form of Agreement,and furnished the required Performance and Payment Bonds, whereupon the Bid Security of both bidders will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish the required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and shall be entitled to make a claim against the Bid Security. The Bid Security of other Bidders will be retained until the Contract is awarded and the Standard Form of Agreement becomes effective, or all bids are rejected, whereupon Bid Security furnished by all such Bidders will be returned. 8. Contract Time II/ 8.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Bid Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to"time"or"days"shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 9. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 9.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus, if any, are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 10. Substitute or"Or-Equal" Items 10.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the specified materials and equipment described in the Plans and Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or- equal" items unless otherwise stated. Whenever it is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or"or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by the Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Agreement becomes effective. All "or-equal" references shall be interpreted to mean "or Owner approved equal". Any substitution made by the Bidder upon which the bid is based shall be at the Bidder's sole risk. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the Contract Documents. 'I 08-2018 00200-5 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 11. Bid Form 11.1 The Bid Proposal form (Section 00300 — Bid Proposal) is included with the Bidding • Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Bid. 11.2 All E-bids must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System Bid Proposal document. All blanks on the Bid Proposal form must be completed or filled in. The Bidder shall bid all Alternates, if any. Incomplete Bid Proposals may be cause for rejection. 11.3 Bid Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president(or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign)and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.4 Bid Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.5 The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Proposal form). Failure to do so could be cause for rejection of the Bid. 11.6 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid Proposal must be shown on the Bid Proposal form. • 12. Submission of Bid Proposals 12.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Bid Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Bid Schedule shall be made by Addenda. 12.2 Electronic Bids shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Bidders utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier, (Bidder). E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. 12.3 Bid Proposals submitted after the bid date and time will be rejected. 13. Modification and Withdrawal of Bid Proposals 13.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 13.2 Once submitted, Bid Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Bid Proposals. • 08-2018 00200-6 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 13.3 A Bidder may not modify or withdraw its Bid Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A • withdrawn Bid Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Bid Proposals. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety(90)days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 13.4 If,within twenty-four(24)hours after Bid Proposals are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Bid Proposal, that Bidder may request to withdraw its Bid Proposal and the bid security may be returned or, at the discretion of the Owner, Owner may make a claim against the bid security. Thereafter,that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 13.5 Bid securities for unsuccessful Bidders will be returned to bidders once a successful Bidder has be identified and notified of the Owner's intent to award a contract. 14. Opening of Bid Proposals 14.1 Bid Proposals will be opened and(unless obviously non-responsive)read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bid Proposals and major alternates(if any)will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bid Proposals through E-Bid. Bid Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Bidder has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. • 15. Bid Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance 15.1 All Bid Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety(90)days after the day of the Bid Proposal opening,but Owner may,in its sole discretion,release any Bid Proposal and return the bid security prior to that date. 16. Award of Contract 16.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bid Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. Owner may reject a bid as non-responsive if: 1) Bidder fails to provide required Bid Security; 2) Bidder improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Bidding Documents; 3) Bidder fails to sign the Bid Proposal or improperly signs the Bid Proposal; 4) Bidder qualifies its Bid Proposal; 5) Bidder tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Bid Proposal; 6) Bidder fails to submit the Qualifications of Bidder as required under section 4 of these Instructions to Bidders; or 7) Bid Proposal is otherwise non-responsive. Contracts are awarded on the basis of the Lowest Responsible Bidder. 16.2 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of bidder, if requested to do so. As required by the Instructions to Bidders • and as a condition of Bid acceptability, the Contractor hereby agrees: 08-2018 00200-7 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. That the City, as Owner and Contract Administrator, retains the right to review and approve the Contractor's and all Subcontractors' qualifications to perform the Work of the Contract and to reject any Subcontractor not meeting the City's • standards, as outlined in the General Conditions, or TxDOT's and FHWA qualifications for performing the Work. 16.3 Lowest Responsible Bidder. In determining Lowest Responsible Bidder, Owner will consider: Lowest Total Bid price for all work including Base Bid, Extra Work, Add Alternates and Cash Allowances, if any, and any other cost criteria. Additional evaluation criteria may include: the Qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bid Proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates,unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Proposal form or prior to the Notice of Award. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 16.4 A contract to be awarded to the Lowest Responsible Bidder may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Bid Proposal format. 16.5 Acceptance of any and all bids may be conditioned on compliance with the requirement for attendance of the mandatory pre-bid meeting. 16.6 In either case, Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid Proposal and to establish the responsibility,qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction,within the Contract Time. 16.7 Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, the Professional/Engineer, and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid. 17. Contract Security 17.1 When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds required by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 18. Signing of Agreement 18.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Bidder until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. • 08-2018 00200-8 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 19. Pre-bid Conference • 19.1 A pre-bid conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. 20. Retainage 20.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 110 C 08-2018 00200-9 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK • 08-2018 00200- 10 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL • Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date: 4-2-20 Bid of W.W.Payton Corporation ,�ctulpr a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a=partmtpsifFirp=oormi4i44g of- __ ,for the construction of: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all • the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Southdown Ground Storage Tank Replacement with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Keith O'Connor, P.E., KIT Professionals, Inc, 2000 W Loop S, Ste 1400, Houston, TX 77042, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Exhibit"A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Bidder. It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive,Pearland,Texas 77581. The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required • insurance in the required amounts. (1 Bidder's Initial's: �` 10-2017 00300- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 270 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500—Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder. It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein,all references to"day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. • Addendum No.: 1 Date: 3-17-20 Addendum No.: 4 Date: 3-30-20 Addendum No.: 2 Date: 3-23-20 Addendum No.: 5 Date: 4-1-20 Addendum No.: 3 Date: 3-24-20 Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement,participated in any collusion,or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name: W.W.Pa Corporation By: �^' �� Title: Wesley W.Payton-President Address: P.O.BOX 1056,Katy,Texas 77492 Phone No: (281)371-7068 ATTEST: Marilyn R.Payton-Secretary (Seal, if Bidder is a Corporation) (Typedo Printed N e) Signature Date: 4-2-20 END OF SECTION Bidder's Initial's: \rY1nn 10-2017 00300-2 of 2 SECTION 00300A BID PRICING FORM 1.0 BID PRICES HAVE BEEN CALCULATED BY BIDDER, USING THE FOLLOWING COMPONENT PRICES AND PROCESS (PRINT OR TYPE NUMERICAL AMOUNTS): A. BASE UNIT PRICE TABLE: Item Item Description Unit of Estimated Unit Price (this Total in figures No. Measure Quantity column controls) 1. Mobilization (not to exceed 3% LS 1 50,000.00 50,000.00 of total bid price) Site Demolition As Shown on Plans Including Demolition of 129,000 GST, Two 20,000 Hydropneumatic Tanks, 2 Booster Pump Valves,Air LS 1 50,000.00 50,000.00 Compressor, Pipe Fill and Abandonment and Related Civil, Mechanical, Structural and Electrical Appurtenances, Complete in Place. 6"Concrete Pavement Including Subgrade and Related Appurtenances 3. (Excluding Pavement CY 160 500.00 80,000.00 Removed and Replaced for Underground Work), Complete in Place. 400,000 Gallon Welded Steel Ground Storage Tank, Foundation including Soil 4. Removal and Replacement, LS 1 890,000.00 890,000.00 Accessories and All Appurtenances, Complete in Place. Yard Piping (Up to Flange at Tank) Including Pipe, Valves, 5' Fittings and Appurtenances, LS 1 85,000.00 85,000.00 Complete in Place. Remove and Replace 8" 6. Booster Pump Suction GateEA 2 2,000.00 4,000.00 Valve and Appurtenances, Complete in Place. Remove and Replace 6" Booster Pump Discharge Gate 7. Valve and Appurtenances, EA 2 1,500.00 3,000.00 Complete in Place. • 104-1906 01540-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. Remove and Replace 6" 8 Booster Pump Check ValveEA 2 2,000.00 4,000.00 and Appurtenances, Complete in Place. Replace Air Conditioner at 9 MCC Building including Wall LS 1 12,000.00 12,000.00 Modifications and Related Appurtenances Site Work Including Paving and Grading, Erosion, Storm 25 000.00 25 000.00 10. Water Pollution Prevention LS 1 and Site Restoration, Complete in Place. Variable Frequency Drives and 11. Related Appurtenances, EA 3 30,000.00 90,000.00 Complete in Place. 450 kW Natural Gas Generator, Foundation, 12. Accessories and All LS 1 200,000.00 200,000.00 Appurtenances, Complete in Place. _ Electrical and Instrumentation Improvements including Field Instruments, Electrical 13. Devices, Ductbank, Conduits LS 1 171,000.00 171,000.00 and Fittings with Associated Appurtenances, Complete in Place. Southdown Groundwater Treatment Plant Improvements 800.00 800.00 14. not included in other Bid Items, LS 1 Complete in Place. A. TOTAL BASE UNIT PRICES $ 1,664,800.00 B. CASH ALLOWANCE Item Item Description Cash Allowance No. 1. Allowance for Painting City of Pearland Logo on GSTs Top and Side $18,000.00(1) B. TOTAL CASH ALLOWANCES $18,000.00(1) C. EXTRA UNIT PRICE TABLE: Item Item Description Unit of Estimated Unit Price(this Total in figures No. Measure Quantity column controls) 15.00 300.00 1. Extra Hand Excavation CY 20 [$15.00](2) [$300.00](2) 104-1906 01540-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. 2. Extra Machine Excavation f CY 50 15.00 750.00 [$15.00](2) [$750.00j(2) 3 Extra Placement of Backfill CY 50 15.00 750.00 Material [$15.002) [$750.042) 4 Extra Structural Concrete in CY 10 500.00 5,000.00 Place [$500.00](2) [$5,000.00]02) 5. Select Backfill Material CY 40 10.00 400.00 [$10.00](2) (400.001)2) C.TOTAL EXTRA UNIT PRICES 7,200.00 [$7,200.00](2) (1) Fixed Unit Price determined prior to Bid. Cannot be adjusted by the Bidder. (2) Minimum Bid Price determined prior to Bid. Can be increased by the Bidder by crossing out the Minimum and noting revised price on the line above. (3) Fixed Unit Price determined prior to Bid. Cannot be adjusted by the Bidder.Allowances to include payment for subcontractor's invoice only. Contractor shall include any overhead and profit in base bid items. TOTAL BASE BID: $ 1,690,000.00 (Add Totals for Items A.,B.and C.above) Note: 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor must achieve Substantial Completion within 270 Calendar Days from date specified in Notice to Proceed, as the time may be adjusted by Change Order 2. Final Completion: Contractor must complete the Punch List within 30 Calendar • Days from Substantial Completion 3. Liquidated Damage Amount for Failure to Meet Time for Substantial Completion: $1,000.00 per Calendar Day 4. Liquidated Damage Amount for Failure to Complete Punch List Items by Time for Final Completion: $50.00, per Calendar Day • 104-1906 01540-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. HARTFORD Bid Bond Surety Department Bond No.n/a •OW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, W.W. Payton Corporation as Principal,hereinafter called the Principal, and the Hartford Fire Insurance Company , a corporation created and existing under the laws of the State of Connecticut ,whose principal office is in Hartford, Connecticut , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee,hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of five percent(5%) of total amount bid Dollars ($ 5% T.A.B.), for the payment of which sum,well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. Whereas,the Principal has submitted a bid for Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement NOW,THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the biddings or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and materials furnished in the prosecution thereof,or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the igee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid,then this obligation 11 be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 2nd day of April A.D. 20 20. Witness W.W. Payton Corporation (If Individual) (Princ. al) (SEAL) By W (SEAL) Wes'e W.Payto ,President (Title) Attest 4 - ' ' (SEAL) ofg (Ifcorp 'o") Marilyn)[t.Payton,Secre Hartf rt, Fire Insurance Com$an (SEAL) Attest ,�� / By ourtneyRe �,i ess� Frame Hay A 1.rne! in-Fact(Title) (SEAL) Form S-3266-4 Printed in U.S.A. 12-70 • Direct Inquiries/Claims to: THE HARTFORD BOND,T-12 POWER OF ATTORNEY HartfOne ord,Connecticut laza 55 Lirgond ClsrmeVihehar1ford.com calf:888.236.3488 or fax:860-757-5835 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: MARSH & MCLENNAN AGENCY LLC Agoncy Code: 61-610074 X Hartford Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut X Hartford Casualty Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana X Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Twin City Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Stale of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida having their home office in Hartford,Connecticut,(hereinafter collectively referred to as the"Companies")do hereby make,constitute and appoint, up to the amount of Unlimited : Sharon Cavanaugh, C.W. Adams, Roxanne G. Brune, Sharen Groppell, David R. Groppell, Francine Hay, Beverly A. Ireland, Edward L. Moore, Kurt A. Risk, James W. Tomforde, Gloria Villa of HOUSTON, Texas their true and lawful Attorney(s)-In-Fact, each In their separate capacity If more than one Is named above, to sign Its name as surety(les)only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written Instruments In the nature thereof,on behalf of the Companies In their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted In any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof,and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 6,2015 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by Its Senior Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by Its Assistant Secretary. Further,pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies,the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. :�Ttria. ed?V. •r. ,r.\ +,IL..?., t4,�,� Cr:2n <4111, 3 6 3 l�'>aazr• a b • s tp"'f"'b • 9 /) ..,.....T1>• . t',•�.,,,yi �`r�.�r,tty/,/ • .alas► -44..;.e..7 4 { ; ta7e ? �. /. yi John Gray,Assistant Secretary M.Ross Fisher,Senior Vice President STATE OF CONNECTICUT ss. Hartford COUNTY OF HARTFORD On this 5th day of January,2018,before me personally came M. Ross Fisher,to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say: that he resides In the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that he Is the Senior Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seats of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto by like authority. acr, g `� 7Cay..�.}11arr.ruR Kathleen T.Maynard Notary Poblic CERTIFICATE My Commission Expires July 31.2021 I,the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which Is still In full force effective as of April 2,2020 Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford. a 4-t-,, \� :i1fl''i .�` ,af t i�,, , .. ils, s 44.� 4.syr tn,1:04: , �s.snrsr•� '�xyt► 3 fe7. I 3 raja 2 7 t♦ i 1• 'fir! ` •i e 9 . ".0," /dgf- .....*-- Kevin Heckman,Assistant Vice President PCA 3^v I3 • .'w THE HARTFORD Claims Inquiries Notice Hartford Fire Insurance Company Twin City Insurance Company Hartford Casualty Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois I-Iartford Accident and Indemnity Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Southwest Please address inquiries regarding Claims for all surety and fidelity products issued b. I he Hartford' s underwriting companies to the following: Phone Number: : 888-266-3488 Fax— Claims 860-757-5835 or 860-221-3965 E-mail • bond.claims@thehartford.com Mailing Address : The Hartford BOND. 1-12 One Ilartford Plaza Hartford, CT 06155 • • Claims Inquiries Notice 2003 IMPORTANT NOTICE thy To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact your Agent. You may call The Hartford's Consumer Affairs toll-free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-451-6944 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights, or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 490-1007 Web: www.tdi.texas.qov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.qov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact the (agent) (company) (agent or the company) first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: to' This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. ./TX4275-1 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland (hereinafter called OWNER or City) and W.W. Payton Corporation (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the "Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by KIT Professionals, Inc, 2000 West Sam Houston Parkway South, Suite 1400, Houston, TX 77042, ATTN: Keith O'Connor, PE who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within two hundred seventy (270) days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within thirty (30) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No work will be allowed on Sundays. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring ® any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER one thousand 4-2015 00500- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT dollars ($1,000.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph ® 3.1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER fifty dollars ($50.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 3.3 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds [$###,###.## edit as required] (the"Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid as accepted by OWNER as shown in Document 00300—Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment"of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6"Measurement and Payment"of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.1.2 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near ® to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon 4-2015 00500-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable • portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under"Final Payment." 5.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations • that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive,or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations,tests,reports,and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or IDindicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities 4-2015 00500-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, • explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations,explorations,tests,reports,and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: • 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. 1 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement(Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 33 inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 4-2015 00500 -4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes • effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 1, 'Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns • and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law,the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no 411/ agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 4-2015 00500-5of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT • 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER(through its employee handbook)considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud,forgery,misappropriation of funds, • receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked,mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions,destruction of assets,embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors,or consultants,and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not,directly or indirectly;cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A (attached)of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. C 4-2015 00500-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in • duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and attestation by authorized representatives of the City of Pearland and upon the following date: May 4 , 2020. OWNER: CONTRACTOR: CITY OF PEA • ► D W.W. Payton CorporLon By: _ 1•--- By: vv I W sley W. Payton Title: Ce < Title: President Date: 2. 0.4,g 2c.-1.4.1 Date: May 4, 2020 (Corporate Seal) ATTEST 4.4g; 6 ATTEST /44/ Marilyn . Payton - Secretary Address for giving notices W.W. Payton Corporation =,`CV :''!�I���• P.O. Box 1056 ` Katy, Texas 77492-1056 goi"' Phone: (281) 371-7068 Fax: (281) 371-7069 Agent for service of process: Wesley W. Payton - President END OF SECTION 41) 4-2015 00500-7 of 7 CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 loft Complete Nos. 4 and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos.1,2,3,5,and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING 1 Name of business entity filing form,and the city,state and country of the business entity's place Certificate Number: of business. 2020-620429 W.W. Payton Corporation Katy,TX United States Date Filed: 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is 05/18/2020 being filed. City of Pearland Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract,and provide a description of the services,goods,or other property to be provided under the contract. WA1904 Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement 4 Nature of interest Name of Interested Party City,State,Country(place of business) (check applicable) Controlling I Intermediary Payton,Wesley and Marilyn Katy,TX United States X C 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ 6 UNSWORN DECLARATION My name is Wesley W. Payton , and my date of birth is My address is P.O. BOX 1056 Katy TX 77492 Harris (street) (city) (state) (zip code) (country) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed in Waller County, State of Texas ,on thel8th day of May ,20 20 . / (month) (year) kir V' 3i nature of authorized agent of contractingbusiness entity 9 (Declarant) Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V1.1.3a6aaf7d Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally-Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT') Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the 4110 contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub-Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub-Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the 410, contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions:The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub-Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub-Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT APPENDIX B 110* House Bill 89 Verification I, Wesley W. Payton (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter referred to as "Representative") of W.W. Payton Corporation (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (18) years of age, after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following: 1. That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland; and 3. That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel" is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270.001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli-controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. SIGNATURE OF REPRESENTATIVE Wesley W. Payton - President SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this 1st day of June, 2020. rc" ERIC A.SUVA Notary Public ;Nq My Notary ID#124639187 Eric A. Sliva p/5 ,.•*`' Expires August 4,2023 Bond No.46BCSIH6426 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Section 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA. § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That W.W. Payton Corporation of the City of Katy , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmlybound unto City of Pearland as Obligee OSix e Million Hundre Seven Two (Owner), in the penal sum of$ Thousand anNo/100--$1.672.000.00- for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 4th day of May , 2020, (the"Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 • • which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents, then this obligation shall be void;otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract,or to the Work to be performed thereunder. • 12/2007 00610-1 of 2 CITY OFPEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 4th day of May ,2020 . Principal: Surety: W. W. Pa on Co oration H ford Fre Insurance Company By: By: Wesley W. Payton Francine Hay Title: President 'Title: Attorney-in-Pact Address: Address: P.O.. Box 1056 3000 Internet Blvd.,#600 Katy,Texas 77492 Frisco,Texas 75034 Telephone: 281-371-7068 Telephone: 469-287-1009 281-371-7069 Fax: Fax: 866-219-4932 • NOTICE:THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 12/2007 00610-2 of 2 Bond No.46BCSIH6426 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That W.W.Payton Corporation of the City of Katy , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the Iaws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, art held and firmly_bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner),in the penal sum of$ 9HoMan�anVo�`I't fe f,6' ; iAo° for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 4th day of May , 20 20, (the"Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change,extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract,or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00611 -1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument thisI 4th day of May ,202Q. Principal: Surety: W.W. Payton Corporation H ford Pir Insurance Company By: 4' By: 4..41 Wesley W. Payton Fran ' e Hay Title: President Title: Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: P.O.. Box 1056 3000 Internet Blvd.,#600 Katy.Texas 77492 Frisco,Texas 75034 Telephone: 281-371-7068 Telephone: 469-287-1009 281-371-7069 Fax: Fax: 866-219-4932 f • • NOTICE:THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION �' 07/2006 00611 -2 of 2 Bond No.46BCSIH6426 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND 4111; Section 00612 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That W.W.Payton Corporation of the City of Katy , County of Harris , and State of Texas, as principal, and Hartford Fire Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner),in the penal sum of$ One Million Six Hundred Seven Two for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 4th day of May , 202Q_, (the"Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion, then this obligation shall be void;otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. • Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change,extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the contract,or to the work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00612- I of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND • IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 4th day of May I ,20 20. Principal: Surety: W.W. Payton Corporation Hart d Fire I urance Comply By: 4 By: Wesley W.Payton Francine Hay Title: pr,tylept Title: Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: P.O..Box 1056 3000 Internet Blvd.,#600 Katy.Texas 77492 Frisco,Texas 75034 Telephone: 281-371-7068 Telephone: 469-287-1009 281-371-7069 Fax: Fax: 866-219-4932 • NOTICE:THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING TTS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00612-2 of 2 • Direct inquiries/Claims to: THE HARTFORD L POWER OF ATTORNEY BOND,T-122 One Hartford Plaza Hertford,Connecticut Plaza 08155 gond,Ct$lm7 Vthohartford.ccm call:888.268.3488 or fax:880-757.5835 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Name: MARSH & MCLENNAN AGENCY LLC Agency Code: 61-610074 X Hartford Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut X Hartford Casualty Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana X Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Stet:of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Twin City Fire Insurance Company,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford insurance Company of Illinois,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast,a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida having their home office In Hartford,Connecticut,(hereinafter collectively referred to as the`Companies')do hereby make,constitute and appoint, up to the amount of Unlimited : Sharon Cavanaugh, C.W. Adams, Roxanne G. Brune, Sharen Groppell, David R. Groppell, Francine Hay, Beverly A. Ireland, Edward L. Moore, Kurt A. Risk, James W. Tomforde, Gloria Villa of HOUSTON, Texas their true and lawful Attorney(s)-In-Fact, each in their separate capacity If more than one Is named above,to sign Its name as surety(les)only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments In the nature thereof,on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof,and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on May 8,2015 the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by Its Senior Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by Its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies,the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. firg. fie%i • t ;��'�. +�`.,`••�ti ; ,'uP. ?C.) 1�a;r 4 ib:• ;.fir..• ... /i Jf �• •11110,1 �INNO �� /we John Gray,Assistant Secretary M.Ross Fisher,Senior Vice President STATE OF CONNECTICUT ss. Hartford COUNTY OF HARTFORD On this 5th day of January,2018,before me personally came M. Ross Fisher,to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say: that he resides In the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that he Is the Senior Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described In and which executed the above Instrument; that he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto by like authority. �pL g "O� ��7(.QRtw��11at�.tuR •� Katheen T.Maynard Notary Public CERTIFICATE My Commission Expires July 31.2021 I,the undersigned,Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which is still In full force effective as of Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford.9117 4'*1/4 ` 1,�1//�a,4�u ..y�•.. 4 .t'--::�\ IS% ti/; ti r` �*' • • 1.11t••7 •;r� h HM► ��1t e 7 3> In 71 S I9r,. .. Ke n Heckman,i'4etstant Vice President POA NIS It THE HARTFORD Claims Inquiries Notice Hartford Fire Insurance Company Twin City Insurance Company Hartford Casualty Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Southwest Please address inquiries regarding Claims for all surety and fidelity products issued b) I he I-lartford' s underwriting companies to the following: ® Phone Number: 888 266-3488 Fax — Claims 860-757-5835 or 860-221-3965 E -mail • bond.claims@thehartford.com Mailing Address : The I lartford BOND. 1-12 One I lartford Plan Hartford, CT 06155 Claims Inquiries Notice 2003 • IMPORTANT NOTICE ® To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact your Agent. You may call The Hartford's Consumer Affairs toll-free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-451-6944 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights, or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 490-1007 Web: www.tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.qov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact the (agent) (company) (agent or the company) first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. ./TX4275-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 • PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of$ the undersigned, on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made,the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any, through the above date from any and all claims, liens,or right to claim or lien, arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. Signature Printed Name&Title Company Name State of County of Subscribed and sworn to,before me,this day of , 20 My Commission Expires: Notary Public 5-12-12 CITYOFPEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents 1.03 Subcontractor 1.04 Written Notice 1.05 Work 1.06 Extra Work 1.07 Work Day 1.07-1 Rain Day III) 1.07-2 Impact Day Y 1.08 Calendar Day 1.09 Substantially Completed 1.10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1.11 Referenced Standards 1.12 Contract Time 1.13 Construction Inspector 1.14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 4 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry III2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700-i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes and Alterations 2.05 Damages j 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 6 3.01 Owner-Engineer Relationship 3.02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.03 Preliminary Approval 3.04 Inspection by Engineer 3.05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3.06 Recommendation of Payment 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 8 4.01 Independent Contractor 4.02 Contractor's Understanding 4.03 Laws and Ordinances 44 4.04 Assignment and Subletting 4.05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4.06 Insurance 4.07 Permits and Fees 4.08 Texas State Sales Tax 4.09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4.10 Character of Workers 4.11 Labor, Equipment,Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 4.12 Sanitation 4.13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4.14 Performance of Work 4.15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700-ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.16 Layout of Work • 4.17 Shop Drawings 4.18 Engineer-Contractor Relationship; Observations 4.19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment, Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes • 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 18 5.01 Time and Order of Completion 5.02 Extension of Time 5.03 Hindrances and Delays 5.04 Suspension of Work 5.05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5.06 Change of Contract Time 5.07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 21 6.01 Discrepancies and Omissions 111) 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 00700-iii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.03 Estimated Quantities 6.04 Price of Work • 6.05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6.07 Use of Completed Portions &Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion 6.08-1 6.09 Final Payment 6.10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6.11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 6.12 Payments Withheld 6.13 Delayed Payments 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 2110 7.01 Differing Site Conditions 7.02 Change Orders 7.03 Change Orders 7.04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non-Work Days 7.05 Minor Changes 7.06 Extra Work 7.07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 30 8.01 Default by Contractor 8.02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 8.03 Cumulative Remedies& Specific Performance ill 8.04 Cross-Default 10-2012 00700-iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency • 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8.07 Waiver of Consequential Damages 8.08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 35 ATTACHMENT NO. 1: WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO. 2: AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE B1 ATTACHMENT NO. 3: OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR Cl • 0 10-2012 00700-v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement • shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) Addenda, if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; (7) Instructions to Bidders; • (8) Bid Proposal; and 08-2018 00700- 1 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto, are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract,unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known business address or registered office of such individual,partnership,joint venture or corporation or company,or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER,to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein, a"Work Day" is defined as any Monday through Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 08-2018 00700-2 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all • charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7.04 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non-work days. 1.07-1 RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY. A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 41W 1 .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed",leted" or "Substantially Complete"or"Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations,the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed", "permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is • intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 08-2018 00700-3 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITKINS OF AGREEMENT Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of 0 various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature,be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words,terms or clauses defining the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees, or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i) to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the 0 Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the • relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 08-2018 00700-4 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance • between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations,thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection, performance, construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished • by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work, then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. • 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 08-2018 00700-5 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four(4) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change. No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non-conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non-conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without • requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 08-2018 00700-6 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT • 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on-site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation,it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the • construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.07. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non-conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.12 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. 08-2018 00700-7 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the • conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 08-2018 00700-8 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a • waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 —Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 —Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent(100%)of • the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-1 of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. • 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection H. 08-2018 00700-9 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 3 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract, to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies,machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or 411 other forms of protection, will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 08-2018 00700- 10 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about • such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION. Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection,construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and shall leave the Work broom-clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. • The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris,trash, waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. • 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules 08-2018 00700- 11 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness,indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract 410 Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 08-2018 00700- 12 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR may, within three (3) days, • make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. • If anyWork, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered upwithout written q p � pp � approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that • it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700- 13 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER, the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for 41110 accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss,damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, a fences,traffic control, warning signs and other safety devices. 08-2018 00700- 14 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work • site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight(8)hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor. Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be • undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or ID waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 08-2018 00700- 15 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be ou resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. 1111. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship, contractual or otherwise,between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE a OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, 41) REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 08-2018 00700- 16 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, • SUIT, LIABILITY, JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, • CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury, death, or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be 110 sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 08-2018 00700- 17 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship; and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re-execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re-execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non-conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non-conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees, the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized, and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time 411) from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the 08-2018 00700- 18 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or • omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If,during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR • agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption,hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable • time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages 08-2018 00700- 19 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty,the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten(10) days after the event-giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is 411 the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum,the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C. Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault,breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 08-2018 00700-20 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive • remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five(5)days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are • approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost, expense, damages,unit price adjustment, quantity differences,unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner. The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as • payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the 08-2018 00700-21 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non-conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount,prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only. No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute, and shall prepare a preliminary certificate for partial payment for the undisputed amount of the application for payment due CONTRACTOR, and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro- • Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the 08-2018 00700-22 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed • by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the • obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments, and subject to the conditions set forth under"6.09 FINAL PAYMENT." The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above-stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete". Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete • items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed 08-2018 00700-23 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non-conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non-conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work,including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work,has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any,to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As-Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; • 08-2018 00700-24 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (f) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to • occupancy and all other required inspections/approvals/acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors,vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor,vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment, tools, temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No. 2,executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals,etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion; and (k) The Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and • OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross-claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may • remove, replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 08-2018 00700-25 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the j Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies, which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non-conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or ca for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion; and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction, the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost 411 08-2018 00700-26 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement • between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code, and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three(3) calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a)Upon written notification, the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the • cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits, will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven(7) calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven(7) calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a)Upon receipt,the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR,its suppliers,or • subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather,the ENGINEER will make an adjustment(excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination, in writing, whether or 08-2018 00700-27 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b)No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c)No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement,the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in Contract Time, which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non-Work Days,prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non-Work Day. 410 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method(A) --By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or Method(B)--By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price; or • 08-2018 00700-28 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Method (C)--If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b) For the General Contractor alone, self-performing the extra work, without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract • Documents,plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance 41) of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the 08-2018 00700-29 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0, within sixty(60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three (3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CONTRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason, to timely file a Request for Mediation, the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER 40 when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents,or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and 08-2018 00700-30 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of • default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand; or (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER 08-2018 00700-31 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract,the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed, the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective 0 addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in accordance with OWNER's direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 411 08-2018 00700-32 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and • remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS-DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that • should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract,or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract,or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER 08-2018 00700-33 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit, whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price. The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by 08-2018 00700-34 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair • and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to, the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution • process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 08-2018 00700-35 of 35 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE • A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") _ A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner- operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the a OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700-A 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT III (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by • workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." I. The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR,prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all II employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700-A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (a) a certificate of coverage,prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to perform as required by paragraphs(1) - (7),with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. (10 J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 1111 05/2007 00700-A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO.2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS • AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation,by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. • 2. It is weed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as • set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700-B1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this,the_day of ,20_ 411 CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation, the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the day of 20_by , a Texas corporation,under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By-Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700-B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT • STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME,the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We) am(are)the person(s)who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we) have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I (we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR-Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me,the day of 20_. Notary Public, State of Texas • My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700- B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release,whose names are set out above, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation,pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation,the By-Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this,the day of , 20 Notary Public, State of Texas 411 My Commission Expires: III 07/2006 00700-B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO.3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS 1111 OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1 . Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and(c)others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor"shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO"means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance • coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five(5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. • 10-2012 00700-Cl CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non-renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: S 10-2012 00700-C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance • 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4.1.4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: fhb. i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non-Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700-C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned,hired, and non-owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop-down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700-C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims-Made basis. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less 4110 than$1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. • 10-2012 00700-C5 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: 411 a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; e. all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and f. other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Form a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include: i. Additional expenses due to delay in $ TBD completion of project(where applicable) ii. Agreed value Included without sublimit iii. Damage arising from error,omission or Included without sublimit deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse iv. Debris removal additional limit 25%of direct damage loss v. Earthquake (where applicable) $ TBD vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage(where $ TBD applicable) vii. Expediting expenses $ TBD viii. Flood (where applicable) $ TBD ix. Freezing Included without sublimit x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot& Included without sublimit cold testing(where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation, non-renewal or Included 10-2012 00700-C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT material reduction—60 days prior IIIwritten notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law Included without sublimit xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal $TBD xv. Preservation of property Included without sublimit xvi. Replacement cost Included xvii. Theft Included without sublimit xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, Included below. 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per $5,000 Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period 5 Days c. Flood, Per Occurrence $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, • B or V d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler $25,000 Leakage, Per Occurrence 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached,has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. • 10-2012 00700-C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be • endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. • 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25,"Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name,which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any 0 kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700-C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. • 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, • evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed • for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700-C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 4111 • 10-2012 00700-C10 • AcD® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) `..------ 5/21/2020 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. 1PORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. Ilbr SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Yvette Cash Marsh &McLennan Agency LLC PHONE FAX 2500 City West Blvd, Ste 2400 iac.No.Ext): 713-780-6154 (A/c,No): Houston TX 77042 ADDRESS: yvette.cash@marshmma.com INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A: BITCO General Insurance Corporation 20095 INSURED VVWPAY-2 INSURER B:Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 W W Payton Corporation PO Box 1056 INSURER C: Katy TX 77492-1056 INSURER D: INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:2066905068 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE AODL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP UMITS LTR 1NSD W /Y VD POLICY NUMBER (MM/DDYYYI (MM!DD/YYYY) a A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y Y CLP3684671 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 DAMAGE TO CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR PREMISES(EaENTED occurrence) $300,000 X 1,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $5,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GE 'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY X JECT PRO- LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 _ OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABIUTY Y Y CAP3684673 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 (Ea accident) X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY — AUTOS ONLY (Per accident) $ A X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR Y Y CUP2815542 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 _ EXCESS UAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X RETENTION$1n nnn $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION Y WC3684672 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 X STATUTE ETH AND EMPLOYERS'LIABIUTY Y/N ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEN E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? N/A - (Mandatory In NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under - DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 B Contractors Equipment Y Y QT6608078X307TLC19 8/1/2019 8/1/2020 Scheduled Equipment 2,463,610 Rented/Leased Equipme 150,000 Builders Risk My One Location' 15,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached If more space is required) The General Liability,Auto Liability,Umbrella Liability&Builder's Risk policies include a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is an executed written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status.The General Liability,Auto Liability, Umbrella Liability,Workers'Compensation policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is an executed written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires it. The General Liability policy &Umbrella policy contains "Primary and Noncontributory"wording.The Builders Risk Policy contains a waiver of subrogation endorsement in favor of certificate holder that requires it.The Umbrella is not excess over General Liability Limited Work site Pollution Endorsement or Builders Risk Policy. Blanket 30 day notice of cancellation applicable to General Liability;Auto;Workers'Compensation and Excess policies. See Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. C City of Pearland 2559 Hillhouse AUTHORIZED REP-ESENTATIVE Pearland,TX 77584 4.100'°1 Brett Herrington ,40,......„ r ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: VWVPAY-2 LOC#: A`oRD ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMED INSURED Marsh &McLennan Agency LLC W W Payton Corporation PO Box 1056 POLICY NUMBER Katy TX 77492-1056 CARRIER NAIC CODE EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE Contractors Equipment Deductible-$2.500 except Cranes 2.5%of the amount of insurance subject to min. of S5,000 `Builder's Risk-$15,000,000 Limit Any One Location(Non-combustible/Masonry Non-Combustible;Semi-Fire Resistive or Fire-Resistive $1,000.000 Limit Any One Location(Frame, Brick,Veneer or Joisted Masonry Limit Any One Occurrence-$25,000,000 Deductible-$5,000 except S25,000(Flood Zone X) Outside High Hazard Counties $25,000-(Earthquake)Outside of High or Moderate Hazard County or Independent City Re: COP PN#WA1904, Construction of Southdown Groundwater Plant, Ground Storage Tank Replacement,City of Pearland,TX. Additional Insureds: KIT Professionals. Inc., City of Pearland,its successors and assigns,and the Engineer: any officers,employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and others as required by the Contract Documents-applies per the Blanket Additional Insured endorsement which grants additional insured status only where such status is required by a written contract. ACORD 101 (2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD WW Payton Corporation Policy#CAP3684673 08/01/2019 - 08/01/2020 . COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 00 01 10 13 4.. BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM Various provisions in this policy restrict coverage. Read SECTION I—COVERED AUTOS the entire policy carefully to determine rights, duties and Item Two of the Declarations shows the autos that are what is and is not covered. covered 'autos" for each of your coverages. The Throughout this policy the words you and "your° refer following numerical symbols describe the "autos' that to the Named Insured shown in the Declarations. The may be covered °autos°. The symbols entered next to a words °we", 'us° and °our' refer to the company coverage on the Declarations designate the only 'autos° providing this insurance. that are covered °autos°. Other words and phrases that appear in quotation marks A. Description Of Covered Auto Designation have special meaning. Refer to Section V- Definitions. Symbols Symbol 2 Description Of Covered Auto Designation Symbols 1 Any °Auto' Owned 'Autos° Only those autos you own (and for Covered Autos Liability Coverage any 'trailers' Only you don't own while attached to power units you own). This includes those "autos' you acquire ownership of after the policy begins. 3 Owned Private Only the private passenger°autos'you own. This includes those private Passenger passenger°autos° you acquire ownership of after the policy begins. Autos Only 4 Owned Only those 'autos' you own that are not of the private passenger type (and for °Autos' Other Covered Autos Liability Coverage any 'trailers' you don't own while attached to power Than Private units you own). This includes those °autos° not of the private passenger type you Passenger acquire ownership of after the policy begins. 'Autos"Only 5 Owned 'Autos" Only those °autos' you own that are required to have no-fault benefits in the state Subject To where they are licensed or principally garaged. This includes those'autos°you acquire No-fault ownership of after the policy begins provided they are required to have no-fault benefits in the state where they are licensed or principally garaged. , 6 Owned 'Autos° Only those 'autos"you own that because of the law in the state where they are Subject To A licensed or principally garaged are required to have and cannot reject Uninsured Compulsory Motorists Coverage. This includes those "autos'you acquire ownership of after the Uninsured policy begins provided they are subject to the same state uninsured motorists Motorists Law requirement. 7 Specifically Only those °autos° described in Item Three of the Declarations for which a Described premium charge is shown (and for Covered Autos Liability Coverage any "trailers'you Autos don't own while attached to any power unit described in Item Three). 8 Hired 'Autos' Only those °autos°you lease, hire, rent or borrow.This does not include any auto you Only lease, hire, rent or borrow from any of your°employees°, partners (if you are a partnership), members (if you are a limited liability company) or members of their households. 9 Non-owned Only those °autos'you do not own, lease, hire, rent or borrow that are used in °Autos° Only connection with your business.This includes 'autos° owned by your 'employees', partners (if you are a partnership), members (if you are a limited liability company) or members of their households but only while used in your business or your personal affairs. CA 00 01 1013 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 1 of 12 19 Mobile Only those °autos° that are land vehicles and that would qualify under the definition of Equipment °mobile equipment" under this policy if they were not subject to a compulsory or Subject To financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance law where they are Compulsory Or licensed or principally garaged. Financial Responsibility Or Other Motor Vehicle Insurance Law Only B. Owned Autos You Acquire After The Policy SECTION II—COVERED AUTOS LIABILITY Begins COVERAGE 1. If Symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6 or 19 are entered next A. Coverage to a coverage in Item Two of the Declarations, We will pay all sums an 'insured' legally must pay as then you have coverage for 'autos° that you damages because of "bodily injury° or °property acquire of the type described for the remainder of damage' to which this insurance applies, caused by the policy period. an °accident° and resulting from the ownership, 2. But, if Symbol 7 is entered next to a coverage in maintenance or use of a covered °auto". Item Two of the Declarations, an °auto' you We will also pay all sums an °insured° legally must acquire will be a covered auto for that coverage pay as a °covered pollution cost or expense°to which only if: this insurance applies, caused by an 'accident° and a. We already cover all °autos° that you own for resulting from the ownership, maintenance or use of that coverage or it replaces an 'auto° you covered °autos°. However, we will only pay for the previously owned that had that coverage; and °covered pollution cost or expense" if there is either b. You tell us within 30 days after you acquire it bodily injury or 'property damages to which this that you want us to cover it for that coverage. insurance applies that is caused by the same 'accident°. C. Certain Trailers, Mobile Equipment And We have the right and duty to defend any 'insured° Temporary Substitute Autos against a °suit° asking for such damages or a II Covered Autos Liability Coverage is provided by °covered pollution cost or expense°. However, we this Coverage Form, the following types of vehicles have no duty to defend any °insured' against a °suit° are also covered 'autos° for Covered Autos Liability seeking damages for "bodily injury° or °property Coverage: damage' or a °covered pollution cost or expense' to 1. 'Trailers' with a load capacity of 2,000 pounds or which this insurance does not apply. We may less designed primarily for travel on public roads. investigate and settle any claim or °suit° as we 2. °Mobile equipment' while being carried or towed consider appropriate. Our duty to defend or settle by a covered 'auto' ends when the Covered Autos Liability Coverage Limit of Insurance has been exhausted by payment 3. Any °auto' you do not own while used with the of judgments or settlements. permission of its owner as a temporary substitute 1. Who Is An Insured for a covered °auto' you own that is out of service because of its: The following are °insureds°: a. Breakdown; a. You for any covered 'auto°. b. Repair; b. Anyone else while using with your permission c. Servicing; a covered 'auto' you own, hire or borrow d. 'Lose; or except: (1) The owner or anyone else from whom you e. Destruction. hire or borrow a covered°auto°. This exception does not apply if the covered °auto' is a °trailer° connected to a covered'auto' you own. Page 2 of 12 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc.,2011 CA 00 01 1013 (2) Your °employee° if the covered °auto° is These payments will not reduce the Limit of owned by that "employee° or a member of Insurance. his or her household. b. Out-of-state Coverage Extensions (3) Someone using a covered 'auto° while he While a covered *auto' is away from the state or she is working in a business of selling, where it is licensed,we will: servicing, repairing, parking or storing °autos° unless that business is yours. (1) Increase the Limit of Insurance for (4) Covered Autos Liability Coverage to meet Anyone other than your `employees', partners (if you are a partnership), the limits specified by a compulsory or financial responsibility law of the members (if you are a limited liability jurisdiction where the covered 'auto' is company) or a lessee or borrower or any being used. This extension does not apply of their °employees°, while moving to the limit or limits specified by any law property to or from a covered "auto". governing motor carriers of passengers or (5) A partner (if you are a partnership) or a property. member (if you are a limited liability (2) Provide the minimum amounts and types company) for a covered °auto° owned by of other coverages, such as no-fault, him or her or a member of his or her required of out-of-state vehicles by the household jurisdiction where the covered °auto' is c. Anyone liable for the conduct of an 'insured° being used. described above but only to the extent of that We will not pay anyone more than once for liability. the same elements of loss because of these 2. Coverage Extensions extensions. a. Supplementary Payments B. Exclusions We will pay for the 'insured': This insurance does not apply to any of the following: (1) All expenses we incur. 1. Expected Or Intended Injury (2) Up to $2,000 for cost of bail bonds °Bodily injury' or °property damage' expected or (including bonds for related traffic law intended from the standpoint of the 'insured'. violations) required because of an 2. Contractual 'accident' we cover. We do not have to furnish these bonds. Liability assumed under any contract or (3) The cost of bonds to release attachments agreement. in any °suit' against the °insured' we But this exclusion does not apply to liability for defend, but only for bond amounts within damages: our Limit of Insurance. a. Assumed in a contract or agreement that is an (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the °insured contract°, provided the °bodily injury' 'insured' at our request, including actual or °property damage' occurs subsequent to loss of earnings up to $250 a day because the execution of the contract or agreement; or of time off from work. b. That the °insured° would have in the absence (5) All court costs taxed against the 'insured' of the contract or agreement. in any 'suit' against the °insured° we 3. Workers'Compensation defend. However, these payments do not Any obligation for which the 'insured° or the include attorneys' fees or attorneys' °insured's° insurer may be held liable under any expenses taxed against the 'insured°. workers' compensation, disability benefits or (6) All interest on the full amount of any unemployment compensation law or any similar judgment that accrues after entry of the law. judgment in any 'suit' against the 'insured° we defend, but our duty to pay interest ends when we have paid, offered to pay or deposited in court the part of the judgment that is within our Limit of Insurance. CA 00 01 1013 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 3 of 12 4. Employee Indemnification And Employer's b. After it is moved from the covered °auto° to Liability the place where it is finally delivered by the °Bodily injury° to: 'insured*. a. An °employee° of the °insured° arising out of 8. Movement Of Property By Mechanical Device and in the course of: °Bodily injury' or °property damage° resulting (1) Employment by the 'insured"; or from the movement of property by a mechanical device (other than a hand truck) unless the (2) Performing the duties related to the device is attached to the covered °auto°. conduct of the °insured's° business; or 9. Operations b. The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that "employee° as a consequence of °Bodily injury" or °property damage° arising out of Paragraph a.above. the operation of: This exclusion applies: a. Any equipment listed in Paragraphs 6.b. and 6.c. of the definition of °mobile equipment'; or (1) Whether the 'insured' may be liable as an employer or in any other capacity; and b. Machinery or equipment that is on, attached to or part of a land vehicle that would qualify (2) To any obligation to share damages with under the definition of 'mobile equipment' it it or repay someone else who must pay were not subject to a compulsory or financial damages because of the injury. responsibility law or other motor vehicle But this exclusion does not apply to °bodily injury' insurance law where it is licensed or to domestic °employees' not entitled to workers' principally garaged. compensation benefits or to liability assumed by 10. Completed Operations the °insured' under an °insured contract°. For the purposes of the Coverage Form, a domestic °Bodily injury° or °property damage' arising out of 'employee° is a person engaged in household or your work after that work has been completed or domestic work performed principally in abandoned. connection with a residence premises. In this exclusion,your work means: 5. Fellow Employee a. Work or operations performed by you or or 'Bodily in}ury° to: your behalf; and a. Any fellow °employee° of the °insured' arising b. Materials, parts or equipment furnished in out of and in the course of the fellow connection with such work or operations. °employee's° employment or while performing Your work includes warranties or representations duties related to the conduct of your business; made at any time with respect to the fitness, or quality, durability or performance of any of the b. The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of items included in Paragraph a.or b.above. that fellow °employee' as a consequence of Your work will be deemed completed at the Paragraph a. above. earliest of the following times: 6. Care,Custody Or Control (1) When all of the work called for in your 'Property damage° to or 'covered pollution cost contract has been completed; or expense° involving property owned or (2) When all of the work to be done at the site transported by the 'insured' or in the °insured's' has been completed if your contract calls care, custody or control. But this exclusion does for work at more than one site; or not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack (3) When that part of the work done at a job agreement. site has been put to its intended use by 7. Handling Of Property any person or organization other than °Bodily injury' or 'property damage' resulting another contractor or subcontractor from the handling of property: working on the same project. a. Before it is moved from the place where it is accepted by the °insured° for movement into or onto the covered °auto°; or Page 4 of 12 0 Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 CA 00 01 10 13 Work that may need service, maintenance, Paragraphs b. and c. above of this exclusion do correction, repair or replacement, but which is not apply to °accidents° that occur away from otherwise complete,will be treated as completed. premises owned by or rented to an °insured° with 11. Pollution respect to 'pollutants° not in or upon a covered 'auto' if: °Bodily injury' or °property damage' arising out of the actual, alleged or threatened discharge, (a) The 'pollutants' or any property in dispersal, seepage, migration, release or escape which the °pollutants° are contained of °pollutants': are upset, overturned or damaged as a result of the maintenance or use of a a. That are, or that are contained in any property covered °auto°; and that is: (b) The discharge, dispersal, seepage, (1) Being transported or towed by, handled or migration, release or escape of the handled for movement into, onto or from 'pollutants' is caused directly by such the covered °auto°; upset, overturn or damage. (2) Otherwise in the course of transit by or on 12. War behalf of the °insured"; or 'Bodily iniury° or 'property damage° arising (3) Being stored, disposed of, treated or directly or indirectly out of: processed in or upon the covered 'auto'; a. War, including undeclared or civil war; b. Before the °pollutants° or any property in which the 'pollutants' are contained are b. Warlike action by a military force, including moved from the place where they are action in hindering or defending against an accepted by the °insured° for movement into actual or expected attack, by any government, or onto the covered°auto°; or sovereign or other authority using military personnel or other agents;or c. After the pollutants or any property in which the 'pollutants° are contained are moved from c. Insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped the covered °auto' to the place where they are power or action taken by governmental tr, finally delivered, disposed of or abandoned by authority in hindering or defending against the °insured', any of these. Paragraph a. above does not apply to fuels, 13. Racing lubricants, fluids, exhaust gases or other similar Covered °autos' while used in any professional or pollutants that are needed for or result from the organized racing or demolition contest or stunting normal electrical, hydraulic or mechanical activity, or while practicing for such contest or functioning of the covered °auto° or its parts if: activity. This insurance also does not apply while (1) The pollutants escape, seep, migrate or that covered °auto' is being prepared for such a are discharged, dispersed or released contest or activity. directly from an 'autos part designed by its C. Limit Of Insurance manufacturer to hold, store, receive or Regardless of the number of covered °autos', dispose of such 'pollutants'; and °insureds°, premiums paid, claims made or vehicles (2) The 'bodily injury', 'property damage' or involved in the °accident°, the most we will pay for °covered pollution cost or expense° does the total of all damages and 'covered pollution cost not arise out of the operation of any or expense' combined resulting from any one equipment listed in Paragraphs 6.b. and 'accident' is the Limit Of insurance for Covered 6.c. of the definition of °mobile Autos Liability Coverage shown in the Declarations. equipment'. CA 00431 10 13 ©Insurance Services Office, inc., 2011 Page 5 of 12 All °bodily injury°, °property damage° and °covered 3. Glass Breakage—Hitting A Bird Or Animal— pollution cost or expense° resulting from continuous Falling Objects Or Missiles or repeated exposure to substantially the same If you carry Comprehensive Coverage for the conditions will be considered as resulting from one damaged covered "auto', we will pay for the "accident°. following under Comprehensive Coverage: No one will be entitled to receive duplicate payments a. Glass breakage; for the same elements of °loss° under this Coverage Form and any Medical Payments Coverage b. °Loss' caused by hitting a bird or animal; and endorsement, Uninsured Motorists Coverage c. 'Loss° caused by falling objects or missiles. endorsement or Underinsured Motorists Coverage However, you have the option of having glass endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. breakage caused by a covered °auto's° collision SECTION III—PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE or overturn considered a °loss° under Collision A. Coverage Coverage. 1. We will pay for °loss° to a covered °auto° or its 4. Coverage Extensions equipment under: a. Transportation Expenses a. Comprehensive Coverage We will pay up to $20 per day, to a maximum From any cause except: of $600, for temporary transportation expense incurred by you because of the total theft of a (1) The covered 'auto's' collision with another covered 'auto° of the private passenger type. object; or We will pay only for those covered 'autos' for (2) The covered 'auto's" overturn. which you carry either Comprehensive or b. Specified Causes Of Loss Coverage Specified Causes Of Loss Coverage. We will pay for temporary transportation expenses Caused by: incurred during the period beginning 48 hours (1) Fire, lightning or explosion; after the theft and ending, regardless of the (2) Theft; policy's expiration,when the covered 'auto° is returned to use or we pay for its °loss°. (3) Windstorm, hail or earthquake; b. Loss 01 Use Expenses (4) Flood; For Hired Auto Physical Damage, we will pay (5) Mischief or vandalism; or expenses for which an insured becomes (6) The sinking, burning, collision or legally responsible to pay for loss of use of a derailment of any conveyance transporting vehicle rented or hired without a driver under the covered 'auto°. a written rental contract or agreement. We will c. Collision Coverage pay for loss of use expenses if caused by: Caused by: (1) Other than collision only if the Declarations indicates that (1) The covered °auto's' collision with another Comprehensive Coverage is provided for object; or any covered 'auto"; (2) The covered 'auto's°overturn. (2) Specified Causes Of Loss only if the 2. Towing Declarations indicates that Specified Causes Of Loss Coverage is provided for We will pay up to the limit shown in the any covered °auto°; or Declarations for towing and labor costs incurred each time a covered 'auto' of the private passenger type is disabled. However, the labor must be performed at the place of disablement. Page 6 of 12 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 CA 00 01 1013 (3) Collision only if the Declarations indicates b. Any device designed or used to detect speed- 4111r that Collision Coverage is provided for any measuring equipment, such as radar or laser covered'autos. detectors, and any jamming apparatus However, the most we will pay for any intended to elude or disrupt speed-measuring expenses for loss of use is $20 per day, to a equipment. maximum of$600. c. Any electronic equipment, without regard to B. Exclusions whether this equipment is permanently installed, that reproduces, receives or 1. We will not pay for "loss' caused by or resulting transmits audio,visual or data signals. from any of the following. Such 'loss° is excluded regardless of any other cause or event that d. Any accessories used with the electronic contributes concurrently or in any sequence to equipment described in Paragraph c.above. the'loss°. 5. Exclusions 4.c. and 4.d, do not apply to a. Nuclear Hazard equipment designed to be operated solely by use of the power from the 'auto's' electrical system (1) The explosion of any weapon employing that, at the time of 'loss°, is: atomic fission or fusion; or a. Permanently installed in or upon the covered (2) Nuclear reaction or radiation, or *auto"; radioactive contamination, however caused. b. Removable from a housing unit which is permanently installed in or upon the covered b. War Or Military Action 'auto°; (1) War, including undeclared or civil war; c. An integral part of the same unit housing any (2) Warlike action by a military force, including electronic equipment described in Paragraphs action in hindering or defending against an a.and b.above; or actual or expected attack, by any d. Necessary for the normal operation of the government, sovereign or other authority covered 'auto° or the monitoring of the using military personnel or other agents; covered 'auto's'operating system. or 6. We will not pay for 'loss° to a covered 'auto' due (3) insurrection, rebellion, revolution, usurped to 'diminution in value°. power or action taken by governmental authority in hindering or defending against C. Limits Of insurance any of these. 1. The most we will pay for: 2. We will not pay for 'loss' to any covered 'auto° a. 'Loss° to any one covered 'auto' is the lesser while used in any professional or organized of: racing or demolition contest or stunting activity, or (1) The actual cash value of the damaged or while practicing for such contest or activity. We stolen property as of the time of the 'loss'; will also not pay for °loss' to any covered 'auto' or while that covered 'auto° is being prepared for such a contest or activity. (2) The cost of repairing or replacing the damaged or stolen property with other 3. We will not pay for°loss' due and confined to: property of like kind and quality. a. Wear and tear, freezing, mechanical or b. All electronic equipment that reproduces, electrical breakdown. receives or transmits audio, visual or data b. Blowouts, punctures or other road damage to signals in any one °loss° is $1,000, if, at the tires, time of °loss', such electronic equipment is: This exclusion does not apply to such loss (1) Permanently installed in or upon the resulting from the total theft of a covered 'auto'. covered 'auto° in a housing, opening or 4. We will not pay for'loss°to any of the following: other location that is not normally used by the 'auto' manufacturer for the installation a. Tapes, records, discs or other similar audio, of such equipment; visual or data electronic devices designed for use with audio, visual or data electronic equipment. 1116, CA 00 01 1013 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 7 of 12 (2) Removable from a permanently installed (2) The °insured's' name and address; and housing unit as described in Paragraph (3) To the extent possible, the names and b.(1)above; or addresses of any injured persons and (3) An integral part of such equipment as witnesses. described in Paragraphs b.(1) and b.(2) b. Additionally, you and any other involved above. 'insured" must: 2. An adjustment for depreciation and physical (1) Assume no obligation, make no payment condition will be made in determining actual cash or incur no expense without our consent, value in the event of a total °loss°. except at the 'insured's'own cost. 3. If a repair or replacement results in better than (2) Immediately send us copies of any like kind or quality, we will not pay for the amount request, demand, order, notice, summons of the betterment. or legal paper received concerning the D. Deductible claim or"suit'. For each covered °auto°, our obligation to pay for, (3) Cooperate with us in the investigation or repair, return or replace damaged or stolen property settlement of the claim or defense against will be reduced by the applicable deductible shown in the °suit°. the Declarations. Any Comprehensive Coverage (4) Authorize us to obtain medical records or deductible shown in the Declarations does not apply other pertinent information. to 'loss' caused by tire or lightning. SECTION IV--BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS (5) Submit to examination, at our expense, by physicians of our choice, as often as we The following conditions apply in addition to the reasonably require. Common Policy Conditions: c. If there is °loss° to a covered °auto' or its A. Loss Conditions equipment,you must also do the following: 1. Appraisal For Physical Damage Loss (1) Promptly notify the police if the covered if you and we disagree on the amount of 'loss°, °auto° or any of its equipment is stolen. either may demand an appraisal of the °loss'. In (2) Take all reasonable steps to protect the this event, each party will select a competent covered °auto° from further damage. Also appraiser. The two appraisers will select a keep a record of your expenses for competent and impartial umpire. The appraisers consideration in the settlement of the will state separately the actual cash value and claim. amount of °loss°. If they fail to agree, they will (3) Permit us to inspect the covered °auto° submit their differences to the umpire. A decision and records proving the "loss° before its agreed to by any two will be binding. Each party repair or disposition. will: a. Pay its chosen appraiser; and (4) Agree to examinations under oath at our request and give us a signed statement of b. Bear the other expenses of the appraisal and your answers. umpire equally. 3. Legal Action Against Us If we submit to an appraisal,we will still retain our No one may bring a legal action against us under right to deny the claim. this Coverage Form until: 2. Duties In The Event Of Accident,Claim,Suit a. There has been full compliance with all the Or Loss terms of this Coverage Form;and We have no duty to provide coverage under this b. Under Covered Autos Liability Coverage, we policy unless there has been full compliance with agree in writing that the °insured' has an the following duties: obligation to pay or until the amount of that a. In the event of °accident°, claim, °suit° or obligation has finally been determined by °loss°, you must give us or our authorized judgment atter trial. No one has the right representative prompt notice of the 'accident° under this policy to bring us into an action to or°loss'. Include: determine the °insured's' liability. (1) How, when and where the °accident° or °loss°occurred; Page 8 of 12 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 CA 00 01 10 13 4. Loss Payment—Physical Damage Coverages 5. Other Insurance At our option,we may: a. For any covered °auto' you own, this a. Pay tor, repair or replace damaged or stolen Coverage Form provides primary insurance. property; For any covered 'auto' you don't own, the insurance provided by this Coverage Form is b. Return the stolen property, at our expense. excess over any other collectible insurance. We will pay for any damage that results to the However, while a covered °auto° which is a 'auto°from the theft;or 'trailer' is connected to another vehicle, the c. Take all or any part of the damaged or stolen Covered Autos Liability Coverage this property at an agreed or appraised value. Coverage Form provides for the trailer is: If we pay for the °loss°, our payment will include (1) Excess while it is connected to a motor the applicable sales tax for the damaged or stolen vehicle you do not own; or property. (2) Primary while it is connected to a covered 5. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against °auto° you own. Others To Us b. For Hired Auto Physical Damage Coverage, If any person or organization to or for whom we any covered °auto° you lease, hire, rent or make payment under this Coverage Form has borrow is deemed to be a covered °auto° you rights to recover damages from another, those own. However, any auto that is leased, rights are transferred to us. That person or hired, rented or borrowed with a driver is not a organization must do everything necessary to covered °auto°. secure our rights and must do nothing after c. Regardless of the provisions of Paragraph a. accident or'foss'to impair them. above, this Coverage Form's Covered Autos B. General Conditions Liability Coverage is primary for any liability 1. Bankruptcyassumed under an °insured contract°. Bankruptcy or insolvency of the °insured° or the d. When this Coverage Form and any other 'insured's° estate will not relieve us of any Coverage Form or policy covers on the same 4111., obligations under this Coverage Form. basis, either excess or primary, we will pay only our share. Our share is the proportion 2. Concealment,Misrepresentation Or Fraud that the Limit of Insurance of our Coverage This Coverage Form is void in any case of fraud Form bears to the total of the limits of all the by you at any time as it relates to this Coverage Coverage Forms and policies covering on the Form. It is also void if you or any other 'insured°, same basis. at any time, intentionally conceals or 6. Premium Audit misrepresents a material fact concerning: a. The estimated premium for this Coverage a. This Coverage Form; Form is based on the exposures you told us b. The covered 'autos; you would have when this policy began. We c. Your interest in the covered °auto';or will compute the final premium due when we determine your actual exposures. The d. A claim under this Coverage Form. estimated total premium will be credited 3. Liberalization against the final premium due and the first IfNamed Insured will be billed for the balance, if we revise this Coverage Form to provide more any. The due date for the final premium or coverage without additional premium charge, retrospective premium is the date shown as your policy will automatically provide the the due date on the bill. If the estimated total additional coverage as of the day the revision is premium exceeds the final premium due, the effective in your state. first Named insured will get a refund. 4. No Benefit To Bailee—Physical Damage b. If this policy is issued for more than one year, Coverages the premium for this Coverage Form will be We will not recognize any assignment or grant computed annually based on our rates or any coverage for the benefit of any person or premiums in effect at the beginning of each organization holding, storing or transporting year of the policy. property for a fee regardless of any other provision of this Coverage Form. CA 00 01 1013 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 9 of 12 7. Policy Period, Coverage Territory 2. Any other land vehicle that is subject to a Under this Coverage Form, we cover 'accidents' compulsory or financial responsibility law or other and 'losses° occurring: motor vehicle insurance law where it is licensed a. During the policy period shown in the or principally garaged. Declarations; and However, °auto° does not include °mobile b. Within the coverage territory. equipment°. C. 'Bodily injury' means bodily injury, sickness or The coverage territory is: disease sustained by a person, including death (1) The United States of America; resulting from any of these. (2) The territories and possessions of the D. 'Covered pollution cost or expense° means any cost United Stales of America; or expense arising out of: (3) Puerto Rico; 1. Any request, demand, order or statutory or (4) Canada; and regulatory requirement that any 'insured' or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, (5) Anywhere in the world if a covered 'auto' contain, treat,detoxify or neutralize, or in any way of the private passenger type is leased, respond to, or assess the effects of, 'pollutants'; hired, rented or borrowed without a driver or for a period of 30 days or less, 2. Any claim or suit° by or on behalf of a provided that the 'insured's° responsibility to pay governmental authority for damages because of damages is determined in a °suit' on the merits, testing for, monitoring, cleaning up, removing, in the United States of America, the territories containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or and possessions of the United States of America, in any way responding to, or assessing the Puerto Rico or Canada, or in a settlement we effects of, 'pollutants'. agree to. °Covered pollution cost or expense' does not include We also cover 'loss' to, or 'accidents' involving, any cost or expense arising out of the actual, alleged a covered "auto' while being transported between or threatened discharge, dispersal, seepage, any of these places. migration, release or escape of °pollutants": 8. Two Or More Coverage Forms Or Policies a. That are, or that are contained in any property Issued By Us that is: It this Coverage Form and any other Coverage (1) Being transported or towed by, handled or Form or policy issued to you by us or any handled for movement into, onto or from company affiliated with us applies to the same the covered °auto'; °accident', the aggregate maximum Limit of (2) Otherwise in the course of transit by or on Insurance under all the Coverage Forms or behalf of the "insured'; or policies shall not exceed the highest applicable Limit of Insurance under any one Coverage Form (3) Being stored, disposed of, treated or or policy. This condition does not apply to any processed in or upon the covered "auto'; Coverage Form or policy issued by us or an b. Before the 'pollutants' or any property in affiliated company specifically to apply as excess which the 'pollutants' are contained are insurance over this Coverage Form. moved from the place where they are SECTION V—DEFINITIONS accepted by the 'insured" for movement into A. °Accident' includes continuous or repeated exposure or onto the covered 'auto'; or to the same conditions resulting in 'bodily injury° or c. After the 'pollutants' or any property in which 'property damage'. the 'pollutants' are contained are moved from B. 'Auto° means: the covered'auto' to the place where they are finally delivered, disposed of or abandoned by 1. A land motor vehicle, 'trailer' or semitrailer the °insured°. designed for travel on public roads; or Page 10 of 12 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 CA 00 01 1013 Paragraph a. above does not apply to fuels, 5. That part of any other contract or agreement thir lubricants, fluids, exhaust gases or other similar pertaining to your business (including an °pollutants° that are needed for or result from the indemnification of a municipality in connection normal electrical, hydraulic or mechanical with work performed for a municipality) under functioning of the covered 'auto'or its parts, if: which you assume the tort liability of another to (1) The "pollutants° escape, seep, migrate or pay for "bodily injury' or 'property damage' to a are discharged, dispersed or released third party or organization. Tort liability means a directly from an 'auto° part designed by its liability that would be imposed by law in the manufacturer to hold, store, receive or absence of any contract or agreement; or dispose of such 'pollutants°;and 6. That part of any contract or agreement entered (2) The °bodily injury', °property damage° or into, as part of your business, pertaining to the 'covered pollution cost or expense does rental or lease, by you or any of your not arise out of the operation of any 'employees°, of any °auto°. However, such equipment listed in Paragraph 6.b. or 6.c. contract or agreement shall not be considered an of the definition of°mobile equipment'. 'insured contract' to the extent that it obligates you or any of your 'employees' to pay for Paragraphs b. and c. above do not apply to 'property damage° to any °auto° rented or leased 'accidents° that occur away from premises owned by you or any of your 'employees°. by or rented to an °insured° with respect to °pollutants° not in or upon a covered °auto° if: An 'insured contract' does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (a) The °pollutants° or any property in which the °pollutants° are contained a. That indemnifies a railroad for *bodily injury' are upset, overturned or damaged as a or 'property damage' arising out of result of the maintenance or use of a construction or demolition operations, within covered °auto°; and 50 feet of any railroad property and affecting any railroad bridge or trestle, tracks, (b) The discharge, dispersal, seepage, roadbeds, tunnel, underpass or crossing; migration, release or escape of the °pollutants° is caused directly by such b. That pertains to the loan, lease or rental of an upset, overturn or damage. "auto' to you or any of your 'employees', if the °auto° is loaned, leased or rented with a E. 'Diminution in value° means the actual or perceived driver; or loss in market value or resale value which resultsc. That holds a person or organization engaged from a direct and accidental 'loss'. in the business of transporting property by F. 'Employee° includes a °leased worker°. °Employee° °auto° for hire harmless for your use of a i does not include a °temporary worker'. covered 'auto° over a route or territory that G. 'Insured' means any person or organization person or organization is authorized to serve qualifying as an insured in the Who is An insured by public authority. provision of the applicable coverage. Except with I. °Leased worker° means a person leased to you by a respect to the Limit of insurance, the coverage labor leasing firm under an agreement between you afforded applies separately to each insured who is and the labor leasing firm to perform duties related to seeking coverage or against whom a claim or'suit* is the conduct of your business. 'Leased worker' does brought. not include a 'temporary worker°. H. °Insured contract'means: J. °Loss° means direct and accidental loss or damage. 1. A lease of premises; K. °Mobile equipment' means any of the following types 2. A sidetrack agreement; of land vehicles, including any attached machinery or 3. Any easement or license agreement, except in equipment: connection with construction or demolition 1. Bulldozers, farm machinery, forklifts and other operations on or within 50 feet of a railroad; vehicles designed for use principally off public 4. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to roads; indemnify a municipality, except in connection 2. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to with work for a municipality; premises you own or rent; 3. Vehicles that travel on crawler treads; CA 00 01 10 13 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 11 of 12 4. Vehicles, whether self-propelled or not, However, °mobile equipment° does not include land maintained primarily to provide mobility to vehicles that are subject to a compulsory or financial permanently mounted: responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance a. Power cranes, shovels, loaders, diggers or law where it is licensed or principally garaged. Land drills; or vehicles subject to a compulsory or financial responsibility law or other motor vehicle insurance b. Road construction or resurfacing equipment law are considered 'autos'. such as graders,scrapers or rollers; • L. °Pollutants° means any solid, liquid, gaseous or 5. Vehicles not described in Paragraph 1., 2., 3. or thermal irritant or contaminant, including smoke, 4. above that are not self-propelled and are vapor, soot, fumes, acids, alkalis, chemicals and maintained primarily to provide mobility to waste. Waste includes materials to be recycled, permanently attached equipment of the following reconditioned or reclaimed. types: M. "Property damage° means damage to or loss of use a. Air compressors, pumps and generators, of tangible property. including spraying, welding, building cleaning, geophysical exploration, lighting and well- N. 'Suit* means a civil proceeding in which: servicing equipment; or 1. Damages because of °bodily injury" or "property b. Cherry pickers and similar devices used to damage"; or raise or lower workers;or 2. A"covered pollution cost or expense"; 6. Vehicles not described in Paragraph 1., 2., 3. or to which this insurance applies, are alleged. 4. above maintained primarily for purposes other °Suit' includes: than the transportation of persons or cargo. However, self-propelled vehicles with the a. An arbitration proceeding in which such following types of permanently attached damages or °covered pollution costs or equipment are not °mobile equipment" but will be expenses° are claimed and to which the considered °autos": "insured' must submit or does submit with our a. Equipment designed primarily for: consent;or (1) Snow removal; b. Any other alternative dispute resolutior, proceeding in which such damages or (2) Road maintenance, but not construction or "covered pollution costs or expenses° are resurfacing;or claimed and to which the insured submits with (3) Street cleaning; our consent. b. Cherry pickers and similar devices mounted 0. 'Temporary worker° means a person who is on automobile or truck chassis and used to furnished to you to substitute for a permanent raise or lower workers; and 'employee" on leave or to meet seasonal or short- term workload conditions. c. Air compressors, pumps and generators, including spraying, welding, building cleaning, P. 'Trailer° includes semitrailer. geophysical exploration, lighting or well- servicing equipment. Page 12 of 12 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 CA 00 01 10 13 WW Payton Corporation Policy#CLP3684671 08/01/2019 - 08/01/2020 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUILDERS EXTENDED LIABILITY COVERAGE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM It is agreed that the provisions listed below apply only upon the entry of an 1 X in the box next to the caption of such provision. A. X Partnership and Joint Venture Extension N. I X 1 Construction Project General Aggregate Limits B. X Contractors Automatic Additional Insured O. X Fellow Employee Coverage Coverage— Ongoing Operations P. X Property Damage Liability - Elevators C. X Automatic Waiver of Subrogation Q. X Property Damage to the Named Insured's Work D. X I Extended Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal R. X Care, Custody or Control E. X Unintentional Failure to Disclose Hazards S. X Concrete Rework Labor Reimbursement F. X Broadened Mobile Equipment Coverage G. X Personal and Advertising Injury -Contractual T. X 1 Lost Key Coverage Coverage U. [T] Electronic Data Liability Coverage H. X Nonemployment Discrimination V. X Consolidated Insurance Program Residual I. X Liquor Liability Liability Coverage J. ' X I Broadened Conditions W X Automatic Additional insureds—Managers or Lessors of Premises K. X Automatic Additional Insureds—Equipment Leases X. l X 1 Automatic Additional Insureds—State or Governmental Agency or Political L. X Insured Contract Extension -Railroad Property Subdivisions—Permits or Authorizations and Construction Contracts _ Y. X Contractors Automatic Additional Insured M. [X Turnkey Jobs - Coverage For Alienated Coverage—Completed Operations Premises Z. l ^ I Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors A. PARTNERSHIP AND JOINT VENTURE EXTENSION The following provision is added to SECTION II-WHO IS AN INSURED: The last full paragraph which reads as follows: No person or organization is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership, joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations. GL-3084 (09/11) -1- is deleted and replaced with the following: With respect to the conduct of any past or present joint venture or partnership not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations and of which you are or were a partner or member,you are an insured, but only with respect to liability arising out of 'your work° on behalf of any partnership or joint venture not shown as a Named insured in the Declarations, provided no other similar liability insurance is available to you for'your work° in connection with your interest in such partnership or joint venture. B. CONTRACTORS AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSURED COVERAGE—ONGOING OPERATIONS SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury', °property damage' or "personal and advertising injury' caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. Your acts or omissions; or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the project(s) designated in the written contract. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusions apply: This insurance does not apply to"bodily injury' or'property damage°occurring after: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or 2. That portion of 'your work° out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. C. AUTOMATIC WAIVER OF SUBROGATION Item 8. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 8. Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us and Automatic Waiver of Subrogation. a. If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this Coverage Form, those rights are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing after loss to impair those rights. At our request, the insured will bring 'suit' or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them. b. if required by a written contract executed prior to loss, we waive any right of recovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your work° for that person or organization. (.I _arum (nail D. EXTENDED NOTICE OF CANCELLATION, NONRENEWAL Item A.2.b.of the COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: A.2.b. 60 days before the effective date of the cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. Item 9. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 9. WHEN WE DO NOT RENEW a. If we choose to nonrenew this policy, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less than 60 days before the expiration date. b. If we do not give notice of our intent to nonrenew as prescribed in a.above, it is agreed that you may extend the period of this policy for a maximum additional sixty(60) days from its scheduled expiration date. Where not otherwise prohibited by law, the existing terms, conditions and rates will remain in effect during that extension period. It is further agreed that so long as it is not otherwise prohibited by law, this one time sixty day extension is the sole remedy and liquidated damages available to the insured as a result of our failure to give the notice as prescribed in 9. a.above. E. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS Although we relied on your representations as to existing and past hazards, if unintentionally you should fail to disclose all such hazards at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. lir F. BROADENED MOBILE EQUIPMENT Item 12.b.of SECTION V- DEFINITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 12.b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to premises, sites or locations you own, rent or occupy. G. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY-CONTRACTUAL COVERAGE Exclusion 2.e.of SECTION 1, COVERAGE B is deleted. H. NONEMPLOYMENT DISCRIMINATION Unless °personal and advertising injury° is excluded from this policy: Item 14.of SECTION V-DEFINITIONS, is amended to include: °Personal and advertising injury° also means embarrassment or humiliation, mental or emotional distress, physical illness, physical impairment, loss of earning capacity or monetary loss, which is caused by °discrimination.' SECTION V-DEFINITIONS, is amended to include: °Discrimination° means the unlawful treatment of individuals based on race, color, ethnic origin, age, gender or religion. C GL-3084 (09/11) -3- Item 2. Exclusions of SECTION I,COVERAGE B, is amended to include: 'Personal and advertising injury° arising out of °discrimination' directly or indirectly related to the past employment, employment or prospective employment of any person or class of persons by any insured. 'Personal and advertising injury° arising out of discrimination by or at your, your agents or your o employees' direction or with your,your agents or your'employees° knowledge or consent. 'Personal and advertising injury° arising out of °discrimination° directly or indirectly related to the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any dwelling, permanent lodging or premises by or at the direction of any insured. Fines, penalties, specific performance or injunctions levied or imposed by a governmental entity, or governmental code,law, or statute because of 'discrimination.' I. LIQUOR LIABILITY Exclusion 2.c.of SECTION I,COVERAGE A, is deleted. J. BROADENED CONDITIONS Items 2.a. and 2.b. of SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, are deleted and replaced with the following: 2. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Offense,Claim Or Suit: a. You must see to it that we are notified of an occurrence or an offense which may result in a claim as soon as practicable after the 'occurrence' has been reported to you, one of your officers or an °employee° designated to give notice to us. Notice should include: (1) How,when and where the 'occurrence° or offense took place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the 'occurrence° or offense. b. If a claim is made or'suit' is brought against any insured,you must: (1) Record the specifics of the claim or 'suit° and the date received as soon as you, one of your officers, or an 'employee' designated to record such information is notified of it; and (2) Notify us in writing as soon as practicable after you, one of your officers, your legal department or an 'employee° you designate to give us such notice learns of the claims or 'suit.' Item 2.e.is added to SECTION IV-COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS: 2.e. If you report an 'occurrence' to your workers compensation insurer which develops into a liability claim for which coverage is provided by the Coverage Form, failure to report such 'occurrence° to us at the time of °occurrence° shall not be deemed in violation of paragraphs 2.a., 2.b., and 2.c. However, you shall give written notice of this 'occurrence° to us as soon as you are made aware of the fact that this 'occurrence° may be a liability claim rather than a workers compensation claim. K. AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSUREDS-EQUIPMENT LEASES SECTION II - WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include any person or organization with whom you agree in a written equipment lease or rental agreement to name as an additional insured with respect to liability for'bodily injury", 'property damage° or°personal and advertising injury" caused, at least in part, by CI OnoA /nn/l1\ I your maintenance, operation, or use by you of the equipment leased to you by such person or organization, subject to the following additional exclusions. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to: 1. °Bodily injury' or"property damage' occurring after you cease leasing the equipment. 2. 'Bodily injury' or °property damage° arising out of the sole negligence of the additional insured. 3. °Property damage' to: a. Property owned, used or occupied by or rented to the additional insured;or b. Property in the care, custody or control of the additional insured or over which the additional insured is for any purpose exercising physical control. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. L. INSURED CONTRACT EXTENSION-RAILROAD PROPERTY AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS Item 9.of SECTION V- DEFINITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following. 9. °Insured Contract° means: a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract tor a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner is not an °insured contract'; b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; f. That part of any other contract or agreement pertaining to your business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which you assume the tort liability of another party to pay for °bodily injury° or °property damage' to a third person or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. Paragraph f.does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnifies an architect,engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, • opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage; or GL-3084 (09/11) -5- (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or failure to render professional services, including those listed in (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. M. TURNKEY JOBS-COVERAGE FOR ALIENATED PREMISES It is agreed that: Exclusion 2.j.{2)of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, does not apply if the premises are 'your work° and were not occupied, rented or held for rental by you for more than 12 months after completion. N. CONSTRUCTION PROJECT GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMITS This modifies SECTION Ili-LIMITS OF INSURANCE. A. For all sums which can be attributed only to ongoing operations at a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an 'occurrence' under SECTION I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I- COVERAGE C: 1. A separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit applies to each construction project, and that limit is equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. 2. The Construction Project General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of all damages under COVERAGE A, except damages because of 'bodily injury' or 'property damage° included in the 'products-completed operations hazard,' and for medical expenses under COVERAGE C regardless of the number of: a. Insureds; b. Claims made or"suits' brought; or c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing °suits.' 3. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for that construction project. Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations nor shall they reduce any other Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for any other construction project. 4. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, Fire Damage and Medical Expense continue to apply. However, instead of being subject to the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, such limits will be subject to the applicable Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. 8. For all sums which cannot be attributed only to ongoing operations at a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an 'occurrence' under SECTION I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I-COVERAGE C: 1. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the amount available under the General Aggregate Limit or the Products- Completed Operations Aggregate Limit, whichever is applicable; and 2. Such payments shall not reduce any Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. r_i .onoe Inn/11% c C. Payments for damages because of °bodily injury' or 'property damage° included in the 'products- completed operations hazard° will reduce the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit, and not reduce the General Aggregate Limit nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. D. If a construction project has been abandoned, delayed, or abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. E. The provisions of SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to be applicable. O. FELLOW EMPLOYEE COVERAGE Exclusion 2.e. Employers Liability of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.e. "Bodily injury' to (1) An "employee° of the insured arising out of and in the course of: (a) Employment by the insured; or (b) Performing duties related to the conduct of the insured's business; or (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that °employee° as a consequence of paragraph (1)above. This exclusion applies: (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an employer or in any other capacity; and (2) To any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury. This exclusion does not apply to: (1) Liability assumed by the insured under an °insured contract"; or (2) Liability arising from any action or omission of a co-'employee° while that co-°employee° is either in the course of his or her employment or performing duties related to the conduct of your business. Item 2.a.(1Xa)of SECTION Il-WHO IS AN INSURED, is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.a.(1Xa) To you, to your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture) or to your members (if you are a limited liability company), or to your 'volunteer workers" while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. P. PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY-ELEVATORS "Property damage° liability is changed as follows: 1. Exclusions 2.1.(3)and 2.1.(4)of SECTION 1, COVERAGE A, do not apply to the use of elevators. 2. The insurance afforded by reason of this provision is excess over any valid and collectible property insurance (including any deductible portion thereof) available to the insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, and the OTHER INSURANCE condition is changed accordingly. GL-3084 (09/11) -7- O. PROPERTY DAMAGE TO THE NAMED INSURED'S WORK Exclusion 1 of SECTION I, COVERAGE A.is deleted and replaced with the following: I. Damage to Your Work °Property damage" to °your work° arising out of it or any part of it and included in the °products completed operation hazard.° This exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of $50,000 per occurrence if the damaged work and the work out of which the damage arises was performed by you. This exclusion does not apply if the damaged work or the work out of which the damage arises was performed on your behalf by a subcontractor. R. CARE,CUSTODY OR CONTROL Exclusion 2.j.4 of SECTION I, COVERAGE A.is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.j.4 Personal property in the care, custody or control of the insured. However, for personal property in the care, custody or control of you or your 'employees,' this exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of$25,000 per occurrence, subject to the following terms and conditions; (a) The most that we will pay under this provision as an annual aggregate is $100,000, regardless of the number of occurrences. (b) This provision does not apply to °employee° owned property or any property that is missing where there is not physical evidence to show what happened to the property. (c) The aggregate limit for this coverage provision is part of the General Aggregate Limit and SECTION III- LIMITS OF INSURANCE is changed accordingly. (d) In the event of damage to or destruction of property covered by this exception, you shall, if requested by us, replace the property or furnish the labor and materials necessary for repairs thereto, at actual cost to you, exclusive of prospective profit or overhead charges of any nature. (e) $2,500 shall be deducted from the total amount of all sums you became obligated to pay as damages on account of damage to or destruction of all property of each person or organization, including the loss of use of that property, as a result of each °occurrence.° Our limit of liability under the endorsement as being applicable to each °occurrence° shall be reduced by the amount of the deductible indicated above; however, our aggregate limit of liability under this provision shall not be reduced by the amount of such deductible. The conditions of the policy, including those with respect to duties in the event of °occurrence,' claims or °suit' apply irrespective of the application of the deductible amount. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or °suit' and, upon notification of the action taken, you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. S. CONCRETE REWORK LABOR REIMBURSEMENT COVERAGE As it applies to this coverage, SECTION I-COVERAGE A is amended as follows: 1. Insuring Agreement, is deleted and replaced by the following: We will reimburse you for your direct labor expense associated with your °concrete rework° which was performed by you during the policy period due to the original "concrete product' failing to meet contractual specifications as ordered for the job or accepted industry standards for its specific (, 'noe inns 0 intended use, verified by testing by an ASTM (American Society of Testing & Materials) accredited independent testing agency. 2. Exclusions, is deleted and replaced by the following: The insurance provided by this endorsement does not apply to: a. "Cosmetic Defects" b. Loss of use c. Changes to the °concrete product° contractual specifications not acknowledged by the named insured in writing prior to the beginning of the job d. °Loss° arising from the 'subsidence° of land e. °Loss' arising from work performed on your behalf by a subcontractor, except for the supply of the 'concrete product" f. Cost of materials used in the installation of the °concrete product' or°concrete rework' g. Damages or 'loss° that is covered by a Property or Inland Marine coverage form for your financial interest in your project and structures h. °Loss° unless the °concrete rework° is completed within one year from the completion of the original 'concrete product° installation performed by you I. "Loss' caused by the failure to order the °concrete product" as required: a. In the contractual specifications; or b. By accepted industry standards for its specific intended use 'Loss° expected or intended from the standpoint of the insured k. °Concrete product° supplied by you SECTION III-LIMRS OF INSURANCE Is amended to include the following: 1. The Limits of Insurance as shown and the rules below fix the most we will pay regardless of the number of a. Insureds covered under this insurance; b. °Concrete rework'projects to which this insurance applies. °Concrete Rework' Project Limit $50,000 °Concrete Rework' Policy Aggregate Limits $50,000 'Concrete Rework' Deductible $ 1,000 2. The 'Concrete Rework' Project Limit shown above is the most we will reimburse you for your direct labor expense arising out of any single 'concrete rework° project. 3. Subject to 2. above, the °Concrete Rework' Policy Aggregate Limit shown above is the most we will reimburse you for your direct labor expenses for the sum of all 'concrete rework' projects. GL-3084 (09/11) -9- 4. The °Concrete Rework° Project Limit and the °Concrete Rework° Policy Aggregate Limits shall be included within and not be in addition to the General Aggregate Limit or the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (whichever applies), as stated in the declarations and as described in SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE. 5. Our obligation to reimburse you applies only to the amount of your direct labor expense in excess of the °Concrete Rework' Deductible stated above. This deductible shall apply separately to each 'concrete rework° project. The Limits of Insurance of this coverage apply separately to each consecutive annual period and to any remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with either the beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, or the effective date of the endorsement, whichever is less. If the policy period is extended after issuance for an additional period of less than 12 months the additional period will be deemed part of the preceding period for purposes of determining the Limits of Insurance. SECTION IV-COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amended as follows: Item 2. Duties in The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit is deleted and replaced by the following: 2. Duties in The Event Of Occurrence,Offense,Claim Or Suit a. You must see to it that we are notified prior to completing the °concrete rework' which may result in labor reimbursement. Notice should include: (1) How,when and where the incident took place; (2) The names and addresses of any witnesses, and (3) The estimated labor expense for the °concrete rework" b. You must promptly take all steps to minimize the expenses involved. c. You must cooperate with us and upon request, assist in enforcing any right of contribution or indemnity against any person or organization. d. You must provide us with proof of loss and any other required documents within 60 days of our request. You must also permit us to examine and copy any of your books and records at any reasonable time. You, your °employees° and your agents must, if we require you to, submit to examination under oath at such times as may be required,and sign a copy of the examination. e. No insureds will, except at their own cost, assume any obligation, or incur any expense without our consent. SECTION V-DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following: 'Concrete rework* means the alteration, repair, removal or replacement of a 'concrete product° "Concrete product° means any product you directly install consisting of concrete, cement, sand, mortar mix or related materials °Cosmetic defects° means a superficial or surface detect that does not affect the structural integrity of the o concrete product" 'Loss° means your direct labor expense associated with a °concrete rework° project 'Subsidence° means earth movement, including but not limited to: a. Landslide; (_i anon inOI1n b. Mud flow; c. Earth sinking; d. Earth rising; e. Collapse or movement of fill; f. Improper compaction; g. Earth settling, slipping, falling away,caving in, eroding, tilting or shifting; h. Earthquake; or I. Any other movement of land or earth. T. LOST KEY COVERAGE As it applies to this coverage, SECTION I,COVERAGE A, is amended to include as follows: We will pay those sums, subject to the limits of liability and deductible stated herein, that you become legally obligated to pay as damages due to the loss or mysterious disappearance of keys entrusted to or in the care, custody or control of you or your "employees" or anyone acting on your behalf. The damages covered by this endorsement are limited to the: 1. Actual cost of the keys; 2. Cost to adjust locks to accept new keys; or 3. Cost of new locks, if required, including the cost of installation. Item 2. Exclusions of SECTION I,COVERAGE A, is amended to include the following: 1. Keys owned by any insured,employees of any insured, or anyone acting on behalf of any insured. 2. Any resulting loss of use from the loss or mysterious disappearance of keys; or 3. Any of the following acts by any insured, employees of any insured, or anyone acting on behalf of any insureds: a. Misappropriation; b. Concealment; c. Conversion; d. Fraud; or a. Dishonesty Exclusions 2.j.(3)and 2.j.(4)of SECTION I,COVERAGE A do not apply to Lost Key Coverage. SECTION III- LIMITS OF INSURANCE is amended to include the following: 1. The Lost Key Coverage Occurrence Limit shown below is the most we will pay for each occurrence for damages for Lost Key Coverage provided in this endorsement. GL-3084 (09/11) -11- 2. The Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit shown below is the most we will pay for all occurrences covered by this endorsement during the policy period. Lost Key Coverage Occurrence Limit $50,000 Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit $50,000 Lost Key Coverage Deductible $ 1,000 3. The Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit shall be included within and not be in addition to the General Aggregate Limit or the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (whichever applies), as stated in the declarations and as described in SECTION III-LIMITS OF INSURANCE. Our obligation under this coverage to pay damages on your behalf applies only to the amount of damages in excess of the Lost Key Coverage Deductible stated above. The deductible applies on an "occurrence" basis. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or "suit" and, upon notification of the action taken, you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. U. ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY COVERAGE 1. Exclusion 2.p. Electronic Data of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.p. Damages arising out of the loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate "electronic data" that does not result from physical injury to tangible property. 2. The following definition is added to SECTION V—DEFINITIONS: "Electronic data" means information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software (including systems and applications software), hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. 3. For the purposes of this coverage, the definition of "property damage" in SECTION V — DEFINRIONS is replaced by the following: "Property damage"means: a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the *occurrence' that caused it; or c. Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to properly manipulate 'electronic data", resulting from physical injury to tangible property. All such loss of°electronic data'shall be deemed to occur at the time of the"occurrence° that caused it. For the purposes of this insurance, 'electronic data" is not tangible property. V. CONSOLIDATED INSURANCE PROGRAM RESIDUAL LIABILITY COVERAGE With respect to "bodily injury", "property damage", or 'personal and advertising injury" arising out of your ongoing operations;or operations included within the"products-completed operations hazard", the policy to ni -anon rnn/1 11 ,n which this coverage is attached shall apply as excess insurance over coverage available to "you" under a Consolidated Insurance Program (such as an Owner Controlled Insurance Program or Contractors C, Controlled Insurance Program). Coverage afforded by this endorsement does not apply to any Consolidated Insurance Program involving a "residential project" or any deductible or insured retention, specified in the Consolidated Insurance Program. The following is added to Section V—Definitions "Residential project' means any project where 30% or more of the total square foot area of the structures on the project is used or is intended to be used for human residency. This includes but is not limited to single or multifamily housing, apartments, condominiums, townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit developments and appurtenant structures (including pools, hot tubs, detached garages, guest houses or any similar structures). A "residential project" does not include military owned housing, college/university owned housing or dormitories, long term care facilities, hotels, motels, hospitals or prisons. All other terms, provisions, exclusions and limitations of this policy apply. W. AUTOMATIC ADDfTIONAL INSUREDS-MANAGERS OR LESSORS OF PREMISES SECTION It-WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include: Any person or organization with whom you agree in a written contract or written agreement to name as an additional insured but only with respect to liability arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that part of the premises, designated in the written contract or written agreement, that is leased to you and subject to the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: 1. Any"occurrence°which takes place after you cease to be a tenant in that premises. 2. Structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or on behalf of the additional insured listed in the written contract or written agreement. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. X. AUTOMATIC ADDMONAL INSUREDS - STATE OR GOVERNMENTAL AGENCY OR POLITICAL SUBDIVISIONS-PERMITS OR AUTHORIZATIONS SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include any state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision with whom you are required by written contract, ordinance, law or building code to name as an additional insured subject to the following provisions: This insurance applies only with respect to operations performed by you or on your behalf for which the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision has issued a permit or authorization. This insurance does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of operations performed for the federal government, state or municipality; or b. "Bodily injury"or"property damage"included within the"products-completed operations hazard". GL-3084 (09/11) -13- This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured,whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualities as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. Y. CONTRACTORS AUTOMATIC ADDITIONAL INSURED COVERAGE—COMPLETED OPERATIONS SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy for completed operations, but only with respect to liability for 'bodily injury' or 'property damage° caused, in whole or in part, by 'your work° at the project designated in the contract, performed for that additional insured and included in the'products-completed operations hazard°. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. Z. ADDITIONAL INSURED—ENGINEERS,ARCHITECTS OR SURVEYORS SECTION II — WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an additional insured any architect, engineer or surveyor who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect to liability for'bodily injury', 'property damage° or 'personal and advertising injury' caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. Your acts or omissions;or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf. This includes such architect, engineer or surveyor, who may not be engaged by you, but is contractually required to be added as an additional insured to your policy. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusion applies: This insurance does not apply to 'bodily injury', 'property damage' or 'personal and advertising injury' arising out of the rendering of or the failure to render any professional services, including: 1. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys,change orders,designs or specifications; or 2. Supervisory, inspection or engineering services. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance it the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. /�1 '_/\n,4 Inn/°.1 .1 WW Payton Corporation 08/01/2019 - 08/01/2020 POLICY NUMBER: CLP 3 684 671 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 10 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organization(s) Locatfon(s)Of Covered Operations SEE FORM MAN-00008 TEXAS Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following additional organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with exclusions apply: respect to liability for °bodily injury°, 'property This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury° or damage° or °personal and advertising injury' caused, "property damage° occurring after: in whole or in part, by: 1. Your acts or omissions; or 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your project (other than service, maintenance or behalf; repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the location of the additional insured(s) at the location(s) designated covered operations has been completed; or above. 2. That portion of 'your work° out of which the injury However: or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than 1. The insurance afforded to such additional insured another contractor or subcontractor engaged in only applies to the extent permitted by law; and performing operations for a principal as a part of 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is the same project. required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. 46. CG 2010 0413 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 2 C. With respect to the insurance afforded to these 2. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance additional insureds, the following is added to Section shown in the Declarations; III-Limits Of Insurance: whichever is less. If coverage provided to the additional insured is This endorsement shall not increase the applicable required by a contract or agreement, the most we will Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount of insurance: 1. Required by the contract or agreement; or • Page 2 of 2 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 CG 20 1004 13 WW Payton Corporation 08/01/2019 - 08/01/2020 POLICY NUMBER: CLP 3 684 671 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 37 04 13 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Orranization(s) Location And Description Of Completed Operations SEE FORM MAN-00009 TEXAS Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following is added to Section organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only III-Limits Of insurance: with respect to liability for°bodily injury° or"property if coverage provided to the additional insured is damage' caused, in whole or in part, by 'your work° required by a contract or agreement, the most we will at the location designated and described in the pay on behalf of the additional insured is the amount Schedule of this endorsement performed for that of insurance: additional insured and included in the 'products- completed operations hazard'. 1. Required by the contract or agreement; or However: 2. Available under the applicable Limits of Insurance 1. The insurance afforded to such additional shown in the Declarations; insured only applies to the extent permitted by whichever is less. law; and This endorsement shall not increase the applicable 2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations. required by a contract or agreement, the insurance afforded to such additional insured will not be broader than that which you are required by the contract or agreement to provide for such additional insured. CG 20 37 0413 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 1 WW Payton Corporation Policy#CLP3684671 08/01/2019 - 08/01/2020 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 2001 0413 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following is added to the Other Insurance Condition (2) You have agreed in writing in a contract or and supersedes any provision to the contrary: agreement that this insurance would be Primary And Noncontributory Insurance primary and would not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional This insurance is primary to and will not seek insured. contribution from any other insurance available to an additional insured under your policy provided that: (1) The additional insured is a Named Insured under such other insurance; and CG 20 01 0413 ©insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 1 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC 42 03 04 B (Ed. 6-14) TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT 411110This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization ( X) Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: Incl . The premium charge for this endorsement shall be VRS percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Incl . This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. (The information below is required only when this endorsement Is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) Endorsement Effective 08/01/2019 Policy No. Endorsement No. Insured WC3684672 Premium iisurance Company Countersigned by WW Payton Corporation WC420304B (Ed. 6-14) Copyright 2014 National Council on Compensation Insurance, Inc. All Rights Reserved. CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 1111 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions, Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions,the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: telephone: 281. 652. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: • A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No. 3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk—Builder's Risk Insurance is Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records, the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract, the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for II) 08/2018 00800- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year,proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Not Required to provide either a Field Office or any internet access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents.Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times,in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined work day. Contractor Will Not be required to provide an on-site construction office for the duration of this project. END OF SECTION • 3 08/2018 00800-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 IDWAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works(Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code), the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five(5) feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. (Attach the current wage rates. Number the pages 00811-2, 00811-3, etc.) • 0 10-2012 00811 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION "General Decision Number:TX20200233 02/14/2020 Superseded General Decision Number:TX20190233 State:Texas Construction Type: Building County: Brazoria County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of$10.80 for calendar year 2020 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.80 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2020. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate,if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate 10-2012 00811 -2 oil5 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2020 1 02/14/2020 tor ASBE0022-009 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT& FROST INSULATOR(Duct, Pipe and Mechanical System Insulation)....$ 24.28 14.16 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2017 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER $28.00 22.35 CARP0551-009 04/01/2016 10-2012 00811 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excludes Drywall Hanging, Form Work, and Metal Stud Installation) $ 23.05 8.78 ELEC0716-005 08/28/2019 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN (Excludes Low Voltage Wiring and Installation of Alarms) $ 32.25 9.24 * ELEV0031-003 01/01/2020 Rates Fringes ELEVATOR MECHANIC $44.00 34.765 FOOTNOTES: A. 6% under 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. 8%over 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. B. Holidays: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day;Thanksgiving Day; Friday after Thanksgiving Day; Christmas Day;and Veterans Day. 'Nu) 10-2012 00811 -4 of 15 A CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 461, ENG 10450-002 04/01/2014 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Cranes $ 34.85 9.85 I RO N0084-01106/01/2019 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL $ 24.42 7.12 IRON0135-002 09/01/2018 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER,STRUCTURAL $ 31.85 12.14 PLAS0079-004 01/01/2015 Rates Fringes PLASTERER $ 19.92 1.00 PLU M0068-002 10/01/2019 C 10-2012 00811 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Rates Fringes PLUMBER $ 36.15 11.04 P LU M0211-010 10/01/2018 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER(Including HVAC Pipe Installation) $ 33.30 12.26 SHEE0054-003 07/01/2017 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER(Excludes HVAC Duct and Unit Installation) $ 27.72 13.70 SUTX2014-008 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes ACOUSTICAL CEILING MECHANIC $ 16.41 3.98 BRICKLAYER $ 19.86 0.00 CAULKER $ 15.36 0.00 10-2012 00811 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 13.33 0.00 DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER $ 16.30 3.71 DRYWALL HANGER AND METAL STUD INSTALLER $ 17.45 3.96 ELECTRICIAN (Alarm Installation Only) $ 17.97 3.37 ELECTRICIAN (Low Voltage Wiring Only) $ 18.00 1.68 FLOOR LAYER: Carpet $ 20.00 0.00 tor FORM WORKER $ 12.57 0.00 GLAZIER $ 19.12 4.41 INSULATOR- BATT $ 14.87 0.73 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 12.10 0.00 LABORER: Common or General $ 10.55 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender-Brick...$ 13.37 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Cr Cement/Concrete $ 10.86 0.00 10-2012 001311 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION LABORER: Pipelayer $ 12.94 0.00 ‘000 LABORER: Roof Tearoff $ 11.28 0.00 LABORER: Landscape and Irrigation $ 9.49 0.00 LATHER $ 19.73 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe $ 15.56 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader $ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer $ 20.77 0.00 OPERATOR: Drill $ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift $ 15.64 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade $ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader $ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic $ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, 1411) 10-2012 00811 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Aggregate, and Concrete) $ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller $ 16.00 0.00 PAINTER(Brush, Roller and Spray), Excludes Drywall Finishing/Taping $ 16.77 4.51 ROOFER $ 15.40 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER(HVAC Duct Installation Only) $ 20.05 4.19 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Unit 41, Installation Only) $ 19.67 2.24 SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 22.17 9.70 TILE FINISHER $ 12.00 0.00 TILE SETTER $ 16.17 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: 1/Single Axle Truck $ 14.95 5.23 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck $ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck $ 19.65 8.57 10-2012 00811 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck $ 12.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck $ 12.00 4.11 WATERPROOFER $ 14.39 0.00 WELDERS-Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued)on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO,the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care;to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured,or has other health-related needs, including preventive care;or for reasons resulting from,or to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information 10-2012 00811 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the ter cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination.The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers""that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate)or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PWM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this 10-2012 0081 1 - 1 1 of 15 I CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION classification,which in this example would be Plumbers.0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198.The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination.07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate,which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA)governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example:SULA2012-007 5/13/2014.SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based.The next number,007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Noel) 10-2012 00811 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100%of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state.The next number,0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination.08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Cy A UAVG rate will be updated once ayear, usuallyin Januaryof P each year,to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: tpir 10-2012 00811 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination ,,,d * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory,then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes,then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: 10-2012 008 I I - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.)that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.)All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION" 10-2012 00811 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 thr ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: March 17, 2020 PROJECT: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement: COP Project # WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 BID DATE: April 2, 2020 FROM: Keith O'Connor, P.E. KIT Professionals, Inc. 2000 W Loop S, Suite 1400 Houston, TX 77042 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and L Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: N/A SPECIFICATIONS: N/A CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: N/A CLARIFICATIONS: 1. The March 24th pre-bid conference to be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Council Chambers at 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 10:30 a.m. will not be a mandatory meeting. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 [Responsible engineer] [Title] 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS LOWEST RESPONSIBLE BIDDER Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebidspearlandtx.gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, April 2, 2020. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: WA1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 A pre-bid conference will be held at the City of Pearland City Hall Council Chambers at 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 10:30 a.m. on March 24, 2020. The project will entail the rehabilitation of the Southdown Groundwater Plant including removal of abandoned ground storage tank and existing hydro-pneumatic tanks,installation of new 400,000 gallon welded steel ground storage tank, new variable frequency drives for booster pumps, new 2-2020 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID 450 mW natural gas generator, and related civil, mechanical, structural, electrical and instrumentation improvements. Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to,all transmittals and material submittals, RFI's, RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, interne access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Lot;in.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents may also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room (281) 376-4577 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. 2-2020 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID fir• The successful Bidder must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent(100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of "Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor, sub-recipient, or sub-contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this agreement, which may result in the termination of this agreement or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Lir Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to be in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been"opened"may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Crystal Roan City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date March 11, 2020 2-2020 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Second Publication date March 18, 2020 2-2020 00100-4 of 4 City of Pearland yy 3519 Liberty Drive n� Pearland, Texas 77581 1 J t%!NIL/ .,�,,,Tel: 281.652.1600 fs 9a pearlandtx.gov t, 8 March 23, 2020 To All Prospective Respondents RE: Bid # 0220-25 Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement ADDENDUM NO. 2 A conference call number has been setup for calling into the non-mandatory pre-bid conference that is scheduled for Tuesday, March 24, 2020 at 10:30 a.m. Dial in number: 281-652-1955 Meeting No.: 1790# Attendee Access Code: 0971# If you will be calling in for the pre-bid meeting, please call in at least 5 minutes prior to the start of the meeting. Please email ebids(a�pearlandtx.gov if further assistance is needed. Sincerely, Julie Blackmore Contract Administrator City of Pearland Page 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 • ADDENDUM NO. 3 Date: March 24, 2020 PROJECT: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement: COP Project# WA 1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 BID DATE: April 2, 2020 FROM: Keith O'Connor, P.E. KIT Professionals, Inc. 2000 W Loop S, Suite 1400 Houston,TX 77042 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and ® Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: N/A SPECIFICATIONS: N/A CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: N/A CLARIFICATIONS: 1. The project jobsite site will be accessible on Friday, March 27, 2020 from 9a.m. to 11:30a.m. Please be advised, in response to suggested social distancing guidelines, City staff has been advised to control the number of contractors inside the plant during this timeframe and to maintain a minimum 6-foot space from individuals. • END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 [Responsible engineer] [Title] 2-22-12 00900- I of I CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 4 Date: 3/30/20 PROJECT: Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement: COP Project # WA 1904 BID NO.: 0220-25 BID DATE: April 2, 2020 FROM: Keith O'Connor, P.E. KIT Professionals, Inc. 2000 W Loop S, Suite 1400 Houston, TX 77042 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and ( Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this fir► Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. ZE OFTF14� CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: N/A • • KEITH A. O'CONNOR 98334 :ctS SPECIFICATIONS: ��i �;•.•�/CENS�,Q: �7 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: # , 1. Remove Dwg. E-6 and E-7 and replaced with attached U k ' ' I updated Drawings. TBPE Firm No. F-4991 CLARIFICATIONS: 2. Geotechnical report labeled "Geotechnical Investigation / Southdown Groundwater Plant/ Ground Storage Tank Replacement/ City of Pearland, TX / Report No. 1140246101"by Geotest Engineering, Inc. is provided for informational purposes. 3. Lead & Asbestos report labeled "Report of Asbestos and Lead Paint Testing/Greater Pearland Water Authority/ 1007 East Belgravia— Pearland, TX/Loflin Environmental �r Services Project No. 200-19-317." By Loflin Environmental Services, Inc. is provided for informational purposes. 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 4. Q: What is the cost estimate for this project: A: Engineer's Opinion of Probable Cost is $1.75M. 5. Q: Please verify if an alternate for a bolted steel water ground storage tank will be accepted by the City of Pearland. A: No, bolted steel tanks are not acceptable. 6. Notify the Engineering Department at least three (3) business days prior to beginning construction and at least twenty-four(24) hours prior to each time concrete is placed on the project and prior to all required inspections or tests. Inspections shall be conducted by the Engineering Department staff or any designee as may be provided by the City. Normal working hours are Monday through Friday from 7:30 AM to 4:30 PM. All Saturday construction shall be scheduled with the Engineering Department at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance. There will be no construction or inspections made on Sundays unless in case of emergency. Request for Sunday or holiday construction or inspections shall be made in writing and submitted to the Engineering Department for approval not later than 72 hours prior to the intent. All Saturday, Sunday or holiday inspections will be on a fee basis paid directly to the City prior to final approval of the project. The fee basis rate for Saturday inspection services is $60.00 per hr. Holiday and Sunday inspections fee rate is $75.00 per hour. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 Keith O'Connor Sr. Project Manager 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 EXISTING POWER TRANSFORMER BY CPE 480V12 -r 1V SECONDARY CPE 12 47KV POWER LINE EXISTING MCG 1600A, 460V, 34.. 3W. NEMA IA 600AT 0) 350AT 100AT 100AT /OAT 600AF 400AF 125AF 125AF 125AF 15A125AFT 125AF 110AT WELL PUMP BOOSTER PUMP NO.1 BOOSTER PUMP NO.2 BOOSTER PUMP NO.3 MCC -1 DEMOLITION ONE -LINE DIAGRAM NTS MCC -1 DEMOLITION ELEVATION NTS AIR COMPRESSOR EXISTING LEVEL TRANSMITTERS TO O BE DEMOLISHED PANEL XFMR 25KVA. 430V.120/240V `:Q, 3W GST LEVEL TRANSMITTERS PHOTOGRAPH NTS. LEGEND: ITEMS TO BE DEMOLISHED. NOTES: 1 EXISTING WIRES TO BE DEMOLISHED. 2 REFER TO SHEET I-1 NOTE 7 AND SPECIFICATION 13342 FOR LEVEL TRANSMITTER. A ADDENDUM NO.4 3/27/20 CV HF UK. DESCRIPTION DATE OWN. CNK. KIT Professionals, Inc. E�greers • Flamers • Boost/v[5.1..9en 2000 W Sam Houston Fkw9 S . Sate 1400 Houston rotas 71042 Phone. 1713) 783-8700, F. 17131787E747 TBPE Fon Regstraton lb. 1-4991 GAI c;u to & AssOciates, Inc. 73205„1,:; Fnrnal. 5eit[410 IWwbn T:u ]]0]4 CONSULTING ENGINEERING T11: 713'636-2916 Fax :713.636-29(7 Registration No. F-2593 email. Woona nOons.„meg ro s SOUTHDOWN GROUNDWATER PLANT GROUND STORAGE TANK REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION MCC -1 ONE -LINE DIAGRAM & ELEVATION Job No.: 104-1901 Shale: WA: MAR 2020 N: N/A Vr N/A DWG E-6 Own By:C.VALDEZ CAD FILE: 1625-E-6 hkd By:W.ZHENG SHEET 30 OF 33 — — SPACE ./ / 7TRANSFORMER/ //// 1 j///� %BOOSTER PUMP NO. I AUT°SENSORY — — PTX160 7/— BOOSTNEROZ / 6005 MAIN DISCONNECT WELL PUMP ` _ —_ _s/ BOOSTER / / FAP NO._a / — AIR— COMPRESSOR — SPCE MCC -1 DEMOLITION ELEVATION NTS AIR COMPRESSOR EXISTING LEVEL TRANSMITTERS TO O BE DEMOLISHED PANEL XFMR 25KVA. 430V.120/240V `:Q, 3W GST LEVEL TRANSMITTERS PHOTOGRAPH NTS. LEGEND: ITEMS TO BE DEMOLISHED. NOTES: 1 EXISTING WIRES TO BE DEMOLISHED. 2 REFER TO SHEET I-1 NOTE 7 AND SPECIFICATION 13342 FOR LEVEL TRANSMITTER. A ADDENDUM NO.4 3/27/20 CV HF UK. DESCRIPTION DATE OWN. CNK. KIT Professionals, Inc. E�greers • Flamers • Boost/v[5.1..9en 2000 W Sam Houston Fkw9 S . Sate 1400 Houston rotas 71042 Phone. 1713) 783-8700, F. 17131787E747 TBPE Fon Regstraton lb. 1-4991 GAI c;u to & AssOciates, Inc. 73205„1,:; Fnrnal. 5eit[410 IWwbn T:u ]]0]4 CONSULTING ENGINEERING T11: 713'636-2916 Fax :713.636-29(7 Registration No. F-2593 email. Woona nOons.„meg ro s SOUTHDOWN GROUNDWATER PLANT GROUND STORAGE TANK REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION MCC -1 ONE -LINE DIAGRAM & ELEVATION Job No.: 104-1901 Shale: WA: MAR 2020 N: N/A Vr N/A DWG E-6 Own By:C.VALDEZ CAD FILE: 1625-E-6 hkd By:W.ZHENG SHEET 30 OF 33 L-3"S291a :311! 060 ON3HZ76:(8 P990 V/N "A V/N H :.loss Z301VA'3:18 6M0 L-3 DMOI OZOZ 11vW 1061-001:'ON a•r NlO1IVAfl'13 78 WV2IDVIQ RNI11-3N10 1 -DOW NOIIVOIdIQOW 'I`IDI21.L3 IT1 11\191AIDJV1d32l ?1NV1 3DV 1OIS ONf10219 .LNV1d 2I3.LVMUNDO2ID NMOCIELDOS mai `puellead Jo X1IJ 01 I' 1h./4. �,„w.l,•w' E65Z-d 'ON 11011e1151698 ”'sqONIN33NION3 ONI1111SNO u�•.,,1 v, moll 'sldnl ,,,vi �,�,w:� c •.EE '3uI alcuossY TV s J IV0 :651"d olluc Obaa 3431 ....lel ISIS) OOLiEB!IE LI) .0Nd zrou Ee.al �oi��oH ou` I erns s �•+la �on�ew wes e� coo: s,.fisuery U0,1.0, • s,x d • s,ew bug •3u1 'sieuoissejoid 1111 sab 0,10 EU Evay ry,� 1 f 87111 100009)1 v ii 1193 'N/A0 31V0 NOIldI213530 'srl AH AO OZ/LZ/E VON WOON300V V 880M NOIIOf1N1SNOO ONIINVIS 01 NOINd ONINIM IONINOO AdIN3A 0131411VHS NO.OVN1NO0 'N3)IV3N8 M3N 11VISNI '02 'ONO 9#'OMV 0/I# E :O„1 'ONO 8#'OMV 4# M0138 31003 HOS 1100N00 335 .3.,1 'ONO 8#'OMV 49 011,-11711.,111.2j11- adA 01 0054 ONIISIX3 NONd 11f10NOO ONION31X3 ONI0f1iONI OAA 01 ON31X3 ONV 'IIfON00 ONI191X3 3H1 NI S3NIM ONIISIX3 3OV1d3N N '3, 1 'ONO B#'OMV £# £ 4 0„6 'ONO L#'OMV OSE# E JO 9.1.36 Z :83033) MON £ 1516 03SOdONd 01 ON31X3 ONV11110N00 ONIISIX3 OHI NI S3NIM ONIISIX3 30V1d3N Z N3NV318 MSN 11VISNI 3131800 3H1 NI S3NIM 1ON1N00 031VIOOSSV ONV AV13N OVO1N3A0 ONV 13 N31N915 N3OY3118 ONIISIX3 3AOWNN S31ON Z -ISO N I-1SO NOd N3MOd AUL ONO Zl# 1OMV ZI# 4 Z-1SO 8 1-1SO „ld„ 13NVd „4IE1 N351NOdSNVNIONIIHOIl 011 3lOY1d30311ONO ONV 6306211 1131V3H SIN'OMV ZI#4 11306111 IVAH NOd X013-1: ,id„l3NVd .1. l 601 llNflONO NOI10310Nd OIOOHIVO SIN 1316 SIN Z 11113110110310114 OIOOHIVO „ld., l3NVd ,.11 dH 601 TON 380114 ONO Zl#'OMY Zl# 4 TON 380114 Z ON 380Nd Nod X09-1' 4/E t VLSI TON 380114 ONO ZL#1316 Z1#4 X08 NOIlVNIW1131 ONIISIX3 TON1 380Nd NOd X08-' 30vso 1 /01 TON N3Or1OSNVNI 13A31 OINOSVN1111 318V0 3Nf11OVJONV51 TON N3Of10SNV81 13A31 OINOSVN1lf1 Z -ISO NOd X08-11fld 14£ I 6901 Z -ISO 3Nn1OVJONVW Z -1S0 -ISO NOd X08Zllnd "l 1 901 ION 380114 ONO Zl#1316 Zl# 4 l"ON 380114 VON 38oNd Nod X013 -r ,.4/£ L VSO1 VON 380114 ONO Z1#1316 Zl# 4 X08 NOIIYNIW1131 ONIISIX3 1'311 38ONd NOd X08 -f 61 1 901 VON N30110SNVN1 13A31 OINOSVNI1f1 318VO 3Nf11OVdfNV51 ION N3Of1OSNVNI 13A31 OINOSVNIIfl I-1SO NOd XON -1111d 4/E L V001 1-150 318V0 3Nn1OVdf1NVW 1153 -ISO Nod X08-1111d'.l 1 401 1130334 113134 53111VIiIXf1V NOIVN3N3O ONO 9# 1DMV 4# E NOIVNNN30 :Ado -131,16A ,.Z/l-11 81 001 NOIVIONEINNV 31860 NOIVI ONIINNV NOIVIONf1NNV NOIVN3N30 2/I -I I ZOI land MOl'IIYd 'INVIS NOIVN3N3O ONO 1#'OMV41#9 NOIVNNN3O SIV 2/1.-1 1 101 51130334 NOIVN3N30 SIV ONO I#1WO1=10SE# 4 S1V NOIVN3N30 ..E Z 001 531011 110NOWOf10N00 01 NOW 3ZIS III -10N00 AllINVf10 1If10NOO OVI 1If10NOO 311103H0911110N00 VPZS III£/A094117 A110Vd51V Wf1WINIW VO9 OVOI 1101051153011 V1 JO %SS V490 1V1019fS VON VA)ISP N351NOdSNVNIONIIHOIl VOP dH0£ EON dVlnd 11315008 VS9 dHOS TON dWnd N319008 VS9 dHOS VON dWnd N315008 VOPZ dHOOS d1/.111d 113M lid dH 51311 NOIIV1f3iVO OVOI £-0001 1135111 10111N00 dWfld 1131S000 QE/A084 4,£/A09P AE/A094 E -d9 NOd OAA '0.,4/E '81# SOYINI Z 'OMV41# 9 IIBEI 5-d0 NOd OAA 0J m 03� N A m* - Ll A N S.) 0 I -d8 NOd OAA '0,.4/E91# SOVINI Z 'OMV41# 9 i/NV4 NOi1:*:"11511131 Old ONiiS// S MEI '04/COMV41# 51 699 0PZ = 9'99 01/5 = :S310N SdWV VAN OV011V101 OVO1 03103NNO [ S./ 0'9 S'01 OS 30.15 — — L 38^d0 — 0'0 L — 3J\VS 6Z 65 33Vds — 1 E"ON dWnd 0.0 — t — 3atds /5 9Z 30vso dlNfid 1131 —.. L _ 0'0 ZON dV/fld 11315008 _ L 37Vds SZ P5 3a vas OZ l 11'0 _ 4'0 1 OZ z -iso CZ ZZ inveY15aLow osaa-1Vo OZ I 61 VI 1'0 1 05 I -iso IT 00 s0N'ISO 1v3loV1d3u3a OZ 1 86 9'E 0'5 Z 09 snoosssoA1Biisouo1MB8s- 6/ LL 81 12o1$611y31 05 L 0'1 01.' O'£ 91 12nolv OE E 8'1 55 0'1 1 OZ slaw= 04 4L 9'1 ' 9'Z 0'1 1 05 MMOilvtl dKlt913oo01asY 0L ZL 8'1 4Z 9'0 L OZ sl3unomV.°moil ma 11 01 3JalvstesVianr10011$32f1ss3a3 OZ 1 TO L'1 ; S'L 1 OZ 71VMNIALV311010 6 9 salonwoae loalNm OZ 1 9'0 1.5 61. L 0Z L 9 osoW1O1 2laalu 5131113? MONIS% 05 1 60 0'1 0'0 1 OZ 13'IIrOY MilvaaoParliOOlo S 4 slsvno30suso OZ 1 4'0 4'0 1 05 3JKiS C Z soasoa1V0 05 I 0'1 8'1 60 1 OZ SmY30130 1 'ON 0101.14160630 0601 dldl 310d VAN 00 90 V0 VAN 3104 dldl NOLLdIdOS300VO1 '06 "190 9p own OI avoi era 1313 L :V W3N 381M V 311511 NO 1108 :3dA19)3 :WOW 03d 359 -Id E :3SVHd 111111039d:6001 NOON '0313 :NOI1V001 A505 /0Z1 :306110A NZZ:ONIIJYN Olv 3OVdNf1S:ONIINOoW LHON) 8051 V0S 1 :SNIVW ..1d.. 13 N V d vszz :ssne � A N D a ED 'iO111N00 Old ON/SI//S 110131 NOIi 39 .1NOSNSSO.1115 )11: ONI131O3 6 13NYd 3NVdS M4 'OE ABOZ/OZL-A090 'VANS4 NWdX 1 F 9 IVOL JYSZI Y ON 9115•! 09 SIN 3NI1-3NO 1-00W NOIIVOIdIOOW TON c/YJ:'id --431500// ON d'e'4fld 03ISOO8 SIN NO IlVA31 3 L -001A1 NOIIVOIdIOO51 S 9 OJA IVOL JVSZI S O/A 16331 1.331 161'5£ dVSZL (� JYSZI (�-1'10/N Y Y VIVA/N 'MC 001d 'ONO 0/4# SVOM4'OE 1 ALLZ/094 MNOS4 1101.11311331 / SVO 1VNn1VN 116009 \ 1 dVO09 0 I_ J 11109(° 1109 0 36009 NE WY3N d£/V009 /AOB4 O31VN 3ONYNIN3 3OIANNS SIV I II J A094 b009"I 00/s ON'.LSIx3 £01 ZOI 01 001 L 19/509/0335 O8>3d3 i'l^"Y'1 P.8 9/3NNOdSIJMNI H//MOd ONIISIX3 3Nil 9/3'.lO/S P.>: :>.I da V 304E — — — — — — — 38^d0 — 103NN0050 — _ - Nivw,000 — — E"ON dWnd — N315000 — — — — dlNfid 1131 —.. _ ZON dV/fld 11315008 _ — 091X14 _ — — — — _ 3:1645 — ION dWfld _ Ol ` — — N31S008— — N3W110/SNVNI— — S 9 OJA IVOL JVSZI S O/A 16331 1.331 161'5£ dVSZL (� JYSZI (�-1'10/N Y Y VIVA/N 'MC 001d 'ONO 0/4# SVOM4'OE 1 ALLZ/094 MNOS4 1101.11311331 / SVO 1VNn1VN 116009 \ 1 dVO09 0 I_ J 11109(° 1109 0 36009 NE WY3N d£/V009 /AOB4 O31VN 3ONYNIN3 3OIANNS SIV I II J A094 b009"I 00/s ON'.LSIx3 £01 ZOI 01 001 L 19/509/0335 O8>3d3 i'l^"Y'1 P.8 9/3NNOdSIJMNI H//MOd ONIISIX3 3Nil 9/3'.lO/S P.>: :>.I da V L GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION SOUTHDOWN GROUNDWATER PLANT GROUND STORAGE TANK REPLACEMENT CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS REPORT NO. 1140246101 Reported to: KIT PROFESSIONALS, INC. Houston, Texas Reported by: GEOTEST ENGINEERING, INC. Houston, Texas Key Map No. 613 F L 1 GEOTEST ENGINEERING , INC. Geotechnical Engineers&Materials Testing 5600 Bintliff Drive Houston,Texas 77036 Telephone: (713) 266-0588 Fax: (713) 266-2977 Report No. 1140246101 December 12, 2019 Mr. Keith O'Connor, P.E. Senior Project Manager KIT Professionals, Inc. 2000 W. Sam Houston Parkway S., Suite 1400 Houston,Texas 77042 Reference: Geotechnical Investigation Southdown Groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas Dear Mr. O'Connor: Presented herein is the final report of our geotechnical investigation for the referenced project. A draft report was submitted to you on November 1,2019. This final report will supersede any previously submitted reports, transmittals, e-mails, etc. for the referenced project. This study was authorized through your notice to proceed e-mail dated August 5, 2019 by accepting our Proposal No. 1140449299 dated February 27, 2019. We appreciate this opportunity to be of service to you. If you have any questions regarding the report or if we can be of further service to you, please call us. Very truly yours, GEOTEST ENGINEERING, INC. TBPE Registration No. F-410 r E of TF�y� h +► . 12 12 r Naresh Kolli, P.E. 'N••••• ... �... ARES .. Project Manger ........ ..... ..t NK/KMP/ego 10928 ; � Copies Submitted: (1-pdf) �`°s��NS.oNN.'_r• PC38\Geotechnical\1140246101 F.doc , ,ss,, :ON LEA" TABLE OF CONTENTS Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1 1.0 INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 Project Description 3 1.2 Purpose and Scope 3 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION 5 3.0 LABORATORY TESTS 6 4.0 GENERAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 7 4.1 Soil Stratigraphy 7 4.2 General Fault Information 7 4.3 Soil Stratigraphy 7 4.4 Water Level 8 4.5 Potential Vertical Rise(PVR) 9 5.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS 10 5.1 Proposed Ground Storage Tank 10 5.1.1 Foundation Type, Depth and Allowable Bearing Pressure 10 5.1.2 Subgrade Preparation 10 5.1.3 Ring Wall Foundation 11 5.1.4 Foundation Settlement 12 5.1.5 Foundation Construction 13 5.1.6 Filling Test 14 5.1.7 Performance Monitoring 14 5.2 Diesel Fuel Generator 14 5.2.1 Foundation Type, Depth and Allowable Bearing Pressure 14 5.2.2 Foundation Settlement 15 5.3 Site Preparation and Structural Fill Requirements 15 5.4 Proposed Yard Piping 16 5.4.1 Trench Excavation 16 ( 5.4.1.1 Geotechnical Parameters 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 5.4.1.2 Excavation Stability 16 5.4.2 Groundwater Control 18 5.4.3 Bedding and Backfill for Utilities 18 5.5 Pavement Recommendations 19 6.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 21 6.1 Foundation Excavation and Construction 21 6.2 Water Level Control 21 7.0 PROVISIONS 23 ILLUSTRATIONS Figure Vicinity Map 1 Plan of Borings 2 Boring Log Profile 3 Symbols and Abbreviations Used on Boring Log Profile 4 Excavation Support Earth Pressures 5.1 and 5.2 Stability of Bottom for Braced Cut 6 TABLES Table Summary of Boring Information 1 Geotechnical Design Parameter Summary—Open-Cut Excavation 2 APPENDIX A Figure Log of Borings A-1 thru A-4 Symbol and Terms Used on Boring Logs A-5 APPENDIX B Figure Grain Size Distribution Curves B-1 Consolidation Test Results B-2 and B-3 L Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Geotest Engineering, Inc. (Geotest) is pleased to present the results of the geotechnical investigation performed for the proposed Southdown groundwater Plant Ground Storage Tank(GST) Replacement for KIT Professionals,Inc. This study was authorized through your notice to proceed e-mail dated August 5, 2019 by accepting our proposal No. 1140449299 dated February 27, 2019. The proposed improvements to the existing Southdown Water plant located in City of Pearland,Texas includes construction of a new 400,000 gallon welded steel storage tank,a 450 kW diesel fuel generator, associated yard piping and miscellaneous site paving, and demolition of existing bolted steel Ground Storage Tank (GST) and hydro tanks. Based on the information provided, we understand that the inner diameter of the proposed steel ground storage tank is approximately 47.5 feet,and side wall depth is approximately 32.2 feet. The maximum depth of the proposed yard piping is about 5 feet. L This study included drilling and sampling one (1) soil boring to a depth of 50 feet at the center of GST, two (2) soil borings each to a depth of 30 feet along the anticipated perimeter, and one (1) soil boring to a depth of 20 diesel fuel generator location, performing laboratory tests, performing engineering analyses and developing geotechnical recommendations and preparing a geotechnical report. The principal findings and conclusions developed from this investigation are summarized as follows: • Based on the available information from U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) Maps and information contained in Geotest Library relating to geologic faults, no known documented faults cross the project area. The nearest documented fault is the Mykawa fault, which is located approximately 3 miles east of the project site. Hence, a Phase I Geological Fault Study may not be warranted for this project. 1 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas • The surficial soils below the existing grade predominantly consists of cohesive soils to the explored depths of 20 to 50 feet, except in boring BH-2. In boring BH-2, cohesionless soils consisting loose to very dense gray and brown silty sand was encountered at depths ranging from 2 to 8 feet and 38 to 45 feet below the existing grade. The cohesive soils consist of stiff to hard gray, dark gray, gray and brown, yellowish brown and gray and reddish-brown fat clay, fat clay with sand, lean clay and silty clay with sand. Fill material consisting of very stiff to hard gray, dark gray and brown fat clay and fat clay with sand with calcareous and ferrous nodules, and grass roots was encountered to depths of 2 to 4 feet in borings BH-1 through BH-3. • Free water was first encountered during drilling in borings BH-2 and BH-4 at depths ranging from 19 to 25 feet. The water level,measured 15 minutes after free water was first encountered, was at depths ranging from 12.7 to 16.9 feet in these borings. No water was encountered in borings BH-1 and BH-3 during drilling. The water level measured at depths ranging from 7.3 to 10 feet in borings BH-1 through BH-3,24 hours after completion of drilling. • The foundation recommendations for the proposed GST, diesel fuel generator, associated yard piping and concrete paving are presented in Section 5.0 of this report. • The foundation excavation and groundwater control are provided under Construction Considerations in Section 6.0 of this report. 2 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Project Description The proposed improvements to the existing Southdown Water plant located in City of Pearland,Texas includes construction of a new 400,000 gallon welded steel storage tank,a 450 kW diesel fuel generator, associated yard piping and miscellaneous site paving, and demolition of existing bolted steel Ground Storage Tank (GST) and hydro tanks. Based on the information provided, we understand that the inner diameter of the proposed steel pound storage tank is approximately 47.5 feet,and side wall depth is approximately 32.2 feet. The maximum depth of the proposed yard piping is about 5 feet. A Vicinity Map is presented on Figure 1. 1.2 Purpose and Scope The purposes of this investigation are to explore the subsurface conditions for the proposed improvements and to develop geotechnical recommendations pertinent to the design and construction of the proposed ground storage tank replacement. The scope of work consisted of the following tasks: • Drilled and sampled one(1)soil boring to a depth of 50 feet at the GST center,and two (2)soil borings each to a depth of 30 feet equally spaced along the anticipated perimeter of the tank foundation, and one (1) soil boring to a depth of 20 diesel fuel generator location. • Performed appropriate laboratory tests including consolidation tests on selected representative soil samples to determine the engineering properties of the soils and to select design soil parameters and consolidation characteristics of the soils. L 3 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas • Performed engineering analyses to develop the geotechnical recommendations for the �+ ground storage tank and proposed improvements. • Prepared a geotechnical investigations report including field and laboratory data, and engineering recommendations as outlined above. 4 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION Subsurface conditions were explored by drilling and sampling four (4) soil borings designated as BH-1 through BH-4, to depths ranging from 20 to 50 feet. The borings were drilled with a tractor mounted rotary drilling rig. The approximate locations of borings are shown on Figure 2, Plan of Borings. The survey information (Northing, Easting and ground surface elevation) was provided to us by KIT Professionals. The summary of boring information is presented in Table 1. Samples were obtained continuously to 20-foot depth and at 5-foot intervals thereafter. Samples of cohesive soils were obtained with a 3-inch diameter thin-walled tube sampler in general accordance with ASTM D1587 and cohesionless soils were sampled with a 2-inch split-barrel sampler in according with ASTM D1586. Each sample was removed from the sampler in the field, carefully examined and logged by an experienced soils technician. Suitable portions of each sample were sealed and packaged for transportation to Geotest's laboratory. The shear strength of cohesive soil samples was estimated by use of a calibrated pocket penetrometer in the field. All the borings were grouted with cement-bentonite grout after completion of drilling and obtaining water level measurements, if any. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered in the borings are given on the boring logs presented on Figures A-1 through A-4 in Appendix A. A key to the symbols and terms used on the boring logs is given on Figure A-5 in Appendix A. Water level observations were made at each boring location during field investigation. The results of these observations are noted on the boring logs. L 5 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 3.0 LABORATORY TESTS The laboratory testing program was designed to evaluate the pertinent physical properties, and shear strength and consolidation characteristics of the subsurface soils. Classification tests were performed on selected samples to aid in soil classification. The undrained shear strength of selected cohesive samples was estimated by unconsolidated- undrained(UU)triaxial compression(ASTM D2850)tests. The results of UU triaxial compression tests are plotted on the boring logs as solid circles. The shear strength of cohesive samples was measured in the field with a calibrated hand pocket penetrometer and also in the laboratory with a Torvane. The shear strength values obtained from the penetrometer and Torvane are plotted on the boring logs as open circles and triangles, respectively. Measurements of moisture content and dry unit weight were taken for each UU triaxial compression test samples. Moisture content(ASTM D2216)measurements were also made on other samples to define the moisture profile at each boring location. The liquid and plastic limit tests (ASTM D4318)and percent passing No.200 sieves(ASTM D1140)were performed on appropriate samples. Sieve analysis (ASTM D6913) tests were performed on selected samples. Two (2) one-dimensional consolidation tests, with a hysteresis loop and a measured final rebound, were performed on selected samples in accordance with ASTM D2435. The results of these and other applicable classification tests are plotted or summarized on the boring logs presented on Figures A-1 through A-4 in Appendix A. The grain size distribution curves are presented on Figure B-1. Consolidation tests results are presented on Figures B-2 and B-3 in Appendix B. 6 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 4.0 GENERAL SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4.1 Site Geology Based on the Houston Sheet,Texas,Geologic Atlas of Texas(Bureau of Economic Geology, University of Texas, 1982),the project site is located within the Beaumont Formation. The clays and sands of the Beaumont Formation are over-consolidated as a result of desiccation from frequent rising and lowering of the sea level and the groundwater table. Consequently,clays of this formation have moderate to high shear strength and relatively low compressibility. The sands of the Beaumont Formation are typically very fine and often silty. There is evidence in the Houston area of the occurrence of cemented material (sandstone and siltstone) deposits within this formation. 4.2 General Fault Information A review of information in the Geotest library, relating to known surface and subsurface geologic faults in the general area of the project, was undertaken. The available information consisted of U.S.Geological Survey and NASA maps,open file reports and information contained in our files relating to geologic faults in the project area. Based on the available information from U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) Maps and information contained in Geotest Library relating to geologic faults, no known documented faults cross the project area. The nearest documented fault is the Mykawa faults, which is located approximately 3 miles east of the project site. Hence, a Phase I Geological Fault Study may not be warranted for this project. 4.3 Soil Stratigraphy The surficial soils below the existing grade predominantly consists of cohesive soils to the explored depths of 20 and 50 feet, except in boring BH-2. In boring BH-2, cohesionless soils L 7 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas consisting loose to very dense gray and brown silty sand was encountered to depths ranging from 2 to 8 feet and 38 to 45 feet below existing grade. The cohesive soils consist of stiff to hard gray, dark gray,gray and brown,yellowish brown and gray and reddish-brown fat clay,fat clay with sand,lean clay and silty clay with sand. Fill material consisting of very stiff to hard gray,dark gray and brown fat clay and fat clay with sand with calcareous and ferrous nodules,and grass roots was encountered to depths of 2 to 4 feet in borings BH-1 through BH-3. The fat clay and fat clay with sand are of high to very high plasticity with liquid limits ranging from 54 to 80 and plasticity indices ranging from 33 to 51. The lean clay and silty clay with sand are of low to high plasticity with liquid limits ranging from 23 to 45 and plasticity indices ranging from 5 to 26. The fines content(passing number 200 sieve)of fat clay and lean clay ranged from 85.6 to 97.8 percent. The fines content of the fat clay with sand and silty clay with sand ranged from 73.3 to 83.9 percent. The fines content of silty sand ranged from 13.8 to 33.1 percent. 4.4 Water Level Free water was first encountered during drilling in borings BH-2 and BH-4 at depths ranging from 19 to 25 feet. The water level measured 15 minutes after free water was first encountered was at depths ranging from 12.7 to 16.9 feet in these borings. No water was encountered in borings BH-1 and BH-3 during drilling. The water level measured at depths ranging from 7.3 to 10 feet in borings BH-1 through BH-3, 24 hours after completion of drilling. However,various environmental and man-made factors such as the amount of precipitation, changes in drainage and adjacent construction activities can substantially influence the depth of the water level. 8 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 4.5 Potential Vertical Rise(PVR) Design of the floor slab and shallow foundation systems for the proposed structures requires consideration of the potential surface heave of the site. Surface heave results from the volumetric expansion of soils as results of moisture absorption. Volumetric expansion of soils is a function of the type and amount of clay minerals and the physical state of soils (i.e., moisture content and density, or degree of overconsolidation). Just as soils are subjected to expansion, they may also experience shrinkage during periods of dry weather as moisture evaporation occurs at the ground surface and the water table in the ground lowers. Estimates of surface heave, or Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) were computed based on correlations of percent free swell with soil index properties,using TxDOT Test Method Tex-124-E' and methods proposed by Vijayvergiya and Ghazzaly(1973)2 and Vijayvergiya and Sullivan(1972)3 Based on soil plasticity, range of anticipated moisture content, total unit weight profile of the near surface soils at the site, we computed values of PVR that range from 3.3 to 3.5 inches. Since the initial physical state(i.e.,moisture content and density)of in-situ soils is the basis for computing the potential for further expansion and resulting ground surface heave,the actual PVR of the site will be highly dependent upon moisture regime of soils at the time of construction. Preserving the moisture contents of near surface very high plasticity clay soils is critical to reduce the potential for excessive surface heave. 1 Texas Department of Transportation,Manual of Testing Procedures,Volume 1,100-E Series,September 1995 2 Vijayvergiya,V.N.and Ghazzaly,0.,"Prediction of Swelling Potential for Natural Clays,"Proceedings,The 3rd International Conference on Expansive Soils,August 1973. 3 Vijayvergiya,V.N.and Sullivan,R.,"Simple Technique for Identifying Heave Potential,"Proceedings,Workshop on Expansive Clays and Shales in Highway Design and Construction,1972. 9 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 5.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS The proposed improvements to the existing Southdown Water plant located in City of Pearland, Texas, includes construction of a 400,000 gallon welded steel storage tank, a 450 kW diesel fuel generator, associated yard piping and miscellaneous site paving, and demolition of existing bolted steel GST and hydro tanks. Based on the information provided,we understand that the inner diameter of the proposed steel ground storage tank is approximately 47.5 feet,and side wall depth is approximately 32.2 feet. 5.1 Proposed Ground Storage Tank 5.1.1 Foundation Type, Depth and Allowable Bearing Pressure. Based on the subsurface conditions revealed by the borings BH-1 through BH-3,the surficial soils below the existing grade consists of high to very high plasticity fat clay and fat clay with sand fill soils,except in boring BH- 2. In boring BH-2 loose to medium dense silty sand was encountered at about 2 feet below existing J grade. Due to the high plasticity and varying moisture consistency of fat clay fill soils encountered at the surface, and to reduce the PVR, it is recommended to over-excavate 36 inches of existing high plasticity soils and replace the surficial soils with a select structural fill material. Alternately, the high plasticity clay subgrade may be stabilized with lime to an approximate depth of 18 inches. It is also recommended to stabilize cohesionless soils encountered near boring BH-2 with lime-fly ash or cement to provide a stable subgrade on which to construct the proposed GST. 5.1.2 Subgrade Preparation The subgrade preparation for the proposed tank floor should consist of stripping,proof-rolling,placement and compaction of select structural fill. The following procedures are recommended for the site preparation: Strip the surficial soils to a suitable depth to remove all surficial vegetation. In isolated areas where soft, compressible,or very loose soils are encountered,additional stripping may be required. 10 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas Stripping should extend to a minimum of 6 feet beyond the edge of the proposed tank pad. 1. After stripping,over-excavate and remove additional 36 inches of the existing fat clay fill soils, and to achieve grade from the tank foundation areas. The excavation should extend to at least 5 feet beyond the tank perimeter. The exposed surface should be proof-rolled with a minimum of 3 passes of a 30-ton pneumatic-tired roller or a partially loaded truck utilizing a tire pressure of approximately 90 psi. The purpose of the proof-rolling operation is to identify any underlying zones or pockets of soft/weak soils in order that these weak materials be removed and replaced with a suitable select structural fill material. 2. The excavated material should be replaced with select structural fill material placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 inches and should be compacted to at least 98 percent of maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D698. The moisture ( content of the structural fill material at the time of placement should be tested and fir► confirmed to be in compliance before the placement of the next lift. 3. The upper 12 inches of the select structural fill material should be stabilized with at least 5%of hydrated lime(by dry unit weight of soil). Lime stabilization of the upper 12 inches of select structural fill material should be performed in accordance with City of Pearland Technical Specifications Section 02335, "Subgrade." The actual percentage of lime should be determined by laboratory tests at the time of construction. 5.1.3 Ring Wall Foundation. Based on the subsurface conditions revealed by borings BH-1 through BH-3, the ground storage tank can be supported on grade with a reinforced concrete ring wall. The ring wall may be placed at least 4 feet below the existing ground surface on the natural stiff to very stiff fat clay. Silty sand as encountered in boring BH-2 should be stabilized with lime- fly ash or cement to provide a stable subgrade on which to construct the proposed GST. The ring wall should be designed for an allowable(net)bearing pressure of 3,250 psf for total load conditions I1 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas including loadings caused by eccentric loads, if any, and 2,200 psf for sustained load conditions, whichever results in a larger footing area. These values contain factors of safety of 2 and 3 for total and sustained loads, respectively. The ring wall should extend above the surrounding ground surface to provide a positive surface drainage. Once the finished subgrade is achieved, stabilization of the top 12 inches with 5 percent lime will enhance the water shedding ability. The concrete ring wall should be reinforced circumferentially against temperature and shrinkage and to resist the lateral pressure of the confined soils with its surcharge. The total horizontal force (P) on ring wall, in lbs. per linear ft. of wall, may be determined by the following equation: P= 0.5 h [(yw x H) + (y x 0.5h)] Where, yw= unit weight of water, 62.4 pcf y= average unit weight of soils inside the ring wall (recommended 125 pcf) VI) h=height of ringwall in feet H =height of tank wall in feet 5.1.4 Foundation Settlement. The settlement of a foundation for any structure depends on its size, shape,depth, and more particularly on the magnitude of the sustained load imposed at the base of the footing and on the compressibility of the foundation soils. Based on an estimated contact pressure of 2 ksf(based on a water height of 32.2 feet) and physical and strength properties of the soils and water level conditions, settlements were estimated for the ground storage tank foundation and are presented below. 12 `410 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas Elastic Settlement, Consolidation Total Location inches Settlement, Settlement, inches inches Center of the Tank 0.2 3.3 3.5 Edge of the Tank 0.1 1.6 1.7 Should the piping connections for the storage tank not be able to accommodate the estimated settlement,flexible pipe connections should be used to withstand the anticipated settlement. Further, other protective measures such as raising the bottom crown may be used to limit the differential settlement less than tolerable limits. It should be noted that the performance of the foundation system will be sensitive to construction quality as well as soil-structure interaction. Care should be taken to ensure that the soils at bearing depths are not disturbed during excavation operations. Actual settlements can vary as much as 20% of the estimated values. 5.1.5 Foundation Construction. When forming the foundation, the steel should be placed and the footing installed the same day of excavation. It is recommended that,the contractor verify the water level in the ground at the time of construction and provide an adequate dewatering system, where required in accordance with City of Pearland Technical Specifications Section 01564"Control of Ground Water and Surface Water." During construction, it is recommended that the footing excavation be inspected by a geotechnical engineer or experienced engineering technician or owner's representative prior to placing concrete. The excavation should be checked to verify that (a) the footing has been constructed to the specified dimensions and is placed at the correct depth and into appropriate stratum with adequate bearing capacity as recommended in this report,and(b)the loose cuttings,and any soft-compressible materials have been removed from the bottom of the excavation. A seal slab of lean concrete should be placed if concrete placement is delayed for more than 6 hours after Lexcavation or sooner if rain is forecasted. No footing concrete should be placed without the prior 13 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas approval of the Project Engineer or Owner's Representative. 5.1.6 Filling Test. It is recommended that the tank be filled in the stages of 25% full, 50% full, 75%full and then 100%full. Each stage should be left for a period of about 24 to 48 hours and the settlement should be monitored for each stage. After 100% full, the tank should remain filled with water for about 4 to 5 days. 5.1.7 Performance Monitoring. It is recommended that the performance of the foundation system be monitored whenever practical during the water testing. A minimum of four monitoring stations should be established on the edges of the footing and elevations be checked during initial water loading. If settlements are in excess of the expected magnitudes or if differential movements are higher than specified values,the geotechnical engineer should be consulted along with the tank manufacturer as to the next course of action. Geotest should be retained to assist you in the monitoring effort. 5.2 Diesel Fuel Generator ,a) 5.2.1 Foundation Type, Depth and Allowable Bearing Pressure. Based on the information provided,the proposed 450 kW diesel fuel generator may be supported on slab-on-grade foundation. The subsurface soils,as encountered in boring BH-4,consist of stiff to hard fat clay with sand and fat clay soils. Based on the plasticity characteristics and the physical state of the natural soils at this site, the surficial soil possesses very high potential for swell/shrinkage with moisture changes. Hence,it is recommended to remove the existing surficial soils to a depth of 24 inches and replace with properly compacted structural fill material. The structural fill should be placed in accordance with procedure mentioned in "Site Preparation and Structural Fill Requirements" section. After removal and replacement of the existing fill material,the generator may be supported on slab-on-grade foundation. The grade beams for the slab-on-grade foundation should be placed at a depth of at least 18 inches below the prepared subgrade and may be designed for an allowable(net)bearing pressure of 3,700 psf for total dead and live loads or 2,500 psf for dead and sustained live loads,whichever results in a larger 14 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas Lfoundation area. These allowable(net)bearing pressures contain safety factors of 2.0 for total loads of 3.0 for dead and sustained live loads, respectively. 5.2.2 Foundation Settlement. Depending upon the footing size and magnitude of the sustained footing pressure, some total and differential settlements should be anticipated due to consolidation of the foundation soils. It is believed that the footings designed in accordance with the above recommendations should experience small acceptable settlements. Small differential settlement may also result from variation in subsurface conditions across the site,loading conditions and construction procedures. 5.3 Site Preparation and Structural Fill Requirements After site clearing,stripping and grubbing to remove vegetation,trees and tree stumps(if any) and topsoil and performing over excavation to remove the existing fill and achieve grade as ( mentioned in the previous section. The exposed surface should be proof-rolled to detect excessively �r moist, soft or otherwise unsuitable soil conditions. Proof-rolling should be done after a suitable period of dry weather to avoid degrading otherwise acceptable subgrade. The select fill should consist of sandy lean clay or lean clay with a plasticity index between 8 and 20 and a liquid limit of less than 40. The onsite surficial high to very high plasticity fat clay do not meet the above criteria of select structural fill unless stabilized with sufficient lime. All excavated areas should be adequately protected from water seepage and surface water run-off and appropriate measures of providing positive surface drainage should be adopted to prevent ponding of water in and around the excavations. Additional measures, such as temporary ditches leading to a sump pit with pumps, may be provided to prevent softening of exposed soils due to ponding and seeping water. Excavations should be sloped, shored or braced in accordance with OSHA's excavation safety standard requirements. The finished grade around the tank should be properly graded to prevent ponding of water. ( 15 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 5.4 Proposed Yard Piping Based on the information provided,it is understood that the project also includes installation of yard piping associated with the proposed Southdown Groundwater Plant Improvements. It is our understanding that the maximum depth of the piping will be about 5 feet and will be installed by open cut method of construction. 5.4.1 Trench Excavation. The following subsections provide information for the design and construction of the proposed pipe lines that will be by installed by open cut method of construction. 5.4.1.1 Geotechnical Parameters. Based on the soil conditions revealed by the borings BH-1 through BH-4,geotechnical parameters were developed for the design of open cut construction for proposed yard piping. The design parameters are provided in Table 2. For design,the groundwater level should be assumed to exist at the ground surface. 5.4.1.2 Excavation Stability. The open excavation may be shored or laid back to a stable slope or supported by some other equivalent means used to provide safety for workers and adjacent structures,if any. The excavating operations should be in accordance with OSHA Standards, OSHA 2207, Subpart P, latest revision and the City of Pearland Technical Specification Section 01570, "Trench Safety System'. • Excavation Shallower Than 5 Feet—For excavations that are less than 5 feet, the need for protection should be evaluated by a competent person to examine the ground for any indication of ground movement or potential cave-in. When any indication of hazardous ground movement or potential cave-in is anticipated during construction, adequate protective system should be provided for all excavation even that if the excavations are shallower than 5 feet. 16 .id Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas • Excavations Deeper Than 5 Feet-Excavations that are deeper than 5 feet(if any)should be sloped, shored, sheeted, braced or laid back to a stable slope or supported by some other equivalent means or protection such that workers are not exposed to moving ground or cave-ins. The slopes and shoring should be in accordance with the trench safety requirements as per OSHA Standards. The following items provide design criteria for excavation stability. (i) OSHA Soil Type. Based on the soil conditions revealed by boring drilled for this study and assumed groundwater level at surface, OSHA soil type "C" should be used for determination of allowable maximum slope and/or the design of shoring along the alignment for full proposed depth of open excavation. For shoring deeper than 20 feet (if needed), an engineering evaluation is required and deeper soil borings will be needed. (ii) Excavation Support Earth Pressure. Based on the subsurface conditions indicated by our field investigation and laboratory testing results, excavation support earth pressure diagrams were developed and are presented on Figures 5.1 and 5.2. This pressure diagrams can be used for the design of temporary trench bracing. For a trench box, a lateral earth pressure resulting from an equivalent fluid with a unit weight of 92 pcf can be used. The effects of any surcharge load at the ground surface should be added to the computed lateral earth pressures. A surcharge load, q, will typically result in a lateral load equal to 0.5 q. The above value of equivalent fluid pressure is based on assumption that the groundwater level is near the ground surface,since these conditions may exist after a heavy rain or flooding. (iii) Bottom Stability. In braced cuts, if tight sheeting is terminated at the base of the cut,the bottom of the excavation can become unstable. The parameters that govern the stability of the excavation base are the soil shear strength and the differential 17 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas hydrostatic head between the groundwater level within the retained soils and the groundwater level at the interior of the trench excavation. For cut in cohesive soils, as predominantly encountered for the proposed excavation depths, the bottom stability can be evaluated as outlined on Figure 6. However, if cohesionless soils are encountered near the invert or 3 feet below the invert depth of pipelines, dewatering may be necessary to avoid bottom stability problems,if the excavation is planned after a heavy rainfall event. 5.4.2 Groundwater Control. Excavations for the proposed structures and pipe lines may encounter groundwater seepage to varying degrees depending upon the groundwater conditions at the time of construction and the location and depth of the trench. Based on the soil conditions identified in the boring,the excavations will be in cohesive soils,and cohesive soils with intermittent cohesionless soils. In general, for cohesive soils the groundwater if encountered may be managed by collection in excavation bottom sumps for pumped disposal. However, if granular (cohesionless) soils are encountered within 3 feet of invert depth, dewatering will be required. In such cases, water is typically controlled by vacuum wellpoints for excavations shallower than 15 feet. The dewatering system should be pumping well ahead of the time before excavation starts so that a steady state water level condition (at least 5 feet below the proposed excavation bottom) is achieved. It is recommended that the actual groundwater conditions should be verified by the contractor at the time of construction and that groundwater control should be performed in general accordance with the City of Pearland Technical Specification, Section 01578,"Trench Safety System." 5.4.3 Bedding and Backfill for Utilities. In general,excavation and backfill for the pipelines should be designed and constructed in accordance with the City of Pearland Technical Specification Section 02318, "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities." 18 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas 5.5 Pavement Recommendations The proposed improvements to Southdown Groundwater Plant also includes miscellaneous site paving. Preparation of Pavement Subgrade. Subgrade preparation for the proposed pavement should consist of stripping, proof-rolling and stabilization. The following procedures for subgrade preparation are recommended: 1. After removing clearing and grubbing, strip the surficial soils to a suitable depth to remove all surficial debris and vegetation and to achieve grade. In any isolated area where soft,compressible or very loose soils are encountered,additional stripping may be required. 2. The surface exposed after stripping should be proof-rolled with a minimum of 3 (110, passes of a 30-ton pneumatic-tired roller or a heavy loaded truck utilizing a tire pressure of approximately 90 psi. If rutting develops, the tire pressure should be reduced. The purpose of the proof rolling operation is to identify any underlying zones or pockets of soft soils and to remove such weak materials. 3. Based on the borings, the subgrade support soils consist of high plasticity fat clay soils. To accelerate the construction and provide stable subgrade on which to construct the pavement section, it is recommended that all the paved drive and parking areas be stabilized to a minimum depth of 6 inches with 5% (by dry unit weight of soil) lime. Following treatment, the subgrade material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D698, at a moisture content within 3 percent above the optimum moisture content. 19 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas After the subgrade is prepared as described above,the minimum recommended thickness of the proposed concrete paving is presented below: Type of Loads Rigid Pavement Heavy Loads 7" PCC (Heavy Truck traffic, 20,000 lbs) 6" Lime Stabilized Subgrade Medium Loads 6" PCC (Medium Truck and Heavy Use Driveways) 6" Lime Stabilized Subgrade Light Loads 5" PCC (Automobile Parking Areas) 6" Lime Stabilized Subgrade PCC = Portland cement Concrete HMAC = Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Note: Modulus of Rupture of Concrete, MR= 600 psi (assumed) For driveway areas and loading areas,we recommend that rigid pavement section be used. Large front-end trash loading dumpsters frequently impose heavier loads on pavements during loading. For such areas, we recommend a 7-inch thick reinforced concrete slab. 20 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas L 6.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 6.1 Foundation Excavation and Construction Whenever practical, excavations should be performed during dry weather. All excavated areas should be adequately protected from water seepage and surface water run-off with appropriate measures to prevent ponding of water in and around the excavations. Excavations should be properly sloped,shored,braced,or protected in accordance with OSHA's excavation safety standard, 29CFR Part 1926, Subpart P (Excavations and Trenches) Standards. It is recommended that temporary sides of the excavation be trimmed to slopes no steeper than 1 vertical to 1.5 horizontal. It is recommended that the footing excavation be inspected by a geotechnical engineer or experienced engineering technician or architect's or owner's representative prior to placing steel and concrete. The excavation should be checked to verify that(a)the footing has been constructed to the specified dimensions and is placed at the correct depth and into the appropriate stratum with adequate bearing capacity as recommended in this report, (b) the loose cuttings, and any soft- compressible materials have been removed from the bottom of the excavation,and(c)placement of concrete should be accomplished as soon as possible to prevent changes in the state of stress and caving of the foundation soils. A seal slab of lean concrete should be placed, if concrete placement is delayed for more than 6 hours after excavation or sooner if rain is forecasted. No footing concrete should be placed without the prior approval of the Project Engineer, Architect or Owner's Representative. 6.2 Water Level Control Excavations for the proposed structures and pipe lines may encounter groundwater seepage to varying degrees depending upon the groundwater conditions at the time of construction and the location and depth of the trench. Based on the soil conditions identified in the boring,the excavations will be in cor 21 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement City of Pearland, Texas cohesive soils,and cohesive soils with intermittent cohesionless soils. In general,for cohesive soils the ., groundwater if encountered may be managed by collection in excavation bottom sumps for pumped disposal. However, if granular (cohesionless) soils are encountered within 3 feet of invert depth, dewatering will be required. In such cases, water is typically controlled by vacuum wellpoints for excavations shallower than 15 feet. The dewatering system should be pumping well ahead of the time before excavation starts so that a steady state water level condition (at least 5 feet below the proposed excavation bottom) is achieved. It is recommended that the actual groundwater conditions should be verified by the contractor at the time of construction and that groundwater control should be performed in general accordance with the City of Pearland Technical Specification, Section 01578, "Trench Safety System." 22 Geotest Engineering, Inc. Report No. 1140246101 Southdown Groundwater Plant December 12, 2019 Ground Storage Tank Replacement ( City of Pearland, Texas 111r 7.0 PROVISIONS The subsurface conditions and the foundation recommendations information contained in this report are based on the test borings made at the time of drilling at specific locations. However,some variation in soil conditions may occur between the boring locations. Should any subsurface conditions other than those described in our boring logs be encountered, Geotest should be immediately notified so that further investigation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. The depth of the groundwater level can be expected to vary with environmental variations such as frequency and magnitude of rainfall. The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from subsurface explorations made at the time test borings were drilled at specific locations and the results of laboratory tests on selected soil samples from the test borings. The stratification lines on the log of borings represent the approximate boundaries between soil types;however,the transition between soil types may be more gradual than depicted. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of KIT Professionals, Inc. and City of Pearland,Texas. This report shall not be reproduced in whole or part without written permission of Geotest Engineering, Inc. and KIT Professionals, Inc. 23 .1) ILLUSTRATIONS Figure Vicinity Map 1 Plan of Borings 2 Boring Log Profile 3 Symbols and Abbreviations Used on Boring Log Profile 4 Excavation Support Earth Pressures 5.1 and 5.2 Stability of Bottom for Braced Cut 6 N O Z 0 ti To To Tomball Spring To CO Porter 0 s9 To 1960 119601 Waller ..... . Humble Cypresrs---�� tii—A�m 2901 / — it \_0 so . - ouston rTo tet ' C Katy IV —............., AISIMIBIPA 47. Virli To Pasadena 1093} 225 CI°dine Bellaire Tp '2' , PROJECT 90 SITE Ifir* Sugorland80 59 28 6 6 To Alvin VICINITY MAP (NOT TO SCALE) Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE 1 Job No. 1140246101 a N BELGRAVIA DR (50' ROW) (coNc PVMT) ROW 03 CONTROL BLDG (SEE DRAWING B-4 & E-8 FOR ENLARGED PLAN) 0 // 01 BH 1 6)BH 2 PROPOSED 400.00 GALLON WELDED STEEL STORAGE TANK (SEE DWG 1.1-1) // BH 3 // a WELDED STEEL GROUND STORAGE TANK 50,000 GALLONS FOR PROPOSED VALVE REPLACEMENTS AT BOOSTER PUMP STATION (SEE DWG M-2) m din '• • \ 4 . 1— 4. 4• 1 4e • 1_ I • e 4 . 16' UTILITY // 14 OH 4 PROP 450 KW GENERATOR 22.-4' ' 4. ♦4 EASEMENT PLAN OF BORINGS PROP CONC. PVMT UT O O w O 0 W 0 0 w O w 0 L_ Z--c— FIGURE 2 LEGEND Boring SITE CONTROL POINTS POINT NORTHING EASTING DESC A 13774109.23 3119265.35 CENTER OF PROP GST 8 13774224.84 3119253.83 NW CORNER OF GENERATOR BOREHOLES POINT NORTHING FASTING ELEVATION BH 1 13774108.28 3119242.57 54.13 BH 2 13774109.21 3119254.73 54.04 BH 3 13774110.54 3119289.11 54.18 BH 4 13774214,92 3119257.19 53.62 DESCRIPTION DATE DAN. CNN. PRELIMINARY ROT TOR CONSTRUCTION, 800040. OR PERUR PURPOSES. TOR RENEW ONLY. KE1171 O'CONNOR, P.E. 98331 BATE: 9/30/2019 KIT ProIesaionols, Inc. Consulting Engineers Tins Registration No. F-4991 [R KIT Professionals, Inc. Ergws a PW+nen a Carainctoralsen.r. 2000 W.Sam Hausbn Piny3. Sdie 1400 M01,10,, Teu. 77012 Pt0r.: U13)7634700. Fu: 713) 7e34747 TRPS Fm, Re0alnton 11o. F4 NGS City of Pearland, Texas SOUTHDOWN GROUNDWATER PLANT GROUND STORAGE TANK REPLACEMEN C-2 - OVERALL SITE PLAN Job No.t 105-1901 Dahl SEP 2019 Soaks H: 1"=20' Own M J. VILLARREAL CIkd MS. BUCK CAD FILEt O101,FNLL SITE PLAY 1333 NI NOI1VA313 N v n N .- N 1 I I I -1 W LC' J C W Q) O E0 (1) o N A o X v ft- Cl_ H. z CL w J C fY-0 O C M to N' J o a 1- i x z o U o U V O 0 O ot NJ CO Z 13 O N V1 S fN O - I � > > cc, _ O U_ N v a) i, 2 c 0.I '> 0 0 0 N L 0. C lU p 0 O .v tiD 0 U L v C OL o o O 0,; CD U•` O C N r•- _ 47 0ya_0� o c a� ayaNO O•LDn N VN vV1 I 0 U.. \ \ ,. \ C OL C > > > OD.,.. yC O tO 0 E°0 01c o•ov c. ..o - N 0 M NI' U NI' U U U vii U D a)"OOyO >~ cC0 CNI 0 o _ •�,.�.�.� �.� 0 a, 0 �/ / _ /L /✓/ /J / / ..r.�r.� Irl f� 0 N 0.5 ca O C O•`iii 0 `•0 ... ` . 6-1 �\ ' J I1 > U o > > V 000-8-c CO1)/ 2V1 2 o) Uv) OU21 O�r - y U> N D•O'O0.0Y O ino jD"- N> N alN� C N C°°O 0a y OE) >, Z 0 U o.O.ND I I I I I Q w 0 0 ow c D N N N N N 0oU00,0 U n N Z MOQNNt3+' w 1333 NI NOIIVA313 .N nvt0 Job No. 1140246101 Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE 3 O N SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ON BORING LOG PROFILE O 0 Z o LEGEND o M ,........ %.7 FAT CLAY LEAN CLAY SAND SILT Sondy FAT Sandy LEAN Silty CLAY CLAY CLAY ihi 1 000 .�. o0 000 . ... 16 IN Cloyey SAND Silty SAND Clayey SILT Sondy SILT GRAVEL FILL or MARL SANDSTONE or CALICHE or SILTSTONE --- ==� -'!'�.4��� d-�- �,T1� .1��, -- M• - :�' : .i'.iiiil SHALE or LIMESTONE ASPHALT CONCRETE BRICK SHELL BLACKBASE CLAYSTONE or HMAC **** .Q3r. Ul : ):%9 **I, 1 ,,• 0•» Depth of Water Depth of Woter ofter **** i ' l "" Encountered Completion of Boring SLAG PAVEMENT MUCK, PEAT RUBBLE During Drilling (for details see or LIGNITE or DEBRIS individuol boring log) ABBREVIATIONS USED FOR CONSISTENCY/DENSITY COHESIVE SOILS COHESIONLESS SOILS V/So : Very Soft V/Lo : Very Loose So : Soft Lo : Loose Fm : Firm S/Co : Slightly Compoct M/St : Medium Stiff Co : Compact St : Stiff M/De : Medium Dense V/St : Very Stiff De : Dense Hd : Hord V/De : Very Dense V/Hd : Very Hard Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE 4 0 �t q MIN a z H/41111 . P1 H COHESIVE Pa= H/2 -f- -� r r UMW H/4 EV r v 1-- Pq — TYPICAL SOIL PARAMETERS BRACED WALL See Table 2 for typical For yH/c s 4 values of soil parameters Pi =0.3y.'H P.=y. H=62.4H Pq=0.5q Where: yq'=Submerged unit weight of cohesive soil,pcf; yM=Unit weight of water,pcf; q =Surcharge load at surface,psf; P.=Lateral pressure,psf; Pi=Active earth pressure,psf; Pq=Horizontal pressure due to surcharge,psf; P�=Hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater,psf; H =Depth of braced excavation,feet c = Shear strength of cohesion soil,psf; EXCAVATION SUPPORT EARTH PRESSURE SUBMERGED COHESIVE SOIL Ge otest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE 5.1 q oN H/4 hilL d COHESIVE O -1- P1 Z e _ 0 COHESIONLESS 1111 or H SEMI-COHESIONLESS Pa_ H/2 + + COHESIVE H/4 • �- — Pw --I i^- P q---� TYPICAL SOIL PARAMETERS BRACED WALL See Table 2 for typical PI - 0.3 Y'avg values of soil parameters pW = Y, H - 62.4 H Pq - O.Sq Y ' Yc l d + YS' (e-d) + Yc' (H-e) avg H Yw = 62.4 pcf Where: = Submerged unit weight of cohesive soil, pcf 7s' = Submerged unit weight of cohesionless or semi-cohesionless soil, pcf; 7W = Unit weight of water, pcf; = Average submerged unit weight of soil, pcf q = Surcharge load at surface, psf; = Lateral pressure, psf; P, = Active earth pressure, psf; Pa = Horizontal pressure due to surcharge, psf: P,,. = Hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater, psf; H = Depth of braced excavation, feet EXCAVATION SUPPORT EARTH PRESSURE SUBMERGED COHESIVE SOIL INTERBEDDED WITH COHESIONLESS OR SEMI-COHESIONLESS SOIL Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE 5.2 0 CUT IN COHESIVE SOIL, N DEPTH OF COHESIVE SOIL UNLIMITED (T>0.7 Bd ) L ? L = LENGTH OF CUT ci Bd I q •- _ y ,c swab MEDIMid H Z 90° iP HI r • FAILURE SURFACE If sheeting terminates at base of cut: NcC Safety factor, Fs = yH + q Nc = Bearing capacity factor, which depends on dimensions of the excavation : Bd , L and H (use Nc from graph below) C = Undrained shear strength of clay in failure zone beneath and surrounding base of cut y = Unit weight of soil (see Table 2) q = Surface surcharge (assumed q=500 psf) If safety factor is less than 1.5, sheeting or soldier piles must be carried below the base of cut to insure stability - (see note) H1 Buried length Bd Z 5 feet Note : If soldier piles are used, the 2 center to center spacing should not exceed 3 times the width or Force on buried length, PH: diameter of soldier pile . 2 Bd If H1 >— — , PH = 0.7 (y HBd - 1.4CH - 7rCBd) in lbs/ linear foot 3 ✓2 2 Bd 1.4CH If H1 <— — , PH = 1.5H1 (y H - - rC) in lbs/ linear foot 3 ✓2 Bd 9 ...... 8 7 2 6 � 50 ' 1 2 ' 3 4 ' 5 STABILITY OF BOTTOM H/Bd FOR Caw For trench excavations BRACED CUT For square pit or circle shaft Geotest Engineering, /nc. FIGURE 6 L TABLES Table Summary of Boring Information 1 Geotechnical Design Parameter Summary—Open-Cut Excavation 2 L L TABLE 1 SUMMARY OF BORING INFORMATION Boring No. Boring Depth Grid Northing Grid Easting Elevation (feet) BH-1 30 13774108.28 3119242.57 54.13 BH-2 50 13774109.21 3119254.73 54.04 BH-3 30 13774110.54 3119289.11 54.18 BH-4 20 13774214.92 3119257.19 53.62 Note: Survey data are provided to us by KIT Professionals, Inc. L L TABLE 2 .1.010 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN PARAMETER SUMMARY OPEN-CUT EXCAVATION Boring Stratigraphic Range Wet Submerged Undrained Internal Nos. Unit of Unit Unit Cohesion, Friction Depths, Weight, Weight,y', psf Angle, ft. y, pcf tp,deg pcf BH-1 FILL 0-2 125 63 3,500 -- FILL/Cohesive 2-6 125 63 1,500 -- 6-12 130 65 2,500 -- 12-20 133 67 3,000 -- BH-2 FILL 0-2 120 58 2,000 -- Cohesionless 2-8 113 51 -- 29 Cohesive 8-10 133 67 1,800 -- 10-20 129 66 2,500 -- BH-3 FILL 0-2 122 61 2,500 -- Cohesive 2-4 122 61 1,000 -- 4-6 122 61 1,500 -- 6-20 133 66 2,000 -- BH-4 Cohesive 0-2 120 58 3,500 -- 2-6 121 59 1,500 -- 6-10 124 62 2,500 -- 10-14 124 62 4,000 -- 14-16 126 63 1,500 -- 16-20 126 63 2,500 -- i. Cohesive soils include fat clay,fat clay with sand,lean clay,and silty clay with sand. 2. Cohesionless soils include silty sand. 3. Fill soils include fat clay and fat clay with sand cor APPENDIX A Figure L. Log of Borings A-1 thru A-4 Symbol and Terms Used on Boring Logs A-5 L LOG OF BORING NO. BH-1 PROJECT : Southdown Water Plant Improvements PROJECT NO. : 1140246101 City of Pcarland, Texas 7-- LOCATION : N 13774108.28, E 3119242.57 COMPLETION DEPTH : 30.0 FT. See Plan of Borings (Figure 2) SURFACE ELEVATION : 54.13 FT. DATE : 08-08-19 0o 0 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, SAMPLER Shelby Tube/Split Spoon v-� z 1- a TSF Kce in> 0 w O HAND PENETROMETER t' DRY AUGER 0.0 TO 30.0 FT. ww . - w N� _' o w Z - p�^ 3 pr-' ' _ _ • UNCONFINED COMPRESSION i w WET ROTARY -- TO -- FT, a3 7N Za j' o UNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED _ 001. j <m a0 >- o TRIAXIAL COMPRESSION wZ > ,._E', o g `n w o DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL oN a o _, n g 0 TORVANE 54.1 O un- 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 r � FILL: very stiff to hard gray and brown fat clay 4 w/sand seams, calcareous 14.4 0 A I nodules and gross roots I -stiff to very stiff 2'-4' 93.4 93 34.9 ss 25 41 4► 50.1 y Stiff yellowish brown and gray FAT CLAY (CH) till -w/ferrous nodules and 31.9 ferrous stains 4'-12' -very stiff 6'-16' 32.1 v -w/colcoreous nodules 8'-14' 1• \ -gray and brown 10,-12' 94 21.5 61 30 31 -gray and reddish brown 94.3 99 31.7 80 29 51 12'-25' 27.4 'Ii!" 22.8 "Ii" -hard-ver 1 6'-18' stiff 18'-25' 99•4 21.7 59 24 35 Y 28.5IN -w/sand seams, ferrous \ nodules and ferrous stains 23'-25' 107 21.5 111111 - 29.1 25 NI \ Gray and brown LEAN CLAY (CL) w/sand seams -very stiff 28'-30' - 24. 31 \ 8G.9 19.4 45 21 24 liii" 111111 .______ 35 DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING : NO GROUNDWATER ENCOUNTERED DURING DRILLING. T.: WATER DEPTH AT 8.3 FT., HOLE OPEN TO 30.0 FT. ON 08-13-19. Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE A-1 LOG OF BORING NO. BH-2 PROJECT : Southdown Water Plant Improvements PROJECT NO. : 1140246101 City of Pearlond, Texas LOCATION : N 13774109.21, E 31 19254.73 COMPLETION DEPTH : 50.0 FT. See Plan of Borings (Figure 2) SURFACE ELEVATION : 54.04 FT. DATE : 08-08-19 no UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, SAMPLER Shelby Tube/Split Spoon ;o Z W = K TSF t<I i2a vAW c� 23� b\ W 0 HAND PENETROMETER Li w DRY AUGER : 0.0 TO 25.0 FT. 1-,w to_ w v, I-. o COLLJ a wa ft- ""LL oz , J = 0 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION zo WET ROTARY : 25.0 TO 50.0 FT. a 3 0 =v >Iv > <v za i- o c UNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED a �^ CO0w zo F TRIAXIAL COMPRESSION -i o DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL o_ CC o ,. o= A TORVANE ''' Dr a <cm z a 54.0- 0 Lai ul LL 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 FILL: very stiff dark gray 1ond brown fiat cloy w/sand 73.3 18.4 63 25 38 52.0 and roots ./- 0 A Gray SILTY SAND (SM) 13.8 6.7 -medium dense 4'-6' : -brown 4'-8' 10 20.1 ,v.,'. -loose 6'-8' ..••; V .%.:.1 8 23.0 46.0 \ Stiff to very stiff groy and brown LEAN CLAY (CL) 44.0-- 10 w/calcareous and ferrous _ 94.9 110 20.9 44 18 26 1 nodules, ferrous stains, 1 silt seams and sand seams 23.4 v \ Very stiff reddish brown and groy FAT CLAY (CH) w/colcoreous nodules 23.7 Ch -w/silt seams 10'-14' - 15 -very stiff to hard 14'-18' ' -w/ferrous nodules and 24.3 00 ferrous stains 14'-20' • -slickensided 18'-20' z3.s AO ?al \ 97.8 100 25.4 79 79 50 `� 2 �I 29.9 nn 1 26.0 \ Very stiff brown and groy LEAN CLAY (CL) - 3• w/colcoreous nodules and 89.7 104 19.6 30 15 15 Q� i silt seams - 21.0 - - - - 4 Soft to medium stiff reddish brown SILTY CLAY 19.0- 35 ' - WITH SAND (CL-ML) w/sand 78.6 23.9 23 18 5 a seams DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING : u: FREE WATER 1st ENCOUNTERED AT 25.0 FT. DURING DRILLING; AFTER 15.0 MIN. AT 12.7 FT. : WATER DEPTH AT 7.3 FT., HOLE OPEN TO 50.0 FT. ON 08-13-19. Continued on Figure A-2a - Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE A-2 LOG OF BORING NO. BH-2 Cont'd PROJECT : Southdown Water Plant Improvements PROJECT NO. : 1140246101 City of Peorlond, Texas LOCATION : N 13774109.21, E 31 19254.73 COMPLETION DEPTH : 50.0 FT. See Plon of Borings (Figure 2) SURFACE ELEVATION : 54.04 FT. DATE : 08-08-19 0_o a UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH. SAMPLER : Shelby Tube/Split Spoon ,_o a t., TSF ,_- < Z,J I K 0 X W Kce in> a Pt, V W Q HAND PENETROMETER ui w e) DRY AUGER : 0.0 TO 25.0 FT. LW « w N r I 0 W 0 - w a 3 (51-. ' 0 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION Pi E WET ROTARY 25.0 TO 50.0 FT. a 3 z 0 Z a 1- J 0 UNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED n g _-_— O u D a 0 - e- i TRIAXIAL COMPRESSION G m j 1- LJ o DESCRIPTION OF MATFRIAI- 9„: az % aU o g A TORVANE <w z a cr'hI. 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 19.0— 35 i ` Soft to medium stiff reddish brown SILTY CLAY I1stI WITH SAND (CL-ML) w/sand 16.0 1 seams t"1'.XVery dense brown SILTY SAND (SM) 60 33.1 24.6 - 40-. •:1 ,l' :L• 9.0— '• -- 60 22.3 45 Reddish brown and gray FAT CLAY (CH) Il —very stiff 48'-50' 4.0— 50' 28 97.1 24.2 66 25 41 - 55- - 60- - 65- - 70- DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING : V: FREE WATER 1st ENCOUNTERED AT 25.0 FT. DURING DRILLING; AFTER 15.0 MIN. AT 12.7 FT. :: WATER DEPTH AT 7.3 FT., HOLE OPEN TO 50.0 FT. ON 08-13-19. Geo test Engineering, Inc. FIGURE A-2o LOG OF BORING NO. BH-3 PROJECT : Southdown Water Plant Improvements PROJECT NO. : 1140246101 City of Pearland, Texas LOCATION : N 13774110.54, E 3119289.11 COMPLETION DEPTH : 30.0 FT See Plon of Borings (Figure 2) SURFACE ELEVATION : 54.18 FT. DATE : 08-08-19 .... Z� SAMPLER : ShelbyTube/Split S oon �o UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, FLa P .G u_ z W = La TSF La W w DRY AUGER : 0.0 TO 25.0 FT. 'i,�',w - L., - .- . o 0 HAND PENETROMETER w 0 a wa n_ 3� o� - � • UNCONFINED COMPRESSION o _ WET ROTARY : 25.0 TO 30.0 FT. a 3 o 1-o w s J I= 'a N CI) c,-1 cW.�N Da ao 0 U c� TRAALCOM.PRESSIO UNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED 41 1.0 O DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL zom az o aU o c, Cl) A TORVANE I-w z a. 54.2 0 �I- 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 r FILL: very stiff dark gray I4 fat clay w/sand ��� -w/grass roots 0'-2' 22.4 0 A I -stiff w/ferrous nodules 2'-4' - 50.2 �♦ 34. 0Ch Stiff gray and yellowish brown FAT CLAY (CH) w/calcoreous and ferrous 90'4 94 29.5 /4 2/ 47IL nodules -very stiff 6'-16' 28.8 2 7 107 24.1 IN■ • \ -reddish brown and gray 10'-20' 94.5 21.6 54 21 33 A.) -w/silt seams 14'-16' 23.1 6 -hard 16'-18' 24.7 -very stiff 18'-20' 25.4 Cb 7 7.2 El • .31.2 Very stiff yellowish brown and gray LEAN CLAY (CL) \ -w/calcareous nodules 85.6 112 18.9 45 19 26 Al 23'-25' -hard gray and brown w/silt seams 28'-30' • 24.2 30 \ 20.3 TO 3 .ff DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING NO GROUNDWATER ENCOUNTERED DURING DRILLING. T. : WATER DEPTH AT 10.0 FT., HOLE OPEN TO 30.0 FT. ON 08-13-19. Ceotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE A-3 LOG OF BORING NO. BH-4 PROJECT : Southdown Water Plant Improvements PROJECT NO. : 1140246101 City of Pearland, Texas LOCATION : N 13774214.92, E 3119257.19 COMPLETION DEPTH : 20.0 FT. See Plan of Borings (Figure 2) SURFACE ELEVATION : 53.62 FT. DATE : 08-08-19 <2o 0 UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, SAMPLER : Shelby Tube/Split Spoon o - i TSF w , w> c� _) bs, w O BAND PENETROMETER 41 w _j w DRY AUGER : 0.0 TO 20.0 FT. will ole-i_ w w� 12 0 LAJ m -J z a 3 O i- 5 M r 0 UNCONFINED COMPRESSION WET ROTARY : -- TO -- FT. a^ -o L-am o = >. a oio zi., ZQ �Z 0 UNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED .- N 0 _- O w a o O TRIAXIAL COMPRESSION a a �m 7C K= 5 w wo DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL �z� WC:_ o ¢� a g L TORVANE ' Fw z a enI-- 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 53.6- 0 Very stiff to hard dark ray FAT CLAY WITH SAND - 51.6-- (CH) w/roots and sand 83.9 20.3 72 28 4 On \ seams r Stiff dark gray FAT CLAY 90.1 96 25.7 78 28 50 AI (CH) w/colcareous and ferrous nodules and ferrous stains 31.9 -very stiff 6'-10' -groy and yellowish brown 6'-12' 93.3 29.7 76 29 47 CSI - t• \ -hard 10'-14' 28.7 A 22.5 GL 20.8 ch 39.6 Stiff brown and groy LEAN - 1 CLAY (CL) w/silt seams and - 37.6 t calcareous nodules 97.6 20.7 33 16 17 0 r ----- Very stiff reddish brown and gray FAT CLAY (CH) 26.7 Qr\ w/ferrous nodules and ferrous stains 33.6- 20 28.5 - - 25 - 30- ------ - o-- 35- DEPTH TO WATER IN BORING : g: FREE WATER 1st ENCOUNTERED AT 19.0 FT. DURING DRILLING: AFTER 15.0 MIN. AT 16.9 FT. HOLE OPEN 70 20.0 FT. AT END OF DRILLING. Geo test Engineering, Inc. FIGURE A-4 SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BORING LOGS SOIL TYPES SAMPLER TYPES (SHOWN IN SYMBOL COLUMN) (SHOWN IN SAMPLES COLUMN) goo O Asphaltic Fill Gravel Sand SILT FAT LEAN Sandy Pitcher Nx Shelby Piston Split No Auger Concrete CLAY CLAY LEAN Barrel Core Tube Spoon Recovery Predominant type shown heavy CLAY TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OR CONDITION Basic Soil Type Density or Standard'Penetration Unconfined Compressive Consistency Resistance, (1) Strength (q„), (2) Blows/ft. Tons/sq. ft. Cohesionless Very loose Less than 4 Not applicable Loose 4 to <10 Not applicable Medium dense 10 to <30 Not applicable Dense 30 to <50 Not applicable Very dense 50 or greater Not applicable Cohesive Very soft Less than 2 Less than 0.25 Soft 2 to <4 0.25 to <0.5 Firm/Medium stiff 4 to <8 0.5 to <1.0 Stiff 8 to <15 1.0 to <2.0 Very stiff 15 to <30 2.0 to <4.0 Hard 30 or greater 4 or greater (1) Number of blows from 140-lb. weight falling 30-in. to drive 2-in. OD, 1-3/8-in. ID, split barrel sampler(ASTM D1586) (2) qu may also be approximated using a pocket penetrometer TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL STRUCTURE Parting: -paper thin in size Seam: -1/8" to 3" thick Layer: -greater than 3" Slickensided - having inclined planes of weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance. Fissured - containing shrinkage cracks, frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually more or less vertical. Laminated - composed of thin layers of varying color and texture. Interbedded - composed of alternate layers of different soil types. Calcareous -containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate. Well graded - having wide range in grain sizes and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes. Poorly graded - predominantly of one grain size, or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing. Flocculated - pertaining to cohesive soils that exhibit a loose knit or flakey structure. Ceotest Engineering, Inc. FIGUREA-5 APPENDIX B Figure cGrain Size Distribution Curves B-1 Consolidation Test Results B-2 and B-3 L 1H013M A9 2l3Si1b08 1N302l3d O 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 O O 0 O (-3(13 N E co O vt o0 O .-O d' v6i OO S oE .-.4- Z E .-00 N .0 )- M - 0 -, U O O O a 0 O C- 0 _J U) 'o W o O to N- ` -O L D o — 'i. U "_ _0— (I) 0 Z O -- ' a' U O v W H _T 0• I- d N w O J O C �� U o 3 CO W o Z w > V) g O >s-C3 (_n I W W N C Q VI O N J 0 o 'h Na , a L LI < E a of Z Q ° a� V) z Z N Q N O a N m H .3o N a Z o — -. I • O•O Q. d'st Q' cC- w r` I I 00 0 00 oto_ N00 to0 ve- =.-Id- J N%:1- O C.) MZ I I c Z�IcC.- 0 (1)(/) !Z N a.-k\e- J Z W Z w Q — Onia110- 0 N N !Y Z • I I O Zi -~ 0OZ mm N CO 0• CC-r-- a0 0 a N.-• 0 Z • %ln w N ,.1— w 1 % LIFJ O 00 o 0 to0 0 0 0 0 0 1H0I3M A8 213NI3 1N3083d Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE B-1 Project: Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement Boring No.: BH-1 Sample No.: 5 Depth (ft): 8-10 o Description: Brown and Gray Fat Clay (CH) e = 0.749 0 C = 0.272 Moisture Content(%): 22 Liquid Limit: 61 Specific Gravity: 2.73 C = 0.061 Dry Unit Weight (pcf): 94 Plasticity Index: 31 P = 7.0 ksf 0.900 I • 0.800 I - 0.700 4"1444 11\ � I ° 0.600 0.500 0.400 1 • 0.300 - 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 VERTICAL PRESSURE,P,ksf CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS ASTM D2435 Geotest Engineering, Inc. - FIGURE B-2 Project: Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement Boring No.: BH-2 Sample No.: 12 Depth (ft): 28-30 o Description: Brown and Gray Lean Clay (CL) e = 0.590 0 C = 0.171 z Moisture Content(%): 20 Liquid Limit: 30 Specific Gravity: 2.68 Cc = 0.037 Dry Unit Weight(pcf): 104 Plasticity Index: 15 P = 8.4 ksf c 0.600 - I 0.550 I - i 0.500 `rrr � I E 0 0.450 0: 0 0.400 � I 0.350 I I 0.300 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 VERTICAL PRESSURE,P,ksf CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS ASTM D2435 Geotest Engineering, Inc. FIGURE B-3 c LOFLIN ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES, INC. August 24, 2019 Lotus Environmental Houston Texas Attention: Mr. Raj Vadlamudi Subject: Report of Asbestos and Lead Paint Testing Greater Pearland Water Authority 1007 East Belgravia—Pearland, TX Loftin Environmental Services Project No. 200-19-317 Dear Mr. Vadlamudi, Loflin Environmental Services, Inc. (LOFLIN) has completed a limited asbestos survey at the above referenced location. The purpose of this work was to identify the presence and quantity of asbestos containing materials within selected areas of the facility and assess those that may be disturbed by renovation and demolition activities. In addition, paint coatings on selected plant components were sampled and analyzed for lead content. This work was performed on August 1, 2019, by James Murray, CIH, CSP. Areas assessed included the two bullet tanks and associated pedestal and piping. Below is a summary of findings. Asbestos Visual observation of the affected areas revealed hatch and valve gaskets as the only suspect asbestos containing materials. Representative samples of there materials were collected and submitted to LOFLIN's Houston laboratory for asbestos analysis. All were analyzed using Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) coupled with dispersion staining in accordance with EPA's "Method For The Determination Of Asbestos In Bulk Samples"EPA 600/R-93/116, July 1993. Location Material Result Bullet Tank Hatch Gasket None Detected Upright Tank Gasket None Detected Upright Tank Hatch Gasket None Detected Pump Gasket None Detected Based on laboratory analysis, none of the sampled materials were found to be asbestos containing. Attached is a table of laboratory results. 2020 Montrose ♦ Houston,Texas 77006 ♦ (713)521-3300 • FAX (713)523-0829 Lead Paint Samples from affected painted components were collected and submitted to J3 Resources for , lead content analysis. Below is a summary of results. Location Color Lead Content West Bullet Tank White 0.0053% Bullet Tank Pedestal White 0.0052% West Bullet Tank White 0.0059% Valve N. of Large Tank Blue 0.0059% Pump N. of Large Tank Blue <0.005% Based on test results, four of the paint samples were found to have lead content greater than the laboratory analytical detection limit of 0.005%. Test results indicated that certain coatings were found to contain some level of lead. To comply with the OSHA Lead Standard for the Construction Industry (29CFR 1926.62), any construction activities (including sanding and demolition) must be initiated by workers wearing respiratory protection and who have already received proper training in the handling of lead contaminated materials. Personal monitoring to measure these employees' exposures to airborne lead should be performed during this initial handling to determine compliance with the OSHA PEL for airborne lead. Additional work on surfaces painted with lead containing paints can then be performed in accordance with the results of the personal lead exposure monitoring. If personal exposures do not exceed OSHA limits, continued use of trained personnel with personal protective equipment may not be necessary. If exposures exceed established OSHA limits, additional protective measures may be warranted. Attached are laboratory reports and photographic documentation. Loflin Environmental Services, Inc. appreciates this opportunity to provide these testing services. If you have any questions concerning this report or the work performed please contact us. Sincerely, Loflin Environmental Services, Inc. James Murray, CIH, CSP Vice President DSHS 10-5776 2020 Montrose ♦ Houston,Texas 77006 ♦ (713)521-3300 ♦ FAX (713)523-0829 cr d ,i; s ,, f0... a r s_ m' . ° • u '� 1 .Fi,. ,. - q 0'7 ' '' '.. ' ' t .:_ Photo 1: Bullet tank white paint 0.0053%lead and pedestal paint 0.0052%lead. • Y v •.. tl i i` J., i• ! 9 lit gg 4 10/001°4b' N*._ , _ ., _4 \ ,,,, _ ---._„...A10, ii K., Photo 2: Valve at north side of large tank blue paint 0.0059%lead. cw 2020 Montrose ♦ Houston,Texas 77006 ♦ (713)521-3300 • FAX (713)523-0829 ''y r `W' A 41/4 '_ Photo 1: Pump north of large tank blue paint<0.005%lead. J 2020 Montrose ♦ Houston,Texas 77006 ♦ (713)521-3300 ♦ FAX (713)523-0829 ASBESTOS TESTING LABORATORY REPORT Greater Pearland Water Authority 1007 East Belgravia Pearland, TX August 1, 2019 2020 Montrose ♦ Houston,Texas 77006 ♦ (713)521-3300 ♦ FAX (713)523-0829 Lollh Environmental Serv/oeB, Inc.2020 Montrose Blvd., Houston, Texas 77006 I (713)521-3300 Fax(713)523-0829 47 Report of Bulk Sample Analysis LOFLMI For Asbestos Identification Polarized Light Microscopy(PLM) NVLAP 10-2044 EPA 600/R-93/116, July 1994 TDH Lab 30-0031 Client:LOTUS ENVIRONMENTAL Client Address: Date Received.08/06/2019 Project No:200-19-317 Date Analyzed:08/06/2019 Project Name: 1007 E. BELGRAVIA, PEARLAND, TX Page 1 of 1 Lab Field Sample Sample Asbestos Additional Number Number Description Location Detected Constituents (Components) L307692 01 BLACK, RUBBERY NONE DETECTED OTHER HOMOGENEOUS (GASKET) L307693 02 WHITE, GUMMY NONE DETECTED OTHER HOMOGENEOUS (GASKET) L307694 03 RED, GUMMY NONE DETECTED OTHER HOMOGENEOUS (GASKET) L307695 04 BLUE, FIBROUS NONE DETECTED 30%CELLULOSE HOMOGENEOUS OTHER (GASKET) I fif 16 Laboratory Manager *Asbestos-containing materials-The type and percentage of various fibrous components was determined by the microscopist in accordance with U.S.Environmental Protection Agency "Method For The Determination Of Asbestos In Bulk Samples"EPA/600/R-93/116,July 1993. cyn;partures from the test method: Nate e above test report must not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any other agency of the U.S. Government. Analysis results on this test report pertain only to those materials tested. Disclaimers: Asbestos content is quantified using Calibrated Visual Estimate. PLM analysis has been known to be inaccurate for materials with low concentrations of asbestos. Negative PLM results cannot be guaranteed. LES recommends using TEM analysis for materials reported as<1%or none detected. This report may not be reproduced,except in full, without written approval by LES LEAD PAINT TESTING LABORATORY REPORT Greater Pearland Water Authority 1007 East Belgravia Pearland, TX August 1, 2019 2020 Montrose ♦ Houston,Texas 77006 ♦ (713)521-3300 ♦ FAX (713)523-0829 J3 Resources, Inc. 1 113 3113 Red Bluff Road Pasadena, Texas 77503 Phone:(713)290-0223—Fax: (832)831-5669 resources, inc. j3resources.com Lead in Paint Performed by Flame AA — USEPA SW846 7420/3050B Jim Murray J3 Order#: JH 19112832 Loftin Environmental Services, Inc. Project#: N/A 2020 Montrose Suite 100 Receipt Date: 6-Aug-2019 Houston,TX 77006 Analysis Date: 9-Aug-2019 Report Date: 9-Aug-2019 GPWA-East Belgravia SAMPLE PAINT LEAD LEAD ID COLOR CONCENTRATION CONCENTRATION (mg/kg) (%) LP-01 West Tank 53 0.0053% LP-02 Pedastal 52 0.0052% LP-03 East Tank 59 0.0059% LP-04 Valve at Tank 59 0.0059% LP-05 Pump <50 <0.005% L Reporting Limit=50.0 mg/kg N/A =Not Applicable INS=Insufficient Sample Weight NS=Not Submitted Analyst: Korry Huddleston Scott Ward,Ph.D. Lab Director This report relates only to the samples submitted. The analysis has been conducted according to the method(s)listed above. Blank corrections are not applied to data unless requested by the customer. This report is for the exclusive use of the addressed customer and shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval by J3 Resources,Inc.(J3).Unless otherwise noted,all quality control samples performed within specifications established by the laboratory. IAB1157714 Page 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 • GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 0 04/2008 CITY OF PEARLAND SUM111[ARY OF WORK Section 01100 • SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A Work of the Contract is for the construction of: renovations to the Southdown Groundwater Plant. Remove and dispose of 129,000 gallon bolted storage tank and two (2) 20,000 gallon hydropneumatic tanks. Construct new 400,000 gallon welded steel storage tank. Remove and replace two (2) check valves and four(4) gate valves on booster pumps. Install adjustable frequency drives (AFDs) on three (3) booster pumps. Install new 450 kW generator. Work includes related sitework, yard piping, structural and electrical and instrumentation. All other items to be included with related bid items. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER 1111 A N/A] 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A N/A 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A Phase 1: Temporarly relocate air compressor. Install new adjustable frequency drives(AFDs)on existing booster pumps. Test and startup. B Phase 2: Demolish existing hydropneumatic storage tanks and abandoned bolted steet storage tank and related appurtenances. Phase 2 can not begin until Phase 1 is in place. C Phase 3: Construct new 400,000 gallon storage tank and related appurtenances. Install new 450 kW natural gas generator and related appurtenances. Test and startup. D Contractor to submit project schedule to Engineer & Owner for approval as specified in Section 01350—Submittals. E Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner as specified in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings. 08/2016 01 100 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 1.06 FUTURE WORK A N/AGO 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the site and Contractor's use of rights-of- way as specified in Section 01140-Contractor's Use of Premises. B Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities required for construction. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer. B Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 08/2016 01100-2 of 2 I CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 • CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2 Section 01730—Cutting&Patching 3 Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720—Field Surveying 6 Section 02980—Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770—Curbs, Curb& Gutter, &Headers 8 Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill,& Embankment Materials 9 Section 02922—Sodding 10 Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding • 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access,operations,and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement; trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements,at Contractor's cost,for temporary use of private properties,in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. 1. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use must be removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. • C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 01/2018 01140- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary 0 Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer. D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners,monuments or other demarcations disturbed,damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. • 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets;when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights-of-ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting&Patching. • G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01 140-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed (10 construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours,72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes or businesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact,who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. ® C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 —Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt,debris,scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers,signs,and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. 41) 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980— Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs,gutters,and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. D Level with bank sand or topsoil,conforming to Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill,& Embankment Materials,as approved by the Engineer. E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922—Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging. j F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved,or not designated to be paved,in accordance with Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. G Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 3 01/2018 01 140-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 • MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1.02 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300—Bid Proposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid • Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verify quantities. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only.Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal • shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.05 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision,labor,products,tools, equipment,plant,transportation,services,and incidentals;and erection,application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300—Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unit price. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. 05/1007 01200-2of3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a • specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading,hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 05/2007 01200-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 ® CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications, Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order, Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents C Other References: 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment(Data Quest Blue ® Book). Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient IDdata to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal with additions, • reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products,rented equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site,the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor- owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of a Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal,which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications.The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE • A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300- Bid Proposal , the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of • change,within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time-and-material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes,and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts,the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time,and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on-site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION • 02/2008 01290-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 • COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.03 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. • 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives,Consultants,Contractor,and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the ® Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule of Values, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including,but not limited to, Work Plans,Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, Construction Photographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payment, Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06"Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench Safety Program. 1.06 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's • Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings,and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. • 02/2008 01310-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda III item. F Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment, payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations,problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information, Requests for Proposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed • 3.0 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 0 02/2008 01310-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications, refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction Schedules 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: ® 1. Section 01310—Coordination &Meetings 2. Section 01630—Product Options&Substitutions 3. Section 01100—Summary of Work 4. Section 01380—Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction,resubmission and final review of all submittals.The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans,Technical • Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 01/2008 01350- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1. Re- Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix(i.e.,2A for first Re-Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re-Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10"Video". C Contractor's Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2"x 11",plain bond,white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts,Mobilization,Bonds,and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 01/2008 01350-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and • Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five (5) percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications,Change Orders,and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be,at a minimum,a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal. The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed IIIIConstruction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted,if approved by the Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations,each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components,these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope,these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased,when they are to be delivered,and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved,each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule(tabulation of the estimated monthly billings)for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction • Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re-submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 01/2008 01350-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700-General Conditions of Agreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan and schedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each Shop Drawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified as such. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale,and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 01/2008 01350-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data • 1. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard,submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words"or approved equal",submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04"Selection Options"and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre-Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer or Owner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. • 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification;one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A When specified in Technical Specification,submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 01/2008 01350-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or • product,but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380—Construction Photographs. 1. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 print directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One print shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction,take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: Two prints, color, matte finish; 3 x 5 inch size, mounted on 81/2 x 11-inch soft card stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch, or in plastic pockets in three-ring notebook. 3. Th photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. Location of the photograph, house number and street name. (This information may be shown on a chalk board in the photograph by a label on the mountings.) 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following411 a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side of street) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features(yard lights, shrubs, fences, trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO1, T02,T03, etc. 01/2008 01350-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.11 DESIGN MIXES • A When specified, submit design mixes for review. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02"Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each design mix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions,gradations,and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION • • 01/2008 01350- 7of6 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 • CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. • B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. C Prepare three(3)prints of each view and submit two(2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven(7)days of taking photographs. One(1)print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections,submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will be left. H With each submittal,include photographic negatives in protective envelopes,identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 111 01/2008 01380- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, and quality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD. B The photographs shall show on a non-elective chalkboard or white board,readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph,house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side of street). 3. House-walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fence, trees, etc.). • 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs and grass. E Identify each photograph with an applied label or rubber stamp on the back with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer(if a professional photographer is • used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs to be in plastic pockets and bound in three-ring notebook for easy access and viewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 01/2008 01380-2of3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.02 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS • A Following the completion of the Work,take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.03 PROGESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two(2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time-lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION • • 01/2008 01380-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219-0150 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street,N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 • 02/2008 01420- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 • 02/2008 01420-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS IP CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,TX 77581 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains,NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 IIFS Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth, MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 IllKaty,TX 77450 02/2008 01420-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 • Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin,TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East 11th Street Austin,TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association • 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas, TX 75234 • WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street—Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin,TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION • 4110 02/2008 01420-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL Section 01430 • CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner. • B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required by individual Technical Specifications. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment, operator training, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation,as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations • and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 01430- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required representative's services. The representative shall be subject to approval of Project • Manager. C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Submit report within one(1)day of observation to Project Manager for review. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 4111 02/2008 01430-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES Section 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections,tests,and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. • B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager,Engineer,and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION Cov 09/2009 01440- 1 of CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A Owner will select,employ,and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi-rigid sanitary sewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet density requirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 LABORATORY REPORTS • A The Engineer will receive 1 copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.04 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section j requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested;to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his own purposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION • 04/2008 01450-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.01 CONDUCTING TESTING • A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329,as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION • • 04/2008 01450-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01500 • TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the Work including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, field office, storage sheds and building, safety requirements,first aid equipment,fire protection,security measures,protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash,debris,and excavated material,pest and rodent control,water runoff and erosion control. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 00200—Instructions to Bidders Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01350—Submittals Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation Section 01100—Summary of Work • Section 01600—Material & Equipment Section 01570—Trench Safety System Section 01555—Traffic Control &Regulation Section 01720—Field Surveying Section 01563 —Tree&Plant Protection Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water Section 13730-Computer Equipment C Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland,Texas D Definitions: Underground Structures - sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Surface Structures - existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations • above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to buildings,tanks,walls,bridges,roads, dams, channels, open drainage,piping,poles, 12-2-2011 01500- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS wires, posts, signs,markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. II) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Work. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Technical Specifications. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer • required. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A Temporary Service Make arrangements with utility service companies for such temporary services as are necessary to construct the work and manage the site. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is Substantially Complete. Included are fuel,power,light,heat,and other utility services necessary for execution, completion,testing, and initial operation of the Work. B Water Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. For water to be drawn from public water supply,obtain special permit or license and • meter from the proper City officials. For facilities under construction, establish a 12-2-2011 01500-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS water/sewer billing account with City's Utility Billing Department.A deposit based on • rates established by latest ordinance will be required. For water drawn from fire hydrants,apply for and receive a construction water meter from City' Public Works Department. Identify specific location for construction water meter installation. Once installed,water meter may not be moved without notification of Public Works Department. Install backflow preventer on fire hydrant supply if not included in City provided meter. Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel. C Electricity and Lighting 1 Provide temporary electric power service in Contractor's name, as required for the prosecution of the Work, including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's equipment, or for any other use by Contractor or as necessary to maintain any of Owner's on-going operations as may continue on the site during any scheduled shutdown. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. 2 Provide permanent electric power service,in the Contractor's name,to the work or site as and when required by the schedule of the work to achieve Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. ® D Natural Gas Provide and pay for natural gas service to the work as and when required by the schedule to achieve Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. E Temporary Heat and Ventilation Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. F Telephone Provide emergency telephone service at the Project Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services. G Sanitary Facilities Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on the Project Site,in compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. Locate toilets on the Project Site near the • work and secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the Project Site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit-type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to lip cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewage and waste hauled off-site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. Control areas where sanitary facilities are located in conformance with Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 1.06 FIELD OFFICE A Provision of a Field Office and other specific temporary facilities as required in paragraph B below UNLESS otherwise stated in Section 00800 - Special Conditions of the Agreement,or Section 01100—Summary of Work. Provide for transportation,move-in,set-up,tie-down and,when project is complete,removal and move-out. The Contractor shall confirm location of office and other temporary facilities with Owner's Representative at Pre-Construction Meeting prior to delivery and set up. Location of temporary facilities shall be approved by the Owner's Representative by way of the submittal process. B. At a minimum, the Contractor's field office shall provide for, contain or serve to: provide a secured space for project administrative operations, periodic progress meetings,on-site storage for project files and plans,office space for CONTRACTOR's field supervisory personnel and provide a separate securable office space for OWNER's Representative including: meeting table and chairs, a single two drawer filing cabinet,a built-in drawing table and plan holders. Provide electric lighting and HVAC to the mobile office. 1. Field Office shall provide for, at a minimum, a high speed internet connection for use by Owner's Representative or Construction Manager as controlled by Paragraph A above. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Provide for storage of materials under the provisions of Section 01600— Material & Equipment. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A Contractor shall prepare, submit and follow a Safety Program that complies with federal, state, and local safety codes, statutes, and practices. Include in the Safety Program documented response to excavation, embankment, and trench safety requirements as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable federal,state and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Work. C Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act (Art. 5182a, V.C.S.) and 411 with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 12-2-2011 01500-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act, published in OSHA Standards -29 • CFR, Part 1926, and adopted by Secretary of Labor under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the Project Site under this Contract,and after such investigation or inspection,advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to Engineer within ten(10)days of occurrence. E Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination. Take immediate and appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first-aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment,in the Plans and Technical Specifications are obligations of the Contractor. • G Maintain required coordination with the local Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. 1.09 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians,hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit. B Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the Project Site whenever work is in progress. 1.10 FIRE PROTECTION A Fire Protection Standards. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements as well as those that may be established by Federal, State, or local governmental agencies. B. Comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 241, Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations. Provide portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10,Portable Fire Extinguishers,for each temporary building,and for every 3000 square feet of floor area of facilities under construction. • Locate portable fire extinguishers within 50 feet maximum from any point on the Project Site. 12-2-2011 01500-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C. Fire Prevention and Safety Measures. Prohibit smoking in hazardous areas. Post suitable warning signs in areas that are 410 continuously or intermittently hazardous. Use metal safety containers for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Do not store flammable or combustible liquids in or near stairways or exits. Maintain clear exits from all points within a structure. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A Protect all materials, equipment, and property associated with the Work from loss, theft,damage,and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner's property. B If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing as approved by Owner's Representative. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES A Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. These utilities are shown on the Plans at their approximate locations. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction, and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when j they conflict with the proposed Work. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Preventive Actions. Take precautions,provide programs, and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage. Take action to prevent damage, injury or loss, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Store apparatus,materials,supplies,and equipment in an orderly,safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or the Owner's operations. b. Provide suitable storage for materials that are subject to damage by exposure to weather,theft,breakage, or otherwise. c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. d. Frequently clean up refuse,rubbish,scrap materials,and debris caused by construction operations, keeping the Work safe and orderly. e. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. 12-2-2011 01500-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, • tools,materials or equipment,privately owned land except on easements provided for construction. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act,omission,neglect, or misconduct in execution of the Work by the Contractor, it shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. B Barricades and Warning Signals. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway, right-of-way, or public place, furnish and erect barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, and danger signals; provide watchmen;and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work.Conform to Section 01555—Traffic Control& Regulation. C Preserving Control Points Maintain permanent benchmarks,public or private elevation or property demarcation and control monumentation, or other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing,replace at no cost to the Owner,those monuments,property corners or other permanent demarcations that are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Section 01720—Field Surveying. ® D Tree and Plant Protection. Protect trees,shrubs,lawns,outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Plans,and in accordance with requirements of Section 01563—Tree &Plant Protection. E Protection of Underground and Surface Structures Known underground structures, including water, sewer, electric, and telephone services are shown on the Plans in accordance with the best information available,but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor is responsible for making Locate Calls. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility which is damaged,broken,or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. • If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents,the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the 12-2-2011 01500-7of10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury to underground and surface 411 structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports,Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties,or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures,pipelines,or utilities,give a minimum of five (5)working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operations reach and uncover the utility. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by the Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. 1.14 PROTECTION OF THE WORK Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed,prior to completion of the Work. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment,materials, and surfaces. 1.15 ROADS AND PARKING A Prevent interference with traffic and Owner operations on existing roads. B Minimize use of existing streets and driveways by construction traffic. C Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment,materials, and surfaces. D Construct and maintain temporary detours, ramps, and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work. E Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment 12-2-2011 01500- 8of10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS F Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site 111 space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. G Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment unnecessarily in existing parking areas. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B Comply with statutes,regulations,and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, PL 91- 190, Executive Order 11514. C Provide, install and maintain storm water runoff control including but not limited to temporary entrance, silt fencing, etc. as specified in Contract Documents. D Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Burning of rubbish,debris or waste materials is not permitted. 1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL 41109 A Provide methods,means,and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil,water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems in conformance with TPDES requirements and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. D Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. E Use equipment during construction that conforms to current federal, state, and local laws and regulations. 1.18 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of Project Site. • B Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the Project Site or adjoining properties. 12-2-2011 01500-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the va) greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to OSHA Standards- 29 CFR and in no case will noise levels be permitted which create a nuisance in the surrounding neighborhoods. B Conduct construction operations during daylight hours from 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. except as approved by Engineer. C Comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Codes of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment under the provisions of Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 1.21 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A Provide methods to control surface water,runoff,subsurface water,and water pumped from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Project Site, or adjoining properties in accordance with Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water and Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 12-2-2011 01500- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION Section 01505 • MOBILIZATION 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(Texas MUTCD) 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent(3%)of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items,as applicable: 1. Schedule of Values(Section 01350—Submittals) • 2. Trench Safety Program(Section 01570—Trench Safety System) 3. Construction Schedule (Section 01350—Submittals) 4. Pre-construction Photographs (Section 01380—Construction Photographs) 5. Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s)(Section 01580—Project Identification Signs) 6. Installation and acceptance of Field Office(Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7. Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements(Section 01565 - TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Installation of High Speed Internet Access(Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) D. Payment for 15%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. F. For contracts with a duration of less than 120 days,payment for the remaining tiftv 50%of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the items listed in B. and C. above,as applicable. 08/2018 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G. Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. • 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s)per Section 01580. The name,address and contact information of the general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described in Section 01580,part 1.03,D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION 0 • 08/2018 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS Section 01550 IIISTABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of erosion and sediment control for Stabilized Construction Exits used during construction and until final development of the Project site. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01565—TPDES Requirements 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT • A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required in this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on Geotextile fabric. C Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements in this Section,2.02"Course Aggregates". 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A Provide woven or non-woven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene,or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi any principal direction, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. • C Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack,mildew, and rot and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable life at a temperature range of 0°F to 120°F. 12/2015 01550- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS D Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc., Or-Equal. 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATES A Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone,gravel,concrete,crushed blast furnace slag,or a combination of these materials. Aggregate shall be composed of clean,hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings,salt,alkali,dirt,clay,loam,shale,soft or flaky materials,or organic and injurious matter. B Course aggregates shall be open graded with a size 3"to 6". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A The Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the construction,staging, parking, storage, and disposal areas to keep the street clean of mud carried by construction vehicle and equipment. Such erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil,other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within the Project Site until acceptance of the Work or until directed by the Engineer to remove and discard the existing system. Maintenance shall be performed routinely to remove soil build up or, as required by the Engineer. D Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exits. Unless otherwise directed, maintain them until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove stabilized construction exits promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. E Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems, including vegetative systems shall be repaired immediately. F Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation and Section 01565 TPDES Requirements. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide stabilized access roads, subdivision roads, parking areas, and other on-site • vehicle transportation routes where shown on Plans. 12/2015 01550-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS B Provide stabilized construction exits, and truck washing areas when approved by • Engineer, of the sizes and locations where shown on Plans or as specified in this Section. C Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures. D Details for Stabilized Construction Exits are shown on the Plans. Construction of all other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 14 feet for one-way traffic and 20 feet for two-way traffic and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. E Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas. Use sandbags,gravel,boards,or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering public right-of-way, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system. F The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top • dressing with additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged control measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped,washed,or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. G The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Plans,but not less than 50 feet. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than full width of all points of ingress or egress. H Stabilization for other areas shall have the same coarse aggregate,thickness,and width requirements as the stabilized construction exit,except where shown otherwise on the Plans. I Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck washing area when authorized by Engineer. J Alternative methods of construction may be utilized when shown on Plans, or when approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION • 12/2015 01550-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 • TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans,signs,signals,control devices,flares,lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications of Flaggers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic • Control and Regulation,including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans, provision of traffic control devices, and provision of equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer. C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. • D Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name,badge number,time start,time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.04 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified, use only Flaggers who are off-duty, regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Flaggers are required at the following locations: 1. Where multi-lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single-lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly. 3. Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehicular traffic lanes and walks. 4. Where construction equipment may intermittently encroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross-walks. 5. Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehicular traffic around the work site. 7. When requested by Owner. C The use of Flaggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage for which he would otherwise be liable. 411 Baggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS,SIGNALS,AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires that public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with the Engineer. B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the • use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m.to 9:00 a.m.and • 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer. D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets: 1. Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations. Leave the area broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day. F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas. 3.02 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. • 3.03 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.04 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.05 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS • A Whenever necessary,bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats,angles,bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed: III 1. On an existing bus route; 2. When more than five percent of daily traffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic; 3. When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge; or 4. When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. C Install bridging to operate with minimum noise. D Adequately shore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. ..1) C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE Section 01560 • FILTER FABRIC FENCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of filter fabric fence to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants from overland flow. Filter fabric fence is not for use in channelized flow areas. Filter fabric fence may be reinforced. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement & Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" • 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Filter fabric fence will be measured by the linear foot between the limits of the beginning and ending of wooden stakes. B Payment for filter fabric fence will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment,materials,supervision,and all incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other Product Data on geotextile fabric. 03/2008 01560- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC • A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric fence as specified in this Section, 3.02F. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide filter fabric fence systems in accordance with the Plan detail for Filter fabric fence. Filter fabric fence shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. B Attach the filter fabric to 2-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. If filter fabric is factory preassembled 03/2008 01560-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE with support netting,then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet. Install wooden stakes IIIat a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. C Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. E Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary,splice the Fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. F Inspect filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall,daily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the fence or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION • • 03/2008 01560-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER Section 01561 . REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of reinforced filter fabric barrier to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants in channelized flow areas. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement& Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion &Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT • A Measurement for reinforced filter fabric barrier is on a linear foot basis between the limits of the beginning and ending fence posts, measured, accepted, and complete in place. B Payment for filter fabric barrier will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, supervision, and incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction.. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile fabric. , Cr, 05/2008 01561 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM - D4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction,a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 2.02 FILTER FABRIC REINFORCEMENT A Provide woven galvanized steel wire fence with minimum thickness of 14 gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. B Welded wire shall be galvanized, 2-inch by 4-inch, welded wire fabric, 12 'h gauge. 2.03 EXECUTION 2.04 PREPARATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil,other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric barrier. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 1562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. • 05/2008 01561 -2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.05 INSTALLATION • A Install reinforced filter fabric barriers for erosion and sediment control used during construction and until the final development of the Project Site. Reinforced filter fabric barriers are used to retain sedimentation in channelized flow areas. B Provide reinforced filter fabric barrier in accordance with the Plan detail for Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier. Reinforced filter fabric bather systems shall be installed in such a manner that runoff will percolate through the system and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. C Trench in the toe of the reinforced filter fabric barrier with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Reinforced filter fabric barrier shall have a height of 18 inches. E Securely fasten the filter fabric to the wire with tie wires. F Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice the fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. G Inspect the reinforced filter fabric barrier systems after each rainfall, daily during • periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the barrier or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 0 05/2008 01561 -3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL Section 01562 '41•B,,, WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation 3. Section 01600—Materials &Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners,along with a description of the property,prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information: 1. Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3. Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed • 07/2006 01562- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL Ill A Excavated material: When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material: Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer. C Pipe culvert: Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials: Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer. F When temporary, on-site storage of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600—Materials &Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans, dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. 0 B Off-site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. C Sediment to be placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area,compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. D If sediment has been contaminated,it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL,WASTE,AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation,rubble,broken concrete,debris,asphaltic concrete pavement,excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage,shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment,materials,waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1.03D. Ill 07/2006 01562-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of • excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the Owner in any way. END OF SECTION • • 07/2006 01562-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Section 01563 • TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tree and plant protection. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage,branch,trunk,or root damage that could result from construction operations. B Prevent following types of damage: 1. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk damage from equipment operations, material storage, or from nailing or bolting. 3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires or machine impacts. 4. Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline,paint, and other noxious materials. 5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6. Damage from lack of water due to: a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones. b. Failure to provide adequate watering. 7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete,plaster,or other base materials near roots. 8. Cutting feeder of roots or roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 1.04 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT A When trees,other than those designated for removal,are destroyed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations,remove and replace with same size,species,and variety up to and including 8 inches in trunk diameter. Trees larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced with an 8-inch diameter tree of the same species and variety and total contract amount will be reduced by an amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: 0.7854 x D2 x $10.00 where D is diameter in inches of tree or shrub trunk measured 12 inches above grade. • B All necessary tree replacements shall be as approved by Engineer/Urban Forester. 02/2013 01563- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLIANT PROTECTION 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS • A Asphalt paint: Emulsified asphalt or other adhesive, elastic, antiseptic coating formulated for horticultural use on cut or injured plant tissue,free from kerosene and coal creosote. B Burlap: Suitable for use as tree wrapping. C Fertilizer: Liquid containing 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, and 5 percent potash. D. Temporary Barrier Fence: Plastic, bright orange color for visibility, 48 inches in height, 8.5 pounds weight minimum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS A Except for trees and shrubs shown on Plans to be removed,all trees and shrubs within the Project Site area are to remain and be protected from damage. B For designated trees to be removed,perform the following: 1. Stake right-of-way limits and identify any tree of diameter greater than 4 inches which is to be removed. Mark trees prior to felling with an X in orange paint, clearly visible, on the trunk, and at eye level. 2. After marking trees give a minimum of 48-hours notice in writing to the Engineer of intent to begin felling operations. 3. Trees whose trunks are only partially in the right-of-way shall be protected and preserved as described below. C For trees or shrubs to remain,perform the following: 1. Trim trees and shrubs only as necessary. a. Trees and shrubs requiring pruning for construction should also be pruned for balance as well as to maintain proper form and branching habit. b. Cut limbs at branch collar. No stubs should remain on trees. Branch cuts should not gouge outer layer of tree structure or trunk. 2. Use extreme care to prevent excessive damage to root systems. a. Roots in construction areas will be cut smoothly with a trencher before excavation begins. Do not allow ripping of roots with a backhoe or other equipment. b. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. c. Cover exposed roots with soil as soon as possible. 3. Prevent damage or compaction of root zone(area inside dripline)by construction activities. a. Do not allow scarring of trunks or limbs by equipment or other means. 02/2013 01563-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION b. Do not store construction materials, vehicles, or excavated material • c. inside dripline of trees. Do not pour liquid materials inside dripline. 4. Water and fertilize trees and shrubs that will remain to maintain their health during construction period. a. Supplemental watering of landscaping during construction should be done once a week in months receiving average rainfall and twice a week in months receiving below average rainfall. b. This watering shall consist of saturating soils at least 6 to 8 inches beneath surface. 5. Water areas currently being served by private sprinkler systems while systems are temporarily taken out of service to maintain health of existing landscapes. 6. At option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's permission,trees and shrubs to remain may be temporarily transplanted and returned to original positions under supervision of professional horticulturist. 3.02 PROTECTIVE CONTROLS A Protection of trees or shrubs in open area: 1. Install steel drive-in fence posts in protective circle, approximately 8 feet on center, at the dripline of the leaf canopy of trees or 2 ft. around shrubs. 2. Drive steel drive-in fence posts 3 feet minimum into ground, leaving 5 feet • 3. minimum above ground. For trees or shrubs in paved areas, use moveable posts constructed from concrete-filled steel pipe 2-1/2 inches minimum in diameter mounted in rubber auto tires filled with concrete. 4. Mount plastic temporary barrier safety fence on posts. B Timber-wrap protection for trees in close proximity of moving or mechanical equipment and construction work: 1. Wrap trunk with layer of burlap. 2. Install 2 x 4's or 2 x 6's(5-foot to 6-foot lengths)vertically, spaced 3 inches to 5 inches apart around circumference of tree trunk. 3. Tie in place with 12 to 9 gage steel wire. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY PLANTED TREES A Water newly planted trees adequately to maintain and support healthy plants at the time of planting. B The Contractor guarantees that trees planted for this Work shall remain alive and healthy at least until the end of a one-year warranty period. 1. Within four weeks of notice from Owner, Contractor shall replace, at his expense, any dead trees or any trees that in the opinion of Owner,have • become unhealthy or unsightly or have lost their natural shape as a result of additional growth, improper pruning or maintenance, or weather conditions. 02/2013 01563 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2. When tree must be replaced,the guarantee period for that tree shall begin on date of replacement of tree, subject to the Owner's inspection, for no less than one year. 3. Straighten leaning trees and bear entire cost. 4. Dispose of trees rejected at any time by Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02/2013 01563 -4 of 4 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER • Section 01564 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dewatering,depressurizing,draining,and maintaining trench and structure excavations and foundation beds in dry and stable condition. B Protecting work against surface runoff and rising flood waters. C Disposing of removed water. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 4. Section 01565—TPDES Requirements 5. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation E Referenced Standards: • 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 3. Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland,Texas 4. Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council (WWD/PI) F Definitions: 1. Ground Water Control Systems - installations external to the excavation such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering and depressurization. a. Dewatering-lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations and disposing of removed water. The intent of dewatering is to increase stability of excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations;reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations;and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. b. Depressurization -reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. 2. Surface Water Control -diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from the excavation. 3. Excavation Drainage-keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 02/2008 01564- 1 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for and control of ground water for open cut pipe excavations shall be on a linear foot basis and shall not exceed the length of open cut pipe installation in the area requiring ground water control. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for control of ground water for any condition(s) other than those described in this Section, 1.02A. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include the cost to control non-pipe excavation ground water and surface water in price for Work requiring such controls. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement & Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by the Engineer prior to start of any field work. The plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The plan shall include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigation and description of the extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. • 2. Names of equipment suppliers and installation subcontractors. 3. A description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria, and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. A description of proposed monitoring and control system indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. A description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other necessary means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. C Submit the following records upon completed initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 02/2008 01564-2of8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER • 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D Submit the following records on a weekly basis during operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to this Section, 3.02 "Requirements for Eductor,Well Points, or Deep Wells". 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations,piezometers, and monitoring wells. E Submit the following records at end of the Work. Decommissioning(abandonment) reports for monitoring wells and piezometers installed by other during the design phase and left for Contractor's monitoring and use. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. B Design a ground water control system, compatible with the requirements of OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and Section 01570-Trench Safety Systems of these • Technical Specifications,to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage,boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C Ground water control systems may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water,as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E Provide ditches,berms,pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. • F Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 02/2008 01564-3 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells,or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. B Comply with TCEQ regulations and WWD/PI Advisory Council for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C Obtain permit from TCEQ under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES),for storm water discharge from construction sites. Refer to Section 01565— TPDES, 3.02 "Certification Requirements". D Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. E Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. F Implement control of ground and surface water under the provisions of Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion &Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve • desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review 02/2008 01564-4 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER Ill of the Engineer through Submittals required in Section 01350 — Submittals, 1.06 "Operations and Maintenance Data". B Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, must be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells,and devices,such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. D All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. E Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers,piezometric pressures,and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown C characteristics of the water-bearing layers. The results shall be presented in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Refer to this Section, 1.03B. B Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Plan. Notify Engineer in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with such notification. D Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or (lire installed works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the Plan. 02/2008 01564-5 of 8 4 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Maintain water level below subgrade elevation. Do not allow levels to rise until foundation concrete has achieved design strength. H During backfilling,dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced,such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means of draining the affected portion of underground system,including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L Compact backfill as required by the Contract Documents. (10 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR,WELL POINTS,OR DEEP WELLS A For aboveground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are predrained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation. D Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations,but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is predrained by an existing system such that the criteria of the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan are satisfied. 02/2008 01564-6 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER • E Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F Provide additional ground water control installations or change the methods in the event that the installations according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03A. G Mechanical dewatering equipment shall comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland,Texas. 3.03 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained, stable trench conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of the following methods or combination of methods: 1. Sump pumping in combination with: a. Layer of crushed stone and filter fabric. b. Sand and gravel drains. 2. Wells for ground water control. B Use sump pumping and a drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321,placed on the foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. • 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area. Keep system in good operating condition. B Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MONITORING AND RECORDING A Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady • conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 02/2008 01564-7 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER B Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Engineer's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.06 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches,curb walls,pipes,sumps or other approved means. The requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by such agencies. C Provide additional surface water control measures or change the methods in the event that the measures according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03B. END OF SECTION val) 02/2008 01564-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 • TPDES REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL A As used herein and in conjunction with TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000,the term OPERATOR refers to the CONTRACTOR. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A Description of the required documentation to be prepared,signed and submitted by the Contractor before conducting construction operations, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)General Permit as issued March 5, 2003, re-issued March 5, 2013, and re-issued March 5, 2018, by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Section 26.040 of the Texas Water Code. B Contractor's responsibility for implementation,maintenance,and inspection of storm water pollution prevention control measures including,but not limited to,erosion and sediment controls,storm water management plans,waste collection and disposal,off- site vehicle tracking,and other practices shown on the Plans or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications.This Specification provides guidelines and Best Management Practices(BMP's) information for the Contractor to use in adhering to • all local, state and federal environmental regulations with respect to storm water pollution prevention during construction activity. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01310—Coordination& Meetings 3. Section 01770—Contract Closeout D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) E Other References: 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP)found in Appendix A of these Technical Specifications. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 - • Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 08/2018 01565 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIRED NOTICES411 A The Contractor shall complete,sign,and date the Contractor's Notice of Intent(NOI) attached in Appendix A. The signed copy of the Contractor's NOI shall be returned to the TCEQ. It is contractor's responsibility to pay for any fees associated with the permit. Submission of the NOI is required by both the Owner and the Contractor before construction operations start. B Upon completion of construction and acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall complete, sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Termination (NOT)attached in Appendix A. 3.02 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A On the Operator's Information form attached in Appendix A, the Contractor shall complete name, address, and telephone number for the Contractor; the names of persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures and all Subcontractors. B The Contractor and Subcontractors named in the Contractor's Information form shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's/Subcontractor's Certification form, attached in Appendix A. C The persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and 40 sediment control measures shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's Inspection and Maintenance Certification form,attached in Appendix A. D The Contractor's Information form and all certification forms shall be submitted to the Owner before beginning construction. E Contractor shall review implementation of the SWPPP in a meeting with the Owner and Engineer prior to start of construction in accordance with Section 01310 — Coordination& Meetings. 3.03 RETENTION OF RECORDS A The Contractor shall keep a copy of the SWPPP at the Project Site or at the Contractor's office from the date that it became effective to the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. B At Contract Closeout,the Contractor shall submit to the Owner all TPDES forms and certifications, as well as a copy of the SWPPP, in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. The SWPPP records and data will be retained by Owner for a period of 3 years from the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. 08/2018 01565-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 3.04 POSTING OF NOTICES • A The following notices shall be posted from the date that this SWPPP goes into effect until the date the Work is accepted by the Owner: 1. Copies of the Notices of Intent submitted by the Owner and Contractor and a brief Description of Construction Activity being conducted at the Project Site,as given in Article 1 of the SWPPP, shall be posted at the Project Site or at Contractor's office in a prominent place for public viewing. 2. Notice to drivers of equipment and vehicles, instructing them to stop, check, and clean tires of debris and mud before driving onto traffic lanes. Post such notices at every stabilized construction exit area. 3. In an easily visible location on Project Site,post a notice of waste disposal procedures. 4. Notice of hazardous material handling and emergency procedures shall be posted with the NOI on Project Site. Keep copies of Material Safety Data Sheets at a location on Project Site that is known to all personnel. 5. Keep a copy of each signed certification at the Project Site or at Contractor's office. APPENDIX A FOLLOWS THIS SECTION END OF SECTION • 41, 08/2018 01565-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS • Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS (APPENDIX A) Table of Contents TCEQ General Permit NOI TCEQ Form 20022 TCEQ Form—20134 NOC TCEQ Form—20023 Site Notice Forms • • 08/2018 01565-4 of 4 i rum 10011.., General Permit to Discharge Under TCEQ the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities TXR150000 Effective March 5, 2018 printed on TEXAS COMMISSION ON ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY recycled paper Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.O.Box 13087,Austin,Texas 78711-3087 ftir 40-QP xl •{ ..` I t GENERAL PERMIT TQ DISCHARGE UNDER THE TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM under provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code This permit supersedes and replaces TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000,issued March 5,2013 Construction sites that discharge stormwater associated with construction activity located in the state of Texas may discharge to surface water in the state only according to monitoring requirements and other conditions set forth in this general permit,as well as the rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ or Commission),the laws of the State of Texas,and other orders of the Commission of the TCEQ. The issuance of this general permit does not grant to the permittee the right to use private or public property for conveyance of stormwater and certain non-stormwater discharges along the discharge route. This includes property belonging to but not limited to any individual,partnership,corporation or other entity. Neither does this general permit authorize any invasion of personal rights nor any violation of federal,state,or local laws or regulations. It is the responsibility of the permittee to acquire property rights as may be necessary to use the discharge route. This general permit and the authorization contained herein shall expire at midnight,five years from the permit effective date. EFFECTIVE DATE: March 5,2018 ISSUED DATE: 2 .141, For5=thhe`.co ission L TPDES GENERAL PERMIT NUMBER TXRi50000 RELATING TO STORMWATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Table of Contents Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions 5 Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required 5 Section B. Definitions 6 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage 13 Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 13 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity 13 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities 13 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges 13 4. Other Permitted Discharges 14 Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out 14 Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 14 1. Post Construction Discharges 14 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges 14 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards 14 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL) Requirements 4.) 14 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone 15 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas 16 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities 16 8. Indian Country Lands 16 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation 16 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities 16 11. Endangered Species Act 16 12. Other 17 Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Large Construction Activities 17 2. Small Construction Activities 17 Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 17 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion- 17 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: 18 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities. 20 5. Effective Date of Coverage 20 (by 6. Notice of Change(NOC) 21 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination (NOT) Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices 22 8. Contents of the NOI 22 Section F. Terminating Coverage 23 1. Notice of Termination (NOT) Required 23 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT 23 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites 24 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control 24 Section G. Waivers from Coverage 25 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage 25 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver 26 3. Effective Date of a LREW 26 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period 26 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 27 (ir 1. Individual Permit Alternative 27 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges 27 3. Individual Permit Required 27 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization 27 Section I. Permit Expiration 27 Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) 28 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development 29 Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 29 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications 29 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control 30 Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation, Implementation, and Compliance 30 Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 30 Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s 31 Section F. Contents of SWP3 31 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites 40 Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants 42 Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 42 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs)and SWP3 Requirements 44 Page 3 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges 46 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements 46 Part VI. Retention of Records 47 `ma) Part VII.Standard Permit Conditions 47 Part VIII. Fees 48 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization 5o Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 52 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 53 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas 54 j Page 4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required When calculating the acreage of land area disturbed, include the disturbed land-area of all construction and construction support activities. How much land will be disturbed? (*1) `- I acre I or more acres (*I) (*i) :1p Do you meet the YES Will 5 or more definition of r acres be disturbed`.' "operator?"(*2) (*t) \U Y1:S r CoPermitCoverage Required • Prepare and Implement SWP3 • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of Site Notice to MS4 Operator 'f tAre you a"primary NO operator?"(*2) t Permit Coverage Not YES Required Unless Part ( Permit Coverage Required 1 of a Larger Common • Prepare and Implement SWP3 Plan of Development • Submit NOI to TCEQ or Sale • Post Site Notice `. J • Submit Copy of NO!to MS4 L. Operator (*1) To determine the size of the construction project,use the size of the entire area to be disturbed,and include the size of the larger common plan of development or sale,if the project is part of a larger project(refer to Part I.B., "Definitions,"for an explanation of"common plan of development or sale"). (*2) Refer to the definitions for"operator,""primary operator,"and"secondary operator"in Part 1., Section B. of this permit. (by Page 5 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section B. Definitions Arid Areas-Areas with an average annual rainfall of o to 10 inches. Best Management Practices(BMPs) -Schedules of activities,prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures,structural controls,local ordinances,and other management .4) practices to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants. BMPs also include treatment requirements,operating procedures,and practices to control construction site runoff,spills or leaks,waste disposal,or drainage from raw material storage areas. Commencement of Construction-The initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavation activities,as well as other construction-related activities (e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition). Common Plan of Development-A construction activity that is completed in separate stages,separate phases,or in combination with other construction activities. A common plan of development(also known as a"common plan of development or sale") is identified by the documentation for the construction project that identifies the scope of the project,and may include plats,blueprints, marketing plans,contracts,building permits,a public notice or hearing, zoning requests,or other similar documentation and activities. A common plan of development does not necessarily include all construction projects within the jurisdiction of a public entity(e.g.,a city or university). Construction of roads or buildings in different parts of the jurisdiction would be considered separate"common plans,"with only the interconnected parts of a project being considered part of a"common plan"(e.g., a building and its associated parking lot and driveways,airport runway and associated taxiways, a building complex,etc.). Where discrete construction projects occur within a larger common plan of development or sale but are located 1/4 mile or more apart,and the area between the projects is not being disturbed,each individual project can be treated as a separate plan of development or sale,provided that any interconnecting road,pipeline or utility project that is part of the same"common plan"is not included in the area to be disturbed. Construction Activity-Includes soil disturbance activities,including clearing,grading, excavating,construction-related activity(e.g.,stockpiling of fill material,demolition),and construction support activity. This does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site (e.g.,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Regulated construction activity is defined in terms of small and large construction activity. Construction Support Activity—A construction-related activity that specifically supports construction activity,which can involve earth disturbance or pollutant-generating activities of its own,and can include,but are not limited to, activities associated with concrete or asphalt batch plants,rock crushers,equipment staging or storage areas, chemical storage areas, material storage areas, material borrow areas,and excavated material disposal areas. Construction support activity must only directly support the construction activity authorized under this general permit. Dewatering—The act of draining rainwater or groundwater from building foundations, vaults,and trenches. Discharge—For the purposes of this permit, the drainage,release,or disposal of pollutants in stormwater and certain non-stormwater from areas where soil disturbing activities(e.g., clearing,grading,excavation,stockpiling of fill material,and demolition),construction materials or equipment storage or maintenance (e.g.,fill piles,borrow area,concrete truck wash out,fueling),or other industrial stormwater directly related to the construction process (e.g.,concrete or asphalt batch plants)are located. Drought-Stricken Area— For the purposes of this permit,an area in which the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's U.S. Seasonal Drought Outlook indicates for the period during which the construction will occur that any of the following conditions are Page 6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 likely: (i) "Drought to persist or intensify", (2) "Drought ongoing, some improvement", (3) "Drought likely to improve, impacts ease", or(4) "Drought development likely". See http://www.cpc.ncep.noaa.gov/products/expert assessment/seasonal drought.html. tor Edwards Aquifer-As defined under Texas Administrative Code(TAC) § 213.3 of this title (relating to the Edwards Aquifer),that portion of an arcuate belt of porous,water-bearing, predominantly carbonate rocks known as the Edwards and Associated Limestones in the Balcones Fault Zone trending from west to east to northeast in Kinney, Uvalde,Medina, Bexar,Comal, Hays,Travis,and Williamson Counties;and composed of the Salmon Peak Limestone, McKnight Formation,West Nueces Formation, Devil's River Limestone, Person Formation, Kainer Formation, Edwards Formation,and Georgetown Formation. The permeable aquifer units generally overlie the less-permeable Glen Rose Formation to the south,overlie the less-permeable Comanche Peak and Walnut Formations north of the Colorado River,and underlie the less-permeable Del Rio Clay regionally. Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone-Generally,that area where the stratigraphic units constituting the Edwards Aquifer crop out,including the outcrops of other geologic formations in proximity to the Edwards Aquifer,where caves,sinkholes,faults,fractures,or other permeable features would create a potential for recharge of surface waters into the Edwards Aquifer. The recharge zone is identified as that area designated as such on official maps located in the offices of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and the appropriate regional office. The Edwards Aquifer Map Viewer,located at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html,can be used to determine where the recharge zone is located. Edwards Aquifer Contributing Zone-The area or watershed where runoff from precipitation flows downgradient to the recharge zone of the Edwards Aquifer. The contributing zone is located upstream(upgradient)and generally north and northwest of the recharge zone for the following counties: all areas within Kinney County,except the area within the watershed draining to Segment No. 2304 of the Rio Grande Basin;all areas within Uvalde,Medina, Bexar,and Comal Counties;all areas within Hays and Travis Counties, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Colorado River above a point 1.3 miles upstream from Tom Miller Dam, Lake Austin at the confluence of Barrow Brook Cove, Segment No. 1403 of the Colorado River Basin;and all areas within Williamson County, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Lampasas River above the dam at Stillhouse Hollow reservoir,Segment No. 1216 of the Brazos River Basin. The contributing zone is illustrated on the Edwards Aquifer map viewer at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html. Effluent Limitations Guideline (ELG) — Defined in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) § 122.2 as a regulation published by the Administrator under§304(b)of the Clean Water Act(CWA)to adopt or revise effluent limitations. Facility or Activity—For the purpose of this permit, referring to a construction site,the location of construction activity,or a construction support activity that is regulated under this general permit,including all contiguous land and fixtures(for example,ponds and materials stockpiles),structures,or appurtenances used at a construction site or industrial site. Final Stabilization-A construction site status where any of the following conditions are met: (a) All soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform(that is, evenly distributed,without large bare areas) perennial vegetative cover with a density of at least 70%of the native background vegetative cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures,or equivalent permanent stabilization measures(such as the use of riprap,gabions,or geotextiles) have been employed. Page 7 Construction General PermitTPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (b) For individual lots in a residential construction site by either: (1) the homebuilder completing final stabilization as specified in condition(a)above; or (2) the homebuilder establishing temporary stabilization for an individual lot prior to the time of transfer of the ownership of the home to the buyer and after informing the homeowner of the need for,and benefits of,final stabilization. If temporary stabilization is not feasible,then the homebuilder may fulfill this requirement by retaining perimeter controls or BMPs,and informing the homeowner of the need for removal of temporary controls and the establishment of final stabilization. Fulfillment of this requirement must be documented in the homebuilder's stormwater pollution prevention plan(SWP3). (c) For construction activities on land used for agricultural purposes (such as pipelines across crop or range land),final stabilization may be accomplished by returning the disturbed land to its preconstruction agricultural use. Areas disturbed that were not previously used for agricultural activities,such as buffer strips immediately adjacent to surface water and areas that are not being returned to their preconstruction agricultural use must meet the final stabilization conditions of condition(a) above. (d) In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas only,all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and both of the following criteria have been met: (1) Temporary erosion control measures(for example,degradable rolled erosion control product) are selected, designed,and installed along with an appropriate seed base to provide erosion control for at least three years without active maintenance by the operator,and (2) The temporary erosion control measures are selected,designed,and installed to achieve 70%of the native background vegetative coverage within three years. Hyperchiorination of Waterlines—Treatment of potable water lines or tanks with chlorine for disinfection purposes,typically following repair or partial replacement of the waterline or tank,and subsequently flushing the contents. Impaired Water-A surface water body that is identified as impaired on the latest approved CWA§303(d) List or waters with an EPA-approved or established total maximum daily load(TMDL)that are found on the latest EPA approved Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 3o5(b)and 303(d),which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. Indian Country Land—All land within the limits of any Indian reservation under the jurisdiction of the United States government, notwithstanding the issuance of any patent, and,including rights-of-way running through the reservation; (2)all dependent Indian communities with the borders of the United States whether within the originally or subsequently acquired territory thereof,and whether within or without the limits of a state; and(3)all Indian allotments,the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished, including rights-of-way running through the same. (4o CFR§122.2) Indian Tribe-Any Indian Tribe,band,group,or community recognized by the Secretary of the Interior and exercising governmental authority over a Federal Indian Reservation(4o CFR§122.2). Infeasible—Not technologically possible,or not economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. (40 CFR§450.11(b)). Large Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than five(5) acres of total Page 8 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than five(5) acres of land. Large construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line tor and grade, hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities.) Linear Project— Includes the construction of roads,bridges,conduits,substructures, pipelines,sewer lines,towers,poles,cables,wires, connectors,switching,regulating and transforming equipment and associated ancillary facilities in a long,narrow area. Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW) -A written submission to the executive director from an operator of a construction site that is considered as small construction activity under the permit,which qualifies for a waiver from the requirements for small construction activities,only during the period of time when the calculated rainfall erosivity factor is less than five(5). Minimize-To reduce or eliminate to the extent achievable using stormwater controls that are technologically available and economically practicable and achievable in light of best industry practices. Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4) -A separate storm sewer system owned or operated by the United States,a state,city,town,county,district,association,or other public body(created by or pursuant to state law) having jurisdiction over the disposal of sewage, industrial wastes,stormwater,or other wastes, including special districts under state law such as a sewer district,flood control or drainage district,or similar entity,or an Indian tribe or an authorized Indian tribal organization,that discharges to surface water in the state. Notice of Change(NOC) —Written notification to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this permit,providing changes to information that was previously provided to the agency in a notice of intent form. Notice of Intent (NOI) -A written submission to the executive director from an applicant requesting coverage under this general permit. Notice of Termination(NOT) -A written submission to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this general permit requesting termination of coverage. Operator-The person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that is either a primary or secondary operator as defined below: Primary Operator—the person or persons associated with construction activity that meets either of the following two criteria: (a) the person or persons have on-site operational control over construction plans and specifications,including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications;or (b) the person or persons have day-to-day operational control of those activities at a construction site that are necessary to ensure compliance with a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3) for the site or other permit conditions(for example,they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities required by the SWP3 or comply with other permit conditions). Secondary Operator—The person or entity,often the property owner,whose operational control is limited to: (a) the employment of other operators,such as a general contractor,to perform or supervise construction activities; or Page 9 Construction General Permit TPDES GeneraliRermit TXR150000 (b) the ability to approve or disapprove changes to construction plans and specifications, but who does not have day-to-day on-site operational control over construction activities at the site. Secondary operators must either prepare their own SWP3 or participate in a shared SWP3 that covers the areas of the construction site,where they have control over the construction plans and specifications. If there is not a primary operator at the construction site,then the secondary operator is defined as the primary operator and must comply with the requirements for primary operators. Outfall-For the purpose of this permit,a point source at the point where stormwater runoff associated with construction activity discharges to surface water in the state and does not include open conveyances connecting two municipal separate storm sewers, or pipes, tunnels,or other conveyances that connect segments of the same stream or other water of the U.S. and are used to convey waters of the U.S. Permittee-An operator authorized under this general permit. The authorization may be gained through submission of a notice of intent,by waiver,or by meeting the requirements for automatic coverage to discharge stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction activity. Point Source —Any discernible,confined, and discrete conveyance,including but not limited to,any pipe,ditch,channel,tunnel,conduit,well,discrete fissure,container,rolling stock concentrated animal feeding operation,landfill leachate collection system,vessel or other floating craft from which pollutants are,or may be,discharged. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture or agricultural stormwater runoff(4o CFR §122.2). Pollutant-Dredged spoil,solid waste, incinerator residue,sewage,garbage,sewage sludge, filter backwash, munitions, chemical wastes,biological materials,radioactive materials,heat, wrecked or discarded equipment,rock,sand,cellar dirt,and industrial,municipal,and agricultural waste discharged into any surface water in the state. The term"pollutant" does not include tail water or runoff water from irrigation or rainwater runoff from cultivated or uncultivated rangeland,pastureland,and farmland. For the purpose of this permit,the term "pollutant"includes sediment. Pollution-The alteration of the physical,thermal,chemical,or biological quality of,or the contamination of,any surface water in the state that renders the water harmful,detrimental, or injurious to humans,animal life,vegetation,or property or to public health,safety,or welfare,or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose(Texas Water Code(TWC) §26.001(14)). Rainfall Erosivity Factor(R factor)-the total annual erosive potential that is due to climatic effects,and is part of the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE). Receiving Water-A"Water of the United States"as defined in 4o CFR§122.2 or a surface water in the state into which the regulated stormwater discharges. Semiarid Areas-areas with an average annual rainfall of 10 to 20 inches. Separate Storm Sewer System-A conveyance or system of conveyances(including roads with drainage systems,streets, catch basins,curbs,gutters,ditches,man-made channels,or storm drains),designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater;that is not a combined sewer,and that is not part of a publicly owned treatment works(POTW). Small Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one(i)acre and less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than one(i)acre of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than one(i)and Page 10 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade, hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site (for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads,asphalt Cir overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities). Steep Slopes —Where a state,Tribe,local government,or industry technical manual(e.g. stormwater BMP manual)has defined what is to be considered a"steep slope", this permit's definition automatically adopts that definition. Where no such definition exists,steep slopes are automatically defined as those that are 15 percent or greater in grade. Stormwater(or Stormwater Runoff) -Rainfall runoff,snow melt runoff, and surface runoff and drainage. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity-Stormwater runoff,as defined above,from a construction activity. Structural Control(or Practice) -A pollution prevention practice that requires the construction of a device,or the use of a device,to reduce or prevent pollution in stormwater runoff. Structural controls and practices may include but are not limited to: silt fences, earthen dikes, drainage swales,sediment traps,check dams,subsurface drains,storm drain inlet protection,rock outlet protection, reinforced soil retaining systems,gabions,and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Surface Water in the State- Lakes,bays,ponds,impounding reservoirs,springs,rivers, streams,creeks,estuaries,wetlands,marshes,inlets,canals,the Gulf of Mexico inside the territorial limits of the state (from the mean high water mark(MHWM)out 10.36 miles into the Gulf),and all other bodies of surface water,natural or artificial, inland or coastal,fresh or salt, navigable or non-navigable,and including the beds and banks of all water-courses and bodies of surface water,that are wholly or partially inside or bordering the state or subject to the jurisdiction of the state;except that waters in treatment systems which are authorized by state or federal law, regulation,or permit,and which are created for the purpose of waste treatment are not considered to be water in the state. Temporary Stabilization-A condition where exposed soils or disturbed areas are provided a protective cover or other structural control to prevent the migration of pollutants. Temporary stabilization may include temporary seeding,geotextiles, mulches,and other techniques to reduce or eliminate erosion until either permanent stabilization can be achieved or until further construction activities take place. Thawing Conditions—for the purposes of this permit,thawing conditions are expected based on the historical likelihood of two or more days with daytime temperatures greater than 327. This date can be determined by looking at historical weather data. Note: The estimation of thawing conditions is for planning purposes only. During construction,the permittee will be required to conduct site inspections based upon actual conditions(i.e., if thawing conditions occur sooner than expected,the permittee will be required to conduct inspections at the regular frequency). Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL) -The total amount of a pollutant that a water body can assimilate and still meet the Texas Surface Water Quality Standards. Turbidity—A condition of water quality characterized by the presence of suspended solids and/or organic material. Waters of the United States-Waters of the United States or waters of the U.S. means: (a) all waters which are currently used,were used in the past,or may be susceptible to • use in interstate or foreign commerce,including all waters which are subject to the ebb and flow of the tide; (b) all interstate waters, including interstate wetlands; Page 11 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (c) all other waters such as intrastate lakes, rivers,streams(including intermittent streams), mudflats,sandflats,wetlands,sloughs,prairie potholes,wet meadows, playa lakes,or natural ponds that the use,degradation,or destruction of which would affect or could affect interstate or foreign commerce including any such waters: (i) which are or could be used by interstate or foreign travelers for recreational or other purposes; (2) from which fish or shellfish are or could be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce; or (3) which are used or could be used for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; (d) all impoundments of waters otherwise defined as waters of the United States under this definition; (e) tributaries of waters identified in paragraphs(a)through(d)of this definition; (f) the territorial sea; and (g) wetlands adjacent to waters(other than waters that are themselves wetlands) identified in paragraphs(a)through(f)of this definition. Waste treatment systems,including treatment ponds or lagoons designed to meet the requirements of CWA are not waters of the U.S. This exclusion applies only to manmade bodies of water which neither were originally created in waters of the U.S. (such as disposal area in wetlands) nor resulted from the impoundment of waters of the U.S. Waters of the U.S.do not include prior converted cropland. Notwithstanding the determination of an area's status as prior converted cropland by any other federal agency,for the purposes of the CWA,the final authority regarding CWA jurisdiction remains with EPA. Page 12 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization III1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from small and large construction activities may be authorized under this general permit. 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities Discharges of stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges from construction support activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit may be authorized,provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the construction support activities are located within one (1)mile from the boundary of the construction site where the construction activity authorized under the permit is being conducted that requires the support of these activities; (b) an SWP3 is developed for the permitted construction site according to the provisions in Part III.F of this general permit,and includes appropriate controls and measures to reduce erosion and the discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff according to the provisions in Part III.G of this general permit; (c) the activities are directly related to the construction site; (d) the activities are not a commercial operation,nor serve other unrelated construction projects; and (e) the activities do not continue to operate beyond the completion of the construction activity at the project it supports. fiir Construction support activities that operate outside the terms provided in(a) through(e) above must obtain authorization under a separate Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES)permit,which may include the TPDES Multi Sector General Permit(MSGP),TXRo50000 (related to stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity),an alternative general permit(if available),or an individual water quality permit. 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit: (a) discharges from fire-fighting activities(fire-fighting activities do not include washing of trucks,run-off water from training activities,test water from fire suppression systems, or similar activities); (b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings(excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life),which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water,surface water,or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants(uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water); (c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles,the external portion of buildings or structures,and pavement,where detergents and soaps are not used, where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred(unless 411, spilled materials have been removed; and if local state,or federal regulations are applicable,the materials are removed according to those regulations),and where the purpose is to remove mud,dirt,or dust; Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRl500oo (d) uncontaminated water used to control dust; (e) potable water sources, including waterline flushings,but excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life; ,41) (f) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate; (g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water,including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and (h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage. 11 4. Other Permitted Discharges Any discharge authorized under a separate National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES),TPDES,or TCEQ permit may be combined with discharges authorized by this general permit,provided those discharges comply with the associated permit. Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out The wash out of concrete trucks at regulated construction sites must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 1. Post Construction Discharges Discharges that occur after construction activities have been completed,and after the construction site and any supporting activity site have undergone final stabilization,are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Discharges originating from the sites are not authorized under this general permit following the submission of the notice of termination(NOT)or removal of the appropriate site notice,as applicable,for the regulated construction activity. 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges Except as otherwise provided in Part II.A of this general permit,only discharges that are composed entirely of stormwater associated with construction activity may be authorized under this general permit. 3. Compliance with Water Quality Standards Discharges to surface water in the state that would cause,have the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or that would fail to protect and maintain existing designated uses of surface water in the state are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. The executive director may require an application for an individual permit or alternative general permit (see Parts II.H.2 and 3.)to authorize discharges to surface water in the state if the executive director determines that any activity will cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or is found to cause,has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to,the impairment of a designated use. The executive director may also require an application for an individual permit considering factors described in Part II.H.3 of this general permit. 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL) Requirements The permittee shall determine whether the authorized discharge is to an impaired water body on the latest EPA-approved CWA Section 3o3(d) List or waters with an EPA- approved or established TMDL that are found on the latest EPA-approved Texas Page 14 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 305(b)and 303(d), which lists the category 4 and 5 water bodies. New sources or new discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired waters are not • authorized by this permit unless otherwise allowable under 3o TAC Chapter 305 and applicable state law. Impaired waters are those that do not meet applicable water quality standard(s)and are listed as category 4 or 5 in the current version of the Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality,and waterbodies listed on the CWA§ 3o3(d)list. Pollutants of concern are those for which the water body is listed as impaired. Discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired water bodies for which there is a TMDL are not eligible for coverage under this general permit unless they are consistent with the approved TM DL. Permittees must incorporate the conditions and requirements applicable to their discharges into their SWP3,in order to be eligible for coverage under this general permit. For consistency with the construction stormwater-related items in an approved TMDL,the SWP3 must be consistent with any applicable condition,goal,or requirement in the TMDL,TMDL Implementation Plan(I-Plan),or as otherwise directed by the executive director. 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone Discharges cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 213 (relating to Edwards Aquifer). In addition, commencement of construction (i.e.,the initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavating activities,as well as other construction-related activities such as stockpiling of fill material and demolition)at a site regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213, may not begin until the appropriate Edwards Aquifer Protection Plan (EAPP)has been approved by the TCEQ's Edwards Aquifer Protection Program. • (a) For new discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,or within that area upstream from the recharge zone and defined as the Contributing Zone (CZ),operators must meet all applicable requirements of,and operate according to, 3o TAC Chapter 213 (Edwards Aquifer Rule)in addition to the provisions and requirements of this general permit. (b) For existing discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,the requirements of the agency-approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan(WPAP) under the Edwards Aquifer Rule is in addition to the requirements of this general permit. BMPs and maintenance schedules for structural stormwater controls,for example, may be required as a provision of the rule. All applicable requirements of the Edwards Aquifer Rule for reductions of suspended solids in stormwater runoff are in addition to the requirements in this general permit for this pollutant. (c) For discharges located within ten stream miles upstream of the Edwards Aquifer recharge zone,applicants shall also submit a copy of the NOI to the appropriate TCEQ regional office. Counties: Comal, Bexar,Medina, Uvalde, and Kinney Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager San Antonio Regional Office 1425o Judson Road San Antonio,Texas 78233-4480 (210) 490-3096 Counties: Williamson,Travis,and Hays tio Contact: TCEQ Water Program Manager Austin Regional Office 12100 Park 35 Circle Page 15 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Room 179, Building A Austin,Texas 78753 (512)339-2929 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas Discharges otherwise eligible for coverage cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 30 TAC Chapter 311 (relating to Watershed Protection)for water quality areas and watersheds. 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities This general permit does not limit the authority or ability of federal,other state,or local governmental entities from placing additional or more stringent requirements on construction activities or discharges from construction activities. For example,this permit does not limit the authority of a home-rule municipality provided by Texas Local Government Code§401.002. 8. Indian Country Lands Stormwater runoff from construction activities occurring on Indian Country lands are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES regulations,authority for these discharges must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA). 9. Oil and Gas Production and Transportation Stormwater runoff from construction activities associated with the exploration, development,or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline,are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Authorization for stormwater discharges from construction activities that are associated with production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline must be obtained, as required,from the U.S. EPA or the Texas Railroad Commission,as applicable. Discharge of stormwater related to construction activity, from a facility that stores both refined products intended for off-site use and crude oil in aboveground storage tanks,is regulated by the TCEQ and is eligible for coverage under this general permit. 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities Stormwater discharges from agricultural activities that are not point source discharges of stormwater are not subject to TPDES permit requirements. These activities may include clearing and cultivating ground for crops,construction of fences to contain livestock,construction of stock ponds,and other similar agricultural activities. Discharges of stormwater runoff associated with the construction of facilities that are subject to TPDES regulations,such as the construction of concentrated animal feeding operations,would be point sources regulated under this general permit. ii. Endangered Species Act Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit,unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied. Federal requirements related to endangered species apply to all TPDES permitted discharges and site-specific controls may be required to ensure that protection of endangered or threatened species is achieved. If a permittee has concerns over potential impacts to listed species,the permittee may contact TCEQ for additional information. Page 16 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 12. Other Nothing in Part II of the general permit is intended to negate any person's ability to assert force majeure (act of God,war,strike,riot,or other catastrophe)defenses found in 3o TAC§70.7. Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Large Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Operators of large construction activities continuing to operate after the effective date of this permit,and authorized under the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000 (effective on March 5, 2013),must submit an NOI to renew authorization or a NOT to terminate coverage under this general permit within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim or grace period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES general permit. 2. Small Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction activity occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. tir (b) Ongoing Construction- Discharges from ongoing small construction activities that commenced prior to the effective date of this general permit,and that do not meet the conditions to qualify for termination of this permit as described in Part II.F of this general permit, must meet the requirements to be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim period, as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the 2013 TPDES Construction General Permit. Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities with Low Potential for Erosion: Operators of small construction activity,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit, shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,which occur in certain counties and during periods of low potential for erosion that do not meet the conditions of the waiver described in Part II.G of this general permit, may be automatically authorized under this general permit if all the following conditions are met. (a) the construction activity occurs in a county and during the corresponding date range(s)listed in Appendix A; cio (b) the construction activity is initiated and completed, including either final or temporary stabilization of all disturbed areas,within the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; Page 17 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (c) all temporary stabilization is adequately maintained to effectively reduce or prohibit erosion,permanent stabilization activities have been initiated,and a condition of final stabilization is completed no later than 3o days following the end date of the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; 'me)(d) the permittee signs a completed TCEQ small construction site notice for low potential for erosion,including the certification statement; (e) a signed and certified copy of the small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is posted at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity; NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified site notice,with a viewable signature,located on- site and available for review by any applicable regulatory authority. (f) a copy of the signed and certified small construction site notice for low potential for erosion is provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities; (g) discharges of stormwater runoff or other non-stormwater discharges from any supporting concrete batch plant or asphalt batch plant is separately authorized under an individual TPDES permit,another TPDES general permit,or under an individual TCEQ permit where stormwater and non-stormwater is disposed of by evaporation or irrigation (discharges are adjacent to water in the state); and (h) any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,are not considered by TCEQ to be a wastewater,or are captured and routed for disposal at a publicly operated treatment works or licensed waste disposal facility. 'go) If all of the conditions in(a) — (h) above are met,then the operator(s)of small construction activities with low potential for erosion are not required to develop a SWP3. If an operator is conducting small construction activities and any of the above conditions (a) — (h)are not met,the operator cannot declare coverage under the automatic authorization for small construction activities with low potential for erosion and must meet the requirements for automatic authorization (all other)small construction activities,described below in Part II.E.2. For small construction activities that occur during a period with a low potential for erosion,where automatic authorization under this section is not available,an operator may apply for and obtain a waiver from permitting(Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver— LREW),as described in Part II.G of this general permit. Waivers from coverage under the LREW do not allow for any discharges of non-stormwater and the operator must ensure that discharges on non-stormwater are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization. 2. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities: Operators of small construction activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit shall not submit an NOI for coverage,unless otherwise required by the executive director. Operators of small construction activities,as defined in Part I.B of this general permit or as defined but who do not meet in the conditions and requirements located in Part II.E.i above, may be automatically authorized for small construction activities,provided that they meet all of the following conditions: Page i8 Construction General Permit TPDES General'Permit TXRi50000 (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit,that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator,and implement the SWP3 prior to commencing construction activities; • (b) all operators of regulated small construction activities must post a copy of a signed and certified Small Construction site notice,the notice must be posted at the construction site in a location where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities,at least two days prior to commencing construction activity,and maintain the notice in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g. pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway; notice for these linear sites may be relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities); (c) operators must maintain a posted site notice at the construction site until final stabilization has been achieved; and NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Small Construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. (d) provide a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice to the operator of any municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4) receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities. As described in Part LB of this general permit,large construction activities include those that will disturb less than five(5)acres of land,but that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale that will ultimately disturb five(5)or more acres of land,and must meet the requirements of Part II.E.3.below. 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: Operators of large construction activities that qualify for coverage under this general permit must meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site where the applicant is the operator. The SWP3 must be developed and implemented prior to obtaining coverage and prior to commencing construction activities; (b) primary operators of large construction activities must submit an NOI prior to commencing construction activity at a construction site.A completed NOI must be submitted to TCEQ electronically using the online e-Permits system on TCEQ's website. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver must submit a completed NOI to TCEQ at least seven(7)days prior to prior to commencing construction activity to obtain provisional coverage seven(7)days from the postmark date for delivery to the TCEQ. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. If an additional primary operator is added after the initial NOI is submitted,the additional primary operator must meet the same requirements for existing primary operator(s),as indicated above. If the primary operator changes due to responsibility at the site being transferred Ci„ from one primary operator to another after the initial NOI is submitted,the new primary operator must submit a paper NOI or an electronic NOI at least ten(1o) Page 19 I Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15oo00 days prior to assuming operational control of a construction site and commencing construction activity. Operators that submit NOIs electronically must use the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Ng) (c) all operators of large construction activities must post a site notice in accordance with Part III.D.2 of this permit. The site notice must be located where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state,and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities,and must be maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g. pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway; notice for these linear sites may be relocated,as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local, state,and federal authorities); (d) two days prior to commencing construction activities,all primary operators must: i. provide a copy of the signed NOI to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to any secondary construction operator,and ii. list in the SWP3 the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy; (e) all persons meeting the definition of"secondary operator" in Part I of this permit are hereby notified that they are regulated under this general permit,but are not required to submit an NOI,provided that a primary operator at the site has submitted an NOI,or prior to commencement of construction activities,a primary operator is required to submit an NOI and the secondary operator has provided notification to the operator(s)of the need to obtain coverage(with records of notification available upon request). Any secondary operator notified under this provision may alternatively submit an NOI under this general permit, may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES individual permit,or may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES general permit if available;and (f) all secondary operators of large construction activities must post a copy of the signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice and provide a copy of the signed and certified site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to the commencement construction activities. NOTE: Posted site notices may have a redacted signature as long as there is an original signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice,with a viewable signature,located on-site and available for review by an applicable regulatory authority. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOI using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities: Operators of certain small construction activities may obtain a waiver from coverage under this general permit,if applicable. The requirements are outlined in Part II.G below. 5. Effective Date of Coverage (a) Operators of small construction activities as described in either Part II.E.1 or II.E.2 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions of Part II.E.1 or II.E.2. Secondary operators of large construction Page 20 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 activities as described in Part II.E.3 above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions in Part II.E.3. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this Cr' authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (b) Primary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3 above that electronically submit an NOI are authorized immediately following confirmation of receipt of the electronic form by the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. Operators with an electronic reporting waiver are provisionally authorized seven(7) days from the date that a completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. An authorization is no longer provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued to the permittee for the construction site indicated on the NOI. For construction activities located in areas regulated by 30 TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction activities may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (c) Operators are not prohibited from submitting late NOIs or posting late notices to obtain authorization under this general permit. The TCEQ reserves the right to take appropriate enforcement action for any unpermitted activities that may have occurred between the time construction commenced and authorization was obtained. (d) If operators that submitted NOIs have active authorizations for construction • activities that are ongoing when the term of the current general permit expires and a new general permit is issued,a 90-day interim(grace) period is granted to provide coverage that is administratively continued until operators with active authorizations can obtain coverage under the newly issued CGP. The 90-day grace period starts on the effective date of the newly issued CGP. Deadlines for obtaining coverage for operators of small and large construction are provided in Part II.D.1 and 2 above. 6. Notice of Change(NOC) If relevant information provided in the NOI changes,the operator that has submitted the NOI must submit an NOC to TCEQ at least fourteen (14)days before the change occurs, if possible. Where a 14-day advance notice is not possible,the operator must submit an NOC to TCEQ within 14-days of discovery of the change. If the operator becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in an NOI, the correct information must be submitted to TCEQ in an NOC within 14 days after discovery. The NOC shall be submitted on a form provided by the executive director,or by letter if an NOC form is not available. A copy of the NOC form or letter must also be placed in the SWP3 and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge. A list that includes the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy of the NOC(or NOC letter) must be included in the SWP3. Information on an NOC may include,but is not limited to,the following: a change in the description of the construction project;an increase in the number of acres disturbed(for increases of one or more acres); or the name of the operator(where the name of the (10, operator has changed). A transfer of operational control from one operator to another, including a transfer of the ownership of a company. Coverage under this general permit is not transferable Page 21 I Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 from one operator to another or one company to another,and may not be included in an NOC. A transfer of ownership of a company may include,but is not limited to,the following: changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation or changing corporation types,so that the filing number(or charter number)that is on record with the Texas Secretary of State must be changed. An NOC is not required for notifying TCEQ of a decrease in the number of acres disturbed. This information must be included in the SWP3 and retained on site. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOC using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT) Forms, NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices NOI forms,NOT forms,NOC letters,and Construction Site Notices that require a signature must be signed according to 3o TAC§ 305.44(relating to Signatories for Applications). 8. Contents of the NOI The NOI form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) the TPDES CGP authorization number for existing authorizations under this general permit,where the operator submits an NOI to renew coverage within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit; (b) the name, address,and telephone number of the operator filing the NOI for permit coverage; (c) the name(or other identifier),address,county,and latitude/longitude of the construction project or site; (d) the number of acres that will be disturbed by the applicant; (e) confirmation that the project or site will not be located on Indian Country lands; (f) confirmation that a SWP3 has been developed in accordance with this general permit,that it will be implemented prior to commencement of construction activities,and that it is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans;for multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3,the confirmation for an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator; (g) name of the receiving water(s); (h) the classified segment number for each classified segment that receives discharges from the regulated construction activity(if the discharge is not directly to a classified segment,then the classified segment number of the first classified segment that those discharges reach);and (i) the name of all surface waters receiving discharges from the regulated construction activity that are on the latest EPA-approved CWA§ 3o3(d) List of impaired waters or Texas Integrated Report of Surface Water Quality for CWA Sections 305(b)and 3o3(d)as not meeting applicable state water quality standards. Page 22 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section F. Terminating Coverage 1. Notice of Termination (NOT) Required Each operator that has submitted an NOI for authorization of large construction activities under this general permit must apply to terminate that authorization following the conditions described in this section of the general permit. Authorization of large construction must be terminated by submitting an NOT on a paper form to TCEQ supplied by the executive director or electronically via the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates at midnight on the day a paper NOT is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ or immediately following confirmation of the receipt of the NOT submitted electronically by the TCEQ. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until an NOT is submitted. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an NOT using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. The NOT must be submitted to TCEQ,and a copy of the NOT provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(with a list in the SWP3 of the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy),within 3o days after any of the following conditions are met: (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred(See Section II.F.4 below); or • (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual TPDES permit or alternative TPDES general permit. 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT The NOT form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) if authorization for construction activity was granted following submission of an NOI, the permittee's site-specific TPDES authorization number for a specific construction site; (b) an indication of whether final stabilization has been achieved at the site and a NOT has been submitted or if the permittee is simply no longer an operator at the site; (c) the name,address,and telephone number of the permittee submitting the NOT; (d) the name(or other identifier),address, county,and location(latitude/longitude)of the construction project or site; and (e) a signed certification that either all stormwater discharges requiring authorization under this general permit will no longer occur,or that the applicant is no longer the operator of the facility or construction site,and that all temporary structural erosion controls have either been removed,will be removed on a schedule defined in the SWP3,or have been transferred to a new operator if the new operator has applied for permit coverage. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. (10Page 23 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites (a) Each operator that has obtained automatic authorization for small construction or is a secondary operator for large construction must perform the following when ',Ns) terminating coverage under the permit: i. remove the site notice; ii. complete the applicable portion of the site notice related to removal of the site notice;and iii. submit a copy of the completed site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(or provide alternative notification as allowed by the MS4 operator, with documentation of such notification included in the SWP3). (b) The activities described in Part II.F.3.(a) above must be completed by the operator within 3o days of meeting any of the following conditions: i. final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the operator; ii. a transfer of day-to-day operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions has occurred(See Section II.F.4.below);or iii. the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual or general TPDES permit. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates immediately upon removal of the applicable site notice. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until the site notice is removed. 4. Transfer of Day-to-Day Operational Control (a) When the primary operator of a large construction activity changes or operational control over activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions is transferred to another primary operator,the original operator must do the following: i. submit an NOT within ten(1o)days prior to the date that responsibility for operations terminates,and the new operator must submit an NOI at least ten (1o)days prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with condition(c)below;and ii. submit a copy of the NOT from the primary operator terminating its coverage under the permit and its operational control of the construction site and submit a copy of the NOI from the new primary operator to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge in accordance with Part II.F.i above. (b) For transfer of operational control,operators of small construction activities and secondary operators of large construction activities who are not required to submit an NOI must do the following: i. the existing operator must remove the original site notice,and the new operator must post the required site notice prior to the transfer of operational control, in accordance with the conditions in Part II.F.4.(c) i or ii below; and ii. a copy of the site notice,which must be completed and provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge, in accordance with Part II.F.3 above. (c) Each operator is responsible for determining its role as an operator as defined in Part I.B and obtaining authorization under the permit,as described above in Part Page 24 -qv) Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500oo II.E. 1 —3. Where authorization has been obtained by submitting an NOI for coverage under this general permit,permit coverage is not transferable from one operator to another. A transfer of operational control can include changes to the • structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation,or changing to a different corporation type such that a different filing(or charter) number is established with the Texas Secretary of State. A transfer of operational control can also occur when of the following criteria is met,as applicable: i. Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that do not meet the definition for final stabilization; ii. all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed, scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3,or transferred to a new operator,provided that the original permitted operator has attempted to notify the new operator in writing of the requirement to obtain permit coverage. Records of this notification(or attempt at notification) shall be retained by the operator transferring operational control to another operator in accordance with Part VI of this permit. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal; or iii. a homebuilder has purchased one or more lots from an operator who obtained coverage under this general permit for a common plan of development or sale. The homebuilder is considered a new operator and shall comply with the requirements of this permit. Under these circumstances,the homebuilder is only responsible for compliance with the general permit requirements as they apply to the lot(s) it has operational control over in a larger common plan of development,and the original operator remains responsible for common controls or discharges,and must amend its SWP3 to remove the lot(s) transferred to the homebuilder. Section G. Waivers from Coverage The executive director may waive the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit for stormwater discharges from small construction activities under the terms and conditions described in this section. 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage Operators of small construction activities may apply for and receive a waiver from the requirements to obtain authorization under this general permit,when the calculated rainfall erosivity(R)factor for the entire period of the construction project is less than five(5). The operator must submit either a signed paper Low Rainfall Erosivity Waiver(LREW) certification form to the TCEQ,supplied by the executive director, or complete the form electronically via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. The form is a certification by the operator that the small construction activity will commence and be completed within a period when the value of the calculated R factor is less than five (5). The paper LREW certification form must be postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ at least seven(7)days before construction activity begins or,if submitted electronically, construction may begin at any time following the receipt of written confirmation from TCEQ that a complete electronic application was submitted and acknowledged. This waiver from coverage does not apply to any non-stormwater discharges,including what is allowed under this permit. The operator must insure that all non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,or are captured and routed to an authorized treatment facility for disposal. Page 25 Construction General Permit TPDES General=Permit TXR15o000 Effective September 1, 2018,applicants must submit an LREW using the online e- Permits system available through the TCEQ website, or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver The construction site operator may calculate the R factor to request a waiver using the following steps: (a) Estimate the construction start date and the construction end date. The construction end date is the date that final stabilization will be achieved. (b) Find the appropriate Erosivity Index(EI)zone in Appendix B of this permit. (c) Find the EI percentage for the project period by adding the results for each period of the project using the table provided in Appendix D of this permit,in EPA Fact Sheet 2.1,or in USDA Handbook 703,by subtracting the start value from the end value to find the percent EI for the site. (d) Refer to the Isoerodent Map(Appendix C of this permit) and interpolate the annual isoerodent value for the proposed construction location. (e) Multiply the percent value obtained in Step(c) above by the annual isoerodent value obtained in Step(d). This is the R factor for the proposed project. If the value is less than 5,then a waiver may be obtained. If the value is five(5)or more,then a waiver may not be obtained,and the operator must obtain coverage under Part II.E.2. of this permit. Alternatively,the operator may calculate a site-specific R factor utilizing the following online calculator: http://ei.tamu.edu/index.html,or using another available resource. A copy of the LREW certification form is not required to be posted at the small ,vg) construction site. 3. Effective Date of a LREW Unless otherwise notified by the executive director,operators of small construction activities seeking coverage under a LREW are provisionally waived from the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit seven (7)days from the date that a completed paper LREW certification form is postmarked for delivery to TCEQ,or immediately upon receiving confirmation of approval of an electronic submittal,made via the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants seeking coverage under a LREW must submit an application for a LREW using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. 4. Activities Extending Beyond the LREW Period If a construction activity extends beyond the approved waiver period due to circumstances beyond the control of the operator,the operator must either: (a) recalculate the R factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date,and if the R factor is still under five(5),submit a new waiver certification form at least two(2)days before the end of the original waiver period;or (b) obtain authorization under this general permit according to the requirements for automatic authorization for small construction activities in Part II.E.2 of this permit, ',mg) prior to the end of the approved LREW period. Page 26 Construction'General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 1. Individual Permit Alternative 410 Any discharge eligible for coverage under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under an individual TPDES permit according to 3o TAC §305(relating to Consolidated Permits). Applications for individual permit coverage must be submitted at least three hundred and thirty(330)days prior to commencement of construction activities to ensure timely authorization. Existing coverage under this general permit should not be terminated until an individual permit is issued and in effect. 2. Alternative Authorizations for Certain Discharges Certain discharges eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 30 TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),as applicable. 3. Individual Permit Required The executive director may require an operator of a construction site,otherwise eligible for authorization under this general permit,to apply for an individual TPDES permit in the following circumstances: (a) the conditions of an approved TMDL or TMDL I-Plan on the receiving water; (b) the activity being determined to cause,has a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or being found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state: and (c) any other consideration defined in 3o TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges) including 3o TAC Chapter 2o5.4(c)(3)(D),which allows the commission to deny authorization under the general permit and require an individual permit if a discharger has been determined by the executive director to have been out of compliance with any rule,order,or permit of the commission, including non-payment of fees assessed by the executive director. A discharger with a TCEQ compliance history rating of"unsatisfactory"is ineligible for coverage under this general permit. In that case, 3o TAC§ 60.3 requires the executive director to deny or suspend an authorization to discharge under a general permit. However,per TWC§ 26.040(h),a discharger is entitled to a hearing before the commission prior to having an authorization denied or suspended for having an "unsatisfactory"compliance history. Denial of authorization to discharge under this general permit or suspension of a permittee's authorization under this general permit for reasons other than compliance history shall be done according to commission rules in 3o TAC Chapter 205(relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges). 4. Alternative Discharge Authorization Any discharge eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 3o TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),if applicable. Section I. Permit Expiration 1. This general permit is effective for a term not to exceed five(5)years. All active discharge authorizations expire on the date provided on page one(i)of this permit. Following public notice and comment, as provided by 3o TAC §205.3(relating to Public Notice,Public Meetings,and Public Comment),the commission may amend, Page 27 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 revoke, cancel,or renew this general permit. All authorizations that are active at the time the permit term expires will be administratively continued as indicated in Part II.I.2 below and in Part II.D.i(b)and D.2(b)of this permit. 2. If the executive director publishes a notice of the intent to renew or amend this general permit before the expiration date,the permit will remain in effect for ,N1) existing,authorized discharges until the commission takes final action on the permit. Upon issuance of a renewed or amended permit,permittees may be required to submit an NOI within 90 days following the effective date of the renewed or amended permit,unless that permit provides for an alternative method for obtaining authorization. 3. If the commission does not propose to reissue this general permit within 90 days before the expiration date,permittees shall apply for authorization under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. If the application for an individual permit is submitted before the expiration date,authorization under this expiring general permit remains in effect until the issuance or denial of an individual permit. No new NOIs will be accepted nor new authorizations honored under the general permit after the expiration date. Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) All regulated construction site operators shall prepare an SWP3,prior to submittal of an NOI,to address discharges authorized under Parts II.E.2 and II.E.3 of this general permit that will reach Waters of the U.S. This includes discharges to MS4s and privately owned separate storm sewer systems that drain into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. Individual operators at a site may develop separate SWP3s that cover only their portion of the project,provided reference is made to the other operators at the site. Where there is more than one SWP3 for a site,operators must coordinate to ensure that BMPs and controls are consistent and do not negate or impair the effectiveness of each other. Regardless of whether a single comprehensive SWP3 is developed or separate SWP3s are developed for each operator, it is the responsibility of each operator to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit in the areas of the construction site where that operator has control over construction plans and specifications or day-to-day operations. An SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater associated with construction activity and non-stormwater discharges described in Part II.A.3, in compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. An SWP3 must also identify any potential sources of pollution that have been determined to cause,have a reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause or contribute to the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state from discharges of stormwater from construction activities and construction support activities. Where potential sources of these pollutants are present at a construction site,the SWP3 must also contain a description of the management practices that will be used to prevent these pollutants from being discharged into surface water in the state or Waters of the U.S. NOTE: Construction support activities can also include vehicle repair areas,fueling areas,etc.that are present at a construction site solely for the support construction activities and are only used by operators at the construction site. The SWP3 is intended to serve as a road map for how the construction operator will comply with the effluent limits and other conditions of this permit and does not establish the effluent limits that apply to the construction site's discharges. These limits are established in Part III.G of the permit. Page 28 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development For more effective coordination of BMPs and opportunities for cost sharing,a cooperative effort by the different operators at a site is encouraged. Operators of small and large construction activities must independently obtain authorization under this permit,but may work together with other regulated operators at the construction site to prepare and implement a single,comprehensive SWP3,which can be shared by some or all operators,for the construction activities that each of the operators are performing at the entire construction site. 1. The SWP3 must include the following: (a) for small construction activities—the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3; (b) for large construction activities-the name of each operator that participates in the shared SWP3,the general permit authorization numbers of each operator (or the date that the NOI was submitted to TCEQ by each operator that has not received an authorization number for coverage under this permit); and (c) for large and small construction activities-the signature of each operator participating in the shared SWP3. 2. The SWP3 must clearly indicate which operator is responsible for satisfying each shared requirement of the SWP3. If the responsibility for satisfying a requirement is not described in the plan,then each permittee is entirely responsible for meeting the requirement within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. The SWP3 must clearly describe responsibilities for meeting each requirement in shared or common areas. 3. The SWP3 may provide that one operator is responsible for preparation of a SWP3 in compliance with the CGP,and another operator is responsible for implementation of the SWP3 at the project site. Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications All secondary operators and primary operators with control over construction plans and specifications shall: (a) ensure the project specifications allow or provide that adequate BMPs are developed to meet the requirements of Part III of this general permit; (b) ensure that the SWP3 indicates the areas of the project where they have control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications; (c) ensure that all other operators affected by modifications in project specifications are notified in a timely manner so that those operators may modify their BMP s as necessary to remain compliant with the conditions of this general permit; and (d) ensure that the SWP3 for portions of the project where they are operators indicates the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number(s)for operators with the day-to-day operational control over those activities necessary (10, to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions. If a primary operator has not been authorized or has abandoned the site,the secondary operator is considered to be the responsible party and must obtain authorization Page 29 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 as a primary operator under the permit, until the authority for day-to-day operational control is transferred to another primary operator. The new primary operator must update or develop a new SWP3 that will reflect the transfer of operational control and include any additional updates to the SWP3 to meet requirements of the permit. '.‘11) 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control Primary operators with day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project that are necessary to ensure compliance with an SWP3 and other permit conditions must ensure that the SWP3 accomplishes the following requirements: (a) meets the requirements of this general permit for those portions of the project where they are operators; (b) identifies the parties responsible for implementation of BMPs described in the SWP3; (c) indicates areas of the project where they have operational control over day-to- day activities; and (d) the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number of the parties with control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications for areas where they have operational control over day-to-day activities. Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation, Implementation,and Compliance The SWP3 must be prepared prior to obtaining authorization under this general permit, and implemented prior to commencing construction activities that result in soil disturbance. The SWP3 must be prepared so that it provides for compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 1. The SWP3 must be retained on-site at the construction site or, if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan,a notice must be posted describing the location of the SWP3. The SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on-site inspection to: the executive director; a federal,state,or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans,grading plans,or stormwater management plans;local government officials; and the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site. If the SWP3 is retained off-site,then it shall be made available as soon as reasonably possible. In most instances,it is reasonable that the SWP3 shall be made available within 24 hours of the request. 2. Operators with authorization for construction activity under this general permit must post a TCEQ site notice at the construction site at a place readily available for viewing by the general public,and local,state,and federal authorities. (a) Primary and secondary operators of large construction activities must each post a TCEQ construction site notice,respective to their role as an operator at the construction site,as required above and according to requirements in Part II.E.3 of this general permit. (b) Primary and secondary operators of small construction activities must post the TCEQ site notice as required in Part III.D.2.(a)above and for the specific type of small construction described in Part II.E.1 and 2 of the permit. (c) If the construction project is a linear construction project,such as a pipeline or highway,the notices must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway. Site notices for small and large construction Page 30 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 activities at these linear construction sites may be located,as necessary,along the length of the project,but must still be readily available for viewing by the general public; local,state,and federal authorities; and contain the following • information: i. the site-specific TPDES authorization number for the project if assigned; ii. the operator name, contact name,and contact phone number; iii. a brief description of the project; and iv. the location of the SWP3. 3. This permit does not provide the general public with any right to trespass on a construction site for any reason,including inspection of a site; nor does this permit require that permittees allow members of the general public access to a construction site. Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s The permittee must revise or update the SWP3 within seven days of when any of the following occurs: 1. a change in design, construction,operation,or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3; 2. changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications, new operators, new areas of responsibility,and changes in BMPs;or 3. results of inspections or investigations by construction site personnel authorized by the permittee,operators of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the 411y discharge,authorized TCEQ personnel,or a federal,state or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit. Section F. Contents of SWP3 The SWP3 must be developed and implemented by primary operators of small and large construction activities and include,at a minimum,the information described in this section and must comply with the construction and development effluent guidelines in Part III, Section G of the general permit. 1. A site or project description,which includes the following information: (a) a description of the nature of the construction activity; (b) a list of potential pollutants and their sources; (c) a description of the intended schedule or sequence of activities that will disturb soils for major portions of the site,including estimated start dates and duration of activities; (d) the total number of acres of the entire property and the total number of acres where construction activities will occur, including areas where construction support activities(defined in Part I.B of this general permit) occur; (e) data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; (f) a map showing the general location of the site(e.g.a portion of a city or county map); (g) a detailed site map(or maps)indicating the following: Page 31 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 i. drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities; ii. areas where soil disturbance will occur; iii. locations of all controls and buffers,either planned or in place; iv. locations where temporary or permanent stabilization practices are expected to be used; v. locations of construction support activities, including those located off-site; vi. surface waters(including wetlands)either at,adjacent,or in close proximity to the site,and also indicate whether those waters are impaired; vii. locations where stormwater discharges from the site directly to a surface water body or a municipal separate storm sewer system; viii. vehicle wash areas; and ix. designated points on the site where vehicles will exit onto paved roads (for instance,this applies to construction transition from unstable dirt areas to exterior paved roads). Where the amount of information required to be included on the map would result in a single map being difficult to read and interpret,the operator shall develop a series of maps that collectively include the required information. (h) the location and description of support activities authorized under the permittee's NOI, including asphalt plants, concrete plants, and other activities providing support to the construction site that is authorized under this general permit; (i) the name of receiving waters at or near the site that may be disturbed or that may receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project; (j) a copy of this TPDES general permit; (k) the NOI and the acknowledgement of provisional and non-provisional authorization for primary operators of large construction sites,and the site notice for small construction sites and for secondary operators of large construction sites; (I) stormwater and allowable non-stormwater discharge locations,including storm drain inlets on site and in the immediate vicinity of the construction site where construction support activities will occur;and (m) locations of all pollutant-generating activities at the construction site and where construction support activities will occur,such as the following: Paving operations; concrete,paint and stucco washout and water disposal; solid waste storage and disposal; and dewatering operations. 2. A description of the BMPs that will be used to minimize pollution in runoff. The description must identify the general timing or sequence for implementation. At a minimum,the description must include the following components: (a) General Requirements i. Erosion and sediment controls must be designed to retain sediment on-site to the extent practicable with consideration for local topography,soil type, and rainfall. ii. Control measures must be properly selected,installed,and maintained according to the manufacturer's or designer's specifications. Page 32 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 iii. Controls must be developed to minimize the offsite transport of litter, construction debris,and construction materials. firy (b) Erosion Control and Stabilization Practices The SWP3 must include a description of temporary and permanent erosion control and stabilization practices for the construction site,where small or large construction activity will occur. The erosion control and stabilization practices selected by the permittee must be compliant with the requirements for sediment and erosion control,located in Part III.G of this permit. The description of the SWP3 must also include a schedule of when the practices will be implemented. Site plans must ensure that existing vegetation at the construction site is preserved where it is possible. i. Erosion control and stabilization practices may include but are not limited to: establishment of temporary or permanent vegetation,mulching, geotextiles,sod stabilization,vegetative buffer strips,protection of existing trees and vegetation,slope texturing,temporary velocity dissipation devices,flow diversion mechanisms,and other similar measures. ii. The following records must be maintained and either attached to or referenced in the SWP3,and made readily available upon request to the parties listed in Part III.D.].of this general permit: (A) the dates when major grading activities occur; (B) the dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site;and (C) the dates when stabilization measures are initiated. iii. Erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated immediately • in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily ceased and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. Stabilization measures that provide a protective cover must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have permanently ceased. The term"immediately"is used to define the deadline for initiating stabilization measures. In the context of this requirement, "immediately" means as soon as practicable,but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth-disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in (A)through(D)below,these measures must be completed as soon as practicable,but no more than 14 calendar days after the initiation of soil stabilization measures: (A) Where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased due to frozen conditions, non-vegetative controls must be implemented until thawing conditions(as defined in Part I.B of this general permit) are present,and vegetative stabilization measures can be initiated as soon as practicable. (B) In arid areas,semi-arid areas,or drought-stricken areas,as they are defined in Part I.B of this general permit,where the immediate initiation of vegetative stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased or is precluded by arid conditions,other types of erosion control and stabilization measures 11 to must be initiated at the site as soon as practicable. Where vegetative controls are infeasible due to arid conditions,and within 14 calendar days of a temporary or permanent cessation of construction activity in any portion of the site,the operator shall immediately install non- Page 33 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 vegetative erosion controls in areas of the construction site where construction activity is complete or has ceased. If non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator shall install temporary sediment controls as required in Part III.F.2.(b).iii.(C)below. (C) In areas where non-vegetative controls are infeasible,the operator may alternatively utilize temporary perimeter controls. The operator must document in the SWP3 the reason why stabilization measures are not feasible,and must demonstrate that the perimeter controls will retain sediment on site to the extent practicable. The operator must continue to inspect the BMPs at the frequencies established in Part III.F.7.(c)for unstabilized sites. (D) The requirement for permittees to initiate stabilization is triggered as soon as it is known with reasonable certainty that construction activity at the site or in certain areas of the site will be stopped for 14 or more additional calendar days. If the initiation or completion of vegetative stabilization is prevented by circumstances beyond the control of the permittee,the permittee must employ and implement alternative stabilization measures immediately. When conditions at the site changes that would allow for vegetative stabilization,then the permittee must initiate or complete vegetative stabilization as soon as practicable. iv. Final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. v. TCEQ does not expect that temporary or permanent stabilization measures to be applied to areas that are intended to be left un-vegetated or un- stabilized following construction(e.g.,dirt access roads,utility pole pads, areas being used for storage of vehicles,equipment,or materials). (c) Sediment Control Practices The SWP3 must include a description of any sediment control practices used to remove eroded soils from stormwater runoff,including the general timing or sequence for implementation of controls. i. Sites With Drainage Areas of Ten or More Acres (A) Sedimentation Basin(s) (1) A sedimentation basin is required,where feasible,for a common drainage location that serves an area with ten(io)or more acres disturbed at one time. A sedimentation basin may be temporary or permanent,and must provide sufficient storage to contain a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained. When calculating the volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm event, it is not required to include the flows from offsite areas and flow from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have already undergone permanent stabilization, if these flows are diverted around both the disturbed areas of the site and the sediment basin. Capacity calculations shall be included in the SWP3. (2) Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,the sedimentation basin must provide at least 3,6o0 cubic feet of storage per acre drained until final stabilization of the site. Page 34 •tem) Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (3) If a sedimentation basin is not feasible,then the permittee shall provide equivalent control measures until final stabilization of the site. In determining whether installing a sediment basin is ® feasible,the permittee may consider factors such as site soils, slope,available area,public safety,precipitation patterns, site geometry,site vegetation,infiltration capacity,geotechnical factors,depth to groundwater, and other similar considerations. The permittee shall document the reason that the sediment basins are not feasible,and shall utilize equivalent control measures, which may include a series of smaller sediment basins. (4) Unless infeasible,when discharging from sedimentation basins and impoundments,the permittee shall utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface. (B) Perimeter Controls: At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. ii. Controls for Sites With Drainage Areas Less than Ten Acres: (A) Sediment traps and sediment basins may be used to control solids in stormwater runoff for drainage locations serving less than ten(1o) acres. At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site • conditions. (B) Alternatively,a sediment basin that provides storage for a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained may be utilized. Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,a temporary or permanent sediment basin providing 3,60o cubic feet of storage per acre drained may be provided. If a calculation is performed,then the calculation shall be included in the SWP3. (C) If sedimentation basins or impoundments are used,the permittee shall comply with the requirements in Part III.G.6 of this general permit. 3. Description of Permanent Stormwater Controls A description of any stormwater control measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that may occur after construction operations have been completed must be included in the SWP3. Permittees are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater management measures,as follows: (a) permittees authorized under the permit for small construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures prior to final stabilization of the site; or (b) permittees authorized under the permit for large construction activities are responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater control measures tor, prior to fmal stabilization of the site and prior to submission of an NOT. 4. Other Required Controls and BMPs Page 35 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) Permittees shall minimize,to the extent practicable,the off-site vehicle tracking of sediments and the generation of dust. The SWP3 shall include a description of controls utilized to accomplish this requirement. (b) The SWP3 must include a description of construction and waste materials expected to be stored on-site and a description of controls to minimize pollutants from these materials. (c) The SWP3 must include a description of potential pollutant sources in discharges of stormwater from all areas of the construction site where construction activity,including construction support activities,will be located, and a description of controls and measures that will be implemented at those sites to minimize pollutant discharges. (d) Permittees shall place velocity dissipation devices at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel (i.e.,runoff conveyance)to provide a non- erosive flow velocity from the structure to a water course,so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected. (e) Permittees shall design and utilize appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water from the site. (f) Permittees shall ensure that all other required controls and BMPs comply with all of the requirements of Part III.G of this general permit. (g) For demolition of any structure with at least 10,00o square feet of floor space that was built or renovated before January 1, 198o,and the receiving waterbody is impaired for polychlorinated biphenyls(PCBs): i. Implement controls to minimize the exposure of PCB-containing building materials, including paint,caulk,and pre-198o fluorescent lighting fixtures to precipitation and to stormwater;and ii. Ensure that disposal of such materials is performed in compliance with applicable state,federal,and local laws. 5. Documentation of Compliance with Approved State and Local Plans (a) Permittees must ensure that the SWP3 is consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by federal,state,or local officials. (b) SWP3s must be updated as necessary to remain consistent with any changes applicable to protecting surface water resources in sediment erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by state or local official for which the permittee receives written notice. (c) If the permittee is required to prepare a separate management plan,including but not limited to a WPAP or Contributing Zone Plan in accordance with 30 TAC Chapter 213 (related to the Edwards Aquifer),then a copy of that plan must be either included in the SWP3 or made readily available upon request to authorized personnel of the TCEQ. The permittee shall maintain a copy of the approval letter for the plan in its SWP3. 6. Maintenance Requirements (a) All protective measures identified in the SWP3 must be maintained in effective operating condition. If,through inspections or other means, as soon as the permittee determines that BMPs are not operating effectively,then the permittee shall perform maintenance as necessary to maintain the continued effectiveness Page 36 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 of stormwater controls,and prior to the next rain event if feasible. If maintenance prior to the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,the reason shall be documented in the SWP3 and maintenance must be scheduled ® and accomplished as soon as practicable. Erosion and sediment controls that have been intentionally disabled,run-over,removed,or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately upon discovery. (b) If periodic inspections or other information indicates a control has been used incorrectly, is performing inadequately,or is damaged,then the operator shall replace or modify the control as soon as practicable after making the discovery. (c) Sediment must be removed from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 5o%. For perimeter controls such as silt fences,berms,etc., the trapped sediment must be removed before it reaches 5o%of the above-ground height. (d) If sediment escapes the site,accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off-site impacts,and prior to the next rain event,if feasible. If the permittee does not own or operate the off-site conveyance, then the permittee shall work with the owner or operator of the property to remove the sediment. 7. Inspections of Controls (a) Personnel provided by the permittee must inspect disturbed areas (cleared, graded,or excavated)of the construction site that do not meet the requirements of final stabilization in this general permit,all locations where stabilization measures have been implemented,areas of construction support activity covered under this permit,stormwater controls(including pollution prevention controls) for evidence of,or the potential for,the discharge of pollutants,areas where stormwater typically flows within the construction site,and points of discharge • from the construction site. i. Personnel conducting these inspections must be knowledgeable of this general permit,the construction activities at the site,and the SWP3 for the site. ii. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. (b) Requirements for Inspections i. Inspect all stormwater controls(including sediment and erosion control measures identified in the SWP3)to ensure that they are installed properly, appear to be operational,and minimizing pollutants in discharges,as intended. ii. Identify locations on the construction site where new or modified stormwater controls are necessary. iii. Check for signs of visible erosion and sedimentation that can be attributed to the points of discharge where discharges leave the construction site or discharge into any surface water in the state flowing within or adjacent to the construction site. iv. Identify any incidents of noncompliance observed during the inspection. v. Inspect locations where vehicles enter or exit the site for evidence of off-site sediment tracking. vi. If an inspection is performed when discharges from the construction site are occurring: identify all discharge points at the site,observe and document the visual quality of the discharge(i.e.,color,odor,floating,settled,or Page 37 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 suspended solids,foam,oil sheen, and other such indicators of pollutants in stormwater). vii. Complete any necessary maintenance needed,based on the results of the inspection and in accordance with the requirements listed in Part III.F.6 above. (c) Inspection frequencies: i. Inspections of construction sites must be conducted at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,unless as otherwise provided below in Part III.F.7.(c).ii—v below. ii. Inspection frequencies must be conducted at least once every month in areas of the construction site that meet final stabilization or have been temporarily stabilized. iii. Inspection frequencies for construction sites,where runoff is unlikely due to the occurrence of frozen conditions at the site, must be conducted at least once every month until thawing conditions begin to occur(See definitions for thawing conditions in Part I.B). The SWP3 must also contain a record of the approximate beginning and ending dates of when frozen conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly, while those conditions persisted,instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. iv. In arid,semi-arid,or drought-stricken areas, inspections must be conducted at least once every month and within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. The SWP3 must also contain a record of the total rainfall measured,as well as the approximate beginning and ending dates of when drought conditions occurred at the site,which resulted in inspections being conducted monthly,while those conditions persisted, instead of at the interval of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. v. As an alternative to the inspection schedule in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7) calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed, then the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. vi. The inspection procedures described in Part III.F.7.(c).i. —v above can be performed at the frequencies and under the applicable conditions indicated for each schedule option,provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are made in accordance with the following provisions: the inspection frequency schedule can only be changed a maximum of one time each month;the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month; and the reason for the schedule change documented in the SWP3 (e.g., end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (d) Utility line installation,pipeline construction,and other examples of long, narrow,linear construction activities may provide inspection personnel with limited access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a)above. i. Inspection of linear construction sites could require the use of vehicles that could compromise areas of temporary or permanent stabilization, cause Page 38 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 additional disturbance of soils,and result in the increase the potential for erosion. In these circumstances,controls must be inspected at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 411) 0.5 inches or greater,but representative inspections may be performed. ii. For representative inspections,personnel must inspect controls along the construction site for 0.25 mile above and below each access point where a roadway,undisturbed right-of-way,or other similar feature intersects the construction site and allows access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. The conditions of the controls along each inspected 0.25 mile portion may be considered as representative of the condition of controls along that reach extending from the end of the 0.25 mile portion to either the end of the next 0.25 mile inspected portion,or to the end of the project, whichever occurs first. As an alternative to the inspection schedule described in Part III.F.7.(c).i above,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven (7) calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed,the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. iii. The SWP3 for a linear construction site must reflect the current inspection schedule. Any changes to the inspection schedule must be made in accordance with the following provisions: (A) the schedule may be changed a maximum of one time each month; (B) the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month,and (C) the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3 41110 (e.g., end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (e) In the event of flooding or other uncontrollable situations which prohibit access to the inspection sites,inspections must be conducted as soon as access is practicable. (f) Inspection Reports i. A report summarizing the scope of any inspection must be completed within 24-hours following the inspection. The report must also include the date(s) of the inspection and major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3. Major observations in the report must include: the locations of where erosion and discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site have occurred;locations of BMPs that need to be maintained;locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate for a particular location; and locations where additional BMPs are needed. ii. Actions taken as a result of inspections must be described within,and retained as a part of,the SWP3. Reports must identify any incidents of non- compliance. Where a report does not identify any incidents of non- compliance,the report must contain a certification that the facility or site is in compliance with the SWP3 and this permit. The report must be retained as part of the SWP3 and signed by the person and in the manner required by 30 TAC§305.128 (relating to Signatories to Reports). iii. The names and qualifications of personnel making the inspections for the (sw permittee may be documented once in the SWP3 rather than being included in each report. (g) The SWP3 must be modified based on the results of inspections, as necessary,to better control pollutants in runoff. Revisions to the SWP3 must be completed Page 39 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 within seven (7) calendar days following the inspection. If existing BMPs are modified or if additional BMPs are necessary,an implementation schedule must be described in the SWP3 and wherever possible those changes implemented before the next storm event. If implementation before the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,these changes must be implemented as soon as practicable. 8. The SWP3 must identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for all eligible non-stormwater components of the discharge,as listed in Part II.A.3 of this permit. 9. The SWP3 must include the information required in Part III.B of this general permit. 10. The SWP3 must include pollution prevention procedures that comply with Part III.G.4 of this general permit. Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites Except as provided in 4o CFR§§125.3o-125.32,any discharge regulated under this general permit,with the exception of sites that obtained waivers based on low rainfall erosivity,must achieve,at a minimum,the following effluent limitations representing the degree of effluent reduction attainable by application of the best practicable control technology currently available(BPT). 1. Erosion and sediment controls. Design,install,and maintain effective erosion controls and sediment controls to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such controls must be designed, installed,and maintained to: (a) Control stormwater volume and velocity within the site to minimize soil erosion in order to minimize pollutant discharges; (b) Control stormwater discharges,including both peak flowrates and total stormwater volume,to minimize channel and streambank erosion and scour in the immediate vicinity of discharge point(s); (c) Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity; (d) Minimize the disturbance of steep slopes; (e) Minimize sediment discharges from the site. The design,installation,and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls must address factors such as the amount,frequency,intensity and duration of precipitation,the nature of resulting stormwater runoff,and soil characteristics,including the range of soil particle sizes expected to be present on the site; (f) If earth disturbance activities are located in close proximity to a surface water in the state,provide and maintain appropriate natural buffers if feasible and as necessary,around surface water in the state,depending on site-specific topography,sensitivity,and proximity to water bodies. Direct stormwater to vegetated areas and maximize stormwater infiltration to reduce pollutant discharges,unless infeasible. If providing buffers is infeasible,the permittee shall document the reason that natural buffers are infeasible and shall implement additional erosion and sediment controls to reduce sediment load; (g) Preserve native topsoil at the site, unless the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that the topsoil be disturbed or removed,or it is infeasible; and (h) Minimize soil compaction. In areas of the construction site where final vegetative stabilization will occur or where infiltration practices will be installed, either: i. restrict vehicle and equipment use to avoid soil compaction;or Page 40 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 ii. prior to seeding or planting areas of exposed soil that have been compacted, use techniques that condition the soils to support vegetative growth, if necessary and feasible; Minimizing soil compaction is not required where the intended function of a specific area of the site dictates that it be compacted. (i) TCEQ does not consider stormwater control features(e.g.,stormwater conveyance channels,storm drain inlets,sediment basins)to constitute"surface water"for the purposes of triggering the buffer requirement in Part III.G.i.(f) above. 2. Soil stabilization. Stabilization of disturbed areas must,at a minimum,be initiated immediately whenever any clearing,grading,excavating,or other earth disturbing activities have permanently ceased on any portion of the site,or temporarily ceased on any portion of the site and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. In the context of this requirement, "immediately" means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth- disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Temporary stabilization must be completed no more than 14 calendar days after initiation of soil stabilization measures,and final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas where initiating vegetative stabilization measures immediately is infeasible,alternative non- vegetative stabilization measures must be employed as soon as practicable. Refer to Part III.F.2.(b)for complete erosion control and stabilization practice requirements. In limited circumstances,stabilization may not be required if the intended function of a specific area of the site necessitates that it remain disturbed. 3. Dewatering. Discharges from dewatering activities,including discharges from 4ir dewatering of trenches and excavations, are prohibited,unless managed by appropriate controls. 4. Pollution prevention measures. Design,install, implement,and maintain effective pollution prevention measures to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such measures must be designed, installed, implemented,and maintained to: (a) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from equipment and vehicle washing, wheel wash water,and other wash waters.Wash waters must be treated in a sediment basin or alternative control that provides equivalent or better treatment prior to discharge; (b) Minimize the exposure of building materials,building products, construction wastes,trash,landscape materials, fertilizers,pesticides,herbicides,detergents, sanitary waste,and other materials present on the site to precipitation and to stormwater; (c) Minimize the exposure of waste materials by closing waste container lids at the end of the work day. For waste containers that do not have lids,where the container itself is not sufficiently secure enough to prevent the discharge of pollutants absent a cover and could leak,the permittee must provide either a cover(e.g.,a tarp,plastic sheeting,temporary roof)to minimize exposure of wastes to precipitation,or a similarly effective means designed to minimize the discharge of pollutants(e.g.,secondary containment);and (d) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from spills and leaks,and implement chemical spill and leak prevention and response procedures. 5. Prohibited discharges.The following discharges are prohibited: Page 41 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (a) Wastewater from wash out of concrete, unless managed by an appropriate control; (b) Wastewater from wash out and cleanout of stucco,paint,form release oils, curing compounds and other construction materials; (c) Fuels,oils,or other pollutants used in vehicle and equipment operation and maintenance; (d) Soaps or solvents used in vehicle and equipment washing; and (e) Toxic or hazardous substances from a spill or other release. 6. Surface outlets.When discharging from basins and impoundments, utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface, unless infeasible. Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants Discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants present at regulated construction sites and operated as a construction support activity may be authorized under the provisions of this general permit,provided that the following requirements are met for concrete batch plant(s)authorized under this permit. Only the discharges of stormwater runoff and non-stormwater from concrete batch plants that meet the requirements of a construction support activity can be authorized under this permit(see the requirements for "Non-Stormwater Discharges"in Part II.A.3 and"Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activity"in Part II.A.2). If discharges of stormwater runoff or non-stormwater from concrete batch plants are not authorized under this general permit,then discharges must be authorized under an alternative general permit or individual permit [see the requirement in Part II.A.2.(c)]. This permit does not authorize the discharge or land disposal of any wastewater from concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites. Authorization for these wastes must be obtained under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 1. Operators of concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit shall sample the stormwater runoff from the concrete batch plants according to the requirements of this section of this general permit,and must conduct evaluations on the effectiveness of the SWP3 based on the following benchmark monitoring values: Table 1. Benchmark Parameters Benchmark Benchmark Value Sampling Sample Type Parameter Frequency Oil and Grease (*1) 15 mg/L i/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) Total Suspended 5o mg/L i/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) Solids(*1) pH 6.o —9.o Standard Units i/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) Total Iron(*i) 1.3 mg/L i/quarter(*2) (*3) Grab(*4) (*1) All analytical results for these parameters must be obtained from a laboratory that is accredited based on rules located in 3o TAC§25.4(a)or through the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program(NELAP). Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR§136.1(c) and 4o CFR §122.44(i)(i)(iv). Page 42 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (*2) When discharge occurs. Sampling is required within the first 3o minutes of discharge. If it is not practicable to take the sample,or to complete the sampling,within the first 30 minutes,sampling must be completed within the i first hour of discharge. If sampling is not completed within the first 3o minutes of discharge,the reason must be documented and attached to all required reports and records of the sampling activity. (*3) Sampling must be conducted at least once during each of the following periods. The first sample must be collected during the first full quarter that a stormwater discharge occurs from a concrete batch plant authorized under this general permit. January through March April through June July through September October through December For projects lasting less than one full quarter,a minimum of one sample shall be collected,provided that a stormwater discharge occurred at least once following submission of the NOI or following the date that automatic authorization was obtained under Section II.E.2,and prior to terminating coverage. (*4) A grab sample shall be collected from the stormwater discharge resulting from a storm event that is at least 0.1 inches of measured precipitation that occurs at least 72 hours from the previously measurable storm event. The sample shall be collected downstream of the concrete batch plant,and where the discharge exits any BMPs utilized to handle the runoff from the batch plant,prior to commingling with any other water authorized under this general permit. 2. The permittee must compare the results of sample analyses to the benchmark values above,and must include this comparison in the overall assessment of the SWP3's effectiveness. Analytical results that exceed a benchmark value are not a violation of this permit,as these values are not numeric effluent limitations. Results of analyses are indicators that modifications of the SWP3 should be assessed and may be necessary to protect water quality. The operator must investigate the cause for each exceedance and must document the results of this investigation in the SWP3 by the end of the quarter following the sampling event. The operator's investigation must identify the following: (a) any additional potential sources of pollution,such as spills that might have occurred; (b) necessary revisions to good housekeeping measures that are part of the SWP3; (c) additional BMPs,including a schedule to install or implement the BMPs; and (d) other parts of the SWP3 that may require revisions in order to meet the goal of the benchmark values. Background concentrations of specific pollutants may also be considered during the investigation. If the operator is able to relate the cause of the exceedance to background concentrations,then subsequent exceedances of benchmark values for that pollutant may be resolved by referencing earlier findings in the SWP3. Background concentrations may be identified by laboratory analyses of samples of cw stormwater run-on to the permitted facility,by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-off from adjacent non-industrial areas,or by identifying the pollutant is a naturally occurring material in soils at the site. Page 43 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi5o000 Section B. Best Management Practices (BMPs) and SWP3 Requirements Minimum SWP3 Requirements—The following are required in addition to other SWP3 requirements listed in this general permit,which include,but are not limited to the applicable requirements located in Part III.F.7 of this general permit,as follows: 1. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources-The SWP3 must provide a description of potential sources(activities and materials)that can cause,have a reasonable potential to cause or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or have been found to cause,or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state in stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this permit. The SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity and non-stormwater discharges(described in Part II.A.3 of this general permit),in compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit, including the protection of water quality, and must ensure the implementation of these practices. The following must be developed,at a minimum,in support of developing this description: (a) Drainage—The site map must include the following information: i. the location of all outfalls for stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this permit; ii. a depiction of the drainage area and the direction of flow to the outfall(s); iii. structural controls used within the drainage area(s); iv. the locations of the following areas associated with concrete batch plants that are exposed to precipitation:vehicle and equipment maintenance activities(including fueling, repair,and storage areas for vehicles and equipment scheduled for maintenance); areas used for the treatment, storage,or disposal of wastes; liquid storage tanks; material processing and storage areas; and loading and unloading areas; and v. the locations of the following: any bag house or other dust control device(s); recycle/sedimentation pond, clarifier or other device used for the treatment of facility wastewater(including the areas that drain to the treatment device); areas with significant materials;and areas where major spills or leaks have occurred. (b) Inventory of Exposed Materials—A list of materials handled at the concrete batch plant that may be exposed to stormwater and that have a potential to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this general permit. (c) Spills and Leaks-A list of significant spills and leaks of toxic or hazardous pollutants that occurred in areas exposed to stormwater and that drain to stormwater outfalls associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit must be developed, maintained,and updated as needed. (d) Sampling Data-A summary of existing stormwater discharge sampling data must be maintained, if available. 2. Measures and Controls-The SWP3 must include a description of management controls to regulate pollutants identified in the SWP3's"Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"from Part IV.B.i of this permit, and a schedule for implementation of the measures and controls. This must include,at a minimum: Page 44 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 (a) Good Housekeeping-Good housekeeping measures must be developed and implemented in the area(s)associated with concrete batch plants. ® i. Operators must prevent or minimize the discharge of spilled cement, aggregate(including sand or gravel),settled dust,or other significant materials from paved portions of the site that are exposed to stormwater. Measures used to minimize the presence of these materials may include regular sweeping or other equivalent practices. These practices must be conducted at a frequency that is determined based on consideration of the amount of industrial activity occurring in the area and frequency of precipitation,and shall occur at least once per week when cement or aggregate is being handled or otherwise processed in the area. ii. Operators must prevent the exposure of fine granular solids, such as cement,to stormwater.Where practicable,these materials must be stored in enclosed silos,hoppers or buildings,in covered areas,or under covering. (b) Spill Prevention and Response Procedures-Areas where potential spills that can contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff, and the drainage areas from these locations,must be identified in the SWP3. Where appropriate,the SWP3 must specify material handling procedures,storage requirements,and use of equipment. Procedures for cleaning up spills must be identified in the SWP3 and made available to the appropriate personnel. (c) Inspections-Qualified facility personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit,the concrete batch plant, and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site) must be identified to inspect designated equipment and areas of the facility specified in the SWP3. Personnel conducting these inspections are not required to have signatory • authority for inspection reports under 3o TAC§305.128. Inspections of facilities in operation must be performed once every seven days. Inspections of facilities that are not in operation must be performed at a minimum of once per month. The current inspection frequency being implemented at the facility must be recorded in the SWP3. The inspection must take place while the facility is in operation and must,at a minimum, include all areas that are exposed to stormwater at the site, including material handling areas,above ground storage tanks, hoppers or silos, dust collection/containment systems, truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Follow-up procedures must be used to ensure that appropriate actions are taken in response to the inspections. Records of inspections must be maintained and be made readily available for inspection upon request. (d) Employee Training-An employee training program must be developed to educate personnel responsible for implementing any component of the SWP3, or personnel otherwise responsible for stormwater pollution prevention,with the provisions of the SWP3. The frequency of training must be documented in the SWP3,and at a minimum,must consist of one training prior to the initiation of operation of the concrete batch plant. (e) Record Keeping and Internal Reporting Procedures-A description of spills and similar incidents,plus additional information that is obtained regarding the quality and quantity of stormwater discharges, must be included in the SWP3. Inspection and maintenance activities must be documented and records of those inspection and maintenance activities must be incorporated in the SWP3. (f) Management of Runoff-The SWP3 shall contain a narrative consideration for (air reducing the volume of runoff from concrete batch plants by diverting runoff or otherwise managing runoff, including use of infiltration,detention ponds, retention ponds, or reusing of runoff. Page 45 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 3. Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation —At least once per year,one or more qualified personnel (i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s) for the site)shall conduct a compliance evaluation of the plant. The evaluation must include the following. (a) Visual examination of all areas draining stormwater associated with regulated concrete batch plants for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. These include,but are not limited to: cleaning areas, material handling areas,above ground storage tanks, hoppers or silos,dust collection/containment systems,and truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Measures implemented to reduce pollutants in runoff(including structural controls and implementation of management practices) must be evaluated to determine if they are effective and if they are implemented in accordance with the terms of this permit and with the permittee's SWP3. The operator shall conduct a visual inspection of equipment needed to implement the SWP3,such as spill response equipment. (b) Based on the results of the evaluation,the following must be revised as appropriate within two weeks of the evaluation: the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the SWP3 (as required in Part IV.B.i, "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"); and pollution prevention measures and controls identified in the SWP3 (as required in Part IV.B.2, "Measures and Controls"). The revisions may include a schedule for implementing the necessary changes. (c) The permittee shall prepare and include in the SWP3 a report summarizing the scope of the evaluation,the personnel making the evaluation,the date(s)of the evaluation, major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3,and actions taken in response to the findings of the evaluation. The report must identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where the report does not identify incidences of noncompliance,the report must contain a statement that the evaluation did not identify any incidence(s),and the report must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.128,relating to Signatories to Reports. (d) The Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation may substitute for one of the required inspections delineated in Part IV.B.2.(c) of this general permit. Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges Wastewater discharges associated with concrete production including wastewater disposal by land application are not authorized under this general permit. These wastewater discharges must be authorized under an alternative TCEQ water quality permit or otherwise disposed of in an authorized manner. Discharges of concrete truck wash out at construction sites may be authorized if conducted in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements This general permit authorizes the land disposal of wash out from concrete trucks at construction sites regulated under this general permit,provided the following requirements are met. Any discharge of concrete production waste water to surface water in the state must be authorized under a separate TCEQ general permit or individual permit. A. Discharge of concrete truck wash out water to surface water in the state, including discharge to storm sewers, is prohibited by this general permit. B. Concrete truck wash out water shall be disposed in areas at the construction site ,110) where structural controls have been established to prevent discharge to surface water Page 46 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 in the state,or to areas that have a minimal slope that allow infiltration and filtering of wash out water to prevent discharge to surface water in the state. Structural controls may consist of temporary berms,temporary shallow pits,temporary storage • tanks with slow rate release,or other reasonable measures to prevent runoff from the construction site. C. Wash out of concrete trucks during rainfall events shall be minimized. The discharge of concrete truck wash out water is prohibited at all times,and the operator shall insure that its BMPs are sufficient to prevent the discharge of concrete truck wash out as the result of rainfall or stormwater runoff. D. The disposal of wash out water from concrete trucks, made under authorization of this general permit must not cause or contribute to groundwater contamination. E. If a SWP3 is required to be implemented,the SWP3 shall include concrete wash out areas on the associated site map. Part VI. Retention of Records The permittee must retain the following records for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that a NOT is submitted as required in Part II.F.1 and 2 of this permit. For activities in which an NOT is not required,records shall be retained for a minimum period of three (3)years from the date that the operator terminates coverage under Section II.F.3 of this permit. Records include: A. A copy of the SWP3; B. All reports and actions required by this permit, including a copy of the construction site notice; C. All data used to complete the NOI,if an NOI is required for coverage under this general permit; and D. All records of submittal of forms submitted to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to the secondary operator of a large construction site,if applicable. Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions A. The permittee has a duty to comply with all permit conditions. Failure to comply with any permit condition is a violation of the permit and statutes under which it was issued(CWA and TWC),and is grounds for enforcement action,for terminating, revoking and reissuance,or modification,or denying coverage under this general permit,or for requiring a discharger to apply for and obtain an individual TPDES permit,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,3o TAC§305.66 and 4o CFR§122.41 (a). B. Authorization under this general permit may be modified,suspended,revoked and reissued,terminated or otherwise suspended for cause,based on rules located in TWC§23.086,30 TAC§305.66 and 4o CFR§122.41(f). Filing a notice of planned changes or anticipated non-compliance by the permittee does not stay any permit condition. The permittee must furnish to the executive director, upon request and within a reasonable time,any information necessary for the executive director to determine whether cause exists for modifying,revoking and reissuing,terminating or,otherwise suspending authorization under this permit,based on rules located in TWC §23.086,30 TAC§305.66 and 40 CFR§122.41 (h). Additionally,the permittee must provide to the executive director,upon request,copies of all records that the permittee is required to maintain as a condition of this general permit. (8.„ C. It is not a defense for a discharger in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity to maintain compliance with the permit conditions. Page 47 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 D. Inspection and entry shall be allowed under TWC Chapters 26-28,Texas Health and Safety Code§§361.032-361.033 and 361.037,and 40 CFR§122.41(i).The statement in TWC§26.014 that commission entry of a facility shall occur according to an establishment's rules and regulations concerning safety,internal security,and fire protection is not grounds for denial or restriction of entry to any part of the facility or site,but merely describes the commission's duty to observe appropriate rules and regulations during an inspection. E. The discharger is subject to administrative, civil,and criminal penalties,as applicable,under TWC Chapter 7 for violations including but not limited to the following: 1. negligently or knowingly violating the federal CWA§§3o1, 302, 306,307,308, 318,or 405,or any condition or limitation implementing any sections in a permit issued under CWA§402,or any requirement imposed in a pretreatment program approved under CWA§§4o2(a)(3)or 402(b)(8); 2. knowingly making any false statement,representation,or certification in any record or other document submitted or required to be maintained under a permit, including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance; and 3. knowingly violating CWA§303 and placing another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily injury. F. All reports and other information requested by the executive director must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128 (relating to Signatories to Reports). G. Authorization under this general permit does not convey property or water rights of any sort and does not grant any exclusive privilege. H. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. I. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control(and related appurtenances) that are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures.This provision requires the operation of back-up or auxiliary facilities or similar systems that are installed by a permittee only when the operation is necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit. J. The permittee shall comply with the monitoring and reporting requirements in 40 CFR§122.41(j)and(1),as applicable. K. Analysis must be performed using sufficiently sensitive methods for analysis that comply with the rules located in 4o CFR§136.1(c) and 4o CFR§122.44(i)(1)(iv). Part VIII. Fees A. A fee of must be submitted along with the NOI: 1. $325 if submitting a paper NOI,or 2. $225 if submitting an NOI electronically. B. Fees are due upon submission of the NOI. An NOI will not be declared administratively complete unless the associated fee has been paid in full. C. No separate annual fees will be assessed for this general permit. The Water Quality Annual Fee has been incorporated into the NOI fees as described above. Page 48 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 D. Effective September 1, 2018,applicants seeking coverage under an NOI or LREW must submit their application using the online e-Permits system available through the TCEQ website,or request and obtain a waiver from electronic reporting from the ® TCEQ. Waivers from electronic reporting are not transferrable and expire on the same date as the authorization to discharge. • • Page 49 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization Periods of Low Erosion Potential by County— Eligible Date Ranges Andrews: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Ector: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Archer: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Edwards: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Armstrong: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 El Paso: Jan. 1-Jul. 14,or May 15-Jul. 31,or Jun. 1 -Aug. 14,or Jun. 15 -Sept. 14, Bailey: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May 14 or Jul. 1-Oct. 14,or Jul. 15 -Oct. 31,or Aug. 1 -Apr.30,or Aug. 15-May 14,or Baylor: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Sept. 1-May 30,or Oct. 1-Jun. 14,or Borden: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Nov. 1 -Jun. 30,or Nov. 15 -Jul. 14 Brewster: Nov. 15 -Apr. 3o Fisher: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Briscoe: Nov. 15 -Apr.3o Floyd: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Brown: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Foard: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Callahan: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Gaines: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Carson: Nov. 15 -Apr. 3o Garza: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Castro: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Glasscock: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Childress: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Hale: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Cochran: Nov. 1 -Apr. 30,or Nov. 15 - Hall: Feb. 1 -Mar. 30 May 14 Hansford: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Coke: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hardeman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Coleman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hartley: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Collingsworth: Jan. 1 -Mar. 30,or Dec. 1- Haskell: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Feb. 28 Hockley: Nov. 1 -Apr. 14, or Nov. 15 - Concho: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Apr. 30 Cottle: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Howard: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Crane: Nov. 15 -Apr.3o Hudspeth: Nov. 1 -May 14 Crockett: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1 - Hutchinson: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Mar. 30 Irion: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Crosby: Nov. 15 -Apr.30 Jeff Davis: Nov. 1-Apr. 30 or Nov. 15- Culberson: Nov. 1 -May 14 May 14 Dallam: Nov. 1 -Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Jones: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 3o Kent: Nov. 15-Jan. 14 or Feb. 1-Mar. 30 Dawson: Nov. 15-Apr. 3o Kerr: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Deaf Smith: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Kimble: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Dickens: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1-Mar. 3o King: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Dimmit: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Kinney: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Donley: Jan. 1 -Mar.30,or Dec. 1 -Feb. Knox: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 28 Lamb: Nov. 1 -Apr. 14,or Nov. 15 -Apr. Eastland: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 30 Page 50 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Loving: Nov. 1 -Apr. 30,or Nov. 15-May Scurry: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 14 Shackelford: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Lubbock: Nov. 15-Apr. 3ofity Lynn: Nov. 15 -Apr. 3o Sherman: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Stephens: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Martin: Nov. 15-Apr. 3o Sterling: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Mason: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Stonewall: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Maverick: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Sutton: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 McCulloch: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Swisher: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Menard: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Taylor: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Midland: Nov. 15 -Apr. 30 Terrell: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mitchell: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Terry: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Moore: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Throckmorton: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Motley: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1 -Mar. 30 Tom Green: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Nolan: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 Upton: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Oldham: Nov. 15 -Apr. 3o Uvalde: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Parmer: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Val Verde: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1 - Mar.30 30 Pecos: Nov. 15-Apr. 3o Ward: Nov. 1 -Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Potter: Nov. 15 -Apr. 3o Wichita: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 tr, Presidio: Nov. 1 -Apr. 30,or Nov. 15 - May 14 Wilbarger: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Winkler: Nov. 1-Apr. 30,or Nov. 15 - Randall: Nov. 15-Apr. 3o May 14 Reagan: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Yoakum: Nov. 1-Apr. 30, or Nov. 15 - Real: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 May 14 Reeves: Nov. 1 -Apr. 30,or Nov. 15-May Young: Dec. 15 -Feb. 14 14 Wheeler: Jan. 1-Mar. 30,or Dec. 1- Feb. Runnels: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 28 Schleicher: Dec. 15 - Feb. 14 Zavala: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 • Page 51 Construction General Permit TPDES General?Rermit TXR150000 Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 1 • - • .• •••, ••.• •••••••••••siM# �r .e�r, 'Olt • •• •• a .' •.. • •i• •.•••1•••••••4 . _ '.'�""_ 40�Ar.•.w•.w� • • . ' • • •• • . •.a • • • ..•� •� ::::::— p •. • •, • -:r•. ,' w 1w • a 1 44 .11 • ••• — —•_. • • • • •. . . �' • • •1 44 44 •. ` ♦• • •• 5 i • ' . • •• 4444 • • • . • r .... +• .� �_�•„•.. . • •.' f • • • 2':• - . • • • •! SO a O.� - • •••• • • . • • • • ♦' •• •. 44..44 V 44.44•• +4444• •. .- • • ..:�� r• ••t 4444 .4444• s>w • •`,4444• • ► • • n - .� ` . ... •.. - . ..•. __ . 9T • # w • I •• • . • •s or Olt AMA Oa wo•AMA map•• 4444! •le.� w.•n• - . . 4 ••••. e1 •. f .. �•• • �.. — saw •• •+w. '• • •.• • •• ••• ••f . .•• • ! •••# ! ! AM• w ••• •• • R • •• a• • • > . I—MO IP OM l I • • •• • • I•..•• a ... • r MIA MA r r MO MD ` • •+• # 4 • . • ss•••.. •»! !! •nAMA O • y ••• • • .• •••••AMA in.MIA i Q�[Myi�[ ♦• • w•• 411 411111 AMA allift • .... .. — • OM.ONO CC • ••l } • ••• • — •.•.•• W— !! .� > • •• • • �•• 1ja ,3 _4 *• • • •• 4444. .• w 44.44 .. r.. - ' • •• •• • ut' • .. r- - • ' �4• •• 44•••4444 •t •w i s#. ! - 4444 4444 r—• : :. •., AM OM Olm .1,* •••• ..10.,,,,j .t i.**' e 4444 4111. nos ••• w r 37 :2 It 4 .tom it- t 'N. 11 c. • • i1 :rt Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703: "Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service J Page 52 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRiS0000 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map • rii • ircitiamill isi-la Ninna51141MVAVISIIirgbAllii- 11,111 WNW illear Ill/,iria/►/r rir ib/ -� �N/�rsIL- .4,4 .tininerair Tar410-4101104- 101111% 411' mtlivistibilivaireagroaraltainellt. 111111111talhilvikwrispq0,Tqwww-T a reititnalilei allaSkilitgiink itaminitamijonagliiLmorlogikkai ampArlIdio , , . rimmatiwapaineritriii0-0-- . laimposinfiripprilf0" . sAL, vilk Aro "7/407 ifitallibalikOliA4VA,IkOwifinc 2° Iv" eillitailtalAviir"SOVV 31D'Vir, . WM Kt&tart,raik.icso, 1 400,r/- 4° 14al "WV toir C' % 6°° " • f WHIM . ,7s Pal1��'t!, % "4 firlifira 46 kyr 250-4.4. VSEC:........ '1 1 T.... Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook dog:`Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service • Page 53 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas Periods: EI# 1/1 i/i6 1/31 2/15 3/1 3/i6 3/31 4/15 4/30 5/15 5/30 6/14 6/29 7/14 7/29 8/13 8/28 9/12 9/27 to/1210/2711/11 11/26 12/11 12� 89 0 1 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 27 38 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 94 97 98 99 100 loo 100 90 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 21 29 37 46 54 6o 65 69 74 81 87 92 95 97 98 99 100 91 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 loo loo 100 92 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 6 16 29 39 46 53 6o 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 93 0 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 25 40 49 56 62 67 72 76 8o 85 91 97 98 99 99 100 94 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 21 29 38 47 53 57 61 65 70 76 83 88 91 94 96 98 100 95 0 1 3 5 7 9 11 14 18 27 35 41 46 51 57 62 68 73 79 84 89 93 96 98 loo 96 0 2 4 6 9 12 17 23 30 37 43 49 54 58 62 66 70 74 78 82 86 90 94 97 100 97 0 1 3 5 7 10 14 20 28 37 48 56 61 64 68 72 77 81 86 89 92 95 98 99 loo 106 0 3 6 9 13 17 21 27 33 38 44 49 55 61 67 71 75 78 81 84 86 90 94 97 100 * Each period begins on the date listed in the table above and lasts until the day before the following period. The final period begins on December ii and ends on December 31. Table adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703: "Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service J J Page 54 • TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: 4iy RN: Flu Notice of Intent (NOI) for an Authorization for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TCEQ TPDES General Permit TXR15 0000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the NOI form. Use the NOI Checklist to ensure all required information is completed correctly. Incomplete applications delay approval or result in automatic denial. Once processed your permit authorization can be viewed by entering the following link into your Internet browser: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm or you can contact TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700. ePERMITS Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ-20754). To submit an NOI electronically, enter the following web address into your internet browser and follow the instructions: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/index.cfm APPLICATION FEE AND PAYMENT The application fee for submitting a paper NOI is $325. The application fee for electronic submittal of a NOI through the TCEQ ePermits system(STEERS) is $225. Payment of the application fee can be submitted by mail or through the TCEQ ePay system. The payment and the NOI must be mailed to separate addresses. To access the TCEQ ePay system enter the following web address into your Internet browser: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay. Provide your payment information for verification of payment: • If payment was mailed to TCEQ, provide the following: o Check/Money Order Number: o Name printed on Check: • If payment was made via ePay, provide the following: o Voucher Number: o A copy of the payment voucher is attached to this paper NOI form. TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 1 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 0 RENEWAL(This portion of the NOI is not applicable after June 3, 2018) Is this NOI for a renewal of an existing authorization? ❑ Yes ❑ No If Yes, provide the authorization number here: TXR15 NOTE: If an authorization number is not provided, a new number will be assigned. SECTION 1. OPERATOR (.APPLIC.-\NT) a) If the applicant is currently a customer with TCEQ, what is the Customer Number (CN) issued to this entity? CN (Refer to Section 1.a) of the Instructions) b) What is the Legal Name of the entity (applicant) applying for this permit? (The legal name must be spelled exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State, County, or in the legal document forming the entity.) c) What is the contact information for the Operator (Responsible Authority)? Prefix (Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing Information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: d) Indicate the type of customer: ❑ Individual ❑ Federal Government ❑ Limited Partnership ❑ County Government ❑ General Partnership ❑ State Government ❑ Trust ❑ City Government ❑ Sole Proprietorship (D.B.A.) ❑ Other Government ❑ Corporation ❑ Other: ❑ Estate e) Is the applicant an independent operator? ❑ Yes ❑ No TCEQ-20022 (3/6/2018) Page 2 J Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 (If a governmental entity, a subsidiary, or part of a larger corporation, check No.) • f) Number of Employees. Select the range applicable to your company. 0 0-20 ❑ 251-500 d 21-100 0 501 or higher O 101-250 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers: (Required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. Not Required for Individuals, Government, or Sole Proprietors.) State Franchise Tax ID Number: Federal Tax ID: Texas Secretary of State Charter (filing) Number: DUNS Number(if known): SECTION 2. APPLICATION CONTACT Is the application contact the same as the applicant identified above? Yes, go to Section 3 0 No, complete this section Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credential: Organization Name: Phone Number: Fax Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: Internal Routing (Mail Code, Etc.): City, State, and Zip Code: Mailing information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: SECTION 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) If this is an existing permitted site, what is the Regulated Entity Number (RN) issued to this site? RN (Refer to Section 3.a) of the Instructions) TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 3 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 b) Name of project or site (the name known by the community where it's located): c) In your own words, briefly describe the type of construction occurring at the regulated site (residential, industrial, commercial, or other): d) County or Counties (if located in more than one): e) Latitude: Longitude: f) Site Address/Location If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section A: Street Number and Name: _ E ';i ' "_ City, State, and Zip Code: 1Mirir Section B. Location Description: City(or city nearest to)where the site is located Zip Code where the site is located: SECTION 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Is the project or site located on Indian Country Lands? ❑ Yes, do not submit this form. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. C! No b) Is your construction activity associated with a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources? CI Yes. Note: The construction stormwater runoff may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization through EPA Region 6. 13 No c) What is the Primary Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site? d) What is the Secondary SIC Code(s), if applicable? e) What is the total number of acres to be disturbed? f) Is the project part of a larger common plan of development or sale? TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 4 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 fFt 0 Yes 0 No. The total number of acres disturbed, provided in e) above, must be 5 or more. • If the total number of acres disturbed is less than 5, do not submit this form. See the requirements in the general permit for small construction sites. g) What is the estimated start date of the project? h) What is the estimated end date of the project? i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? 0 Yes 0 No j) What is the name of the first water body(ies) to receive the stormwater runoff or potential runoff from the site? k) What is the segment number(s) of the classified water body(ies) that the discharge will eventually reach? 1) Is the discharge into a Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)? ❑ Yes ❑ No If Yes, provide the name of the MS4 operator: Note: The general permit requires you to send a copy of this NOI form to the MS4 operator. m) Is the discharge or potential discharge from the site within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, as defined in 30 TAC Chapter 213? E Yes, complete the certification below. No, go to Section 5 I certify that the copy of the TCEQ approved Plan required by the Edwards Aquifer Rule (30 TAC Chapter 213) that is included or referenced in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan will be implemented. 0 Yes SECTION 5. NOI CERTIFICATION a) I certify that I have obtained a copy and understand the terms and conditions of the a� Construction General Permit (TXR150000). �s] Yes b) I certify that the full legal name of the entity applying for this permit has been provided and is legally authorized to do business in Texas. Yes c) I understand that a Notice of Termination(NOT) must be submitted when this authorization is no longer needed. 0 Yes d) I certify that a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan has been developed, will be implemented prior to construction and to the best of my knowledge and belief is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans, as required in the Construction General Permit (TXR150000). 0 Yes Note: For multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3, the confirmation of an operator may be limited to its obligations under the SWP3, provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator. • TCEQ-20022(3/6/2018) Page 5 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 SECTION 6. APPLICANT CERTIFICATION SIGNATURE Operator Signatory Name: Operator Signatory Title: ., ,, I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature (use blue ink): Date: TM-20022(3/6/2018) Page 6 Notice of Intent for Construction Stormwater Discharges under TXR150000 NOTICE OF INTENT CHECKLIST (TXR15 0000) Did you complete everything? Use this checklist to be sure! Are you ready to mail your form to TCEQ? Go to the General Information Section of the Instructions for mailing addresses. Confirm each item (or applicable item) in this form is complete. This checklist is for use by the applicant to ensure a complete application is being submitted. Missing information may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. (See NOI process description in the General Information and Instructions.) APPLICATION FEE If paying by check: ❑ Check was mailed separately to the TCEQs Cashier's Office. (See Instructions for Cashier's address and Application address.) ❑ Check number and name on check is provided in this application. If using ePay: ❑ The voucher number is provided in this application and a copy of the voucher is attached. RENEWAL ❑ If this application is for renewal of an existing authorization, the authorization number is Cre provided. OPERATOR INFORMATION ❑ Customer Number (CN) issued by TCEQ Central Registry ❑ Legal name as filed to do business in Texas. (Call TX SOS 512-463-5555 to verify.) ❑ Name and title of responsible authority signing the application. ❑ Phone number and e-mail address ❑ Mailing address is complete & verifiable with USPS. Nvww.usps.com ❑ Type of operator (entity type). Is applicant an independent operator? ❑ Number of employees. ❑ For corporations or limited partnerships - Tax ID and SOS filing numbers. ❑ Application contact and address is complete &verifiable with USPS. http://www.usps.com REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE ❑ Regulated Entity Number (RN) (if site is already regulated by TCEQ) ❑ Site/project name and construction activity description ❑ County I (tio 0 Latitude and longitude http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sqmaview.html TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 1 ❑ Site Address/Location. Do not use a rural route or post office box. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ❑ Indian Country Lands -the facility is not on Indian Country Lands. ❑ Construction activity related to facility associated to oil, gas, or geothermal resources ❑ Primary SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site. www.osha.gov/oshstats/sicser.html ❑ Estimated starting and ending dates of the project. ❑ Confirmation of concrete truck washout. ❑ Acres disturbed is provided and qualifies for coverage through a NOI. ❑ Common plan of development or sale. ❑ Receiving water body or water bodies. ❑ Segment number or numbers. ❑ MS4 operator. ❑ Edwards Aquifer rule. CERTIFICATION ❑ Certification statements have been checked indicating Yes. ❑ Signature meets 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44 and is original. J TCEQ-20022 Checklist (03/06/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent (NOI) for ,., Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR150000) GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Intent (NOI): By Regular Mail: By Overnight or Express Mail: TCEQ TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) P.O. Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, Texas 78711-3087 Austin, TX Application Fee: The application fee of $325 is required to be paid at the time the NOI is submitted. Failure to submit payment at the time the application is filed will cause delays in acknowledgment or denial of coverage under the general permit. Payment of the fee may be made by check or money order, payable to TCEQ, or through EPAY (electronic payment through the web). Mailed Payments: Use the attached General Permit Payment Submittal Form. The application fee is submitted to a different address than the NOI. Read the General Permit Payment Submittal Form for further instructions, including the address to send the payment. ePAY Electronic Payment: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay When making the payment you must select Water Quality, and then select the fee category "General Permit Construction Storm Water Discharge NOI Application". You must include a copy of the payment voucher with your NOI. Your NOI will not be considered complete without the payment voucher. TCEQ Contact List: Application - status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management - obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases (as available): 512-239-DATA (3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Intent Process: When your NOI is received by the program, the form will be processed as follows: • Administrative Review: Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response. In addition, the operator's legal name must be verified with Texas Secretary of State as valid and active (if applicable). The address(es) on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as receiving regular mail delivery. Do not give an overnight/express 11 (p, mailing address. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a notice of deficiency (NOD) will be mailed to the operator. The operator will have 30 days to respond to the NOD. The response will be reviewed for completeness. • Acknowledgment of Coverage: An Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator. This certificate acknowledges coverage under the general permit. or Denial of Coverage: If the operator fails to respond to the NOD or the response is inadequate, coverage under the general permit may be denied. If coverage is denied, the operator will be notified. General Permit (Your Permit) For NOIs submitted electronically through ePermits, provisional coverage under the general permit begins immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI form by the TCEQ. For paper NOIs, provisional coverage under the general permit begins 7 days after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application. You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage, on the TCEQ web site http://www.tceq.texas.gov. Search using keyword TXR150000. Change in Operator An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated project or site changes, the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted no later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. TCEQ Central Registry Core Data Form The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a Core Data Form to TCEQ. After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit, the program will assign a Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number, if one has not already been assigned to this customer or site. For existing customers and sites, you can find the Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number by entering the following web address into your Internet browser: http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/ or you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. On the website, you can search by your permit number, the Regulated Entity(RN)number, or the Customer Number(CN). If you do not know these numbers, you can select "Advanced Search" to search by permittee name, site address, etc. The Customer (Permittee) is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ and for updating all CN and RN data for all authorizations as changes occur.For this permit, a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. 411 TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE NOI FORM • Renewal of General Permit. Dischargers holding active authorizations under the expired General Permit are required to submit a NOI to continue coverage. The existing permit number is required. If the permit number is not provided or has been terminated, expired, or denied, a new permit number will be issued. Section 1. OPERATOR (APPLICANT) a) Customer Number (CN) TCEQ's Central Registry will assign each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. If the applicant is an existing TCEQ customer, the Customer Number is available at the following website: http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If the applicant is not an existing TCEQ customer, leave the space for CN blank. b) Legal Name of Applicant Provide the current legal name of the applicant. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State(SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, as filed in the county. You may contact the SOS at 512-463-5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county, provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name. c) Contact Information for the Applicant (Responsible Authority) Provide information for the person signing the application in the Certification section. • This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website: https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the applicant. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the applicant. d) Type of Customer(Entity Type) Check only one box that identifies the type of entity. Use the descriptions below to identify the appropriate entity type. Note that the selected entity type also indicates the name that must be provided as an applicant for an authorization. Individual An individual is a customer who has not established a business, but conducts an activity that needs to be regulated by the TCEQ. Partnership A customer that is established as a partnership as defined by the Texas Secretary of State Office(TX SOS). If the customer is a 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' filed in the county (not filed with TX SOS), the legal name of each partner forming the 'General Partnership' or 'Joint Venture' must be provided. Each 'legal entity' • must apply as a co-applicant. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Trust or Estate A trust and an estate are fiduciary relationships governing the trustee/executor with respect to the trust/estate property. �•/ Sole Proprietorship (DBA) A sole proprietorship is a customer that is owned by only one person and has not been incorporated. This business may: 1. be under the person's name 2. have its own name (doing business as or DBA) 3. have any number of employees. If the customer is a Sole Proprietorship or DBA, the `legal name' of the individual business `owner' must be provided. The DBA name is not recognized as the 'legal name' of the entity. The DBA name may be used for the site name (regulated entity). Corporation A customer that meets all of these conditions: 1. is a legally incorporated entity under the laws of any state or country 2. is recognized as a corporation by the Texas Secretary of State 3. has proper operating authority to operate in Texas The corporation's `legal name' as filed with the Texas Secretary of State must be provided as applicant. An `assumed' name of a corporation is not recognized as the `legal name' of the entity. Government Federal, state, county, or city government (as appropriate) The customer is either an agency of one of these levels of government or the governmental body itself. The government agency's `legal name' must be provided as the applicant. A department name or other description of the organization is not recognized as the `legal name'. Other This may include a utility district, water district, tribal government, college district, council of governments, or river authority. Provide the specific type of government. e) Independent Entity Check No if this customer is a subsidiary, part of a larger company, or is a governmental entity. Otherwise, check Yes. f) Number of Employees Check one box to show the number of employees for this customer's entire company, at all locations. This is not necessarily the number of employees at the site named in the application. TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers 4110 These are required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. These are not required for Individuals, Government, and Sole Proprietors. State Franchise Tax ID Number Corporations and limited liability companies that operate in Texas are issued a franchise tax identification number. If this customer is a corporation or limited liability company, enter the Tax ID number. Federal Tax ID All businesses, except for some small sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships should have a federal taxpayer identification number(TIN). Enter this number here. Use no prefixes, dashes, or hyphens. Sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships do not need to provide a federal tax ID. TX SOS Charter (filing) Number Corporations and Limited Partnerships required to register with the Texas Secretary of State are issued a charter or filing number. You may obtain further information by calling SOS at 512-463-5555. DUNS Number Most businesses have a DUNS (Data Universal Numbering System) number issued by Dun and Bradstreet Corp. If this customer has one, enter it here. Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT • Provide the name and contact information for the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. REGULA IED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SUE a) Regulated Entity Number (RN) The RN is issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity is regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. Search TCEQ's Central Registry to see if the site has an assigned RN at http://wwwl5.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/. If this regulated entity has not been assigned an RN, leave this space blank. If the site of your business is part of a larger business site, an RN may already be assigned for the larger site. Use the RN assigned for the larger site. If the site is found, provide the assigned RN and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. An example is a chemical plant where a unit is owned or operated by a separate corporation that is accessible by the same physical address of your unit or facility. Other examples include industrial parks identified by one common address but different corporations have control of defined areas within the site. In both cases, an RN would be assigned for the physical address location and the permitted sites would be identified separately under the same RN. • TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 5 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site or project as known by the public in the area where the site is located. The name you provide on this application will be used in the TCEQ Central Registry as the Regulated Entity name. c) Description of Activity Regulated In your own words, briefly describe the primary business that you are doing that requires this authorization. Do not repeat the SIC Code description. d) County Provide the name of the county where the site or project is located. If the site or project is located in more than one county, provide the county names as secondary. e) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal form. For help obtaining the latitude and longitude, go to: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sqmaview.html. f) Site Address/Location If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site in Section A. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address, you may need to validate the address with your local police (911 service) or through an online map site used to locate a site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name, provide a complete written location description in Section B. For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city (or nearest city) and zip code of the site location. Section 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Indian Country Lands If your site is located on Indian Country Lands, the TCEQ does not have authority to process your application. You must obtain authorization through EPA Region 6, Dallas. Do not submit this form to TCEQ. b) Construction activity associated with facility associated with exploration, development, or production of oil, gas, or geothermal resources If your activity is associated with oil and gas exploration, development, or production, you may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas (RRC) and may need to obtain authorization from EPA Region 6. Construction activities associated with a facility related to oil, gas or geothermal resources may include the construction of a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 6 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 carbon dioxide geologic storage facility; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution • pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. Where required by federal law, discharges of stormwater associated with construction activities under the RRC's jurisdiction must be authorized by the EPA and the RRC, as applicable. Activities under RRC jurisdiction include construction of a facility that, when completed, would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, such as a well site; treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility under the jurisdiction of the RRC; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids, prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. The RRC also has jurisdiction over stormwater from land disturbance associated with a site survey that is conducted prior to construction of a facility that would be regulated by the RRC. Under 33 U.S.C. §1342(1)(2) and §1362(24), EPA cannot require a permit for discharges of stormwater from field activities or operations associated with {oil and gas} exploration, production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities, including activities necessary to prepare a site for drilling and for the movement and placement of drilling equipment, whether or not such field activities or operations may be considered to be construction activities unless the discharge is III contaminated by contact with any overburden, raw material, intermediate product, finished product,byproduct, or waste product located on the site of the facility. Under §3.8 of this title (relating to Water Protection), the RRC prohibits operators from causing or allowing pollution of surface or subsurface water. Operators are encouraged to implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs) to minimize discharges of pollutants, including sediment, in stormwater during construction activities to help ensure protection of surface water quality during storm events. For more information about the jurisdictions of the RRC and the TCEQ read the Memorandum of Understanding (MOU)between the RRC and TCEQ at 16 Texas Administrative Code, Part 1, Chapter 3, Rule 3.30, by entering the following link into an internet browser: http://texreg.sos.state.tx.us/public/readtac$ext.TacPage?s1=R&app=9&p_dir=&p_rloc= &p_tloc=&p_ploc=&pg=1&p_tac=&ti=16&pt=1&ch=3&r1=30 or contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 for additional information. c) Primary Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code Provide the SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at this site. Common SIC Codes related to construction activities include: • 1521 - Construction of Single Family Homes • 1522 - Construction of Residential Buildings Other than Single Family Homes • 1541 - Construction of Industrial Buildings and Warehouses • TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 7 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 • 1542 - Construction of Non-residential Buildings, other than Industrial Buildings and Warehouses • 1611 - Highway and Street Construction, except Highway Construction • 1622 - Bridge, Tunnel, and Elevated Highway Construction • 1623 -Water, Sewer, Pipeline and Communications, and Power Line Construction For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Local Government Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. d) Secondary SIC Code Secondary SIC Code(s)may be provided. Leave this blank if not applicable. For help with SIC Codes, enter the following link into your internet browser: http://www.osha.gov/pls/imis/sicsearch.html or you can contact the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance Section at 800-447-2827 for assistance. e) Total Number of Acres Disturbed Provide the approximate number of acres that the construction site will disturb. Construction activities that disturb less than one acre, unless they are part of a larger common plan that disturbs more than one acre, do not require permit coverage. Construction activities that disturb between one and five acres, unless they are part of a common plan that disturbs more than five acres, do not require submission of an NOI. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. If you have any questions about this item, please contact the stormwater technical staff by phone at 512-239-4671 or by email at swgp@tceq.texas.gov. f) Common Plan of Development Construction activities that disturb less than five acres do not require submission of an NOI unless they are part of a common plan of development or for sale where the area disturbed is five or more acres. Therefore, the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. For more information on what a common plan of development is, refer to the definition of"Common Plan of Development" in the Definitions section of the general permit or enter the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/permitting/stormwater/common_plan_of_development_steps.html For further information, go to the TCEQ stormwater construction webpage enter the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction and search for "Additional Guidance and Quick Links If you have any further questions about the Common Plan of Development you can contact the TCEQ Stormwater Team at 512-239-4671 or the TCEQ Small Business and Environmental Assistance at 800-447- 2827. • TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 8 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 g) Estimated Start Date of the Project 5 This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity is initiated at the site. If renewing the permit provide the original start date of when construction activity for this project began. h) Estimated End Date of the Project This is the date that any construction activity or construction support activity will end and final stabilization will be achieved at the site. i) Will concrete truck washout be performed at the site? Indicate if you expect that operators of concrete trucks will washout concrete trucks at the construction site. j) Identify the water body(s) receiving stormwater runoff The stormwater may be discharged directly to a receiving stream or through a MS4 from your site. It eventually reaches a receiving water body such as a local stream or lake, possibly via a drainage ditch.You must provide the name of the water body that receives the discharge from the site(a local stream or lake). If your site has more than one outfall you need to include the name of the first water body for each outfall, if they are different. k) Identify the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s) Identify the classified segment number(s) receiving a discharge directly or indirectly. Enter the following link into your internet browser to find the segment number of the • classified water body where stormwater will flow from the site: www.tceq.texas.gov/waterquality/monitoring/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. You may also find the segment number in TCEQ publication GI-316 by entering the following link into your internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/publications/gi/gi-316 or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at (512) 239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge is into an unclassified receiving water and then crosses state lines prior to entering a classified segment, select the appropriate watershed: • 0100 (Canadian River Basin) • 0200(Red River Basin) • 0300(Sulfur River Basin) • 0400 (Cypress Creek Basin) • 0500 (Sabine River Basin) Call the Water Quality Assessments section at 512-239-4671 for further assistance. 1) Discharge into MS4 - Identify the MS4 Operator The discharge may initially be into a municipal separate storm sewer system(MS4). If the stormwater discharge is into an MS4, provide the name of the entity that operates the MS4 where the stormwater discharges. An MS4 operator is often a city, town, county, or utility district, but possibly can be another form of government. Please note • that the Construction General Permit requires the Operator to supply the MS4 with a TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 9 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 copy of the NOI submitted to TCEQ. For assistance, you may call the technical staff at 512-239-4671. m) Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone and Certification The general permit requires the approved Contributing Zone Plan or Water Pollution Abatement Plan to be included or referenced as a part of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. See maps on the TCEQ website to determine if the site is located within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer by entering the following link into an internet browser: w'ww.tceq.texas.gov/field/eapp/viewer.html or by contacting the TCEQ Water Quality Division at 512-239-4671 for assistance. If the discharge or potential discharge is within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, a site-specific authorization approved by the Executive Director under the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program (30 TAC Chapter 213) is required before construction can begin. For questions regarding the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program, contact the appropriate TCEQ Regional Office. For projects in Hays, Travis and Williamson Counties: Austin Regional Office, 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, 512-339- 2929. For Projects in Bexar, Comal, Kinney, Medina and Uvalde Counties: TCEQ San Antonio Regional Office, 14250 Judson Rd., San Antonio, TX 78233-4480, 210-490- 3096. Section 5. NOI CERTIFICATION Note: Failure to indicate Yes to all of the certification items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) Certification of Understanding the Terms and Conditions of Construction General Permit (TXR150000) Provisional coverage under the Construction General Permit (TXR150000)begins 7 days after the completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. Electronic applications submitted through ePermits have immediate provisional coverage. You must obtain a copy and read the Construction General Permit before submitting your application. You may view and print the Construction General Permit for which you are seeking coverage at the TCEQ web site by entering the following link into an internet browser: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction or you may contact the TCEQ Stormwater processing Center at 512-239-3700 for assistance. b) Certification of Legal Name The full legal name of the applicant as authorized to do business in Texas is required. The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity, that is filed in the county where doing business. You may contact the SOS at 512-463 5555, for more information related to filing in Texas. c) Understanding of Notice of Termination A permittee shall terminate coverage under the Construction General Permit through the submittal of a NOT when the operator of the facility changes, final stabilization has TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 10 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 been reached, the discharge becomes authorized under an individual permit, or the construction activity never began at this site. d) Certification of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan The SWP3 identifies the areas and activities that could produce contaminated runoff at your site and then tells how you will ensure that this contamination is mitigated. For example, in describing your mitigation measures, your site's plan might identify the devices that collect and filter stormwater, tell how those devices are to be maintained, and tell how frequently that maintenance is to be carried out. You must develop this plan in accordance with the TCEQ general permit requirements. This plan must be developed and implemented before you complete this NOI. The SWP3 must be available for a TCEQ investigator to review on request. Section 6. APPLICANT CERIIF1CATION SIGNATURE The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §305.44. If you are a corporation: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(1)(see below). According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. If you are a municipality or other government entity: • The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a)(3)(see below).According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity, it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statute(s)under which your government entity was formed. An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation. By signing the NOI or similar form, you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above, please contact the TCEQ's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. • TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 11 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. Signatories to Applications (a)All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation, the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision- making functions for the corporation; or the manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2)For a partnership or sole proprietorship, the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor, respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency, the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph, a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g., regional administrator of the EPA). 411 TCEQ 20022 (3/6/2018) Page 12 Instructions for Notice of Intent for TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. Instructions: • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form Filth your NO1 form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOL Mail this form and your check to either of the following: By Regular US. Mail By Overnight or Express Mail Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, TX 78711-3088 Austin, TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXR150000 1. Check or Money Order No: 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI Information: If the check is for more than one NOI, list each Project or Site (RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. Do not submit a copy of the NOI with this form, as it could cause duplicate permit application entries! If there is not enough space on the form to list all of the projects or sites the authorization will cover, then attach a list of the additional sites. Project/Site (RE) Name: Project/Site (RE) Physical Address: Staple the check or money order to this form in this space. ty TCEQ-20134 (03/06/2018) Page 1 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form .. Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you are mailing your payment. • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOI. Mail this form and your check to: BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office,MC-214 Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3088 Austin,TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXG920000 1. Check/ Money Order No: YY 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI INFORMATION If the check is for more than one NOI,list each Project/Site (RE)Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. DO NOT SUBMIT A COPY OF THE NOI WITH THIS FORM AS IT COULD CAUSE DUPLICATE PERMIT ENTRIES. See Attached List of Sites(If more space is needed,you may attach a list.) Project/Site (RE)Name: Project/Site(RE)Physical Address: YYuY Staple Check in This Space J TCEQ-20134(04/13/2006) Page 1 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No: CN: RN: Region: 410, `� Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TCE12 TPDES General Permit TXR150000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION: Please read and use the General Information and Instructions prior to filling out each question in the form. Effective September 1, 2018, this paper form must be submitted to TCEQ with a completed electronic reporting waiver form(TCEQ-20754). ePermits: This form is available on our online permitting system. Sign up for online permitting at: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/ What is the permit number to be terminated? TXR15 TXRCW Section 1. OPERATOR (Permittee) a) What is the Customer Number(CN)issued to this entity? CN b) What is the Legal Name of the current permittee? c) Provide the contact information for the Operator(Responsible Authority). Prefix(Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: Section 2. APPLICATION CONTACT This is the person TCEQ will contact if additional information is needed regarding this application. Is the application contact the same as the permittee identified above? 0 Yes, go to Section 3. 0 No, complete section below TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Notice of Termination for TXR130000 Prefix(Mr. Ms. or Miss): First and Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credentials: Phone Number: Fax Number: Email: Mailing Address: City, State, and Zip Code: Country Mailing Information, if outside USA: Section 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) TCEQ issued RE Reference Number(RN): RN b) Name of project or site as known by the local community: c) County,or counties if more than 1: d) Latitude: Longitude: e) Site Address/Location: If the site has a physical address such as 12100 Park 35 Circle, Austin, TX 78753, complete Section 3A. If the site does not have a physical address, provide a location description in Section 3B. Example: located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1. Section 3A:Physical Address of Project or Site: Street Number and Name: City, State, and Zip Code: Section 3B: Site Location Description: Location description: City where the site is located or, if not in a city, what is the nearest city: Zip Code where the site is located: Section 4. REASON FOR TERMINATION Check the reason for termination: 0 Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the Operator and all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have been removed, or scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3. 0 Another permitted Operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized, and temporary erosion controls that have been identified in the SWP3 have been transferred to the new Operator. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 0 The discharge is now authorized under an alternate TPDES permit. a The activity never began at this site that is regulated under the general permit. Section 5. CERTIFICATION Signatory Name: Signatory Title: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true,accurate, and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature(use blue ink): Date: • TCEQ 20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Instructions for Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TPDES General Permit TXR150000 J GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Termination(NOT): BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL: BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL: Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center(MC-228) Stormwater Processing Center(MC-228) P.O.Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin, Texas 78711-3087 Austin, TX 78753 TCEQ Contact List: Application status and form questions: 512-239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512-239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512-239-0600 Records Management- obtain copies of forms: 512-239-0900 Reports from databases(as available): 512-239-DATA(3282) Cashier's office: 512-239-0357 or 512-239-0187 Notice of Termination Process: A Notice of Termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. When your NOT is received by the program, the form will be processed as follows: 1) Administrative Review: The form will be reviewed to confirm the following: 4111) • the permit number is provided; • the permit is active and has been approved; • the entity terminating the permit is the current permittee; • the site information matches the original permit record; and • the form has the required original signature with title and date. 2) Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a phone call will be made to the applicant to clear the deficiency. A letter will not be sent to the permittee if unable to process the form. 3) Confirmation of Termination: A Notice of Termination Confirmation letter will be mailed to the operator. Chan:e in O s erator: An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted not later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE FORM The majority of permit information related to the current operator and regulated entity are available at the following website:http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 1 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 1. O.erator (Current Permittee): • a) Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry assigns each customer a number that begins with CN, followed by nine digits. This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. The Customer Number, for the current permittee,is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. b) Legal Name of Operator The operator must be the same entity as previously submitted on the original Notice of Intent for the permit number provided.The current operator name, as provided on the current authorization, is available at the following website: httn://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. c) Contact Information for the Operator (Responsible Authority) Provide information for person signing the NOT application in the Certification section. This person is also referred to as the Responsible Authority. Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. Update the address if different than previously submitted for the Notice of Intent or Notice of Change. The mailing address must be recognized by the US Postal Service. You may verify the address on the following website:https://tools.usps.com/go/ZipLookupAction!input.action. The phone number should provide contact to the operator. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the operator. • Section 2. A. •lication Contact: Provide the name,title and contact information of the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. Section 3. Re: lated Entit 7 (RE) Information on Pro'ect or Site: a) Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) A number issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites where an activity regulated by TCEQ. This is not a permit number,registration number,or license number. The Regulated Entity Reference Number is available at the following website: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq_dpa/index.cfm. b) Name of the Project or Site Provide the name of the site as known by the public in the area where the site is located. c) County Identify the county or counties in which the regulated entity is located. d) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees,minutes,and seconds or decimal form. The latitude and longitude as provided on the current authorization is available at the following website: http://www2.tcea.texas.gov/wa_dna/index.cfm. e) Site/Project(RE)Physical Address/Location Information • The physical address/location information, as provided on the current authorization,is available at the following website:httn://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wa_dpa/index.cfm. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 2 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 Section 3A. If a site has an address that includes a street number and street name, enter the complete address for the site. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address,you may need to validate the address with your local police(911 service)or through an online map site used to locate the site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. Section 3B.If a site does not have an address that includes a street number and street name,provide a complete written location description.For example: "The site is located on the north side of FM 123, 2 miles west of the intersection of FM 123 and Highway 1." Provide the city(or nearest city) and Zip Code of the facility location. Section 4. Reason for Termination: The Notice of Termination form is only for use to terminate the authorization(permit). The Permittee must indicate the specific reason for terminating by checking one of the options. If the reason is not listed then provide an attachment that explains the reason for termination. Please read your general permit carefully to determine when to terminate your permit. Permits will not be reactivated after submitting a termination form. The termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. Section 5. Certification: The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. IF YOUAREA CORPORATION: J The regulation that controls who may sign an application form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a),which is provided below. According to this code provision,any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOUAREA MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44(a),which is provided below. According to this code provision,only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity,it may be beneficial to consult your city charter,county or city ordinances,or the Texas statutes under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3). The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation.By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at 512-239-0600. TCEQ-20023 (03/09/2018) Page 3 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44. Signatories to Applications • (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph,a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary,treasurer,or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function,or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation;or the manager of one or more manufacturing,production,or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding$25 million(in second-quarter 1980 dollars),if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor,respectively. (3) For a municipality, state, federal, or other public agency,the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g.,regional administrator of the EPA). III III TCEQ 20023 (03/09/2018) Page 4 Instructions for Notice of Termination for TXR150000 smor M AIMIIMIP AIM "vii) LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "PRIMARY OPERA TOR"NOTICE This notice applies to construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://wwvv.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq_construction.html Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: - 111.111. OW NM MMII ,.... Ma. I mr 0 ___ _ -,,,.:01 I LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "SECONDARY OPERA TOR " NOTICE This notice applies to secondary operators of construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://wvvw.tceq.state.tx.usinav/permits/wq_construction.html 411• e-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: erator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3): For Large Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.3. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.3. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. • Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part ILF.3. s� 1111111111111 '41111=11111 I MEM s , s i 7 IIIIIII" VS SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3. 0 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION Section 01566 SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Descriptions of measures and practices, in response to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, which shall be used on the Work to eliminate or significantly minimize pollutants in discharges into Surface Water in the State by controlling erosion and sediments at their source. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01550—Stabilized Construction Exit 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls C Definitions: 1. Potential Water Pollutant-any substance that could potentially alter the physical, thermal, chemical, or biological quality of the Surface Water in the State, rendering the water harmful, detrimental,or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property, or to public health, safety or welfare, or • impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. 1.02 MEAUSREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Plans and this Technical Specification. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control • measures and practices that operate effectively and as specified in the Plans and in this or other Technical Specifications. 07/2006 01566- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION D Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on tik areas outside of the limits of construction or dedicated rights-of-way and easements. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing, hauling, and disposing of spoil, silt, waste materials, and contaminated material resulting from erosion and sediment control measures as specified in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.02 EXPOSED SOIL A When soil is exposed as a result of clearing,grading,excavating,stockpiling,or other soil disturbing activities, the Contractor shall implement measures to effectively control erosion and prevent the escape of sediments from the Project Site. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Preserve existing vegetation to the extent possible. 2. Construct drainage swales, berms, or sediment basins. 3. Maintain grades to minimize the velocity of sheet flow over disturbed areas and promote evaporation and infiltration of storm water directly into the ground. 4. Install filter fabric fences or barriers, sediment traps, seepage basins, gabions, or storm drain inlet protection devices. 5. Utilize vegetative buffer strips, mulching, or riprap C When the placement of topsoil,bank sand,or other soil material is specified,after an area has been brought to grade and immediately prior to placement, loosen the subgrade discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 2 inches to permit bonding to the subsoil. D When all soil disturbing activities have been completed, establish a perennial vegetative cover on all areas that are not paved, covered by permanent structures, or otherwise permanently stabilized. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A Implement control measures to minimize dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. B Control blowing dust by using one or more of the following measures: 1. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 4. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 07/2006 01566-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION • 5. Barriers using solid board fences, burlap fences,crate walls,bales of hay, or similar materials. C Implement dust control measures immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the Project Site. 3.04 DEMOLITION AREAS A Demolition activities which create large amounts of dust with significant concentrations of heavy metals or other potential water pollutants shall use methods described in this Section,3.03"Dust Control",to limit transport of airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust contaminated with heavy metals or potential water pollutants shall be retained on the Project Site and shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems by the appropriate use of control measures described in this Section. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRACKING A Minimize off-site tracking of sediments and the generation of dust by construction vehicles, keeping the streets clean or construction debris and mud, by implementing one or more of the following control measures: • 1. Restrict all ingress and egress to stabilized construction exits. 2. Stabilize areas used for staging, parking, storage or disposal. 3. Stabilize on-site vehicle transportation routes. 4. Remove mud and other debris, washing if necessary, from vehicles prior to entrance onto public roadways from the Project Site. 5. Maintain grade to minimize the occurrence of mud on the Project Site. B Construct stabilized construction areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. C In addition to Stabilized Construction Exits shovel or sweep the pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water-hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off of the street into adjacent areas is not allowed. 3.06 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A Control equipment maintenance and repair so that oils,gasoline,grease,solvents,and other potential water pollutants cannot be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment • 2. to areas specifically designated for that purpose. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. 07/2006 01566-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 3. Clean and inspect maintenance and repair areas daily. 4. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 5. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 6. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 7. Isolate areas of contaminated soil or other materials to facilitate proper removal and disposal. C Where effective control measures are not feasible,equipment shall be taken off-site for maintenance and repair. 3.07 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL A Conduct operations in conformance with the plan provided in Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal and utilize such control measures,described in this Section,as may be necessary to eliminate or significantly reduce the discharge of possible water pollutants from the Project Site as a result of waste collection and disposal. B Keep receptacles and waste collection areas neat and orderly to the extent possible. Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate from day-to-day. Locate trash collection points where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff. 3.08 WASHING AREAS A Vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow directly into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Designate special areas for washing vehicles. 2. Locate these areas where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. 3. Beneath wash areas construct a gravel or rock base to minimize mud production. B Construct washing areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. 3.09 STORAGE AND USAGE OF POTENTIAL WATER POLLUTANTS A Store and use potential water pollutants such as pesticides,fertilizers,distillate fuels, lubricants, solvents, cements, paints, acids, caustics, and other toxic substances in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines, Material Safety Data Sheets, and with local, state, and federal regulations. • 07/2006 01566-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION • B Isolate these substances in areas where they are to be stored,opened or used such that they will not cause pollution of runoff from the Project Site. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 2. Store containers on raised platforms. 3. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 4. Provide protective cover or weather proof enclosure. 5. Minimize accidental spillage. 6. Keep containers tightly closed. 7. Periodically inspect containers for leakage. 8. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 9. Provide berms, filter fabric fences or barriers, or sediment basins. 10. Designate washing areas for containers and other items that have come in contact with potential water pollutants. C Avoid overuse of substances such as pesticides and fertilizers which could produce contaminated runoff. 3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A Provide the Project Site with adequate portable toilets for workers in accordance with • Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls,and applicable health regulations. B Control areas where sanitary facilities are located so that sewage or chemicals will not be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems by using one or more of the following measures. 1. Inspect the facilities daily. 2. Service the facilities as often as necessary to maintain cleanliness and prevent overflows. 3. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate 4. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area END OF SECTION 07/2006 01566-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Section 01570 • TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench safety system for excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) E. Definitions: 1. Trench. A narrow excavation(in relation to its depth)made below the surface of the ground. In general,the depth is greater than the width,but the width of a trench(measured at the bottom)is not greater than 15 feet. 2. Trench safety system requirements apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent to a trench as defined. 3. Trench safety systems include both Protective Systems and Shoring Systems but are not limited to sloping, sheeting,trench boxes or trench shields, slide rail systems, sheet piling, cribbing,bracing, shoring,dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. tir 5/2013 01570- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM a. Protective System: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of an adjacent structure. b. Shoring System: A structure, which supports the sides of an excavation, to prevent cave-ins, maintain stable soil conditions, or to prevent movements of the ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements. c. Special Shoring: A shoring system meeting Special Shoring Requirements for locations identified on the Plans. 4. Competent Person-one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary,hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for trench safety systems used on utility excavations is on a linear foot basis,measured along the centerline of the trench. Payment for trench safety systems includes payment for manholes and other line structures. B. Unless indicated in as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for shoring systems 410 under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for trench safety systems. C. If shown on the Plans and included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as a separate Bid Item, Measurement and Payment for Special Shoring system installation for trench excavation is on a square foot basis,measured and completed in place. D. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on structural excavations under this Section. Include cost for trench safety system used on structural excavations in applicable structure installation. E. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on roadway excavation or embankment under this Section. Include cost in applicable Sections. F. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a safety plan specifically for the construction of trench excavation,excavation ID of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of 5/2013 01570-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. Design the Trench Safety Plan to be in accordance with OSHA Standards - 29CFR governing the presence and activities of cor individuals working in and around trench excavations, and in accordance with any Special Shoring requirements at locations shown on the Plans. Include in the plan, submittal of the contact information for the Competent Person. C. Have Shop Drawings for trench safety systems sealed, as required by OSHA, by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the provision of Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring,OSHA Standards-29 CFR,Part 1926,Subpart P, as amended,including Final Rule,published in the Federal Register Vol.54,No.209 on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these Technical Specifications,by reference, include Standard 1926.650—652. B. A reproduction of the OSHA Standards — 29 CFR included in Subpart P — "Excavations"from the Federal Register Vol. 54,No. 209 is available upon request to Contractors bidding on the Work. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the reproduction. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of this ® section of the Federal Register. C. Include in the Trench Safety Program measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),ofthe Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970—20 USC 654 which states,`Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." D. Legislation that has been enacted by the State of Texas with regard to Trench Safety Systems is hereby incorporated,by reference, into these specifications. Under Texas Statutes, refer to Chapter 756 of the Health and Safety Code, SUBCHAPTER C. TRENCH SAFETY. E. Reference materials,if developed for this Work, will be issued by the Engineer along with the Bid Documents, including the following: 1. Geotechnical information obtained for use in design of the trench safety system. 2. Special Shoring Requirements. 1.05 INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees, and agents, from any and all damages, costs(including,without limitation,legal fees,court costs, and the cost of investigation),judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of 5/2013 01570-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner in case the Owner is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with the Contract Documents and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under state and federal trench safety laws. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards—29 CFR. B. Specially designed trench safety systems shall be installed in accordance with the Contractor's trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. Install Special Shoring at the locations shown on the Plans. D. Obtain verification from a Competent Person,defined in this Section and as identified in the Contractor's Trench Safety Program, that trench boxes and other pre- manufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Conduct daily inspections by Contractor or Contractor's independently retained consultant, of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA Standards—29 CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. 5/2013 01570-4of5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL IIIA. Verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the Work. END OF SECTION • • 5/2013 01570-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS IISection 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 - Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current,payment will be made by change order. III C. Skid-mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Post-mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer,at no additional cost to the City. If a post-mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post-mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance: Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker: Experienced as a professional sign company. D. Sign Placement: Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer. The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre-construction Meeting. 1. A linear project is one involving paving,overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage,or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A III 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects: Provide one project identification sign. 3. Multiple Sites: Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4. Sign Relocation: As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer. E. Alternate Skid-mounted Sign Construction: Post-mounted signs are preferred,but skid-mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another. The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid-mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. 2.0 PRODUCTS (10 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: All sign materials shall be new. 1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND. 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing: 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3. Skid Members: 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4. Fasteners: a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer. c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match sign background B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall • be an industrial grade,fast-drying,oil-based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural 10/2014 01580-2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS and framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign • and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D. Colors: Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-construction Meeting or as described in part 1.03 of this Section. Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D. If mounted on posts, sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing grade for mounting of • the sign and header. E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION (10 10/2014 01580-3 a CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN 3 EXHIBIT ya First LAIF Impression ..1P..a M.......4 TA...ati.&..e PROJECT NAME LOCATED HERE pT. Y »A., PROJECT NO. 12345678 Capital Improvement CITY OF PEARLAND Signage Layout CAPTTAI PROJECT PROJECT SCHEDULE: MONTH/YEAR •cx,.rss Various MAYOR.TOM REID BUDGET: $DOLLAR AMOUNT ,,, COUNCIL PONTOON I: TONT(MONS Pearland.Texas couxntrosmox:: $COTTSNfRMAN ENGINEER/ARCHITECT: October 2014 COUNCIL POSITION}GATT!POOH NAME GOES HERE MAYOt PRO TIM:REIN ORDSNSAUX Capital improvement O#4I7 COUN(R POSITION S.OM MITI CONTRACTOR: 4x8 blank template • october 2014 p, CTYMANAOER: (EATPIARSON CONTRACTOR NAME GOES HERE • °MUTT CITY MAN AMP.JON ttANSON =s;WN`S;T:•:.i:liU f:NCAS41r2: ASST CITY MANA0511:TRENTfPPtt50N pearlandtx.gov/departments/engineering-capital-projects/projects WO:M U4M NARMMR. M71 0.01117 rXPX140.1.11.-.0.711.11P MAMA SPECIAL NOTE: CONTACT CITY SECRETARY FOR CURRENT COUNCIL NAMES EiRsrtttiK OLLECTCAL SINGLE SIDE MDO MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD FINISHED WITH ALKYD ENAMEL GLOSS WHITE T2UAWTO MONDERIPR SERVICE COMPUTER CUT VINYL AND DIGITAL PRINT 5 YEAR LIFE MINIMUM MATERIALS CUCat5�n0,4ER SESYSERNCES xcoxo" INSTALL ON TWO 4"X4"TREATED POSTS.MIN.DEPTH IS 24",OR SKID MOUNTED AS SITE REO'D.. CLIENT APPROVAL 411 10/2014 01580-4 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 • MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.03 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for • reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment,designated to be removed, except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in Sample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storage space. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 111 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner, by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the a Work. 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause • a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the Project Manager. F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers'unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. • K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION • 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 • PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product • does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.04 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make,or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the j alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications,the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.06 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in 410 determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: • a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION C • 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING Section 01720 C. FIELD SURVEYING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and reference points. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a • land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. • B Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 07/2006 01720- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.07 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner-provided survey and indicated J on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points, including property corners,prior to starting site work. Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged; control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re-staking of control points lost,disturbed,or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. G Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing,disturbed,or damaged monumentation. 1.08 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations,lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading; fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 07/2006 01720-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS Section 01750 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Starting systems. B Demonstration and instructions. C Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D References to Technical specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS • A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Contractor shall conduct all start-up operations under this Contract in conformance with Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control. B Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. C Notify Engineer 7 days prior to startup of each item. D Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. E Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 07/2006 01750- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS F Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G Execute start-up under Contractor's supervision in accordance with manufacturer's • instructions. H When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check and approve equipment or system installation prior to and during start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner two weeks minimum prior to date of Substantial Completion. B Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. D Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.03 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A Contractor shall start, test, adjust, balance, and provide reports on all installed equipment as provided for in this section. B Owner may also appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner indicating observations and results of the tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C Owner's employment of an independent firm shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility under this section. END OF SECTION III 07/2006 01750-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 • PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 4 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents,or in a secure location. Provide files,racks,and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large,printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. 1.05 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all • actual construction, or"as built" conditions, including: 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances,referenced to permanent surface improvements. 07/2006 01760- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. • 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set, provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION CD ill 07/2006 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 • CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data, warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. Ill1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warranty period. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. IIC Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.07 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "Substantially Completed". 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work, the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30) days of the date of -.1101 Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION J 09/2009 01770-2of2 City of Pearland Operations and Maintenance Data Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 01782 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal requirements for equipment and facility operating and maintenance (O&M) manuals. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The value of approved equipment operations and maintenance manuals is 5 percent of the individual equipment value as indicated in the Schedule of Unit Price Work or Schedule of Values. This amount can be included in the next Application for Payment after approval of a submitted manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Along with the schedule for other submittals as required in Section 01350 - Submittals, submit a list of operation and maintenance manuals and parts manuals to be provided. B. Submit documents, bound in 8-1/2x11-inch text pages, 3-ring/D binders with durable plastic covers. C. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. D. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. E. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified. 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 104-1906 01782-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. a City of Pearland Operations and Maintenance Data Riverwalk Lift Station Improvement f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended ) cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying `•/ detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties. F. Within one month prior to placing the equipment or facility in service, submit two copies of operation and maintenance manual and parts manual for review. G. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 10 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. H. Revise and resubmit final volumes within 10 days after final inspection. 1.04 EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Furnish operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment. Operation and maintenance manual must contain all information required for Owner to operate, maintain, and repair equipment. The manual must be prepared by equipment manufacturer, furnished to the Engineer by Contractor, and, as a minimum, contain the following: 1. Equipment functions, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 3. Operating instructions for start-up, normal operation, regulation and control, normal shutdown, and emergency shutdown. 4. Lubrication and detailed maintenance instructions. The maintenance instructions are to include detailed drawings giving the location of each maintainable part and lubrication point and detailed instructions on disassembly and reassembly of the equipment. 5. Troubleshooting guide. 6. Complete spare parts list with predicted life of parts subject to wear, lists of spare parts recommended on hand for both initial start-up and for normal operating inventory, and local or nearest source of spare parts availability. 7. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; wiring diagram. 8. Test data and performance curves. 'go) 104-1907 01782-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Operations and Maintenance Data Riverwalk Lift Station Improvement B. Furnish parts manuals for all equipment. The manual must be prepared by (kir equipment manufacturers, furnished to Engineer by Contractor, and, as a minimum, contain the following. 1. Detailed drawings giving the location of each maintainable part. 2. Complete spare parts list with predicted life of parts subject to wear, lists of spare parts recommended on hand for both initial start-up and for normal operating inventory, and local or nearest source of spare parts availability. PART2 PRODUCTS - Not Used PART3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION I 104-1907 01782-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Operations and Maintenance Data Riverwalk Lift Station Improvement THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1907 01782-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 • SITE WORK • 04/2008 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 • SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures, equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. B Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. C Removing concrete curbs, concrete curb and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. D Removing pipe culverts and sewers. E Removing miscellaneous structures of wood,plastics, metals, concrete,masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry, etc. F Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. G References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Control 4. Section 01100—Summary of Work 5. Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 7. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If indicated as a Bid Item,measurement will be as follows: 1. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing,and removing asphaltic surfacing,is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course,with or without asphalt surfacing, is on a square yard basis. 3. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs,is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment tp, includes removal of all base,asphaltic surfacing,concrete pavement,esplanade curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 07/2006 02220- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. 5. Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, • removing monolithic concrete curb,and removing concrete curb,is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb. 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7. Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of pipe removed. 9. Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans,or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for a demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off,capping,and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property. C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. E Obtain a permit for building demolition,as required. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been a taken. 07/2006 02220-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 1.05 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT • A Materials and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100— Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition,handling and storage. Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property of the Contractor. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated on Plans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION • A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section, 1.03"Submittals'. B Use of a"drop hammer"must have the Engineer's prior approval. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition,make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated for demolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner. C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer. D Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications,pipelines, and electrical distribution services. B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is necessary. 07/2006 02220-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 3.03 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors,water tanks,equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting,capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process,water,chemical, gas, fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support,capped,and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls,cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be altered or removed,cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. (10 Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned,fill with sand,pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonry bulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain,remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof,making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty. F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear, distribution switchboards,control panels,bus duct,conduits and wires,panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. a 07/2006 02220-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. • Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that power is properly de-energized and disconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicable codes. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. END OF SECTION • 07/2006 02220-5 of 5 I City of Pearland Compacted Sand Under Tank Floor Plate Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 02226 1111 COMPACTED SAND FILL UNDER TANK FLOOR PLATE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation, sand fill and compaction under structures within limits shown on plans. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT — NOT USED 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWWA D 100 — Standard for Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage B. ASTM C 117 — Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 75-pm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing C. ASTM D 698 — Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soils Using Standard Effort (12400 ft-lbf/ft2 (600 kN-m/m3)) D. ASTM D 1557 — Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soils Using Modified Effort (56000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2700 kN-m/m3)) E. ASTM D 4318 — Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit proposed materials and sequence of operations for compacting sand. Describe proposed equipment. C. Submit sand fill to Owner for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. SAND BASE 1. Non-plastic, clean sand or clean bank sand free from clay and clay lumps, shale, loam, organic matter, salt or chlorides, and other deleterious materials in accordance with ASTM C33 shall be used. Water soluble ionic (salt) contamination of the sand shall be determined and limited in accordance with AWWA D100, Section 12.6, Note 3. Maximum chloride level not to exceed 100 ppm, maximum sulfate level not to exceed 200 ppm. 411.' 104-1901 02226-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Compacted Sand Under Tank Floor Plate Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2. No more than 15% passing a No. 200 sieve, in accordance with ASTM C117. B. Water, if used to obtain moisture content, to be clean and fresh. C. Hydrated lime for soil stabilization shall comply with Section 31 32 13.19 — Lime- Stabilized Subgrade. D. Select fill shall be silty or sandy clay with liquid limit of less than 40 and plasticity index between 7 and 20. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Clear and grub as specified in Section 02220 — Site Demolition and excavate as required. B. Following stripping and excavation, proofroll subgrade with a minimum 20-ton pneumatic roller to detect any soft or poorly compacted areas. C. All weak areas in the subgrade are to be removed and replaced with structural fill. Where indicated on the Drawings, scarify upper 6-inches of soil and stabilize with 5% hydrated lime and compact to 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. D. Shape surface to receive sand fill as shown on Plans. E. Fill for grade adjustments (below clean sand) shall be structural fill, as specified in Sections 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. F. Place sand base under floor plate in 4-inch maximum lifts, and compact with pneumatic, vibratory or mechanical tamps. Compact to 95% standard Proctor maximum dry density with +2 percentage points of the optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D698. G. After compaction, shape surface area to grade indicated. H. The Owner will provide for density testing and will be performed on each lift of fill for grade adjustments and fill under tank floor as directed by the Owner. I. Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 24 hours prior to proof rolling and density testing. END OF SECTION 104-1901 02226-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Section 02252 • CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Cement stabilized sand for backfill and bedding. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight)Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" b. ASTM D 1632, "Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory" c. ASTM D 1633, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders" d. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" S e. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" f. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes(Unified Soil Classification System)" g. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" h. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" i. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" j. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" k. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" 1. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as an Extra Item, no separate payment will be made for cement stabilized sand under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for applicable utility or structure installation. B If use of cement stabilized sand is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and • indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a per ton basis. A conversion between volumes calculated based on theoretical limits and total weight will be made based on a ratio of 1.64 tons per cubic yard. 02/2009 02252- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material qualification and design mix tests to include: 1. Three series of tests of sand or fine aggregate material from the proposed source. Tests shall include procedures defined in this Section, 2.01 "Materials". 2. Three moisture-density relationship tests prepared using the material qualified by the tests in this Section, 1.03B1. Blends of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and bank run sand shall be tested at the ratio to be used for the design mix testing. 3. Design mix report to meet the specifications of this Section, 1.04 "Design Requirements". The design mix shall include compressive strength tests after 48-hours and 7 days curing. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A Design sand-cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch in 48 hours when compacted to a minimum 95 percent in accordance with ASTM D 558 and when cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. Mix shall contain a minimum of 1-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Compact mix with a moisture content on the dry side of optimum. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Cement shall be Type 1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. B Sand shall be clean, durable, and meet grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C 33 and the following requirements: 1. Classified as SW, SP or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D 2487. 2. Deleterious material content: a. Clay lumps shall comprise less than 0.5 percent by ASTM C 142. b. Lightweight pieces shall comprise less than 5.0 percent by ASTM C 123. c. Organic impurities shall produce color no darker than the standard color by ASTM C 40 ASTM. 3. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C Fine aggregate,manufactured from crushed concrete meeting the quality requirements for crushed rock material in Section 02255 - Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials, may be used as a complete or partial substitute for Bank Sand. The blending ratio of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and Bank Sand shall be defined in the mix design report. 02/2009 02252-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D Water shall be potable,free of oils,acids,alkalies,organic matter,or other deleterious substances,meeting requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.02 MIXING MATERIALS A Thoroughly mix sand, cement and water in proportions of the mix design using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions. B Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Place sand-cement mixture in 8-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D 558, unless otherwise specified on Plans. The moisture content during compaction shall be on the dry side of optimum but sufficient for hydration. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water to mix at the plant. B Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water. • 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B Mixing plant inspections will be performed periodically. Material samples will be obtained and tested in accordance with this Section, 2.01 "Materials", if there is evidence of change in material characteristic. C One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production. Random samples of delivered cement stabilized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in accordance with ASTM 3665.Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12 to 15 lb each from the first,middle, and last third of the truck and composite them into one sample for test purpose. D Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with ASTM D558,Method A,without adjusting moisture content.Samples will be molded at approximately same time material is being used,but no later than 4 hours after water is added to mix. E After molding,specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632. • 02/2009 02252-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND F Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633, Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two • specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours. G A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same sample of material and tested at same age. Average daily strength will be average of strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age. H Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in ASTM D 1633 Section 9. I Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum,the following information: 1. Supplier and plant number 2. Time material was batched 3. Time material was sampled 4. Test age(exact hours) 5. Average 48-hour strength 6. Average 7-day strength 7. Specification section number 8. Indication of compliance/non-compliance 9. Mixture identification 10. Truck and ticket numbers 11. The time of molding 12. Moisture content at time of molding 13. Required strength 14. Test method designations 15. Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633 16. Supplier mixture identification 17. Specimen diameter and height, in. 18. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in. J The cement content will be checked on samples obtained in the field whenever there are apparent changes in the mix properties. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if: 1. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual strength test below 70 psi. 2. All 7-day individual strength tests(average of two specimens)are greater than or equal to 100 psi. B Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test(average of two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04 Adjustment for Deficient Strength. C The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement • at Contractors expense when individual strength test(average of two specimens)has 7-day strength less than 70 psi 02/2009 02252-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi,discontinue • shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material,which exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi. E Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor,Project Manager,and material supplier by facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements within 24 hours. F If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength, Contractor may, at his own expense, request test of cores drilled from the area in question in accordance with ASTM C42. In such cases,three(3)cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A. G Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of three(3)cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single core is less that 70 psi.Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH A When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi, then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full. SB When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than or equal to 70 psi,material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment Compute credit by the following formula: Credit per Cubic Yard = $30.00 x 2 (100 psi -Actual psi) 100 C When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square inch,then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary work at no cost to City. END OF SECTION 4 02/2009 02252-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS • Section 02255 BEDDING, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A reference source for materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment,specified elsewhere in the Technical Specifications,and their associated material qualification testing requirements. B Source qualifications and handling of these materials. C Material use and application is specified on the Plans or in individual Technical Specifications referencing materials either by Material Classification or by Product Description. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 02910—Topsoil 3. Section 02252—Cement Stabilized Sand • E Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" b. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" c. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" d. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" e. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" f. ASTM D 1140, "Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer the No. 200(70-um) Sieve" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" i. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" L 07/2007 02255 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A Materials shall be classified for the purpose of quality control in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. 1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed well- graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic. b. Gradation: D60/D10-greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200 sieve -less than or equal to 5 percent. 2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to moderate fines: a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations: Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5 percent. Gradation(GM,SM): amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. c. Borderline gradations with dual classifications(e.g.,SP-SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve -between 5 percent and 12 percent. 3. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand, silt, and clay(GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC): a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No.200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. 4. Class NA: Lean clays (CL). a. Plasticity Indexes: Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between 4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve-greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. 5. Class NB: Fat clays (CH) a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. B Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which are not defined above, according to the more restrictive class. 2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A Unsuitable Material. Unsuitable soil materials are the following: 07/2007 02255-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING, BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS • 1. Materials that are classified as ML,CL-ML,MH,PT,OH and OL according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to the required density due to either gradation, plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials. 4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. B Suitable Material. Soil materials meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with,for example, lime or cement shall be considered suitable, unless otherwise indicated. C General Fill. Material that is free of stones greater than 3 inches,free of roots,waste, debris,trash,organic material,unstable material,non-soil matter,hydrocarbon or other contamination,conforming to the following limits for deleterious materials: 1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. 2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 123. 3. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. • D Random Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I, II, III, IV, or fat clay(CH), sand,gravel,or a combination,from excavation or borrow,which can be compacted to form stable embankments, and conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 65 maximum, ASTM -D4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 0 minimum,45 maximum, ASTM -D4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. E Structural Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I,II,III,or IV,sand,gravel,or a combination, from excavation or borrow, which can be compacted to form stable embankments and fills conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 45 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 12 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones,hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. F Select Fill. Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay or clayey soils treated with • lime or cement, and conforming to: 07/2007 02255-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Plasticity Index: 7 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth j and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 3. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. G Concrete Fill. Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete. H Topsoil. Conform to requirements specified in Section 02910-Topsoil. Bank Sand: Durable Bank Sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by the Unified Soil Classification System(ASTM D 2487) meeting the following requirements: 1. Less than 15 percent passing the number 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. The amount of clay lumps or balls not exceeding 2 percent. 2. Material passing the number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: a. Liquid limit: not exceeding 25 percent. b. Plasticity index: not exceeding 7. J Cement Stabilized Sand. Conform to requirements of Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. K Concrete Sand. Natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of natural and manufactured sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 L Gem Sand. Sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 95 to 100 No. 4 60 to 80 • No. 8 15 to 40 07/2007 02255-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS • M Pea Gravel. Durable particles composed of small,smooth,rounded stones or pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 1/2" 100 3/8" 85 to 100 No. 4 10 to 30 No. 8 0 to 10 No. 16 0 to 5 N Crushed Aggregates. Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. Materials of one product delivered for the same construction activity from a single source. 2. Non-plastic fines. 3. Los Angeles Abrasion Test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4. Crushed aggregate shall have a minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the No.4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by TxDOT Tex- 460-A, Part I. 5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel,sized • by crushing to predominantly angular particles from a naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel are not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on the applicable utility embedment drawing details. 6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are the same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material, free from other substances such as asphalt,reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum (calcium sulfate),or debris. 7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with TxDOT Tex-110-E. PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT FOR PIPE SIEVE EMBEDMENT BY RANGES OF NOMINAL PIPES SIZES >15" 15" - 8" <8" 1" 95 - 100 100 - 3/4" 60 - 90 90— 100 100 1/2" 25 - 60 - 90— 100 3/8" - 20—55 40 - 70 No. 4 0 - 5 0— 10 0 - 15 No. 8 - 0- 5 0 - 5 (h._ (17/2007 02255-5of7 I CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCE QUALIFICATIONS FOR BORROW MATERIAL A Use of material encountered in excavations is acceptable, provided applicable requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable,provide from other approved source. B Identify off-site sources for materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use so that the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing. C Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products,furnish materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements will be rejected. Do not use material which,after approval,has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, a Change Order is required to change to a different material. D Bank sand, select fill, and random fill, if available in the project excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete the Work from off-site sources. E The Owner does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in the excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. 3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING A When material is obtained from either a commercial or non-commercial borrow pit, open the pit to expose the vertical faces of the various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate the selected material by vertical cuts extending through the exposed strata to achieve uniformity in the product. B Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control,and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. C When stockpiling material near the Project Site,use appropriate methods to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering the drainage system. D Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. Do not place stockpiles of excavated materials on public streets. 07/2007 02255-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS • E Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. END OF SECTION • 07/2007 02255-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS • Section 02316 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation of materials for roadways. B. Excavation of materials for roadside ditches. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill and Embankment Material 7. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 8. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water • 9. Section 01720—Field Surveying 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 02200—Site Preparation 12. Section 02330—Embankment 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 698,"Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" d. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT • A. Measurement shall be by the cubic yard measured in place,including labor,equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1/2018 02316- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS B. Payment includes control of ground water and surface water, trench safety systems, removal of existing pavements and structures,repair and maintenance of excavated or • backfilled areas, and other measures specified in this Section and not included in payment elsewhere. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D. No payment will be made for material excavated under the following conditions: 1. More than 2 feet outside of vertical planes behind back of curbs. 2. For portion within limits of trench for utilities constructed by open-cut methods. 3. As indicated otherwise on Drawings. E. Construction Surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the Work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, Contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre-construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the Work. F. Excavation and Backfill quantities that exceed the construction plans shall be substantiated with topographic survey of finished grade by survey (RPLS) and verified by the Engineer at contractor's expense. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C. Submit field red lines documenting location of roadway excavation as installed, referenced to survey Control Points,under the provisions of Section 01760—Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.5 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this • Section. 1/2018 02316-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 4110 1.6 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.1 PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.1 EXECUTION 3.2 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in • accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D. Identify existing structures and utilities above and below grade. Stake and flag their location. E. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. F. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. G. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. H. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities,or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to lines and grades shown on Plans. 1/2018 02316-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS B. Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials, and compacted under the provisions of Section 02330—Embankment. (;10 C. At intersections,grade back at minimum slope of one inch per foot. Produce a smooth riding junction with intersecting street. Maintain proper drainage. 0 III 1/2018 02316-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS • D. Fill over-excavated areas in accordance with requirements of Section 02330 — Embankment at no cost to the Owner. 3.4 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B. Compact to minimum densities at moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Areas under future paving and shoulders: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Minimum density of 90 percent of maximum dry density. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL • A. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B. Three or more tests,at Engineer's/Owner's option,will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.7 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 0 1/2018 02316-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 3.8 PROTECTION OF THE WORKCP A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Maintain ditches and cut temporary swales to allow natural drainage in order to avoid damage to roadway. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 0 III 1/2018 02316-6 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES • Section 02317 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Excavation,backfilling, and compaction of backfill for structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450-Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 7. Section 01570-Trench Safety System 8. Section 01564- Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220- Site Demolition 10. Section 02200—Site Preparation 11. Section 02252-Cement Stabilized Sand 12. Section 01562-Waste Material Disposal • C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D Definitions: 1. Backfill - material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted under controlled conditions around pavements, structures and 1111 utilities. 07/2006 02317- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 2. Foundation Backfill - natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class I requirements and Geotextile fabrics as required to control drainage and • material separation placed and compacted where needed to provide stable support for the structure foundation base. Foundation backfill may include crushed aggregate with filter fabric as required, cement stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. 3. Foundation Base - provides a smooth, level working surface for the construction of the concrete foundation. 4. Foundation Subgrade-the surface of the natural soil which has been excavated and prepared to support the foundation base or foundation backfill, where needed. 5. Over-Excavation - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below the foundation as shown on the Plans. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT UNIT PRICES A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Excavation and Backfill for Structures under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for construction of structures. B If Excavation and Backfill for Structures is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with • Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit for each structure a work plan for excavation and backfill with a complete written description which identifies details of the proposed method of construction and the sequence of operations for construction relative to excavation and backfill activities. The descriptions, with supporting illustrations, shall be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to the Engineer that the procedures meet the requirements of the Plans and Technical Specifications. C Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D Submit field red lines documenting location of structures as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 411 07/2006 02317-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES • 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment,backfill,back-dressing,and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 2.02 EQUIPMENT • A Perform excavation with equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B Use equipment which will produce the degree of compaction specified. Backfill within 3 feet of walls shall be compacted with hand operated equipment. Do not use equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Use hand operated power compaction equipment where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570-Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in accordance with requirements of Section 02220- Site Demolition, as applicable. • D Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 - Site Preparation prior to excavation. 07/2006 02317-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES E Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200-Site Preparation • F Upon discovery of unknown utilities,badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.02 EXCAVATION A Perform excavation work so that the underground structure can be installed to depths and alignments shown on Plans Drawings. Use caution during excavation work to avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. Keep excavation to the absolute minimum necessary. No additional payment will be made for excess excavation not authorized by Engineer. B Avoid settlement of surrounding soil due to equipment operations, excavation procedures, vibration, dewatering, or other construction methods. C Prevent voids from forming outside of sheeting. Immediately fill voids with grout, concrete fill, cement stabilized sand, or other material approved by Engineer. D After completion of the structure, remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing unless Engineer has approved in writing that such temporary structures may remain. Remove sheeting,shoring,and bracing in such a manner as to maintain safety during backfilling operations and to prevent damage to the Work and adjacent structures or improvements. E Immediately fill and compact voids left or caused by removal of sheeting with cement stabilized sand or material approved by Engineer. 3.03 DEWATERING A Maintain ground water control as directed by Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water and until the structure is sufficiently complete to provide the required weight to resist hydrostatic uplift with a minimum safety factor of 1.2. B Maintain the ground water surface a minimum of two feet below the bottom of the foundation base. 3.04 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION A Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to planned completion of foundation excavations. Do not place the foundation base until the excavation is accepted by the Engineer. B Excavate to elevations shown on Plans Drawings,as needed to provide space for the foundation base, forming a level undisturbed surface, free of mud or soft material. Remove pockets of soft or otherwise unstable soils and replace with foundation backfill material or a material as directed by the Engineer. Prior to placing material 07/2006 02317-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES • over it,re-compact the subgrade,scarifying as needed,to 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698. If the specified level of compaction cannot be achieved, moisture condition the subgrade and re-compact until 95 percent is achieved,over-excavate to provide a minimum layer of 24 inches of foundation backfill material, or other means acceptable to the Engineer. C Fill unauthorized excessive excavation with foundation backfill material or other material as directed by the Engineer. D Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in a satisfactory,undisturbed condition. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete placement. E Soils which become unsuitable due to inadequate dewatering or other causes, after initial excavation to the required subgrade, shall be removed and replaced with foundation backfill material, as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. F Place foundation base, or foundation backfill material where needed, over the subgrade on same day that excavation is completed to final grade. Where base of excavations are left open for longer periods,protect them with a seal slab or cement- • stabilized sand. G Where directed by the Plans Drawings,all crushed aggregate,and other free draining Class I materials,shall have a Geo-textile filter fabric separating it from native soils or select material backfill. The fabric shall overlap a minimum of 12 inches beyond where another material stops contact with the soil. H Crushed aggregate, and other Class I materials, shall be placed in uniform layers of 8-inch maximum thickness. Compaction shall be by means of at least two passes of a vibratory compactor. 3.05 FOUNDATION BASE A After the subgrade is properly prepared, including the placement of foundation backfill where needed, the foundation base shall be placed. The foundation base shall consist of a 12-inch layer of crushed aggregate or cement stabilized sand. Alternately, a 4-inch minimum seal slab may be placed. The foundation base shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edge of the structure foundation. B Where the foundation base and foundation backfill are of the same material,both can be placed in one operation. • 07/2006 02317-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 3.06 BACKFILL A Complete backfill to surface of natural ground or to lines and grades shown on Plans Drawings. Use existing material that qualifies as select material, unless indicated otherwise. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified. B Do not place backfill against concrete walls or similar structures until laboratory test breaks indicate that the concrete has reached a minimum of 85 percent of the specified compressive strength. Where walls are supported by slabs or intermediate walls,do not begin backfill operations until the slab or intermediate walls have been placed and concrete has attained sufficient strength. C Remove concrete forms before starting backfill and remove shoring and bracing as work progresses. D Maintain fill material at no less than 2 percent below and no more than 2 percent above optimum moisture content. Place fill material in uniform 8-inch maximum loose layers. Compaction of fill shall be to at least 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 under paved areas. Compact to at least 90 percent around structures below unpaved areas. E Where backfill is placed against a sloped excavation surface, run compaction equipment across the boundary of the cut slope and backfill to form a compacted slope surface for placement of the next layer of backfill. j F Place backfill using cement stabilized sand in accordance with Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Tests will be performed initially on minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics,in accordance with ASTM D 4318,and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. B In-place density tests of compacted subgrade and backfill will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions: 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 cubic yards of compacted backfill material. 2. A minimum three density tests for each full work shift. 3. Density tests will be performed in all placement areas. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil types or moisture contents are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density. 07/2006 02317-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES • C At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be initially performed for each type of backfill material in accordance with ASTM D 698. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. D If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140- Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. • C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION • 07/2006 02317 -7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES • Section 02318 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation,trenching,foundation,embedment,and backfill for installation of utilities, storm sewers including manholes, pipeline structures and other associated appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 4. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 7. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls • 8. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 9. Section 02370—Geotextile 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight)Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" d. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" e. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" f. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" g. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" 5/2013 02318 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) • a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D. Definitions: 1. Excavation - Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by removal of material. a. Extra Hand Excavation- excavation by manual labor at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. b. Extra Machine Excavation- excavation by machine at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. c. Special Excavation-excavation necessitated by obstruction of pipes, ducts, or other structures, not shown on Plans, which interfere with installation of utility piping by normal methods of excavation or augering. Contractor shall be responsible for locating such underground obstructions,sufficiently in advance of trench excavation or augering, to preclude damage to the obstructions. 2. Pipe Foundation-suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Plans, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over- excavations. 3. Pipe Bedding-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to a level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 4. Haunching-the material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to spring-line of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 5. Initial Backfill - the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from spring-line of pipe(top of haunching)up to a level line 12 inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 6. Pipe Embedment - the portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching, and initial backfill. 7. Trench Zone-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement. 5/2013 02318 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES • 8. Trench Conditions - description of the stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill,except where structural trench support is necessary. a. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. b. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. 1) Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. 2) Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is • provided in the embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. c. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances,such as sloughing,sliding,boiling,heaving or loss of density. 9. Sub-trench - a special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor. 10. Trench Dam - a placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along the trench. 11. Over-Excavation and Backfill - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Plans, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. 12. Foundation Backfill Materials - natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, and geo-textile filter fabrics as required, to control 5/2013 02318-3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs. 13. Trench Shield(Trench Box)-a portable worker safety structure moved along the trench as work proceeds, used as a Protective System and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave-in, thereby protecting persons within the trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in a series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench excavation,embedment,and backfill under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for all excavation and backfill associated with the placement and construction of: underground piping,boxes,manholes and associated appurtenances including conduit, or duct work. B. If Special Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis,measured in place,without deduction for space occupied by portions of pipes, ducts, or other structures left in place across trenches excavated under this item. • 1. Payment for Special Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Protection of pipes, ducts, or other structures encountered including bracing, shoring, and sheeting necessary for support. c. Replacement of pipes, ducts, or structures damaged by special excavation operations, except where payment for replacement is authorized by Engineer due to deteriorated condition of pipes,ducts,or structure. d. Temporary disconnecting,plugging, and reconnecting of low volume water pipes,to allow machine excavation or augering,when approved by Engineer. Pipe for replacement shall be new and conform to specification requirements for type of existing pipe removed. e. Placement of material from Special Excavation. f. Geo-textile material and concrete trench dams required to complete the placement of material from Special Excavation. g. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Special Excavation. h. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill,or not required for the Work. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. • Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: 5/2013 02318 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES • a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Utility piping installed in trenches excavated under this item. c. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. C. If Extra Hand Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis,measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Hand Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill,or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from Extra Hand Excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Hand Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component.: • a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. D. If Extra Machine Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis,measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Machine Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill,or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from extra machine excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Machine Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. 5/2013 02318-5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. No payment will be 0 made for delays in completion of Work resulting from Extra Item Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of excavation,backfill placement and compaction, including: 1. Sequence of work and coordination of activities. 2. Selected trench widths. 3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction. 4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other pre-manufactured systems while assuring specified compaction against undisturbed soil. 5. Procedure for installation of Special Shoring at locations identified on the Plans. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D. Submit field red lines documenting location of Utilities as installed, referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. • 5/2013 02318-6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES • 1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Special Shoring shall be, in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety System, designed by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas,At Contractor's expense. B. Special Shoring shall be designed to provide support for the sides of the excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. C. Special Shoring may be a pre-manufactured system or a field fabricated system that meets the requirements of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. • B. Manufactured materials,such as crushed concrete,may be substituted for natural soil or rock products where indicated in the product specification, and approved by the Engineer,provided that the physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing. C. Geotextile(Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Section 02370—Geotextile. D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed(bag) concrete. E. Timber Shoring Left in Place: Untreated oak. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with track mounted excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other Protective Systems or Shoring Systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed native soil. 5/2013 02318 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use Special Shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting, 0 braced soldier piles and lagging, slide rail systems, or other systems meeting the Special Shoring design requirements. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Program as specified in Section 01570 — Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures conform to Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. D. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. E. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation F. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that 0 acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation,manhole, or other structures. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, install underground utilities in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe,conduit,and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on the Plans. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. C. Determine trench excavation widths using the following schedule as related to pipe outside diameter(O.D.). Maximum trench width shall be the minimum trench width plus 24 inches. NOMINAL MINIMUM TRENCH PIPE SIZE,INCHES WIDTH,INCHES Less than 18 O.D. + 18 i 18 to 30 O.D. +24 Greater than 30 O.D. + 36 5/2013 02318 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES • D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above the embedment zone for installation of well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from the surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms,pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials. E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding. F. Shoring of Trench Walls. 1. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with the trench excavation, so that the soils within the full height of the trench excavation walls will remain fully laterally supported at all times. 2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in the pipe embedment zone throughout the installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent washing the trench wall soil out from behind the trench wall support. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,leave sheeting driven into or below the pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation • and embedment materials. Leave rangers,walers,and braces in place as long as required to support sheeting,which has been cut off,and the trench wall in the vicinity of the pipe zone. 4. Employ special methods for maintaining the integrity of embedment or foundation material. Before moving supports,place and compact embedment to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment. 5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of the pipe embedment zone,do not disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into the embedment zone 1 inch. Fill voids left on removal of supports with compacted backfill material. G. Use of Trench Shields. When a trench shield (trench box)is used as a worker safety device,the following requirements apply: 1. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled freely, without damage to the trench sidewalls. 2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor the degree of compaction reduced. 5/2013 02318-9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials beneath the shield. For backfill above bedding, move the shield as backfill is placed and ramped in. Place and compact backfill materials against undisturbed trench walls and foundation. 4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in a safe manner. 3.03 TRENCH FOUNDATION A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. B. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.04 PIPE EMBEDMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials,the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil. B. Place Geotextile,if specified,to prevent particle migration from the in-situ into open- graded(Class I)embedment materials or drainage layers. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching and initial backfill to meet requirements indicated on Plans. PVC & HDPE require cement stabilized sand bedding and backfill to one foot below subgrade or below grade if under pavement,or one foot above top of pipe if not under pavement. D. For pipe installation,manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Do not allow materials to free-fall from heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. Perform placement and compaction directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place. E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of the embedment zone unless means to maintain the density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift the supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of the material against undisturbed soil. F. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates. 5/2013 02318- 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES G. Place haunching material manually around the pipe and compact it to provide uniform bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside the pipe with sand bags or other suitable means. H. Place electrical conduit directly on foundation without bedding. Shovel pipe embedment material in place and compact it using pneumatic tampers in restricted spaces,and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in unrestricted spaces. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of the next lift. 1. Class I embedment materials. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment. Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed the pipe to meet the deflection test criteria. c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of trench bottom,foundation or trench walls. 2. Class II embedment and cement stabilized sand. • a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials. c. Moisture content of Class II materials within 3 percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement stabilized sands on the dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration. J. Place trench dams in Class I embedments in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.05 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only the minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. Backfill placement and compaction shall apply to all soils excavated for the trench especially • including any areas that were "benched" or over-excavated in place of trenched shoring. All disturbed soils generated during excavation,whether inside the trench or associated with it, shall be considered to fall under this requirement. 5/2013 02318- 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES B. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal of sheeting, leave the sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5 feet or more above the crown of the pipe. Remove trench supports within 5 feet from the ground surface. C. For sewer pipes,use backfill materials described here as determined by trench limits. As trench zone backfill in paved areas for streets and to one foot back of curbs and pavements,use cement stabilized sand for pipe of nominal sizes less than 36 inches,or Bank Sand for pipe of nominal sizes 36 inches and larger as indicated on the Drawings. Uniformly backfill trenches unless specified otherwise according to the paved area criteria. Use select backfill within one foot below pavement subgrade for rigid pavement. For asphalt concrete,use flexible base material within one foot below pavement subgrade. D. For water lines,backfill in trench zone, including auger pits, with Bank Sand, Select Fill, or Random Fill material as specified in this Section. E. For trench excavations under pavement,place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods indicated below. Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift. 1. Bank Sand. a. Maximum 9-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 3 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698 2. Cement Stabilized Sand. a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform placement and required compaction,but not exceeding 24 inches. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558. c. Moisture content on the dry side of optimum determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration. 3. Select Fill. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by equipment providing tamping or kneading impact to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 2 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698. F. For trench excavations outside pavements,a Random Fill of suitable material may be Ill used in the trench zone. 5/2013 02318- 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES • 1. Fat clays(CH)may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at the Contractor's option. If the required density is not achieved,the Contractor,at his option and at no additional cost to the Owner,may use lime stabilization to achieve compaction requirements or use a different suitable material. 2. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12- inch lift thickness for granular soils. 3. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or to same density as adjacent soils. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density. 3.06 MANHOLES,JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures,as shown on the Plans. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control 1. The Engineer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off-site stockpiles. b. On-site stockpiles. c. Materials placed in the Work. 2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials,as directed by the Engineer. Samples maybe taken at the source or at the production plant, as applicable. C. Provide excavation and Trench Safety Systems at locations and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction. D. Tests will be performed on a minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional • classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. 5/2013 02318- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698,and for cement stabilized sand in accordance with ASTM D 558. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. F. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions. 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill material. Testing shall be performed for each lift thickness for different backfill material specified in Item 3.05. 2. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work when backfill is placed. 3. Density tests will be distributed among the placement areas. Placement areas are: foundation,bedding,haunching,initial backfill and trench zone. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. 5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. 6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing density less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. 7. Re-compacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series, including verification tests. G. Recondition,re-compact,and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For Cement Stabilized Sand with nonconforming density,core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. H. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with a Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 5/2013 02318- 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES • 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. D. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of existing utilities with utility representative. Excavate by hand to locate existing utility, support utility with methods agreed upon by utility representative. All work shall be subsidiary to bid items in Section 00300 Bid Proposal. No additional cost to City. END OF SECTION • , (so 5/2013 02318- 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE Section 02335 • SUBGRADE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation course of lime and Portland Cement stabilized in situ subgrade material. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 01720—Field Surveying 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) • a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017,"Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth)" f. ASTM C 150- Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. ASTM D 558 -Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement-Mixtures. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for subgrade is on a square yard basis. Separate payment will be made for each different required type and thickness of stabilized Subgrade. Limits of measurement shall match actual pavement replaced, but no greater than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on Drawings. Limits for measurement will be extended to include installed stabilized subgrade material that extends 2 foot beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where proposed pavement section 5/2013 02335- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE shares common longitudinal or transverse edge with existing pavement section. No payment will be made for stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits. • B. Measurement for hydrated lime and quicklime is by the ton of 2,000 pounds dry- weight basis,determined by the area to be covered and the rate of application. Do not include cost of hydrated lime or quicklime in Bid Item for subgrade. C. Measurement for lime slurry is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of lime calculated on the percentage by weight of dry solids for the grade of slurry. Do not include cost of lime slurry in Bid Item for subgrade. D. Measurement for Portland Cement is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of dry weight basis. Do not include cost of Portland Cement in Bid Item for subgrade. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates stating that hydrated lime, commercial lime slurry and quicklime complies with the requirements in this Section. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of lime to Project 11) Site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for rotary speed mixer and compaction equipment for approval. 1.04 TESTING AND SAMPLING A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C. Sampling and testing of lime slurry shall be in accordance with Tex-600-J. D. Sample mixtures of Portland Cement,hydrated lime or quicklime in slurry form will be tested to establish compliance with the requirements in this Section. E. Soil will be evaluated to establish percent of hydrated lime,quicklime,or lime slurry to be applied to subgrade material. F. Moisture-density relationship will be established on material sample from roadway, after stabilization, in accordance with ASTM D 698. 5/2013 02335-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE G. Soil will be evaluated to establish ratio of cement to soil to obtain desired stability. • Normal range is 6 percent to 10 percent by weight. H. The percentage of moisture in soil, at time of cement application,will be determined by ASTM D 558. Moisture will not be allowed to exceed quantity that will permit uniform, complete mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations nor specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture, as determined. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Bagged lime shall bear manufacturer's name, product identification, and certified weight.Bags varying more than 5 percent of certified weight may be rejected;average weight of 50 random bags in each shipment shall not be less than certified weight. B. Store lime in weatherproof enclosures. Protect lime from ground dampness. • C. Quicklime can be dangerous; exercise extreme caution if used for the Work. Contractor shall become informed about recommended precautions in the handling, storage and use of quicklime. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER A. Water shall be clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or organic matter. 2.02 LIME A. Type A-Hydrated Lime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium hydroxide or mixture of calcium hydroxide and an allowable percentage of calcium oxide and magnesium hydroxide. B. Type B-Lime Slurry: Liquid mixture consisting essentially of lime solids and water in slurry form. Water or liquid portion shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity to be injurious or objectionable for purpose intended. C. Type C - Quicklime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium oxide. Furnish quicklime in either of the following grades: 5/2013 02335-3 of 10 I CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 1. Grade DS: Pebble quicklime of a gradation suitable for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. 2. Grade S:Finely-graded quicklime for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. Do not use Grade S quicklime for dry placing. (So called "Blue Lime"is not acceptable.) D. Lime shall conform to following requirements: CHEMICAL COMPOSITION TYPE A B C Active lime content, I 2 %by weight Ca(OH)2+CaO 90.0 min 87.0 min - Unhydrated lime content, %by weight CaO 5.0 max - 87.0 min Free water content, %by weight H2O 5.0 max - - SIZING Wet Sieve, as %by weight residue retained: No. 6 0.2 max 0.2 max2 8.0 max3 No. 30 4.0 max 4.0 max2 - Dry sieve, as%by weight residue retained: 1-inch - - 0.0 3/4-inch - - 10.0 max Notes: I Maximum 5.0%by weight CaO shall be allowed in determining total active lime content. 2 Maximum solids content of slurry. 3 Total active lime content, as CaO, in material retained on the No. 6 sieve shall not exceed 2.0%by weight of original Type C lime. E. Lime Slurry may be delivered to the Project Site as Commercial Lime Slurry,or may be prepared at the Project Site using Hydrated Lime or Quicklime. The slurry shall be free of liquids other than water and shall be of a consistency that can be handled and uniformly applied without difficulty. 2.03 PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. ASTM C 150 Type I,bulk or sacked. • 5/2013 02335-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE • 2.04 SOIL A. Provide soil consisting of approved material free from vegetation or other objectable matter encountered in existing roadbed. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures below future grade is complete. B. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. C. Verify subgrade lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. • B. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. C. Cut material to bottom of subgrade using an approved cutting and pulverizing machine meeting following requirements: 1. Cutters accurately provide a smooth surface over entire width of cut to plane of secondary grade. 2. Visible indication that cut is to proper depth. D. Alternatively,scarify or excavate to bottom of stabilized subgrade. Remove material or windrow to expose secondary grade. Correct wet or unstable material below secondary grade by scarifying,adding lime,and compacting. Obtain uniform stability. E. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 LIME SLURRY APPLICATION A. Mix hydrated lime or quicklime with water to form a slurry of the solids content te specified. Commercial lime slurry shall have dry solids content as specified. Conform to cautionary requirements in this Section, 1.06C, concerning use of quicklime. 5/2013 02335-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Apply slurry with a distributor truck equipped with an agitator to keep lime and water in a consistent mixture. Make successive passes over measured section of roadway to attain proper moisture and lime content. Limit spreading to an area where preliminary yid mixing operations can be completed on the same working day. 3.04 PRELIMINARY MIXING A. Do not mix and place material when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. B. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to mix soil, lime, and water to required depth. Obtain a homogeneous friable mixture free of clods and lumps. C. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. D. Seal subgrade as a precaution against heavy rainfall by rolling lightly with light pneumatic rollers. E. Cure soil-lime material for 1 to 4 days. Keep subgrade moist during cure. 3.05 FINAL MIXING A. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to uniformly mix cured soil and lime to required depth. B. Add water to bring moisture content of soil mixture to a minimum of optimum or above. C. Mix and pulverize until all material passes a 1 inch sieve; a minimum of 90 percent, excluding non-slaking fractions,passes a 3/4-inch sieve;and a minimum of 65 percent excluding non-slaking fractions passes a No. 4 sieve. D. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. E. Do not expose hydrated lime to open air for more than 6 hours during interval between application and mixing. Avoid excessive hydrated lime loss due to washing or blowing. 3.06 MIXING- PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Do not place and mix cement when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place Portland Cement base when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. 5/2013 02335-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Spread cement uniformly on soil at rate specified by laboratory. When bulk cement • spreader is used,position it by string lines or other approved method to ensure uniform distribution of cement. Apply cement only to area where operations can be continuous and completed in daylight,within 1 hour of application. Amount of moisture in soil at time of cement placement shall not exceed quantity that will permit uniform mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations. Do not exceed specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture. C. Do not allow equipment other than that used in spreading and mixing, to pass over freshly spread cement until it is mixed with soil. D. Dry mix cement with soil after cement application. Continue mixing until cement has been sufficiently blended with soil to prevent formation of cement balls when water is applied. Mixture of soil and cement that has not been compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than 30 minutes. E. Immediately after dry mixing is complete, uniformly apply water as necessary and incorporate it into mixture. Pressurized equipment must provide adequate supply to ensure continuous application of required amount of water to sections being processed within 3 hours of cement application. Ensure proper moisture distribution at all times. After last increment of water has been added, continue mixing until thorough and uniform mix has been obtained. . F. Ensure percentage of moisture in mixture,based on dry weights,is within 2 percentage points of specified optimum moisture content prior to compaction. When uncompacted soil cement mixture is wetted by rain indicating that average moisture content exceeds tolerance given at time of final compaction,reconstruct entire section in accordance with this Section at no additional cost to City. 3.07 COMPACTION-LIME SUBGRADE A. Aerate or sprinkle to attain optimum moisture content as determined by Testing Laboratory. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. B. Start compaction immediately after final mixing,unless approved by Engineer. C. Spread and compact in two or more approximately equal layers where total compacted thickness is to be greater than 8 inches. D. Compact with approved heavy pneumatic or vibrating rollers, or a combination of tamping rollers and light pneumatic rollers. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until entire depth is uniformly compacted. E. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and re-compacting. 5/2013 02335-7 of 10 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE F. Compact to following minimum densities at a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Plans: 1. Areas to receive pavement without subsequent base course: Minimum density of 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Areas to receive subsequent base course: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. G. Seal with approved light pneumatic tired rollers: Prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and re-compact at areas where hair line cracking develops. H. Contractor shall conduct operations to minimize elapsed time between mixing and compacting stabilized subgrade in order to take advantage of rapid initial set characteristics. Complete compaction within 2 hours of commencing compaction and not more than 6 hours after adding and mixing the last stabilizing agent. 3.08 COMPACTION-PORTLAND CEMENT SUBGRADE(ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Prior to beginning compaction,ensure mixture is in loose condition for its full depth. Uniformly compact the loose mixture to specified density, lines and grades. B. After soil and cement mixture is compacted,apply water uniformly as needed and mix 410 thoroughly. Then reshape surface to required lines, grades and cross section and lightly scarify to loosen imprints left by compacting or shaping equipment. C. Roll resulting surface with pneumatic-tired roller and "skin" surface with power grader. Thoroughly compact mixture with pneumatic roller,adding small increments of moisture,as needed. When aggregate larger than No.4 sieve is present in mixture, make one complete coverage of section with flat-wheel roller immediately after skinning operation. When approved by Project Manager, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure, provided dense uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes, is produced. Maintain moisture content of surface material at its specified optimum during finishing operations. Compact and finish surface within period not to exceed 2 hours,to produce smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges, or loose material, conforming to crown, grade and line shown on Drawings within period not to exceed 2 hours. 3.09 CURING A. Moist cure for a minimum of 3 days before placing base or surface course,or opening to traffic. Time may be adjusted as approved by Engineer. Subgrade may be opened to traffic after 2 days if adequate strength has been attained to prevent damage.Restrict • traffic to light pneumatic rollers or vehicles weighing less than 10 tons. 5/2013 02335-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. Roll with light pneumatic roller to keep • surface knit together. C. Place base, surface, or seal course within 14 days after final mixing and compaction unless prior approval is obtained from Engineer. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16 foot length. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A minimum of three phenolphthalein test will be made at random locations per 1000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth,place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at random locations near depth determination tests. Three tests will be performed for each 1000 foot roadway section. Rework and re-compact • areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no cost to the Owner. 3.12 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. Fill test pits with new compacted lime stabilized subgrade. C. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. D. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.13 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized Subgrade to lines and grades and in good condition until placement of base or surface course. B. Protect the asphalt membrane, if used, from being picked up by traffic. 5/2013 02335-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE C. Repair settlements, areas with loss of density, or areas of subgrade damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner by replacing and re-compacting a material to full depth. D. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 0 II/ 5/2013 02335- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS Section 02510 • WATER MAINS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of water mains, including valves, fire hydrants,wet connections, cut and plug of mains, disinfection, and hydrostatic testing for pipelines. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200- Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals 3. Section 02514- Fire Hydrant Assembly 4. Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02512 - Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02417 - Augering Pipe for Water Lines 7. Section 02515 - Water Tap and Service Line Installation 8. Section 02318 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 9. Section 02980-Pavement Repair 10. Section 01450- Testing Laboratory Services 4110 11. Section 02634- Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings C. Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) 3. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for water mains open cut or augered, with or without casing, is on a linear foot basis for each size of pipe installed. Mains: Measure along axis of pipe and include fittings and valves. Branch Pipe: Measure from axis of main to end of branch. B. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: • 1. Pipe shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories(UL)or Factory Mutual(FM)label. 6/2014 02510- 1 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Pipe material acceptable without penalty to State's community fire insurance rating agency. 3. System acceptable to City and TCEQ. 4. Bacteriological disinfection acceptable to local health officials and Texas Department of Health, and TCEQ. 5. Water taps and draw off lines in compliance with local municipal specifications and regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Obtain from pipe manufacturer installation instructions,manuals,and printed recommendations, except for Owner furnished pipe. 2. Retain product data on job site for reference. 3. Submit certified record of tests of pipe, fittings, or valves upon request of Engineer. 4. Submit hydrant manufacturer flow and friction loss curve. C. Samples: 1. Notify City when system is pressure tested and disinfected. City will take all samples for bacteriological testing as required by TCEQ. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver pipe to trench in sound, undamaged condition. B. Cut pipe neatly avoiding sharp, ragged, or unbeveled, plain ends and do not damage lining by cutting. C. Remove damaged or rejected materials from project site. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not lay pipe when it is raining or when trench is muddy, soft, or contains standing water. B. 6/2014 02510-2 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2.0 PRODUCTS III2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02534-PVC Pipe. All pipe used for water mains shall be blue. 2.02 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02532W- HDPE 2.03 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER LINES A. Conform to requirements of Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 2.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.05 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02514-Fire Hydrant Assembly. 2.06 VALVES • A. General: Conform to requirements of Section 02541 —Water and Wastewater Line Valves. 1. Manual operators: a. Provide hand wheel manual operators for in-plant valves. b. Equip buried valves with 2 in. square operating nuts. 2. Furnish no less than one operating key with each lot of 10 buried valves with nut operators. 3. Rotation: a. Direction: OPEN COUNTERCLOCKWISE(OPEN LEFT). 4. Shop coating: a. Shop coat ferrous metal surfaces of valves both interior and exterior for corrosion protection. b.Protect internal and external iron surfaces of valves with coating of 4 mils of two-part thermosetting epoxy: AWWA C 550. 5. Working and test pressures: a. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: 200 psi working pressure, 400 psi hydrostatic test pressure. b. Valves 14 in.through 36 in.: 150 psi working pressure,300 psi hydrostatic test pressure. 410 6/2014 02510-3 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Gate Valves (2 in. Through 36 in.): 1. Buried valves: ,vili) a. Comply with AWWA C500, non-rising stem (NRS); resilient wedge. b. Epoxy-coated ductile iron body and bonnet, inside screw. c. Bronze: Seat and disc rings, stem and mountings, and disc wedges. d. "0" ring sealed stem and 2 in. square operating nut. e. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: Vertical type without by-passes. f. Valves 16 in.through 36 in.: Horizontal type with enclosed steel bevel gears resilient wedge, standard size by-pass valves. g. Stuffing box and bonnet bolts and nuts to be 304 stainless steel. h. Install in section of horizontal pipe. i. Mechanical joint ends with gasket complying with AWWA C 111. j. Acceptable product: 1) East Jordan, American Flow Control, Mueller Co. "A-2380 '..) Series" C. Tapping Valves and Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping sleeves shall be solid stainless steel and valves shall conform with all others as mentioned above. D. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast iron,threaded screw extension sleeve type,adjustable suitable for depth of cover over pipe, with base and cover. 2. 3/16 in. thick, 5 in. diameter minimum. 3. Provide with suitable cast iron bases and covers. 4. Covers: Cast name designating type of service, e.g., "WATER" for water service. 2.07 RELATED MATERIALS A. Concrete: As specified in Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. „....) 6/2014 02510-4 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Meter Box: • 1. Cast iron to Owner's dimensions: ASTM A 48. C. The service line between Curb stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR—9. D. Corporation and Curb Stops and Fittings: ASTM B 62,NSF 61 lead free 3.0 EXECUTION A. Conform to requirements in Section 02534-PVC Pipe, Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, Section 02532W—HDPE, Section 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings, and Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean pipe interiors of foreign matter before being lowered into trench. B. Clean hydrant and valve interiors of foreign matter before installation. C. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints. • D. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings and Details. E. If asbestos-cement (A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outline in American Water Works Association's publication, "Work Practices for A/C Pipe". Strictly adhere to "recommended practices" contained in this publication and make them"mandatory practices"for this project. F. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater,clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique identifying mark minimum of five feet away from either end of each section of pipe. Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4 inches to mark designations. G. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for extra fittings and,therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements are not met. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Inspection: 1. Carefully examine each piece of pipe for soundness and specifications compliance after delivery at trench before placing in trench. 6/2014 02510-5 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Remove rejected pipe and fittings from site of work and replace with sound pipe. 3. Pipe and fittings will be rejected because of any of the following: a. Cracks in pipe or fittings. b. Damaged or cracked ends. c. Damaged gaskets or gasket grooves. d. Less than minimum wall thickness. e. Defects and deformations. B. Cleaning: 1. Clean interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before laying. 2. Keep interiors and ends clean during installation. 3. Keep joint contact surfaces clean during installation. 4. Take precautions to prevent foreign material from entering pipe during installation. 5. Do not place rubbish, tools, rags, or other materials in pipe. 6. Whenever pipe laying is stopped, place plugs in uncompleted ends of pipe. C. Installation: 1. Install pipe, couplings, and fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipes use. 2. Install gaskets and lubricants as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Full length of each barrel of pipe shall rest solidly on pipe bed with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints. 4. Take up and relay pipe that has grade or joint disturbed. 5. Do not joint pipe with water in trench. 6. Keep water out of trench until jointing is completed. 7. Do not lay water pipe closer than 10 ft. horizontally from sanitary sewer. 8. Do not locate joints at cross-overs with sanitary sewers closer than 9 ft. from cross-over point. 6/2014 02510-6 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS • 9. Where water lines cross sanitary sewers,construct in accordance with the City of Pearland Engineering Design Criteria Manual for water line or TCEQ standards whichever is more stringent 10. Where pipe ends are left for future connections, install valve and plug or cap end. Forty feet minimum line section required between valve and plug or cap end. 11. Install concrete thrust blocking at bends and tees and at ends of lines to provide adequate reaction backing. 12. Lay not more than 100 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. 13. Dig trench proper width as shown in details. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified, install higher class of pipe or improved bedding,as determined by Engineer. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or improved bedding. 14. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment;employ personnel competent in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as indicated on Drawings shall not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as built"horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet on record drawings. • 15. Before assembling couplings,lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets per manufacturer's specification. 16. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings. D. Setting Valves, Valve Boxes and Fire Hydrants: 1. Set plumb. 2. Center valve boxes on valves. 3. Where feasible, locate valves outside area of roads and streets. 4. Carefully tamp back fill around each valve box to distance of 4 ft.on all sides or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 ft. 5. Set hydrants at elevation so that connecting pipe will not have less cover than mains. 6. Set hydrants on concrete pad. 7. Depth of bury of hydrant is defined as distance from bottom of inlet pipe to ground line. 6/2014 02510-7 of 22 a CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Place concrete thrust block back of hydrant opposite pipe connections set • against vertical face of trench to prevent from blowing off line. 9. Use 5/8 in. stock stainless steel bridle rods and rod collars. 10. Place not less than 5 cu. ft. of broken stone around base of hydrant to ensure drainage. 11. Compact backfill to grade in accordance with specification section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 12. Tighten stuffing boxes. 13. Test hydrant and valve in opened and closed position to ensure that parts are in working condition. E. Joints and Jointing: 1. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for PVC,Steel,and Ductile Iron Pipe: 2. a.After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe,equalize rubber gasket cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. 0 b. Lubricate gaskets per manufacturer's specification. c.Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. d.After pipe sections are joined,check gaskets to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred.If displacement has occurred,remove pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, inspect for damage and replace if necessary before remaking joint. e.Where preventing movement of 16-inch diameter or greater pipe is necessary due to thrust,use restrained joints as shown on Drawings. 1) Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust restraint calculations. 2) Do not include passive resistance of soil in thrust restraint calculations. f. Except for PVC pipe, provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell as shown on Drawings. Means may consist of wedges or other types of stops as approved by Engineer. 6/2014 02510- 8 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 4111, 2. Flanged Joints where required on Ductile Iron Pipe,or Steel Pipe: a. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges,pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line.Do not exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment. b. Use full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide 1/8-inch-thick cloth inserted rubber gasket material. Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions. c. Use stainless steelnuts and bolts to match flange material.Use stainless steelnuts and bolts underground.Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress. Maintain at all times approximately same distance between two flanges at points around flanges.Tighten bolts alternately (180°apart)until all are evenly tight.Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. d. Full length bolt isolating sleeves and washers shall be used with flanged connections. • e. For in-line flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater and at butterfly valve flanges, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrite seal, conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. For in-line flange joints sized between 12 inches in diameter and greater and 24 inches in diameter and smaller,provide Phenolic PSI with nitrite seal gasket conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. 3. Welded Joints (Steel Pipe): a. Prior to starting work,provide certification of qualification for welders employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved. b. Joints: AWWA C 206. Full-fillet, single lap-welded slip-type either inside or outside, or double butt-welded type; use automatic or hand welders; completely penetrate deposited metal with base metal; use filler metal compatible with base metal; keep inside of fittings and joints free from globules of weld metal which would restrict flow or become loose. Do not use mitered joints. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide adequate working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. 6/2014 02510-9 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS c. Furnish welded joints with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36- inch and larger pipe. d. Bell-and-spigot,lap-welded slip joints:Deflection maybe taken at joint by pulling joint up to 3/4 inch as long as 1 Y2 inch minimum lap is maintained. Spigot end may be miter cut to take deflections up to 5 degrees as long as joint tolerances are maintained. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints maybe used for joint deflections of up to 5 degrees. e. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. For butt welded joints, align abutting ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness,do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps for this purpose;however, take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings. f. Protect epoxy or cement lining during welding by draping an 18-inch wide strip of heat resistant material over top half of pipe on each side of lining holdback to avoid damage to lining by hot splatter. Protect tape coating similarly if external welding is required. g. Welding rods:Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond, E-7018. Root or"Stringer"pass shall be performed with 6011 a rods and Filler and Cap shall be done using 7018 rods. h. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide at least 2 passes or beads for automatic welding and 3 passes or beads for manual welding in completed weld. i. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass.Thoroughly clean each individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt,slag or flux. j. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly protected. k. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld. Otherwise,remove tack welds during welding operation. 1. Remove dirt,scale,and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in sections, fittings,or valves. m. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines: J 6/2014 02510- 10 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) Furnish pipe with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36 • inch and larger pipe. 2) Use exterior welds for 30 inch and smaller. 3) Only one end may be miter cut. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints maybe used for joint deflections of up to 2 1/2 degrees. 4) For large diameter water lines,employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. Include cost of such testing and associated work to accommodate testing in contract unit price bid for water line. Furnish copies of test reports to Engineer for review. Engineer has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. A) Weld acceptance criteria: i) Cracking. ii) Lack of fusion/penetration. iii) Slag which exceeds one-third (t) where (t) quals material thickness. iv) Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater than • 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with length equal to or less than three times its width. v) Relevant linear indications in which length of linear indication exceeds three times its width. vi) Four or more relevant 1/16 inch rounded indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less edge to edge. n. After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and bell essentially concentric by jacking,shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints. o. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds,so work of each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to weld. When welder leaves job,stencil must be voided and not duplicated.Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site. Welder may return to project site only after recertification p. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for epoxy lined steel pipe 24 inch diameter and smaller,unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inches or greater. 6/2014 02510- 11 of 22 A CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) In additional to welding requirements contained herein Paragraph 3.06, conform to protection fitting manufacturer's • installation recommendations. 2) Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative to train welders and advise regarding installation and general construction methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience installing protection fittings. 3) All steel pipe is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than 1 inch of internal diameter coating from weld bevel. 4) Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with AWWA C210 or AWWA C213. 5) All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be allowed. 4. Restrained Joints: 411 a. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter, restrain pipe joints with concrete thrust blocks. b. Thrust restraint lengths shown on Drawings are minimum anticipated lengths. These lengths are based on deflections indicated for large diameter lines and ductile iron pipe for small diameter lines. Adjustments in deflections or use of other pipe material may result in reduction or increase of thrust lengths. Perform calculations by pipe manufacturer to verify proposed thrust restraint lengths. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in State of Texas for review by Engineer. Make adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to City. c. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint. d. For 16 inch lines and larger use minimum 16 foot length of pipe in and out of joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16 feet on each side of beveled joints. al e. Installation: 6/2014 02510- 12 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS • 1) Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Examine and clean mechanism; remove direct, debris and other foreign material. 3) Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA per manufacturer's specification. 4) Verify gasket is evenly seated. 5) Do not over stab pipe into mechanism f. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing and operation. g. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction, for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines, to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 • days prior to hydrostatic testing of pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II cement is used. 5. Joint Grout(Steel Pipe): a. Mix cement grout mixture by machine except when less than 1/2 cubic yard is required. When less than 1/2 cubic yard is required,grout may be hand mixed. Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes of mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means is not permitted. b. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it will adhere to ends of pipe. c. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. 6/2014 02510- 13 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS d. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement. 411 e. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as practical to pipe laying operations. Allow grouted exterior joints to cure at least 1 hour before compacting backfill. f. Grouting exterior joint space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess.Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with placement of additional bedding and backfill material. g. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 inches and Smaller:Circumferentially butter ca bell with grout prior to insertion of spigot,strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by Project Manager for 20-inch pipe and smaller. h. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by metallizing,by other approved coatings,or by pointing with grout.Joint pointing may be omitted on potable water pipelines if joint bands are protected by zinc metalizing or other approved protective coatings. i. Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout. j. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of pipe. k. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply approved flexible sealer,such as Flex Protex or equal,to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean and prime surfaces receiving sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete protection of steel in 6/2014 02510- 14 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal manner after joint . closure. 1. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 inches and Larger:Clean joint space, wet joint surfaces,fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth. Accomplish grouting at end of each work day. Obtain written acceptance from Project Engineer of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and replace delaminated mortar lining. m. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line must be completed before mortar is applied to interior joints. n. Do not apply grout to joints that are out of tolerance until acceptable repairs are made. 6. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with feeler gauge approximately 1/2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick,use other joint testing procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure watertight installation prior to backfilling.Perform tests • at no additional cost to City. 7. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints or other method as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's recommended deflection prior to installation. a. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent, repair entire deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded. c. If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe. d. Replace,repair,or reapply coatings and linings as required. e. Assessment of deflection may be measured by the Engineer at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average (6, measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard. 6/2014 02510- 15 of 22 I A CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS f. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve, join pipe in straight • alignment and then deflect to curved alignment. 8. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel Pipe and Fittings: a. Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire fabric: minimum W1; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar thickness less than 3/4 inch. b. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with nonshrink grout. c. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and exterior of pipe. d. For large diameter water lines,provide minimum overlap of 4 inches of butt strap over adjacent piece on butt-strap closures. F. Cathodic Protection Appurtenances: 1. Where identified on Drawings,modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed on Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits • including test stations at connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and other major openings in water line,or as shown on Drawings. 2. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges are provided. Weld strap or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for thrust restraint.Repair coatings as specified by appropriate AWWA standard,as recommended by manufacturer,and as approved by the Engineer 3. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance between wire and strap or clip. 6/2014 02510- 16 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS G. Anchorage of Fittings: • 1. Anchor tees, elbows and plugs in water mains with concrete thrust blocks. 2. Place blocks so that joints will be accessible for inspection and repair. H. Handling: 1. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe. 2. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe,lining and coating.Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with coatings. Where required, provide pipe fittings with sufficient interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight. 3. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel cable, canvas,leather,nylon or similar material. 4. For large diameter water lines,handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas, • leather,nylon,or similar material.Sling shall be minimum 36 inches in width. Do not tear or wrinkle tape layers. 5. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe,protective linings and coatings. a. Package stacked pipe on timbers. Place protective pads under banding straps at time of packaging. b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material.Use nylon straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. c. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe. d. Do not place debris, tools,clothing, or other materials on pipe. 6. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final acceptance. 7. For cement mortar line and coated steel pipe,permit no visible cracks longer than 6 inches,measured within 15 degrees of line parallel to pipe longitudinal axis of finished pipe, except: a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete. , (20. b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers. c. Within 12 inches of pipe ends. 6/2014 02510- 17 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Reject pipe with visible cracks (not meeting exceptions) and remove from project site. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before installation, and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed.Do not place debris,tools,clothing or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed, clean inside of pipe and remove debris. J. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject defective,damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site. 3.04 WET CONNECTIONS A. Definitions: 1. Wet connections consist of isolating sections of pipe to be connected with installed valves,draining the isolated sections,and completing the connections. 2. Connection of 2 inch or smaller lines,which may be referred to on Plans as"2 inch standard connections"or"gooseneck connections"will be measured as 2" wet connections. This item is not to be used as any part of a 2-inch service line. B. Materials: 1. Corporation stops and saddles shall conform to requirements of Section 02515- Water Tap and Service Line Installation. 2. Valves shall conform to requirements of Section 02541 — Fire Hydrant Assembly. 3. Brass fittings shall conform to requirements of AWWA C800. C. Execution: 1. Plan wet connections in such manner and at such hours as to least inconvenience public. Notify Public Works Department at least 48 hours in advance of making connections. 2. DO NOT OPERATE VALVES ON MAINS IN USE BY OWNER.Owner will handle, at no cost to Contractor,all operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections. 3. Conduct connection operations when Inspector is at job site. Connection work shall progress without interruption until complete, once existing mains have been cut or plugs have been removed for making connections. 6/2014 02510- 18 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS II) D. 2-Inch Wet Connections: 1. Tap water main. Provide and install corporation stops,saddles,as required for line and grade adjustment; and brass fittings necessary to adapt to existing main. Provide one Corporation Stop at main line and one Curb Stop at meter. The service line between Curb Stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR-9. 3.05 CUT, PLUG AND ABANDONMENT OF MAINS A. Materials: 1. Concrete for thrust blocks: Class B conforming to requirements of Section 03305. 2. Plugs and clamps shall be suitable for type of pipe to be plugged. B. Execution: 1. Do not begin cut,plug and abandonment operations until replacement main has been constructed, disinfected, and tested, and all service lines have been transferred to replacement main. • 2. Install plug,clamp, and concrete thrust block and make cut at location shown on Plans. 3. Main to be abandoned shall not be valved off and shall not be cut or plugged other than at supply main or as shown on Plans. 4. After main to be abandoned has been cut and plugged,check for other sources feeding abandoned main. If sources are found,notify Engineer immediately. Cut and plug abandoned main at point of other feed as directed by Engineer. 5. Plug or cap all ends or openings in abandoned main in an acceptable manner approved by Engineer. 6. Remove and dispose of all surface identifications such as valve boxes and fire hydrants. Valve boxes in improved streets,other than shell,may be poured full of concrete after removing cap. 7. Backfill all excavations in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 8. Repair all street surfaces in accordance with Section 02980—Pavement Repair. 6/2014 02510- 19 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 3.06 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Hydrostatically test all new water pipelines for liquids before connecting to water distribution system. B. Pipelines shall be tested in lengths between valves, or plugs, of not more than 1,500 feet unless greater length is approved by Engineer. C. Conduct hydrostatic tests in presence of Engineer. D. Preparation: 1. Disinfect water system pipelines prior to hydrostatic testing. E. Test Procedures: 1. Furnish,install,and operate connections,pump,meter and gages necessary for hydrostatic testing. 2. Allow pipeline to sit minimum of 24 hours from time it is initially disinfected until testing begins, to allow pipe wall or lining material to absorb water. Contractor should be aware that periods of up to 7 days may be required for mortar lining to become saturated. 3. Expel all air and apply a minimum test pressure of 125 psi or 150 psi as directed by Engineer. 4. Maintain test pressure for 8 hours. If a large quantity of water is required to maintain pressure during test,testing shall be discontinued until cause of water loss is identified and corrected. F. Allowable Leakage for Water Mains: 1. During hydrostatic tests,no leakage will be allowed for sections of water mains consisting of welded joints. 2. Maximum allowable leakage for water mains with rubber gasketed joints: 11.65 gallons per inch nominal diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours while testing at the required pressure. G. Correction for Failed Tests: 1. Repair all joints showing visible leaks on surface regardless of total leakage shown on test. Check all valves and fittings to ensure that no leakage occurs that could affect or invalidate test. Remove any cracked or defective pipes, fittings and valves discovered during pressure test and replace with new items. 2. Repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained. 6/2014 02510-20 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS • 3.07 DISINFECTION A. All waterlines constructed shall be promptly disinfected before any tests are conducted on waterlines and before waterlines are connected to water distribution system. B. Water for disinfection and flushing will be furnished without charge to Contractor. C. Preparation: 1. Furnish all required temporary blind flanges,cast-iron sleeves,plugs,and other items needed to facilitate disinfection of new mains prior to connecting them to water distribution system. Normally,each valved section of waterline requires two each 3/4-inch taps. A 2-inch minimum blow-off is required for waterlines up to and including 6-inch diameter. 2. .Fire hydrants shall be used as blow-offs to flush newly constructed waterlines 8-inch diameter and above. Where fire hydrants are not available on waterlines,locations and designs for blow-offs shall be as indicated on Plans. Install temporary blow-off valves and remove promptly upon successful completion of disinfection and testing. Abandon by turning off corp and using a stainless steel cap. 3. Slowly fill each section of pipe with water in a manner approved by Engineer. • Average water velocity when filling pipeline should be less than 1 fps and shall not, under any circumstance, exceed 2 fps. Before beginning disinfection operations, expel all air from pipeline. 4. All excavations made shall be backfilled immediately after installation of risers or blow-offs. 5. Install blow-off valves at end of main to facilitate flushing at all dead-end water mains. Install permanent blow-off valves/auto flusher per drawing Ll D. Disinfection: 1. Use not less than 100 parts of chlorine per million parts of water. Introduce chlorinating material to water lines in accordance with AWWA C651. After contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush system with clean water until residual chlorine is no greater than 1.0 parts per million parts of water. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period.If super-chlorinated water(i.e. chlorine concentration above 4mg/1) is used for cleaning water main disinfection and flushing,the water must be dechlorinated prior to discharge.The water discharged into the stormsewer system or natural waterway must meet the Clean Water Act (33 USC § 1251 et seq.) and any (iw subsequent amendments thereof. 2. If a chemical compound is used for a sterilizing agent, it shall be placed in pipes as directed by Engineer. 6/2014 02510-21 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS E. Bacteriological Testing: 1. After disinfection and flushing of waterlines, bacteriological tests will be (;) performed by Owner or testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450— Testing Laboratory Services. If test results indicate need for additional disinfection of waterlines based upon Texas Department of Health and TCEQ requirements,Contractor shall perform additional disinfection operations at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Completion: 1. Upon completion of disinfection and testing, remove risers except those approved for use in subsequent hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly. END OF SECTION 4111 6/2014 02510-22 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP Section 02512 • POLYETHYLENE WRAP 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION NCLUDES A Polyethylene wrap for cast and ductile iron pipe to be used only in open-cut construction when cathodic protection system is not required by Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C105 American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-lion Pipe Systems 2. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT • A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for polyethylene wrap. Include cost of polyethylene wrap in unit price for items wrapped. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed film and tape for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Polyethylene Film: Tubular or sheet form without tears,breaks, holidays or defects; conforming with requirements of AWWA C 105,2.5 to 3 percent carbon black content, either low-or high-density: 1. Low-density polyethylene film. Low-density polyethylene film shall be manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D 1248. a. Raw material. 1) Type : I 2) Class: C (black) 3) Grade: E-5 07/2006 02512- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP 4) Flow rate (formerly melt index): 0.4 g/10 minute, maximum 5) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum b. Physical properties. 1) Tensile strength: 1200 psi, minimum 2) Elongation: 300 percent, minimum 3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness, minimum c. Thickness: Low-density polyethylene film shall have a nominal thickness of 0.008 inch. The minus tolerance on thickness is 10 percent of the nominal thickness. 2. High-density,cross-laminated polyethylene film:High-density,cross laminated polyethylene film shall be manufactured of virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D 1248 a. Raw material. 1) Type: III 2) Class: C (black) 3) Grade: P33 4) Flow rate (formerly melt index): 0.4 to 0.5g/10 minute, maximum 5) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum b. Physical properties. 1) Tensile strength: 5000 psi, minimum 2) Elongation: 100 percent, minimum 3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness, minimum c. Thickness: Film shall have a nominal thickness of 0.004 inch. The minus tolerance of thickness is 10 percent of the nominal thickness. B Polyethylene Tape: Provide 3-inch wide,plastic-backed,adhesive tape;Polyken No. 900, Scotchwrap No. 50, or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Preparation: 1. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc., on pipe surface prior to installation of polyethylene encasement. Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between pipe and polyethylene. 2. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to affect a snug fit, but not tight; encase with minimum space between polyethylene and pipe. Provide sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces,such as bell-spigot interfaces,bolted joints or fittings,and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling operations. Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape to hold polyethylene encasement in place until backfilling operations are complete. 07/2006 02512-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP 3. For installations below water table and/or in areas subject to tidal actions,seal • both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap. B Tubular Type(Method A): 1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section,and bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears pipe ends. 2. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube. 3. After assembling pipe joint,make overlap of polyethylene tube. Pull bunched polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of new length of pipe,and secure in place. Then slip end of polyethylene from new pipe section over end of first wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe. Secure overlap in place. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug,but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points. 4. Repair cuts, tears,punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. C Tubular Type (Method B): 1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe,centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along • 2. barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends. Before making up joint, slip 3-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of preceding pipe section, bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise. After completing joint, pull 3-foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least 1 foot; make each end snug and secure. 3. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. D Sheet Type: 1. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching it until it clears pipe ends. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so that it circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of pipe. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet. 2. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends. 3. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. E Pipe-shaped Appurtenances: Cover bends, reducers, offsets, and other pipe-shaped • appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe. 07/2006 02512-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYETHYLENE WRAP F Odd-shaped Appurtenances: When it is not practical to wrap valves,tees,crosses,and other odd-shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length of polyethylene tube by passing sheet under appurtenance and bringing it up around body. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice, and taping down. Tape polyethylene securely in place at valve stem and other penetrations. G Repairs: Repair any cuts, tears,punctures, or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube,wrapped around pipe to cover damaged area, and secured in place. H Openings in Encasement: Provide openings for branches, service taps, blowoffs, air valves, and similar appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. After appurtenance is installed,tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut,as well as other damaged area in polyethylene,with tape. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with any resulting damaged areas being repaired as described above. I Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe: Where polyethylene-wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped,extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from cast or ductile iron pipe. END OF SECTION • 07/2006 02512-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE Section 02534 • PVC PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for water distribution in nominal diameters 4 inches through 16 inches. B. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe for gravity sanitary sewers in nominal diameters 4 inches through 48 inches. C. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for gravity sanitary sewers and force mains in nominal diameters 4 inches through 36 inches. D. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350— Submittals 2. Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02533—Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap • 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 7. Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 8. Section 02630—Storm Sewers 9. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities E. Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12"for Water Distribution. b. AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, • Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. c. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) • for Joining Plastic Pipe" 05/2013 02534- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE c. ASTM D 3139,"Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" d. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM F 679,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" h. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series)" i. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight)" k. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" 3. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) a. ANSI A21.10 Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water. b. ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for PVC pipe under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains,Gravity Sanitary Sewer,and Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. 05/2013 02534-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL • A. Submit manufacturer's certifications that PVC pipe and fittings meet requirements of this Section and AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 for pressure pipe applications,or the appropriate ASTM standard specified for gravity sewer pipe. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that PVC pressure pipe has been hydrostatically tested at the factory in accordance with AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 and this Section. C. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, have material tested for conformance to applicable ASTM requirements by certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Furnish copies of test reports to the Engineer for review. Cost of testing shall be borne by Contractor or Supplier. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. • B. Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout,free of voids,cracks,inclusions,and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. C. For PVC pressure pipe used for water mains,provide self-extinguishing PVC pipe that bears Underwriters'Laboratories mark of approval and is acceptable without penalty to Texas State Fire Insurance Committee for use in fire protection lines. D. Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. Use elastomeric factory- installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. 2. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants. • 05/2013 02534-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED • Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer E. Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble, non-toxic,non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 2.02 WATER SERVICE PIPE A. Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch: AWWAC900, Class 150, DR 18; nominal 20-foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameters. B. Pipe 16-inch: AWWA C905; Class 235; DR 18; nominal 20 foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameter. C. Joints: ASTM D 3139; push-on type joints in integral bell or separate sleeve couplings. Do not use socket type or solvent weld type joints. D. Make curves and bends by deflecting the joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for review by the Engineer. E. Hydrostatic Test: AWWA C900, AWWA C905, ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110); at point of manufacture; submit manufacturer's written certification. 2.03 BENDS AND FITTINGS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE A. Bends and Fittings: ANSI A21.10, ductile iron; ANSI A21.11 single rubber gasket push-on type joint;minimum 150 psi pressure rating. B. Coatings and Linings: Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.04 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions in the following table: 05/2013 02534-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE • WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER MANUFACTURER TYPE 01'PIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS(MIN.) SIZE RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6"to 15" CertainTeed Approved F679 SDR 26/PS 115 18" to 48" Can-Tex Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Carlon DiamondApproved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14"to 36" Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F949 N/A/50 psi 12"to 36" included in the ETI Ultra-Rib Bid Schedule F794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" Lamson Vylon F794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to maximum depth of 10' only. ***For water-seer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. B. When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. C. For sewers up to 12-inch-diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation,provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. • D. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. E. ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477 shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable. 2.05 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE A. Provide PVC pressure pipe conforming to the requirements for water service pipe,and conforming to the minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot,containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting the requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use EBAA Iron Series 2000PV, Uniflange Series 1350 restrainer,or equal joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13,for PVC pipe • 12-inch diameter and less. 05/2013 02534-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per this Section,2.03 "Bends and Fittings for PVC Pressure Pipe", except furnish all fittings with one of the following internal 0 linings: 1. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248,heat fused to the interior surface of the fitting,as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe "Polybond", or U.S. Pipe "Polyline". 2. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)polyurethane, Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals, Inc. 3. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)ceramic epoxy,Protecto 401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile iron fittings as required by Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap. E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with this Section, 2.02E. F. Manufacturers: Approved manufacturers of pressure rated, solid wall PVC pipe for sanitary sewer force mains are: 1. J &M Manufacturing Company, Inc. 4111 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. Diamond Plastics Corporation 4. Carlon Company 5. North American Pipe Corporation(NAPCO) 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Store pipe under cover out of direct sunlight and protect from excessive heat or harmful chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains, Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers,Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,and Section 02630— Storm Sewers. B. Install PVC pipe in accordance with Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, ASTM D 2321, and manufacturer's recommendations. 0 05/2013 02534-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Water service pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller: Installed to clear utility lines • and have minimum 4 feet of cover below lowest property line grade of street,unless otherwise required by Plans. D. For water service,exclude use of PVC within 200 feet(along the public right-of-way) of underground storage tanks or in undeveloped commercial acreage. Underground storage tanks are primarily located on service stations but can exist at other commercial establishments. E. Avoid imposing strains that will overstress or buckle the pipe when lowering pipe into trench. F. Hand shovel pipe bedding under the pipe haunches and along the sides of the pipe barrel and compact to eliminate voids and ensure side support. END OF SECTION • • 05/2013 02534-7of7 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES Section 02541 • WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gate valves, Plug Valves, Butterfly Valves, Air Release and Pressure Reducing Valves. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittal Procedures 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" b. ASTM B 763,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting • for Valve Applications" c. ASTM B 62, "Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings" d. ASTM D 429,"Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates" e. ASTM A 126, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 240,"Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet,and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications" h. ASTM A 276, "Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes" i. ASTM B 584,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications" j. ASTM A 313,"Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 Resilient-seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems • c. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants d. AWWA C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves 04/2009 02541 - 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT0 A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for valves under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Stipulated Price(Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract,payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 and this Section,and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance with AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515. 411 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A Gate Valves: AWWA C500, AWWA C509 or C515 and additional requirements of this Section.Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults,aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, use gate valves as line valves for sizes less than 16-inches. If type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed. C Gate Valves 1-1/2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem; single-wedge; disc type; screwed ends; such as Crane No. 428,or approved equal. D Coatings for Gate Valves 2 Inches and Larger: AWWA C550; Indurall 3300 or approved equal, non-toxic,imparts no taste to water,functions as physical,chemical, and electrical barrier between base metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body. E Gate Valves 2 Inches in Diameter: Iron body,double gate,non-rising stem, 150-pound test, 2 inch square nut operating clockwise to open. III 04/2009 02541 -2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES F Gate Valves 4 Inches to 12 Inches in Diameter: Non-directional, resilient seated III (AWWA C509 or AWWA C515) or parallel seat double disc (AWWA C500), 200 psig, bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide resilient seated valves manufactured by American Darling AFC-500, US Pipe Metroseal 200, or approved equal. Provide double disc valves manufactured by American Darling 52, Clow F-6102, or approved equal. Comply with following requirements: 1. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening. 2. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts.Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. 3. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum. 4. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number 995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2 inches of 12 percent, non-rising. 5. 0-rings: AWWA C509, sections 2.2.6 and 4.8.2. 6. Stem Seals: Consist of three 0-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar. 7. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 8. Resilient Wedge: Molded,synthetic rubber,vulcanized and bonded to cast or ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or • exceed ASTM D 429, Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve body. 9. Bolts: AWWA C509 Section 4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. G Gate Valves 16 Inches to 24 Inches in Diameter: AWWA C500 by Mueller;push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise specified,double disc, 150 psi, and comply with the following: 1. Body: Cast or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. Equip with rollers, tracks, and scrapers. 2. Stems: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust collar machined to size; non-rising. 3. Stem Seals: Consist of one 0-ring above and one 0-ring below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. 4. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely peened into machined dovetailed grooves. 6. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel alloy-to-iron. II 04/2009 02541 -3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 7. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over, or supported on,cast iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate for • imposed forces. 8. Gear Cases: Cast iron;furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or 0- rings at shaft openings. 9. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case. H Gate Valves 20 Inches and Larger: Furnish and equip with bypass valves. 1. Sizes: Provide 3-inch bypass valves for 16-inch through 20 inch gate valves. Provide 4-inch bypass valves for 24-inch gate valves. I Valves 4 Inches through 12 Inches for Installation in Vertical Pipe Lines: 1. Double disc, square bottom. J Valves 14 Inches and Larger for Installation in Horizontal Pipe Lines: 1. Equipped with bronze shoes and slides. K Gate Valves Installed at Greater than 4 foot Depth: 1. Provide non-rising, extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve. Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4 feet from finished grade. L Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service)Type Meter Installations: 1. Conform to provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; CIO carry label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.;flanged,Class 125;clockwise to close. M Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. 2.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACTUATORS A Butterfly Valves and Actuators: Conform to AWWA C504, except as modified or supplemented herein. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or approved equal. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans,butterfly valves shall be used for line valve sizes 16 inch and larger. If type of valve is specified, no substitute will be allowed. C Butterfly valves shall be short-body,flanged design and installed at locations as shown on Plans. D Direct-bury valves,valves in subsurface vaults. Above-ground and plant valves shall open counterclockwise. E Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. F Butterfly Valves and Actuators (Additional Requirements for Large-Diameter Water Mains): Valves larger than 72 inches in diameter shall have all components designed 04/2009 02541 -4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES so that the allowable stresses at rated pressure shall not exceed one-third of the yield • strength or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of the material used. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or equal. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE CONSTRUCTION A Valves: AWWA C504, Class 150B. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1,Class 125 lb. B Discs for Butterfly Valves: Either cast iron or ductile iron. C Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to disc or body. Seats shall be mechanically secured and may not rely solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or similar bonding agent to attach seat to body. Seats on disc shall be mechanically retained by stainless steel(18-8)retaining ring held in place by stainless steel(18-8) cap screws that pass through rubber seat for added retention. When seat is on disc, seat shall be retained in position by shoulders located on both disc and stainless-steel retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 304 or 316,stainless steel and secured to disc by mechanical means. Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces will not be allowed. D Coat interior wetted ferrous surfaces of valve,including disc,with epoxy suitable for potable-water conditions. Epoxy, surface preparation, and epoxy application: In accordance with AWWA C550 and coating manufacturer's recommendations. Provide 1111 two coats of two-component, high-build epoxy with minimum dry thickness of 10 mils. Epoxy coating: Indurall 3300 or approved equal. Coatings shall be holiday tested and measured for thickness. E Valve shaft and keys,dowel pins,or taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc: Type-304 or 316 stainless steel. Shaft Bearings: Stainless steel,bronze,nylon, or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat or backing material with proven record of preventing Teflon flow under load) in accordance with AWWA C504. F Packing: Field-adjustable, split-V type, and replaceable without removing operator assembly. G Retaining Hardware for Seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Nuts and screws used with clamps and discs for rubber seats shall be held securely with locktight, or other approved method,to prevent loosening by vibration or cavitational effects. H Valve disc shall seat in position at 90 degrees to the pipe axis and shall rotate 90 degrees between full-open and tight-closed position. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal and convex side of disc facing anticipated direction of flow,except where shown otherwise on Plans. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION • A Provide actuators for valves with size based on line velocity of 16 feet per second, and, unless otherwise shown on Plans, equip with geared manual actuators. Provide 04/2009 02541 -5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES fully enclosed and traveling-nut type, rack-and-pinion type, or worm-gear type for valves 24 inches and smaller. vd) B Provide actuator designed for installation with valve shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C Provide valve shaft extended from valve to actuator. Space between actuator housing and valve body shall be completely enclosed so that no moving parts are exposed to soil or elements. D Provide oil-tight and watertight actuator housings for valves,specifically designed for buried service or submerged service when located in valve vaults,and factory packed with suitable grease. E Install a valve position indicator on each actuator housing located above ground or in valve vaults. Valves shall be equipped with 2-inch actuator nut only. F Indicate direction of opening of valve on exposed visible part of assembly. G Design worm-gear or traveling-nut actuators so that a torque of 150 foot-pounds, or less,will operate valve at most adverse condition for which valve is designed.Vertical axis of actuating nut shall not move as valve is opened or closed. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A Provide standard adjustable valve boxes only conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. 2.06 VALVE SERVICE MANHOLES A For large-diameter water mains, provide manholes to dimensions shown on Plans conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes. 2.07 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A Air Release Valves: Apco No. 200, GA Industries Fig. 2-AR, or equal. Materials: body and cover, ASTM A 48, Class 30, cast iron; float and leverage mechanism, ASTM A 240 or A276 stainless steel;orifice and seat,stainless steel against Buna-N or Viton mechanically retained with hex head nut and bolt;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Provide inlet and outlet connections, and orifice as shown on Plans. B Air Release and Vacuum Valves: Provide single-body, standard combination or duplex-body custom combination valves as indicated on Plans. 1. For 2 inch and 3 inch, single-body valves, provide inlet and outlet sizes as shown on Plans and orifice sized for 100 psi working pressure. Valve materials: body, cover and baffle, ASTM A 48, Class 35, or ASTM A 126, Grade B cast iron;plug or poppet,ASTM A 276 stainless steel;float,ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Buna-N; other valve internals, stainless steel. Valve • exterior: Painted with shop-applied primer suitable for contact with potable 04/2009 02541 -6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES water. Provide Apco Model 145C or 147C, Val-Matic Series 200, or equal III 2. valves. For 3 inch and larger duplex body valves as shown on Plans, provide Apco Series 1700 with No. 200 air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. AR/GH- 21K/280,or equal. Air and vacuum valve materials: body and cover,ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; float, ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Type-304, stainless steel and Buna-N;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Air release valve: Constructed as specified in paragraph above on Air Release Valves. C Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide air inlet vacuum relief valves with flanged inlet and outlet connections as shown on Plans. Provide air release valves in combination with inlet and outlet, and orifice as shown on Plans. Valve shall open under pressure differential not to exceed 0.25 psi. Provide Apco Series 1500 with a No. 200A air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. HCARV, or approved equal. Materials for vacuum relief valves: valve body, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; seat and plug, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy 836; spring, ASTM A 313, Type-304, stainless steel;bushing,ASTM B 584 bronze,copper alloy 932;retaining screws,ASTM A 276, Type-304, stainless steel. D Air Release Valve Vault as detailed in Plans. 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES • A Provide Cla-Val Model 90-01, or approved equal, PRV with strainer in location and arrangement as shown on Plans. Valve body: ASTM A 48,cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with ANSI B16.1, Class 125, flanges. Valve cover: ASTM A 48 cast iron. Valve internals: Type-303, stainless steel or B-62 bronze. Rubber parts: Buna-N. No leather parts shall be allowed. Resilient seat shall have rectangular cross section. B Control Tubing: Contain shutoff cocks with "Y" strainer. C PRV: Equip with valve position indicator. Initially set in field by authorized manufacturer's representative with 60 psi downstream pressure. D Provide basket strainer upstream of PRV as shown on Plans. Strainer body: quick- opening type, fabricated-steel construction with ANSI B16.1, Class 150, flanges. Basket: Type-304, stainless steel. Provide Hayward Model 90,or equal,for PRV 4- inch through 24-inch. Provide Hayward Model 510, or equal, for PRV 14 inches or greater when space limitations dictate the use of smaller strainer housing. E Pilot Systems for PRV: Adjustable and pressure sustaining. F Valve Box: Valve Box conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter boxes, and Meter Vaults. 0 04/2009 02541 -7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION0 A Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer. 3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition. B Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Plans. Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet. Install valves completely closed when placed in water line. C For pipe section of each valve box,use only cast iron,ductile iron,or DR 18 PVC pipe cut to proper length. Size to allow future operation of valve. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on Plans. 3.03 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A Perform disinfection and testing of valves and appurtenances as required by Section 0 02510—Water Mains. B Repair or replace valves which exceed the allowable specified leakage rate. 3.04 PAINTING OF VALVES A Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground using ACRO Paint No. 2215, or approved equal. END OF SECTION II 04/2009 02541 -8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS • Section 02603 FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates,meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. B. Ring grates. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" III b. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" c. ASTM C 270,"Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO M 306,"Drainage, Sewage,Utility, and Related Castings" 3. American Welding Society(AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for frames,grates, rings, covers, and seals under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals are included as a Bid Items, measurement 1111 will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 12/2015 02603- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS 1.03 SUBMITTALS • A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Provide copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions. Manufacturer shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. or as approved by public works. C. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames,grates,rings and covers shall conform to ASTM A 48,Class 35B and AASHTO M 306. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. ill C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be 75% post-consumer recycled material, clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.02 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.03 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide stainless steel inflow preventers and watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole Frames and Covers, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or as approved by public works. 4 B. Where personnel entry is anticipated,minimum clear opening of 30-inches is required. 12/2015 02603-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES,GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS • 2.04 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.05 MORTAR A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installations that have an elevation difference between the final elevation of the manhole cover and the surrounding finished grade greater than 18 inches will be required to be hinged, lift assist gasketed ring and cover. B. Install castings according to approved Shop Drawings, instructions given in related ® Sections, and applicable directions from the manufacturer's printed materials. C. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep castings plumb, level, true and free of rack. Measure location accurately from established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in formwork until permanently set. D. Ring grates shall be fabricated in accordance with Plans and shall be set in mortar in the mouth of the pipe bell. END OF SECTION 41) 12/2015 02603-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS Section 02630 • STORM SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm sewers and appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02415—Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 9. Section 02629 - Safety End Treatments C. Referenced Standards: • 1. American SocietyTesting for and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe b. ASTM C 443,"Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets" c. ASTM C 506,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" d. ASTM C 877,"Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections" e. ASTM C 507, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" f. ASTM C 655, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D- Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" g. ASTM D 3350,"Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" h. ASTM C 1433, "Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers" i. ASTM B 633,"Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel" j. ASTM A 760, "Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains" 5/2013 02630- 1 of 12 I CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) fill 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for storm sewers is on a linear foot basis taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes or from end to end of culverts, measured and complete in place. Separate measurement will be made for each type and size of pipe installed. B. Payment for storm sewer includes pipe,earthwork,connections to existing manholes and pipe,accessories,equipment and execution required are incidental to storm sewer work. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. C. Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance 411 with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The condition for acceptance will be a storm sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to- pipe,box-to-box joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections and in box connections. Ill 5/2013 02630-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING • A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Handle pipe, fittings, and accessories carefully with approved handling devices. Do not drop or roll pipe off trucks or trailers. Materials cracked,gouged,chipped,dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved for installation. C. Store pipe and fittings on heavy timbers or platforms to avoid contact with the ground. D. Unload pipe,fittings,and specials as close as practical to the location of installation to avoid unnecessary handling. E. Keep interiors of pipe and fittings completely free of dirt and foreign matter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Materials for storm sewers shall be of the sizes and types indicated on the Plans. B. Materials for pipe and fittings, other than those specified or referenced, may be considered for use in storm sewers. II/ C. For consideration of other materials, submit complete manufacturer's data including materials,sizes,flow carrying capacity,installation procedures,and history of similar installations to Engineer for pre-bid evaluations,if allowed, or as a substitution. 2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A. Circular reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 76, for Class III wall thickness. Joints shall be rubber gasketed conforming to ASTM C 443. B. Reinforced concrete arch pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 506 for Class A-III. Joints shall conform to ASTM C 877. C. Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe, either vertical or horizontal, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 507 for Class VE-III for vertical or Class HE-III for horizontal. Joints shall be rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 877. D. Reinforced concrete D-load pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 655. 5/2013 02630-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2.03 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS A. All box sewer sections shall conform to ASTM C1433. (110 B. All pipe and boxes shall be machine-made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. C. Concrete shall conform to requirements of Section 03300— Cast-in-Place Concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. D. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit-mixed concrete is not acceptable. E. Make test specimens in test cylinders at the same time and in the same manner as the box sections they represent. Make a minimum of 4 test cylinders for each day's production run and each mix design. Cure test cylinders in the same manner and for the same times as the boxes they represent. The producer must furnish all equipment required for testing concrete for boxes produced in a precasting plant. F. For precast boxes,provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes of sufficient size for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the box section. Do not use lifting holes larger than 3 in. in diameter. Do not cut more 0 than 1 longitudinal. G. Rubber gaskted joints for precast reinforced concrete box culverts and sewers may be selected in lieu of boxes with preformed,flexible,mastic gasket material.When rubber gasket joints are selected, they shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1677 for design of the joints, performance and joint tolerances. When selecting the rubber gasket joint for box,neither filter fabric nor external joint wrap shall be required. 2.04 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated metal pipe may be galvanized steel, aluminized steel, aluminum or precoated galvanized steel as indicated on Plans and conforming to the following: Galvanized Steel AASHTO M218 Aluminized Steel AASHTO M274 Aluminum AASHTO M197 Precoated Galvanized Steel AASHTO M246 1. Reference to gauge of metal is to U.S. Standard Gauge for uncoated sheets. Tables in AASHTO M218 and AASHTO M274 list thicknesses for coated sheets in inches. The tables in AASHTO M197 list thicknesses in inches for 0 clad aluminum sheets. 5/2013 02630-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS B. Coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall 1111 conform to requirements of AASHTO M36 for steel pipe and AASHTO Ml 96 for aluminum pipe. 1. Coupling bands shall be not more than 3 nominal sheet thicknesses lighter than thickness of pipe to be connected and in no case lighter than 0.052 inch for steel or 0.048 inch for aluminum. 2. Coupling bands shall be made of same base metal and coating (metallic or otherwise)as pipe. 3. Minimum width of corrugated locking bands shall be as shown below for corrugations which correspond to end circumferential corrugations on pipes being joined: a. 10 Y2 inches wide for 2 2/3 inch x 1/2-inch corrugations. b. 12 inches wide for 3 inch x 1 inch corrugations. 4. Helical pipe without circumferential end corrugations will be permitted only when it is necessary to join a new pipe to an existing pipe which was installed with no circumferential end corrugations. In this event pipe furnished with helical corrugations at ends shall be field jointed with either helically corrugated bands or with bands with projections (dimples). The minimum • width of helical corrugated bands shall conform to the following: a. 12 inches wide for 1/2 inch-deep helical end corrugations. b. 14 inches wide for one inch-deep helical end corrugations. 5. Bands with projections shall have circumferential rows ofprojections with one projection for each corrugation. Width of bands with projections shall be not less than the following: a. 12 inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72 inches. Bands shall have two circumferential rows of projections. b. 16 IA inches wide for pipe diameters of 78 inches and greater. Bands shall have four circumferential rows of projections. 6. Bolts for coupling bands shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Bands 12 inches wide or less will have a minimum of 2 bolts per end at each connection, and bands greater than 12 inches wide shall have a minimum of 3 bolts at each connection. 7. Galvanized bolts may be hot dip galvanized in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M 232,mechanically galvanized to provide same requirements as AASHTO M 232,or electro-galvanized per ASTM B 633,Type RS. II/ 5/2013 02630-5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Bituminous coated pipe or pipe arch shall be coated inside and out with a bituminous coating which shall meet these performance requirements and requirements of • AASHTO M190. 1. Pipe shall be uniformly coated inside and out to a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch,measured on crests of corrugations. 2. Bituminous coating shall adhere to the metal so that it will not chip,crack,or peel during handling and placement;and shall protect pipe from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Where a paved invert is shown on Plans,pipe or pipe arch,in addition to fully- coated treatment described above,shall receive additional bituminous material, same as specified above, applied to the bottom quarter of circumference to form a smooth pavement. Maintain a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch above crests of corrugations. D. Furnish all fittings and specials required for bends, end sections, branches, access manholes,and connections to other fittings. Design fittings and specials in accordance with Plans and ASTM A 760. Fittings and specials are subject to same internal and external loads as straight pipe. 2.05 PIPE FABRICATION A. Steel Pipe: 1. Galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 36,Type I,Type IA, or Type II, as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,helical corrugations with continuous helical lock seam,or ultra-high frequency resistance butt-welded seams is acceptable. B. Aluminum Pipe: 1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196,Type I,Type IA, circular pipe,or Type II,pipe arch as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,or helical corrugations with a continuous helical lock seam. 3. Portions of aluminum pipe that will be in contact with concrete or metal other than aluminum, shall be insulated from these materials with a coating of bituminous material meeting requirements of AASHTO M 190. Extend 0 coating a minimum distance of one foot beyond area of contact. 5/2013 02630-6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Precoated Galvanized Steel Pipe: • 1. Pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 245, Type I, Type IA or Type II as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted seams, or helical lock seams is acceptable. 3. Inside and outside coating shall be a minimum of 10 mils. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4 inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete thickness in excess of that required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that such excess thickness does not interfere with proper jointing operations. B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer clearly on the inside of inlet,headwall or wingwall. C. Rejection: Precast units may be rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for any of the following reasons: • 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that do not exceed the depth of the joint. 2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from the work site and replace with acceptable units. E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage may be repaired if, in the opinion of the Engineer, repaired units conform to requirements of these specifications. 2.07 BEDDING, BACKFILL,AND TOPSOIL MATERIAL A. Bedding and Backfill Material: Conform to Plans and requirements of Sections 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 5/2013 02630-7of12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, 3.02 "Preparation". 3.02 EARTHWORK A. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the Plans. When pipes are laid in a trench,the trench when completed and shaped to receive the pipe,shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of backfill and bedding material under and around pipe. B. Bed pipe in accordance with Plans and Specifications. When requested by Engineer, furnish a simple template for each size and shape of pipe for use in checking shaping of bedding. Template shall consist of a thin plate or board cut to match lower half of cross section. C. Where rock in either ledge or boulder form exists below pipe,remove the rock below grade and replace with suitable materials so that a slightly yielding compacted earth cushion is provided below pipe a minimum of 12 inches thick. D. Where soil encountered at established grade is quicksand, muck or similar unstable materials, such unstable soil shall be removed and replaced in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Do not allow cement stabilized materials for backfill to come into contact with any uncoated aluminum or aluminized pipe surface. E. After metal pipe structure has been completely assembled on proper line and grade and headwalls constructed when required by the drawing details,place selected material from excavation or borrow along both sides of the completed structures equally, in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth(loose measurement),wetted if required and thoroughly compacted between adjacent structures and between structure and sides of trench, or for a distance each side of structure equal to diameter of pipe. Backfill material shall be compacted to the same density requirements as specified for adjoining sections of embankment in accordance with specifications. Above three-fourths point of structure,place uniformly on each side of pipe in layers not to exceed 12 inches. F. Only hand operated tamping equipment will be allowed within vertical planes 2 feet beyond horizontal projection of outside surface of structure for backfilling, until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained. Remove and replace damaged pipe. G. Do not permit heavy earth moving equipment to haul over structure until a minimum of 4 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed. 5/2013 02630-8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS H. During backfilling, obtain uniform backfill material and uniform compacted density • throughout length of structure so that unequal pressure will be avoided. Provide proper backfill under structure. I. Prior to adding each new layer of loose backfill material,an inspection will be made of inside periphery of structure for local or unequal deformation caused by improper construction methods. Evidence of deformation will be reason for such corrective measures as may be directed by Engineer. 3.03 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE INSTALLATION A. Place pipes on prepared foundation starting at outlet end. Join sections firmly together, with side laps or circumferential joints pointing upstream and with longitudinal laps on sides. B. Metal in joints which is not protected by galvanizing or aluminizing shall be coated with an approved asphaltum paint. C. Provide proper equipment for hoisting and lowering sections of pipe into trench without damaging pipe or disturbing prepared foundation and sides of trench. Pipe which is not in alignment or which shows undue settlement after laying,or is damaged, shall be taken up and relaid. SD. Multiple installations of corrugated metal pipe and pipe arches shall be laid with the center lines of individual barrels parallel. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, maintain the following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes: DIAMETER CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN PIPES PIPE ARCH OF PIPE FULL CIRCLE AND PIPE ARCH DESIGN NO. 18" l' 2" 2 24" 1, 5" 3 30" l' 8" 4 36" 1' 11" 5 42" 2' 2" 6 48" 2' 5" 7 54" 2' 10" 8 60"—84" 3' 2" 9 90"- 120" 3' 5" 10 & Over E. Where extensions are attached to existing structures, install a proper connection between structure and existing as indicated on Plans, coat the connection with bituminous material when required. • F. When existing headwalls and aprons are indicated for reuse on the Plans,sever portion to be reused from the existing culvert, and relocate to prepared position. Damaged 5/2013 02630-9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS headwalls,aprons or pipes attached to the headwall, shall be restored to their original condition. 3.04 JOINTING A. Field joints shall maintain pipe alignment during construction and prevent infiltration of side material. B. Coupling bands shall lap equally on pipes being connected to form a tightly-closed joint. C. Use corrugated locking bands to field join pipes furnished with circumferential corrugations including pipe with helical corrugations having reformed circumferential corrugations on ends. Fit locking bands into a minimum of one full circumferential corrugation of pipe ends being coupled. 3.05 CONCRETE PIPE INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the Plans and pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in this Section. B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, the bottom of the trench shaped, bedding material is installed, and the trench has been approved by the Engineer. C. Install pipe to the line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in the trench so the interior surfaces of the pipe follow the grades and alignments indicated. D. Install pipe with the spigot ends toward the direction of flow. E. Form a concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets. F. Place and drive home newly laid sections with come-a-long winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by the Engineer. G. Keep the interior of pipe clean as the installation progresses. Where cleaning after laying the pipe is difficult because of small pipe size,use a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the joint has been completed. H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection. I. When work is not in progress,cover the exposed ends of pipes with an approved plug to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. • 5/2013 02630- 10 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.06 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BOX SEWERS INSTALLATION • A. Placement of Boxes: when precast boxes are used to form multiple barrel structures, place the box sections in conformance with the plans or as directed. Place material to be used between barrels as shown on the plans or as directed. Unless otherwise authorized, start the laying of boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched. Fit,match,and lay the boxes to form a smooth,uniform conduit true to the established lines and grades. For trench installations, lower the box sections into the trench without damaging the box or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the box before it is placed. Prevent the earth or bedding material from entering the box as it is laid. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, boxes that are not in alignments or that show excessive settlement after laying. Form and place cast-in- place boxes in accordance with Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Connections and Stub Ends: Make connections of boxes to existing boxes, pipes, storm drains,or storm drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the connections. Connect boxes to any required headwalls,wingwalls, safety end treatments or riprap,or other structures as shown on the plans or as directed. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the box. • C. For precast boxes,fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure. Precast concrete or mortar plugs may be used. 3.07 INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT A. For installation of pipe by augering,boring,or jacking pipe,conform to requirements of Section 02415 - Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers. B. Design pipe and box sewers for jacking,boring or tunneling considering the specific installation conditions such as the soil conditions, installation methods, anticipated deflection angles and jacking pressures. When requested, provide design notes and drawings signed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. 3.08 CONNECTIONS A. Connect inlet leads to the inlets as shown on the Plans. Use non-shrink grout jointing material as shown on the Plans Drawing or as approved. Make connections water tight. • 5/2013 02630- 11 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.09 FINISHES A. Cut off inlet leads neatly at the inside face of inlet wall. Point up with mortar or field galvanizing. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed,shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to the detailed Plans. C. Finish concrete surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Backfill the trench only after pipe and box sewer installation is approved by the Engineer. B. Bed pipes with materials conforming to requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and as indicated on Plans. C. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.11 INSPECTION A. Remove and replace all nonconforming work at no additional cost to City. 3.12 SAFETY END TREATMENTS (SET) A. Install safety end treatments in accordance with Section 02629 and as indicated on the plans. Use only approved pre-cast SET's with cross bars. 3.13 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas,grade surface as a uniform slope to natural grade as indicated on the Plans. END OF SECTION • 5/2013 02630- 12 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS • Section 02631 PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete inlets for storm or sanitary sewers,including cast iron frame and plate or grate. B. Precast concrete headwalls and wingwalls for storm sewers. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01630—Product Options and Substitution 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe b. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" E. Definitions: 1. Normal Depth Type A,Type B,Type C and Type E Inlets-depth of 2.25 feet or less(2'3")plus pipe inside diameter when measured from grating,bottom of gutter, or throat to flow line of inlet lead. 2. Normal Depth Type BB Inlet - depth of 2.55 feet (2' 6 5/s ") plus pipe inside diameter when measured from curb beam to flow line of inlet lead. 3. Extra Depth Inlet - specified depth exceeding normal depth for the type inlet used. 5/2013 02631 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT III A. Measurement for normal depth inlets is on a per each basis, complete in place. B. When extra depth is specified on the Plans,measurement for extra depth inlets is on a vertical foot basis for each foot in excess of normal depth,measured and complete in place. C. Measurement for headwalls and wingwalls is on a per each basis, complete in place. D. Payment for inlets and for culvert headwalls and wingwalls includes connection of lines, and furnishing and installing frames, grates,rings and covers. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings for approval of design and construction details for precast concrete inlets,headwalls and wingwalls. . 0 C. Submit proposals for using equivalent construction products or processes according to Section 01630—Product Options and Substitution. D. Submit manufacturer's data and details for frames, grates,rings, and covers. 1.04 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT A. Store precast units on level blocking. Do not place loads on them until design strength is reached. Shipment of acceptable units may be made when the 28 day strength requirements have been met. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Concrete for precast machine-made units meeting requirements of ASTM C 76 regarding reinforced concrete, cement, aggregate, mixture, and concrete test. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. B. Reinforcing steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete. Place reinforcing steel to conform to details shown on Plans and as follows: • 5/2013 02631 -2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS • 1. Provide a positive means for holding steel cages in place throughout production of concrete units. The maximum variation in reinforcement position is plus or minus 10 percent of wall thickness or plus or minus 1/2 inch whichever is less. Regardless of variation, the minimum cover of concrete over reinforcement as shown on the Plans shall be maintained. 2. Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted unless noted on the Plans. C. Mortar: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270,Type S using Portland cement. D. Miscellaneous metal: Cast-iron frames and plates conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4 inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete thickness in excess of that required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that such excess thickness does not interfere with proper jointing operations. B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer clearly on the inside of inlet,headwall or wingwall. IIIC. Rejection: Precast units maybe rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for any of the following reasons: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. 2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from the work site and replace with acceptable units. E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage may be repaired if, in the opinion of the Engineer, repaired units according to requirements of these specifications. • 5/2013 02631 -3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by inlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install inlets,headwalls,and wingwalls complete in place to the dimensions,lines and grades as shown on the Plans. B. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C. Bed precast concrete units on cement stabilized sand on foundations of firm, stable material accurately shaped to conform to the shape of unit bases. D. Provide adequate means to lift and place concrete units. 3.03 FINISHES A. Use a cement-sand mortar mix to seal joints, fill lifting holes, and as otherwise required. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed,shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to Plans details. C. Accurately adjust cast iron inlet plate frames to line,grade,and slope. Grout frame in place with mortar. 3.04 INLET WATERTIGHTNESS A. Test each inlet for leaks. Verify that inlets are free of visible leaks. Repair leaks in an approved manner. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Connect inlet leads to the inlets as shown on the Plans. Use non-shrink jointing material as shown on the Plans or as approved. Make connections water tight. 4111 5/2013 02631 -4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PRECAST INLETS,HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS • 3.06 BACKFILL A. Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each completed inlet, headwall or wingwall according to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION • 5/2013 02631 -5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS • Section 02632 CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS, AND WINGWALLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place inlets for storm or sanitary sewers,including cast iron frame and plate or grate. B. Cast-in-place headwalls and wingwalls for storm sewers. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02603 —Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities D. Referenced Standards: • 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 270,"Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" E. Definitions: 1. Normal Depth Type A,Type B,Type C and Type E Inlets-Depth of 2.25 feet or less(2'3")plus pipe inside diameter when measured from grating,bottom of gutter,or throat to flow line of inlet lead. 2. Normal Depth Type BB Inlet - Depth of 2.55 feet (2' 6%") plus pipe inside diameter when measured from curb beam to flow line of inlet lead. 3. Extra Depth Inlet- Specified depth exceeding normal depth for the type inlet used. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for normal depth inlets is on a per each basis, complete in. B. Measurement for extra depth inlets is on a vertical foot basis for each foot in excess of • normal depth,measured and complete in place. C. Measurement for headwalls and wingwalls is on a per each basis, complete in place. 5/2013 02632- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS D. Payment for inlets and for culvert headwalls and wingwalls includes connection of • lines and furnishing and installing frames, grates,rings and covers. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings for approval of design and construction details for cast-in-place units which differ from units shown on Plans. C. Submit manufacturer's data and details for frames,grates,rings, and covers. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi conforming to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete, unless otherwise indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. 411 B. Reinforcing steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Mortar: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270,Type S using Portland cement. D. Miscellaneous metals: Cast-iron frames, grates, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of Section 02603 —Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by inlets. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Construct inlets,headwalls,and wingwalls complete in place to the dimensions,lines and grades as shown on Plans. 0 5/2013 02632-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE INLETS, HEADWALLS,AND WINGWALLS • B. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C. The box section of inlet may be constructed of Class A concrete. D. Forms will be required for both the outside and inside faces of concrete inlet walls, however,if the nature of the material excavated for the inlet is such that it can be hand trimmed to a smooth vertical face,the outside forms may be omitted with approval of the Engineer. E. Place reinforcing steel to conform to details shown on the Plans. Provide a positive means for holding steel cages in place during concrete placement. Welding of reinforcing steel is not permitted unless noted on the Plans. The maximum variation in reinforcement position is plus or minus 10 percent of wall thickness or plus or minus 1/2 inch whichever is less. Regardless of variation, the minimum cover of concrete over reinforcement as shown on the Plans shall be maintained. F. Chamfer exposed edges unless otherwise indicated on Plans. 3.03 FINISHES A. Cut off inlet leads neatly at the inside face of inlet wall. Point up with mortar. • B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed,shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to the detailed Plans. C. Finish concrete surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.04 INLET WATERTIGHNESS A. Verify that inlets are free of visible leaks. Repair leaks in an approved manner. 3.05 BACKFILL A. Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each completed inlet according to the requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02632-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES Section 02633 411, ADJUSTING MANHOLES, INLETS, AND VALVE BOXES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Adjusting elevation of manholes, inlets, and valve boxes to new grades. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02910—Topsoil 7. Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT OA Measurement for adjusting utility structures to grade is on a lump sum basis for: 1. Adjusting manholes. 2. Adjusting inlets. 3. Adjusting valve boxes. B Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A For cast in place concrete,refer to Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. B For precast concrete manhole sections and adjustment rings,refer to Section 02542— Concrete Manholes and Accessories. C For mortar mix, conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 411, 07/2006 02633- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES 2.02 CAST IRON ADJUSTING RINGS A For cast iron adjusting rings, refer to Section 02542 — Concrete Manholes and ,j Accessories. 2.03 PIPING MATERIALS A For riser pipes and fittings, refer to applicable piping materials specifications in Sections 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Examine existing structure,valve box,frame and cover or inlet box,frame and cover or inlet,and piping and connections for damage or defects that would affect adjustment to grade. Report such damage or defects to the Engineer. 3.02 ESTABLISHING GRADE A Coordinate grade related items with existing grade and finished grade or paving,and relate to established bench mark or reference line. 3.03 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND INLETS A Elevation of manhole or inlet can be raised using precast concrete rings or metal (JO adjusting rings. Use of brick for adjustment to grade is prohibited. Elevation of manhole or inlet can be lowered by removing existing masonry,adjusting rings or the top section of the barrel below the new elevation and then rebuilding or raising the elevation to the proper height. B Grout inside and outside adjusting ring joints. C Salvage and reuse cast iron frame and cover or grate. D Protect or block off manhole or inlet bottom using wood forms shaped to fit so that no debris or soil falls to the bottom during adjustment. E Set the cast iron frame for the manhole cover or grate in a full mortar bed and adjust to the established elevation. In streets, adjust covers to be flush to 1/8 inch above pavement. F Verify that manholes and inlets are free of visible leaks as a result of reconstruction. Repair leaks in a manner subject to the Engineer's approval. 3.04 ADJUSTING VALVE BOXES A If usable, salvage and reuse valve box and surrounding concrete block. • 07/2006 02633-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES B Remove and replace 6 inch ductile iron riser pipe with suitable length for depth of • cover required to establish the adjusted elevation to accommodate actual finish grade. C Reinstall in-kind adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in vertical position. Provide minimum 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end and interior contact flange of valve box for vertical movement damping. D After valve box has been set, aligned, and adjusted so that top lid is level with final grade, pour a 24 inch by 24 inch by 8 inch thick concrete pad around valve box. Center valve box horizontally within concrete slab. 3.05 BACKFILL AND GRADING A Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each adjusted manhole, inlet, and valve box and compact according to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Grade the ground surface to drain away from each manhole and valve box. Place earth fill around manholes to the level of the upper rim of the manhole frame. Place earth fill around the valve box concrete block. C In unpaved areas,grade surface at a uniform slope of 1 to 5 from the manhole frame to natural grade. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil and seed in accordance with Section 02921—Hydromulch • Seeding. END OF SECTION • 07/2006 02633-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02634 • DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water mains,wastewater force mains,gravity sanitary sewers, and storm sewers. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02676—Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines 3. Section 02533 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers C. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) • a. ANSI A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugal Cast, in Metal Molds b. ANSI A21.11,Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe c. ANSI A21.15, Flanged Cast and Ductile Iron d. ANSI A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe e. ANSI A21.10,Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water f. ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings g. ANSI A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service h. ANSI A21.4, Cement-Mortar lining/Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings b. AWWA C110 Ductile-lion and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service d. AWWA C600 Installation for Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) (soy. a. SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning 4. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 5/2013 02634- 1 of 5 A _ CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS a. ASTM G 62,"Standard Test Method for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings" b. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for ductile iron pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains, Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, Gravity Sanitary Sewers, and Storm Sewers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer is at Contractor's risk. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all ductile iron pipe and fittings meet al provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A21.51. B. Provide certifications that all pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A21.11. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile iron pipe barrels: ANSI A21.15,ANSI A21.50 or ANSI A21.51;bear mark of Underwriters' Laboratories approval. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths,not less than 18 feet long,except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,use minimum Pressure Class 250 for waterlines or thickness Class 52 for waterlines in casing or augered hole. Provide minimum thickness Class 52 for sanitary sewers. Provide minimum Pressure Class 350 for flanged pipe. 111 5/2013 02634-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.02 JOINTS • A. Joint types: ANSI A21.11 push-on;ANSI A21.11 mechanical joint;or ANSI A21.15 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or required by these specifications.For bolted joints,bolts shall conform to requirements of AWWA C111. B. Where restrained joints for buried service are required by Plans, provide one of the following,or Approved Equal (restrained joints shall be polyethylene wrapped): 1. Super-Lock Joint by Clow Corporation. 2. Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company. 3. TR-Flex Joint by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 4. EBAA IRON MEGALUG Mechanical Joint Restraint. C. Threaded or grooved type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide for restrained joints designed to meet test pressures required under Section 02676 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines or Section 02533— Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, as applicable. IIIE. Where ductile iron water main is cathodically protected from corrosion,bond rubber gasketed joints as shown on Plans to provide electrical continuity along entire pipeline, except where insulating flanges are required by Plans. 2.03 GASKETS A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber(SBR) gasket material; for flanged joints 1/8-inch thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A21.15. B. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas,especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed pipeline, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum(diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber,Nitrile Rubber, FKM Viton Type Gasket(ASTM 1418) Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacture ' C.,, 5/2013 02634-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size • fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they serve. B. Push-on Fittings will not be allowed above grade. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI A21.10; ANSI B16.1 cast or ductile iron. Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125;pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A21.10(AWWA C110);pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Mains:ANSI A21.53(AWWA C153);4-inch through 12-inch diameter; cement-mortar lining;conform to requirements of Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap. 2.05 COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water Main Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat. B. Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors: 1. Preparation: Commercial blast cleaning conforming to SSPC-SP6. • 2. Liner thickness: Nominal 40 mils,minimum 35 mils, for pipe barrel interior; minimum 6- 10 mils at gasket groove and outside spigot end to 6-inches back from end. 3. Testing: ASTM G 62, Method B for voids and holidays; provide written certification. 4. Acceptable Lining Materials: a. Virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D 1248, with inert fillers and carbon black to resist ultraviolet degradation during storage heat bonded to interior surface of pipe and fittings;"Polyline"by American Cast Iron Pipe Company; or Approved Equal. b. Polyurethane: Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals. c. Ceramic Epoxy: Protecto-401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. C. Sanitary Sewer Point Repair Pipe: For pipes which will be lined with high density polyethylene liner pipe or cured-in-place liner,provide cement-lined with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A21.4. For pipes which will not be provided with named liner, • provide pipe as specified in this Section, 2.05B "Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors". 5/2013 02634-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS D. Exterior: Prime coat and outside asphaltic coating conforming to ANSI A21.10,ANSI • A21.15, or ANSI A21.51 for pipe and fittings in open cut excavation and in casings. E. Polyethylene Wrap: For buried water lines and sanitary sewers, including point repairs, provide polyethylene wrap unless otherwise specified or shown. Provide Polyethylene Wrap for all buried ductile iron pipe,including polyurethane coated pipe. F. For flanged joints in buried service,provide petrolatum wrapping system, Denso, or Approved Equal, for the complete joint and all alloy steel fasteners. Alternatively, provide bolts made of Type 304 Stainless Steel. G. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have coatings and linings recommended by the manufacturer as resistant to the contaminants. 2.06 MANUFACTURERS A. Pre-approved manufacturers of ductile iron are American Cast Iron Pipe Co.,McWane Cast Iron Pipe Co., and U. S. Pipe and Foundry Co. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • A. Conform to installation requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains,Section 02530 —Gravity Sanitary Sewers,and Section 02533—Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AWWA C600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. 3.02 GRADE A. Unless otherwise specified on Plans,install ductile iron pipe for water service to clear utility lines with following minimum cover: DIAMETER DEPTH OF COVER (INCHES) (FEET) 16 and 24 5 12 and smaller 4 END OF SECTION 5/2013 02634-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02635 • STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A New steel pipe and fittings for water mains, pumping facilities, and casings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 3. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 36, "Standard Specification for Carbon structural Steel" b. ASTM A 570, "Standard Practice for Roof System Assemblies Employing Steel Deck, Performed Roof Insulation, and Bituminous Built-Up Roofing" c. ASTM A 53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless" d. ASTM A 135,"Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded • Steel Pipe" e. ASTM A 139, "Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (arc)- Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over)" f. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM D 512, "Standard Test Method for Chloride Ion in Water" i. ASTM D 1293, "Standard Test Method for pH of Water" j. ASTM D 4541, "Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe—6 in. and Larger b. AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe c. AWWA Ml1 Steel Water Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation, Fourth Edition d. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 in. Through 144 in. e. AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines f. AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Special Sections,Connections,and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines (tio02/2008 02635- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS g. AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe—4 in. and Larger—Shop Applied h. AWWA C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place-4 in. • and Larger i. AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NFS) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for steel pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains, pumping facilities and casings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit Shop Drawings for aerial crossings and water plant/facilities. Include design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade,laying dimensions,lining and coating systems,proposed welding procedures,fabrication,fitting,flange,and special details. C Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's certifications that all pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C200, Section 3.4. B Provide manufacturer's affidavits that polyurethane coatings,linings and tape coatings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that coatings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature 5 degrees above the dew point. C Provide manufacturer's affidavits that mortar coatings and linings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that linings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature above 32 degrees F. D Prior to work being started, provide proof of certification of qualification for all welders employed for type of work,procedures and positions involved. Qualifications shall be in accordance with AWWA C206. E Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer shall be at Contractor's risk. J 02/2008 02635 -2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.0 PRODUCTS • 2.01 STEEL PIPE A Provide steel pipe designed and manufactured in conformance with AWWA C200 and AWWA M1 1 except as modified herein. Steel shall be minimum of ASTM A 36, ASTM A 570 Grade 36, ASTM A 53 Grade B, ASTM A 135 Grade B, or ASTM A 139 Grade B. B Minimum Allowable Steel-Wall Thickness: In accordance with following table for HS-20 live loads and depths of bury of up to 16 feet and AWWA C200 new uncoated welded steel. CASING PIPE (ENCASEMENT SLEEVES) CASING MINIMUM WALL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT PIPE SIZE PER O.D. THICKNESS LINEAR FOOT UNCOATED 8" 8.625" 0.219" 19.64 10" 10.75" 0.219" 24.60 12" 12.75" 0.219" 29.28 14" 14.00" 0.219" 32.00 16" 16.00" 0.219" 36.86 20" 20.00" 0.250" 52.73 24" 24.00" 0.250" 63.41 30" 30.00" 0.250" 79.43 C Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 20 feet except as required for special fittings or closure sections. D Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 24 inches; long radius bends; beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness: equal to or greater than pipe to which fittings is to be welded; unless otherwise shown on the Plans. E Joints: 1. Standard field joint for steel pipe; including casings: AWWA C206. a. Single-welded, lap joint. b. Double-welded, butt joint. 2. Provide mechanically coupled or flanged joints where required for valves and fittings, and as shown on Plans. Flanges: AWWA C207, Class D; same diameter and drilling as Class 125 cast iron flanges, ASA B16.1. Maintain 4111" electrically isolated flanged joints between steel and cast iron by using epoxy- 02/2008 02635-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS coated bolts, nuts, washers and insulating type gasket unless otherwise approved by Engineer. F Make curves and bends by use of beveled joints unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Contractor may submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for consideration by the Engineer. If other methods are deemed satisfactory,install at no additional cost to Owner. G Provide shop coated and shop lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape coated steel pipe to be used for field-applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H Standard or Special Sections: Within 1/8 inch + of specified or theoretical lengths. Flanges: Square with pipe with bolt holes straddling both horizontal and vertical axis. Provide 1/2-inch gap between pipe ends where pipe is to be coupled with sleeve couplings. 2.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A General: Supplied with either tape coatings as specified herein. 1. Tape Coating: AWWA C214;80-mil,shop-applied,Polyken YG-III,Tek-Rap Yard-Rap,or equal,except as modified herein. Components: primer,one 20- mil layer of inner-layer tape for corrosion protection and two 30-mil layers of outer-layer tape for mechanical protection. Primer: compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating-system manufacturer. Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper successive tape layers by 1-inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping of joints. Cut back approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches to facilitate welding. Inner and outer tape widths: DIAMETER TAPE WIDTH 4"—6" 6" 8"— 12" 9" 14"— 16" 12" 18"—24" 18" 2.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL, CASING OR AUGER HOLES A Provide exterior coating system of pipe in augered holes or casing, without annular grout,as specified in Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe. No additional exterior coating is required for mortar coated pipe. 02/2008 02635-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED • ABOVEGROUND (OR EXPOSED) A Provide a 3-coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Surface Preparation SSPC SP10 Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat ACRO 4422 Inhibitive Epoxy Primer, or approved equal 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT Intermediate Coat ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy, or approved equal 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Finish Coat ACRO 4428 Polyurethane, or approved equal 1.5 to 2.0 mils DFT B Total minimum allowable dry film thickness for system: 10 mils. C All materials shall be from same manufacturer. 2.05 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE • A General: Supply steel pipe with either epoxy lining or shop applied cement mortar lining,capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140°F.All linings shall conform to American National Standards Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted, coat all exposed(wetted) steel parts of flanges,blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers,etc., with epoxy lining, as specified herein. B Epoxy Lining: AWWA C210 - White, or approved equal for shop and field joint applied, except as modified herein. 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP-10(64);Near White Blast Clean;2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2. Prime Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff;4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 3. Intermediate Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff: 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 4. Finish Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-White 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 5. Minimum allowable dry film system thickness: 12.0 mils. 6. Maximum allowable dry film system thickness: 18.0 mils. 7. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. 8. Dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with the • product manufacturer's recommendations. 9. The lining system may consist of three or more coats of the same approved alternate epoxy lining without the use of a separate primer. 02/2008 02635-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 10. Provide materials from the same manufacturer. C Shop Applied Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; shop-applied, cement mortar • linings,except as specified herein 3/8 inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 24 inches and smaller.Pipe with cut back lining from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2.06 MORTAR FOR EXTERIOR JOINTS A Cement Mortar: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand; mix with water to a consistency of thick cream. B Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type H. C Sand: 1. Inside joints: AWWA C602; fine graded natural sand. 2. Outside joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. D Water: total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/1;ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/1 for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02510—Water Mains except as modified herein. 3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A Tape Coating System: 1. Inspect pipe,prior to shipment, for holidays and damage to coating. Perform electrical holiday test of minimum of 6,000 volts with a 60 cycle current audio detector. If test indicates no holidays and outer wrap(s) is torn, remove damaged layers of outer wrap by carefully cutting with sharp razor-type utility knife. Wash with Xylol area to be patched and at least 4 inches of undamaged tape where hand-applied tape wrap will overlap. AWWA C209 cold-applied tape; compatible with tape-wrapping system applied for each layer of outer- wrap tape that has been removed. If damaged area shows holiday when tested, remove outer layers and expose inner wrap. Prime exposed area and overlaps with light coat of primer. Firmly press into place patch of inner wrap of sufficient size to extend 4 inches from holidays in all directions. Holiday test patch to verify that it is installed satisfactorily. Retrim outer layer of tape to expose first wrap of outer-wrap tape sufficiently to allow minimum lap of 2 inches in all directions. Wash exposed outer wrap tape with Xylol and prime. Apply two layers of AWWA C209 outer wrap with 35 mils minimum thickness. 02/2008 02635-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2. Regardless of results of electrical holiday test,bubbles in tape coating system • 3. are not allowed. Cut out bubbles and patch as detailed above. Field repairs and applications of coatings: AWWA C209 around joint cutbacks except as modified herein. Field-welded joints: clean shop-primed ends of weld splatter, damaged primer and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of linings and coatings. a. Immediately prior to placing joint in trench, remove shop-applied primer by abrasive blasting,solvent or other method as approved by the Engineer. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP6 in accordance with AWWA C209. Solvent: environmentally safe and compatible with coating-system primer. b. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond. Apply tape while primer is still "tacky" with 3-inch minimum overlap over shop-applied coating. 4. Do not expose tape coatings to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove) and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days. In case of factory applied coatings,remove joint from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. B At Owner's option,coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C214. 41, C Cement Mortar Coating: AWWA C205; 1-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND, IN VAULTS, TUNNELS OR CASINGS, AND INTERNAL LINING FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS A Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; 1/2-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. B Safety: Paints,coatings,and linings specified herein are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment,approved by appropriate regulatory agency, is mandatory for all personnel involved in painting, coating, and lining operations. C Workmanship: 1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. D Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare all surfaces for painting with abrasive blasting. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other tir contaminants do not fall on wet,newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. 02/2008 02635-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Prior to blasting,clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease,oil and dirt by steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP1. 4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove all surface defects such as gouges,pits, 41) welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch minimum radius. 5. Abrasive Material: a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting. b. Use sharp, angular, properly-graded abrasive capable of producing depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Owner for filing and future reference. d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences,or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6. Remove all dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. E Coating and Lining Application: 1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F;when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application of coating;or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. Provide dehumidifiers for all field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2. Application Procedures: a. Apply coatings and linings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. Provide a finish free of runs,sags,curtains,pinholes,orange peel,fish eyes,excessive overspray or de-laminations. b. Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners. Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day. 3. Apply primer immediately after surface has been cleaned. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of under surface occurs. 4. Allow each coat of paint either to dry or cure amount of time recommended by coating or lining manufacturer before successive coats of paint are applied. Apply all successive coats of paint within recoat threshold time as • 02/2008 02635-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data III sheets or through written communications. 3.04 INSPECTION A Procure services of an independent testing laboratory or inspection service,approved by the Engineer, to perform tests on all portions of coating and lining applications. Laboratory shall supply services of NACE Certified Coatings Inspectors having Level III Certification for all coating and linings inspection work. Include cost of such testing in contract unit price bid for water main. Furnish copies of all test reports to the Engineer for review. If defective coatings or lining are revealed,cost of repair and testing of repair will be paid for by Contractor. The Engineer shall have full and final decision as to suitability of all coatings and linings tested. B For all field applied coatings and linings,including joints,notify Owner sufficiently in advance of work so that Owner can perform examination of and acceptance of surface preparation and application of each coat prior to application of next coat. Furnish appropriate test data to Owner verifying compliance with requirements of this Section of each coat prior to proceeding with next coat. Recoat or repair runs, overspray, roughness and/or abrasives in coating,or other indications of improper application in accordance with coating or lining manufacturer's and the Engineer's instructions. C Repairs, surface preparation and painting will be subject to inspection by Owner. Guidelines published by Steel Structures Painting Council will be used as basis for • acceptance or rejection of cleaning, painting or coating application. SSPC VISI, Pictoral Surface, along with single-probe magnetic pull-off type dry film thickness gages,electrical holiday detectors,and standard wet film thickness gages will be used to determine acceptability of paint applications. D Check film thickness with nondestructive magnetic pull-off gage such as Mikrotest Model DFG-100 or electronic thickness gage. National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates will be used to verify accuracy of thickness gage. Determine maximum and minimum thickness in accordance with SSPC PA2 for frequency and method. Evaluate each length of pipe under SSPC PA2. Consider each field joint area separate and discrete for purpose of DFT measurements. Perform five spot DFT measurements on each field joint area (15 individual readings). Check thickness of each individual coat as well as thickness of overall system with respect to compliance with this Section. Failure to meet either overall system thickness requirements or requirements of component coats shall be cause for rejection and recoat or repair of entire joint or length of pipe. E Holiday Test: 1. Begin inspection after coating has sufficiently cured,usually one to five days. (Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing schedule.) 2. Use high-voltage d-c holiday detector such as D.E. Stearns Company Model 14/20 or Tinker & Rasor Model AP/W. Use 1600 volts, plus or minus 100 0 volts. Use brass brush type electrode. 02/2008 02635-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Ground high-voltage d-c holiday detector to metal being inspected. Earth-type ground tape is not acceptable. Mark detected defects with white chalk,repair and reinspect. 11111. 4. Adhesion Tests: ASTM D 4541; pull-off testing using an Elcometer Model 106 Fixed Alignment Adhesion Tester. Adhesion testing may be directed by the Engineer on any length of pipe or joint which exceeds maximum coating thickness limitations specified in this Section. 3.05 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION A Owner reserves right to inspect or acquire service of independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable of, and qualified to inspect, surface preparation and application of high-performance coatings to inspect any and all phases of all coatings and linings work,whether field or shop applied. Contractor responsible for application and performance of coating and lining whether or not Owner provides such inspection. END OF SECTION • 02/2008 02635- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE IIISection 02636 POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Two-component polyurethane coating system for use as an internal or external coating for steel or ductile iron pipe. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634 -Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02635—Steel Pipe and Fittings C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C210, Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 16, "Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications" • b. ASTM D 1737, "Standard Guide for Testing Industrial Water- Reducible Coatings" 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-PA 2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges b. SSPC-PA 3, A Guide to Safety in Paint Application c. SSPC-PS Guide 17.00,Guide for Selecting Urethane Painting Systems d. SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning e. SSPC-SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section.Include cost of polyurethane coatings in Bid Items for steel pipe or ductile iron pipe. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit coating manufacturer's catalog sheets and technical information for approval, IIIprior to delivery of pipe. 07/2006 02636- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE C Obtain from coating manufacturer and submit a coating "affidavit of compliance" to requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied in factory and in accordance with manufacturer's minimum requirements. 1.04 SAFETY A Secure, from manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for polyurethane coatings and repair materials listed in this Section. B Safety requirements stated in this and related Sections apply in addition to applicable federal, state and local rules and regulations. Comply with instructions of coating manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters. C Follow handling and application practices of SSPC-PA Guide 3; SSPC-PS Guide 17.00; Coating Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A Use standard containers to prevent gelling,thickening deleteriously or forming of gas in closed containers within period of one year from date of manufacture. B Label each container of separately packaged component clearly and durably to indicate date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color, component identification and designated name or formula specification, number of coatings together with special instructions. Do not use coating components older than one year. C Deliver coating materials to pipe manufacturer in sealed containers showing designated name, batch number, color, date of manufacture and name of coating manufacturer. D Store materials on site in enclosures which are out of direct sunlight, and in warm, ventilated, and dry area. E Prevent puncture, inappropriate opening, or other action which may lead to product contamination. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 COATING MATERIAL A Coating Standard: ASTM D 16. B Coating System: Use Type V system which is a 2-package polyisocyanate, polyol- cured urethane coating, mixed in 1:1 ratio at time of application. The components shall be balanced viscosities in their liquid state and not require agitation during use. C Exterior Coating Material: CORROPIPE II-TX and Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE II-PW, manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc., 5673 Old a Dixie Road, Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. 07/2006 02636-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE • D Internal Coating Material: Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE II-PW,manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc., 5673 Old Dixie Road, Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. E Cured Coating Properties: 1. Conversion to Solids by Volume: 97 percent plus or minus 3 percent. 2. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F and plus 130 degrees F. 3. Minimum Adhesion: 500 psi,when applied without primer to ductile iron pipe which has been blasted to comply with SSPC-SP 10. 4. Cure Time: For handling in 1 minute at 120 degrees F, and full cure within 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Maximum Specific Gravities: Polyisocyanate resin, 1.20. Polyol resin, 1.15. 6. Minimum Impact Resistance: 80 inch-pounds using 1-inch diameter steel ball where coating is applied at 30 mils to ductile iron pipe surface which has been blasted to SSPC No. 10 finish. 7. Minimum Tensile Strength: 2000 psi. 8. Hardness: 55 plus or minus 5 Shore D at 70 degrees F. 9. Flexibility Resistance: ASTM D 1737 using 1-inch mandrel. Allow coating to cure for 7 days. Perform testing on test coupons held for 15 minutes at temperature extremes specified in this Paragraph. 2.02 REPAIR AND TOUCHUP MATERIAL • A CORROPIPE 11 PW (two-component, brush applied, or approved equal). Mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A Remove deposits of oil,grease or other organic contaminates before blast cleaning by using solvent wash as specified in SSPC-PA Guide 3. Clean and dry surfaces making them completely dry, free of moisture, dust, grit, oil, grease or any other deleterious substances prior to application of coating. B Exterior and Interior Surfaces: SSPC-SP10, near-white metal blast cleaning. The blasting shall be done with clean, hard, sharp cutting abrasives with no steel or cast iron shot in the mix. C Ductile Iron Pipe: Prior to the start of production blasting, prepare specimens for a white metal blast and a near-white metal blast using the equipment and abrasives proposed for the work. During preparation of the specimens,the blasting intensity and abrasive shall be changed as necessary to provide the degree of cleaning required by SSPC-SP10,except that the color of the blasted substrate is not expected to match the color of blasted steel. After examination and concurrence by the Engineer, the • production blasting may begin. Monitor and control the production blasting so that production pipe surfaces match the surface of the approved blasting specimens. 07/2006 02636-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3.02 THICKNESS 0 A External Coatings: Minimum DFT of 25 mils (0.025 inch). B Internal Coatings: Minimum DFT of 35 mils. C Thickness Determinations: Use Type 1 magnetic thickness gauge as described in SSP- PA2 specification. Individual readings below 90 percent of specified minimum are not acceptable. Average individual spot readings(consisting of three point measurements within 3 inches of each other) less than 95 percent of minimum are not acceptable. Average of all spot readings less than minimum thickness specified is not acceptable. 3.03 FACTORY APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE COATING A Equipment: Two-component, 1:1 mix ratio, heated airless spray unit. B Temperature: Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature. The temperature of the surface shall not be less than 60 degrees F during application. C Humidity: Heating of pipe surfaces may be required to meet the requirements of this Section, 2.01E, "Cured Coating Properties", if relative humidity exceeds 80 percent. D Do not thin or mix resins; use as received. Store resins at a temperature above 55 degrees F at all times. II E Application: Conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations. Apply directly to substrate to achieve specified thickness. Multiple-pass,one-coat application process is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating manufacturer is not exceeded. F Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, brush-blast or thoroughly sand coating surface. Blow-off cleaning using clean, dry, high pressure compressed air. G Cure at ambient temperature above 0 degrees F. Do not handle pipe until coating has been allowed to cure as follows: AMBIENT MINIMUM FULL TEMPERATURE CURE TIME Over 70 degrees F 7 days 50 to 70 degrees F 9 days 0 to 50 degrees F 12 days • 07/2006 02636-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE • 3.04 JOINTS A Apply coating to unlined pipe surfaces including inside of bell socket and outside of spigot. B Coating thickness on sealing areas of spigot end of pipe exterior: Minimum 8 mils (0.008 inch),maximum of 10 mils(0.010 inch). Maximum 10 mils may be exceeded in spigot end provided maximum spigot diameter as specified by pipe manufacturer is not exceeded. 3.05 INSPECTION A Engineer may inspect coatings at coating applicator's facilities. B Secure approval of surface preparation by coating manufacturer's representative prior to coating application. C Holiday Inspection: Conform to AWWA C 210, Section 5.3.3.1. Follow coating manufacturer's recommendation. Conduct inspection any time after coating has reached initial cure. Repair in accordance with this Section, 3.07 "Repair and Field Touchup". 3.06 PIPE INSTALLATION 410 A When required by the Engineer,provide services of manufacturer's representative for period of not less than 2 weeks at beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor regarding installation including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting,coatings repairs,and general construction methods as to how they may affect pipe coatings. B Use nylon straps,padded lifts and padded storage skids. Field cuts should be kept to minimum. Repair damage to coating due to handling or construction practices. Refer to Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings and Section 02635—Steel Pipe and Fittings for additional requirements. C Just before each section of pipe is to be placed into the trench, conduct a visual and holiday inspection. Defects in the coating system shall be repaired before the pipe is installed. 3.07 REPAIR AND FIELD TOUCHUP A Apply repair and touchup materials in conformance with factory application of polyurethane coating requirements specified in this Section, excluding equipment requirements. • B Repair Procedure- Holidays: 1. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 2. Roughen area to be patched by sanding with rough grade sandpaper(40 grit). 07/2006 02636-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3. Apply one coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. C Repair Procedure -Field Cuts or Large Damage: 1. Remove burrs from field cut ends or handling damage and smooth out edge of polyurethane coating. 2. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 3. Roughen area to be patched with rough grade sandpaper (40-grit). Feather edges and include overlap of 1 inch to 2 inches of roughened polyurethane in area to be patched. 4. Apply thick coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. Feather edges of repair material into prepared surface. Cover at least 1 inch of roughened area surrounding damage, or adjacent to field cut. D Repair Procedure-Thermite Brazed Connection Bonds: 1. Remove polyurethane coating with power wire brush from area on metal surface which is to receive thermite brazed connection. 2. Grind metal surface to shiny metal with power grinder and coarse grit grinding wheel. 3. Apply thermite-brazed connection using equipment, charge and procedure recommended by manufacturer of thermite equipment. 4. After welded surface has cooled to temperature below 130 degrees F, apply 0 protective coating repair material to weld,exposed pipe surface and damaged areas of polyurethane coating. 5. Do not cover or backfill freshly repaired areas of coating at thermite-brazed connection until repair material has completely cured. Allow material to cure in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Ill 07/2006 02636-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section 02751 CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Streets,Driveways and Sidewalks; Joints and Curing Materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" c. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM C 131,"Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" e. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" f. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" g. ASTM C 260 h. ASTM C 494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" i. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" j. ASTM D 994,"Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" k. ASTM D 1751,"Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) 1. ASTM D 6690,"Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" m. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" n. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" • o. ASTM C 143,"Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete" 08/2011 02751 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT p. ASTM C 138,"Standard Test Method for Density(Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" q. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" r. ASTM C 171, "Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete" s. ASTM C 309,"Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete" t. ASTM C 42,"Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-406-A, "Material Finer than 75-nm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates (Decantation Test for Concrete Aggregates) b. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" c. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 438 "Cleaning and Sealing Joints and Cracks (Rigid Pavements and Bridge Decks)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for concrete paving is on square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of pavement. B Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete paving, joints and curing material, as indicated on Plans. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D Refer to this Section,3.26"Noncomforming Pavement"for unit price adjustments for deficient thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350-Submittals. B Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual compressive strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. C Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for mixing equipment, and for traveling form paver, if proposed for use, for approval. D Submit manufacturer's certificates giving properties of reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for testing when required by the Engineer. 08/2011 02751 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT • E Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. F Submit samples of dowel cup,metal supports,and deformed metal strip for approval. 1.04 HANDLING AND STORAGE A Do not mix different classes of aggregate without written permission of the Engineer. B Class of aggregate being used may be changed before or during Work with written permission of the Engineer. New class shall comply with specifications. C Segregated aggregate will be rejected. Before using aggregate whose particles are separated by size, mix them uniformly to grading requirements. D Aggregates mixed with dirt, weeds or foreign matter will be rejected. E Do not dump or store aggregate in roadbed. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS • A Portland Cement: 1. Sample and test cement to verify compliance with Standards of ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. Bulk cement which meets referenced standards may be used if the method of handling is approved by the Engineer. When using bulk cement, provide satisfactory weighing devices. B Water: Conform to requirements for water in ASTM C 94. C Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone, or combination thereof, which is clean, hard, durable, conforms to requirements of ASTM C 33, and has abrasion loss not more than 45 percent by weight when subjected to Los Angeles Abrasion Test(ASTM C 131). No pit run gravel will be allowed. 1. Maximum percentage by weight of deleterious substances shall not exceed following values: PERCENT BY WEIGHT ITEM OF TOTAL SAMPLE MAXIMUM Clay lumps and friable particles. 3.0 Material finer than 75-pm(No. 200) sieve: • Concrete subject to abrasion. 3.0* 08/2011 02751 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT All other concrete. 5.0* Coal and lignite: Where surface appearance of concrete is of 0.5 importance. All other concrete. 1.0 * In case of manufactured sand, if material finer than 75-pm (No. 200) sieve consists of dust of fracture, essentially free from clay or shale, these limits may be increased to 5 and 7 percent, respectively. 2. Coarse aggregate(size 1 1/2 inch to No.4 sieve)shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (SQUARE OPENINGS) (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) Retained on 1 3/4 inch sieve 0 Retained on 1 1/2 inch sieve 0 to 5 Retained on 3/4 inch sieve 30 to 65 Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 70 to 90 Retained on No. 4 sieve 95 to 100 Loss by Decantation Test *Method Tex-406-A 1.0 maximum * In case of aggregates made primarily from crushing of stone, if material finer than 200 sieve is dust of fracture essentially free from clay or shale as established by Part III of Tex-406-A, percent may be increased to 1.5 D Fine Aggregate: Sand,manufactured sand,or combination thereof,composed of clean, hard,durable,uncoated grains,free from foams or other injurious foreign matter. Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) (SQUARE OPENINGS) Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 0 Retained on No.4 sieve 0 to 5 Retained on No. 8 sieve 0 to 20 Retained on No. 16 sieve 15 to 50 Retained on No. 30 sieve 35 to 75 Retained on No. 50 sieve 65 to 90 08/2011 02751 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT ® Retained on No. 100 sieve 90 to 100 Retained on No. 200 sieve 97 to 100 1. When subjected to color test for organic impurities (ASTM C 40), fine aggregate shall not show color darker than standard color. Fine aggregate shall be subjected to Sand Equivalent Test(Tex-203-F). Sand equivalent value shall not be less than 80, unless higher value is shown on Plans. E Air Entraining Agent: Furnish an air entraining agent conforming to requirements of ASTM C 260. F Water Reducer: Water reducing admixture conforming to requirements of ASTM C 494 may be used if required to improve the workability of concrete. Amount and type of such admixture shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. G Reinforcing Steel: 1. Provide new billet steel manufactured by open hearth process and conforming to ASTM A 615,Grade 60. Store steel to protect it from mechanical injury and rust. At time of placement,steel shall be free from dirt,scale,rust,paint,oil or other injurious materials. 2. Cold bend reinforcing steel to shapes shown. Once steel has been bent,it may not be rebent. • 2.02 CONCRETE JOINTS A When allowed on the Plans,or with approval of the Engineer,Board Expansion Joint Material may be used: Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density and type as follows: 1. Clear,all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 2. Clear,all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 3. Use wood only when part of a load transmission device assembly. B Unless specified otherwise,use Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751. C Joint Sealing Compound: 1. Hot poured rubber-asphalt compound meeting the requirements of ASTM D 6690. 2. When indicated on Plans, self-leveling Low Modulas Silicone sealant single component meeting the requirements of TxDOT Specification 438. D Load Transmission Devices: • 08/2011 02751 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. Smooth, steel dowel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. When indicated on Plans,encase one end of dowel bar in approved cap having inside • diameter 1/16 inch greater than diameter of dowel bar. 2. Deformed steel tie bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. E Metal Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as directed by the Engineer. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A Equipment: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.04 MIXING A Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare mix designs. Compressive strength shall be as specified using test specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Contractor shall determine and measure batch quantity of each ingredient,including all water for batch designs and all concrete produced for Work. Mix shall conform to these specifications and other requirements indicated on Plans. B Mix design to produce concrete which will have a minimum compressive strength of 0 2500 psi at 7days and 3500 psi at 28 days. When high-early-strength cement is used,it shall reach a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 7 days and 4000 at 28 days. Slump of concrete shall be at least 2 inch,but no more than 5 inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143. 1. Concrete pavement shall contain at least 5 1/2 sacks (94 pounds per sack) of cement per cubic yard,with not more than 6.5 gallons of water,net,per sack of cement (water cement ratio maximum 0.57). Cement content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 138. Addition of mineral filler may be used to improve workability or plasticity of concrete to limits specified. 2. Coarse dry aggregate shall not exceed 85 percent of loose volume of concrete. 3. Add air-entraining admixture to ensure uniform distribution of agent throughout batch. Base air content of freshly mixed air-entrained concrete upon trial mixes with materials to be used in Work, adjusted to produce concrete of required plasticity and workability. Percentage of air entrainment in mix shall be 4 1/2 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent. Air content shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C 231. 4. Use retardant when temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. Proportion shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Use same brand as used for air-entraining agent. Add and batch material using same methods as used for air-entraining agent. Accelerators will not be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. 411 08/2011 02751 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT • 2.05 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A Curing materials shall conform to one of following: 1. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171. 2. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171. 3. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/4 of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall be stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 4. Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds: Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C 309. Membrane shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction requirements. 110 B Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms, reinforcing steel or concrete. After forms have been set to proper grade and alignment, use subgrade planer to shape subgrade to its final cross section. Check contour of subgrade with template. B Remove subgrade that will not support loaded form. Replace and compact subgrade to required density. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A Alternate equipment and methods, other than those required by this article, may be used provided the Contractor demonstrates that equal, or better, results will be obtained. Maintain equipment for preparing subgrade and for finishing and compacting concrete in good working order. Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer or the Plans, slip form paving methods shall be used. B Subgrade Planer and Template: 1. Use subgrade planer with adjustable cutting blades to trim subgrade to exact • section shown on Plans. Select planer mounted on visible rollers which ride on forms. Planer frame must have sufficient weight so that it will remain on form 08/2011 02751 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT at all times, and have such strength and rigidity that, under tests made by 0 changing support from wheels to center,planer will not develop deflection of more than 1/8 inch. Tractors used to pull planer shall not produce ruts or indentations in subgrade. When slip form method of paving is used, operate subgrade planer on prepared track grade or have it controlled by electronic sensor system operated from string line to establish horizontal alignment and elevation of subbase. 2. Provide template for checking contour of subgrade. Template shall be long enough to rest upon side forms and have such strength and rigidity that,when supported at center, maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Fit template with accurately adjustable rods projecting downward at 1 foot intervals. Adjust these rods to gauge cross sections of slab bottom when template is resting on side forms. C Texturing Equipment 1. Carpet Drag a. Provide a carpet drag mounted on a work bridge or a moveable support system. Provide a single piece of carpet of sufficient transverse length of carpet is in contact with the concrete being placed to produce the desired texture. D Machine Finisher: Provide a power-driven,transverse finishing machine designed and operated to strike off and consolidate concrete. Machine shall have two screeds • accurately adjusted to crown of pavement and with frame equipped to ride on forms. Use finishing machine with rubber tires if it operates on concrete pavement. E Hand Finishing: 1. Provide mechanical strike and tamping template 2 feet longer than width of pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. 2. Provide two bridges to ride on forms and span pavement for finishing expansion and dummy joints. Provide floats and necessary edging and finishing tools. F Vibrators: Furnish mechanically operated synchronized vibrators mounted on tamping bar which rides on forms and hand-manipulated mechanical vibrators. Furnish vibrators with frequency of vibration to provide maximum consolidation of concrete without segregation. 3.04 FORMS A Side Forms: Use clean metal forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form shall be equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted,provided difference between form depth and edge thickness if not greater than 1 inch,and further provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge thickness by 0 securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form,or by grouting under form. 08/2011 02751 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT • Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. All forms shall be approved by the Engineer. Length of form sections shall be not less than 10 feet and each section shall provide for staking in position with not less than 3 pins. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200 foot radius or less. Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in-place they will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be less than 8 inches for form 8 inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp, bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide reasonable straight edge on concrete. Top of each form section, when tested with straight edge, shall conform to requirements specified for surface of completed pavement. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory placement of concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10 feet in length or curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways, wood forms of good grade and quality may be used. B Form Setting: 1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of placing, compacting and finishing of concrete,do not deviate from this grade and alignment more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length. Do not remove forms for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. Provide supply of • forms that will be adequate for orderly and continuous placing of concrete. Set forms and check grade for at least 300 feet ahead of mixer or as approved by the Engineer. 2. Adjacent slabs may be used instead of forms, provided that concrete is well protected from possible damage by finishing equipment. These adjacent slabs shall not be used for forms until concrete has aged at least 7 days. 3.05 REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES A Accurately place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position them securely as indicated on Plans. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed. Place all reinforcing steel and secure to chairs. All reinforcing steel must be positively supported before pour begins. B Place pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly secure all parts in required positions. Install dowel bars accurately in joint assemblies as shown, each parallel to pavement surface and to center line of pavement. Rigidly secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of concrete. Accurately cut header boards,joint filler and other material used for forming joints to receive each dowel bar. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers, as required, to provide rigid pavement sections. • 08/2011 02751 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.06 PLACEMENT • A Place concrete only in rain-free days when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place concrete that is between 40 degrees F and 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. Do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water,using ice or placing at night,as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 95 degrees F. Do not place when concrete temperature is above 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. B Place concrete within 60 minutes of mixing. Remove and dispose of concrete not placed within this period. C Concrete slump during placement shall be 2 to 5 inches,except when using traveling- form paver slump shall be a maximum of 3 inches. D Deposit concrete rapidly and continuously on subgrade or subbase in successive batches. Distribute concrete to required depth and for entire width of placement in manner that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is necessary, distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only 411 concrete rakes in handling concrete. At end of day or in case of unavoidable interruption of more than 30 minutes, place transverse construction joint at point of stopping work. Remove and replace sections less than 10 feet long. E Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement will be cause for rejection. 3.07 FINISHING A Finish concrete pavement with power-driven transverse finishing machines or by hand finishing methods. 1. Use transverse finishing machine to make at least two trips over each area. Make last trip continuous run of not less than 40 feet. After transverse screeding, use hand-operated longitudinal float to test and level surface to required grade. 2. Hand finish with mechanical strike and tamping template as wide as pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. Move strike template forward in direction of placement, maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make at least two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section. Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal float to level surface. 08/2011 02751 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT • B On narrow strips and transitions,finish concrete pavement by hand. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike- off screed. Move strike-off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing,maintaining screed in contact with forms,and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface. C While concrete is still workable,give surface final belting to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. Perform belting with short rapid transverse strokes having sweeping longitudinal motion. 3.08 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING A When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. B If the limit of removal of existing concrete or asphaltic pavement does not fall on existing joint, saw cut existing pavement minimum of 1 1/2 inches deep to provide straight, smooth joint surface without chipping, spalling or cracks. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes using No.5 deformed tie bars,30 inches long and spaced 18 inches on centers. 3.10 EXPANSION JOINTS A Place 3/4 inch expansion joints at locations shown on Plans. Use no filler shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use not more than 2 lengths of filler. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape filler accurately to cross section of concrete slab. Use load transmission devices of type and size shown on Plans. Seal with joint sealing compound. 3.11 CONTRACTION JOINTS A Place contraction joints at same locations as in adjacent pavement or at spaces indicated on Plans. Maximum spacing of contraction/construction joints,20 feet. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 3.12 LONGITUDINAL WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS A Place longitudinal weakened plane joints at spaces indicated on Plans. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 08/2011 02751 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND GDNCRETE PAVEMENT 3.13 SAWED JOINTS • A Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints.Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 1/2 inch wide.Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus 1/2 inch. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until completed. Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. B Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain an ample supply of saw blades at work site at all times during sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.14 JOINTS FOR CURB,AND CURB AND GUTTER A Place 3/4 inch preformed expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of expansion and contraction joints in pavement; at end of radius returns at street intersections and driveways; and at curb inlets. Maximum spacing shall be 60 foot centers. 3.15 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 0 A Provide 3/4 inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab. Where dowels are used, wrap or sleeve one end. 3.16 JOINT SEALING A Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F but less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B Joint sealing equipment shall be in first-class working condition,and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C Clean joints of loose scale,dirt,dust and curing compound. Term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. 08/2011 02751 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT • D Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.17 CONCRETE CURING A Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. B Where curing requires use of water,curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 3.18 POLYETHYLENE FILM CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in the form of a fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Joints in film sheets shall overlap minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during curing period by placing acceptable moisture-proof patches or by replacing. • 3.19 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length. Joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets shall lap not less than 5 inches and shall be securely sealed with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees F. Place blankets to secure an overlap of at least 12 inches. Tears or holes appearing in paper during curing period shall be immediately repaired by cementing patches over defects. 3.20 COTTON MAT CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats,thoroughly saturated before application,in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. B Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so • that,when lightly compressed,water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. 08/2011 02751 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.21 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 TOLERANCES A Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring surface within requirements of following test and then finish. Place 10 foot straightedge parallel to center of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch all high spots. Do not permit ordinates measured from face of straight edge to surface of pavement to exceed 1/16 inch per foot from nearest point of contact. Maximum ordinate with 10 foot straightedge shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Grind spots in excess of requirements of this paragraph to meet surface test requirements. Restore texture by grooving concrete to meet surface finishing specifications. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B Test Specimens: Four test specimen cylinders for compressive strength tests will be made for each 150 cubic yards or less of pavement that is placed in one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. For failed 7-day tests, remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39. C Yield test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138 for cement content per cubic yard of concrete. If such cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D At the Engineer's direction a minimum of one 4-inch core may be taken at random locations per 1,000 feet per lane or 500 square yards of pavement to measure in-place depth. Each core may be tested for 28 day compressive strength according to methods of ASTM C 42. The 28 day compressive strength of each core tested shall be a minimum of 3000 pounds per square inch. E Contractor may,at his own expense,request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. In-place depth at these locations shall be the average of depth of four cores. F Fill cores and density test sections with new concrete paving or non shrink grout. • 08/2011 02751 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.24 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A Remove and replace areas of pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent, or that fail compressive strength tests, with new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans at no cost to the Owner. B Areas of concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness(as determined by cores)to the thickness required. C No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.25 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details and the Engineer's requirements. 3.26 PROTECTION A Barricade pavement section from use until concrete has attained minimum design • strength. B On those sections of pavement to be opened to traffic,seal joints,clean pavement and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Such opening of pavement to traffic shall not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for Work. C Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work. D Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth. END OF SECTION • 08/2011 02751 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Section 02771 • CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Sidewalks. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200- Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350- Submittals 3. Section 01450-Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94,"Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" • c. ASTM C 33,"Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" e. ASTM D 994, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" f. ASTM D 1751, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) g. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" h. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" i. ASTM C 31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" j. ASTM C 138, "Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight),Yield,and Air Content(Gravimetric)of Concrete" k. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" 1. ASTM C 42, "Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 2. Texas Accessibility Standards of Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statues • 5/2013 02771 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for concrete sidewalks is on square foot basis. • B. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete sidewalks,joints and curing material. No payment will be made for work in areas where sidewalk has been removed for contractor's convenience. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350- Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: conform to material requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving for reinforcing steel. Use No. 4 reinforcing bars. C. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for J preformed expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. D. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. E. Forms: Use straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth equal to or greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. F. Sand Bed: Conform to material requirements for bank run sand. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REPLACEMENT A. Replace sidewalks which are removed or damaged during construction with thickness and width equivalent to one removed or damaged unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Finish surface (exposed aggregate, brick pavers, etc.) to match existing sidewalk. B. Provide replaced and new sidewalks with wheelchair ramps when sidewalk intersects curb at street. • 5/2013 02771 -2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 3.02 PREPARATION • A. Identify and protect utilities which are to remain. B. Protect living trees, other plant growth and features designated to remain. C. Conduct clearing and grubbing operations in accordance with Section 02200 - Site Preparation. D. Determine sidewalk horizontal and vertical alignment to facilitate drainage and prevent ponding. Location and slopes must be in compliance with Texas Accessibility Academy Standards latest edition and revisions. E. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of sidewalk. Shape to line, grade and cross section. Compact 6 inches of select fill to minimum of 95% maximum dry density at optimal or above optimal moisture content as per ASTM D698. For soils with plasticity index above 40 percent, stabilize soil with lime in accordance with Section 02335 - Subgrade. Compact subgrade to minimum of 90 percent maximum dry density at optimum to 3 percent above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698. No separate pay for this requirement. This work shall be subsidiary to sidewalk square foot unit pricing. 3.03 PLACEMENT • A. Setting Forms: Straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth 1/2" greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. Securely stake forms to line and grade. Maintain position during concrete placement. B. Reinforcement: 1. Install No. 4 reinforcing bars. 2. Install reinforcing steel as shown on the Drawings. Lay longitudinal bars in walk continuously through expansion joints. Reinforcing bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Use sufficient number of chairs to support reinforcement in manner to maintain reinforcement in center of slab vertically during placement. 4. Drill dowels into existing paving, sidewalk and driveways, secure with epoxy and provide headers as required. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints with load transfer units in accordance with Section 02751 -Concrete Pavement. D. Place concrete in forms to specified depth and tamp thoroughly with "jitterbug" (10,, tamp,or other acceptable method. Bring mortar to surface. 5/2013 02771 -3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS E. Strike off to smooth finish with wood strike board. Finish smoothly with wood hand float. Brush across sidewalk lightly with fine-haired brush. F. Apply coating to wheelchair ramp with contrasting color. • G. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, mark off sidewalk joints 1/2 inch deep, at spacing equal to width of walk. Use joint tool equal in width to edging tool. H. Finish edges with tool having 3/8 inch radius. I. After concrete has set sufficiently, refill space along sides of sidewalk to 1 inch from top of walk with suitable material. Tamp until firm and solid, place sod as applicable. Dispose of excess material. Repair driveways and parking lots damaged by sidewalk excavation in accordance with Section 02980 - Pavement Repair and Resurfacing. 3.04 CURING A. Conform to requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. 410 B. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Four test specimens for compressive strength test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 31 for each 30 cubic yards or less of sidewalk that is placed on one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. Remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Minimum compressive strength: 2500 psi at 7 days and 3500 psi at 28 days. C. Yield test for cement content per cubic yard of concrete will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138. When cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard,reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D. If the Contractor places concrete without notifying the City, Contractor will have the concrete tested by means of core test as specified in ASTM C 42. When concrete does not meet specification, cost of test will be deducted from payment. Contractor will replace the cored section of sidewalk at no cost to City. E. Sampling of fresh concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172. F. Take slump tests when cylinders are made and when concrete slump appears excessive. 5/2013 02771 -4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS G. Concrete shall be acceptable when average of two 28 day compression tests is • equal to or greater than minimum 28 day strength specified. H. If either of two tests on field samples is less than average of two tests by more than 10 percent, that entire test shall be considered erratic and not indicative of concrete strength. Core samples will be required of in-place concrete in question. I. If 28 day laboratory test indicates that concrete of low strength has been placed,test concrete in question by taking cores as directed by Project Manager. Take and test at least three representative cores as specified in ASTM C 42 and deduct cost from payment due. 3.06 NONCONFORMING CONCRETE A. Remove and replace areas that fail compressive strength tests, with concrete of thickness shown on Drawings. B. Replace nonconforming sections at no additional cost to City. Replacement section shall be no less in length than the width of sidewalks. 3.07 PROTECTION 1111 A. Maintain newly placed concrete in good condition until completion of Work. B. Replace damaged areas at no cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02771 -5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL Section 02910 • TOPSOIL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and planting. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200- Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02200—Site Preparation 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which topsoil is a component. • B If topsoil is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and • Controls. 07/2006 02910- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL .10 A Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having the following characteristics: 1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5. 2. Liquid limit: topsoil not exceed 50 3. Plasticity index: 10 or less. 4. Gradation: maximum of 40 percent with a passing the#280 sieve. B Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps,weeds,non-soil materials and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots,stumps,and stones larger than 2 inches. C Obtain topsoil from the top material from naturally well drained areas where topsoil occurs at a minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at the placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with a growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that excavation and embankment operations have been completed to correct lines and grades. 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND SOTCKPII.ING A Conform to topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements of Section 02200 — Site Preparation. 3.03 PLACEMENT A Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation during topsoil placement operations. B For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing surface material to a minimum depth of 4 inches,or as indicated on the Plans. Remove any vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on the loosened material and roll lightly with an appropriate lawn roller to consolidate the topsoil. C Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over cement stabilized sand used as bedding and backfill material. D For areas to receive bushes or trees,excavate existing material and place topsoil to the depth and dimensions shown on the Plans. 07/2006 02910-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL E Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess • topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain topsoil until a vegetative cover is established. B Repair areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION • • 07/2006 02910-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING Section 02921 • HYDROMULCH SEEDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Seeding, fertilizing, mulching, and maintaining areas of commercial, industrial, or undeveloped land disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMEN AND PAYMENT A Measurement for hydromulch seeding is on a per acre basis,measured and complete in place. • B Payment for hydromulch seeding shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and preparation necessary for application and maintenance. C No payment shall be made for hydromulch seeding used in restoration of areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit certification from supplier that each type of seed conforms to these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Certification shall accompany seed delivery. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02921 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Seed: Conform to U.S.Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of the Federal Seed Act and the Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90 percent pure and furnish 80 percent germination and meet the following requirements: 1. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-florum), mixed in labeled Proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers. 2. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon dactylon). Deliver in original, unopened container showing weight, analysis, name of vender, and germination test results. 3. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. D Fertilizer: Dry and free flowing,inorganic,water soluble commercial fertilizer,which is uniform in composition. Deliver in unopened containers which bear the manufacturers guaranteed analysis. Caked,damaged,or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. Fertilizer shall contain minimum percentages of the following elements: 411 Nitrogen: 10 Percent Phosphoric Acid: 20 Percent Potash: 10 Percent E Mulch: Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having a minimum of 20 percent fibers 0.42 inches(10.7 mm)in length and 0.01 inches(0.27 mm)in diameter. Mulch shall be dyed green for coverage verification purposes. F Soil Stabilizer: "Terra Tack" 1 or approved equal. G Weed control agent: Pre-emergent herbicide for grass areas, "Benefin" or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start or perform work under conditions that are not satisfactory to perform tasks due to inclement or impending inclement weather. B After the areas to receive hydromulch seeding have been brought to grade,rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps, and other • debris. 07/2006 02921 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. • D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact a layer of topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 —Topsoil. F Surface of topsoil shall be smooth and free of weeds,rocks,and other foreign material immediately before applying hydromulch seeding. 3.02 APPLICATION A Seed: Apply uniformly at the following rates for type of seed and planting date: APPLICATION PLANTING TYPE RATE DATE POUNDS/A Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Jan 1 to Mar 31 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Apr 1 to Sep 30 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Oct 1 to Dec 31 Annual Rye Grass(Gulf) 30 . B Fertilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 500 pounds per acre. C Mulch: Apply uniformly at a rate of 50 pounds per 1000 square feet. D Soil stabilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 40 pounds per acre. E Weed control agent: Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate prior to Hydromulching. F Suspend all operations under conditions of drought,excessive moisture,high winds,or extreme or prolonged cold. Obtain the Engineer's approval before resuming operations. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintain grassed areas by watering,fertilizing,weeding,and trimming as required to establish and sustain 70% acceptable vegetative cover. B For areas seeded in the fall, continue maintenance the following spring until an acceptable lawn is established. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION • A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 07/2006 02921 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain grassed areas a minimum of 90 days, or as required to establish j an acceptable lawn. B Once a lawn is established, protect and maintain it until completion of the Work. C Replace seeded areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION • • 07/2006 02921 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING Section 02922 ,d SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn -ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod-blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. • 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 07/2006 02922- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in • conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips,uniform in thickness(2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal, green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. • 07/2006 02922-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or • inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch (±1")layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G Prior to placing sod,rake areas smooth,free from unsightly variations,bumps,ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. • B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re-sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. • B Watering: 1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light-weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by 411 treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140-Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION • 07/2006 02922-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR Section 02980 CPAVEMENT REPAIR 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Repairing streets,highways,driveways,sidewalks,and other pavements that have been cut,broken, or otherwise damaged during construction. B Repairing areas of failed paving in preparation for resurfacing. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02335—Subgrade 5. Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT • A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for pavement repair under this section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If pavement repair is included as a Bid Item,measurement is on a square yard basis. as follows: 1. Trench width plus 48 inches for utilities. 2. Trench width plus 10 feet for structures. 3. As marked in field for failed paving. C If provisions of this Section, 3.01D, require the limits of pavement repairs to be increased, then the payment limits shall be increased to the same extent. D No payment will be made for work outside payment limits, in areas that are not specifically called out as pay items and are incidental to the work or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. E Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make submittals required by this section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. (kr 05/2008 02980- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in j conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Provide materials of the same character as existing materials encountered in a cross section of the area to be repaired, or as approved by the Engineer. B Subgrade: Provide on site soil stabilized with lime, lime fly ash, etc., as required by the testing laboratory under the provisions of Section 02335—Subgrade. C Base: Provide new base material as required by applicable portions of Section 02710— Base Course for Pavement. D Pavement: Provide new paving materials as required by Technical Specifications of applicable surface course treatments. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.02 PREPARATION A For installation of utilities and utility appurtenances, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving)24 inches beyond the width of excavation, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. B For installation of structures, saw cut and remove pavement(including base material for asphalt paving)5 feet beyond the width of excavation,unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C For repair of areas of failed paving, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving) where indicated in the field or as directed by Engineer. Remove subgrade that is soft and yielding, or to depth as directed by Engineer. D If removed pavement is greater than one-half of pavement lane width, or within 18 inches of a longitudinal joint, on concrete pavement, replace pavement for full lane (11 width or to nearest longitudinal joint as approved by the Engineer. 05/2008 02980-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR E Protect edges of existing pavement to remain from damage during removals, utility the placement,backfill,and paving operations. For concrete pavement,leave and protect minimum of 18 inches of undisturbed subgrade on each side of trench to support replacement slab. 3.03 EXAMINATION : A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.04 INSTALLATION A Replace subgrade with material specified in this Section, 2.O1B. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02330—Embankment for areas under future paving to match lines and grade of surrounding subgrade. B Replace base course with material specified in this Section,2.01C. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement to match lines and grade of surrounding base course. C Replace pavement with material specified in this Section,2.O1D,and according to the • Technical Specifications of the particular surface course treatment so that a smooth, hard, well cemented surface, conforming to the lines and grade of the surround pavement is secured D For concrete pavement, install size and length of reinforcing steel and pavement thickness indicated on Plans. Place types and spacing of joints to match existing or as indicated on Plans. E Where existing pavement consists of concrete pavement with asphaltic surfacing, resurface with minimum 2-inch depth asphaltic pavement. F Repair state highway crossings in accordance with highway department permit and within 1 week after utility work is installed. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all pavement in good condition until completion of Work. B Replace pavement damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 05/2008 02980-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 CONCRETE (6. 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 • CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members,floors,shear walls,foundation walls, and supported slabs,vaults,manholes and wet wells. B. Cast-in-place concrete work for utility construction or rehabilitation,such as slabs on grade,small vaults,site-cast bases for precast units,cast-in-place manholes,including headwalls and miscellaneous small structures. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete seal slabs. E. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants. F. Design, construction, erection, and removal of structural concrete formwork. • G. Equipment pads, light pole base, thrust blocks. H. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment 2. Section 01350- Submittals 3. Section 01310- Coordination and Meetings 4. Section 03600- Structural Grout 5. Section 03310- Structural Concrete 6. Section 03100—Concrete Formwork 7. Section 01440—Inspection Services 8. Section 01460—Testing Laboratory Services I. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) 5. Wire Reinforcement Institute(WRI) 6. Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis Cor 5/2013 03300- 1 of 38 i CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for cast-in-place concrete is on lump-sum basis for each aforementioned item as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these items in accordance with related sections of these Technical Specifications. B. Measurement for extra cast-in-place concrete is on cubic-yard basis. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections. C. Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI- 305R. B. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 306R. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01350—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings detailing reinforcement fabrication, bar replacement location, splices, spacing, bar designation, bar type, length, size, bending, number of bars, bar support type, and other pertinent information, including dimensions. Provide sufficient detail for placement of reinforcement without use of Plans. Information shall correspond directly to data listed on bill of materials. 2. Use of reproductions of Plans by Contractor,Subcontractor,erector,fabricator or material supplier in preparation of Shop Drawings(or in lieu of preparation of Shop Drawings) signifies acceptance by that party of information shown thereon as correct,and acceptance of obligation to pay for any job expense,real or implied,arising due to errors that may occur thereon. Remove references to Design Engineer, including seals, when reproductions of Plans are used as Shop Drawings. 3. Detail Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315, Figure 6. • 5/2013 03300-2 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Submit Shop Drawings showing location of proposed additional construction 4., joints,and obtain approval of the Engineer,prior to submitting reinforcing steel Shop Drawings. C. Bill of Materials: Submit with Shop Drawings. D. Product Data: 1. Mechanical Bar Splices: Submit manufacturer's technical literature,including specifications and installation instructions. 2. Epoxy grout proposed for anchoring reinforcing dowels to hardened concrete: Submit manufacturer's technical literature including recommended installation procedures. 3. Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures. E. Certificates: 1. Submit steel manufacturer's certificates of mill tests giving properties of steel proposed for use. List of manufacturer's test number,heat number,chemical analysis, yield point, tensile strength, and percentage of elongation. Identify proposed location of steel in work. 2. Foreign-manufactured reinforcing bars shall be tested for conformance to ASTM requirements by a certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Submit test reports for review. Do not begin fabrication of reinforcement until material has been approved. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01350-Submittals. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete- IP. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. ® C. Conform appropriately to ACI 305R-99:Hot Weather Concreting or ACI 306R.1- 90:Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5/2013 03300-3 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings. a B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM - C150, Type 1 - Normal Portland Type 1I - Moderate Sulphate resistance Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM - C33. C. Use coarse limestone aggregate and crushed limestone for fine aggregate. The product of concrete alkalinity(A,as equivalent calcium carbonate)times the thickness of cover over the reinforcing steel (Z, in inches) shall not be less than 0.54, i.e. concrete shall have an AZ factor greater than or equal to 0.54. Provide a minimum concrete cover of 2" over reinforcing steel on the inside of the structures. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM - C260. B. Chemical: ASTM - C494, Type A -Water Reducing Type D -Water Reducing and Retarding Type E-Water Reducing and Accelerating admixture. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film type recommended for below grade application. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents;capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler Type C: ASTM - D1752; Premolded sponge rubber, fully compressible 411 with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent. 5/2013 03300-4 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Sealant: ASTM -D1190; synthetic rubber. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM - C94, Alternative No. 3. A minimum of 5.75 bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete shall be used. For Concrete in Contact with sewage use Portland Type II, ASTM-C150, Cement. B. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength 7 days: 2400 psi 2. Compressive Strength 28 days: 4000 psi 3. Slump: 3 to 4 inches for concrete cast against earth in slabs and footings and where used as a topping. 5 to 6 inches for concrete in supported slabs,beams, columns and walls. 4. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.50. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 411) D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer. E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to temperature lower than 40 degrees F. Air content shall be 3 percent maximum for concrete with trowel finished surfaces and 3-5 percent for other concrete. 2.06 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Forms: New plywood, metal, plastic, tempered concrete-form hardboard, dressed lumber faced with plywood or lining, or metal-framed plywood-faced panel material,to provide continuous,straight,smooth surfaces. Form material shall be free of raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Furnish material in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints and,when indicated on Plans,conform to joint system indicated. Form material shall have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Rough Forms: Plywood, metal, dressed or undressed lumber free of knots, splits or other defects, or other material acceptable to the Engineer of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. 11, C. Plywood: Conform to PS 1, Class 1. D. Lumber: Conform to PS 20. 5/2013 03300-5 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Edge Forms and Intermediate Screed Strips: Type and strength compatible with the screed equipment and methods used. • F. Plastic Forms: One-piece forms for domes,beams and pan joists. Single lengths for columns not exceeding height of 7'-6". For columns over 7'-6",use 7'-6"sections and filler sections as needed. To facilitate removal of pan joist forms, taper sides 1 inch per foot. G. Metal Pan Joist Forms: Removable type; fabricated of minimum 14-gage steel; one piece between end closures. Adjustable forms not allowed. Taper sides 1 inch per foot to facilitate removal. H. Earth Cuts for Forms: 1. Use earth cuts for forming unexposed sides of grade beams cast monolithically with slabs on grade. 2. Where sides of excavations are stable enough to prevent caving or sloughing, following surfaces may be cast against neat-cut excavations: a. Sides of footings. b. Inside face of perimeter grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When inside face is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated • on Plans by 1 inch. c. Both faces of interior grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When grade beam is cast against earth,increase beam width indicated on Plans by 2 inches. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Corrugated fiberboard carton forms, when called for, are intended to form a void space beneath pile-supported and pier-supported slabs and other structural elements as shown. 2. Provide products of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in commercial production of double-faced corrugated fiberboard carton forms,constructed of waterproof paper and laminated with waterproof adhesive. 3. Fiberboard forms: Capable of supporting required dead load plus construction loads,and designed to lose their strength upon prolonged contact with moisture and soil bacteria. 4. Seal cuts and ends of each form section by dipping in waterproof wax,unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with waterproofing. • 5/2013 03300-6 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ID 5. Size forms as indicated on Plans. Assemble as recommended by manufacturer, either with steel banding at 4'-0" maximum on centers, or, where liners and flutes are impregnated with waterproofing,with adequate stapling. J. Circular Forms: 1. Form round-section members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. Provide manufacturer's seamless units to minimize spiral gaps and seams. 2. Fiberglass or steel forms may be used for round-section members. K. Shores: Wood or adjustable metal,with bearing plates;with double wedges at lower end. L. Form Ties: 1. Use commercially-manufactured ties, hangers and other accessories for embedding in concrete. Do not use wire not commercially fabricated for use as a form accessory. ® 2. Fabricate ties so ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling of concrete faces. Depth from formed concrete face to the embedded portion: At least 1 inch,or twice the minimum dimension of tie,whichever is greater. 3. Provide waterstop feature for form ties used on liquid-containing structures and on concrete walls which will have earth backfill on one side. 4. Removable ties: Taper ties may be used when approved by the Engineer. In the hole left by the removal of the taper tie, insert a preformed neoprene or polyurethane plug sized to seat at the center of the wall. M. Form Coating: Commercial formulation of form oil or form-release agent having proven satisfactory performance. Coating shall not bond with, stain or otherwise adversely affect concrete surfaces, or impair their subsequent treatment, including application of bonding agents, curing compounds, paint, protective liners and membrane waterproofing. N. Coating for Plastic Forms: Alkali-resistant gel-coat. O. Chamfer Strips: Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,provide 3/4 inch chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges where required by this Section, 3.0 ® "Execution". P. Form Gaskets: Polyethylene rod, closed cell, 1-inch diameter. 5/2013 03300-7 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.07 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Conform to ACI 117, ACI 347 and building codes, unless more restrictive requirements are specified or shown on Plans. Contractor shall design and engineer concrete formwork, including shoring and bracing. Design formwork for applicable gravity loads,lateral pressure,wind loads and allowable stresses. Camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflection during placement of concrete required to maintain specified tolerances. Design formwork to be readily removed without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. B. Slip Forming: Permitted on written approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall demonstrate suitability of method proposed. 2.08 REINFORCING MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM-A615,grade as indicated on Plans, except column spirals and those shown on Plans to be smooth bars. Where grade is not shown on Plans,use Grade 60. B. Smooth Bars: Where indicated on Plans, use smooth bars conforming to ASTM - A36; ASTM -A615, Grade 60; or ASTM -A675, Grade 70. C. Column Spirals: Bars conforming to ASTM-A615,Grade 60,or wire conforming to ASTM -A82. D. Epoxy-Coated Deformed Bars,Column Spirals and Smooth Bars: Conform to ASTM -A775/A775M. E. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM -A185. 2. Welded Deformed Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM - A497. 3. Provide wire size, type and spacing as shown. Where type is not shown on Plans,use welded smooth wire fabric. 4. Furnish welded wire fabric in flat sheets only. F. Tie Wire: 16-1/2 gage or heavier annealed steel wire. Use plastic-coated tie wire with epoxy-coated reinforcing steel. G. Bar Supports: Provide chairs. Use bar supports and accessories of sizes required to provide required concrete cover. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, water or wastewater,provide plastic accessories only;do not use galvanized or plastic- tipped metal in such locations. Provide metal bar supports and accessories rated Class 1 or 2 conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Use epoxy-coated bar • supports with epoxy-coated reinforcing bars. 5/2013 03300-8 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE H. Slabs on Grade: Provide chairs with sheet metal bases or provide precast concrete bar ® supports 3 inches wide, 6 inches long, and thick enough to allow required cover. Embed tie wires in 3-inch by 6-inch side. I. Mechanical Bar Splices: 1. Conform to ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; use where indicated on Plans. a. Compression splices shall develop ultimate stress of reinforcing bar. b. Tension splices shall develop 125 percent of minimum yield point stress of reinforcing bar. 2. Regardless of chemical composition of steel,any heat effect shall not adversely affect performance of reinforcing bar. J. Welded Splices: 1. Provide welded splices where shown and where approved by the Engineer. Welded splices of reinforcing steel shall develop a tensile strength exceeding 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars connected. 2. Provide materials for welded splices conforming to AWS D1.4 — Structural 110 Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. K. Epoxy Grout: High-strength rigid epoxy adhesive,conforming to ASTM-C881,Type IV, manufactured for purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete and the moisture condition, application temperature and orientation of the hole to be filled. Unless otherwise shown,depth of embedment shall be as required to develop the full tensile strength(125 percent of yield strength)of dowel,but not less than 12 diameters. 2.09 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING A. Bending: Fabricate bars to shapes indicated on Plans by cold bending. Bends shall conform to minimum bend diameters specified in ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. Do not straighten or rebend bars. Fabricate epoxy-coated reinforcing steel to required shapes in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair any epoxy coating with patching material conforming to Item 4.4 of ASTM - A775/A775M. B. Splices: 1. Locate splices as indicated on Plans. Do not locate splices at other locations without approval of the Engineer. Use minimum number of splices located at 11) points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. 2. Length of lap splices: As shown on Plans. 5/2013 03300-9 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Prepare ends of bars at mechanical splices in accordance with splice manufacturer's requirements. C. Construction Joints: Unless otherwise shown, continue reinforcing through construction joints. D. Bar Fabrication Tolerances:Conform to tolerances listed in ACI 315,Figures 4 and 5. E. Standard Hooks: Conform to the requirements of ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. F. Marking:Clearly mark bars with waterproof tags showing number of bars,size,mark, length, and yield strength. Mark steel with same designation as member in which it occurs. 2.10 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Sealer/Dustproofer (VOC Compliant): Water-based acrylic sealer; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 200-hour test in accordance with ASTM - D4587. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. B. Epoxy Floor Topping: Two-component epoxy resin meeting ASTM-C881 Type III, resistant to wear,staining and chemical attack,blended with granite,sand,trap rock or 0 quartz aggregate,trowel-applied over concrete floor. Topping thickness shall be 1/8 inch. Color shall be gray. C. Abrasive Aggregate for Nonslip Finish: Fused aluminum oxide grit,or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Material shall be factory graded, packaged, rustproof and nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing,moisture and cleaning materials. D. Epoxy Penetrating Sealer: Low-viscosity,two-component epoxy system designed to give maximum penetration into concrete surfaces. Sealer shall completely seal concrete surfaces from penetration of water, oil and chemicals; prevent dusting and deterioration of concrete surfaces caused by heavy traffic;and be capable of adhering to floor surfaces subject to hydrostatic pressure from below. Color shall be transparent amber or gray. Surface shall be non-slip. E. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable latex base liquid conforming to ASTM - C 1059.When used in water and wastewater treatment structures,bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. F. Bonding Grout: Prepare bonding grout by mixing approximately one part cement to one part fine sand meeting ASTM - C144 but with 100 percent passing No. 30 mesh sieve. Mix with water to consistency of thick cream. At Contractor's option, a commercially-prepared bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturer's 5/2013 03300- 10 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE recommendations and instructions may be used. When used in water and wastewater 110 treatment structures, bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. Submit manufacturer's technical information on proposed bonding agent. G. Patching Mortar: 1. Make patching mortar of same materials and of approximately same proportions as concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Substitute white Portland cement for part of gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to match color of surrounding concrete. Determine color by making trial patch. Use minimum amount of mixing water required for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand. Mix frequently with trowel until it has reached stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Do not add water. 2. Proprietary compounds for adhesion or specially formulated cementitious repair mortars may be used in lieu of or in addition to foregoing patching materials provided that properties of bond and compressive strength meet or exceed the foregoing and color of surrounding concrete can be matched where required. Use such compounds according to manufacturer's recommendations. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, material shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. H. Epoxy Adhesive: Two-component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound developing 100 percent of strength of concrete, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Epoxy used to inject cracks and as a binder in epoxy mortar shall meet ASTM-C881,Type VI. Epoxy used as a bonding agent for fresh concrete shall meet ASTM- C881,Type V. I. Non-shrink Grout: See Section 03600- Structural Grout. J. Spray-Applied Coating: Acceptable products are Thoro System Products"Thoroseal Plaster Mix" or approved equal. Color: Gray. K. Concrete Topping: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,as specified in this Section. L. Concrete Fill: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,(Class C where fill thickness exceeds 3 inches throughout a placement), as specified in Section 03310 - Structural Concrete. M. Evaporation Retardant: Confilm, manufactured by Master Builders; Eucobar, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company; or equal. 11 C 5/2013 03300- 11 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.11 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Membrane-forming Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM - C309, Type 1 D, and r.. following requirements. 1. Minimum solids content: 30 percent. 2. Compound shall not permanently discolor concrete. When used for liquid- containing structures, curing compound shall be white-pigmented. 3. When used in areas that are to be coated,or that will receive topping or floor covering,material shall not reduce bond of coating,topping,or floor covering to concrete. Curing compound manufacturer's technical information shall state conditions under which compound will not prevent bond. 4. Conform to local,state and federal solvent emission requirements.Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. 5. White pigmented concrete curing compound shall be sprayed on in one even coat with a hand or power sprayer as soon as the surface water disappears from concrete surface. B. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound(VOC Compliant): Conform to ASTM-C309, Type 1,Class B,and the following requirements: 30 percent solids content minimum; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 500-hour test in accordance with ASTM - 0 D4587. Sodium silicate compounds are not permitted. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. C. Sheet Material for Curing Concrete: ASTM-C171; waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheeting. D. Curing Mats(for use in Curing Method 2): Heavy shag rugs or carpets,or cotton mats quilted at 4 inches on center; 12 ounce per square yard minimum weight when dry. E. Water for curing: Clean and potable. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify that anchors,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. • 5/2013 03300- 12 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.02 PREPARATION • A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 1. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Plans call for joint surfaces to be coated,clean joint surfaces of laitance, loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting(exposing aggregate),roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction • joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. 5/2013 03300- 13 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Plans,Shop Drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer,place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork,inserts,embedded items,reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydro-blasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Formwork Construction 1. Construct and maintain formwork so that it will maintain correct sizes of members,shape,alignment,elevation and position during concrete placement and until concrete has gained sufficient strength. Provide for required 5/2013 03300- 14 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, anchorages, and IDinserts. 2. Construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. 3. Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. Provide gaskets for wall forms to prevent concrete paste leakage at their base. 4. Place chamfer strips in forms to bevel edges and corners permanently exposed to view,except top edges of walls,and slabs which are indicated on Plans to be tooled. Do not bevel edges of formed joints and interior corners unless indicated on Plans. Form beveled edges for vertical and horizontal corners of equipment bases. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,make bevels 3/4 inch wide. 5. Provide temporary openings at bases of column and wall forms and other points as required for observation and cleaning immediately before concrete is placed. 6. Where runways are required for moving equipment,support runways directly on the formwork or structural members. Do not allow runways or supports to 11110 rest on reinforcing steel. 7. Use smooth forms on formed concrete surfaces required to have smooth form finish or rubbed finish. 8. Rough forms may be used on formed concrete surfaces indicated to have rough form finish. B. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish: 1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Uniformly space form ties and align in horizontal and vertical rows. Install taper ties,if used,with the large end on the wet face of the wall. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back up joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 3. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. 4. Form exposed corners of beams and columns to produce square,smooth,solid, 110 unbroken lines. 5/2013 03300- 15 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Provide exterior exposed edges with 3/4-inch chamfer or 3/4-inch radius. 40 6. Arrange facing material in orderly and symmetrical fashion. Keep number of joints to practical minimum. Support facing material adequately to prevent deflection in excess of allowable tolerances. 7. For flush surfaces exposed to view in completed structure,overlap previously- placed hardened concrete with form sheathing by approximately 1 inch. Hold forms against hardened concrete to maintain true surfaces,preventing offsets or loss of mortar. C. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Rubbed Finish: Provide forms as specified in this Section, 3.04B "Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish". Use smooth plywood linings or forms, in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. D. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure supports for types of screeds required. E. Circular Forms: Set forms in one piece for full height of member. F. Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Coordinate surface finish, anchors, reglets, and similar requirements with membrane waterproofing applicator. G. Fireproofing Steel Member: Construct forms to provide not less than the concrete thickness necessary,measured from face of steel member,to provide the required fire rating. Forms for concealed surfaces may be unlined. H. Tolerances: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Plans,construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed in Tables 03100A and 03100B at end of this Section. 2. Establish sufficient control points and bench marks as references for tolerance checks. Maintain these references in undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the Work. Adjustment of Formwork: 1. Use wedges or jacks to provide positive adjustment of shores and struts. After final inspection and before concrete placement,fasten in position wedges used for final adjustment of forms. 2. Brace forms securely against lateral deflections. Prepare to compensate for settling during concrete placement. 5/2013 03300- 16 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. For wall openings,construct wood forms that facilitate necessary loosening to ,r counteract swelling of forms. J. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Place on smooth firm bed of suitable material to prevent vertical displacement; set tight to prevent horizontal displacement. Exercise care to avoid buckling of forms. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 2. Fit carton forms tightly around piles and piers; completely fill the space between subgrade and concrete placement with carton forms to form a void space. 3. Protect carton forms from moisture and maintain in a dry condition until concrete is placed on them. If they become wet before placement of concrete, allow them to dry and carefully inspect for strength before concrete is placed. 4. Before concrete placement,replace damaged or deteriorated forms which are incapable of supporting concrete dead load plus construction live loads. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials before placing concrete. Remove accumulated mortar, grout, rust and other foreign matter. B. Coat forms for exposed or painted concrete surfaces with form oil or form-release agent before placing reinforcement. Cover form surfaces with coating material in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. Remove coating material from reinforcement before placing concrete. C. Forms for unexposed surfaces,other than retained-in-place metal forms,may be wet with water immediately before concrete placement in lieu of coating. When possibility of freezing temperatures exists,however,the use of coating is mandatory. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A. Placement Tolerances: Place reinforcement within tolerances of Table 03210A at the end of this Section. Bend tie wire away from forms to maintain the specified concrete coverage. ® B. Interferences: Maintain 2-inch clearance from embedded items. Where reinforcing interferes with location of other reinforcing steel,conduit or embedded items,bars may be moved within specified tolerances or one bar diameter,whichever is greater. Where 5/2013 03300- 17 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE greater movement of bars is required to avoid interference,notify the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduit, mechanical openings or other items • without approval of the Engineer. C. Concrete Cover: Provide clear cover measured from reinforcement to face of concrete as listed in Table 03210B at the end of this Section, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. D. Placement in Forms: Use spacers,chairs,wire ties and other accessory items necessary to assemble,space,and support reinforcing properly. Provide accessories of sufficient number,size and strength to prevent deflection or displacement of reinforcement due to construction loads or concrete placement. Use appropriate accessories to position and support bolts, anchors and other embedded items. Tie reinforcing bars at each intersection,and to accessories. Blocking reinforcement with concrete or masonry is prohibited. E. Placement for Concrete on Ground: Support bar and wire reinforcement on chairs with sheet metal bases or precast concrete blocks spaced at approximately 3 feet on centers each way. Use minimum of one support for each 9 square feet. Tie supports to reinforcing bars and wires. F. Vertical Reinforcement in Columns: Offset vertical bars by at least one bar diameter at splices. Provide accurate templates for column dowels to ensure proper placement. G. Splices: 1. Do not splice bars, except at locations indicated on Plans or reviewed Shop Drawings,without approval of the Engineer. 2. Lap Splices: Unless otherwise shown or noted, Class B, conforming to ACI 318-89,Section 12.15.1. Tie securely with wire prior to concrete placement,to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement. 3. Mechanical Bar Splices: Use only where indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Couplers located at a joint face shall be of a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown. Seal couplers prior to concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. b. Couplers intended for future connections: Recess 1/2 inch minimum from concrete surface. After concrete is placed,plug coupler and fill recess with sealant to prevent contact with water or other corrosive materials. c. Unless noted otherwise, match mechanical coupler spacing and • capacity to that shown for the adjacent reinforcing. 5/2013 03300- 18 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Construction Joints: Place reinforcing continuous through construction joints, • unless noted otherwise. H. Welded Wire Fabric: Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, lap adjoining pieces at least 6 inches or one full mesh plus 2 inches, whichever is larger. Lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams,or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Conform to WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric. I. Field Bending: Shape reinforcing bent during construction operations to conform to Plans. Bars shall be cold-bent; do not heat bars. Closely inspect reinforcing for breaks. When reinforcing is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair, as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete. J. Epoxy-coated Reinforcing Steel: Install in accordance this Section, 3.06J "Field Bending",and in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair damaged epoxy coating with patching material as specified in Paragraph 2.09 A -Bending. K. Field Cutting: Cut reinforcing bars by shearing or sawing. Do not cut bars with cutting torch. L. Welding of reinforcing bars is prohibited, except where shown on Plans. 1111 3.07 GROUTING OF REINFORCING AND DOWEL BARS A. Use epoxy grout for anchoring reinforcing and dowel steel to existing concrete in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions. Drill hole not more than 1/4 inch larger than steel bar diameter(including height of deformations for deformed bars)in existing concrete. Just before installation of steel,blow hole clean of all debris using compressed air. Partially fill hole with epoxy,using enough epoxy so when steel bar is inserted, epoxy grout will completely fill hole around bar. Dip end of steel bar in epoxy and twist bar while inserting into partially-filled hole. S 5/2013 03300- 19 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210A REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCES Placement Tolerances (in inches) Clear Distance- To formed soffit: -1/4 To other formed surfaces: ±1/4 Minimum spacing between bars -1/4 Clear distance from unformed surface to top reinforcement- Members 8 inches deep or less: ±1/4 Members more than 8 inches deep but less than 24 inches deep: -1/4, +1/2 Members 24 inches deep or greater: -1/4, +1 Uniform spacing of bars ±2 (but the required number of bars shall not reduced): Uniform spacing of stirrups and ties ±1 (but the required number of stirrups and ties shall not be reduced): Longitudinal locations of bends and ends of reinforcement- General: ±2 • Discontinuous ends of members: ±1/2 Length of bar laps: -1 1/2 Embedded length- For bar sizes No. 3 through 11: -I For bar sizes No. 14 and 18: -2 • 5 2013 03300-20 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ® TABLE 03210B MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCEMENT Minimum Surface Cover (in inches) Slabs and Joists- Top and bottom bars for dry conditions— No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water,or weather,over,or in contact with, sewage; and for bottoms bearing on work mat,or slabs supporting earth cover- No. 5 bars and smaller: 1 1/2 No. 6 through No. 18 bars: 2 Beams and Columns - For dry conditions - Stirrups, spirals and ties: 1 1/2 Principal reinforcement: 2 Exposed to earth,water, sewage or weather Stirrups and ties: 2 ® Principal reinforcement: 2 1/2 Walls - For dry conditions- No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1 i 2 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather, or in contact with ground- Circular tanks with ring tension: 2 All others: 2 Footings and Base Slabs- At formed surfaces and bottoms bearing on concrete work mat: 2 At unformed surfaces and bottoms in contact with earth: 3 Over top of piles: 2 Top of footings- - same as slabs 5/2013 03300-21 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.08 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of this Section and Chapter 8 of ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete—IP,Chapter 8. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel. 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. a Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. 5/2013 03300-22 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, ® apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed,below 90 degrees F. 3.09 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R-96:Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Quality Control: Take samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at the placement(discharge)end of the line. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place • alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures,before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not 5/2013 03300-23 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2 inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.11 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R-96:Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, Group 3, immersion-type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. Do not transport concrete by vibrating. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.12 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into JO previously-placed layer. 5/2013 03300-24 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ® 4. Refer to Section 03310 - Structural Concrete for Mass Concreting. 3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING 3.14 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Unfinished Surfaces: Finish is not required on surfaces concealed from view in completed structure by earth,ceilings or similar cover,unless indicated otherwise on Plans. B. Rough Form Finish: 1. No form facing material is required on rough form finish surfaces. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Chip off fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height. 3. Rough form finish may be used on concrete surfaces which will be concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except concealed surfaces required to have smooth form finish, as shown on Plans. C. Smooth Form Finish: 411 1. Form facing shall produce smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Rub fins and joint marks with wooden blocks to leave smooth,unmarred finished surface. 3. Provide smooth form finish on the wet face of formed surfaces of water- holding structures, and of other formed surfaces not concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except where otherwise indicated on Plans. Walls that will be exposed after future construction,at locations indicated on Plans, shall have smooth form finish. Smooth form finish on exterior face of exterior walls shall extend below final top of ground elevation. Exterior face of all perimeter grade beams shall have smooth form finish for full depth of grade beam. D. Rubbed Finish: 1. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Remove forms as soon as practicable,repair defects,wet surfaces,and rub with No. 16 carborundum stone or similar abrasive. Continue rubbing sufficiently to bring surface paste,remove form marks and fins,and produce smooth,dense 5/2013 03300-25 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE surface of uniform color and texture. Do not use cement paste other than that drawn from concrete itself. Spread paste uniformly over surface with brush. Allow paste to reset, then wash surface with clean water. 3. Use rubbed finish at locations indicated on Plans,except where rubbed finish is indicated for a wall which will be containing a liquid, use spray-applied coating. E. Spray-applied Coating: At Contractor's option,in lieu of rubbed finish,spray-applied coating may be applied after defects have been repaired and fins removed. Remove form oil, curing compound and other foreign matter that would prevent bonding of coating. Apply coating in uniform texture and color in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. F. Related Unformed Surfaces: Tops of piers, walls, bent caps, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed. Float unformed surfaces to texture reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces. Continue final treatment on formed surfaces uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3.15 HOT WEATHER FINISHING A. When hot weather conditions exist, as defined in the Section, 1.03A"Hot Weather", and as judged by the Engineer, apply evaporation retardant to the surfaces of slabs, topping and concrete fill placements immediately after each step in the finishing process has been completed. 3.16 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO CLASS A, B AND C TOLERANCES A. Apply Class A, B and C finishes at locations indicated on Plans. Class B or better finish shall be applied if not shown otherwise by the Plans. B. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. See Section 03100- Concrete Formwork for edge forms and screeds. C. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as stiff as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling, do not permit manipulation of surfaces prior to finishing operations. D. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Check tolerances by placing straightedge of specified length anywhere on slab. Gap between slab and straightedge shall not exceed • tolerance listed for specified class. 5/2013 03300-26 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE S Straightedge Tolerance ength in Feet in Inches A 10 1/8 B 10 1/4 C 2 1/4 E. Raked Finish: After concrete has been placed,struck off,consolidated and leveled to Class C tolerance,roughen surface before final set.Roughen with stiff brushes or rakes to depth of approximately 1/4 inch. Notify the Engineer prior to placing concrete requiring initial raked surface finish so that acceptable raked finish standard may be established for project. Protect raked,base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Provide raked finish for following: 1. Surfaces to receive bonded concrete topping or fill. 2. Steep ramps, as noted on Plans. 3. Additional locations as noted on Plans. F. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has ® disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. After initial floating, re-check tolerance of surface with 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to Class B tolerance. Immediately re-float slab to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3. Provide float finish at locations not otherwise specified and not otherwise indicated on Plans. G. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional troweling by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. II/ 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to Class A tolerance. On surfaces intended to 5/2013 03300-27 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE support floor coverings,remove defects which might show through covering by grinding. 410 3. Provide trowel finish for floors which will receive floor covering and additional locations indicated on Plans. H. Broom or Belt Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. Immediately after completing floated finish, draw broom or burlap belt across surface to give coarse transverse scored texture. 2. Provide broom or belt finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.17 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO "F-NUMBER SYSTEM" FINISH A. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. Edge forms and screeds: Conform to Section 03100-Concrete Formwork. B. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dry as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level a slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling,do not manipulate surfaces prior to finishing operations. C. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Independent testing laboratory will check floor flatness and levelness in accordance with this Section,3.23F"Field Quality Control". D. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. Check tolerance of surface after initial floating with a 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat slab to uniform, smooth, granular texture to FF20/FL17 tolerance,unless shown otherwise on Plans. 3. Provide "F-Number System" float finish at locations indicated on Plans. 5/2013 03300-28 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Trowel Finish: III1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to an FF25/FL20 tolerance for slabs on grade and FF25/F117 for elevated slabs, unless shown otherwise on Plans. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove defects, which might show through covering,by grinding. 3. Provide"F-Number System" trowel finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.18 BONDED CONCRETE TOPPING AND FILL A. Surface Preparation: 1. Protect raked, base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. 111 Mechanically remove oil, grease, asphalt, paint, clay stains or other contaminants, leaving clean surface. 2. Prior to placement of topping or fill, thoroughly dampen roughened slab surface and leave free of standing water. Immediately before topping or fill is placed, scrub coat of bonding grout into surface. Do not allow grout to set or dry before topping or fill is placed. B. Concrete Fill: 1. Where concrete fill intersects a wall surface at an angle steeper than 45 degrees from vertical, provide a 1.5-inch deep keyway in the wall at the point of intersection; size keyway so that no portion of the concrete fill is less than 1.5 inches thick. Form keyway in new walls; create by saw cutting the top and bottom lines and chipping in existing walls. 2. Apply wood float finish to surfaces of concrete fill. 3. Provide concrete fill at locations shown on Plans. C. Bonded Concrete Topping in Bottom of Clarifiers and Thickeners: SI. Minimum thickness of concrete topping: 1 inch. Maximum thickness when swept in by clarifier and thickener equipment: 3 inches. 5/2013 03300-29 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Compact topping and fill by rolling or tamping,bring to established grade,and float. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the • bottom of the slab to the top,for the full width of the placement. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed between finishing operations to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. 3. Screed topping to true surface using installed equipment. Protect equipment from damage during sweeping-in process. Perform sweeping-in process under supervision of equipment manufacturer's factory representative. After topping has been screeded, apply wood float finish. During finishing, do not apply water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand to the surface. 4. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the Engineer,fill the tank with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. 5. Provide bonded concrete topping in bottom of all clarifiers and thickeners. 3.19 EPDXY PENETRATING SEALER A. Surfaces to receive epoxy penetrating sealer: Apply wood float finish. Clean surface 0 and apply sealer in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: Apply minimum 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surface to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs,bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Provide epoxy penetrating sealer at locations indicated on Plans. 3.20 EPDXY FLOOR TOPPING A. Surfaces to receive epoxy floor topping: Apply wood float finish unless recommended otherwise by epoxy floor topping manufacturer. Clean surface and apply epoxy floor topping in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Thickness of topping: 1/8 inch. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: 0 apply 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. 5/2013 03300-30 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Mask walls,doors, frames and similar surfaces to prevent floor coating contact. ® D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs,bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and dimples. F. Provide epoxy floor topping at locations indicated on Plans. 3.21 SEALER/DUSTPROOFER A. Where sealer or sealer/dustproofer is indicated on Plans,just prior to completion of construction, apply coat of specified clear sealer/dustproofing compound to exposed interior concrete floors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 NONSLIP FINISH A. Apply float finish as specified. Apply two-thirds of required abrasive aggregate by method that ensures even coverage without segregation and re-float. Apply remainder of abrasive aggregate at right angles to first application,using heavier application of aggregate in areas not sufficiently covered by first application. Re-float after second application of aggregate and complete operations with troweled finish. Perform ® finishing operations in a manner that will allow the abrasive aggregate to be exposed and not covered with cement paste. B. Provide nonslip finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete-IP and under provisions of Sections 01440 —Inspection Services and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cu yds or less of concrete or as directed by the Engineer. S F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting,cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5/2013 03300-31 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Provide the results of alkalinity tests of concrete used in sanitary structures. Provide one test for each structure. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Perform the test on the concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure. Alkalinity tests are to be in accordance with Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis, Vol. 15, Page 230, Interscience Publishers Division, John Wiley and Sons. 3.24 PATCHING A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete- IP. 3.25 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines,details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill,touch-up,repair,or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. 3.26 CURING A. Comply with ACI 308.1-98:Standard Specifications for Curing Concrete. Cure by preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change and mechanical injury for a period of 7 curing days when Type II or IP cement has been used and for 3 curing days when Type III cement has been used. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. A curing day is any calendar day in which the temperature is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted if air temperature adjacent to concrete is maintained above 50 degrees F. In continued cold weather, when artificial heat is not provided, removal of forms and shoring may be permitted at the end of calendar days equal to twice the required number of curing days. However,leave soffit forms and shores in place until concrete has reached the specified 28-day strength, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Cure formed surfaces not requiring rub-finished surface by leaving forms in place for 411) the full curing period. Keep wood forms wet during the curing period. Add water as 5/2013 03300-32 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE needed for other types of forms. Or, at Contractor's option, forms may be removed ® after 2 days and curing compound applied. C. Rubbed Finish: 1. At formed surfaces requiring rubbed finish, remove forms as soon as practicable without damaging the surface. 2. After rub-finish operations are complete, continue curing formed surfaces by using either approved curing/sealing compounds or moist cotton mats until normal curing period is complete. D. Unformed Surfaces: Cure by membrane curing compound method. 1. After concrete has received a final finish and surplus water sheen has disappeared, immediately seal surface with a uniform coating of approved curing compound, applied at the rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. Do not apply less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. Provide satisfactory means to properly control and check rate of application of the compound. 2. Thoroughly agitate the compound during use and apply by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers equipped with atomizing nozzles. For • application on small miscellaneous items,hand-powered spray equipment may be used. Prevent loss of compound between nozzle and concrete surface during spraying operations. 3. Do not apply compound to a dry surface. If concrete surface has become dry, thoroughly moisten surface immediately prior to application. At locations where coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects,or if rain falls on a newly coated surface before film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, apply an additional coat of compound at the specified rate of coverage. 3.27 CURING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when curing mass concrete. 1. Minimum curing period: 2 weeks. 2. When ambient air temperature falls below 32 degrees F, protect surface of concrete against freezing. 3. Do not use steam or other curing methods that will add heat to concrete. • 4. Keep forms and exposed concrete continuously wet for at least the first 48 hours after placing, and whenever surrounding air temperature is above 90 degrees F during final curing period. 5/2013 03300-33 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. During 2-week curing period,provide necessary controls to prevent ambient air 0 temperature immediately adjacent to concrete from falling more than 30 degrees F in 24 hours. 3.28 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Time Limits: 1. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required before concrete is aged, forms on vertical surfaces may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. 2. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. Leave formwork for water-retaining structures in place for at least 2 days. Formwork for non-water-retaining columns, walls, sides of beams and other formwork components not supporting weight of concrete may be removed after 12 hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations,and provided removal of forms will not disturb members supporting weight of concrete. 3. Forms and shoring supporting weight of concrete or construction loads: Leave ID in place until concrete has reached minimum strength specified for removal of forms and shoring. Do not remove such forms in less than 4 days. B. Circular Paper or Spiral Tube Forms: Follow manufacturer's directions for form removal. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to concrete surface. When removal is done before completion of curing time,replace form,tie in place,and seal to retard escape of moisture. C. Removal Strength: 1. Control Tests: Suitable strength-control tests will be required as evidence that concrete has attained specified strength for removal of formwork or shoring supporting weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members. Furnish test cylinders and data to verify strength for early form removal. a. Field-cured Test Cylinders: When field-cured test cylinders reach specified removal strength,formwork or shoring maybe removed from respective concrete placements. b. Laboratory-cured Test Cylinders: When concrete has been cured as specified for structural concrete for same time period required by 0 laboratory-cured cylinders to reach specified strength, formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. 5/2013 03300-34 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Determine length of time that concrete has been cured by totaling the III days or fractions of days,not necessarily consecutive,during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50 degrees F and concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed against evaporation and loss of moisture. 2. Compressive Strengths: The minimum concrete compressive strength for removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete is 75 percent of specified minimum 28-day strength for class of concrete involved. 3.29 RESHORING A. When reshoring is permitted, plan operations in advance and obtain the Engineer's approval of such operations. While reshoring is under way, keep live load off new construction. Do not permit concrete in any beam, slab, column or other structural member to be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. B. Place reshores as soon as practicable after form-stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without over stressing construction. Leave reshores in place until tests representative of concrete being supported have reached specified strength at time of • removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete. C. Floors supporting shores under newly-placed concrete: Leave original supporting shores in place, or re-shore. Locate reshores directly under shore position above. Extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly- placed concrete, forms and construction live loads in such manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded. 3.30 FORM REUSE A. Do not reuse forms that are worn or damaged beyond repair. Thoroughly clean and recoat forms before reuse. For wood and plywood forms to be used for exposed smooth finish,sand or otherwise dress concrete contact surface to original condition or provide form liner facing material. For metal forms, straighten, remove dents and clean to return forms to original condition. 5/2013 03300-35 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100A • TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BUILDINGS** For any Variation For any Maximum 20-foot From Variation In 10-foot len h or for Entire length Dimension any bay Lines and Surfaces of Columns, l/4" - - - 1" Plumb or Piers, Walls and Arrises Specified Exposed Corner Columns, Control - - - 1/4" 1 2" Batter Joint Grooves, and Other Conspicuous Lines Slab Soffits, Ceilings, Beam Soffits, 1 '4" 3;8" 3 4" Level of and Arrises (measured before Specified removal of shores), Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, - - - 1;4" I Grade Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous Lines Drawing Position of Linear Building Lines, - - - 1;2" 1 Dimensions Columns, Walls and Partitions Size and Location of Sleeves, Floor - - - - - - ±1/4" Openings and Wall Openings Cross Section of Columns, Beams, - - - - - - +1/2", -1/4" Slabs, and Walls Footings* in Plan - - - - - - +2", -1/2" Footing Misplacement or Eccentricity - - - - - - 2% of Width in Direction of Error(the lesser of) or 2" Footing Thickness Decrease - - - - - - 5% Footing Thickness Increase - - - - - - No Limit Step Rise in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - ±1/8" Step Tread in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - ±1/4" Consecutive Step Rise - - - - - - ±1/16" Consecutive Step Tread - - - - - - ±1/8" *Footing tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels,or embedded items **Includes water and wastewater process structures • 5/2013 03300-36 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 410 TABLE 03100B TOLERANCE FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BRIDGES,WHARVES AND MARINE STRUCTURES Variation From Variation In Maximum Plumb of Specified Surfaces of columns,piers and walls 1/2" in I 0' Batter Level or Top surfaces of slabs See Section 03345 Specified Grade Top surfaces of curbs and railings 3/16"in 10' Drawing Cross section of columns, caps,walls,beams, and ±1/2", -1/4" Dimensions similar members Thickness of deck slabs ±1/4", -1/8" 4k, Size and location of slab and wall openings ±1/2" Footings in plan +2, -1/2" Footing misplacement or eccentricity in direction 2%of width or 2" of error(the lesser of) Footing thickness decrease 5% Footing thickness increase No limit Step rise in flight of stairs ±1/8" Step tread in flight of stairs ±1/4" Consecutive step rise +1/16" Consecutive step tread ±1/8" • 5/2013 03300-37 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.31 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. • B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 411 5/2013 03300-38 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 03310 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place normal-weight structural concrete and mass concrete. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 00300—Bid Proposal 2. Section 01200—Measurement 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for structural concrete is on an each basis for each structure as bid. 411) Payment includes related work performed on these structures in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. B. If Extra Structural Concrete is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic-yard basis, measured in place. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. D. No provisions shall be provided for temperature controlled curing of test cylinder. Test cylinder(s) shall be cured in identical environment until picked up by lab. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Mass Concrete: Concrete sections 4 feet or more in least dimension. B. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 305R. • C. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI - 306R. 5/2013 03310-1 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01350—Submittals. • B. Mill Certificates: Required for bulk cement. C. Design Mixes: 1. Submit test data on proposed design mixes for each type of concrete in the Work, including each class, and variations in type, source or quantity of material. Include type, brand and amount of cementitious materials; type, brand and amount of each admixture; slump; air content; aggregate sources, gradations,specific gravity and absorption;total water(including moisture in aggregate);water/cement ratio; compressive strength test results for 7 and 28 days;and shrinkage tests for Class C and D concrete at 21 or 28 days of drying. 2. Submit abrasion loss and soundness test results for limestone aggregate. 3. Testing of aggregates, including sieve analysis, shall be performed by a certified independent testing laboratory. Tests shall have been performed no earlier than 3 months before Notice to Proceed. 4. Provide standard deviation data for plant producing concrete. Data shall include copies of laboratory test results and standard deviation calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1. Laboratory tests shall have been performed within past 12 months. When standard deviation data is not available, comply with ACI 318,Table 5.3.2.2. 5. Review and acceptance of mix design does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete of quality and strength required by these Specifications. D. Admixtures: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including following: 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Give requirements to control air content under all conditions,including temperature variations and presence of other admixtures. 2. Chemical Admixtures: Give requirements for quantities and types to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce uniform,workable concrete mix. Submit evidence of compatibility with other admixtures and cementitious materials proposed for use in design mix. E. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): When proposed for use, submit manufacturer's technical information and instructions for use of superplasticizer. State whether superplasticizer will be added at ready-mix plant or job site. When superplasticizer will be added at job site, submit proposed plan for measuring and adding superplasticizer to concrete mix at job site, and establish dosing area on site with holding tanks and metering devices. When superplasticizer is to be added at 5/2013 03310-2 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ready-mix plant,submit contingency plans for adding additional superplasticizer at job ® site when required due to delay in placing concrete. Identify portions of Work on which superplasticizer is proposed for use. F. Hot and Cold Weather Concreting: Submit,when applicable,proposed plans for hot and cold weather concreting. Review and acceptance of proposed procedure will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quality of finished product. G. Project Record Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide necessary controls during evaluation of materials,mix designs,production and delivery of concrete, placement and compaction to assure that the Work will be accomplished in accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record dates, locations, quantities, air temperatures, and test samples taken. B. Code Requirements: Concrete construction for buildings shall conform to ACI 318. Concrete construction for water and wastewater treatment and conveying structures shall conform to ACI 318 with modifications by ACI 350R, Item 2.6. Where this Specification conflicts with ACI 318 or ACI 350R,this Specification governs. C. Testing and Other Quality Control Services: 1. Concrete testing required in this section,except concrete mix design,limestone aggregate test data,and testing of deficient concrete,will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Provide material for and cooperate fully with Owner's testing laboratory technician in obtaining samples for required tests. 3. Standard Services: The following testing and quality control services will be provided by Owner in accordance with Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services: a. Verification that plant equipment and facilities conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready-Mix Concrete Production Facilities". b. Testing of proposed materials for compliance with this Specification. c. Review of proposed mix design submitted by Contractor. 5/2013 03310-3 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE d. Obtaining production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles during work progress and testing for compliance with this Specification. e. Strength testing of concrete according to following procedures: 1) Obtaining samples for field test cylinders from every 100 cubic yards and any portion less than 100 cubic yards for each mix design placed each day, according to ASTM C172, with each sample obtained from a different batch of concrete on a representative, random basis. Selecting test batches by any means other than random numbers chosen before concrete placement begins is not allowed. 2) Molding four specimens from each sample according to ASTM C31, and curing under standard moisture and temperature conditions as specified in Sections 7(a)and(b)of ASTM C31. 3) Testing two specimens at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days according to ASTM C39, reporting test results averaging strengths of two specimens. However, when one specimen evidences improper sampling, molding or testing, it will be discarded and remaining cylinder considered test result. When high-early-strength concrete is used,specimens will be tested at 3 and 7 days. f. Air content: For each strength test, determination of air content of normal weight concrete according to ASTM C231. g. Slump: For each strength test, and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, conducting slump test in accordance with ASTM C143. h. Temperature: For each strength test,checking concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C 1064. Lightweight concrete: For each strength test,or more frequently when requested by the Engineer,determination of air content by ASTM C567 and unit weight by ASTM C567. j. Monitoring of current and forecasted climatic conditions to determine when rate of evaporation,as determined by Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R, will produce loss of 0.2 pounds of water,or more,per square foot per hour. Testing lab representative will advise Contractor to use hot weather precautions when such conditions will exist during concrete placement,and note on concrete test reports when Contractor has been advised that hot weather conditions will exist. 5/2013 03310-4 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE • k. Class A and D Concrete Shrinkage Tests: Performance of drying shrinkage tests for trial batches as follows: 1) Preparation and Testing of Specimens: Compression and drying shrinkage test specimens will be taken in each case from the same concrete sample; shrinkage tests will be considered a part of the normal compression tests for the project. 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gage length of 10 inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with ASTM C157, modified as follows: (a). Wet curing: Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ±1 hour after trial batching and immediately immerse in water at 70 degrees F ±3 degrees F for at least 30 minutes; (b). Measure within 30 minutes after first 30 minutes of immersion to determine original length (not to be confused with "base length"); (c). Then submerge in saturated limewater, at 73 degrees F ±3 degrees F, for 7 days; 1110 (d). Then measure at age 7 days to establish "base length" for drying shrinkage calculations ("zero" days drying age); (e). Calculate expansion (base length expressed as a percentage of original length); (f). Immediately store specimens in a temperature and humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees F, ±3 degrees, and 50 percent relative humidity, ±4 percent, for the remainder of the test. (g). Measure to determine shrinkage, expressed as percentage of base length. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as the difference between the base length (at ?zero@ days drying age)and the length after drying at each test age. Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens to the nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs • from the average of that test age by more than 0.0004 inch,disregard the results obtained from that specimen. 5/2013 03310-5 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Report results of shrinkage tests to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. (h). Report shrinkage separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. 4. Additional Testing and Quality Control Services: The following will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450,Testing Laboratory Services, when requested by the Engineer. a. Checking of batching and mixing operations. b. Review of manufacturer's report of each cement shipment and conducting laboratory tests of cement. c. Molding and testing reserve 7-day cylinders or field cylinders. d. Conducting additional field tests for slump,concrete temperature,and ambient temperature. e. Alkalinity Tests: For concrete used in sanitary structures,one test for each structure. Perform alkalinity tests on concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure in accordance with "Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis," Vol. 15, page 230. 5. Contractor shall provide the following testing and quality control services: a. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test design mix for each class of concrete for which material source has been changed. b. Notify commercial testing laboratory employed by Owner 24 hours prior to placing concrete. 6. Testing of deficient concrete in place: a. When averages of three consecutive strength test results fail to equal or exceed specified strength, or when any individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi, strength of concrete shall be considered potentially deficient and core testing, structural analysis or load testing may be required by the Engineer. b. When concrete in place proves to be deficient, Contractor shall pay costs, including costs due to delays, incurred in providing additional 5/2013 03310-6 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE testing and analysis services provided by the Engineer, or the II) independent commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner. c. Replace concrete work judged inadequate by core tests, structural analysis or load tests at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Core Tests: 1) Obtain and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Where concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test; test dry. Where concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42. 2) Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so as to least impair strength of structure. When,before testing,one or more cores shows evidence of having been damaged during or after removal from structure, replace the damaged cores. ® 3) Concrete in area represented by core test will be considered adequate when average strength of cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength, and when no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength. 4) Patch core holes in accordance with Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. e. Structural Analysis: When core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, the Engineer may perform additional structural analysis at Contractor's expense to confirm safety of structure. f. Load Tests: When core tests and structural analysis do not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required, and their results evaluated, in accordance with ACI 318. g. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, probe penetration tests (Windsor probe),or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure,to evaluate concrete strength in place,or for selecting areas to be cored. However, such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated with other test data,shall not be used as basis for acceptance ® or rejection of structure's safety. 5/2013 03310-7 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Cement: Store cement in weather tight buildings,bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. When there is any doubt as to the expansive potential of shrinkage-compensating cements because of method or length of storage and exposure, laboratory test cement before use. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before next is started. C. Fine Aggregate: Before using, allow fine aggregate to drain until uniform moisture content is reached. D. Admixtures: Store admixtures to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions,provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. E. Lightweight Aggregates: Uniformly pre-dampen lightweight aggregates as necessary to prevent excessive variations in moisture content. Allow pre-dampened aggregates to remain in stockpiles,under continuous fog spray,for minimum of 24 hours before use. Provide adequate drainage in stockpile areas to eliminate excess water and accumulation of contaminated fines. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Use same brand of cement used in concrete mix design. Use only one brand of each type in each structure,unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I or Type II,gray in color. Use Type III only when specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. Use Type II, including the requirements of Table 2, in construction of liquid-containing structures and cooling towers,unless shown otherwise on Drawings. B. Admixtures: 1. Do not use calcium chloride,thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. 2. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260,compatible with other admixtures • used. 5/2013 03310-8 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ® 3. Chemical Admixtures: Polymer type,non-staining,chloride-free admixtures conforming to ASTM C494,Type A, C, D or E. 4. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, compatible with and by the same manufacturer as other admixtures. C. Mixing Water: Use clean, potable water, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94. D. Aggregates: Use coarse aggregate from only one source and fine aggregate from only one source, for exposed concrete in any single structure. 1. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel,crushed gravel or crushed limestone conforming to ASTM C33. 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand complying with ASTM C33. 3. Limestone aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and the following additional requirements: a. Clean,hard,strong and durable particles free of chemicals and coatings of silt,clay,or other fine materials that may affect hydration and bond of cement paste. b. Select crushed limestone: High-calcium limestone (minimum 95 percent CaCO3 and maximum 3.5 percent MgCO3)with maximum Los Angeles Abrasion loss of 38 percent,when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. c. Test aggregate for soundness in accordance with ASTM C88; maximum loss shall not exceed 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate test. 4. Maximum size of coarse aggregate: a. Normal weight concrete, except as noted below: 1-1/2 inches. b. Formed members 6 inches or less in least dimension: 1/5 least dimension. c. Slabs: 1/3 depth of slab. d. Drilled shafts: 1/3 clearance between reinforcing steel,but not greater than 3/4 inch. e. Concrete fill, seal slabs and bonded concrete topping in clarifiers: 3/8 inch. 5/2013 03310-9 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: ASTM C330. Grading limits: 3/4 inch to No. 4. 6. Abrasive Aggregate: Conform to requirements of Section 03300— Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. E. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted. F. Evaporation Retardant: Masterbuilders "Confilm", Euclid "Eucobar",or equal. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Bonding Agent: Two-component modified epoxy resin. 2. Vapor barrier: 6-mil clear polyethylene film of type recommended for below- grade application. 3. Non-shrink grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement and water-reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX • A. Objective: Select proportions of ingredients to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance and other specified properties. B. Mix Design: Employ and pay an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test mix designs for each type of concrete specified. Proportion mix design ingredients by weight. Submit mix designs and test results for approval. 1. During the trial batches,aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces an acceptable mix,a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the Contractor's preliminary mix design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. Prepare trial batches using the aggregates,cement and admixtures proposed for the project. Make trial batches large enough to obtain 3 drying shrinkage test specimens and 6 compression test specimens from each batch. Shrinkage testing is required only for Class A and D concrete. • 5/2013 03310-10 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Determine compressive strength by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high • cylinders,made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C192 and ASTM C39. Test 3 compression test cylinders at 7 days and 3 at 28 days. Average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 days for any given trial batch shall be not less than 125 percent of the specified compressive strength. 3. Perform sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch according to of ASTM C136. Report percentage passing each sieve. 4. In mix designs for Class A and D concrete, fine aggregate shall not exceed 41 percent of total aggregate by weight. C. Shrinkage Limitations, Class A and D Concrete 1. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch: 0.036 percent as measured at 21-day drying age or 0.042 percent at 28-day drying age. Use for construction only mix designs that meet trial batch shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage limitations apply only to Class A and D concrete. 2. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. ® 3. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction,take any or all of the following actions,at no additional cost to the Owner,for securing the specified shrinkage requirements: Changing the source or aggregates,cement or admixtures; reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or its effects. D. Selecting Ingredient Proportions for Concrete: 1. Proportion concrete mix according to ACI 301, Chapter 3. 2. Establish concrete mix design by laboratory trial batches prepared by independent testing laboratory, or on basis of previous field experience in accordance with provisions of ACI 318,Item 5.3;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. 3. Concrete mix design data submitted for review shall have average 28-day compressive strength calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.2.1. When data is not available to determine standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1, average 28-day strength of mix design shall conform to ACI 318,Table 5.3.2.2. E. Water-Cement Ratios: 1. Maximum allowable water-cement ratios shall be as follows: 5/2013 03310-11 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE a. Concrete for liquid-containing structures: 0.45. b. Concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray or deicers: 0.40. c. All other concrete: 0.55. 2. Superplasticizer may be added to maintain specified maximum water-cement ratios. Include free water in aggregate in water-cement ratio computations. F. Adjustment of Mix Proportions: After sufficient data becomes available during construction,mix may be adjusted upon approval of the Engineer,in accordance with ACI 318,Item 5.5;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. G. Entrained Air: Air-entrain all concrete except drilled shafts. Total air content in accordance with ASTM C173: 4 to 6 percent. H. Consistency,Workability, and Slump: 1. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period,to produce concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation,and which can be compacted by vibratory methods as specified, to give the desired strength, density, impermeability and smoothness of surface. Change the quantity of water as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. Determine the consistency of the concrete in successive batches by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slumps shall be as follows: Concrete Type Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Portland Cement Concrete 2" 4" Concrete to be dosed with superplasticizer: 1" 3" Normal Weight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 9" Lightweight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 7" Drilled Shaft Concrete: 4"* 8" *Minimum slump where drilled shafts are cast in temporary casings: 5 inches 2. Specified slump shall apply at time when concrete is discharged at job site. Perform slump tests to monitor uniformity and consistency of concrete delivered to job site; however, do not use as basis for mix design. Do not exceed water-cement ratios specified. • 5/2013 03310-12 of23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE I. Admixtures: Proportion admixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. • Use of accelerator is permitted when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Use of retarder is permitted when temperature of placed concrete exceeds 65 degrees F. J. High-Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): Use superplasticizer to improve workability of concrete or delay hydration of cement,in accordance with requirements and recommendations of product manufacturer and approved submittals. K. Concrete Classification and Strength: 1. Strength: Conform to values for class of concrete indicated on Drawings for each portion of Work. Requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength. If high early-strength concrete is allowed,requirements are based on 7-day compressive strength. 2. Classification: Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Normal-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard Concrete for Structures Containing Water or Wastewater A 4,000 564(6 sacks) B 1,500 329 (3 '/2 sacks) • C 3,000 470(5 sacks) D 5,000 658 (7 sacks) H 3,000 611 (6 %2 sacks) Concrete for Buildings, Slabs on Grade and Miscellaneous Structures AB 4,000 Not Applicable BB 1,500 Not Applicable CB 3,000 Not Applicable DB 5,000 Not Applicable Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Light-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard E 3,000 Not Applicable F 4,000 Not Applicable G 5,000 Not Applicable 3. Maximum size aggregate for Class H concrete: 3/8 inch. Maximum size aggregate for all other normal-weight concrete: 1-1/2 inches, except as specified in Paragraph 2.01D.4. 4. When required strength is not obtained with minimum cement content as specified,add cement,lower water-cement ratio or provide other aggregates as • necessary. 5/2013 03310-13 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. In addition to conforming to specified strength,lightweight concrete must be within specified unit weight limits. Maximum air-dry unit weight is 118 pounds per cubic foot; minimum is 110 pounds per cubic foot unless shown • otherwise on Drawings. Determine air-dry unit weight in accordance with ASTM C567. Correlate air-dry unit weight with fresh unit weight of the same concrete as a basis for acceptance during construction. L. Use of Classes of Concrete: 1. Use classes of concrete as indicated on the Drawings and in other specifications. 2. Liquid-containing structures: If not otherwise indicated, use the following classes for structures containing water or wastewater and for utility applications in the locations described: a. Class A: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class B: Unreinforced concrete used for plugging pipes, seal slabs, thrust blocks, and trench dams,unless indicated otherwise. c. Class H: Fill and topping. Where concrete fill thickness exceeds 3 inches in the majority of a placement and is not less than 1.5 inches thick, Class A concrete may be used. 3. All other structures: If not otherwise indicated,use the following classes in the locations described: a. Class AB: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class CB: Duct banks;see Section 16402—Underground Duct Banks for additional requirements. c. Class BB: Unreinforced concrete fill under structures. 2.03 MIXING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Conform to ACI 301, Chapter 7. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 1. Measure,batch,mix and transport ready-mixed concrete according to ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities". 5/2013 03310-14 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Provide batch tickets with information specified in ASTM C94. Deliver batch • ticket with concrete and give to Owner's on-site testing laboratory representative. C. Batch Mixing at Site: 1. Mix concrete in batch mixer conforming to requirements of CPMB"Concrete Plant Mixer Standards". Use mixer equipped with suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and water measuring device. Batch mixer shall be capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into uniform mass within specified mixing time, and of discharging mix without segregation. Operate mixer according to rated capacity and recommended revolutions per minute printed on manufacturer's rating plate. 2. Charge batch into mixer so some water will enter before cement and aggregates. Keep water running until one-fourth of specified mixing time has elapsed. Provide controls to prevent discharging until required mixing time has elapsed. When concrete of normal weight is specified,provide controls to prevent addition of water during mixing. Discharge entire batch before mixer is recharged. 3. Mix each batch of 2 cubic yards or less for not less than 1 minute and 30 seconds. Increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic • yard or fraction of cubic yard. 4. Keep mixer clean. Replace pick-up and throw-over blades in drum when they have lost 10 percent of original depth. D. Admixtures: 1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into mixer as solution using automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Measure admixture to accuracy within+3 percent. Do not use admixtures in powdered form. 2. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided that admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on concrete or on properties of each other. Inject admixtures separately during batching sequence. 3. Add retarding admixtures as soon as practicable after addition of cement. E. Temperature Control: 1. When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F, keep as-mixed temperature above 55 degrees F to maintain concrete above minimum placing • temperature. 5/2013 03310-15 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. When water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when temperature of mixture is greater than 100 degrees F. 3. In hot weather, maintain temperature of concrete below maximum placing temperature. When necessary, temperature may be lowered by cooling ingredients, cooling mixer drum by fog spray, using chilled water or well- crushed ice in whole or part for added water,or arranging delivery sequence so that time of transport and placement does not generate unacceptable temperatures. 4. Submit hot weather and cold weather concreting plans for approval. 2.04 MIXING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE A. Determining Absorption of Aggregates: Mixing procedures vary according to total absorption by weight of lightweight aggregates. Determine total absorption by weight before pre-damping in accordance with ASTM C127. B. Ten Percent or Less Absorption: Follow same requirements as for mixing normal- weight concrete when preparing concrete made with low-absorptive lightweight aggregates having 10 percent or less total absorption by weight. To be low-absorptive, aggregates must absorb less than 2 percent additional water in first hour after mixing. C. More Than 10 Percent Absorption: Batch and mix concrete made with lightweight aggregates having more than 10 percent total absorption by weight, as follows: 1. Place approximately 80 percent of mixing water in mixer. 2. If aggregates are pre-dampened, add air-entraining admixture and all aggregates. Mix for minimum of 30 seconds, or 5 to 10 revolutions of truck mixer. 3. When aggregates have not been pre-dampened,mix aggregates and water for minimum of 1 minute and 30 seconds,or 15 to 30 revolutions of truck mixer. Then add air-entraining admixture and mix for additional 30 seconds. 4. Then,in the following sequence,add specified or permitted admixtures(other than air-entraining agent), all cement, and mixing water previously withheld. 5. Complete mixing using procedures for normal-weight concrete. 2.05 MASS CONCRETE A. Do not use high early-strength cement(Type III)or accelerating admixtures. 5/2013 03310-16 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE B. Use high-range water-reducing admixture(superplasticizer)to minimize water content • and cement content. C. Specified water-reducing retarding admixture may be required to prevent cold joints when placing large quantities of concrete,to permit revibration of concrete,to offset effects of high temperature in concrete or weather, and to reduce maximum temperature or rapid temperature rise. 2.06 EQUIPMENT A. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at delivery end. Conform to following equipment and operations requirements. B. Truck mixers, agitators and manner of operation: Conform to ASTM C94. Use of non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete is not permitted. C. Belt conveyors: Configure horizontally,or at a slope causing no segregation or loss. Use approved arrangement at discharge end to prevent separation. Discharge long runs without separation into hopper. D. Chutes: Metal or metal-lined (other than aluminum). Arrange for vertical-to- horizontal slopes not more than 1 to 2 or less than 1 to 3. Chutes longer than 20 feet or not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into hopper before distribution. E. Do not use aluminum or aluminum-alloy pipe or chutes for conveying concrete. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Concreting Under Water: Not permitted except where shown otherwise on Drawings or approved by the Engineer. When shown or permitted,deposit concrete under water by methods acceptable to the Engineer so fresh concrete enters mass of previously- placed concrete from within,causing water to be displaced with minimum disturbance at surface of concrete. B. Protection from Adverse Weather: Unless adequate protection is provided or the Engineer's approval is obtained, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, snow or freezing weather. Do not permit rainwater to increase mixing water or to damage surface finish. If rainfall occurs after placing operations begin, provide adequate covering to protect Work. • 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 5/2013 03310-17 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for 411, good bond. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance,loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate), roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Contract Drawings, shop drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork, inserts, embedded items, reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. 5/2013 03310-18 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete • (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater without special methods. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. ® I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces ofinetalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 HANDLING,TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and this Section. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel that will not be covered by current pour. 5/2013 03310-19 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. Do not transport concrete with vibrators. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet;take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. Rate of placement shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors,if used,shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. • 5/2013 03310-20 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE H. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes • between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed,below 90 degrees F. 3.04 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning,or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose(conduit)diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses(conduits)that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Control: Take samples for slump,air content and test cylinders at the placement (discharge)end of the line. • 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures,before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.06 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly • embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R Group 3 immersion- type high-speed power vibrators(8,000 to 12,000 rpm)in sufficient number and with 5/2013 03310-21 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. 411 B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.07 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 0 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. 3.08 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS AND FINISHING A. Conform to Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.09 CURING A. Conform to Section 03300- Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. III 5/2013 03310-22 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all tIP' components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION III • 5/2013 03310-23 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 5 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 5 �r► METALS 04/2008 a City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and stainless steel items including: 1 . Miscellaneous metal fabrications. 2. Steel shapes. 3. Aluminum shapes. 4. Stainless steel shapes. 5. Galvanized steel shapes. 6. Loose steel lintels. 7. Shelf angles. 8. Ladders. 9. Pipe bollards. 10.Stainless steel corner guards. 11 .Stair nosings. 1 .02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for concrete formwork under this Section. Include payment in work for which it is included with price breakdown included in the Schedule of Values. B. Refer to Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1 .03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2002. B. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. C. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. D. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. E. ASTM A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. F. ASTM A 276 - Specifications for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2006. It 104-1901 05500-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement G. ASTM A 283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007). H. ASTM A 320 - Specifications for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service; 2005. I. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2007a. J. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2007. K. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007. L. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006 and Errata. M. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). N. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1 .05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of structural components. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of fabrications, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Include embedment Drawings. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 3. Welded connections are required to be made in the shop prior to galvanizing. 4. Clearly identify field work and connections. Field connections to be compression or bolted connections. 5. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: Include structural analysis data for fabrications to comply with design loads; signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and licensed by the authority having jurisdiction. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. D. Written certification by fabricator that the components are hot-dip galvanized as specified. 105-1901 05500-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1 .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design members and connections under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the project's jurisdiction. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Design members and connections under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed by the authority having jurisdiction. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum five years of experience. 1 .07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1 .08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS - GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. B. Components to be shop fabricated to extent possible. No field welding is permitted. All field connections to be compression or bolted connections. 104-1901 05500-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2.02 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36, or as noted on drawings and scope of work. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283, ASTM A 276 - Type L, or as noted on drawings and scope of work. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold formed metal channels with flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16 inch wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches o.c... 1. Width of Channels: 1-5/8 inches. 2. Depth of Channels: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness. F. Trench Grates: Cast aluminum with manufacturer standard powder coating, color to be selected by Architect. 1. Basis of Design: IronSmith; 800-338-4766. 2. Pattern: Conquistador, 6" wide with 3/8" slots Model No. M9054 for 6" Poly- drain trough. 3. Substitutions are permitted for comparable projects. Submit per Section 01630 — Product Options and Substitutions. G. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. H. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, galvanized to ASTM A 153 where connecting galvanized components. Made in the USA only I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 ; type required for materials being welded. J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 MATERIALS- STAINLESS STEEL A. ASTM A276 Type 304 or ASTM A 276 Type 316L when near salt water or as indicated on Drawings. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A320 or as noted on drawings and scope of work. Made in the USA only. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1. All field splicing or connection to be compression or bolted connections. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds unless noted. 105-1901 05500-4 KIT Professionals. Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1 . Field welds are not permitted. (hr D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius of approximately 1/32 inch without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted. G. Fabricate in a manner to eliminate distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base materials. H. Provide erection marks as required for field assembly that are not visible or easily removed if visible without damaging the finish. I. Fabricate joints that will exclude water and provide weep holes or drainage where water can accumulate. J. Eliminate the detrimental effects of thermal movement from fabrication and ambient temperatures which could cause buckling, opening of joints, overstressing 41. components, failure of connections, and loss of waterproofing. K. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. L. Remove welding flux immediately. M. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. N. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. 2.05 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish or as noted on drawings or scope of work. 1 . Side Rails: 3/8 x 2 inches members spaced at 20 inches. 2. Rungs: one inch diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches on center with abrasive non-slip surface as supplied by Mebac; IKG Borden. Material finish to match ladder. 3. Space rungs 7 inches from wall surface. B. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; minimum schedule 40 with galvanized finish. 1 . Provide 1/8"yellow HPDE bollard cover with bullet ends over each steel bollard. Provide neoprene adhesive tape. (16._ 104-1901 05500-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement C. Joist and Joist Hangers: Strap anchors, fabricated with 18 gage minimum steel; galvanized finish. D. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish unless noted otherwise on drawings. E. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish. F. Wet Suit Support Racks: 1 . Structural design to support racks fully loaded with soaking wet suits for drying without noticeable warping or permanent racking distortion. G. Corner Guards: 1 . Manufacturers: a. Basis of Design: Wallguard, 877-943-6826, www.wallquard.com b. Substitutions: See Section 01630 — Product Options and Substitutions. 2. Product: Defender Series 2330 a. Size: 3.5" x 3.5" x 4' long. b. Stainless Steel Type 304, 16 gauge (0.059"), #4 Satin Finish, c. Finish: #4 Satin d. Radius Corner: 1/8" min. e. Edge Bevel: 1/4" f. Countersunk and predrilled. 2.06 Stair Tread Nosings A. Locations: Interior and Exterior Stairs. B. Poured Concrete Stairs: 1. Non-Corrosive Environment: a. Product: Basis of Design: Ferrogrit Type 116 as manufactured by Wooster Products, Inc., 800-321-4936, www.wooster-products.com b. Nosing Material: Abrasive cast iron, class 20 iron, high silicon. Machinable, hyper eutectic. c. Finish: Shot-blasted, one coat of shop-black paint. d. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 2. Corrosive Environment: a. Product: Basis of Design: Alumogrit Type 116 as manufactured by Wooster Products, Inc., 800-321-4936, www.wooster-products.com b. Nosing Material: Abrasive cast aluminum, No. 43 prime and secondary ingot, low copper content, corrosion resistant. c. Finish: Shot-blasted. d. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 3. Abrasives: #20 virgin grain aluminum oxide abrasive, integrally cast into the walking surface to a minimum depth oft/32 inch. 4. Pattern: a. Cross-hatched [preferred for SEA] or fluted. b. 1/16 deep minimum, clean and well-defined. c. Feature strip along the back edge. 105-1901 05500-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 5. Dimension: fiw a. Thickness: 3/8". b. Depth: 3". c. Nose Depth: Thickness of nosing plus 1". d. Width: Nosings shall terminate not more than 4" from ends of treads. C. Steel Pan Concrete-Filled Stairs: 1. Non-Corrosive Environment: a. Product, Basis of Design: Ferrogrit Type 101-SP abrasive cast iron as manufactured by Wooster Products, Inc., 800-321-4936, www.wooster- products.com b. Nosing Material: Abrasive cast iron, class 20 iron, high silicon. Machinable, hyper eutectic. c. Finish: Shot-blasted, one coat of shop-black paint. d. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 2. Corrosive Environment: a. Product, Basis of Design: Alumogrit Type 101-SP abrasive cast iron as manufactured by Wooster Products, Inc., 800-321-4936, www.wooster- products.com b. Nosing Material: Abrasive cast aluminum, No. 43 prime and secondary ingot, low copper content, corrosion resistant. c. Finish: Shot-blasted. 1110 d. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 3. Abrasives: #20 virgin grain aluminum oxide abrasive, integrally cast into the walking surface to a minimum depth of1/32 inch. 4. Pattern: a. Cross-hatched [preferred for SEA] or fluted. b. 1/16 deep minimum, clean and well-defined. c. Feature strip along the back edge. 5. Dimension: a. Thickness: 3/8". b. Depth: 3". c. Nose Depth: Thickness of nosing plus 3/8". d. Width: Nosings shall terminate not more than 1/8" from ends of treads. D. Protective Tape: Provide protective tape on tread. Maintain protective tape until Substantial Completion. E. Concealed Anchors: Slotted rivet type, integrally cast into the body of the noising a minimum of 3/8 inch. F. Holes or countersinks shall be machine made; screw heads shall not protrude above tread surface; cored holes or countersinks are not acceptable. G. Install according to manufacturer's directions. Schedule pour to allow installation of metal nosings before initial set of concrete occurs. 4I) 104-1901 05500-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions as follows: 1. Beams: Continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports unless noted otherwise. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim unless noted otherwise. 2.09 FINISHES - STEEL A. All steel to be G90 galvanized by the hot dip process per ASTM A 123 requirements. 1 . Galvanize assemblies after fabrication to the fullest extent possible. 2.10 FINISHES - STAINLESS STEEL A. Structural shapes annealed and pickled providing a 2B like finish unless noted otherwise. B. Handrail and guardrail shall have a number 4 polished finish (120 to 150 grit) unless noted otherwise. 105-1901 05500-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2.11 FASTENERS 4,, A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316L stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 . F. Forged Eye-Bolts: Drop forged steel ASTM C 1023 with a galvanized finish. Threaded bolts or lag bolts as manufactured by Chicago Hardware. G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1. H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21 .1. I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed. 46. 2.12 GROUT A. Non-shrink, Non-metallic, Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. 2.13 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/16 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field dimensions and conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 104-1901 05500-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Metal Fabrications Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.02 PREPARATION A. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. B. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. C. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 1 . Any field welding required is to be approved by Owner's representative before welding is to commence. 2. Any approved field welds to be in accordance with AWS D1.1 . 3. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 4. Fix exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 5. Materials may be rejected if galvanized coating is damaged in any way. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and repair other finish defects to restore finishes to their designed condition. 3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/8 inch. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Obtain approval prior to any site repairs. B. Material may be rejected if galvanized coating is damaged in any way. C. Stainless Steel Surfaces: Clean welds and bolted connections. Burn marks from welding will not be acceptable. END OF SECTION 105-1901 05500-10 KIT Professionals, Inc. CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 9 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 9 • FINISHES 04/2008 City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 40, SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and apply paint systems. a. CONTRACTOR is responsible for surface preparation and painting of all new and existing interior and exterior items and surfaces throughout the Project areas included under this and other Sections. 2. Extent of painting includes the Work specified below. Painting shown in schedules may not provide CONTRACTOR with complete indication of all painting Work. Refer to Article 2.2 of this Section where all surfaces of generic types specified are specified for preparation and painting according to their status, intended function, and location, using the painting system for that surface, function, and location as specified, unless specifically identified on the Drawings as a surface not to receive specified painting system. a. All new and specifically identified existing surfaces and items except where the natural finish of the material is specified as a corrosion-resistant material • not requiring paint; or is specifically indicated in the Contract Documents as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint them the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. b. Mechanical and process items to be painted include: 1) Piping, pipe supports, and electrical conduit. 2) Tanks. 3) Motors, pumps, and bases. c. Surface preparation and painting of all new and specifically identified existing items, both interior and exterior, and other surfaces, are included in the Work, except as otherwise shown or specified. d. Removal of all substances, top coats, primers and all intermediate coats of paint and other protective or decorative coatings on those items and surfaces to remain that are identified to receive a painting system under this Section, to provide surfaces acceptable for application of painting specified. e. Approved stepped-down mock-ups for all painting systems showing all components of the surface preparation and paint system application before start of Work. Check all dry film thicknesses; demonstrate methods of surface preparation, and methods of application, and obtain ENGINEER's approval of colors and textures to be used in the Work. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation, removal, and demolition procedures under other Sections and coordinate them with the Work specified in this Section. 2. Coordinate painting of areas that will become inaccessible once equipment, piping, II (tip, tanks, and similar fixed items have been installed. 104-1901 09900-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3. Coordinate primers with finish paint materials to provide primers that are compatible with finish paint materials. Review other Sections and other contracts where primed surfaces are provided, to ensure compatibility of total painting system for each surface. CONTRACTOR is responsible for coordinating compatibility of all shop primed and field painted items in other Sections and in general contract and other contracts. 4. Furnish information to ENGINEER on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use and ensure compatibility with prime coats used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and repaint as required. Notify ENGINEER in writing of anticipated problems using specified painting systems with surfaces primed by others. Re-prime equipment primed in factory and other factory-primed items that are damaged or scratched. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 15051, Buried Piping Installation. 2. Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 3. Section 15140, Pipe Hangers and Supports. 4. Section 15062, Ductile Iron Pipe. 5. Section 15054, Steel Pipe. 7. Section 15500, Process Valves. D. Work Not Included: The following Work is not included as painting Work, or are included under other Sections or in other contracts: 1. Shop Priming: Shop priming of structural metal, miscellaneous metal fabrications, other metal items and fabricated components such as shop-fabricated or factory- painted process equipment, plumbing equipment, heating and ventilating equipment, electrical equipment, and accessories shall conform to applicable requirements of this Section but are included under other Sections or in other contracts. 2. Pre-finished Items: a. Items furnished with such finishes as baked-on enamel, porcelain, and polyvinylidene fluoride shall only be touched up at Site by CONTRACTOR using manufacturer's recommended compatible field-applied touchup paint. b. Items furnished with finishes such as chrome plating or anodizing. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Non-metallic wall or ceiling surfaces in areas not exposed to view, and generally inaccessible areas, such as furred spaces, pipe chases, duct shafts, and elevator shafts. 4. Concrete surfaces below grade, unless otherwise shown or specified. 5. Concrete floors, unless specifically shown as a surface to be painted. 6. Face brick, glazed structural tile, and prefaced, ground-faced or split-faced concrete unit masonry. 7. Exterior face of architectural precast concrete. 8. Collector bearings, shafts and chains, wood flights, wood stop logs, and wood or fiberglass baffles. 9. Corrosion-Resistant Metal Surfaces: Where the natural oxide of item forms a barrier to corrosion, whether factory- or Site-formed, including such materials as copper, bronze, muntz metal, terne metal, and stainless steel. 104-1901 09900-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 10. Operating Parts and Labels: a. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, interior of motors, and fan shafts. b. Do not paint over labels required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at Site, or equipment identification, performance rating, nameplates, and nomenclature plates. c. Cover moving parts and labels during the painting with protective masking. Remove all protective masking upon completion of Work. Remove all paint, coatings, and splatter that comes in contact with such labels. 11. Structural and miscellaneous metals covered with concrete need not receive primers, intermediate, or finish coats of paint. 12. Existing structures, equipment, and other existing surfaces and items unless otherwise shown or specified. E. Description of Colors and Finishes: 1. Color Selection: a. Colors will be selected by ENGINEER in addition to color coding of pipelines, valves, equipment, ducts, and electrical conduit. b. ENGINEER reserves the right to select non-standard colors for paint systems specified within ability of paint manufacturer to produce such non-standard colors. Provide such colors at no additional expense to OWNER. 2. Color Coding of Pipelines, Valves, Equipment, and Ducts: • a. In general, color-coding of pipelines, valves, equipment and ducts shall comply with applicable standards of ANSI A13.1, ANSI Z535.1 and 40 CFR 1910.144. Provide color-coding for pipelines per Table 09900-B, Pipeline Color Table. b. For equipment on roofs or exposed to view, such as on exterior building facades and in offices and lobbies, color shall be selected by ENGINEER. 3. Color Coding of Pipelines and Equipment: a. Finish coats of paint for pipelines and equipment shall be coded in basic colors. Colors shall be brilliant, distinctive shades matching the following safety and pipeline colors per Texas Administrative Code (TAC) §290 Subchapter D, Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems: TABLE 09900-A TABLE OF STANDARD COLORS Color Designation* Aqua Aqua Sky: 10GN Black Black; 35GR Blue True/Safety Blue; 11 SF Brown Terra Cotta; 07RD Charcoal Deep Space; GR34 Dark Blue Old Glory Blue; 78BL Dark Brown Medium Bronze; 85BR Dark Gray Blackthorn; GR31 Gray Gray-ANSI 61; 33GR 104-1901 09900-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement Green Spearmint/Safety Green; 09SF Light Blue Fontainebleau; 25BL Light Brown Twine; 68BR Light Gray Light Gray; 32GR Light Green Misty Jade; GB38 Olive Clover; 110GN Orange Tangerine/Safety Orange; 04SF Red Candy Apple/Safety Red; 06SF White White; 11 WH Yellow Lemon/Safety Yellow; 02SF 'Color designations are provided per Tnemec Company, Inc. paint color numbers and are provided as a standard of quality; equivalent colors matching these colors are acceptable. Provide with Shop Drawing submittal direct color comparisons of color numbers available from manufacturer submitted. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 I 104-1901 09900-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement b. General Color Code: Unless otherwise specified, use the following color code: TABLE 09900-B PIPELINE COLOR TABLE Pipeline Color Chlorine Solution Yellow with Red Bands Drain Dark Gray Liquid Ammonium Sulfate Yellow with Brown Bands Caustic Soda White with Orange Bands Non-potable Water Blue with Black Bands Potable Water Light Blue Surface Water Light Blue Groundwater Light Brown Disinfected Groundwater Light Blue c. Color of final coats shall match as closely as possible, without custom blending, color tabulated for specific pipeline service. d. Where bands are used, they shall be placed along the pipe at no greater than five foot intervals. ® 4. After approval by ENGINEER of colors and Shop Drawings and prior to commencing painting Work, ENGINEER will furnish color schedules for surfaces to be painted. F. Abbreviations and Symbols: 1. Abbreviations and symbols used in painting systems are explained in Article 2.2 of this Section and provide information on generic composition of required materials, manufacturers, number of coats and dry mil film thickness per coat (DMFTPC), and coverage for determining required number of gallons for the Work. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A13.1, Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ANSI Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 3. ANSI/NSF Standard 60, Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. 4. ANSI/NSF Standard 61, Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. 5. ASTM D16, Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials and Applications. 6. ASTM D2200, Pictoral Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces. 7. ASTM D4258, Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 8. ASTM D4259, Practice for Abrading Concrete. 9. ASTM D4262, Testing Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. 10. ASTM D4263, Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 104-1901 09900-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 11. ASTM D4417, Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel. 12. ASTM D4541, Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion-Testers. 13. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 14. AWWA C652, Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities. 15. AWWA D102, Coating Steel Water-Storage Tanks. 16. Green Seal, Inc. Paint, (GS-11). 17. Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board of Public Health and Environmental Managers (GLUMRB) Recommended Standards for Water Works. 18. National Association of Piping Fabricators, NAPF 500-03, Surface Preparation Standard For Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings And/or Special Internal Linings. 19. Ozone Transport Commission, (OTC), OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. 20. SSPC PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 21. SSPC SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. 22. SSPC SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. 23. SSPC SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 24. SSPC SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning. 25. SSPC SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning To Bare Metal. 26. SSPC VIS 1, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. 27. SSPC VIS 2, Method of Evaluating Degree of Rusting/Painted Steel Surfaces. 28. SSPC Volume 2, Systems and Specifications. 29. Texas Administrative Code §290.42, Water Treatment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section, including: 1. Paint: Pretreatment and all painting system materials, such as primer, emulsion, enamel, organic/inorganic polymer coating, stain sealer and filler, and other applied materials whether used as prime, filler, intermediate, or finish coats. 2. Exposed: All items not covered with cement plaster, concrete, or fireproofing. Items covered with these materials shall be provided with specified primer only, except where specified as a surface not to be painted. Exposed-to-view surfaces include areas visible after permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, ceiling tile, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar covering products are in areas scheduled to be painted. 3. Low VOC: All interior and exterior field-applied coatings that have maximum VOC content as listed in OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. 4. OTC: Ozone Transport Commission, which recommends standard VOC content levels in several Northeastern and Mid-Atlantic states. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 104-1901 09900-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (10 1. Engage a single applicator that regularly performs installation of paint materials, with documented skill and successful experience in installing types of products required and that agrees to employ only trained, skilled tradesmen who have successful experience in installing types of products specified. 2. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with following information for at least three successful, completed projects: a. Names and telephone numbers of owner and design professional responsible for project. b. Approximate contract cost of paint products. c. Amount of area painted. 3. Submit to ENGINEER proof of acceptability of applicator by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Provide an independent testing agency for testing specified in this Section. Testing agency shall be selected by OWNER and paid for by CONTRACTOR. When requested, submit documentation demonstrating to satisfaction of ENGINEER, that testing agency has experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct testing required without delaying the Work, in accordance with ASTM E329. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Obtain materials from manufacturers that will provide services of a qualified manufacturer's representative at Site at commencement of painting Work, to advise on products, mock-ups, installation, and finishing techniques and, at completion of Work, to advise ENGINEER on acceptability of completed Work and ® during the course of the Work as may be requested by ENGINEER. 2. Certify long-term compatibility of all coatings with surfaces. 3. Do not submit products that decrease number of coats, surface preparation, or generic type and formulation of coatings specified. Products exceeding VOC limits and chemical content specified will not be approved. 4. ENGINEER may review manufacturers' recommendations concerning methods of installation and number of coats of paint for each painting system. CONTRACTOR shall prepare construction costs based on painting systems, number of coats, coverage and installation methods specified. 5. Submit"or equal" products, when proposed, with direct comparison to products specified, including information on durability, adhesion, color and gloss retention, percent solids, VOC's grams per liter, and recoatability after curing. 6. "Or equal" manufacturers shall furnish same color selection as manufacturers specified, including intense chroma and custom pigmented colors in all painting systems. 7. Color Pigments: Provide pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit surfaces and services to be painted. Comply with: a. Lead and Chromate: Lead and chromate content shall not exceed amount permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Manufacturer shall identify colors that meet the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site for use in locations subject to contact with potable water or water being prepared for use as potable water. 8. Obtain each product from one manufacturer. Multiple manufacturing sources for the same system component are unacceptable. I co, 104-1901 09900-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. A City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 9. Certify product shelf life history for each product source for materials manufactured by the same manufacturer, but purchased and stored at different locations or obtained from different sources. 10. Constantly store materials to be used for painting Work between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F, and per paint manufacturer's written recommendations, for not more than six months. Certify to ENGINEER that painting materials have been manufactured within six months of installation and have not, nor will be, subjected to freezing temperatures. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Painting systems for surfaces in contact with potable water, or water being treated for potable use, shall not impart any taste or odor to the water or result in any organic or inorganic content in excess of the maximum allowable contaminant level established by authorities having jurisdiction at Site. Such painting systems shall be approved by the regulatory agency. Revise painting systems specified herein to provide manufacturer's regulatory agency approved painting system(s) where required. 2. Comply with VOC content limits of OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings: a. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 340 grams per liter. b. Interior and Exterior Non-Flat Coatings: 250 grams per liter. 3. Comply with the following: a. 29 CFR 1910.144, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. b. 40 CFR, Subpart D-2001, National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. c. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA). d. SW-846, Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). 4. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction at Site for blast cleaning, confined space entry, and disposition of spent abrasive and debris. E. Pre-painting Conference: 1. Prior to installing painting systems, arrange a meeting at Site with painting applicator and its foreman, paint manufacturer's technical representative, installers of other work in and around painting that must follow painting Work, ENGINEER, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of painting Work. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements and disagreements and furnish a copy of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures relating to painting Work including: a. Review Project requirements including Contract Documents, approved Shop Drawings, pending and approved Change Orders, requests for information that submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER, and other pertinent documents. b. Review required samples and submittals, both completed and to be completed. c. Review status of surfaces including drying, surface preparations, and similar considerations. d. Review availability of materials, tradesmen, equipment, and facilities required for progress, to avoid delays, and to protect Work from damage. e. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and quality control procedures. 104-1901 09900-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (by f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. Supplemental heating sources required to for working in low-temperature conditions, shall be operating and acceptable to paint applicator and ENGINEER. g. Review methods for complying with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction at Site, such as compliance with environmental protection, health, safety, fire, and similar regulations. h. Review laws and procedures covering removal and disposal of blast debris. 2. Reconvene meeting at earliest opportunity if additional information must be developed to conclude the required topics of the meeting. 3. Record revisions or changes agreed upon, reasons therefore, and parties agreeing or disagreeing with them. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's technical information and test performance data, including paint analysis, VOC and chemical component content in comparison to maximum allowed by the Contact Documents, and application instructions for each product proposed for use. b. Submit proof of acceptability of proposed application techniques by paint manufacturer selected. ® c. Copies of CONTRACTOR's proposed protection procedures in each area of the Work explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption, and for maintaining acceptable application, curing, and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. d. List each material and cross-reference to the specific painting system and application, including a list of site-specific surfaces to which painting system will be applied. Identify by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. State number of gallons of each product being purchased for delivery to Site and square foot area calculated to be covered by each painting system specified based on theoretical loss of 20 percent. Where actual area to be covered by paint system exceeds area submitted to ENGINEER for that system, proof of additional material purchase shall be provided to ENGINEER. Calculated coverage shall be as specified for each component of each painting system specified. This requirement does not take precedence over CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide dry film thickness required for each component of each painting system. e. Identify maximum exposure times allowable for each paint system component before next coat of paint can be applied. Submit proposed methods for preparing surfaces for subsequent coats if maximum exposure times are exceeded. f. Information on curing times and environmental conditions that affect curing time of each paint system component and proposed methods for accommodating variations in curing time. Identify this information for each painting system in the Work. 104-1901 09900-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement g. Specification for spray equipment with cross-reference to paint manufacturer's recommended equipment requirements. 2. Samples: a. Copies of manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system. b. Mock-ups specified for the Site. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certificate from paint manufacturer stating that materials meet or exceed Contract Documents requirements. b. Evidence of shelf life history for all products verifying compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. c. CONTRACTOR shall provide notarized statement verifying that all painting systems are compatible with surfaces specified. All painting systems components shall be reviewed by an authorized technical representative of paint manufacturer for use as a compatible system. Verify that all painting systems are acceptable for exposures specified and that paint manufacturer is in agreement that selected systems are proper, compatible, and are not in conflict with paint manufacturer's recommended specifications. Show by copy of transmittal form that a copy of letter has been transmitted to paint applicator. 2. Test Reports: a. Certified laboratory test reports for required performance and analysis testing in compliance with ASTM E329. b. Adhesion testing plan and procedures. c. Results of adhesion testing on existing surfaces containing paints or other coatings to be topcoated with paint systems specified. Prior to adhesion testing, submit a testing plan establishing methods, procedures and number of tests in each area where existing coatings are to remain and become substrate for painting Work. Based on results of adhesion testing, recommend methods, procedures, and painting system modifications, if necessary, for proceeding with Work. d. Locations of and test methods for soil sampling before beginning Work and after Substantial Completion. e. Proposed methods for testing, handling, and disposal of waste generated during Work. f. Results of alkalinity and moisture content tests performed in accordance with ASTM D4262 and ASTM D4263. g. Results of tests of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide paint manufacturer's storage, handling, and application instructions prior to commencing painting Work at Site. 4. Manufacturer's Site Reports: Provide report of paint manufacturer's representative for each visit to Site by paint manufacturer's representative. 5. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Proposed protection procedures for each area of Work, explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption. b. Site-specific health and safety plan. 104-1901 09900-10 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement c. Procedures for maintaining acceptable application, curing and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. d. Procedures for providing adequate lighting, ventilation, and personal protection equipment relative to painting Work. 6. Qualifications: a. Applicator. b. Testing laboratory C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the painting Work, furnish ENGINEER five copies of detailed maintenance manual including the following information: a. Complete and updated product catalog of paint manufacturer's currently available products including complete technical information on each product. Identify product names and numbers of each product used in the painting Work. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer, local distributor, applicator and technical representative. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. 2. Statement of Application: Upon completion of the painting Work, submit a notarized statement to ENGINEER signed by CONTRACTOR and painting applicator stating that Work complies with requirements of the Contract Documents and that application methods, equipment, and environmental conditions were proper and adequate for conditions of installation and use. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery Requirements: Deliver products to Site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers, accurately and legibly and accurately labeled with the following: 1. Container contents, including name and generic description of product. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer's name. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Grams per liter of volatile organic compounds. 6. Thinning instructions, where recommended. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Product Storage Requirements: 1. Store acceptable materials at Site. 2. Store in an environmentally controlled location as recommended in paint manufacturer's written product information. Keep area clean and accessible. Prevent freezing of products. 3. Store products that are not in actual use in tightly covered containers. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. 104-1901 09900-11 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement C. Product Handling Requirements: 1. Handle products in a manner that minimizes the potential for contamination, or incorrect product catalyzation. 2. Do not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory work has been completed and approved by ENGINEER and painting Work will start immediately. 3. Maintain containers used in storing, mixing, and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Facilities: 1. Supplemental heat sources, as required to maintain both ambient and surface temperatures within range recommended by paint manufacturer for paint system application, are not available at Site. 2. Provision of supplemental heat energy sources, power, equipment, and operating, maintenance and temperature monitoring personnel is responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 3. Do not use heat sources that emit carbon dioxide or carbon monoxide into areas being painted. Properly locate and vent such heat sources to exterior such that paint systems are unaffected by exhaust. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Existing surfaces to receive painting Work shall be surface-prepared to meet requirements of painting systems specified. Prior to commencing painting Work, perform adhesion tests on existing surfaces to be painted. Perform testing per ASTM D4541 or other method acceptable to ENGINEER. Number and location of tests shall be sufficient to determine condition of existing coatings and suitability of existing coatings to remain to provide acceptable substrate for new coatings. Submit testing plan prior to testing and provide ENGINEER a copy of adhesion test results. 2. Provide abrasive blasting, scraping, or other abrading or surface film removal, or preparatory techniques accepted by ENGINEER. 3. Before commencing painting in an area, surfaces to be painted and floors shall be cleaned of dust using commercial vacuum cleaning equipment equipped with high- efficiency particulate air (NEPA) filters and dust containment systems. C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply water-base paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's published instructions. 2. Surfaces to be painted shall be at least 5 degrees F above dew point temperature and be dry to the touch. Apply paint only when temperature of surfaces to be painted, paint products, and ambient air temperatures are between 65 degrees F and 95 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's published instructions. 3. Apply paint system within shortest possible time consistent with manufacturer's recommended curing instructions for each coat. If chemical, salt, or other 104-1901 09900-12 KIT Professionals. Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement tipf contamination contacts paint film between coats, remove contamination per SSPC SP 1 and restore surface before applying paint. 4. Do not paint tanks or pipelines containing fluid without specific permission of ENGINEER and only under conditions where "sweating" of outside surface of vessel being painted is not likely to occur within 24 hours of paint application. 5. Do not apply epoxy paints if ambient temperature is expected to go below 50 degrees F within twelve hours of application. Follow manufacturer's instructions when manufacturer's published recommendations require a higher minimum ambient temperature. 6. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces or when surfaces will reach dew point due to falling or rising temperatures and humidity conditions during course of paint application, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's published instructions. 7. Do not paint unacceptably hot or cold surfaces until such surfaces can be maintained within temperature and dew point ranges acceptable to paint manufacturer. Arrange for surfaces to be brought within acceptable temperature and dew point ranges as part of painting Work. 8. Moisture content of surfaces shall be verified to ENGINEER as acceptable prior to commencement of painting using methods recommended by paint manufacturer. 9. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer for application and drying. • 10. Provide adequate illumination and ventilation where painting operations are in progress. D. Protection: 1. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not being painted concurrently, or not to be painted. 2. During surface preparation and painting, facility shall remain in operation. Use procedures that prevent contamination of process or cause or require facility shutdown. 3. Coordinate and schedule surface preparation and painting to avoid exposing personnel to hazards associated with painting Work. Provide required personnel safety equipment per requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. 4. Submit protection procedures to be employed. Do not begin surface preparation and painting Work until ENGINEER accepts protection techniques proposed by CONTRACTOR. 5. When working with flammable materials, provide fire extinguishers and post temporary signs warning against smoking and open flame. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and store an additional one percent by volume of all coatings and colors installed. Provide a minimum of one gallon of each coating and color. Store in unopened containers as specified until turned over to OWNER. 104-1901 09900-13 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINTING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Where referenced under painting systems provide products manufactured by the following: 1. Tnemec Company, Inc. (TCI). 2. The Carboline Company, part of StonCor Group, an RMP Company (TCC). 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (SWC). 4. Benjamin Moore & Company (BMC). 5. ICI Paints (ICI). 6. Righter Group Inc. (RGI) 7. Duron Inc. (DI) 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS A. New and Existing Ferrous Metals, Structural Steel (With or Without Sprayed Fireproofing), Miscellaneous Ferrous Metals, Exterior Surfaces of Valves, Exterior Surfaces of Ferrous Piping, and Exterior Surfaces of All Ferrous Metal (Both Exposed and to be Later Covered With Insulation); Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.C.1., 3.2.C.2. 2. Shop Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy or polyamido-amine epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Macropoxy HS Epoxy (SWC): One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 3. Field Primer and Touch-Up: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 100 percent volume solids, high-build, two-component, polyamide-catalyzed epoxy; 8 grams per gallon VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 165 Epoxoline 100 (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Cor-Cote HP (SWC): One coat, 8.0 to 12.0 dry mils. 4. Finish: High-Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 80 percent volume solids, high-build, chemical-resistant, high- gloss, modified, polyamine- or polyamidoamine-catalyzed epoxy finish; 25 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 280 Tneme-Glaze (TCI); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Cor-Cote HP (SWC): a) Horizontal Surfaces: One coat, 6.0 to 12.0 dry mils. b) Vertical Surfaces: One coat, 4.0 to 8.0 dry mils. B. New and Existing Ferrous Metals, Interior Surfaces of Potable Water Storage Reservoirs, vertical lineshaft pump columns inside suction barrels, interior surfaces of 104-1901 09900-14 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement valves, and any other surface in contact with potable water or water that is going to be treated to become potable, at Ambient Temperatures, Galvanized Metals and Non- Ferrous Metals and Exterior Surfaces of Piping; Submerged and Intermittently Submerged, including up to 4.0 feet above liquid surface; Certified per ANSI/NSF Standard 61; Low VOC Content: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.0.1., 3.2.C.2., 3.2.D. and 3.2.E. 2. Prime/Finish: Semi-Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 100 percent solids, modified polyamine epoxy or flake-filled epoxy; 8 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 22 Pota-Pox 100 (TCI); Plastite 140 S (TCC); Dura-Plate UHS NSF (SWC): Two coats, 8.0 to 10.0 dry mils, per coat. C. New and Existing Ferrous Metals, Non-Ferrous Metals, and Galvanized Metals, including Water Storage Tanks; Low VOC Content, Non-Submerged, Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.0.1., 3.2.C.2., 3.2.D., 3.2.E., and 3.2.F. 2. Ferrous Metal Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. ® b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series V69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (T0I); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Macropoxy HS (SWC): One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 3. Ferrous Metal Touch-Up: a. Generic Components: 1) For Low-temperature Curing Conditions: Minimum 80 percent solids, modified polyamido-amine or polyamine epoxy; 296 grams per liter VOC, maximum. 2) For Warm-temperature Curing Conditions: Minimum 80 percent volume solids, modified polyamido-amine or polyamine epoxy; 296 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) For Low-temperature Curing Conditions: Series 136, Chembuild FC (T0I); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Macropoxy HS Epoxy (SWC): One coat, 10.0 dry mils. 2) For Warm-temperature Curing Conditions: Series 166 Epoxoline HS (TCI); Carboguard 1207 HB (TCC); Macropoxy HS Epoxy (SWC): One coat, 6.0 dry mils. 4. Galvanized and Non-Ferrous Primer. a. Generic Components: 1) Refer to Paragraph 2.2.R.2.a.1), above. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Refer to Paragraph 2.2.R.2.b.1), above. 5. Intermediate — Ferrous Metals Only: a. Generic Components: 1) Refer to Paragraph 2.2.R.3.a.1), above. 104-1901 09900-15 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Refer to Paragraph 2.2.R.3.b.1), above. 6. Finish: Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 49 percent volume solids, two-component, waterborne acrylic polyurethane or aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating; 247 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 1080 Endura-Shield WB (TCI); Carbothane 134 VOC (TCC); Centurion WB Urethane (SWC): Two coats, 2.0 to 3.0 dry mils. D New and Existing Dissimilar Metals in Contact: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A. and 3.2.D. 2. Primer/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 100 percent volume solids, high-build, two-component, polyamido-amine or polyamine epoxy; 49 grams per gallon VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 165 Epoxoline 100 (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Dura-Plate UHS (SWC): Two coats, 8.0 to 15.0 dry mils, per coat. E. New and Existing PVC and CPVC Piping and Fiberglass; Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A. and 3.2.F. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 37 percent volume solids single-component, self-cross linking acrylic primer-sealer; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 115 Uni-Bond DF (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 3. Finish: Satin: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 37 percent volume solids, single component, self-cross linking acrylic; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 116 Uni-Bond (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. F. New and Existing Exterior Surfaces of Steel Pipe; Buried Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.C.1., and 3.2.E. 2. Primer/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1) Minimum 75 percent volume solids, build, coal tar polyamide epoxy coating; 330 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1) Series 46 Hi-Build H-413 Tneme-Tar(TCI); Bitumastic 300M (TCC); Targuard (SWC): Two coats, 9.0 dry mils, per coat. 104-1901 09900-16 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement G. New and Existing Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron Process Pipe; Buried Exterior: 1. Refer to Section 15062, Ductile Iron Process Pipe. 2.03 INSTRUMENTS A. Instruments: 1. Provide one new dry-film thickness gauge for checking film thickness, one holiday detector to detect holidays or holes in the coating, and one set of visual standards to check surface preparation. Calibrate dry film thickness gauge at Site using Bureau of Standards standard shim blocks. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide the following: a. Film Thickness Testers: Model FM-III manufactured by Mikrotest, or equal. b. Holiday detector shall be Model M-1 as manufactured by Tinker& Rasor, or equal. c. Visual Standards: ASTM D2200, Swedish Standards, SSPC VIS 1. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which painting Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. 41110 Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film capable of performing in accordance with claims made in paint manufacturer's product literature for surfaces and conditions encountered. C. Do not paint over existing paint where there is no assurance that existing paint will provide an acceptable surface for long-term adherence and durability of painting systems specified or where paint manufacturer requires removal of all existing paint to recommend use of specified painting system. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Test for moisture content of surfaces before commencement of painting Work. Test for moisture in concrete in compliance with ASTM D4263. Report results to ENGINEER before commencing Work. 2. Prepare existing surfaces to be painted as specified for new surfaces. Submit substitute methods of preparing existing surfaces, when proposed, with Shop Drawing submittal. ENGINEER's acceptance of substitute surface preparation methods does not relieve CONTRACTOR of performance required under the Contract Documents. To provide surfaces acceptable for application of painting system specified: 104-1901 09900-17 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement a. Clean and roughen surfaces of existing paint and other decorative or protective toppings on surfaces to remain that are to receive a painting system under this Section. b. Where existing surfaces to be painted have corrosion, peeling paint, or unacceptably adhering coatings, remove all topcoats, primers, and intermediate coats of paint, and other protective or decorative coatings. 3. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures as specified herein and in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's approved instructions for each surface and atmospheric condition. 4. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items already in place that do not require field painting, or provide effective surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. 5. Remove as necessary items that must be field-painted where adjacent surfaces cannot be completely protected from splatter or overspray. Following completion of painting of each space or area, the removed items shall be reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 6. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying painting system components. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. 7. Prepare surfaces that were improperly shop-painted and abraded or rusted shop- painted surfaces as specified. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Ferrous Metals Except Ductile and Cast Iron: a. Comply with paint manufacturer's recommendations for type and size of abrasive to provide a surface profile that meets manufacturer's painting system requirements for type, function, and location of surface. Verify that paint manufacturer-recommended profiles have been achieved on prepared surfaces. Report profiles to ENGINEER using Test Method C of ASTM D4417. b. Clean non-submerged ferrous surfaces including structural steel and miscellaneous metal to be shop-primed, of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by commercial blast cleaning complying with SSPC SP 6 at time of paint system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. c. Clean submerged ferrous surfaces including structural steel and miscellaneous metal to be shop-primed of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by near-white blasting complying with SSPC SP 10 at time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. d. Clean non-submerged, ferrous surfaces that have not been shop-coated of all oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other contamination by commercial blasting complying with SSPC SP 6 at the time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. e. Clean submerged ferrous surfaces that have not been shop-coated or that have been improperly shop-coated of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by near-white blasting complying with SSPC SP 10 at time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. 104-1901 09900-18 KIT Professionals. Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4 f. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats that have damaged or have bare areas with primer recommended by paint manufacturer after commercial blasting complying with SSPC SP 6 at the time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison, to provide a surface profile of not less than one mil. g. Power tool-clean per SSPC SP 3 to remove welding splatter and slag. h. Remove all rust and contamination on existing ferrous metals to sound surfaces by power tool-cleaning complying with SSPC SP 11 to provide a surface profile of not less than one mil. i. Cleaning: Clean tank to remove sediment and coarse debris, including aluminum or magnesium anode rods, from tank floor and other horizontal surfaces. Sediment and debris shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 2. Ductile and Cast Iron: a. Comply with paint manufacturer's recommendations and NAPF 500-03 for type and size of abrasive to provide a surface profile meeting paint manufacturer's requirements for type, function and location of surface. Verify that paint manufacturer-recommended profiles are achieved on prepared surfaces. b. Clean submerged and non-submerged ductile and cast iron surfaces to be shop-primed of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by solvent cleaning and abrasive blasting complying with NAPF 500-03-01, ® NAPF 500-03-04, and NAPF 500-03-05 at time of paint system application. c. Clean submerged ductile and cast iron that have not been shop-coated or that have been improperly shop-coated of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by solvent cleaning and abrasive blasting complying with NAPF 500-03-01, NAPF 500-03-04, and NAPF 500-03-05 at time of paint system application. d. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats that are damaged or have bare areas with primer recommended by paint manufacturer, after power tooling complying with NAPF 500-03 at the time of painting system application. e. Remove all contamination on existing ductile and cast iron to sound surfaces by power tool cleaning complying with NAPF 500-03-03. D. Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Prepare non-ferrous metal surfaces for painting by light whip blasting or by lightly sanding with 60-to 80-mesh sandpaper. E. Galvanized (Zinc-Coated) Surfaces: Prepare galvanized surfaces for painting by lightly sanding with 60-to 80-mesh sandpaper or by light whip blasting. F. PVC and CPVC Piping and Fiberglass: Lightly sand and clean surfaces to be painted. Fiberglass surfaces shall be prepared by solvent washing to remove wax and other contaminants, before abrading surfaces with 60- to 80-mesh sandpaper to provide an anchor pattern with scratches no further apart than 1/16-inch. 411P'' 104-1901 09900-19 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.03 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND STRUCTURES A. Protect property and structures adjacent to the Work from waste residues resulting from cleaning, surface preparation and paint application. B. Use shrouding, vacuum blasting, or other approved methods for cleaning and surface preparation of exterior surfaces. C. During blast cleaning and surface preparation of interior and exterior surfaces, control discharge of dust and grit, using shrouding, negative-pressure containment/dust collection systems, or other means to protect adjacent property and structures and prevent dust/grit from escaping. Similarly control removal and temporary storage of residues to protect adjacent property and structures. D. For painting of exterior surfaces, use rollers, shrouding or other approved methods as required to protect adjacent property and structures from wind-blown paint residues. E. Submit proposed procedures for cleaning, surface preparation and paint application describing methods for protecting adjacent property and structures from residues. Do not proceed with cleaning, surface preparation or painting until proposed procedures are approved by ENGINEER. 3.04 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. General: 1. Mix and prepare paint products in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's product literature. 2. Do not mix painting materials produced by different manufacturers, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's instructions. 3. Where thinners are required, they shall be produced by paint system manufacturer unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's product literature and submitted to and accepted by ENGINEER with Shop Drawings. B. Tinting: 1. Where multiple coats of the same material are to be provided, tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat of paint. 2. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat of paint, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. Provide a code number to identify material tinted by manufacturer. C. Mixing: 1. For products requiring constant agitation, use methods in compliance with manufacturer's product literature to prevent settling during paint application. 2. Mix in containers placed in suitably sized non-ferrous or oxide resistant metal pans to protect floors from slashes or spills that could stain the floor or react with subsequent finish floor material. 3. Mix and apply paint in containers bearing accurate product name of material being mixed or applied. ',Ng) 104-1901 09900-20 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement flar, 4. Stir products before application to produce a mixture of uniform density and as required during the application. Do not stir into the product film that forms on surface; instead, remove film and, if necessary, strain product before using. 5. Strain products requiring such mixing procedures. After adjusting mixer speed to break up lumps and after components are thoroughly blended, strain through 35 to 50-mesh screen before application. 3.05 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint systems by brush, roller, or airless spray per manufacturer's recommendations and in compliance with Paint Application Specifications No. 1 in SSPC Volume 2, where applicable. Use brushes best suited for type of paint applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheeps wool as recommended by paint manufacturer for product and texture required. Use air spray and airless spray equipment recommended by paint manufacturer for specific painting systems specified. Submit a list of application methods proposed, listing paint systems and location. 2. Paint dry film thicknesses required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has completely dried. 3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is uniform finish, color, and appearance, particularly for intense chroma primary colors. Ensure that surfaces, including • edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Paint backs of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Paint parts in contact with dissimilar metals with specified paint system. 6. Paint tops, bottoms, and side edges of doors the same as exterior surfaces. 7. Omit field-applied primer on metal surfaces that have been primed in the shop. Touch-up paint shop-primed coats and pre-finished items only when approved by ENGINEER using compatible primers and manufacturer's recommended compatible field-applied finishes. 8. Welds shall be stripe-coated with intermediate or finish coat of paint after application of prime coat. 9. Paint steel water storage tanks per AWWA D102. B. Minimum/Maximum Paint Film Thickness: 1. Apply each product at not less than, nor more than, manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, and provide total dry film thickness as specified. 2. Apply additional coats of paint if required to obtain specified total dry film thickness. 3. Maximum dry film thickness shall not exceed 100 percent of minimum dry film thickness, except where more stringent limitations are recommended by paint manufacturer for a specific product. 104-1901 09900-21 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement C. Scheduling Surface Preparation and Painting: 1. As soon as practical after preparation, apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting. Apply first-coat material before subsequent surface deterioration due to atmospheric conditions existing at time of surface preparation and painting. Surfaces that have started to rust before first-coat application is complete shall be brought back to required standard by abrasive blasting. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion to undercoat. 3. Scarify primers and other painting system components by brush-blasting if paint has been exposed for lengths of time or under conditions beyond manufacturer's written recommendations for painting systems required, intended use, or method of application proposed for subsequent coats of paint. 4. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from cleaning process do not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Prime Coats: Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing. E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. F. Brush Application: 1. Brush out and work all brush coats onto surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections are unacceptable. Neatly draw all glass and color break lines. 2. Brush-apply primer or first coats, unless otherwise permitted to use mechanical applicators. G. Mechanical Applicators: 1. Use mechanical methods for paint application when permitted by governing ordinances, manufacturer, and approved by ENGINEER. 2. Limit roller applications, if approved by ENGINEER, to interior wall finishes for second and third coats. Apply each roller coat to provide the equivalent hiding as brush-applied coats. 3. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment for purpose of building up film thickness of multiple coats in one pass. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint Work not in compliance with specified requirements as required by ENGINEER. 104-1901 09900-22 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ,, 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ENGINEER may invoke the following material testing procedure at any time for a maximum of five times during field painting Work: 1. CONTRACTOR shall engage service of an independent testing laboratory to sample paints used, as designated by ENGINEER. Samples of products delivered to Site shall be obtained, identified, sealed, and certified as to being products actually applied to surfaces in each area, in presence of CONTRACTOR. 2. A testing laboratory selected by OWNER and paid for by CONTRACTOR shall perform appropriate tests for any or all of the following: a. Abrasion resistance. b. Apparent reflectivity. c. Flexibility. d. Washability. e. Absorption. f. Accelerated weathering. g. Dry opacity. h. Accelerated yellowness. i. Recoating. j. Skinning. k. Color retention. I. Alkali resistance. m. Quantitative materials analysis. • 3. If test results show that products being used do not comply with specified requirements, CONTRACTOR may be directed to stop painting Work and remove non-complying paint, and shall prepare and repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint with material complying with the Contract Documents. B. Notify ENGINEER after completing each coat of paint. After inspection and checking of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections, and after acceptance by ENGINEER, proceed with succeeding coat. Perform testing using testing instruments specified in Article 2.4 of this Section. 1. ENGINEER will witness all testing and shall be notified of scheduled testing at least twenty-four hours in advance. 2. Apply additional coats, if required, to produce specified film thickness and to correct holidays and to completely fill all surface air holes. C. For magnetic substrates, measure thickness of dry film nonmagnetic coatings following recommendations of SSPC PA-2. These procedures supplement manufacturers' approved instructions for manual operation of measurement gauges and do not replace such instructions. D. Record time, location, number of coats, dry film thickness, holidays, and other imperfections and submit testing results to ENGINEER. • 104-1901 09900-23 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.07 MISCELLANEOUS TANK REHABILITATION A. Sealant Replacement: Remove all existing sealant material between tank bottom and concrete ring wall foundation. Thoroughly wet space between bottom of tank and top of wall and provide 1-inch thick cane fiber filler. Seal entire outer edge of tank bottom to ring wall with a 1/2-inch width of two-compartment polysulfide compound. B. Provide new rubber gaskets and Type 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts for access hatches. Remove and dispose of old nuts, bolts, and gaskets. New gasketing system shall prevent leakage from tank through access hatch. C. Seal existing cathodic protection system manhole covers to tank roof using an NSF 61- approved sealant product. Covers and sealant shall prevent entrance of water into tank. 3.08 DISINFECTION A. Disinfection shall conform to applicable requirements of AWWA C652, except as modified below. B. After tank painting is complete and interior surfaces thoroughly dried, remove all visible dirt and contaminating materials. Disinfect interior of tank by spraying all surfaces, including underside of roof and roof support members, with a chlorine solution measuring at least 200 mg/L chlorine. Chlorine solution shall remain in contact with surfaces for at least thirty minutes. Provide a sterile environment inside tank. After spray-disinfection, flush tank contents to drain by spraying disinfected surfaces with potable water for at least ten minutes, then fill tank to result in overflow for another ten minutes, after which samples for bacteriological testing will be obtained by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper disinfection until successful bacteriological testing results are achieved. C. Water for initial disinfection and filling will be furnished by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide pumps, hoses, and other temporary equipment required to fill tank. CONTRACTOR shall furnish chlorine. D. First set of bacteriological testing will be paid for by OWNER. E. If tank must be emptied, re-disinfected, flushed, and refilled to obtain satisfactory bacteriological samples, or because of extensive leakage, CONTRACTOR shall pay for additional chlorine, re-testing, and water at the utility owner's standard rates. F. Water VOC Concentration Testing: 1. After tank has filled and allowed to stand for twenty-four hours, OWNER will provide one set of water samples for testing for total volatile organic compounds per EPA Method 524.2 and bacteriological levels to confirm acceptability of water with applicable drinking water standards. 2. If a sample does not meet applicable requirements, CONTRACTOR shall drain tank and allow the paint system to further cure. CONTRACTOR shall pay costs for additional refilling, testing, and disposal of water necessary to achieve compliance with applicable drinking water standards. 104-1901 09900-24 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement Cair 3.09 PROTECTION OF NEW FINISHES A. Provide signs that read, "Wet Paint" as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary wrappings provided for protection of the Work and work of other contractors after completion of painting. 3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Correct damages to work of other trades through cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to ENGINEER. B. During progress of Work, remove from Site all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at end of each workday. C. Upon completion of painting, clean paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, while avoiding scratching or otherwise damaging finished surfaces. D. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces as determined by ENGINEER. END OF SECTION • 104-1901 09900-25 KIT Professionals, Inc. I City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CP' SECTION 09971 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and application of paints and/or protective coating materials in a safe manner with proper handling and removal and disposal of all waste materials. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT — NOT USED 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 4285, "Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air" 2. ASTM A 123, "Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip) Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Products" 3. ASTM A 153, "Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware" 4. ASTM A 385, "Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)" 5. ASTM E 376, "Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Test Methods" 6. ASTM D 4940. "Method for Conductimetric Analysis of Water Soluble Ionic Contamination of Blasting Abrasives" 7. ASTM D 4417, "Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel" B. NACE International "Book of Standards" 1. Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces Using Replica Tape: RP0287-91 2. Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings: RP0188-90 3. Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Centrifugally Blast Cleaned with Steel Grit and Shot TM0175-75 C. NACE International Publication 6A192, "Dehumidification Equipment in Lining Application" (kb 104-1901 09971-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 1, Good Painting Practice" E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specification" 1. Solvent Cleaning: SSPC-SP-1-82 2. Hand Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-2-95 3. Power Tool Cleaning: SSPC-SP-3-95 4. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: SSPC-SP-11-95 5. White Metal Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-5/NACE 1-94 6. Commercial Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-6/NACE 3-94 7. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-7/NACE 4-94 8. Near-White Blast Cleaning: SSPC-SP-10/NACE 2-94 9. Mineral and Slag Abrasives: SSPC-AB 1-91 10. Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel: SSPC-Guide to Vis 1-89 11. Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages: SSPC-PA 2 F. NSF International Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components. G. If there is a conflict between cited reference standards and this Specification, this Specification prevails unless otherwise indicated in the procurement documents. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submittals for materials and/or systems proposed for use on this project must conform to requirements included in Section 01350 — Submittals and include, but not be limited to, those items listed for each product/system below. Provide submittals to the Owner for review. A. Paint and Protective Coatings: 1. Manufacturer Technical Data Sheets for all paints, coatings, solvents, detergents, and degreasers proposed. 2. Manufacturer Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all paints, coating and thinners proposed. 3. Color name and/or number with color chart for each specific coating product. 104-1901 09971-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4. Manufacturer's statement of conformance with ANSI/NSF 61 (NSF International) requirements for use on potable water tank interior surfaces. 5. Manufacturer's specific ventilation requirements for products used on interior surfaces. Provide ventilation requirements to ensure adequate evacuation of solvents to prevent solvent entrapment, worker exposure to solvents above the OSHAPEL, and timely coating system cure. B. Abrasive Blast Products Use abrasive blast products which conform to the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)Abrasive Specification No. 1. "Mineral and Slag Abrasives", except that copper slag is not permitted. Abrasive blast product submittals to include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturer's certification or laboratory analysis that the product proposed contains less than 1% free crystalline silica. 2. Laboratory analysis of blast material presenting results of blast material testing as required in SSPC-AB 1, Table 1 requirements for Chemical and Physical Properties of Abrasives, except that the conductivity test for water soluble contaminants in accordance with ASTM D-4940 shall not exceed 500 microsiemens (micromhos). 3. Material Safety Data Sheets. 4. Composition, mesh size, and bulk density. 5. Recommended application nozzle, air requirements, and pressure. C. Containment System Include a sample or samples of containment materials including screens, tarpaulins, sheets, films, and ground covers. Include Manufacturer technical data sheets for the proposed containment system. In addition, include the following: 1. Outrigger/containment structural support system layout and details. a. For ground storage tanks, submit proposed arrangement of scaffolds and/or A-frames to support containment materials. Do not support containment from existing tank handrails or ladders. The scaffolding must be designed to support the weight of the containment materials and provide a safe working environment for workers. b. For elevated storage tanks, submit proposed layout of outrigger system, containment hoisting system, details of proposed method of connection to tank shell, list of structural members including, but not limited to, size of member, maximum allowable wind velocity before system must be lowered to prevent structural damage to the system and/or tank, method of determining wind velocity and proposed location of wind velocity measuring device. The 104-1901 09971-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement outrigger system layout must be reviewed and sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. 2. Manufacturer's technical data sheets for the proposed containment system. 3. Manufacturer's certification that proposed containment materials are fire resistant. 4. Provide a minimum shade factor for proposed containment materials of 95%, except for a minimum shade factor of containment materials used with chemical stripping agents of 85%. D. Chemical Stripping Agents - For Rehabilitation of an Existing Tank 1. Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet for the materials proposed. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 3. Proposed method of application. 4. Waste material containment and retrieval system. E. Dehumidification Equipment 1. Manufacturer and Supplier 2. Support Equipment (i.e. generator) 3. Equipment capacity, sized per NACE Publication 6A192 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COATINGS A. Painting and Coatings 1. The following paint/coating Manufacturers are known to have products of acceptable quality for this project: ACRO, Raven Lining Systems, Carboline, Sherwin - Williams, Tnemec, Valspar and Devoe (for exterior wash only). Bid based upon the use of products supplied by one of these named manufacturers. These named manufacturers are designated to establish a level of acceptable product quality or manufacturing experience and are not to be construed as the only manufactures of products acceptable for use on this project. Other manufacturers and products will be considered on an individual basis and may be submitted for consideration in accordance with Section 01630— Product Options and Substitutions, Section 01350 — Submittals, and this Section. 2. Specific products of the named manufacturers acceptable for use and to be bid for this project are contained in Table 1, "Coating Product," included in this Section. 104-1901 09971-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3. Use non-lead containing coatings which comply with all laws, regulations and ordinances of the Federal, State, and Local government including V.O.C. regulations. 4. Properly store and handle materials according to Manufacturer's requirements and in compliance with applicable government regulations. 5. Color: Generally, colors are to be as follows: a. When multiple coats are required, use coatings alternating colors. b. Use white for the interior final coat. c. Provide color chart to OWNER for final topcoat selection. 6. Obtain all coating materials and required thinners for each tank from the same single source coating Manufacturer. 7. The schedule for painting and coating for specific tanks is contained in Table 2 "Surface Preparation and Finish Schedule" included in this Section. B. Hot Dip Galvanized Surfaces 1. If specified, hot dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A 123, ASTM A 385 and/or ASTM A 153. 2. The completed galvanized sections to have a minimum of 2 ounces per square foot. Two ounces of galvanizing per square foot equals approximately 3.4 mils. 3. Estimate weight of galvanizing by use of magnetic dry film thickness gage in accordance with ASTM E 376-89. 4. Galvanizing (zinc) in contact with potable water must be NSF classified for contact with potable water. 2.02 EPDXY CAULKING A. Use flexible, NSF classified epoxy caulking for use in contact with potable water and compatible with the epoxy lining system used in the tank. B. Caulk to be 100% solids, two component, polyamine or polyamide cured. C. The coating Manufacturer and caulk material Manufacturer to confirm, in writing, that the internal epoxy coating system is compatible with the 100% solids epoxy caulk material. D. Include in the written confirmation of material compatibility, any conditions for or surface preparation requirements of the epoxy caulk material. E. An acceptable product for this Project is "Aquatapoxy A7", manufactured by Raven Lining Systems, Tulsa, Oklahoma. 41, 104-1901 09971-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2.03 CHEMICAL PAINT STRIPPER (FOR REHABILITATION OF AN EXISTING TANK) A. Use of chemical paint stripper for removal of exterior paint is allowed, if approved by the Owner and used in strict accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Propose a chemical stripping system such as "Peel Away", manufactured by Dumond Chemicals, Inc. of New York, NY, or approved equivalent. 2.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEM A. Provide a containment system which allows for the containment of the environmentally sensitive waste, dust and paint over spray that will be generated during the blasting and painting operations. B. When a tank is to be rehabilitated and the coatings to be removed contain lead, containment to conform at a minimum to the requirements of TCEQ Texas Air Control Board Regulation I, 31 TAC Chapter 111 Sections 131 through 139 and meet the performance requirements of this Specification. C. When chemical stripping agents are used, provide for containment of debris, aerosols, strippings and other emissions or releases. In addition, manage contained waste in accordance with Section 01562 —Waste Disposal and Contractor waste-handling procedure. D. Determine by the Owner, the containment system requirements, if any, for wet abrasive blast or vacuum abrasive blast, and roller applied or brush-on coatings. Use impervious ground coverage as noted in Item 2.05.F.6 at all times. E. Containment system proposed by the Contractor must assure the protection of the surrounding environment and must provide sufficient protection to meet: TCEQ Texas Air Control Board regulations for the Control of Air Pollution and Visible Emissions of Particulate Matter; Texas Water Commission regulations applicable to protection of the soil and water; and 02136 - Waste Material Handling, Testing, and Disposal of this Specification. F. Construct containment system with wind screens of a minimal shade factor as specified in Item 1.07.0 of this Section, or as required below, with no emission from edges, rips, or tears. The containment system must be designed for the purpose of containing and controlling emissions, debris and protecting the air, ground and soil from contaminants resulting from lead paint removal, surface preparation and painting operations. 1. Containment System to provide a safe working environment and provide for control of emissions as required in this Specification. 2. For rehabilitating an existing tank, employ a Containment System meeting the requirements of an SSPC Class 2 containment, per SSPC Guide 6 (CON), when lead containing paint is to be removed by abrasive blast cleaning methods. 104-1901 09971-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3. The containment materials must provide for performance which will comply with L the following: a. Protection of the environment, including air, water, and soil, from abrasive blast media, process water, dust particles and paint debris. b. Air movement within containment. c. Secure edges and seams. d. Permeable to natural lighting unless alternate lighting is to be provided. e. Tarp overlap to provide for maximum containment of spent debris. 4. Maintain the containment system free of defects through the course of the project. In the event that emissions or releases occur stop work until all defects are repaired. 5. Prior to installation, the containment system design must be submitted and reviewed by the Owner. In addition, for work on elevated water storage tanks, design the containment enclosure to be raised and lowered within 15 minutes to prevent damage to the enclosure, the tank, personnel, and excessive loading to the tank and tank appurtenances in the event of high winds and foul weather. 6. Place membranes that are impervious to the abrasive blast media, paint debris dusts, and process water on the ground around the tank to prevent contamination of the ground storm waters and surface waters due to run-off. Use chemically resistant membranes when chemical stripping is employed. Contain the debris within 30 feet of the base of the tank. • 7. Prior to any changes or modifications in the containment system during the course of the work, submit in writing and review by the Owner, proposed changes and modifications. Address the operational and technical reasons for containment modifications in the submittal. G. Eagle Industries, Reef Industries, or equivalent are acceptable suppliers. 2.05 ABRASIVE BLAST MATERIALS A. Mineral and slag abrasive materials are to conform to the requirements of the Society for Protective Coating's Abrasive Specification No. 1, SSPC-AB1. Abrasives are to be Class A, less than 1% crystalline silica. The conductivity of the abrasive (indicative of water soluble contaminants) is not to exceed 500 microsiemen (micromhos)when tested in accordance with ASTM-D4940. Prior to use, provide the Owner qualifications and conformance testing performed and documented in accordance with Section 5 of SSPC-AB1. Abrasive materials expressly prohibited from use include sand and copper slag. 104-1901 09971-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2.06 PRODUCT HANDLING DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all paints, coatings and related materials to the job site or fabrication shop in original unopened containers with the product name, type and batch number, color, and manufacture date clearly marked on each container. B. Store all materials used on the job in a single place provided by the Contractor or designated by the Owner at the job site. Comply with OSHA requirements, recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association, City Fire Codes, and Manufacturer recommendations for on-site and fabrication shop storage. C. Remove oily or solvent-soaked rags and all waste from the job site every night and take all necessary precautions to reduce fire hazards to a minimum. D. If the storage space was a fixed part of the project, leave clean upon completion of the work. Repair any damage to storage space or its surroundings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COATING OPERATION ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Tank Interior Humidity and Temperature 1. During abrasive blast cleaning and painting operations, the relative humidity of the interior air is not to exceed 50%. Measure relative humidity by a sling psychrometer or other appropriate psychometric measuring equipment. 2. Maintain the interior air temperature and surface temperature of surfaces to be coated between 50°F and 120°F and at least 5°F above the dew point or as otherwise required by the Manufacturer. (Note, that for use of Aquatapoxy, the maximum surface temperature is 100°F.) 3. Achieve the required conditions for interior air conditions through the use of dehumidification equipment. a. Submit for review by the Owner, proposed dehumidification equipment. Provide a minimum of three air changes per hour unless dehumidification equipment Manufacturer's calculations substantiate fewer air changes. b. Supply dry, fresh (not recirculated) air within 12 inches of the tank bottom from a system of duct work and blowers with the dehumidification equipment. Operate the ventilation system 24 hrs/day throughout the entire coating cure process. c. Maintain dehumidification until abrasive cleaning operations, coating operations and cure are complete, but not less than 10 days. B. Tank Exterior Humidity and Temperature 1. Do not apply a coating to wet or damp surfaces or in rain, snow, fog, or mist. 104-1901 09971-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2. Do not apply any coatings when it is expected that the ambient air temperature will 400 fall below 50°F or within 5°F of the dew point within 6 hours after application of coatings or paints. 3. Do not apply a coating when the relative humidity is above 85%, or as specified in the coating Manufacturer's product data sheet. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction with US. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. If the above conditions are exceeded, delay coating or painting operations until conditions are favorable. 4. The ambient conditions and surface temperature of the surfaces being coated must be between 50°F and 120°F and at least 5°F above the dew point in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. The maximum surface temperature during application of urethane coatings is 100°F. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Good workmanship is required for all work as defined by the latest edition of the "Manual of Good Painting Practices" published by the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), 40 24th Street, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222. B. These Specifications do not cancel or supersede the directions of the Manufacturer regarding the warranty or applicability of the product. In instances of variations between Manufacturer's recommendations and this Specification, the more stringent requirement governs. • C. The Contractor to furnish trained personnel experienced in the work to be performed. Contractor to ensure work is performed in accordance with these specification requirements including, but not limited to: surface cleanliness; anchor profile; ambient conditions; film thickness (wet and dry) and holiday detection. Provide and use such inspection instruments, gauges or other equipment as may be required to verify compliance with Manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. Assure proper operating condition and calibration of equipment and instrumentation before and after use. D. Provide tools and equipment in good working order including moisture traps in air lines to pressure pot and spray gun when air atomization is used. Set moisture trap for continuous bleed during spraying operation. Place moisture traps as close to spray gun as practical. Process air to be free from oil and moisture when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4285. E. Do not apply primer closer than 4 inches to any surface scheduled for subsequent blasting or to be field welded. F. Apply a brush stripe coat of primer, subsequent to surface preparation, but prior to full primer coat application to welds, rivets, corners, crevices, and other default to coat surfaces. 4111, 104-1901 09971-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement G. Apply all caulk and/or sealant materials smooth and continuous. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove visible deposits of oil or grease prior to surface preparation in accordance with SSPC-SP- 1 or other methods approved by the Owner, remove visible deposits of oil or grease. B. Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, remove all surface imperfections such as sharp fins, sharp edges, weld spatter, or burning slag. Grind sharp corners and edges to a smooth round edge with a radius of not less than 1/16 inch. C. Abrasive blast cleaned surfaces to meet the requirements of this specification when examined in accordance with Society for Protective Coatings "Guide to SSPC-VIS 1- 89". This applies to all exposed surfaces, including difficult to access areas (e.g. behind stiffener rings). When a tank is to be rehabilitated and the coatings to be removed contain lead, acceptable coating removal methods include wet abrasive blast cleaning, water jetting with or without abrasives, vacuum abrasive blast cleaning, and chemical stripping. Certain coating removal methods require subsequent dry abrasive blasting to achieve the specified surface preparation. Should these methods be selected, ensure that no fugitive dust escapes the containment system during dry abrasive blasting. This is to be accomplished by the use of negative air and/or dust collection systems adequately sized to effectively control dust. D. For rehabilitation of an existing tank, Moderately Pitted Surface is defined as a surface having pits less than 1/16-inch-deep with a frequency of 4 to 5 pits per square foot. Prior to application of the specified coating system, blast the pitted surface to SSPC- SP10. The first coat may be thinned (not to exceed Manufacturer's published recommendations) and applied by stiff bristle brush or roller to all pitted surfaces. E. For rehabilitation of an existing tank, Badly Pitted Surface is defined as a surface having pits greater than 1/16-inch-deep and less than 1/2 of the metal thickness with a frequency of 8-12 pits per square foot. Prior to application of the specified coating system, blast the pitted surface to SSPC-SP10. Prior to applying the specified system, fill the pits with an epoxy caulk seam sealer applied by putty knife or stiff bristle brush. F. Prior to painting, remove dust by vacuuming from all prepared interior surfaces to be coated. G. Subsequent to achieving the specified surface preparation and prior to coating application, interior wetted surfaces must be free from surface contaminants, visible and non-visible, to a level of less than 7pg/cm2 as sodium chloride. Surfaces will be tested by the Owner's laboratory for evidence of surface contaminants including soluble iron and salts such as chlorides. A minimum of one test for every 2500 square feet of shell and floor area will be performed. Ensure tank interior is dust free at the time of the test and that the surfaces to be tested are clean. H. Prepared exterior surfaces may be vacuumed or cleaned by an alternative method acceptable to the Owner. (For rehabilitation of an existing tank, note that use of 104-1901 09971-10 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement compressed air during lead paint removal operations is only allowable under full (by containment.) I. Prepared and approved surfaces must be coated before contamination, including rust bloom. Surfaces shown to be contaminated or exhibiting rust are to be recleaned to the requirements of the specifications at Contractor's expense. J. Repair abraded or otherwise damaged areas of existing paint using comparable materials and procedures, as approved by the Owner. K. Treat areas of visible mildew with an approved mildewcide, compatible with the coating system to be applied. 3.04 CHEMICAL STRIPPER (FOR REHABILITATION OF AN EXISTING TANK) A. After application of chemical stripper and prior to recoating of the exterior surface of the tank, evaluate the anchor profile and surface cleanliness. If the surface cleanliness and anchor profile meet specification requirements, recoating of the tank can be performed. If surface cleanliness and/or anchor profile do not meet the requirements of this specification, prepare the surface in the manner specified to obtain the required anchor profile and freedom from surface contaminants. B. For caustic based strippers, use pH paper to check the tank surface after removal of the chemical stripper and existing coating system. Failure to properly clean and neutralize the surface can result in an alkaline residue remaining on the tank surface. If • the surface pH is not neutral (pH of 7.0 to 7.5), flush the surface with potable water or approved neutralizing agent until a neutral surface pH is achieved. C. Notify the Owner a minimum of 48 hours in advance of the initiation of the chemical stripper removal process in order for the Owner to be present. The Manufacturer's representative is required to be on site during the initial removal process. D. Install tarpaulins or similar containment materials on the ground surface immediately under and adjacent to the area of the tank where the coating system is to be removed as described in Contractor's submittals and acceptable to the Owner. Install the tarps in a watertight manner so as to completely contain all materials and liquids from chemical stripper application, removal, neutralization and rinsing of the tank surface. Consider all resulting waste hazardous and handle as such. Extend the watertight tarps a minimum of twenty feet beyond the outer perimeter of the tank. E. Apply chemical strippers to the tank surface in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations for coverage, contact time, removal, and surface cleaning. F. For caustic based strippers, unless an inhibitor is recommended by the chemical stripper Manufacturer and acceptable to the coating Manufacturer, wash the surface after neutralization. 104-1901 09971-11 KIT Professionals, Inc. I City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.05 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coating to the standards represented in the SSPC Painting Manual, Volume 1, "Good Painting Practices" and Manufacturer's recommendations for paint application procedures. B. Use coating application equipment consistent with the coating Manufacturer's recommendations. Supply air free from oil and moisture when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4285. C. All mixing and thinning of coatings to be in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. D. Only compatible solvents recommended by the coating Manufacturer will be used for thinning and clean up. E. Strictly adhere to the re-coat intervals recommended and supplied by the coating Manufacturer. F. Do not coat any cleaned surface if"rust bloom" or recontamination has occurred. The Owner to approve cleaned surfaces prior to application of coating. G. The Owner spot checks surfaces to ensure conformance. At Contractor's expense, re- prepare surfaces not found to meet specifications. H. All painted surfaces to be free from all dust, dirt, and contamination before succeeding coats are applied. The Owner to approve each coat of paint before succeeding coats are applied. I. All environmental (ambient) conditions to satisfy Manufacturer's recommendations before coatings are applied. J. All coats to be free of runs, drips, sags and holidays or other discontinuities. The finish is to be uniform. K. Dry film thicknesses of all coats to conform to minimum and/or maximum thicknesses required by these specifications. Measure all dry film thicknesses in strict accordance with SSPC-PA2. L. Interior— Prior to application of primer and prior to application of intermediate coat, brush stripe coat all welds, rivets, corners, edges, crevices, and uniformly pitted surfaces. Brush stripe coat rough pits, depressions, and crevices to work in coatings. Do not thin stripe coats in excess of that recommended by the Manufacturer. For rehabilitation of an existing tank: 1. Fill weld "deep pits" and grind flush at the direction of the Owner. Payment to be at the unit price bid for"Extra 6-inch Diameter Floor Patches". 104-1901 09971-12 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2. Moderately and badly pitted surfaces may exceed specified limits on the anchor (lbr profile. The primer coat dry film thickness must be sufficient to adequately cover the anchor profile. M. Exterior - All welds, rivets, corners, edges, and irregular surfaces are to be stripe coated as part of the first coat application. Brush stripe coat pits, depressions, and crevices to work in coating. Apply coating by brush or roller, using Manufacturers' recommended thinner (if applicable) for the application method selected. NO SPRAY PAINTING ON EXTERIOR SURFACES AT TANK SITES WILL BE PERMITTED WITHOUT THE USE OF CONTAINMENT SCREENS AND APPROVAL OF OWNER. N. When more than one coat is to be applied, each coat should have a distinguishable color from the preceding and following coats. Note that stripe coating is considered to be part of the first coat application. O. Exterior surface preparation and priming of all metal tank appurtenances to be in accordance with this specification. Intermediate and finish coatings to be the same as those of adjacent surfaces. P. Pipe and Fittings 1. For elevated tanks, prepare the external surface of new and existing piping and fittings within the "dry" tank pedestal with the same surface preparation and coating system as the interior of the tank pedestal. 2. Prepare new above ground piping and fittings with the same surface preparation and coating system as specified for tank exterior. 3. Prepare existing above ground piping and fittings connected directly to the tank with the same surface preparation and coating system as specified for tank exterior. Limit this to exposed portions of piping at inlets/outlets and to the nozzle of the adjacent tank on interconnect lines. Additional limits of yard piping are indicated on the plans. Q. Prepare and coat inaccessible interior surface of roof plate and rafters as follows: 1. For new tank construction, prepare inaccessible surfaces, such as interior surface of roof plate and rafters, with specified surface preparation. Prime coat prior to erection. Apply a minimum of two additional full coats prior to final placement. Surface preparation and prime coat application may be conducted off-site. Follow inspection of shop blasting and painting in accordance with this specification. Follow the recoat intervals recommended by the Manufacturer. 2. For repair of existing tanks, prepare all inaccessible interior surfaces of roof plate and rafters to be installed with specified surface preparation and a minimum of two full coats prior to final placement. R. Jack the roof plate/rafter interfaces, which are not accessible for surface preparation and coating work, off the rafters to facilitate blasting and coating the tops of rafters and 104-1901 09971-13 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement the roof plate. Move wedges used to hold the roof plate off the rafters as required so that all areas between the rafters and roof plate are blasted and coated. S. For wet surfaces, including immersion and condensation zones, maintain a constant positive flow of dehumidified air, with adequate circulation across the finish coat for a period of 10 days, minimum. Evacuate solvent from the bottom of the tank. Forced or induced airflow may be required. Any accelerated curing procedure must be recommended in writing by the Manufacturer and approved by the Owner. 1 T. Repair damaged areas in galvanized coating as follows: 1. Interior surfaces require a NSF approved cold galvanizing component. 2. Mechanical exterior damage to be prepared by hand tool (SP-2) or power tool (SP- 3) spot cleaning and to be spot coated with an organic zinc coating approved by the Owner. 3. Prepare damaged areas exhibiting red rust to bare metal (SP-11) and coat with an inorganic zinc coating approved by the Owner. U. Coatings work will be permitted during daylight hours only unless arrangements or permission has been granted in writing. 3.06 PROTECTION OF SURFACES A. Unless otherwise specified, painting will not be required on the following items: 1. Exposed surfaces of Aluminum 2. Polished or finished Stainless Steel 3. Nickel, Monel, Copper, Bronze, Lead or Brass 4. Rubber and plastic including Fiberglass Reinforced Plastics 5. Chromium plated surfaces B. If Contractor applies paint to or causes damage to surfaces to be protected or unspecified surfaces, removal of coating, repair or replacement of item is required. C. Protect all surfaces, which are not to be painted, from overblasting, spraying, over spray, spatters, or spillage of paint. 3.07 PAINT SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Tank Label: Stencil (or use ready-to-apply decals) the information below to the side of the tank near the flush clean-out door for GST and the access door for EST about 3 feet from the 104-1901 09971-14 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ground after completion of the painting operation. Letters are to be 0.75 inches in height, the color is to be black and material is to be compatible with finish coat: 1. Date of coating application. Completion [month/year] 2. General Contractor, Painting Subcontractor 3. Interior coating system supplier and product number(s). Surface Preparation, Prime Coat, Intermediate Coat, Finish Coat, Caulking 4. Exterior coating system supplier and product number(s). Surface Preparation, Prime Coat, Intermediate Coat, Finish Coat 3.08 INSPECTION, TESTING, RECORD KEEPING A. Schedule and coordinate work with the Owner to allow for expeditious inspection by the Owner or designated representative, including the use of ladders, scaffolds, lighting, and swing stages to provide regular access for inspections. B. All surfaces ready to receive a coating must be approved by the Owner before the application of the next succeeding specified coat. If the Contractor proceeds without such approval, he may, at the direction of the Owner, be required to remove and/or recoat all such work at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Measure wet film thickness at least once every thirty (30) minutes to make certain that proper film thickness is being achieved. More frequent checks may be required by the Owner at his direction. D. Test all tank interior coated surfaces under the direction of the Owner for nicks, scrapes and/or pinholes in the coating film using a low voltage, wet sponge holiday detector for thin film coating (<20 mils) and high voltage holiday detector for thick film coating (>20 mils). Perform holiday detection in accordance with NACE RP0188-90: "Discontinuity (Holiday)Testing of Protective Coatings." Correct any deficiencies to the satisfaction of the Owner. Non-conformance coats of paint shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner. E. Record temperature, humidity, and dew point on a log including date and time reading obtained. Obtain a minimum of three such readings on days of coating application. The format for these records is presented in Table 3, "Daily Coating Summary Report" included in this Section. Enter the records into a Windows compatible file such as Quatro Pro or Excel and submit a hard copy with monthly pay requests for those months when coatings are applied. Furnish the Owner with a 31,4-inch disk containing the complete coating summary report for the project at the end of the project, or in the interim, if requested. F. Paint films showing sags, checks, blisters, teardrops, curtains, fish eyes, or fat edges will not be accepted. Entirely remove films exhibiting any of these defects and recoat the surface at no additional cost to the Owner. 104-1901 09971-15 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement G. Inspect blasted steel surfaces by the Owner using SSPC-Vis 1, "Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel", or NACE TM-0175 for new steel. H. Demonstrate surface profile conformance to the specifications by obtaining average results of a minimum of 10 equally spaced anchor profile determinations per 1000 square feet. Employ at the discretion of the Owner, ASTM D 4417 "Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel" Method A, B or C. ASTM D 4417 Method C shall be employed to resolve any dispute. The average reading to be between 2.0 mils and 3.0 mils. Any individual profile point less than 1.5 mils or greater than 4.0 mils will be cause for rejection of the anchor profile. Rejected areas are to be reblasted to correct profile. All non-conformance coatings / paints shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 FINISH SCHEDULE A. A list of the tanks to be coated is presented in Table 2, "Surface Preparation and Finish Schedule " at the end of this Section. Table 2 contains the required pre-cleaning procedures, the degree of surface preparation and coating system schedule for the interior and exterior of the various tanks. B. Utilize the following legend for TABLE 2 "Surface Preparation and Finish Schedule": 1. Prior to abrasive blasting, degrease oily residue using steam cleaner and/or water blaster. Check with black light and reclean if necessary. Check the pH of the surface for neutrality if an emulsifying type degreaser is used. 2. Prior to abrasive blasting, perform Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP-1) to remove oil, grease, and other detrimental foreign contaminants for interior and/or exterior surfaces. 3. Power Tool Clean (SSPC-SP-3) any new welds, flame cut surfaces, buckshot and/or weld splatter associated with tank repairs, modifications, and other new work. 4. Perform Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10 - NACE No. 2) of all interior tank surfaces unless otherwise noted in the Finish Schedule. Achieve an AVERAGE of 2.0 mils to 3.0 mils with no individual reading greater than 4.0 mils or less than 1.5 mils for anchor profile on abrasive blasted surfaces. 5. Perform Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10 - NACE No. 2) to the exterior surfaces. Achieve an AVERAGE of 2.0 mils to 3.0 mils with no individual reading greater than 4.0 mils or less than 1.5 mils for anchor profile on abrasive blasted surfaces. 6. Perform Commercial Blast (SSPC-SP6 - NACE No. 3) on all exterior surfaces. Achieve an AVERAGE of 2.0 mils to 3.0 mils with no individual reading greater than 4.0 mils or less than 1.5 mils for anchor profile on abrasive blasted surfaces. 104-1901 09971-16 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 7. Perform Brush-Off Blast(SSPC-SP7 - NACE No. 4) on all exterior surfaces to remove poorly adhering coatings, mildew, dirt, soil, and other detrimental foreign contaminants. Use of TSP or equal will improve cleaning effectiveness. 8. Spot Repair by hand sanding and/or power tool cleaning any pinholed coatings, damaged coatings, and/or rust spots. All repair areas are to be feathered into adjacent painted areas using the appropriate paint system specified for the applicable interior or exterior of the tank. 9. Three Coat Interior Polyamide Epoxy Paint System having ANSI/NSF 61 approval for potable water service. Each coat in alternating colors. a. The total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 10 mils to 16 mils. b. Each primer and intermediate coats to have a nominal 3 to 5 mils DFT. Finish coat to have a nominal 4 to 6 mils DFT. c. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-PA2 and represent the DFT, corrected for magnetic base readings. 10. Two Coat Interior Polyamide Epoxy Paint System having ANSI/NSF 61 approval for potable water service. Each coat a different color. a. The total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 7 mils to 11 mils. b. Primer coat to have a nominal dry film thickness of 3 to 5 mils, and for the finish coat, 4 to 6 mils. c. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-PA2 41„, and represent the DFT corrected for magnetic base readings. 11. Interior Epoxy Caulk Material to be EPA and FDA approved for potable water service such as Raven Lining Systems A-7. Apply caulk material to surfaces which have received a Near White Metal Blast(SSPC SP-10 - NACE No. 2). Apply caulk in a smooth and continuous manner, overlapping material at least one inch on each side of seam to be caulked. Caulk to be at least 30 mils thick at centerline of seam. After material has cured but prior to application of any coating, lightly scarify the surface of the caulk material. Caulk material is not to be applied to continuous weld seams except as required to fill deep weld undercuts. The 1.0-inch overlap does not apply for deep pit repairs or undercuts. 12. Three Coat Exterior Epoxy/Epoxy Urethane Paint System. Intermediate color to compliment topcoat color selected by the Owner. a. The total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 9 to 12.5 mils. b. Primer coat to have a nominal dry film thickness (DFT) of 3 to 4.5 mils. Intermediate coat to have a nominal 4.5 to 6 mils DFT. Finish coat to have a nominal 1.5 to 2 mils DFT. c. All field coats to be brush or roller applied. SPRAY APPLICATION ON SITE REQUIRES APPROVAL OF OWNER AND USE OF CONTAINMENT SCREENING. 1 104-1901 09971-17 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement d. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-PA2 and represent the DFT adjusted for magnetic base readings of abrasive blast cleaned steel. 13. Two Coat Exterior Epoxy /Urethane Paint System. Intermediate color to compliment topcoat color selected by the Owner. a. Total coating system to have a nominal dry film thickness of 6 to 8 mils. b. Primer coat to have a nominal 4.5 to 6 mils DFT. Finish coat to have a nominal 1.5 to 2 mils DFT. c. All field coats to be brush or roller applied. SPRAY APPLICATION ON SITE REQUIRES APPROVAL OF OWNER AND USE OF CONTAINMENT SCREENING. d. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-PA2 and shall represent the DFT adjusted for magnetic base readings of abrasive blast cleaned steel. 14. Two Coat Exterior Silicone Alkyd Paint System a. Prime all blasted and repaired areas with one coat of Alkyd Primer having a nominal DFT of 3 to 4.5 mils. b. Apply full Silicone Alkyd Finish Coat having a nominal DFT of 2.5 to 4 mils. c. Total coating system to have a nominal 5.5 to 8.5 mils DFT. d. All field coats to be brush or roller applied. SPRAY APPLICATION ON SITE REQUIRES APPROVAL OF AND USE OF CONTAINMENT SCREENING. e. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-PA2 and represent the DFT adjusted for magnetic base readings for abrasive blast cleaned steel. 15. Interior 100% Solids, Plural Component Paint System having ANSI/NSF 61 approval for potable water service. a. Total coating system to have a minimum nominal dry film thickness of 20 to 25 mils. b. Apply coating in one or two coats, as recommended by the Manufacturer. c. All DFT measurements are to be performed in accordance with SSPC-PA2 and shall represent the DFT corrected for magnetic base readings. d. Application to be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's published requirements. e. The use of dehumidification may be waived by the Owner when this system is utilized. Maintain surface cleanliness to ensure no coatings are applied over contaminated, rust blooms or otherwise discolored surfaces as specified elsewhere in these documents. Use ventilation equipment as required by the Manufacturer to maintain a safe working environment. 16. Non-Skid Walk-way a. GST— Provide three-foot wide safety/skid resistant roof walkway. Coating to be compatible with specified external prime coat coating system and applied to a properly cleaned surface. Spread crushed walnut shells or aluminum oxide on intermediate coat while still tacky to achieve a coarse-textured finish. After this coat has cured, sweep all loose shells or grit from surface and apply finish coat. Finish coat paint color to be a contrasting shade to the roof color. 104-1901 09971-18 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement For galvanized tanks, do not blast but clean according to SP-1. Apply one coat of wash primer, then apply skid resistant material. b. EST— Provide safety/skid resistant walkway, as above, inside the handrail area on the tank roof. 17. Concrete Surfaces a. Prior to application of specified system, pressure wash all surfaces to remove all dirt, laitance efflorescence and other non-cementitious material. b. Prepare concrete, masonry units, brick, and plaster surfaces by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, and oils and by roughening the surfaces as required to remove glaze. High pressure water, 4,000 psi minimum at 2.5 gallons/minute minimum, with or without abrasive injection, will be used to remove poorly adherent or"powdery" existing paint. c. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces. Where the alkalinity exceeds the paint Manufacturer's recommendations for application of the paint, correct the condition in accordance with the paint Manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply paint to surfaces while the surface moisture content exceeds the paint Manufacturer's moisture content limitations 18. Continuous tank ventilation system must be able to prevent the vapor concentration from reaching the TLV(threshold limit values) of exposure to the solvent(s) used in accordance with the TLV values published by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists. 19. Inspect galvanized sheets for white rust deposits prior to erection. Clean any white • rusted areas by the use of a water and scrub brush technique. Measure the coating thickness in accordance with ASTM E 376. Any thickness less than 3.0 mils may be cause for rejection of the plate. 20. On ground storage tanks with aluminum domes, apply 20 mils of Ameron 487 elastomeric polyurethane coating, or equivalent, to the top of the wind girder, exterior shell of the tank under the aluminum flashing at the wind girder, and lap 6 inches over the top edge of the shell inside the tank. 21. Apply 20 mils DFT nominal/16 mils minimum Corrocote II PW, 100% solids as manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries. Surface preparation to be in accordance with Manufacturer's published instructions. 3.10 SCHEDULING A. Perform painting work according to the contract construction schedule as required in Section 01350 - Submittals. B. Scheduling not to supersede temperature, humidity or other environmental requirements for coatings application included in these specifications. C. Coordinate work of other trades and provide conditions for neat, clean, dust-free work. 104-1901 09971-19 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.11 SITE CLEAN-UP A. The Contractor to maintain the construction site in a neat and orderly manner throughout the duration of the project. TABLE NO. 1 "COATING PRODUCTS" Coating Intermediate Coating System Manufacturer Primer Coat Coat Finish Coat Tank Interior 3 Coat Polyamide/ 61 or 891 VOC Polyamine Epoxy CARBOLINE 61 or 891VOC 61 or 891VOC SERIES 20HS TNEMEC SERIES 20HS SERIES 20HS TANK CLAD HS SHERWIN- TANK CLAD HS TANK CLAD HS WILLIAMS 2 Coat 100% Solids RAVEN AQUATAPDXY Plural Component CARBOLINE A-6 Tank Shield Plus Tank Exterior 3 Coat Epoxy/ 134 HG Epoxy Polyurethane CARBOLINE 890 890 SERIES 1074 SERIES 20 HI-SOLIDS TNEMEC Recoatable SERIES 20 Polyurethane SHERWIN- Epoxy Primer Macropoxy 646 WILLIAMS Skid Resistant Epoxy/Polyurethane CARBOLINE 890 890 134 HS TNEMEC SERIES 20 SERIES 20 SERIES 74 SHERWIN- Recoatable Macropoxy 646 HI-SOLIDS WILLIAMS Epoxy Primer Polyurethane Special Service Pitted Surfaces RAVEN LINING AQUATAPDXY AQUATAPDXY Internal TNEMEC A-6 A-6 SERIES 125 SERIES 125 SHERWIN- Steel Seam WILLIAMS Trowel Grade 104-1901 09971-20 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TABLE NO. 1 CP* "COATING PRODUCTS" Coating Intermediate Coating System Manufacturer Primer Coat Coat Finish Coat Concrete Surfaces Internal 891 VOC 891 VOC 891 VOC CARBOLINE TANK CLAD HS 32-SERIES TANK CLAD HS SHERWIN- SERIES 20HS TANK CLAD HS SERIES 22 WILLIAMS TNEMEC Exterior Above CARBOLINE 3359 3359 3359 Grade METALATEX CRETE/GARD II METALATEX SHERWIN- SERIES 156 METALATEX SERIES 156 WILLIAMS TNEMEC Interior Flexible RAVEN LINING AQUATAPDXY Caulking A-7 • 104-1901 09971-21 KIT Professionals. Inc. City of Pearland Painting and Protective Coatings for Water Storage Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TABLE NO. 2 SURFACE PREPARATION AND FINISH SCHEDULE .40 INTERIOR EXTERIOR Additional Surface Paint Work Surface Paint Additional Tank Preparation System Items Preparation System Work Items Comments Schedule GST 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 9 8, 18 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 12 8, 18, 20 typical for all GSTs Notes: 1. See Table 1 "Coatings Products" for allowable coating manufacturers and products. 2. See Paragraph 3.09 B. "Finish Schedule" for description of items listed in this table. END OF SECTION J 104-1901 09971-22 KIT Professionals, Inc. CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 13 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION • 04/2008 City of Pearland Tank Clean-up and Disinfection Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 13203 TANK CLEAN-UP AND DISINFECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clean-up and disinfection of the new potable water storage tanks complete with all required disinfecting and neutralizing chemicals, and all equipment, labor, and superintendence. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT — NOT USED 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWWA B 300 — Standard for Hypochlorites B. AWWA C 651 — Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains C. AWWA C 652 —Standard for Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities D. AWWA C 653 — Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants 1.04 SUBMITTALS ® A. Prior to starting disinfection work, furnish to Owner a detailed plan of proposed sequence of work, manners of filling and flushing units, source and quality of water to be used, sampling points and disposal of wastewater. B. Submit material data sheets on all disinfectants and neutralization chemicals to be used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Bacteriological Sampling and Testing: 1. Bacteriological sampling and water quality testing of disinfected tank to be conducted by the City of Sugar Land. 2. Results to be acceptable to the Owner. 3. Tank to be verified free of coliform bacteria contamination. Work to be in accordance with AWWA C652, Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities, as applicable. 4. Methods of bacteriological analysis are as specified in the Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater by the American Public Health Association, latest edition. 105-1901 132030-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Tank Clean-up and Disinfection Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DISINFECTANT A. Disinfectant to be calcium hypochlorite meeting the requirements of the AWWA B300 "Standard for Hypochlorites". 2.02 WATER A. Water for the first tank washdown, disinfection, fill and testing of piping to meet the TCEQ Standards for potable water will be provided by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be required to pay for water required for refill or retesting due to failures in workmanship caused by the Contractor discovered during initial testing. 2.03 CHLORINE NEUTRALIZING CHEMICALS A. Chlorine neutralizing chemicals (e.g. sulfur dioxide, sodium bisulfite, sodium sulfite, etc.), if required for residual reduction of heavily chlorinated water, are to be of grade and analysis approved by the Owner. Provide the Owner with standard operating procedures for neutralizing any chlorine prior to discharge. Contractor shall determine if a TPDES permit is required for discharge. If discharging to existing sewer, Contractor shall ensure that existing capacity is sufficient to prevent backup from occurring. Provide the Owner with standard operating procedures neutralizing any chlorine prior to discharge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all construction equipment, scaffolding, planks, tools, rags, paint containers, erection lugs, brackets weld burrs, weld spatter, or other materials not part of the tank structure. B. Clean tank of dirt, blast products, and debris by sweeping, scrubbing, vacuuming or equally effective measures. C. Hose down tank interior (walls, roof and floor) with potable water to remove remaining foreign materials. D. Collect and properly dispose of all accumulated rinse water and associated solids. 3.02 DISINFECTION A. General: All inside surfaces of the tank including roof, rafters and other structural members above the high water level but excluding the tank overflow piping are to be disinfected. Thoroughly rinse chlorinated water from roof and rafters prior to the filling of the tank. All procedures listed herein shall comply with the latest version of AWWA C652-11 — Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities. 105-1901 13203-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Tank Clean-up and Disinfection Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement B. Initial Disinfection Procedure: (11/ 1. Spray and/or brush interior of tank with chlorine solution of 1 pound of 65% calcium hypochlorite to 100 gallons of water. 2. Thoroughly coat all surfaces including inlet and outlet piping up to and including first block valve. 3. Surfaces to be disinfected to remain in contact with disinfectant solution for a minimum of 30 minutes. 4. After minimum contact time has elapsed, disinfected surfaces to be flushed by hosing down with potable water. C. Secondary Disinfection Procedure: 1. Fill tank with water, furnished by Owner, to approximately 8 feet above the tank floor. 2. Add 65% calcium hypochlorite in solution to obtain a 5 ppm residual in the 8 feet of water in the tank as follows: Use the following formula to calculate weight of 65% Calcium Hypochlorite to use to obtain 5 ppm: (Total weight of water)X (5 ppm) (1,000,000)X (.65) 3. Fill the tank with water to top of overflow. 4. Let stand for a minimum of 24 hours or until the chlorine residual is less than or equal to 4 ppm. 5. Tests for leakage shall be made at this time. 6. In the event leaks occur, water shall be lowered to 2 feet below the point the leaks occur. 7. After repairs, the process shall be repeated. D. Water Sampling: 1. Water samples are to be taken from the tank by the Owner for bacteriological and quality analyses. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Owner when the tank is ready to be sampled. 3. All sampling to be done during normal business working hours. E. Additional Testing Requirements: • 105-1901 13203-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Tank Clean-up and Disinfection Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1. Repeat disinfection procedure, if necessary, at Contractor's expense until acceptable water samples are obtained. 2. Contractor responsible for disposing of chlorinated water. 3. Responsibility to include the obtaining of any necessary permits and all required neutralizing chemicals. 4. After the bacteriological criteria have been satisfied, the water in the tank must have a chlorine residual of less than 2.0 ppm before the tank is placed in service. 3.03 DISINFECTION OF PLANT PIPING I A. General: 1. Furnish pump, pipe connections and necessary apparatus, gauges and meters. 2. Furnish necessary labor, assistance and chlorination agent for disinfection. B. Contamination Control: 1. Prevent admission of contaminated water to previously disinfected units. 2. If contaminated water is admitted to previously disinfected units, disinfect these units at no additional cost to Owner. C. Disinfect: In accordance with applicable sections of AWWA C651, Disinfecting Water Mains and as follows: 1. Chlorine dose, 50 mg/I minimum. 2. Retain chlorine water in system until completion of hydrostatic tests. Minimum retention period to be 24 hours. 3. Following chlorination, flush treated water from piping until replacement water has chlorine content not more than 0.1 mg/I in excess of residual in water from supply line, and in any event not more than 0.2 mg/I total. 4. If initial treatment results in an unsatisfactory bacterial test, repeat disinfection procedures at no additional cost to Owner until satisfactory results are obtained. END OF SECTION 105-1901 13203-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 13205 WELDED STEEL WATER STORAGE TANK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for the design, fabrication, erection, and testing of one (1) field-painted, 400,000 gallon welded steel water ground storage tanks (GSTs) including concrete ring-wall foundation, sand cushion, steel roof, tank structure, overflow and drain box, inlet and outlet piping, and tank appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Furnish and install all piping and fittings to the limits as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein and in other Sections. C. Tank Manufacturer shall perform subsurface investigation as required to support their design for meeting specified settlement guarantee. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment, include cost of work in associated lump sum bid item. 1.03 RELATED WORK 41/ A. Submittal Procedures and Shop Drawings are included in Sections 01350— Submittals. B. Basic Product Requirements are specified in Section 01600 — Material and Equipment. C. Equipment and Facility Commissioning is included in Section 01750 — Starting Systems. D. Piping is specified in Section 02510 — Water Mains. E. Concrete and reinforcing steel work for foundation is included in Division 03. F. Painting system for steel tank is specified in Section 09971- Painting and Protective Coatings for Potable Water Storage Tanks. G. Cathodic protection is included in Section 16610 - Cathodic Protection for Steel Water Tanks. H. Pipe couplings and piping specialties are included under Section 15100 — Couplings Adapters and Specials for Process Piping. I. Pipe Supports are included in Section 15140 — Hangers, Supports, and Restraints. 41) 105-1901 13205-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1.04 DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. Design Drawings and Calculations: Contractor shall prepare design drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01350 — Submittals. All drawings shall be dimensioned, easily readable, and adequately referenced. Drawings shall contain the following minimum information for each tank: 1. Plan view, elevation view, and section views as necessary, drawn to a scale as required for clarity. 2. Location, size, and type of all wall and roof penetrations. Same for all appurtenances such as ladders, access hatches, railing, etc. 3. Location and size of all piping, connections, and appurtenances, 4. Pipe couplings, piping specialties, pipe supports. 5. Fabrication details and details of all connections; drawn to scale. 6. Material specifications (ASTM designation) and code or standards references for all items. 7. Describe AWS welding procedure proposed for all welds. Indicate welding process degrees of bevel and root dimension. 8. Submit method of bottom testing. 9. Coating System B. Design calculations are to be submitted on 81/2-inch by 11-inch digital paper format, easily readable and suitable for easy reproduction. C. All design drawings and calculations are to be prepared by, or under the direct supervision of and officially sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas attesting to the conformance with design criteria. D. Submit Manufacturer's certification that the tank has been fabricated in accordance with AWWA D100. E. Submit Manufacturer's quality assurance/quality control document describing procedures followed during fabrication. F. Test Reports: 1. Furnish mill test reports. 2. Submit weld test reports prior to initiation of field painting. Rejected material to be replaced promptly at no cost to the Owner. 105-1901 13205-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBG) 1. International Code Council (ICC) — 2015 International Building Code (IBC) Pearland Amendments to the 2015 IBC, effective 04/12/19 B. Aluminum Association —Aluminum Design Manual C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 350 - Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary 2. ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete D. AISC 316 —AISC Manual of Steel Construction E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A6 —Standard for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes and Sheet Piling 2. ASTM A36 — Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel, Sheet 3. ASTM A307 — Standard for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs 41) 4. ASTM A615 —Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM C509 — Standard Specification for Cellular Elastomeric Performed Gasket Sealing Material. 6. ASTM D1751 —Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Conditions (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 7. ASTM 4940 — Standard for Conducting Analysis of Water Soluble Ionic Contamination of Blasting Abrasives 8. ASTM F593 —Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A10.4 — Requirements for Personal Hoists, Safety. 2. ANSI A14.3 — Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements. G. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 46. 1. AWWA D100 —Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage 105-1901 13205-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2. AWWA D102 — Coating Steel Water-Storage Tanks 3. AWWA D104—Automatically Controlled, Impressed-Current Cathodic Protection for the Interior Submerged Surfaces of Steel Water Storage Tanks 4. AWWA C207 — Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm) 5. AWWA B300 —Hypochlorites 6. AWWA M42 — Steel Water Storage Tanks H. American Welding Society 1. AWS B2.1 — Standard for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification 2. AWS D1.1 — Structural Welding Code Steel I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1. CHAPTER 14.1 — Painting Steel Tanks, Good Painting Practice, Volume 1 J. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1. 29 CFR — Occupational Safety and Health Standards Part 1910. K. NSF International (NSF): 1. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. 2. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components — Lead Content L. Where reference is made to 1 of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tank foundation system shall be designed to limit settlement to half of the allowable as found in ACI 372R. Overflow Box, piping, and electrical appurtenance shall be designed to accommodate anticipated settlements. B. Conduct performance tests to qualify welders and welding operators in accordance with AWS B2.1 - 2013. C. Quality control for all welding shall be in accordance with AWWA D100: 1. Field inspection by means of radiographs will be performed by the Owner at their direction and cost. 2. Contractor shall vacuum test all bottom plate welds. Test corner welds by oil penetrant. Include costs for these tests in the cost of the tank. 105-1901 13205-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3. Radiographs will be performed as recommended by AWWA D100, Section 11. 411W 4. All areas found to be defective shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. 5. Any retesting to check repaired areas will be paid for by the Contractor. D. The initial supply of water required for leak test shall be supplied by the City. Additional water required for subsequent leak tests shall be at the Contractor's expense. E. Comply with applicable OSHA Rules and Regulations. 1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design, fabricate, erect, and test in accordance with "AWWA Standard for Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage" (AWWA D100 - Latest Revision) except as modified herein and as may be shown on Drawings. B. Surfaces in contact with potable water shall be NSF-61 listed. C. Design in accordance with Appendix C of AWWA D100 will NOT be acceptable. D. Design standards and codes: 1. Local Building Code: City of Pearland, Texas (current version at time of bid). 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Chapter 290. 3. See Part 1.05 "Reference Standards" for additional requirements. E. New Design Requirements 1. Tank Dimensions: a. Inside Tank Diameter: 47.5 feet ± b. Top of Finished Floor Elevation: 54.25 feet msl ±(1) c. Top of Tank Shell Elevation: 86.42 feet msl ± (1) d. Maximum Normal Water Surface Elevation: 85.92 feet msl ± (1) e. Overflow Weir Elevation Field Verify (1) f. Max Water Surface Above Overflow Weir: 3 inches g. Tank Capacity: Nominal 400,000 gallons h. Maximum Tank Fill Rate: 1.8 MGD i. Maximum Drawdown Rate: 3.75 MGD j. Overflow Rate: 1.8 MGD (')Elevations shall be field verified to ensure they match GST-1. 2. The tank's shell shall also be capable of having a 12-foot x 8-foot lower shell coupon removed for heavy cleaning operations with no detrimental effect on tank integrity. • 3. Tank shall be field blasted and painted. Shop priming of tank will not be allowed. 105-1901 13205-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement F. Tank Design Loads: 1. Include items supported from tank such as ladders, platforms, piping, panels, etc. 2. Dead load plus 20 pounds per square foot live load for roof. 3. Wind Loads: a. Basic wind speed for Risk Category III and IV per 01600 — Material and Equipment. b. Wind exposure category is listed on the structural drawings for each structure. 4. Seismic Loads: a. Seismic per 01600 — Material and Equipment. 5. Design for at least the following load combinations: a. Dead + water + live or b. Dead + water+ wind or c. Dead + wind 6. Fireman Bollard at Top of GST Dome: Minimum 1,500 lbs and shock load from a falling person arrested by the fall prevention safety equipment. 7. Temperature Criteria: a. Air temperature range: winter to summer; 20° F to 110 °F. b. Water Temperature Range: winter to summer; 50 °F to 95 °F. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store all materials carefully to prevent distortions or other damage that could affect structural, mechanical, or electrical integrity. Store all materials that are subject to deterioration by exposure to the elements off the ground in a well-drained location and protected from the weather. All materials shall be accessible for inspection and handling. Storage of tank and appurtenances shall be in the designated construction staying area. B. Materials furnished for the tank which are determined to be defective by the Owner or shall be rejected and replaced with acceptable sheets. All materials rejected must be removed from the project site immediately or within such time as allowed by the Owner and replaced with material of a quality acceptable to the Owner. Failure to reject any material or to require removal of any such rejected material shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the quality and character of material used, or for any other obligations imposed by the contract 1.09 WARRANTY A. The tank manufacturer shall warranty the tank structure and all other related appurtenances against any defective materials or workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of tank(s) Substantial Completion. If any materials or workmanship prove 105-1901 13205-6 KIT Professionals. Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement to be defective within that period, they shall be replaced or repaired by the tank manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. tor PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Welded Steel Tank: Tank Builders Inc., McDermott International (CB&I-LLC), Caldwell Tanks, Inc., Pittsburg Tank & Tower Group, Advance Tank & Construction Company, American Tank & Vessel, Inc., TARSCO - TF Warren Group, Bulldog Steel. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete and reinforcement for ring footing see Division 3 specifications. B. Structural and Other Metals: 1. As per AWWA D100. 2. All steel in contact with water shall be a minimum of 14-inch thick, floor shall be a minimum of 3/8-inch thick; roof plates shall be a minimum of'/ inches thic. 3. A corrosion allowance of 0.05 inches shall be applied to all minimum steel thicknesses. 41) 4. All internal structural members to nontubular, non-composite structural members. C. Sand for Sand Cushion: Clean sand or clean bank sand free from clay and clay lumps, shale, loam, organic, loam, organic matter, salt, and other deleterious materials. Sand with maximum Plasticity Index of 7 and with not more than 40 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. D. Fiberglass Impregnated Asphalt Tank Padding. 1. Gulf-Seal No. 990 tank padding as manufactured by Gulf States Asphalt Co., Inc. or equal. 2. Compressibility 750 psi (50% reduction in thickness). E. Accessories as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein include: 1. Exterior tank ladder, intermediate access platforms, ladder safety system, Bilco ladder-up safety post, roof hatch, vents, handrails, internal tank ladder, cathodic protection, drain penetrations, overflow, and drain piping. 2. Inlet, outlet, drain piping, and overflow pipe with funnels to be as shown on Drawings. 3. Roof Vents: Design in accordance with AWWA D100 Item `Accessories for Ground Supported Standpipes and Reservoirs" for additional roof opening. 46. a. Fabricated from fiberglass reinforced plastic 105-1901 13205-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement b. Size to permit flow rates specified above for filling and emptying without developing excessive stresses or strains in tank shell. c. Location: As shown on PLANS d. Insect Screen: No. 16 stainless steel mesh and banding of AISI Type 316 stainless steel 4. Safety Handrails / Railings: Provide in accordance with Drawings. Handrail shall be of aluminum construction conforming to OSHA. Railing shall extend a minimum of 6 feet on either side of the exterior ladder or as otherwise shown on the Drawings. The handrail shall consist of vertical posts, kick plate, mid rail, and a top rail 42 inches in height. Two stainless steel safety chains (min. 5/16-inch link or as shown on Drawings) with hooks shall be installed at the ladder. The chains shall be installed at the top and mid rail. 5. Ladders: a. An exterior tank ladder shall be attached to the tank shell extending from approximately 8' above top of foundation to the top of the shell. b. Ladder side rails shall be a minimum 3/8 inch by 2 inches with a 16 inch clear spacing. Rungs shall be not less than 3/4 inch, round or square, spaced at 12 inch centers. The surface of the rungs shall be knurled, dimpled or otherwise treated to minimize slipping. Ladders shall be secured to the tank by brackets located at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Brackets shall be of sufficient length to provide a minimum distance of 7 inches from the center of the rung to the nearest permanent object behind the ladder c. Ladders shall be equipped with a fall arrest system meeting OSHA regulation. The system shall be supplied complete with safety harnesses, locking mechanisms, lanyards and accessories for two persons 6. Overflow Assembly: Size and configuration per Drawings and welded per AWWA D100. 7. Shell Manholes: Provide manholes as shown on the Drawings. Minimum diameter is 30-inches. Design and installation to be per AWWA D100. 8. Shell Clean-Out Fittings: Provide flush-type shell clean-out fittings with lifting davit for hatch as shown on the Drawings. Design and installation to be per AWWA D100. 9. Roof Hatches: a. Roof hatch(es) shall be an aluminum hatch. The hatch shall be designed for a 150-Ib/sf live load. The hatch for the interior ladder access and overflow weir inspection shall have a 42-inch square minimum opening and the hatch for future maintenance access shall have a 10-foot by 10-foot square minimum opening. Each 42-inch door shall be equipped with a hold open device(s) that shall automatically lock when the door is in the fully opened position. Springs, where required, shall be of stainless steel. Hatch(es) shall be provided with spring latch and heavy duty high security padlock hasp. The Maintenance access hatch will be a cover that has crane lifting provisions as well as security provisions. 105-1901 13205-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement b. Hatch(es) shall be furnished with stainless steel hardware throughout. A 40, suitable stainless-steel anchor system for attachment to roof shall be provided. Provide continuous '/4-inch thick, 60-durometer neoprene sheet gasket under hatch flange and fasten flange through gasket. c. Hatch(es) shall be watertight and meet TCEQ requirements for a minimum 2- inch lid overlap. d. Install roof hatches on a 4-inch minimum high curb as shown on Drawings. Roof hatches are to be located between rafters or aluminum dome grid support beams. Hatches are to be constructed from 0.9-inch aluminum. 10. Piping Connections, Sumps, and Drains a. Provide piping connections, sumps, and drains as shown on the Drawings. b. For shell or roof penetrations less than 3 inches diameter, use 3,000 lbs half- or full forged steel couplings for piping connections unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. c. For shell or roof penetrations 3 inches in diameter or larger, use flanged nozzles. Reinforce shell or roof plate as required by AWWA D100 and API 650. All flanges to be flat face in compliance with AWWA C207, Class D. d. Flush type drains and openings, where shown on the Drawings, shall be designed and installed in accordance with API 650. 11. Rigging: A painter's rail attached to the roof, pipe couplings with plugs in the roof or other attachments that provide complete access for painting and operator fall protection shall be furnished. ® 12. Level Transducer: Contractor shall provide level transducer in accordance with Division 16 — Electrical. 13. All exposed piping for sample tap and pressure gauge shall be heat traced and aluminum jacketed insulated per Section 15261 — Pipe Insulation—Water and Chemical Service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining soil design conditions. The geotechnical information provided by the Owner is for information only and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for determining soil conditions. B. The Contractor shall make any additional investigations including soil borings as he deems necessary to ascertain actual site conditions. C. The maximum allowable soil bearing values to be determined by tank designer using established principles of soil mechanics. D. Design shall be in accordance with the most recent edition of the International Code Council (ICC)—International Building Code (IBC). • 105-1901 13205-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.02 FABRICATION A. Joints: 1. Tanks Shell: Butt Welds 2. Steel Roof and Bottom: Lap Weld 3. Roof Framing: Welded 3.03 FIELD ERECTION A. Tank Foundation: 1. Tank foundation shall consist of: a. Sand cushion within a concrete ringwall. b. Sand shall not be saturated with oil. c. Installation shall be as shown on the Drawings. d. Asphalt pad expansion joint material between tank bottom and concrete ringwall to be installed with butt joint, 3/4-inch thick as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or approved equal. Seal joints with mastic in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. e. Pad joints to be sealed with APOC No. 111 Waterguard Trowel Mastic or equal. 2. Sitework: a. The site should be graded such that positive surface drainage away from the work areas is established and maintained at all times. b. Water should not be allowed to pond on the surface during construction. c. The surface soils are moisture sensitive. If wet, such soils will become unstable and unable to support construction efforts. d. Failure to keep sandy and silty surface soils drained may necessitate chemical stabilization at Contractor's expense. 3. Sand material under the tank floor: a. Free of water soluble ionic contamination (salt). Salt content of the sand shall be determined and limited in accordance with ASTM 4940. b. Excavate or strip to depth(s) as required. Compact subgrade to minimum dry density of 95 percent of maximum in accordance with ASTM D698. Accomplish by making several passes with flat-wheeled or vibratory roller to uniformly dense soils and to ensure that localized weak and compressible zones are not present. Shape surface to receive sand fill as indicated. c. Place in 8-inch maximum lifts, measured loose, and compact with pneumatic- tired or vibratory roller. In confined areas, compact with mechanical tamps. Compact soils at or near optimum moisture content to a minimum dry density of 95 percent of maximum in accordance with ASTM D698. "Waterflooding" to obtain required compaction is not permitted. After compacting, shape surface area to grade indicated. Make at least one density test per lift. 105-1901 13205-10 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4. Cement-stabilized sand: (hir a. Placed as indicated on the Drawings. b. Placed and compacted within 2 hours or initial set, whichever occurs first. 5. Concrete ringwall: a. Installed with 1 continuous concrete pour. b. Formed on both sides. c. Ringwalls and slabs after grouting or before placing the joint filler shall be level within +/-1/8 inch in any 30-foot circumference under the shell. The levelness on the circumference shall not vary by more than +/-1/4 inch from an established plane. The tolerance on poured concrete before grouting shall be +/-1 inch. Contractor to record and furnish written report to Owner prior to installation of floor plate. B. Steel Reservoirs: 1. All steel reservoirs and appurtenances to be constructed per AWWA D100. 2. Square and bevel all shell plates prior to delivery to the job site. 3. Assemble and weld plates to maintain proper curvature. 4. No de-coiled steel shall be used in the tank shell construction. 5. Roll-top angle to the curvature of the tank for steel roof tanks prior to shipment to the job site. 6. The tank will be measured for conformance to the criteria stated below at various times throughout construction. Construction of the tank may be halted by the Owner and corrections required prior to recommencement of construction should deficiencies be noted in 1 or more of the criteria. 7. Plumbness: The maximum out-of-plumbness of the top of the shell relative to the bottom of the shell shall not exceed 1/200 of the total tank height. The out-of- plumbness in 1 shell plate shall not exceed the permissible variations for flatness and waviness as specified in ASTM A6 or ASTM A20, whichever is applicable. 8. Roundness: Radii measured at 1 foot above the bottom corner well shall not exceed the following tolerances: Tank Diameter Radius (feet) Tolerance 0 to 40 feet +/- 1/2 inch 40 to 150 feet +/- 3/4 inch 150 to 250 feet +/- 1 inch 250 feet and over +/- 11/4 inches 41;1 105-1901 13205-11 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 9. Peaking and Banding: Local deviations from the theoretical shape (for example, weld discontinuities, and flat spots) shall be limited as follows: a. Peaking at vertical weld joints shall not exceed 1/2 inch. Peaking at vertical weld joints shall be determined using a horizontal sweep board 36 inches long. b. Banding at horizontal weld joints shall not exceed '/2 inch. Banding at horizontal weld joints shall be determined using a vertical sweep board 36 inches long. c. Flat spots measured in the vertical plane shall not exceed the appropriate plate flatness and waviness requirements given in ASTM A6 and A2, whichever is applicable. 10. Measurements: Measurements listed in items above shall be taken as each tank ring is completed. Contractor shall repair defects, correct alignments, and take other corrective actions as required to insure each tank ring is constructed in strict compliance with these Specifications prior to proceeding with additional tank rings. C. Buried Yard Piping 1. All buried yard piping shall be installed in accordance with Section 02510—Water Mains within to the limits shown on the Drawings. D. Cleanliness: 1. Provide proper sanitary waste facilities. 2. Only healthy personnel may enter tank. 3. If necessary, Owner's physician will judge physical fitness of all persons entering tank. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Provide protective coatings for the new tank in accordance with Section 09971 — "Painting and Protective Coatings for Potable Water Storage Tanks". 3.05 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Keep interior of tank and accessories clean and free from foreign matter. Following construction each tank shall be cleaned and disinfected in accordance with AWWA C652, Chlorination Method 3 and as specified below. B. Cleaning 1. Remove all construction equipment, scaffolding, planks, tools, rags, paint containers, erection lugs, brackets weld burrs, weld spatter, or other materials not part of the tank structure. 2. Clean tank of dirt, blast products, and debris by sweeping, scrubbing, vacuuming or equally effective measures. 3. Hose down tank interior (walls, roof and floor) with potable water to remove remaining foreign materials. 4. Collect and properly dispose of all accumulated rinse water and associated solids. C. Disinfection 105-1901 13205-12 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1. The tank manufacturer shall provide all labor, material, and facilities required to 4,, chlorinate the tank(s). 2. All inside surfaces of the tank including roof, rafters and other structural members above the high water level but excluding the tank overflow piping are to be disinfected. Thoroughly rinse chlorinated water from roof and rafters prior to the filling of the tank. All procedures listed herein shall comply with the latest version of AWWA C652. 3. Initial Disinfection Procedure: a. Spray and/or brush interior of tank with chlorine solution of 1 pound of 65% calcium hypochlorite to 100 gallons of water. b. Thoroughly coat all surfaces including inlet and outlet piping up to and including first block valve. c. Surfaces to be disinfected to remain in contact with disinfectant solution for a minimum of 30 minutes. d. After minimum contact time has elapsed, disinfected surfaces to be flushed by hosing down with potable water. 4. Secondary Disinfection Procedure: a. Fill tank with water, furnished by Owner, to approximately 8 feet above the tank floor. b. Add 65% calcium hypochlorite in solution to obtain a 5 ppm residual in the 8 feet of water in the tank as follows: 41100 Use the following formula to calculate weight of 65% Calcium Hypochlorite to use to obtain 5 ppm: (Total weight of water) X (5 ppm) (1,000,000) X (.65) c. Fill the tank with water to top of overflow. d. Let stand for a minimum of 24 hours or until the chlorine residual is less than or equal to 4 ppm. e. Tests for leakage shall be made at this time. f. In the event leaks occur, water shall be lowered to 2 feet below the point the leaks occur. g. After repairs, the process shall be repeated. 5. Water Sampling: a. Water samples are to be taken from the tank by the Owner for bacteriological and quality analyses. b. The Contractor shall notify the Owner when the tank is ready to be sampled. c. All sampling to be done during normal business working hours. 6. Additional Testing Requirements: a. Repeat disinfection procedure, if necessary, at Contractor's expense until acceptable water samples are obtained. b. Contractor responsible for disposing of chlorinated water. ® c. Responsibility to include the obtaining of any necessary permits and all required neutralizing chemicals. 105-1901 13205-13 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement d. After the bacteriological criteria have been satisfied, the water in the tank must have a chlorine residual of less than 2.0 ppm before the tank is placed in service. ---- 3.06 FIELD TESTING A. All four (4) ground storage tanks shall be field tested following completion of construction activity. B. Prior to Field Testing, Contractor shall submit the equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Physical Checkout and Installation in accordance with Section 01750 — Starting Systems. C. Prior to Field Testing, Contractor shall: 1. Clean and disinfect the tank, as specified herein. 2. Complete pressure testing, leak testing, and disinfection of all inlet and outlet piping and valves installed under this Contract and required to connect the GSTs to the inlet and discharge piping headers. D. After the construction activity for each individual tank has been completed, but before any backfill is placed, the tank shall be filled slowly with filtered, chlorinated water. Careful observation for leaks shall be made and any leaks that occur shall be immediately repaired. E. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to fill the tank to be tested to its capacity. Capacity shall be defined as achieving a level within 6 inches of the overflow level in the tank. F. The tank to be tested shall then be isolated by closing the inlet and discharge isolation valves associated with the tank. G. Tank shall be slowly filled and isolated in the presence of the Owner. Notify Owner of test schedule 14 calendar days prior to the tests. H. Duration of the test shall not be less than the time required for a drop in the water surface elevation of 3/8-inch calculated at the maximum allowable leakage rate, but need not exceed 5 days. I. Loss of volume measurements shall be taken at intervals of no greater than 24 hours. Measure water surface elevations at the 2 roof access hatches. Record water temperature measured 18 inches below the water surface when taking the first and last sets of measurements. J. Submit watertightness test results to the Owner following each test. K. The tank(s) shall be kept full of water until the Owner is satisfied that all defects have been discovered and repaired. Tanks shall be leak free. 105-1901 13205-14 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement L. Following completion of hydrostatic testing for each GST, submit Certificate of 411W Hydrostatic Testing. M. The Owner shall be reimbursed for all water required for testing of the GSTs at the normal water rate. This requirement specifically applies to all Testing Flows discharged to the plant storm water ditch following disinfection and dechlorination, including retesting following repair work. Contractor shall be reimbursed from the Allowance for water required for initial testing only. The use of this water supply shall be such that it does not adversely affect the normal pressure and flow in the distribution system. N. After 12 months of operation, GST shall be drained and have weir pan adjusted to have all matching elevations. O. If internal repair work is required, Contractor shall repeat cleaning and disinfection prior to retesting, at no cost to the Owner. P. Following successful Field Testing, Contractor shall submit the equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Field Testing in accordance with Section 01 75 50— Starting Systems 3.07 FUNCTIONAL/ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Following Field Testing, Contractor shall conduct all TCEQ-required bacteriological testing prior to placing a Ground Storage Tank in service for the Functional/Acceptance Testing of the Work. B. All instrumentation associated with the Ground Storage Tanks that are to be tested shall be installed, functioning and connected to the SCADA system prior to initiating the test. C. Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Pre-Startup Activities in accordance with Section 01750—Starting Systems D. Contractor shall not initiate the Functional/Acceptance Test without the approval of the operating staff and receipt of a written Notice to Proceed from the Owner. E. Once a Notice to Proceed has been given, the Contractor, under the supervision of the operating staff, shall place the Ground Storage Tank in service, providing finished water to the High Service Pump Station, beginning a 30-calendar day test period. F. During the 30-day test period the Ground Storage Tanks will be inspected daily and tank operating levels will be monitored hourly through the SCADA system. G. All defective work will be corrected by the Contractor. H. Following the 30-day test period, the tested Ground Storage Tank will be filled to its maximum operating level, and isolated using the inlet and discharge isolation valves for a period of 48 hours. Tank level will be monitored throughout the test period, and a leakage rate, if any, calculated. The maximum allowable leakage shall be as specified in Paragraphs 3.05L, M, and N. above. If the liquid volume loss exceeds this amount, the Ground Storage Tank shall be taken out of service, repaired, disinfected and 105-1901 13205-15 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Welded Steel Water Storage Tank Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement retested. No additional payment to the Contractor shall be made for repair, disinfection and retesting. I. If the Ground Storage Tank successfully completes the 30-day Functional/Acceptance test and the subsequent leakage test, Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Acceptance Testing Period. 3.08 WATER DISCHARGE FOLLOWING DISINFECTION, FIELD TESTING AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING A. Following disinfection, Field Testing and bacteriological testing, and prior to Acceptance Testing, testing water in the tank shall be dechlorinated to reduce chlorine concentration to less than 4 mg/L prior to discharging to plant storm water ditch. Dechlorination should be performed by methods acceptable to the City. END OF SECTION 105-1901 13205-16 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS Section 13300 410Y INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C)—GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall procure the services of a single Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) to furnish and install all materials, equipment, labor and services, except for those services and materials specifically noted, required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein and in other Specification Sections listed below. B. Items specifically excluded from the PCSS's scope include the following: 1. Human Machine Interface (HMI) graphics development, HMI software configuration, database development, report development, and startup/training activities associated with the configured portions of the HMI system. 2. Instrumentation supplied with the vendor provided equipment. The equipment specifications and drawings identify vendor supplied instrumentation. C. The work shall include furnishing, installing, testing, and making operational the equipment and materials detailed in the following Sections: Section No. Title 13300 Instrumentation and Controls (I&C) - General Provisions 13302 l&C -Testing 13303 l&C -Training 13305 l&C - Control Descriptions 13330 l&C - Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment 13342 l&C - Pressure Devices 1. Requirements specified in this Section apply to all equipment specified in the above Sections, unless otherwise specified. D. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance, such as transducers, relays, signal amplifiers, intrinsic safety barriers, signal isolators, software, and drivers to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by others under other Sections of these Specifications, shall be included whether they are shown on the Drawings or not. E. Substitutions on functions or type of equipment specified shall not be acceptable unless specifically noted. In order to confirm compatibility between all equipment, coordinate all interface requirements with mechanical and electrical systems and furnish any signal isolation devices that might be required. F. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed and placed in operating condition in full conformity with the project Specifications, Drawings, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer as approved by the Engineer. 104-1901 13300-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS G. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance, similar products (e.g., instruments, network devices, panel components, I/O cards, etc.) shall be supplied from the same manufacturer. H. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State and local codes. I. Use the equipment, instrument, and loop numbering scheme that has been developed and shown on the Drawings and Specifications in the development of the submittals. Do not deviate from or modify said numbering scheme without the Engineer's approval. J. The PCSS work shall include, but not be limited to, the Process Control System (PCS), Instrumentation Subsystem (IS), and coordination with other contractors. The PCSS shall: 1. Furnish and install PLC I/O cards shown on the P&ID drawing, unless otherwise specifically annotated as being provided under a different division. 2. Furnish and install all instrument as indicated in P&ID drawing. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Process & Instrumentation Diagram (P&IDs) included in the Drawing. B. Specific control system and instrumentation materials and requirements are included in related Sections of Division 13. C. Instrumentation and Controls conduit systems are specified in Section 16110. D. Instrumentation signal cable and alarm and status wiring are specified in Section 16120. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General submittal requirements include: 1. Refer to Section for general submittal requirements. 2. Other Division 13 Sections may have additional submittal requirements. 3. Shop drawings shall be submitted as detailed herein. Shop drawings shall demonstrate that the equipment and services to be furnished comply with the provisions of these Specifications and shall provide a complete record of the equipment as manufactured and delivered. 4. Submittals shall be complete, giving equipment specifications, details of connections, wiring, ranges, installation requirements, and specific dimensions. Submittals consisting of only general sales literature shall not be acceptable. 5. Submittals shall be bound in separate three-ring binders, with an index and sectional dividers, with all Drawings reduced to a maximum size of 11-inch by 17-inch, then folded to 8.5-inch by 11-inch for inclusion within the binder. Maximum binder size shall be 3 inches. 104-1901 13300-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS 6. The submittal Drawings' title block shall include, as a minimum, the PCSS's registered business name and address, Owner and project name, Drawing name, revision level, and personnel responsible for the content of the Drawing. 7. Incomplete or partial submittals not complying with the submittal arrangements outlined in this Section will be returned without review. 8. Separate submittals shall be made as follows: a. Project Plan, Deviation List and Schedule Submittal b. Coordination Meetings Agenda c. Input/Output(I/O) Address List Submittal d. Field Instruments Submittal e. Hardware Submittal and Software Packages Submittal f. Panel Layout Drawings and Wiring Diagrams Submittal g. Testing Plans Submittal h. Training Plan Submittal Ifi. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Submittal j. Final System Documentation B. Project Plan, Deviation List, and Schedule Submittal 1. Submit, within 45 days, a Project Plan. The Project Plan shall be submitted and approved before any further submittals shall be accepted. The Project Plan shall, as a minimum, contain the following: a. Overview of the proposed control system in clear text format describing the PCSS understanding of the project work, preliminary system architecture Drawing, interfaces to other systems, schedule, startup, and coordination. b. Approach to work in clearly written format describing how the PCSS intends to execute the work. A discussion of switchover, startup, replacement of existing equipment with new, and other tasks as required by these Specifications shall be included as applicable. c. Preliminary HMI software submittal information, including version numbers, solely to determine compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents prior to development of system programming. Review and approval of software and hardware systems as part of this Project Plan stage shall not relieve the PCSS of meeting all the functional and performance requirements of the system as 410 specified herein. Substitution of manufacturer or model of these systems after the submittal is approved is not allowed without Engineer approval. 104-1901 13300-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS d. Project personnel and organization including the PCSS project manager, project engineer, and lead project technicians. Include resumes of each key individual and specify in writing their commitment to this project. e. Preliminary coordination meeting agendas as specified herein. 0 f. Preliminary testing plan. g. Preliminary training plan. h. Sample formats of the shop drawings to be submitted and in conformance with the requirements of the Specifications. At a minimum, include samples of panel fabrication Drawings, loop, I/O wiring diagrams, and graphical display presentations. 2. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined in a separate Deviation List. The Deviation List shall consist of a paragraph by paragraph review of the Specifications indicating acceptance or any proposed deviations, the reason for exception, the exact nature of the exception and the proposed substitution so that an evaluation may be made by the Engineer. The acceptability of any device or methodology submitted as an "or equal" or "exception" to the Specifications shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer. If no exceptions are taken to the Specifications or Drawings, the PCSS shall make a statement as such. If there is no statement by the PCSS, then it is acknowledged that no exceptions are taken. 3. Project schedule shall be prepared and submitted using Primavera, Microsoft Project, or equal scheduling software. Schedule shall be prepared in Gantt chart format clearly showing task linkages for all tasks and identifying critical path elements. PCSS schedule must be based on the General Contractor schedule and must meet all field installation, testing, and startup milestones in that schedule. The project schedule shall illustrate all major project milestones including the following: a. Schedule for all subsequent project submittals. Include in the time allotment the time required for Contractor submittal preparation, Engineer's review time, and a minimum of two complete review cycles. b. Proposed dates for all project coordination meetings. c. Hardware purchasing, fabrication, and assembly (following approval of related submittals). d. Software configuration (following approval of related submittals). e. Shipment of all instrument and control system equipment. f. Installation of all instrument and control system equipment. g. Testing: Schedule for all testing. Testing schedule shall include submittal of test procedures a minimum of 30 days prior to commencement of testing. Schedule shall also include submittal of completed test procedure forms for review and approval by the Engineer prior to shipment, startup, or subsequent project work. 104-1901 13300-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS h. Schedule for system cutover, startup, and/or going on line for each major system. 411/ At a minimum, include the schedule for each process controller and HMI server/workstation provided under this Contract. i. Schedule for all training including submittal and approval of O&M manuals, factory training, and site training. C. Coordination Meetings Agenda 1. Agendas shall be submitted for the coordination meetings as specified herein. Submit proposed control system coordination meeting agenda a minimum of two weeks prior to the scheduled meeting date for review and comment by the Engineer. D. Input/Output (I/O) Address List Submittal 1. Submit, within 60 days, a complete system Input/Output (I/O) address list for equipment connected to the control system under this Contract. 2. I/O list shall be based on the P&IDs, the Drawings, the design I/O list (if included within these Specifications), and requirements outlined in the Specifications. 3. The I/O list shall be submitted in both a Microsoft Excel readable electronic file format on a CD-ROM and an 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch hard copy. 4. The I/O list shall reflect all active and spare I/O points. Add points to accommodate ® spare I/O. 5. The I/O list shall be arranged such that each control panel has a dedicated worksheet. At a minimum, I/O worksheet tables shall include the following information: a. TAG NUMBER(S): The identifier assigned to a device that performs a function in the control system. As part of this information, the loop number of the tag shall be broken out to allow for sorting by loop. b. DESCRIPTION: A description of the function of the device (text that includes signal source, control function, etc.). Include the text "Spare Points" for all I/O module points that are not connected to equipment. c. PHYSICAL LOCATION: The control panel designation of where the I/O point is wired to. d. Physical POINT ADDRESS: Rack, Slot, and Point (or Channel) assignment for each I/O point. e. LOGICAL POINT ADDRESS: Leave this field blank for use by the AESS. f. I/O TYPE: use DO - Discrete Output, DI - Discrete Input, AO - Analog Output, Al - Analog Input, PI - Pulse Input, or PO — Pulse Output. g. RANGE/STATE: The range in engineering units corresponding to an analog 4-20 mA signal, or, the state at which the value of the discrete points are "1." 104-1901 13300-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS h. ENGINEERING UNITS: The engineering units associated with the Analog I/O. i. ALARM LIMITS: Include alarm limits based on the control descriptions and the Drawings. j. P&ID — the P&ID or Drawing where the I/O point appears on. Mark as "NA" (Not Applicable) if the I/O point is derived from a Specification requirement and is not on the P&IDs. 6. The I/O list shall be sorted in order by: a. Physical location b. I/O Type c. Loop Number I d. Device Tag 7. After the I/O list is approved, do not modify the I/O addresses without approval by the Engineer. 8. Where multiple mechanical components are provided for process redundancy, their field connections to I/O modules shall be arranged such that the failure of a single I/O module will not disable all mechanical components of the redundant system. This applies to all I/O types. E. Field Instruments Submittal 1. Refer to the Instrument Section 13342 for submittal requirements. 2. for each loop which is shown on the Contract Drawings. The loop drawings shall be prepared in accordance with ISA Standard S5.4, latest edition, with the layout following Figures 5 and 6 (shown in the S5.4 Standard), titled Minimum Required Items Plus Optional items". Loop drawings shall be 11-inch x 17-inch minimum size. The information required on the Loop Drawings in order to satisfy the "minimum" and "optional" requirements is as follows: a. Minimum Required Items —The following information shall be provided on loop drawings in order to meet this requirement: (1) Identification of the loop and loop components shown on the P&IDs. Other principal components of the loop to be shown and identified under ISA-5.1, "Instrumentation Symbols and Identification". (2) Word description of loop functions within the title. If not adequate, use a supplemental note. Identify any special features or functions of shutdown and safety circuits. (3) Indication of the interrelation to other instrumentation loops, including overrides, interlocks, cascaded set points, shutdowns and safety circuits. 104-1901 13300-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS (4) All point-to-point interconnections with identifying numbers or colors of electrical cables, conductors, pneumatic multi-tubes, and individual pneumatic and hydraulic tubing. This identification of interconnections includes junction boxes, terminals, bulkheads, ports, and grounding connections. (5) General location of devices such as field, panel, auxiliary equipment, rack, termination cabinet, cable spreading room, I/O cabinet, etc. (6) Energy sources of devices, such as electrical power, air supply, and hydraulic fluid supply. Identify voltage, pressure, and other applicable requirements. For electrical sources, identify circuit or disconnect numbers. (7) Process lines and equipment sufficient to describe the process side of the loop and provide clarity of control action. Include what is being measured and what is being controlled. (8) Actions or fail-safe positions (electronic, pneumatic, or both) of control devices such as controllers, switches, control valves, solenoid valves, and transmitters (if reverse-acting). These are to be identified in accordance with ISA-5.1, "Instrumentation Symbols and Identification". b. Additional Required Items—The following information shall be provided on loop drawings (in a tabular format as shown in Figures 5 and 6 of ISA 5.4) in order to meet this requirement: (1) Process equipment, lines, and their identification numbers, source, designation, or flow direction. (2) Reference to supplementary records and drawings, such as installation details, P&IDs, location drawings, wiring diagrams or drawings, and instrument specifications. (3) Specific location of each device, such as elevation, area, panel subdivision, rack or cabinet number and location, I/O location. (4) References to equipment descriptions, manufacturers, model numbers, hardware types, specifications or data sheets, purchase order numbers. (5) Signal ranges and calibration information, including setpoint values for switches, and alarm and shutdown devices. (6) Software reference numbers, such as I/O addresses, control block types and names, network interfaces, point names. (7) Engraving or legend information that helps identify the instrument or accessory. Per ISA-5.4-1991 11. (8) Accessories, tagged or otherwise identified, such as regulators, filters, purge • meters, manifold valves, root valves. 104-1901 13300-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS (10) References to manufacturer's documentation such as schematics, connection details, operating instructions. (11) Color code identification for conductors or tubes that use numbers for differentiation. c. Submit, in electronic MS-Excel format, a database of all termination points and assignments for all loop terminations shown on the submitted loop drawings. F. Testing Plans Submittal 1. Test Procedure Submittals: Submit the procedures proposed to be followed for each test. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms, and checklists to be used to control and document the required tests. Include sign-off forms for each testing phase or loop with sign-off areas for the PCSS, Engineer, and Owner. Refer to Section 13302 for specific testing requirements, and submit separate procedures for each specified test phase. 2. Test Documentation: Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a copy of the signed off test procedures. Testing shall not be considered complete until the signed-off test procedures have been submitted and favorably reviewed. Submittal of other test documentation, including "highlighted" wiring diagrams with field technician notes, are not acceptable substitutes for the formal test documentation. 3. Each loop shall have a Loop Status signoff form to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These forms shall include the following information and check-off items: a. Project Name. b. Loop Number. c. Detailed test procedure indicating exactly how the loop will be tested including all required test equipment, necessary terminal block numbers, and simulation techniques required. d. Tag Number for each component. e. Check-offs/signoffs for each component: (1) Tag/identification (2) Installation (3) Termination -wiring (4) Termination -tubing (5) Calibration/adjustment f. Check-offs/signoffs for the loop: "Ng) 104-1901 13300-8 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS (1) Panel interface terminations (ilire (2) I/O interface terminations (3) I/O signal operation (4) Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted (5) Total loop operation (6) Space for comments (7) Sign off and date fields for the Contractor, the Engineer, and the PCSS 4. Each active analog subsystem element shall have a Component Calibration form. These forms shall have the following information, including space for data entry: a. Project Name. b. Loop Number. c. ISA Tag Number and I/O Module Address. d. Manufacturer. e. Model Number/Serial Number. ® f. Summary of Functional Requirements. For example: (1) For Indicators: Scale ranges. (2) For Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges. (3) For Computing Elements: Function. (4) For Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control modes (PID). (5) For Switching Elements: Unit range, differential (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE), reset (AUTO/MANUAL). (6) For I/O Modules: Input or output. g. Calibrations; for example: (1) For Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 50 and 100 percent of span. (2) For Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points. (3) For Controllers: Mode settings (PID). II (4) For I/O Modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs for 0, 50 and 100 percent of span. 104-1901 13300-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS h. Space for comments. i. Sign off and date fields for the Contractor, the Engineer, and the PCSS. G. Training Plans Submittal 1. Refer to Section 13303 for specific training requirements. H. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Submittal 1. This submittal shall include for each Subsystem: a. A list of, and descriptive literature for, spares, expendables, and test equipment as specified in Division 13. b. A list of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables, and test equipment recommended by the manufacturer. c. Unit and total costs for the additional spare items specified or recommended for each subsystem. I. Final System Documentation 1. The final system documentation shall consist of operations and maintenance manuals as specified herein. The manuals shall be bound in three-ring binders, maximum size of three inches, with drawings reduced to 11-inch by 17-inch, then folded to 8.5-inch by 11-inch for inclusion. Each section shall have a uniquely numbered tab divider, and each component within each section shall have a separate binder tab divider. 2. The operations and maintenance manuals shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: a. Table of Contents (1) A table of contents shall be provided for the entire manual with the specific contents of each volume clearly listed. The complete table of contents shall appear in each volume. b. Instrument and Equipment Lists (1) The following lists shall be developed in Microsoft Excel format and provided not only as a hardcopy in O&M but also electronically on a CD. (2) An instrument list for all devices supplied including tag number, description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, range, span, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data. (3) An equipment list for all non-instrument devices supplied listing description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, 104-1901 13300-10 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS 4 serial number, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data. c. Data Sheets with Vendor Operations and Maintenance Information (1) ISA S20 data sheets shall be provided for all field instruments. For non-field instrumentation devices, provide a cover page for each device, piece of equipment, and OEM software that lists, at a minimum, date, specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA S20, general data sheet; however, other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required information. (2) For any component requiring dip switch settings or custom software configuration, that information shall be included along with the corresponding data sheets and O&M information. d. As-Built Drawings (1) Complete as-built drawings, including all drawings and diagram specified in this Section under the "Submittals" section. These drawings shall include all termination points on all equipment the system in connected to, including terminal points of equipment not supplied by the PCSS. ID (2) As built documentation shall include information from submittals, as described in this Specification, updated to reflect the as-built system. Any errors in or modifications to the system resulting from the Factory and/or Functional Acceptance Tests shall be incorporated in this documentation. e. Original Licensed Software (1) Submit original software diskettes or CD-ROMs of all software provided under this Contract. Submit original paper-based and electronic documentation for all software provided. Submit license agreement information including serial numbers, license agreements, user registration numbers and related information. All software provided under this Contract shall be licensed to the Owner at the time of purchase. Provide media in software sleeves within O&M manual. f. Electronic O&M Information (1) In addition to the hard copy of O&M data, provide an electronic version of all equipment manuals CDROM or DVD. Electronic documents shall be supplied in Adobe Acrobat format. (2) Provide electronic files for all custom-developed manuals. Text shall be supplied in both Microsoft Office format and Adobe Acrobat format. ® (3) Provide electronic files for all drawings produced. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD ".dwg" format and in Adobe Acrobat format. Drawings shall be 104-1901 13300-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS provided using the AutoCAD eTransmit feature to bind external references, pen/line styles, and fonts into individual zip files along with the drawing file. (4) Each computer system hardware device shall be backed up onto CDROM or DVD after Substantial Completion and shall be turned over to the Owner. 3. The cover and edge of each volume shall contain the following information: Project Name (refer to Contract Documents) Contract Number (refer to Contract Documents) Instrumentation and Control System Hardware [or Applications Engineering] Operations and Maintenance Manual Specification Sections Subcontractor Name Date Volume X of Y (Where X is the volume number and Y is the number of volumes) 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Schedule the mandatory coordination meetings as described herein. The meetings shall be held at the Owner's designated location and shall include attendance by the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor and the PCSS's Project Engineer. Other Division 13 Specifications may require additional meetings. Prepare and distribute an agenda for this meeting a minimum of one week before the scheduled meeting date. Meeting shall be scheduled a minimum of one week before the requested meeting date. 1. A project kickoff coordination meeting shall be held within two weeks after submitting the Project Plan. The purpose of the meeting shall be to discuss the PCSS's Project Plan, to summarize the PCSS's understanding of the project; discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives; schedule testing and delivery deadline dates; provide a forum to coordinate hardware and software related issues; and request any additional information required from the Owner. The meeting will last up to one business day. 2. A submittal review coordination meeting shall be held after the Hardware and Software Packages, and Panel Layout Drawings and Wiring Diagrams submittal packages have been reviewed by the Engineer and returned to the PCSS. The purpose of this meeting shall be to review comments made on the submittal package; to refine scheduled deadline dates; coordinate equipment installation activities; and provide a forum for any further required coordination between the PCSS and AESS. The meeting will last up to one business day. 3. Refer to Section 13307 for additional required meetings with the AESS. 4. Regular onsite meetings during the time PCSS staff is at the plant site. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 104-1901 13300-12 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS 411, B. International Society of Automation (ISA) 1. ISA S5.2 Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations. 2. ISA S5.3 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems. 3. ISA S5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams. 4. ISA S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. 5. ISA RP60.3, Human Engineering for Control Centers. 6. ISA RP60.6, Nameplates, Labels, and Tags for Control Centers. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment -for custom fabricated equipment. ID2. A nationally recognized testing laboratory, as approved by the Authority having jurisdiction, may substitute for UL listing on commercial off-the-shelf products. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Process Control System Supplier(PCSS) shall be a "systems integrator" regularly engaged in the design and the installation of instrumentation and control systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water and wastewater industry. For the purposes of this section, a "systems integrator" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all of the following criteria: 1. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed ISA or manufacturer's training courses on general process instrumentation and configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. Key personnel shall hold ISA CCST Level 1 certification or have a minimum of 10 years of verifiable plant startup experience. Key personnel shall include, as a minimum, the lead field technician. 2. Has successfully completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three previous projects within the last five years. Successful completion shall be defined as a finished project completed on time, without any outstanding claims or litigation involving the PCSS. Potential references shall be for projects where the PCSS's contract was of similar size and scope to this project. (...., 3. Has been actively engaged in the type of work specified in this Specification Section for a minimum of five years. 104-1901 13300-13 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS B. The PCSS shall maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 300 miles of the project site with full-time employees capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, and testing the systems specified herein. At a minimum, the PCSS shall be capable of responding to onsite problems within 12 hours of notice. Provide an onsite response within four hours of notification, starting at two months before scheduled startup to two months after startup completion. C. PCSS shall hold a valid UL-508 certification for their panel fabrication facility. D. Actual installation of the instrumentation system need not be performed by the PCSS's employees; however, the PCSS as a minimum shall be responsible for the technical supervision of the installation by providing on site supervision to the installers of the various components. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommendation . B. Shipping Precautions 1. None of the HMI control and monitoring equipment shall be shipped to the site until the control room areas comply with specified ambient temperature and humidity. Have qualified personnel accept the equipment on delivery and supervise unloading within the control room areas. 2. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION A. Field Instrument Tags 1. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as indicated in the Drawings, shall be provided on each piece of equipment supplied under this Section. Equipment shall be tagged before shipping to the site. 2. Provide 1/8-inch by 3/8-inch, Type 316 stainless steel button head machine screws. 3. All supplied field instrument transmitters and field instrument transmitter elements shall have a stainless steel identification tag attached to each transmitter and element prior to shipment. Tag shall be attached via stainless steel chain or stainless steel wire (24-gauge minimum) to a non-removable part of the device. The tag size shall be a minimum of 1.5 square inches. Tag shall include the ISA alphanumeric instrument number as indicated in the P&IDs. The alphanumeric instrument number shall be stamped into the tag and shall have a minimum of 3/16-inch high alphanumeric characters. B. Panel Nameplates 1. See Section 13330. 104-1901 13300-14 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty per Warranties and Bonds, and as specified herein. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Environmental Requirements. Refer to Section 16000 for specific environmental and hazardous area classifications. B. Elevation: Equipment shall be designed to operate at the project ground elevation. C. Temperature: 1. Outdoor areas' equipment shall operate between -30 to 50 C degrees ambient. 2. Equipment located in indoor locations shall operate between 10 to 35 C degrees ambient minimum. 3. Storage temperatures shall range from 0 to 50 C degrees ambient minimum. 4. Additional cooling or heating shall be furnished if required by the equipment as specified herein. D. Relative Humidity. Air conditioned area equipment shall operate between 20 to 95 percent relative, non-condensing humidity. All other equipment shall operate between 0 to 100 percent relative, condensing humidity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS - GENERAL A. All instrumentation and electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, utilizing printed circuitry and epoxy or equal coating to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. The field-mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid and slightly corrosive service conditions. B. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks unless otherwise noted. Fasteners for securing control panels and enclosures to walls and floors shall be 316 stainless steel. Provide and size anchors in accordance with Division 1 and 5 as required per the seismic calculations. Provide minimum size anchor of 3/8-inch. C. All indicators shall be linear in process units, unless otherwise noted. All transmitters shall be provided with indicators in process units, accurate to two percent or better. D. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished shall be heavy duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain similar products of a single manufacturer, and shall consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion. tor PART 3 - EXECUTION 104-1901 13300-15 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The locations of equipment, transmitters, alarms and similar devices indicated are approximate only. Exact locations of all devices shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field, all information relevant to the placing of process control equipment and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Contractor and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The P&IDs and Drawings indicate the intent and not the precise nature of the interconnection between the individual instruments. Where indicated on the P&IDs or Drawings as not requiring installation, provide the instruments suitably packaged for storage. C. All equipment used in areas designated as hazardous shall be designed for the Class, Group and Division as required for the locations as shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 16. All work shall be in strict accordance with codes and local rulings. D. Unless specifically indicated, direct reading or electrical transmitting instrumentation shall not be mounted on process piping. Instrumentation shall be mounted on instrument racks or stands. All instrumentation connections shall be provided with shutoff and drain valves. For differential pressure transmitters, 5-valve manifolds for calibration, testing and blow down service shall also be provided. For chemical or corrosive fluids, diaphragm seals with flushing connections shall be provided. E. All piping and tubing to and from field instrumentation shall be provided with necessary unions, calibrations and test tees, couplings, adaptors, and shutoff valves. Process tubing shall be installed to slope from the instrument toward process for gas measurement service and from the process toward the instrument for liquid measurement service. Provide drain/vent valves or fittings at any process tubing points where the required slopes cannot be maintained. F. Brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment shall be provided. They shall be installed as shown and not interfere with any other equipment. G. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source to destination and be grounded at only one ground point for each shield. H. Investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, ship material in sections sized to permit passing through restricted areas in the building. Provide onsite service to oversee the installation, the placing and location of system components, their connections to the process equipment panels, cabinets and devices, subject to the Engineer's approval. Certify that field wiring associated with his/her equipment is installed in accordance with best industry practice. Schedule and coordinate work under this Section with that of the electrical work specified under applicable Sections of Division 16. I. Loop Tuning -All electronic control stations incorporating PID controllers shall be tuned following device installation but prior to commencement of the field tests. 104-1901 13300-16 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS J. PLC programming and HMI configuration shall be provided by PCSS supplier or appointed by OWNER, PCSS shall contract hire an OWNER reselected software programmer to perform programming modifications to the PLC and HMI applications. The existing City owned software shall be verified and as needed or instructed by the OWNER. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the Owner. 1. Optimal loop tuning shall be achieved either by auto-tuning software or manually by trial and error, Ziegler-Nichols step-response method, or other documented process tuning method. Assigning common PID factors for identical loops following field tuning of a single typical loop is acceptable. However, tuning documentation shall be submitted for each loop individually as specified in Part 1 of these Specifications. 2. Determine and configure optimal tuning parameters to assure stable, steady state operation of final control elements running under the control of field-mounted, dedicated PID controllers or software based PID controllers residing as part of the programmable logic controller system. Each control loop that includes anti-reset windup features shall be adjusted to provide optimum response following startup from an integral action saturation condition. 3. Tune all PID control loops to eliminate excessive oscillating final control elements. Loop parameters shall be adjusted to achieve 1/4 amplitude damping or better. In addition, loop steady state shall be achieved at least as fast as the loop response time associated with critical damping. 4. Loop performance and stability shall be verified in the field following tuning by step changes to setpoint. Submit loop tuning methodology and verification as part of the final system documentation as specified in PART 1. 5. For cascade loops, tune both sets of controllers so that the cascade loop achieves the loop tuning characteristics specified herein. 3.02 TESTING A. Refer to Section 13302. 3.03 TRAINING A. Refer to Section 13303. END OF SECTION 411, 104-1901 13300-17 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERAL PROVISIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 13300-18 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C -TESTING Section 13302 4111, &C—TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, and incidentals required and installed, and place into operation the instrument and control system as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. This section covers the testing requirements for all devices and systems furnished and installed detailed on the Drawings, and as described in the related Sections of Division 13. C. Refer to Section 13300. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS II; A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. (so 104-1901 13302-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C - TESTING 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.11 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.12 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Refer to Section 13300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING - GENERAL A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Confirmation of an operational control system is dependent upon results derived from test procedures as specified in this section. Test all equipment at the factory prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all equipment provided shall be tested at the factory as a single fully integrated system. C. Coordinate the testing of the ORT and FDT with the Owner. D. At a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Operational Readiness Test (ORT). 2. Functional Demonstration Test (FDT). 3. 30-day Site Acceptance Test (SAT). E. As the construction for this project will occur in multiple phases, the system integrator will perform testing of the equipment in multiple phases as defined in Appendix C (attached at the end of this section). Refer to Appendix C for a list of the components that will be tested in each phase, and the type of test that will be performed for the components in each phase. F. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied. G. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Engineer and/or Owner approved procedures, forms, and checklists as submitted under PART 1 of Section 13300. Each test to be performed shall be described and a space provided after it for sign-off by the appropriate parties after its satisfactory completion. Include "punchlist" forms with the test procedures to document issues that arise during the testing. Punchlist forms, at a 104-1901 13302-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C -TESTING minimum, shall include a specification cross reference; an issues description field; a (ir resolution description field; and a sign-off area for the PCSS, Owner, and Engineer. ' H. Copies of the signed-off test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required testing documentation. The test result forms shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 10 days of completion of each test. I. The PCSS shall provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. These simulation techniques shall be defined in the test procedures. J. The PCSS shall coordinate all required testing with the Contractor, all affected Subcontractors, the Engineer, and the Owner. K. The PCSS shall furnish the services of field service engineers, all special calibration and test equipment, and labor to perform the field tests. L. The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions, whether or not explicitly stated on the Test Procedures, as required to determine compliance with the functional requirements of the overall system. Such testing required to determine compliance with the specified requirements shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. tfr M. No equipment shall be shipped until the Engineer and/or Owner has received all test results and approved the system is ready for shipment. N. Correction of Deficiencies 1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 FIELD TESTING - OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. Following installation of the process control system components and prior to startup and the Functional Demonstration Test, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, wired, calibrated, tested, etc., and documented) that it is installed and ready for the FDT as defined below. B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these Specifications. (Iry 104-1901 13302-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C - TESTING C. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer approved forms and checklists. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check-off items with spaces for sign-off by the system supplier: 1. Project Name, Test Date, PCSS Name, and Lead PCSS Technician Name. 2. Loop Number. 3. Tag Number for each component. 4. Check-offs/sign-offs for each component: Tag/identification; installation; termination (wiring and tubing); scale, range, and setpoint as applicable; and calibration/ adjustment (four-point for analog, set point for switches) rising and falling. 5. Check-offs/sign-offs for the loop: Panel interface terminations; I/O interface terminations; I/O signal operation; inputs/outputs operational (received/sent, processed, adjusted); total loop operation; process controller scaling and adjustment; and space for comments. 6. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign-off by the PCSS. a. Project Name. b. Loop Number. c. Component Tag Number of I/O Module Number. d. Component Code Number Analog System. e. Manufacturer (for Analog system element). f. Model Number/Serial Number (for Analog system). g. Summary of functional requirements shall include, but not be limited to, scale and chart ranges of indicators, recorders, and transmitters/converters; functions of computing elements; and parameters of controllers (i.e., proportional, integral, derivative, reverse/forward acting, etc.). h. Calibrations shall include testing of analog input and output signals at zero, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span. Where appropriate, discrete input signals shall include details regarding actual trip points and reset points. i. Space for comments. j. Space for sign-off by the PCSS. D. The PCSS shall maintain the Loop Status Reports sheets at the job site and make them available to the Engineer/Owner at any time. 104-1901 13302-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C -TESTING E. These inspections, calibrations, and tests do not require witnessing. However, the C Engineer will review Loop Status Sheets and spot check the test process periodically. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected by the PCSS prior to commencement of the FDT. F. Prior to checkout of the I/O to the HMI, the PCSS shall thoroughly test all I/O from the field device to the PLC terminals, and verify the PLC is powered up and the PLC is communicating to the HMI servers. After the PCSS has successfully tested all I/O from the field devices to the PLC terminals, the PCSS shall test all I/O from the HMI to the field device. Should this test prove to be unsuccessful, the PCSS and G. PCSS shall test from the HMI to the terminations located in the Owner's termination cabinet, and the PCSS shall inform the Owner in writing of the discrepancy with the existing field wire. G. Computer-Manual (i.e., Remote-Manual) start/stop, open/close commands of all devices controlled by the SCADA system shall be verified by the PCSS during the ORT. Simultaneously, the PCSS may continue with Computer-Automatic testing to confirm the control strategies were implemented as specified. H. For all panels with enclosures (new and existing) modified by this contract, heat load tests shall be performed to ensure proper cooling/ventilation is being provided. I. Upon successful completion of the ORT, the PCSS shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and request the scheduling of the FDT as noted in ® the following section. 3.03 FIELD TESTING - FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Prior to startup and the 30-day Site Acceptance Test(s), the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the ORT. The FDT will be a joint test by the PCSS. B. Once a process area has been started up and is operating, a witnessed FDT shall be performed on that system to demonstrate that it is operating and is in compliance with these Specifications. A witnessed FDT shall be performed on each process area. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis. C. Loop specific and non loop specific tests shall be the same as specified under WFT, except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functions demonstrated using live field-based data to the greatest extent possible. D. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the factory tests shall be made available to the Engineer at the job site both before and during the tests. In addition, one copy of all 0 & M Manuals shall be available for reference at the job site, both before and during testing. E. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the factory tests shall also be followed (1111, during the FDT. 104-1901 13302-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C - TESTING F. During the FDT, a demonstration of communication failure and recovery shall be accomplished. This test shall be scheduled and coordinated with Owner's personnel to minimize the impact on plant operations. G. Following initial startup, the entire process control system shall operate for a continuous 100 hours without failure before this test will be started. H. Punchlist items and resolutions noted during the test shall be documented on the Punchlist/Resolution form. In the event of rejection of any part or function test procedure, perform repairs, replacement, and/or retest within 10 days. I. Upon successful completion of the FDT, the PCSS shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and request the scheduling of the SAT as noted in the following section. 3.04 FIELD TESTING - 7-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the system shall undergo a 7-day Site Acceptance Test (SAT), under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non-field-repairable malfunction. B. During this test, plant operations and PCSS personnel shall be present as required to address any potential issues that would impact the overall system operation. Provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system. When not on site, provide cell phone/pager numbers that the Owner personnel can use to ensure that support staff is available by phone and/or on site within four hours of a request by operations staff. C. While this test is proceeding, the Engineer and Owner's Agent shall have full use of the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. Plant operations shall remain the responsibility of Owner and the decision of plant operators regarding plant operations shall be final. D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed and corrected. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test. E. Any malfunction during this 7-consecutive-day test period which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered as a non-field-repairable malfunction. Upon completion of repairs, the SAT will be re-started from the date on which the malfunction(s) were successfully corrected and the Owner and Engineer had accepted and signed off on the repairs. F. In the event of rejection of any part or function, perform repairs or replacement within 10 days. G. All data base, process controller logic, and graphical interface system errors must be functioning as required per the specifications prior to the start of each test period. The 7- day test will not be considered successful until all data base points and logic functions are tested and verified to be correct. 104-1901 13302-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C -TESTING H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent during this test (1111, period. Availability shall be defined as: 1. Availability in percent = 100 * (Total Testing Time— Down Time)/Total Testing Time I. Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or backup power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above. J. Throughout the duration of the 7-day SAT, no software or hardware modifications shall be made to the system without prior approval from the Owner and Engineer. K. Upon successful completion of the 7-day operation test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete and the warranty period shall commence. L. Certification of Installation: Following successful completion of the 7-day test, issue a Certification of Installation. Certification shall be on corporate letterhead and signed by an officer of the firm. Certification shall state that the process control system has been completed in conformance with plans and specifications. Certification shall be submitted to the Engineer as specified herein. END OF SECTION C 104-1901 13302-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C - TESTING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 13302-8 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C TRAINING iiir Section 13303 I&C—TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish training as specified herein. B. This Section covers the training requirements for all devices and systems furnished andinstalled as detailed on the Drawings. C. Refer to Section 13300. 1.02 RELATED WORK A.Refer to Section 13300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Refer to Section 13300. IIIB.Preliminary Training Plan Submittal 1. Prior to the preparation of the Final Training Plans, submit outlines of each training course including course objectives and target audience, resumes of instructors, prerequisite requirements for each class, and samples of handouts for review. C. Final Training Plan Submittal 1. Upon receipt of the Engineer's comments on the preliminary training plan, submit the specific proposed training plan. The training plan shall include: a. Definitions, objectives, and target audience of each course. b. Schedule of training courses, including proposed dates, duration and locations of each class. c. Complete copy of all proposed handouts and training materials. Training information shall be bound and logically arranged with all materials reduced to a maximum size of 11-inch by 17-inch, then folded to 8.5-inch by 11-inch for inclusion into the binder. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) Cp- 104-1901 13303-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C TRAINING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The cost of the training programs shall be included in the Contract price. The training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being supplied. The training program shall represent a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the operation and maintenance of the system. B. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule. C. All onsite instructors must be intimately familiar with the operation and control of the Owner's facilities. D. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. The manuals shall be provided for each student. Provide electronic copy of each training manual in PDF format for Owner's future use. E. The trainer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, all training materials shall be delivered to Owner. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape all custom training sessions. All training tapes shall become the sole property of the Owner. G. The system supplier shall be retained to provide operation and maintenance training for all plant monitoring and control system equipment as specified herein. H. For equipment items not manufactured by the system supplier, on-site training shall be provided by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer. The manufacturer's representative shall be fully knowledgeable in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. 3.02 TRAINING SUMMARY A.The following training courses listed in the summary table shall, as a minimum, be provided: B.Definitions of Audience Roles 1. Administrator- personnel responsible for maintaining the PLC and SCADA HMI system. 2. Maintenance - personnel responsible for maintaining the field controller hardware and instrumentation system. 3. Operations - personnel responsible for daily plant operations. 4. Management- non-daily operations personnel 104-1901 13303-2 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C TRAINING 41r 3.03 ONSITE TRAINING A.Training personnel shall be intimately familiar with the control system equipment, its manipulation, and configuration. Training personnel shall command knowledge of system debugging, program modification, troubleshooting, maintenance procedure, system operation, and programming, and shall be capable of transferring this knowledge in an orderly fashion to technically oriented personnel. B.Instruments Training 1. Provide instruction on the maintenance of the field and panel instrumentation for the Owner's instrumentation technicians. This training shall be conducted before the FDT, but no more than one month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall take place at the Owner's facility. As a minimum, the following shall be included: a. Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided. b. Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract. c. Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures. 411 d. Troubleshooting and diagnosis. e. Periodic maintenance. C. Instruments - Operator Familiarity 1. Provide operator level instruction on the use of the field and panel instrumentation for the Owner's operations staff. This training shall be conducted before the FDT, but no more than one month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall take place at the Owner's facility. Include hands on demonstration of the information each transmitter indicates and the method used to retrieve any operator information from the transmitter, including use of pushbuttons and interpretation of international graphic symbols used on the instruments. END OF SECTION Cie 104-1901 13303-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C TRAINING THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 13303-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Section 13305 41, l&C - CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL I.()1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This specification section is provided for reference to the Process Control System Supplier (PCSS). B. Programming is by the Applications Engineering Services Supplier (AESS) within Section 13307. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The following control descriptions are broken into areas. The following is a list of areas and the loop numbers associated with each area: 1. Well and Booster Pumps Control System B. The control descriptions are sorted by loop number and/or process area. Each loop is associated with a specific PLC cabinet location to which it shall communicate. C. The control descriptions are broken into a hierarchical structure. There may be one layer or multiple layers per loop, depending on the loop. An example of a multiple layered loop is as follows: The lowest layer of control, local control, is at that piece of equipment or that piece of equipment's panel or drive. The second layer of control is at an intermediate control panel between the equipment and the PLC I/O. The highest layer of control is by the PLC System with its associated SCADA HMI in the main control room. The PLC which does the actual monitoring and control logic for the process equipment and the SCADA HMI, which are computers that have graphical software that interface to the PLC software for monitoring and implementing all operator-required tasks to control that process equipment. Any functions done in the operator workstations also take place at all the SCADA OITs. 3.02 CONTROL FUNCTION DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL CRITERIA A. The following control descriptions shall be used in conjunction with all Project Drawings. Logic descriptions are provided for both the HMI and PLC software required under this Contract. B. For all controlled devices such as pumps, valves, etc., if the device is commanded to Start or Stop (or Open or Close) by the PLC and the device feedback state does not (b. 104-1901 13305-1 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS match the commanded state within a preset time, an equipment Discrepancy Alarm is generated by the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI and the device is commanded to Stop (valves shall remain in the last state). If a duty pump, or system, is commanded to start and does not start within the pre-set time, an alarm shall be generated by the PLC for display and alarming at the HMI. The operator shall then determine whether or not to start the standby pump or system. Also, if a device feedback state does not match the commanded state at any time, excluding the change of state described above, an equipment Failure Alarm is generated by the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI and the device is commanded to Stop (valves shall remain in the last state). After a Discrepancy Alarm occurs, the device cannot be started again until the operator at the SCADA HMI has issued a Reset. All controlled devices with feedback shall generate Failure alarms at the PLC for display and alarming at the associated process graphic displays, even if not shown on the Loop Drawings. C. All analog alarms shall be generated at the PLC level and shall be generated by the PLC as follows: If the analog point's value exceeds or drops below the alarm limit value, then an alarm shall be generated at the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI. To eliminate excessive alarm reporting, the analog point shall remain in alarm until the analog point's value returns beyond the limit set by the analog limit dead band. D. For all analog points (such as level, flow, pressure, etc.), if the value of the analog point is below a value of 2 mA since the last time the analog point was scanned by the PLC, Loss-of-Signal shall be generated at the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI. The alarms shall remain in effect until the value is within the normal signal range (4-20 mA) the next time the analog point is scanned by the PLC. All analog points shall generate a Loss-of-Signal Alarm at the PLC for displaying and alarming on the associated process graphic displays even if not shown on the Drawings. E. For all analog points (such as level, flow, pressure, etc.), if the value of the analog point is above or below the transmitter range, Out-Of-Range alarm shall be generated at the PLC level for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI (if applicable). F. All alarm and control set points shall be adjustable at the SCADA HMI unless specifically stated otherwise, even if not shown on the Drawings. Only personnel with the proper level of security authorization will be able to access these setpoints. Some alarms and/or set points shall be hard coded in the PLC and not adjustable by the Operator. Generally, hard coded values will be alarms and/or set points that are not anticipated to change. G. Preclusion logic shall be added to all applicable alarms. This logic will prevent secondary alarms that are a direct result of a primary alarm from being annunciated. For example, station power failure should not cause a circuit breaker-tripped alarm to be annunciated. H. Runtimes for all motorized equipment shall be totalized in the PLC and indicated at the SCADA HMI with 0.1 (tenth) hour resolution. Number of starts for all motorized equipment shall also be totalized in the PLC and indicated at the SCADA HMI. Three runtimes and 'number-of-starts' shall be calculated: accumulated for the current day, total for the previous day and an overall accumulated with the capability to be reset at the SCADA HMI. Only personnel with the proper level of security authorization will be 104-1901 13305-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS able to perform this reset function. Runtime and 'number-of-starts' reports shall include Cr' hourly and daily totals. I. All flows shall be totalized in the PLC as daily totals and accumulated totals even if not shown on the Loop Drawings. Daily totals will be reset at midnight and then displayed as "Yesterday's Total Flow" at the SCADA HMI. Accumulated totals shall only be reset at the SCADA HMI by personnel with the proper level of security authorization. Flow rates and flow totals shall be indicated and recorded at the SCADA HMI. When a valve is closed or a pump is not running, the flow totalizer shall not accumulate values caused by noise or errors in calibration. J. All software adjustable alarm set points accessible from the SCADA HMI shall have adjustable dead bands unless specifically noted otherwise. K. All process analog inputs are displayed, historically collected and trended. Low-low, low, high and high-high alarms shall be calculated at the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI. Nuisance alarms, such as low turbidity, shall be inhibited. When a valve is closed or a pump is not running, the analog flow signal associated with that valve or pump shall not generate a low flow alarm, and it shall be forced to a zero valve. L. All alarms shall be acknowledged before they can be cleared. No alarm shall clear automatically until it has been acknowledged. M. For all variable speed pumps, if the pump is commanded to run at a specific speed and the speed feedback signal deviates from the commanded speed by a preset dead band for a preset time period, a speed deviation alarm is generated by the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI. N. For all modulating valves, if the valve is commanded to a specific position, and the position feedback signal deviates from the requested position by a preset dead band for a preset time period, a position deviation alarm is generated by the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI. 0. For all controlled set points (i.e., level, flow, etc.), if a process is requested to a specific set point, and the control variable feedback signal deviates from the requested set point by a preset dead band for a preset time period, a set point deviation alarm is generated by the PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI. P. All tuning parameters for each PLC software PID controller are entered at the SCADA HMI. Tuning trends are provided to tune and monitor each PID operation. Tuning parameters settings are password protected. Q. Provide specific communication status(s) for all peer-to-peer data communications. Upon a peer-to-peer communication failure, a communication failure alarm shall be generated at each PLC for display and alarming at the SCADA HMI. This communication failure alarm shall also be utilized for the associated control strategy. 3.03 CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS tb. 104-1901 13305-3 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS A. PLC Control Panel I. Overview b. Existing PLC Control Panel: Contractor shall provide analog, digital and relays I/O cards, relays and terminal blocks, wires including modification to existing PLC and SCADA HMI programs. c. Existing Termination Control cabinet: Contractor shall provide H-O-A switches for booster pumps including terminal blocks, relays and field verify and modification to existing control wires as required to ensure provide a complete working system. Including provide Warrick Controls electromechanical control relays, terminal blocks, control relays and modify existing control circuit for well pump automatic control to server as backup to PLC control system. Contractor shall verify existing well pump on/off level setpoints and setting probes for both GST tanks accordingly. d. Existing Autosensory Control Section: Contractor shall field verify and modification to existing control wires as required to ensure provide a complete working system. c. PLC Control Functions: Contractor shall download, evaluate and review existing PLC programs and associated SCADA HMI displays and make modification to PLC and SCADA HMI. Contractor shall modify PLC control function for new GST tank level and new booster pumps VFDs, the P&ID control for the VFDs shall operates within the booster pumps pressure setpoints. Pressure setpoints, GST level and interlocks shall be input by operator at SCADA HMI. 2. Local VFD Manual Control a. At VFD: Each VFD will have a keypad interface with a small screen to allow an operator to configure the VFD settings. When an operator selects `local' mode using the L/R setting on the VFD keypad interface, an operator shall be able to set the speed and start/stop the pump from the VFD keypad interface. b. At Termination Cabinet: A local H-O-A is provided for each pump. When an operator selects `remote' mode using the L/R setting on the VFD keypad interface, and the H/O/A switch on the termination cabinet is placed in the `hand' position, an operator shall be able to start the pump. 3. Automatic Control a. At VFD: Each VFD will have a keypad interface with a small screen to allow an operator to configure the VFD settings. When an operator selects `remote' mode using the L/R setting on the VFD keypad interface, an operator shall be able to set the booster pumps run speed at the SCADA HMI. b. At Termination Cabinet: A local H-O-A is provided for each pump. When an operator selects `remote' mode using the L/R setting on the VFD keypad 104-1901 13305-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS interface, and the H/O/A switch the termination cabinet is placed in the `remote' position, the PLC shall control booster pump within the control pressure setpoints. END OF SECTION 104-1901 13305-5 Gupta &Associates. Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 13305-6 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT Section 13330 tor l&C - CONTROL PANELS AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Furnish and install control panels and panel mounted equipment as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. C. All panel components shall match existing equipment makes and models wherever possible, so that system additions can be most easily integrated with respect to operation and maintenance training, spare parts inventory, and service contracts. Even when exact matches are not possible, equipment furnished must be fully compatible with the existing system. Color, size, and material of new panels should conform to that of existing panels. D. All control panels modification location as shown on the Electrical Drawings and unless noted as otherwise. PANELS MODIFICATION SCHEDULE 411/ — - Panel Designation Panel Size Space Available [ Enclosure Rating & Type Existing PLC Refer to Electrical Control Panel in NEMA Type 12 Control Room Drawings. Existing Autosensory Refer to Electrical NEMA Type 12 Section in Electrical Drawings. Room Existing Termination Refer to Electrical NEMA Type 12 Cabinet in Electrical Drawings. Room Existing Sensaphone Refer to Electrical Control Panel in Drawings NEMA Type 12 Electrical Room Existing Well Pump Refer to Electrical Control Panel in NEMA Type 12 Electrical Room Drawings 1.02 RELATED WORK 4111, A. Refer to Section 13300. 104-1901 13330-1 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland I&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.08 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Test Equipment: 1. Refer to Section 13300. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 13300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Section 13300. 2.02 LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 13300. 2.03 CONTROL PANEL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The dimensions within this Section and on the Contract Drawings are for general reference only. Ensure that final enclosure sizing and panel arrangements accommodate all required equipment for a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein and in the Contract Documents. 104-1901 13330-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland I&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT 41, B. Each control panel and terminal cabinet shall bear the UL label. The UL label shall apply to the enclosure, the specific equipment supplied with the enclosure, and the installation and wiring of the equipment within and on the enclosure. If required for UL labeling, provide ground fault protective devices, isolation transformers, fuses and any other equipment necessary to achieve compliance with UL 508 requirement. The Drawings do not detail all UL 508 requirements. C. All panel doors shall have a lock installed in the door handle, or a hasp and staple for padlocking. Locks for all panels provided under this Contract shall be keyed alike. D. The devices designated for rear of panel mounting shall be arranged within the panel according to respective panel Drawings and in a manner to allow for ease of maintenance and adjustment. Heat generating devices such as power supplies shall be located at or near the top of the panel. E. The panels shall be completely fabricated, instruments and devices installed and wired at the PCSS's facility. F. All components shall be mounted in a manner that shall permit servicing, adjustment, testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving, or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required otherwise by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Component mounting shall be oriented in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic or metal engraved nametags mounted adjacent to (not on)each component identifying the component in accordance with the Drawing, specifications, and PCSS's data. G. All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets, faceplates, etc. required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel. H. Nameplates 1. All panels and panel devices shall be supplied with suitable nameplates, which identify the panel and individual devices as required. Unless otherwise indicated, each device nameplate shall include up to three lines with the first line containing the device tag number as shown on the Drawings, the second line containing a functional description (e.g., Recirculation Pump No. 1), and the third line containing a functional control description (e.g., Start). 2. Unless escutcheon plates are specified or unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, nameplates shall be 3/32-inch thick, black and white, Lamicoid with engraved inscriptions. The letters shall be Black against a White background unless otherwise noted. Edges of the nameplates shall be beveled and smooth. Nameplates with chipped or rough edges will not be acceptable. 3. Nameplate fasteners and mounting shall be epoxy adhesive or stainless steel screws for cabinet-mounted nameplates 411, 104-1901 13330-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT 4. For every panel, provide a panel nameplate with a minimum of 1-inch high letters. Provide legend plates or 1-inch by 3-inch engraved nameplates with 1/4-inch lettering for identification of door mounted control devices, pilot lights, and meters. 5. Single lamicoid nameplates with multiple legends shall be used for grouping of devices such as selector switches and pilot lights that relate to one function. I. Mounting Elevations 1. ISA Recommended Practice RP60.3 shall be used as a guide in layout and arrangement of panels and panel mounted components. Dimensions shall account for all housekeeping pads that panels will sit on once they are installed. 2. Centerline of indicators and controllers shall be located no lower than 48 inches or higher than 66 inches above the floor or access platform on a panel face. 3. Centerline of lights, selector switches, and pushbuttons shall be located no lower than 32 inches or higher than 70 inches above the floor or access platform on a panel face. 4. Tops of annunciators shall be located no higher than 86 inches above the floor or access platform on a panel face. 5. Installation of panel components shall conform to component manufacturer's guidelines. 2.04 PANEL MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Structure and Enclosure 1. Panels shall be of continuous welded steel or FRP construction as shown on the Panel Schedule. Provide angle stiffeners as required on the back of the panel face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation. Internally the panels shall be supplied with a structural framework for instrument support purposes and panel bracing. The internal framework shall permit panel lifting without racking or distortion. Provide removable lifting rings designed to facilitate simple, safe rigging, and lifting of the control panels during installation. 2. Each panel shall be provided with full height, fully gasketed access doors where shown. Doors shall be provided with a three point stainless steel latch (except for NEMA 4X panels) and heavy duty stainless steel locking handle. Rear access doors (if included) shall be conveniently arranged and sized such that they extend no further than 24 inches beyond the panel when opened to the 90-degree position. Front and side access doors shall be as shown. Panel access doors shall be provided with full length, continuous, piano type stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins. Front access doors with mounted instruments or control devices shall be of sufficient width to permit door opening without interference from flush mounted instruments. 104-1901 13330-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland I&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT 3. The panels, including component parts, shall be free from sharp edges and welding flaws. Wiring shall be free from kinks and sharp bends and shall be routed for easy access to other components for maintenance and inspection purposes. 4. The panel shall be suitable for top and bottom conduit entry as required by the Electrical Drawings. For top-mounted conduit entry, the panel top shall be provided with nominal one-foot square removable access plates, which may be drilled to accommodate conduit and cable penetrations. All conduit and cable penetrations shall be provided with ground bushings, hubs, gasketed locknuts, and other accessories as required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel and electrical rating of the conduit system. 5. All panels in indoor, dry, non-corrosive environments shall be NEMA 12 unless otherwise noted. All panels in outdoor, wet, and non-chemically corrosive environments shall be NEMA 4 unless otherwise noted. Panels in chemically corrosive environments shall be NEMA 4X unless otherwise noted. All panels located in a hazardous location shall be rated for the type of hazard (e.g., NEMA 7 for Class 1, Division 1). B. Freestanding and Floor-Mounted Vertical Panels 1. Freestanding and floor-mounted vertical panels shall meet the NEMA classification as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. The panels shall be constructed of 12-gauge sheet steel, suitably braced internally for structural rigidity and strength. All ® NEMA 4X rated panels shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, unless FRP is specifically indicated to be provided. Front panels or panels containing instruments shall be not less than 10-gauge stretcher leveled sheet steel, reinforced to prevent warping or distortion. C. Wall and Unistrut Mounted Panels 1. All wall and Unistrut mounted panels shall meet the NEMA classification as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. The panels shall be constructed of not less than USS 14-gauge steel, suitably braced internally for structural rigidity and strength. All NEMA 4X rated wall mounted panels shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, unless FRP is specifically indicated. FRP panels shall be used in chlorine areas. All FRP panels located in direct sunlight shall be provided with a protective coating and sun shield to prevent discoloration and cracking. D. Finish Requirements 1. All sections shall be de-scaled, degreased, filled, ground and finished. The enclosure when fabricated of steel shall be finished with two rust resistant phosphate prime coats and two coats of enamel, polyurethane, or lacquer finish which shall be applied by either the hot air spray or conventional cold spray methods. Brushed anodized aluminum, stainless steel, and FRP panels will not require a paint finish. 2. The panels shall have edges ground smooth and shall be sandblasted and then cleaned with a solvent. Surface voids shall be filled and ground smooth. 46, 104-1901 13330-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT 3. Immediately after cleaning, one coat of a rust inhibiting primer shall be applied inside and outside, followed by an exterior intermediate and top coat of a two-component type epoxy enamel. A final sanding shall be applied to the intermediate exterior coat before top coating. 4. Apply a minimum of two coats of flat white lacquer on the panel interior after priming. 5. Unless otherwise noted, the finish exterior colors shall be ANSI 61 gray with a textured finish. E. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. The storage pockets shall be steel, welded on to the door, and finished to match the interior panel color. The storage pocket shall be sufficient to hold all of the prints required to service the equipment, and to accommodate 8.5-inch by 11-inch documents without folding. F. Where specified on the Panel Schedule, a folding shelf shall be provided on the inside of the door on all free-standing and floor-mounted panels. The shelf shall be suitable for a laptop computer and shall be placed such that an open laptop computer does not interfere with any door-mounted devices. The folded shelf shall not interfere with any internal panel components when the door is closed. The folding shelf shall automatically lock in the horizontal position when raised. The folding shelf shall be approximately 18 inches wide by 12 inches deep and shall have a minimum distributed load rating of 100 pounds. All parts shall be made of heavy gauge steel and shall be painted white or finished to match the interior panel color. G. Manufacturer: 1 . Hoffman 2. Approved Equal 2.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL A. All panels shall be provided with louvers, sun shields, heat sinks, forced air ventilation, or air conditioning units as required to prevent temperature buildup inside of panel. The internal temperature of all panels shall be regulated to a range of 45 Deg F to 104 Deg F under all conditions. Under no circumstances shall the panel cooling or heating equipment compromise the NEMA rating of the panel. B. PCSS shall submit heat dissipation calculations for every control panel. C. Except for panels mounted with their backs directly adjacent to a wall, louvers shall be in the rear of the panels, top and bottom, and shall be stamped sheet metal construction. D. For panels mounted with their backs directly adjacent to a wall, louvers shall be on the sides. E. Forced air ventilation fans, where used, shall provide a positive internal pressure within the panel, and shall be provided with washable or replaceable filters. Fan motors shall operate on 120-Volt, 60-Hz power. 104-1901 13330-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT F. For panels with internal heat that cannot be adequately dissipated with natural convection and heat sinks, or forced air ventilation, an air conditioner shall be provided. G. Provide custom fabricated sun shields for all outdoor panels in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Sun shields shall be fabricated from minimum 12-gauge Type 316 stainless steel. Units shall be designed, fabricated, installed, and supported to fully cover and shade the top, sides and back of the enclosure, and to partially shade the front panel of the enclosure, from direct exposure to sunlight from sunrise to sunset. 2. Depending on overall size, sun shields may be fabricated in single or multiple segments for attachment to the enclosure support framing or to separate freestanding framing around the enclosure. 3. Sun shields shall not be attached directly to the enclosure by drilling holes through, or welding studs to, the enclosure surfaces, and shall be designed and mounted to provide a minimum 3-inch air gap all around the enclosure for air circulation and heat dissipation. 4. The top section of all sun shields shall be sloped at a minimum angle of 5 degrees from horizontal. For wall-mounted enclosures, the top section shall slope downward away from the wall and towards the front of the enclosure. For freestanding, floor- mounted and frame-mounted enclosures, the top section shall slope downward towards the back side of the enclosure. • 5. The front edge of the top section of all sun shields shall incorporate a narrow and more steeply sloped drip shield segment which sheds water away from the front of the enclosure and prevents it from dripping or running directly onto the front panel of the enclosure. 6. All seam welds used in sun shield fabrication shall be continuous and shall be ground smooth. 7. All exposed corners, edges and projections shall be smooth rounded or chamfered to prevent injury. H. All outdoor enclosures and enclosures located in unheated areas indoors or in areas subject to humidity and moisture shall be provided with an integral heater, fan, and adjustable thermostat to reduce condensation and maintain the minimum internal panel temperature. Mount the unit near the bottom of the enclosure with discharge away from heat-sensitive equipment. Heater shall be Hoffman DAH 100 Watts, 115 Volt, 50/60 HZ, or equal. 2.06 CORROSION CONTROL A. Panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion inhibiting vapor capsules as manufactured by Northern Technologies International Corporation, Model Zerust VC; Hoffman Model AHCI; or equal. 41.0 2.07 CONTROL PANEL - INTERNAL CONSTRUCTION 104-1901 13330-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Internal Electrical Wiring 1. All interconnecting wiring shall be stranded, type MTW, and shall have 600-Volt insulation and be rated for not less than 90 degrees Celsius. Wiring for systems operating at voltages in excess of 120VAC shall be segregated from other panel wiring either in a separate section of a multi-section panel or behind a removable Plexiglas or similar dielectric barrier. Panel layout shall be developed such that technicians shall have complete access to 120VAC and lower voltage wiring systems without direct exposure to higher voltages. 2. Power distribution wiring on the line side of fuses or breakers shall be 12 AWG minimum. Control wiring on the secondary side of fuses shall be 16 AWG minimum. Electronic analog circuits shall utilize 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair, cable insulated for not less than 600 Volts. 3. Power and low voltage DC wiring systems shall be routed in separate wireways. Crossing of different system wires shall be at right angles. Different system wires routed parallel to each other shall be separated by at least 6 inches. Different wiring systems shall terminate on separate terminal blocks. Wiring troughs shall not be filled to more than 60 percent visible fill. 4. Terminations a. All wiring shall terminate onto single tier terminal blocks, where each terminal is uniquely and sequentially numbered. Direct wiring between field equipment and panel components is not acceptable. b. Multi-level terminal blocks or strips are not acceptable. c. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into groups (power, AC control, DC signal). Each group of terminal blocks shall have a minimum of 25 percent spares. d. Terminal blocks shall be the compression type, fused, unfused, or switched as shown on the Contract Drawings or specified elsewhere in Division 13. e. Discrete inputs and outputs (DI and DO) shall have two terminals per point with adjacent terminal assignments. All active and spare PLC controller points shall be wired to terminal blocks. f. Analog inputs and outputs (Al and AO) shall have three terminals per shielded pair connection with adjacent terminal assignments for each point. The third terminal is for shielded ground connection for cable pairs. Ground the shielded signal cable at the PLC controller cabinet. All active and spare PLC controller points shall be wired to terminal blocks. g. Wire and tube markers shall be the sleeve type with heat impressed letters and numbers. h. Only one side of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field wiring side of the terminal shall not be within 6 inches of the side panel or 104-1901 13330-8 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT adjacent terminal or within 8 inches of the bottom of freestanding panels, or within 3 inches of stanchion-mounted panels, or 3 inches of adjacent wireway. i. Circuit power from the SCADA cabinet out to field devices (switches, dry contacts, etc.) that are used as discrete inputs to the PLC controller input cards shall be isolated with an isolating switch terminal block with flip cover that is supplied with a dummy fuse. Isolation switch block shall be an Allen Bradley Model 1492-H7, or equal. One isolating switch terminal block per loop numbered piece of equipment and one per spare I/O point is acceptable. j. All PLC discrete outputs to the field shall be isolated with an isolating fuse switch terminal block with a flip cover and a neon blown fuse indicator. The single circuit fusible terminal block shall be an Allen Bradley 1492-H4, or equal. 5. All wiring to hand switches and other devices, which are live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection, shall be clearly identified as such. 6. All wiring shall be clearly tagged and color coded. All tag numbers and color coding shall correspond to the panel wiring diagrams and loop Drawings prepared by the PCSS. All power wiring, control wiring, grounding, and DC wiring shall utilize different color insulation for each wiring system used. The color coding scheme shall be: a. Incoming 120VAC Hot- Black b. 120VAC Hot wiring downstream of panel circuit breaker— Red c. 120VAC Hot wiring derived from a UPS system — Red with Black stripe d. Three-phase power— Brown, Orange, Yellow, and Green ground or as specified in Division 16. e. 120VAC neutral -White f. Ground - Green g. DC power or control wiring — Blue h. DC analog signal wiring — Black (+), White (-) i. Foreign voltage—Yellow 7. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be plastic type with snap-on covers. The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire changing without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the subpanel by stainless steel screws. Trough shall not be bonded to the panel with glue or adhesives. 8. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 9. Each panel shall have control, signal, and communication line surge suppression in 410, accordance with Section 13300. 104-1901 13330-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland I&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT 10. All microprocessor-based electronic devices in the panel that are powered by 120VAC shall be powered by the UPS (refer to appropriate Section in Division 13). 11. Additional electrical components including transformers, motor starters, switches, circuit breakers, etc., shall be in compliance with the requirements of Division 16. B. Relays not provided under Division 16 and required for properly completing the control function specified in Division 13, Division 16, or shown on the Drawings shall be provided under this Section. C. The orientation of all devices including PLC controller and I/O when installed shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations. No vertical orientation of PLC controller racks shall be allowed unless specifically indicated by the manufacturer as an acceptable mounting alternative and also approved by the engineer. 2.08 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A. The main circuit breaker shall be a thermal-magnetic molded case breaker, by Square D Company, or equal. Provide a flange-mounted main power disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock having a bypass that will allow the panel door to open only when the switch is in the OFF position. B. A mechanical disconnect mechanism, with bypass, shall be installed on each motor circuit protector, capable of being locked in the "OFF" position to provide a means of disconnecting power to the motor. C. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical equipment requirements, the P&IDs (Division 13), the Control Wiring Diagrams (Division 16) and as shown on the Drawings. D. All operating control devices and instruments shall be securely mounted on the exterior door. All controls shall be clearly labeled to indicate function and shall be in accordance with the electrical area classification indicated on the Electrical Contract Drawings. E. Specific control devices, control descriptions and other data are specified under the detailed specification for the mechanical equipment with which the control panel is supplied. 2.09 PILOT TYPE INDICATING LIGHTS A. Type: Energy efficient Solid State LED Lamps. B. Functional: 1. Units shall be provided with low voltage LED lamps suitable for the voltage supplied. 2. Lights supplied with 120VAC power shall have integral reduced voltage transformers. 3. Lamps shall be replaceable from the front of the unit. 104-1901 13330-10 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT C. Physical: 41, 1. Lens color: a. Running, on, open — Red b. Stopped, off, closed —Green c. Alarm —Amber d. White - Power on e. Blue - All other status indications not covered by the above f. Lens caps shall be approximately .46 inch diameter. Provide legend faceplates engraved to indicate the required function of each device; NEMA rating - 4X. D. Manufacturers: 1. Cutler-Hammer. 2. Allen Bradley. 3. General Electric. 4. Square D. ® 5. Crouse Hinds (NEMA 7). 6. Equal. 2.10 SELECTOR SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS A. Type: 1. Control devices shall be heavy-duty oil tight type with stackable contact blocks. B. Functional: 1. Provide contact arrangement and switching action as required for the control system specified. C. Physical: 1. For 120VAC service, provide contacts rated 10 Amps at 120VAC; for 24VDC service, provide silver sliding contacts rated 5 Amps at 125VDC; for electronic (millivolt/milliamp) switching, provide contacts rated lamp at 28VDC. 2. Pushbuttons shall have flush type operators. 3. Selector switches shall have knob or wing lever operators; NEMA rating - 4X; Provide legend plates denoting switch/pushbutton position/function. 104-1901 13330-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT D. Manufacturers: 1. Cutler-Hammer. 2. Allen Bradley. 3. General Electric. 4. Square D. 5. Crouse Hinds (NEMA 7). 6. Equal. 2.11 GENERAL PURPOSE RELAYS AND TIME DELAYS A. Type: 1. General purpose plug-in type. B. Functional: 1. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the specified control function; Mechanical life expectancy shall be in excess of 10 million. 2. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation; Units shall be provided with integral indicating light to indicate if relay is energized. 3. Solid state time delays shall be provided with polarity protection (DC units) and transient protection. 4. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from .1 second to 4.5 hours. C. Physical: 1. For 120VAC service, provide contacts rated 10 Amps at 120VAC; for 24VDC service, provide contacts rated 5 Amps at 28VDC; for electronic (milliamp/millivolt) switching applicator, provide gold-plated contacts rated for electronic service; relays shall be provided with dust and moisture-resistant covers. D. Options/Accessories Required: 1. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks rated 300 Volts and 10 Amps. 2. Provide mounting rails/holders as required. E. Manufacturers: 1. IDEC. 104-1901 13330-12 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland l&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT 2. Allen Bradley. 3. Potter & Brumfield. 4. Equal. 2.12 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) A. Digital Input Module 1. Manufacturer model 1746-IA16 2. Inputs: 16 3. Operating Input: 100/120AC 4. Watts Per Point: 0.270W B. Isolated Output Module 1. Manufacturer model 1746-OW8 2. Inputs: 8 (Isolated) 3. Operating Input: DC?120AC 4. Watts Per Point: 0.138W C. Analog Input Module 1. Manufacturer model 1746-N18 2. Inputs: 8 3. Converter Resolution: 16-bit 4. Type of input (selectable): 0-20ma, 4-20ma. D. Analog Output Module 1. Manufacturer model 1746-NO81 2. Inputs: 8 3. Output Type: Current 4. Resolution: 16-Bit 416, 104-1901 13330-13 Gupta & Associates, Inc. 0 I City of Pearland I&C CONTROL PANELS Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement AND PANEL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The panels shall be installed at locations as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Refer to Section 13300. 3.02 TESTS A. Refer to Section 13300. END OF SECTION 104-1901 13330-14 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement I&C— LEVEL DEVICES 411110 Section 13342 I&C— LEVELDEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor and materials required and installed complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. This Section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for the field-mounted instruments as detailed on the Drawings. C. Refer to Section 13300. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 13300. (1, 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. N/A 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.08 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 13300. B. Accessories (ory 104-1901 13342-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C — LEVEL DEVICES 1. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting shall be provided. 2. Each instrument shall be provided with a manufacturer-installed stainless steel tag identifying the instrument tag number. Refer to Section 13300. 1.10 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 13300. 1.11 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS A. Instruments for hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instrument specifications in Part 2 state the Class, Division, and gas groups for FM/CSA approval, followed in parenthesis by the CENELEC certification; however, instruments provided are only required to have the approval/certification stated above. The instrument shall have a stainless steel tag identifying the relevant approval or certification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LEVEL TRANSMITTERS A. Manufacturers 1. Siemens Model HydroRanger 200 2. Or Approved Equal B. Type 1. The emitter in the sensor is excited electrically to send ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the surface of the liquid or solid which partially reflects the pulses. This echo is detected by the same sensor and is converted back into electrical signal. The time between sending and receiving the ultrasonic wave is proportional to the distance between the sensor and the reflection surface. C. Monitor/Transmitter: 1. Function/Performance a) Power Requirement: 120 VAC 50/60Hz b) Output Signal: 2 isolated 4-20 mA analog signals c) Alarms: 6 SPDT programmable relays. Relays shall be rated 5 amps at 250 VAC. 104-1901 13342-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C— LEVEL DEVICES d) Minimum Range: 0.3 meter to 15 meters (1 ft to 50 ft) e) Accuracy: 0.25 % of programmable range or better f) Temperature compensation shall be provided for the entire range of measurement. g) Operating Temperature Range: —4°F to 140°F h) Repeatability: 0.25 % of full scale i) Level transmitter shall be programmed by entering all operational data via a removable, non-intrusive infrared programming module. 2. Physical a) Enclosure: Panel, rail or wall mounted NEMA 4X (IP 45)polycarbonate enclosure. All mounting hardware shall be 316-stainless steel. b) Single Cable: Provided by the manufacturer with sufficient length to reach the sensor without the risk of electromagnetic interference. c) Transmitter shall be provided with sunshield if mounted outside. D. Level Element 1. Function/Performance a) Power Requirement: Provided by the transmitter b) Minimum Range: 0.3 meter to 15 meters (1 ft to 50 ft) c) Frequency (23°C): 10-60 kHz d) Maximum Beam Angle: 6°(GST) and 12° (chemical) e) Altitude: Up to 2000 meters f) Operating Temperature Range: -40°F to 203°F (-40°C to 95°C) 2. Physical a) Housing: Non-contact, Type 304 stainless-steel encapsulated sensor. Approved to be used in Classes I, II, and III, Division 1, 2. b) Mounting: flange mounting. Flange diameter shall be up to 8-in or to (10, match with tank, 150-lb RF, Teflon-coated. 104-1901 13342-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement l&C— LEVEL DEVICES c) All level elements shall be provided with submergence shields. E. Accessories/Options 1. All necessary mounting brackets 2. Provide hand held program(s) where full setup is not available for the instrument. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. See execution requirements in Section 13300. END OF SECTION 41) 104-1901 13342-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15 Ciw TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15 • MECHANICAL 04/2008 City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15051 BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to install and test all buried piping, fittings, and specials. The Work includes the following: a. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this Section includes all buried piping Work required, beginning at the outside face of structures or structure foundations, including piping beneath structures, and extending away from structures. b. Work on or affecting existing buried piping. c. Installation of all jointing and gasket materials, specials, flexible couplings, mechanical couplings, harnessed and flanged adapters, sleeves, tie rods, cathodic protection, and other Work required for a complete, buried piping installation. d. Supports, restraints, and thrust blocks. e. Pipe encasements, with the exception of piping embedded in concrete within a • structure or foundation specified under Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. f. Field quality control, including testing. g. Cleaning and disinfecting. h. Incorporation of valves, meters, and special items shown or specified into piping systems in accordance with the Contract Documents and as required. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before buried piping Work. 2. Coordinate with appropriate piping Sections of Division 15, Mechanical. C. Related Divisions: 1. Division 1, General Requirements 2. Division 2, Existing Conditions 3. Division 3, Concrete. 4. Division 9, Finishes. 5. Division 15, Utilities. & Process Interconnections Cir 104-1901 15051-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. I City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 2. ASME B31.3, Process Piping. 3. American Society for Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT),ASNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice, Personnel Qualification, and Certification in Non-destructive Testing. 4. ASTM B32, Specification for Solder Metal. 5. ASTM D2321, Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and other Gravity-Flow Applications. 6. ASTM D2774, Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping. 7. ASTM F1417, Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines using Low-Pressure Air. 8. ANSI/AWWA C105, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 9. ANSI/AWWA C111, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 10. ANSI/AWWA C206, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. 11. ANSI/AWWA C600, Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 12. ANSI/AWWA C605, Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water. 13. ANSI/AWWA C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 14. ANSI/AWWA C651, Disinfecting Water Mains. 15. AWWA M9, Concrete Pressure Pipe. 16. AWWA M11, Steel Water Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation. 17. AWWA M23, PVC Pipe - Design and Installation. 18. AWWA M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 19. ASCE 37, Design and Construction of Sanitary and Storm Sewers. 20. American Concrete Pipe Association, Concrete Pipe Handbook. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements and recommendations of authorities having jurisdiction over the Work 2. Obtain required permits for Work in roads, rights-of-way, railroads, and other areas of the Work. 104-1901 15051-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 41110 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Laying schedules for ductile iron piping with restrained joints. b. Details of piping,specials,joints, harnessing and thrust blocks,and connections to piping, structures, equipment, and appurtenances. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature and specifications, as applicable,for products specified in this Section. 3. Testing Procedures: a. Submit proposed testing procedures, methods, apparatus, and sequencing. Obtain ENGINEER's approval prior to commencing testing. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certificate signed by manufacturer of each product certifying that product conforms to applicable referenced standards. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of each specified field quality control test. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: ® a. Maintain accurate and up-to-date record documents showing modifications made in the field, in accordance with approved submittals, and other Contract modifications relative to buried piping Work. Submittal shall show actual location of all piping Work and appurtenances at same scale as the Drawings. b. Show piping with elevations referenced to Project datum and dimensions from permanent structures. For each horizontal bend in piping, include dimensions to at least three permanent structures, when possible. For straight runs of piping provide offset dimensions as required to document piping location. c. Include profile drawings with buried piping record documents when the Contract Documents include piping profile drawings. d. Conform to Section 01760, Project Record Documents. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 2. Upon delivery inspect pipe and appurtenances for cracking, gouging, chipping, denting, and other damage and immediately remove from Site and replace with acceptable material. C 104-1901 15051-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement B. Storage: -.41) 1. Store materials to allow convenient access for inspection and identification. Store material off ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Pipe and fittings other than PVC may be stored outdoors without cover. Cover PVC pipe and fittings stored outdoors. C. Handling: 1. Handle pipe, fittings, specials, and accessories carefully in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Do not drop or roll material off trucks. Do not drop, roll or skid piping. 2. Avoid unnecessary handling of pipe. 3. Keep pipe interiors free from dirt and foreign matter. 4. Protect interior linings and exterior coatings of pipe and fittings from damage. Replace pipe and fittings with damaged lining regardless of cause of damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Required pipe materials are listed in the Buried Piping Schedule at the end of this Section. Refer to applicable Sections for material specifications. Where more than one type of pipe is indicated for a line in the schedule, the type of pipe material to be installed may be selected by the CONTRACTOR.The details on the drawings cover only one type of pipe for each line. If a different material is selected by the CONTRACTOR, all details for connections, jointing, fittings, supports, anchorages, and harnesses shall be modified as necessary and approved by ENGINEER and OWNER. B. General: 1. Pipe Markings: a. Factory-mark each length of pipe and each fitting with designation conforming to those on approved laying schedules. b. Manufacturer shall cast or paint on each length of pipe and each fitting pipe material, diameter, and pressure or thickness class. C. Polyethylene Encasement: 1. Polyethylene may be supplied in tubes or sheets. 2. Polyethylene encasement materials shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105. D. Cathodic Protection: 1. Bonding Cables: Bonding cable and test lead wires shall be not less than No. 6 AWG, Type CP copper cathodic protection cable, with low density, high molecular weight polyethylene insulation. 2. Test Lead Stations: Provide test lead stations where shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. Standard connection boxes for test lead stations shall be plastic terminal boxes, 18 inches long and five-inch inside diameter, with locking cast iron lid with"CP TEST"cast into cover. Inside terminal box shall be terminal block with seven terminals.Terminal box shall be manufactured by C.P. Test Services"NM-7"or equal. 104-1901 15051-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ,, 2.02 BURIED PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Polyethylene Underground Warning Tape for Metallic Pipelines: 1. Tracer tape shall be of inert, acid-and alkali-resistant, polyethylene,four mils thick,six inches wide, suitable for direct burial. Tape shall be capable of stretching to twice its original length. 2. Message shall read, "CAUTION ["POTABLE WATER", "SANITARY SEWER", "LIQUID AMMONIUM SULFATE", or other service as appropriate, as indicated in the Buried Pipe Schedule at the end of this Section] PIPE BURIED BELOW', with bold letters approximately two inches high. Messages shall be printed at maximum intervals of two feet. Tape shall be custom colored the same as pipeline colors specified for associated pipe service in Section 09900, Painting. 3. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Brady Corporation b. Seton Identification Products c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Or equal. B. Detectable Underground Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Pipelines: 1. Tape shall be of inert, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene, five mils thick, six inches wide, with aluminum backing, and have 15,000 psi tensile strength and 80 percent elongation capability. Tape shall be suitable for direct burial. 2. Message shall read, "CAUTION [insert customized name of pipe service, i.e., "POTABLE WATER", "SANITARY SEWER", "AMMONIA SOLUTION ", or other ILappropriate service, as indicated in the Buried Pipe Schedule at the end of this Section] PIPE BURIED BELOW' with bold letters approximately two inches high. Messages shall be printed at maximum intervals of two feet. Tape shall be custom colored the same as the pipeline colors as specified for the associated pipe service in Section 09900, Painting. 3. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: a. Brady Corporation b. Seton Identification Products c. Marking Services, Inc. d. Or equal. 104-1901 15051-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install piping as shown, specified, and as recommended by pipe and fittings manufacturer. 2. In event of conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents, request interpretation from ENGINEER before proceeding. 3. ENGINEER will observe excavations and bedding prior to laying pipe by CONTRACTOR. Notify ENGINEER in advance of excavating, bedding, pipe laying, and backfilling operations. 4. Minimum cover over buried piping shall be 4 feet, unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER. 5. Earthwork is specified in Section 02 30 20, Utility Backfill Materials. 6. Excavation in excess of that required or shown, and that is not authorized by ENGINEER shall be filled at CONTRACTOR's expense with granular material furnished, placed, and compacted in accordance with Section 02255, Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 7. Comply with NFPA 24 for "Outside Protection", where applicable to water piping systems used for fire protection. B. Separation of Sewers and Potable Water Piping: 1. Horizontal Separation: a. Where possible, existing and proposed potable water mains and service lines, and sanitary, combined, and storm sewers shall be separated horizontally by clear distance of at least nine feet. b. If local conditions preclude the specified clear horizontal separation, installation will be allowed if potable water main is in separate trench or on undistributed earth shelf on one side of sewer and with bottom of potable water main at least 18 inches above top of sewer. c. Exception: 1) Where it is not possible to provide minimum horizontal separation described above, construct potable water main of cement-lined ductile iron pipe with restrained push-on joint or restrained mechanical joint pipe complying with public water supply design standards of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. Hydrostatically test water main and sewer as specified in this Section prior to backfilling. Hydrostatic test pressure at crossing shall be at least 150 psi. 2. Vertical Separation: a. Provide minimum vertical distance of 18 inches between outside of potable water main and outside of sewer when sewer crosses over potable water main. b. Center a section of potable water main pipe at least 18 feet long over sewer so that sewer joints are equidistant from potable water main joints. c. Provide adequate structural support where potable water main crosses under sewer. At minimum, provide compacted select backfill for ten feet on each side of crossing. d. Encase potable water main in watertight carrier pipe extending ten feet on each side of crossing, measured perpendicular to potable water main. 104-1901 15051-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4110 C. Plugs: 1. Temporarily plug installed pipe at end of each day of work or other interruption of pipe installation to prevent entry of animals, liquids,and persons into pipe,and entrance or insertion of deleterious materials into pipe. 2. Install standard plugs in bells at dead ends, tees, and crosses. Cap spigot and plain ends. 3. Fully secure and block plugs, caps, and bulkheads installed for testing to withstand specified test pressure. 4. Where plugging is required for phasing of the Work or subsequent connection of piping, install watertight, permanent type plugs, caps, or bulkhead acceptable to ENGINEER. D. Bedding Pipe: Bed pipe as specified and in accordance with details on the Drawings. 1. Trench excavation and backfill,and bedding materials shall conform to Section 02255, Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials as applicable. 2. Where ENGINEER deems existing bedding material unsuitable, remove and replace existing bedding with approved granular material furnished,placed,and compacted in accordance with Section 02255, Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. Payment for additional excavation and providing granular material will be made under the unit price payment items in the Contract. 3. Where pipe is installed in rock excavation, provide minimum of four inches of granular bedding material underneath pipe smaller than four-inch nominal diameter, and III minimum of seven inches of granular bedding material underneath pipes four-inch nominal diameter and larger. 4. Excavate trenches below bottom of pipe by amount shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. Remove loose and unsuitable material from bottom of trench. 5. Carefully and thoroughly compact pipe bedding with hand held pneumatic compactors. 6. Do not lay pipe until ENGINEER approves bedding condition. 7. Do not bring pipe into position until preceding length of pipe has been bedded and secured in its final position. E. Laying Pipe: 1. Conform to manufacturer's instructions and requirements of standards and manuals listed below, as applicable: a. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C600, ANSI/AWWA C105, AWWA M41. b. Concrete Pipe: AWWA M9. c. Steel Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C206, AWWA M11. d. Thermoplastic Pipe: ASTM D2321, ASTM D2774, ANSI/AWWA C605, AWWA M23, AWWA M45, AWWA, M55. e. Sanitary and Storm Sewers: ASCE 37. 2. Install pipe accurately to line and grade shown and indicated in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. Remove and reinstall pipes that are not installed correctly. 3. Slope piping uniformly between elevations shown. 4. Keep groundwater level in trench at least 24 inches below bottom of pipe before laying pipe. Do not lay pipe in water. Maintain dry trench conditions until jointing and ID 104-1901 15051-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement backfilling are complete. Keep clean and protect interiors of pipe, fittings, valves,and appurtenances. 5. Start laying pipe at lowest point and proceed towards higher elevations, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. 6. Place bell and spigot-type pipe so that bells face the direction of laying, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. 7. Excavate around joints in bedding and lay pipe so that pipe barrel bears uniformly on trench bottom. 8. Deflections at joints shall not exceed 75 percent of amount allowed by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. 9. For PVC piping with solvent welded joints, 2.5-inch diameter and smaller, snake piping in trench to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. 10. Carefully examine pipe, fittings, valves, and specials for cracks, damage, and other defects while suspended above trench before installation. Immediately remove defective materials from the Site and replace with acceptable products. 11. Inspect interior of all pipe, fittings, valves, and specials and completely remove all dirt, gravel, sand, debris, and other foreign material from pipe interior and joint recesses before pipe and appurtenances are moved into excavation. Bell and spigot-type mating surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed, and wiped clean and dry immediately before pipe is laid. 12. Field cut pipe, where required,with machine specially designed for cutting the type of pipe being installed. Make cuts carefully, without damage to pipe, coating or lining, and with smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Cut ends on push-on joint type pipe shall be tapered and sharp edges filed off smooth. Do not flame-cut pipe. 13. Do not place blocking under pipe, unless specifically approved by ENGINEER for special conditions. 14. Touch up protective coatings in manner satisfactory to ENGINEER prior to backfilling. 15. Notify ENGINEER in advance of backfilling operations. 16. On steep slopes, take measures acceptable to ENGINEER to prevent movement of pipe during installation. 17. Thrust Restraint: Where required, provide thrust restraint conforming to Article 3.3 of this Section. 18. Exercise care to avoid flotation when installing pipe in cast-in-place concrete, and in locations with high groundwater. F. Polyethylene Encasement: 1. Provide polyethylene encasement for ductile iron piping to prevent contact between pipe and surrounding bedding material and backfill. 2. Polyethylene encasement installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105. G. Jointing Pipe: 1. Ductile Iron Proprietary Joints: a. Install pipe that utilizes proprietary joints for restraint specified in Section 15061, Ductile Iron Pipe, or other such joints, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Steel Pipe Joints: a. Joints in steel pipe shall be butt welded or lap welded joints, except that mechanical couplings, or flanged connections shall be provided at connections to valves, meters, and similar equipment, and where shown or indicated in the 104-1901 15051-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 411, Contract Documents. Mechanical couplings are specified in Section 15100, Piping Specialties and Accessories. b. Welding shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C206. c. Field welded lap joints shall have fillet welds both inside and outside. Outside weld may be seal weld. d. After welding, coat the joint and surrounding damaged or uncoated area with same coating and thickness as shop-applied coating. e. Where flanged connections or couplings are provided,flanges, couplings,bolts, and nuts, except when stainless steel, shall be coated with two coats, minimum dry film thickness of eight-mils each, of high-build epoxy or bituminous coating manufactured by Tnemec, or equal. f. Welds shall be free from embedded scale and slag and shall have tensile strength across weld not less than thinnest of connected sections. g. Welds shall be watertight. h. Provide cathodic protection at steel pipe joints as specified in this Section. 3. Thermoplastic Pipe Joints: a. Solvent Cement Welded Joints: 1) Bevel pipe ends and remove all burrs before making joints. Clean pipe and fittings thoroughly. Do not attempt to make solvent cement joints if temperature is below 40 degrees F. Do not make solvent cement welded joints in wet conditions. 2) Use solvent cement supplied or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 3) Apply joint primer and solvent cement and assemble joints in accordance with • recommendations and instructions of manufacturer of joint materials and pipe manufacturer. 4) Take appropriate safety precautions when using joint primers and solvent cements. Allow air to circulate freely through pipelines to allow solvent vapors to escape. Slowly admit water when flushing or filling pipelines to prevent compression of gases within pipes. • 104-1901 15051-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4. Mechanical Coupling Joints: a. Mechanical couplings include: sleeve-type flexible couplings, split flexible couplings,ANSI/AWWA C606 grooved or shouldered end couplings, plasticized PVC couplings, and other mechanical couplings specified in Section 15100, Couplers, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping. b. Prior to installing and assembling mechanical couplings, thoroughly clean joint ends with wire brush to remove foreign matter. c. For mechanical couplings that incorporate gaskets,after cleaning apply lubricant to rubber gasket or inside of coupling housing and to joint ends. After lubrication, install gasket around joint end of previously installed piece and mate joint end of subsequent piece to installed piece. Position gasket and place coupling housing around gasket and over grooved or shouldered joint ends. Insert bolts and install nuts tightly by hand. Tighten bolts uniformly to produce an equal pressure on all parts of housing. When housing clamps meet metal to metal,joint is complete and further tightening is not required. d. For plasticized PVC couplings, loosen the stainless steel clamping bands and remove clamps from coupling. Slide coupling over plain ends of pipes to be joined without using lubricants. Place clamps over each end of coupling at grooved section and tighten with torque wrench to torque recommended by manufacturer. H. Backfilling: 1. Conform to applicable requirements of Section 02318, Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 2. Place backfill as Work progresses. Backfill by hand and use power tampers until pipe is covered by at least one foot of backfill. I. Connections to Valves and Hydrants: 1. Install valves and hydrants as shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide suitable adapters when valves or hydrants and piping have different joint types. 3. Provide thrust restraint at all hydrants and at valves located at pipeline terminations. J. Transitions from One Type of Pipe to Another: 1. Provide necessary adapters, specials, and connection pieces required when connecting different types and sizes of pipe or connecting pipe made by different manufacturers. K. Closures: 1. Provide closure pieces shown or required to complete the Work. 104-1901 15051-10 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (Isw 3.02 TRACER TAPE INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Underground Warning Tape for Metallic Pipelines: 1. Provide polyethylene tracer tape for buried metallic piping,which includes pipe that is steel, stainless steel, ductile iron, and cast iron. 2. Provide tracer tape 12 to 18 inches below finished grade, above and parallel to buried pipe. 3. For pipelines buried eight feet or greater below finished grade, provide second line of magnetic tracer tape 2.5 feet above crown of buried pipe, aligned along pipe centerline. 4. Tape shall be spread flat with message side up before backfilling. B. Detectable Underground Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Pipelines: 1. Provide polyethylene tracer tape with aluminum backing for buried, non-metallic piping, which includes PVC pipe. 2. Provide magnetic tracer tape 12 to 18 inches below finished grade,above and parallel to buried pipe. 3. For pipelines buried eight feet or greater below finished grade, provide second line of magnetic tracer tape 2.5 feet above crown of buried pipe, aligned along the pipe centerline. 4. Tape shall be spread flat with message side up before backfilling. 3.03 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Provide thrust restraint on all pressure piping systems and line valves and bends in the Contract Documents. B. Thrust restraint shall be accomplished by means of restrained pipe joints. Concrete thrust blocks shall only be used where specifically shown on drawings. Thrust restraints shall be designed for axial thrust exerted by 120 percent of the test pressure specified in the Buried Piping Schedule at the end of this Section. C. Restrained Pipe Joints: 1. Pipe joints shall be restrained by means suitable for the type of pipe being installed. a. Ductile Iron, Push-on Joints: Restrain with proprietary restrained joint system as specified in Section 15062, Ductile Iron Process Pipe. b. Steel Pipe Joints: Provide butt-welded joints, lap welded joints,flanged joints,or mechanical coupling connections as shown and specified in Buried Piping Schedule in this Section. Provide tie rods connected to lugs welded to the steel pipe for restraint at mechanical couplings. c. Thermoplastic Joints: Where bell and spigot-type or other non-restrained joints are utilized, provide tie rods across joint or other suitable joint restraint system, subject to the approval of ENGINEER. 104-1901 15051-11 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.04 WORK AFFECTING EXISTING PIPING A. Location of Existing Underground Facilities: 1. Locations of existing Underground Facilities shown on the Drawings should be considered approximate. 2. Determine the true location of existing Underground Facilities to which connections are to be made, crossed, and that could be disturbed, and determine location of Underground Facilities that could be disturbed during excavation and backfilling operations, or that may be affected by the Work. B. Taking Existing Pipelines and Underground Facilities Out of Service: 1. Do not take pipelines or Underground Facilities out of service unless approved by OWNER. 2. Notify OWNER in writing prior to taking pipeline or Underground Facilities out of service. Shutdown notification shall be provided in advance of the shutdown in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01100 — Summary of Work. C. Work on Existing Pipelines or Underground Facilities: 1. Cut or tap piping or Underground Facilities as shown or required with machines specifically designed for cutting or tapping pipelines or Underground Facilities, as applicable. 2. Install temporary plugs to prevent entry of mud, dirt, water, and debris into pipe. 3. Provide necessary adapters, sleeves, fittings, pipe, and appurtenances required to complete the Work. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Test all piping, except as exempted in the Buried Piping Schedule in this Section. 2. When authorities having jurisdiction are to witness tests, notify ENGINEER and authorities having jurisdiction in writing at least 48 hours in advance of testing. 3. Conduct all tests in presence of ENGINEER. 4. Remove or protect pipeline-mounted devices that could be damaged by testing. 5. Provide all apparatus and services required for testing, including: a. Test pumps, compressors, hoses, calibrated gages, meters, test containers, valves, fittings, and temporary pumping systems required to maintain OWNER's operations. b. Temporary bulkheads, bracing, blocking, and thrust restraints. 6. Provide air if an air test is required, power if pumping is required, and gases if gases are required. 7. Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall provide meter on supply line and OWNER will provide fluid required for hydrostatic testing at no additional cost. CONTRACTOR shall provide means to convey fluid for hydrostatic testing into piping being tested. CONTRACTOR shall provide fluid for other types of testing required. 8. Repair observed leaks and repair pipe that fails to meet acceptance criteria. Retest after repair. 9. Unless otherwise specified, testing shall include existing piping systems that connect with new piping system. Test existing pipe to nearest valve. Piping not installed by CONTRACTOR and that fails the test shall be repaired upon authorization of 104-1901 15051-12 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 41,„, OWNER. Unless otherwise included in the Work, repair of existing piping or Underground Facilities will be paid as extra Work. B. Test Schedule: 1. Refer to the Buried Piping Schedule in this Section for type of test required and required test pressure. 2. Unless otherwise specified, required test pressures are at lowest elevation of pipeline segment being tested. 3. For piping not listed in Buried Piping Schedule in this Section: a. Hydrostatically test pipe that will convey liquid at a pressure greater than five psig. b. Use exfiltration testing for other piping. c. Disinfect for bacteriological testing piping that conveys potable water. 4. Test Pressure: a. Use test pressures listed in Buried Piping Schedule in this Section. b. If test pressure is not listed in Buried Piping Schedule, or if test is required for piping not listed in the Buried Piping Schedule, test pressure will be determined by ENGINEER based on maximum anticipated sustained operating pressure and methods described in applicable ANSI/AWWA manual or standard that applies to the piping system. C. Hydrostatic Testing: 1. Preparation for Testing: • a. For thermoplastic pipe,follow procedures described in Section 7 of ANSI/AWWA Standard C605. b. For steel pipe, follow procedures described in ANSI/AWWA Manual M11. Wetting period is not required for pipe that is not cement-lined. c. For other piping follow procedures described in ANSI/AWWA Manual M9, except that minimum wetting period required immediately prior to testing for asbestos cement pipe shall be 24 hours rather than the 48 hours prescribed for concrete pipe. Wetting period is not required for pipe that is not cement mortar- lined. d. Prior to testing, ensure that adequate thrust protection is in place and joints are properly installed. 2. Test Procedure: a. Fill pipeline slowly to minimize air entrapment and surge pressures. Fill rate shall not exceed one foot of pipe length per second in pipe being tested. b. For small diameter pipelines, expel air and apply minimum test pressure of 125 psi. For large diameter water lines, expel air and apply minimum test pressure of 150 psi. c. Expel air from pipe as required. Obtain approval of ENGINEER prior to tapping pipe for expelling air. d. Examine exposed joints and valves, and make repairs to eliminate visible leakage. e. After specified wetting period, add fluid as required to pressurize line to required test pressure. Maintain test pressure for a stabilization period of ten minutes before beginning test. f. Begin test by 9:00 a.m. unless otherwise approved by Project Manager. • Maintain test pressure for 8 hours. When large quantity of water is required to 104-1901 15051-13 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement maintain pressure during test, discontinue testing until cause of water loss is identified and corrected. g. Keep valves inside pressure reducing stations closed during hydrostatic pressure testing. h. Timed test period shall not begin until after pipe has been filled, exposed to required wetting period, air has been expelled, and pressure stabilized. i. Timed Test Period: After stabilization period, maintain test pressure for at least two hours. During timed testing period, add fluid as required to maintain pressure within five psig of required test pressure. j. Pump from test container to maintain test pressure. Measure volume of fluid pumped from test container and record on test report. Record pressure at test pump at 15 minute intervals for duration of test. 3. Allowable Leakage Rates: Leakage is defined as the quantity of fluid supplied to pipe segment being tested to maintain pressure within five psi of test pressure during timed test period. Allowable leakage rates for piping are: a. No Leakage: Pipe with flanged, welded, fused, threaded, soldered, or brazed joints. D. Exfiltration Testing: 1. Plug and bulkhead ends and lateral connections of pipe segment to be tested and admit fluid until the pipe is full. Admit fluid slowly to minimize air entrapment. Groundwater level shall be below the pipe during exfiltration test. 2. Before measuring leakage, allow fluid to wet pipe interior for the following period: a. Concrete Pipe: 48 hours. b. Cement Mortar-lined Pipe: 24 hours. c. Asbestos-cement Pipe: 24 hours. d. Other Pipe: Wetting period not required. 3. Maintain hydrostatic head during test to equal an elevation two feet above present and future maximum groundwater elevation at pipe segment tested. ENGINEER will determine test water surface elevation for each pipe segment. 4. Provide minimum hydrostatic head during test of two feet above crown of upstream end of pipe segment tested. 5. Add fluid from test container or from metered supply as required to maintain test water level within three inches of test head throughout the test. 6. Test duration shall be at least two hours. 7. Allowable Leakage Rates: a. Leakage is defined as the quantity of fluid that must be supplied to pipe segment tested to maintain hydrostatic head within three inches of test head during the test after pipe has been filled and exposed to required wetting period, plus quantity required to refill to original head at end of test. b. Leakage shall not exceed that allowed by authority having jurisdiction. E. Examination of Welds: 1. Personnel performing examination of welds shall be qualified to at least Level II in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A. 2. Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section V and applicable articles for examination of welds. 3. Visually examine all welds, Category D Fluid Service, in conformance with ASME B31.3. 104-1901 15051-14 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4. Examine at least ten percent of welds using liquid penetrant examination. 5. If defect is detected, all welds shall be examined by liquid penetrant examination. 6. At conclusion of liquid penetrant examination, remove penetrant test materials by flushing, washing, or wiping clean with applicable solvents. F. Bacteriological Testing: 1. Bacteriological testing for potable water lines,finished water lines, and other piping in accordance with the Buried Piping Schedule, is specified in Article 3.6 of this Section. 3.06 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Cleaning, General: Clean pipe systems as follows: 1. Thoroughly clean all piping, including flushing with water as required, in manner approved by ENGINEER, prior to placing in service. 2. Piping 24-inch diameter and larger shall be inspected from inside and debris, dirt and foreign matter removed. 3. For piping that requires disinfection and has not been kept clean during storage or installation, swab each section individually before installation with five percent sodium hypochlorite solution. • 0 104-1901 15051-15 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement B. Disinfection: 1. Disinfect all potable and finished water piping. 2. Suggested procedure for accomplishing complete and satisfactory disinfection is specified below. Other procedures may be considered for acceptance by ENGINEER. a. Prior to disinfection, clean piping as specified and flush thoroughly. b. Conform to procedures described in ANSI/AWWA C651. Use continuous feed method of disinfecting, unless alternative method is acceptable to ENGINEER. 3. Water for initial flushing, testing, and disinfection will be furnished by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary piping, hose,valves,appurtenances,and services required. Cost of water required for redisinfection will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER at water utility's standard rates. 4. Chlorine shall be provided by OWNER. 5. Bacteriologic tests will be performed by OWNER. Certified test laboratory report will be provided to CONTRACTOR, if requested. 6. Chlorine concentration in water entering the piping shall be between 50 and 100 ppm, such that minimum residual concentration of 25 mg/L remains after 24-hour retention period. Disinfect piping and all related components. Repeat as necessary to provide complete disinfection. 7. After required retention period, flush chlorinated water to closed drain line, unless otherwise acceptable to ENGINEER. Properly dispose of chlorinated water in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Do not discharge chlorinated water to storm sewers, ditches, or overland. 3.07 CATHODIC PROTECTION A. General: 1. Provide cathodic protection for buried steel pipelines. 2. Provide insulated joint at each of the following: a. Connection to steel water tanks and each branch connecting to a water line. b. Connection between ductile iron pipe and steel pipe. c. Connection through wall. d. Where indicated. 3. Provide electrical bond across all other gasketed steel pipe joints. 4. Provide test lead stations for monitoring electrical currents on pipeline at locations shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Details of Cathodic Protection: 1. Insulated Joints: Where shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, provide insulated flange type joints. After joint is made, provide exterior coating around joint as specified for piping being joined. 2. Electrical Bond Across Rubber Gasket Joints: Provide two electrical bonding cables across each rubber-gasketed bell and spigot joint. Before exterior coating is applied to bell and spigot joints, two small areas of metal shall be exposed on each side of joint, one on spigot ring and one on bell. Thoroughly clean each area and bond two cathodic protection cables to pipe, one on each side of joint. Bond each cable by thermite process. Coat completed connections and exposed metal as specified for exterior coating of pipe being joined. 3. Electrical Bond Across Mechanical Couplings: Provide two electrical bonding cables across each mechanical coupling. Before the exterior coating is applied to 104-1901 15051-16 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 411, mechanical couplings, expose two small areas of metal on pipe surface on each side of coupling, on middle ring and on each follower ring of coupling. Thoroughly clean each area and bond two cathodic protection cables to pipe, one on each side of joint and to middle ring and follower rings of mechanical coupling. Bond each cable by thermite process. Coat completed connections and exposed metal as specified for exterior coating of pipe being joined. 4. Electrical Bond Across Valves and Flanges: Provide two electrical bonding cables across valves and flanged connections other than insulated flange type joints. Provide electrical bond as specified for bond across rubber gasket joints. 5. Test Lead Stations: Provide test lead stations where shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. Terminate test lead on ground surface in standard connection box at a protected location acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.08 SCHEDULES A. Schedules listed below, following the "End of Section" designation, are part of this Specification section. 1. Table 15051-A, Buried Piping Schedule. END OF SECTION • III 104-1901 15051-17 KIT Professionals, Inc. cU O _ co O O > zi ,84) co N6 Cco 0C D > o C O c� .0O W 1 o N 0) 0) co 1 a FW 'Q' OL... ri, CL p Ce _0 r' C u_ ~ O O :a V ,- m z � C� Y 3J C LL R 1 I— I- 03 m m 0 0 0 0 in moo 0 a— a0 0 2 >- >- )- I I I W J x CI p 0- d J a I— W - CC CC LL I C.) N m U) 0 3 V! RM M O Lf) In C ET_ n`. v :E Mo --I `° W •L o ./ 2 oC33 a,oLo m art WW W i) Q Q LU O W W a . co in o C a) "I 'C C J J J / COO 0 J J C m EQ E I— is N .` _ _ J J � :: 00 f-f co co co a Et I— U) cn in. dV M N N C £ C r N O R Cu 6 E co 3 -O c W C O � � 0 co 0 a� c� a z as c a 0 0 ,_ O rn O o 0 0 co City of Pearland Buried Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement The following abbreviations are used in the Buried Piping Schedule. (6, A. Service Abbreviations Service Abbrev Service Abbrev. Pump Suction Line PSL Potable Distribution Water DW GST Fill Line GFL Natural Gas NG B. Material Abbreviations Material Abbrev Material Abbrev. Ductile Iron DI Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Stainless Steel SST Steel STL C. Lining/Coating Abbreviations Lining/Coating Abbrev Lining/Coating Abbrev. Cement Mortar Lined CL Polyethylene Wrapped PEW Fusion Bonded Epoxy FBEL Asphaltic Coated AC Lined Fusion Bonded Epoxy FBEC Coated D. Joint Abbreviations • Joint Type Abbrev Joint Type Abbrev. Flange FLG Plain End PE Bell and Spigot BS Solvent Weld SW Restrained Mech. Joint RMJ Threaded T Push-on Joint POJ Butt Weld BW Restrained Push-on Joint RPOJ Split Flexible Coupling SPFC Mechanical Joint MJ Sleeve-type Flexible SLFC Coupling Restrained Mech. Joint RMJ Clamped Barbed CB E. Test Abbreviations Test Abbrev Test Abbrev. Hydrostatic Test (test HYD ( ) Disinfection and DBT pressure in psig) Bacteriological Testing Nitrogen (test pressure in NI No Test Required NR psig) — (_ 104-1901 15051-19 KIT Professionals, Inc. I City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15052 Cir EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to install and test all exposed piping, fittings, and specials. The Work includes the following: a. All types and sizes of exposed piping, except where exposed piping installations are specified under other Sections. b. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this Section includes all piping beginning at the outside face of structures or structure foundations and extending into the structure. Piping embedded in concrete within a structure or foundation shall be considered as exposed and is included herein. Piping that is permanently or intermittently submerged, or installed in sub-aqueous environments, is considered as exposed and is included in this Section. c. Work on or affecting existing exposed piping. d. Installation of all jointing and gasket materials, specials, flexible couplings, mechanical couplings, harnessed and flanged adapters, sleeves, tie rods, and all Work required for a complete exposed piping installation. e. Supports, restraints, and other anchors. • f. Field quality control, including testing. g. Cleaning and disinfecting. h. Incorporation of valves, meters, and special items shown or specified into the piping systems per the Contract Documents and as required. i. Pipe labels. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before exposed piping Work. 2. Coordinate with appropriate piping Sections of Division 15, Mechanical. C. Related Divisions: 1. Division 09, Finishes 3. Division 15, Process Interconnections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3. ASME B31.3, Process Piping. 4. American Society for Non-Destructive Testing(ASNT),ASNT-TC-1 A, Recommended Practice, Personnel Qualification, and Certification in Non-destructive Testing. 5. ASTM A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling,and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems 104-1901 15052-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. 4 City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 6. ASTM B32, Specification for Solder Metal. 7. ASTM D4161, Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 8. ASTM F2164, Standard Practice for Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene(PE)Pressure Piping Systems Using Hydrostatic Pressure 9. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code-Steel. 10. ANSI/AWWA C111, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 11. ANSI/AWWA C206, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. 12. ANSI/AWWA C600, Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 13. ANSI/AWWA C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 14. ANSI/AWWA C651, Disinfecting Water Mains. 15. AWWA M11, Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation. 16. AWWA M23, PVC Piping - Design and Installation. 17. AWWA M41, Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 18. AWWA M45, Fiberglass Pipe Design. 19. SAE J1227, Method for Assessing the Cleanliness Level of New Hydraulic Fluid. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements and recommendations of authorities having jurisdiction over the Work 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Detailed drawings in plan and, as applicable, section. b. Details of piping, valves, supports, accessories, specials,joints, harnessing, and main anchor supports, and connections to existing piping, structures,equipment, and appurtenances. c. Information on pipe labels, including catalog information, specifications, mounting, mounting and installation data. 2. Testing Plans, Procedures, and Testing Limitations a. Submit description of proposed testing methods, procedures, and apparatus, and obtain ENGINEER's approval prior to testing. b. Submit copies of testing reports for each test. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Submit a certificate signed by manufacturer of each product certifying product conforms to applicable referenced standards. b. Welder's Certificate to comply with Paragraph 3.1.E.7.c. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit copies of testing report for each test. 3. Site Quality Control Reports: a. Submit copies of testing report for each test. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: 104-1901 15052-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement a. Maintain accurate and up-to-date record documents showing field and Shop Drawing modifications. Record documents for exposed piping Work shall show Cur actual location of all piping and appurtenances on a copy of the Drawings, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. b. Record documents shall show piping with elevations referenced to the project datum and dimensions from permanent structures. For straight runs of pipe provide offset dimensions as required to document pipe location. c. Include section drawings with exposed piping record documents when the Contract Documents include section Drawings. d. Conform to Section 01760, Project Record Documents. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 2. Upon delivery, inspect pipe and appurtenances for cracked,gouged,chipped,dented, and other damage and immediately remove damaged products from Site. B. Storage: 1. Store products for convenient access for inspection and identification. Store products off the ground using pallets, platforms,or other supports. Protect packaged products from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Pipe and fittings other than thermoplastic materials may be stored outdoors without cover. Thermoplastic pipe and fittings stored outdoors shall be covered. Noir C. Handling: 1. Handle pipe, fittings, specials, and accessories carefully with approved handling devices. Do not drop or roll material of delivery vehicles. Do not otherwise drop, roll, or skid piping. 2. Avoid unnecessary handling of pipe. 3. Keep pipe interiors free of dirt and foreign matter. 4. Protect interior linings and exterior coatings of pipe and fittings from damage. Replace pipe and fittings with damaged lining regardless of cause of damage. Repair damaged coatings. 1/44151, 104-1901 15052-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Piping materials are specified in the Exposed Piping Schedule at the end of this Section. Piping materials shall conform to Specification for each type of pipe and piping appurtenances in applicable sections of Division 15, Mechanical. B. Markings and Identification: 1. Pipe Markings: a. Clearly mark each piece of pipe or fitting with a designation conforming to that shown on the approved Shop Drawings. b. Manufacturer shall cast or paint on each length of pipe and each fitting the pipe material, diameter, and pressure or thickness class. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install piping as shown, specified and as recommended by the pipe and fittings manufacturer. 2. If there is a conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents, request in writing instructions from ENGINEER before proceeding. 3. Provide pipe manufacturers installation specialist at Site as specified on this Section. B. Temporary Blind Flanges, Plugs, Caps, and Bulkheads: 1. Temporarily plug installed pipe at the end of each day of work or other interruption of pipe installation to prevent entry of animals, liquids, and persons into pipe, and entrance or insertion of deleterious materials into pipe. 2. Install standard plugs in all bells at dead ends, tees, and crosses. Cap all spigot and plain ends. 3. Fully secure and block blind flanges, plugs, caps, and bulkheads installed for testing, designed to withstand specified test pressure. 4. Where plugging is required for phasing of Work or subsequent connection of piping, install watertight, permanent type blind flanges, plugs, caps,or bulkhead acceptable to ENGINEER. C. Piping Installation: 1. Conform to manufacturer's instructions and requirements of standards and manuals listed in this Section, as applicable: a. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C600, AWWA M41. b. Steel Pipe: ASME B31.3, ANSI/AWWA C206, AWWA M11. c. Thermoplastic Pipe: AWWA M23 d. Concrete Pipe: AWWA M9. 104-1901 15052-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2. Install straight runs true to line and elevation. tilie 3. Install vertical pipe truly plumb in all directions. 4. Install piping parallel or perpendicular to walls of structures. Piping at angles and 45 degree runs across corners of structures will not be accepted unless specifically shown on the Contract Documents or approved by the ENGINEER. 5. Install small diameter piping generally as shown when specific locations and elevations are not indicated. Locate such piping as required to avoid ducts, equipment, beams, and other obstructions. 6. Install piping to leave all corridors, walkways, work areas, and similar spaces unobstructed. Unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER provide a minimum headroom clearance under piping and pipe supports of 7.5 feet. Clearances beneath piping shall be measured from the outermost edge of piping, flanges or other type of joint that extends beyond the nominal outside diameter of piping. 7. Protect and keep clean interiors, fittings, and valves of pipe that will convey potable water, chemicals, and other pipe designated by ENGINEER. 8. Cutting: Cut pipe from measurements verified at Site. Field cut pipe, where required, with a machine specially designed for cutting type of pipe being installed. Make cuts carefully without damage to pipe, coating, or lining, and with a smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Cut ends of push-on joint type pipe shall be tapered and sharp edges filed off smooth. Do not flame-cut pipe. 9. Deflections at joints shall not exceed 75 percent of amount allowed by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 10. Additional General Requirements for Thermoplastic Piping: a. Utilize wide band supports as recommended by pipe manufacturer and approved by ENGINEER to minimize localized stresses. 4 b. Provide piping passing through walls with a sleeve of wearing material to prevent abrasion damage to piping. c. Provide anchored supports at elbows, valves, bends in piping, and at connections to equipment and tanks. d. Spacing of supports shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations at maximum design operating temperature of pipe. e. Provide U-clamps with wide band circumferential contact. f. Provide guides on long runs of piping to maintain alignment and reduce chance of elastic failure of pipe. Space guides as recommended by pipe manufacturer. g. Provide anchored supports to restrain joints that allow expansion. Minimize use of bellows style joints. Where required and approved by the ENGINEER provide bellows style joints with low axial force to take up pipe expansion. Flexible connectors may be used to absorb thermal movement when approved in writing by ENGINEER. h. Provide devices that will reduce hydraulic pulsation in piping, together with shut-off and drain valve on all discharge lines of positive displacement pumps to reduce hydraulic hammer, and provide flexible connectors to absorb vibration. Submit details for ENGINEER to review. D. Jointing Pipe: 1. General: a. Make joints in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Documents. b. Cut piping accurately and squarely and install without forcing or springing. 4i, c. Ream out pipes and tubing to full inside diameter after cutting. Remove all sharp edges on end cuts. 104-1901 15052-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement d. Remove all cuttings and foreign matter from inside of pipe and tubing before installation. Thoroughly clean all pipe, fittings, valves,specials,and accessories before installing. 2. Ductile Iron and Steel Flanged Joints: a. Assemble flanged joints using ring-type gaskets, with thickness as recommended by pipe manufacturer but not less than 1/8-inch thick, for raised- face flanges. Use full-face gaskets for flat-face flanges, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER or recommended by pipe manufacturer. Gaskets shall be suitable for the service intended in accordance with the manufacturer's ratings and instructions. Gaskets shall be properly centered. b. Tighten bolts in a sequence that provides equal distribution of bolt loads. c. Length of bolts shall be uniform. Bolts shall not project beyond the nut more than 1/4-inch or fall short of the nut when fully taken up. Machine-cut ends of bolts to be neatly rounded. Do not use washers. d. Prior to assembly of flanged joints, lubricate bolt threads and gasket faces. e. Alternately tighten bolts 180 degrees apart to compress the gasket evenly. f. After assembly, coat all bolts and nuts, except stainless steel bolts and nuts, with same coating specified in Section 09900, Painting, for material of pipe and fittings being joined. 3. Field Welded Steel Pipe Joints: a. Joints in steel pipe shall be butt welded, except that flexible couplings, mechanical couplings, or flanged connections shall be provided at connections to valves, meters, and similar equipment, and where shown or specified. b. Welding procedures and welder qualifications shall conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX or to American Welding Society Structural Welding Code Dl.1/D1.1 M, Section 5, whichever is required. Welding of steel water pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C206. c. For all piping, submit current certificates that all welders and welding operators have been qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX or American Welding Society Structural Welding Code D1.1/D1.1 M, Section 5, whichever is required. d. Conform to field welding procedures recommended by pipe manufacturer and as specified herein. e. Clean ends to be welded up to at least 1/2-inch beyond the estimated toe of weld by sandblasting or other means to remove surface contamination such as paint, oil, grease, scale, oxide, rust, and other contamination. f. Verify that ends to be welded are adequately prepared in shop for welding. g. Provide full penetration welds, free of cracks, overlap and cold laps. h. Preheat and interpass temperatures shall be not less than 60 degrees F and not more than 350 degrees F, respectively. i. Limit on Undercut: 1/32-inch or ten percent of base metal thickness, whichever is less. j. For pipe wall thickness up to 11-gauge (0.125-inch) use GTAW(Gas Tungsten Arc Welding). k. For pipe wall thickness greater than 11-gauge, use GTAW root pass followed by GMAW (Gas Metal Arc Welding) or SMAW(Shielded Metal Arc Welding) Cap. I. Provide internal inert gas purge to exclude atmosphere. m. Filler Wire: ELC grade, of matching composition or of higher molybdenum content. n. Weld Thickness: Equal to or greater than parent metal. Strength of welded joints shall be equal to or greater than strength of pipes being joined. 104-1901 15052-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement o. All welds shall be smooth with an internal crown of 1/16-inch or less, and tieexternal crown of 3/32-inch or less. p. For grinding operations, use iron-free grinding wheels. q. After welding, joint and the surrounding damaged or uncoated area shall be coated with same coating and thickness as shop applied coating. r. Tack Welds: Make tack welds when required to aid in joining, with same grade of filler metal as for finished welds. For finish welding, either completely remove tack welds or grind starting and finishing ends of tack welds for incorporation into finished welds. s. Clean and de-scale all welds per ASTM A380. 4. Steel Pipe Threaded Joints: a. For threaded joints, use standard, right hand tapered full depth threads on steel piping and apply a manufacturer's recommended joint compound to male threads only, before installation. b. Remove cuttings and foreign matter from inside of pipe. c. Thoroughly clean all pipe, fittings, valves, specials, and accessories before installing. 5. Thermoplastic Pipe Joints: a. Solvent Cement Welded Joints: 1) Bevel pipe ends and remove all burrs before making joint. Clean pipe and fittings thoroughly. Do not make solvent cement joints if temperature is below 40 degrees F. Do not make solvent cement welded joints in wet conditions. 2) Use solvent cement supplied or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 3) Apply joint primer and solvent cement and assemble joints in accordance with recommendations and instructions of manufacturer of joint materials and pipe • manufacturer. 4) Implement appropriate safety precautions when using joint primers and solvent cements. Allow air to circulate freely through pipelines to allow solvent vapors to escape. Slowly admit fluid when flushing or filling pipelines to prevent compression of gases within pipes. b. Threaded Joints: 1) Cut pipe square and smooth and remove burrs or raised edges with a knife or file. 2) Hold pipe firmly in a pipe vise. Protect pipe at the point of grip by inserting a rubber sheet or other material between pipe and vise. 3) Thread pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Brush threads clean of chips and ribbons. 4) After threading pipe, starting with second full thread, and continuing over thread length,wrap 100-percent virgin TFE(Teflon)thread tape in direction of threads. Overlap each wrap by one-half width of tape. 5) After application of the TFE thread tape, screw fitting or coupling onto the pipe end to be joined and tighten by hand. Using a strap wrench only,further tighten connection an additional one to two threads past hand tightness. E. Installing Valves and Accessories: 1. Provide supports for large valves, flow meters, and other heavy items as shown or required to prevent strain on adjoining piping. 2. Position flow measuring devices in pipe lines so that they have the amount of straight upstream and downstream runs recommended by the flow measuring device (..., manufacturer, unless specific location dimensions are shown. 104-1901 15052-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3. Position butterfly valves so that they do not conflict with upstream and downstream elements of the piping system. F. Unions: 1. Install dielectric unions as specified in Section 15100, Couplings, Adapters and Specials for Process Pipe,where dissimilar metals are connected, except for bronze or brass valves in ferrous piping. 2. Provide a union downstream of each valve with screwed connections. 3. Provide screwed or flanged unions at each piece of equipment, where shown, and where necessary to install or dismantle piping. G. Transitions from One Type of Pipe to Another: 1. Provide all necessary adapters, specials, and connection pieces required when connecting different types and sizes of pipe or connecting pipe made by different manufacturers. H. Closures: 1. Provide closure pieces, such as blind flanges and caps, shown or required to complete the Work. 3.03 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Provide thrust restraint on all pressure piping systems and where otherwise shown or specified. B. Thrust restraints shall be designed for axial thrust exerted by test pressure specified in the Exposed Piping Schedule at end of this Section. .11) C. Restrained Pipe Joints: 1. Pipe joints shall be restrained by means suitable for the type of pipe being installed. a. Ductile Iron: Restrain ductile iron pipe connected by flexible couplings or flanged coupling adapters by harnessing across the coupling or adapter using tie rods or extended bolts connecting between flanges. b. Steel Pipe Joints: Provide butt-welded joints, lap welded joints,flanged joints,or mechanical coupling connections as shown and specified in Exposed Piping Schedule. Provide tie rods connected to lugs welded to the steel pipe for restraint at mechanical couplings. 3.04 WORK AFFECTING EXISTING PIPING A. Location of Existing Piping: 1. Locations of existing piping shown on Drawings is approximate. 2. Determine the true location of existing piping to which connections are to be made, crossed, and that could be disturbed, and determine location of other facilities that could be affected by the Work. B. Work on Existing Pipelines: 1. Cut or tap pipes as shown or required with machines and tools specifically designed for cutting or tapping pipelines. 2. Install temporary plugs to prevent entry of mud, dirt, water, and debris into pipe. 104-1901 15052-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3. Provide necessary adapters, sleeves, fittings, pipe, and appurtenances required to (hoy complete the Work. 3.05 PAINTING A. Field painting shall conform to Section 09900, Painting. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing, General: 1. Test all piping, except as exempted in the Exposed Piping Schedule. 2. Notification: a. Notify ENGINEER at least 48 hours prior to testing. b. When authorities having jurisdiction are to witness tests, notify ENGINEER and authorities having jurisdiction in writing at least 48 hours in advance of testing. 3. Conduct all tests in presence of ENGINEER. 4. Remove or protect pipeline-mounted devices that could be damaged by testing. 5. Provide all apparatus and services required for testing, including: a. Test pumps, compressors, hoses, calibrated gages, meters, test containers, valves,fittings,and temporary pumping systems required to maintain OWNER's operations. b. Temporary bulkheads, bracing, blocking, and thrust restraints. 6. Provide air if an air test is required, power if pumping is required, and gases if gases are required. 7. Unless otherwise specified, OWNER will provide fluid required for hydrostatic testing. ® CONTRACTOR shall provide means to convey fluid for hydrostatic testing into the pipe being tested. CONTRACTOR shall provide fluid for other types of testing required. 8. Repair observed leaks and repair pipe that fails to meet acceptance criteria. Retest after repair. 9. Unless otherwise specified, testing shall include existing piping systems that connect with new piping system. Test existing pipe to nearest valve. Piping not installed by CONTRACTOR and that fails the test shall be repaired upon authorization of ENGINEER or OWNER. Repair of existing piping will be paid as extra work unless otherwise specified. B. Test Schedule: 1. Refer to the Exposed Piping Schedule for type of test required and required test pressure. 2. Unless otherwise specified, the required test pressures are at lowest elevation of pipeline segment being tested. 3. For piping not listed in Exposed Piping Schedule: a. Hydrostatically test pipe that will convey liquid at a pressure greater than five psig. b. Disinfect for bacteriological testing piping that conveys potable water. 4. Test Pressure: a. Use test pressures listed in Exposed Piping Schedule. b. If test pressure is not listed in Exposed Piping Schedule, or if a test is required for piping not listed in the Exposed Piping Schedule, test pressure will be determined by the ENGINEER based on the maximum anticipated sustained 104-1901 15052-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement operating pressure and the methods described in the applicable ANSI/AWWA manual or standard that applies to the piping system. C. Hydrostatic Testing: 1. Preparation for Testing: a. For thermoplastic pipe,follow procedures described in Section 7 of ANSI/AWWA Standard C605. b. For other piping follow procedures described in AWWA Manual M9. A wetting period is not required for pipe that is not cement mortar-lined. c. Prior to testing, ensure that adequate thrust protection is in place and all joints are properly installed. 2. Test Procedure: a. Fill pipeline slowly to minimize air entrapment and surge pressures. Fill rate shall not exceed one foot of pipe length per second in the pipe being tested. b. Expel air from pipe as required. Obtain approval of ENGINEER prior to tapping pipe for expelling air. c. Examine joints and valves, and make repairs to eliminate visible leakage. d. After specified wetting period, add fluid as required to pressurize line to required test pressure. Maintain test pressure for a stabilization period of ten minutes before beginning test. e. Timed test period shall not begin until after the pipe has been filled, exposed to the required wetting period, air has been expelled, and pressure stabilized. f. Timed Test Period: After the stabilization period, maintain test pressure for at least two hours. During timed testing period, add fluid as required to maintain pressure within five psig of required test pressure. g. Pump from a test container to maintain test pressure. Measure volume of fluid pumped from test container and record on test report. Record pressure at test 'vim) pump at fifteen minute intervals for duration of test. 3. Allowable Leakage Rates: Leakage is defined as the quantity of fluid supplied to pipe segment being tested to maintain pressure within five psi of the test pressure during timed test period. Allowable leakage rates for piping are: a. Zero. D. Examination of Welds: 1. Personnel performing examination of welds shall be qualified to at least Level II, in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A. 2. Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section V and applicable articles for examination of welds. 3. Visually examine all welds, Category D Fluid Service, in conformance with ASME B31.3. 4. Examine at least ten percent of welds using liquid penetrant examination. 5. If a defect is detected, all welds shall be examined by liquid penetrant examination. 6. At conclusion of liquid penetrant examination, remove penetrant test materials by flushing, washing, or wiping clean with applicable solvents. E. Bacteriological Testing: 1. Bacteriological testing for potable water lines, finished water lines, and other piping per Exposed Piping Schedule, is specified in Article 3.7 of this Section. 104-1901 15052-10 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.07 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION 410, A. Cleaning, General: Clean pipe systems as follows: 1. Thoroughly clean all piping, including flushing with water, in a manner approved by OWNER, prior to placing in service. 2. Piping 24-inch diameter and larger shall be inspected from inside and debris, dirt and foreign matter removed. 3. For piping that requires disinfection and has not been kept clean during storage or installation, swab each section individually before installation with a five percent hypochlorite solution. B. Disinfection: 1. Disinfect all potable and finished water piping. 2. A suggested procedure for accomplishing complete and satisfactory disinfection is specified below. Other procedures may be considered for acceptance by ENGINEER. a. Prior to disinfection, clean piping as specified and flush thoroughly. b. Conform to procedures described in ANSI/AWWA C651. Continuous feed method of disinfecting shall be used, unless alternative method is acceptable to ENGINEER. 3. Water for initial flushing, testing, and disinfection will be furnished by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary piping, hose,valves,appurtenances, and services required. Cost of water required for re-disinfection will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER at the water utility's standard rates. 4. Chlorine shall be provided by OWNER. 5. Bacteriologic tests will be performed by OWNER. A certified test laboratory report will be provided to CONTRACTOR, if requested. 6. Chlorine concentration in the water entering the piping shall be between 50 and 100 ppm, such that a minimum residual concentration of 25 mg/I remains after a 24-hour retention period. Disinfect the piping and all related components. Repeat as necessary to provide complete disinfection. 7. After required retention period,the chlorinated water shall be flushed to a closed drain line, unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. Properly dispose of chlorinated water in accordance with applicable regulations. Do not discharge chlorinated water to storm sewers, ditches, or overland. 3.08 EXPOSED PIPING SCHEDULE A. The schedules listed below, following the "End of Section" designation, are a part of this Specification section. 1. Table 15052-A, Exposed Piping Schedule. END OF SECTION 104-1901 15052-11 KIT Professionals, Inc. C ti O O co o-,/ N O c O _ •. 0) Y C c co Q) ) •Q E 0 CL cc a. w O Q x W H H c0 CO 0 0 O 0 O o Lc" I— o o 0 o Z w O J _J H J -, LL L.L. D 0 w I d \ v co co O (70 N C lf') Y w a a v v U CJ a c I_ w N V1 L I!) 0 0 C O U O X CU tij CI_ w Lx v° . (1) Q N Li) tIOO L7 C J J 111 W E O O Z C a) E - a) 'i _ _ J 0 CU (6 ea (n • 2 a) H - CD u O N C ,--C 0 ca a_ i O (13 C d 7 u J J (�• 0 �n d (� z RS >C a > c Q O c -0 o— O .— >, C O 0 co O City of Pearland Exposed Piping Installation Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement The following abbreviations are used in the Exposed Piping Schedule. 4l1W A. Service Abbreviations Service Abbrev _ Service Abbrev. Pump Suction Line PSL Potable Distribution Water DW GST Fill Line GFL Natural Gas NG B. Material Abbreviations Material Abbrev Material Abbrev. Ductile Iron DI Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Stainless Steel SST Steel STL Tygon T C. Lininq/Coatinq Abbreviations Lining Abbrev Coating Abbrev. Cement Mortar Lined CL Painted P Fusion Bonded Epoxy FBEL Insulated I Lined Woven Nylon Sleeve WNS D. Joint Abbreviations 0 Joint Type Abbrev Joint Type Abbrev. Flanged FLG Solvent Weld SW Butt Weld BW Threaded T Clamped Barbed CB E. Test Abbreviations Test Abbrev Test Abbrev. Hydrostatic Test (test HYD ( ) Disinfection and DBT pressure in psig) Bacteriological Testing Nitrogen (test pressure in NI No Test Required NR psig) 1 0 I 104-1901 15052-13 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15054 4111, STEEL PROCESS PIPE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials,equipment,and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install steel pipe and fittings for liquid service. 2. Extent of piping is shown or indicated on the Drawings. Piping schedules in Section 15051 — Buried Piping Installation and Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, specify pipe service, diameter, material, lining, coating, pressure rating,joint type(s), and Site quality control testing required. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Specification Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with or before steel pipe Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900, Painting. • 2. Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 3. Section 15100, Couplings, Adapters and Specials for Process Piping 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AASHTO, Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets. 2. ANSI/ASME B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form). 3. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch. 4. ANSI/ASME B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 5. ANSI/ASME B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300. 6. ANSI/ASME B16.4, Gray Iron Threaded Fittings (Classes 125 and 250). 7. ANSI/ASME B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 8. ANSI/ASME B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 9. ANSI/ASME B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. 10. ANSI/ASME B18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series. 11. ANSI/ASME B18.2.2, Square and Hex Nuts. 12. ANSI/ASME B31.3, Process Piping. 13. ANSI/ASME B36.10M, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. 416. 14. ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 15. ASTM A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 104-1901 15054-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 16. ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless. 17. ASTM A105/A105M, Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 18. ASTM A106/A106M, Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High- Temperature Service. 19. ASTM A126,Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 20. ASTM A139/A139M, Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over). 21. ASTM A193/A193M,Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 22. ASTM A194/A194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 23. ASTM A197/A197M, Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. 24. ASTM A234/A234M,Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 25. ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 26. ASTM A536, Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 27. ASTM A865, Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints. 28. ASTM D16, Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications. 29. ASTM D297, Test Methods for Rubber Products —Chemical Analysis. 30. ASTM D395, Test Methods for Rubber Property—Compression Set. 31. ASTM D412, Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers — Tension. 32. ASTM D573, Test Method for Rubber— Deterioration in an Air Oven. 33. ASTM D1330, Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets. 34. ASTM D2240, Test Method for Rubber Property— Durometer Hardness. 35. ASTM D3359, Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 36. ASTM D3363, Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. 37. ASTM D4541,Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. 38. ASTM D4752, Standard Test Method for Measuring MEK Resistance of Ethyl Silicate (Inorganic) Zinc-Rich Primers by Solvent Rub. 39. AWWA C200, Standard for Steel Water Pipe - 6 in. (150 mm) and Larger. 40. AWWA C205, Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe,4 In. (100 mm) and Larger, Shop Applied. 41. AWWA C206, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. 42. AWWA C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm). 43. AWWA C208, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. 44. AWWA C210, Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. 104-1901 15054-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 45. ANSI/AWWA C218, Coating the Exterior of Aboveground Steel Water Pipelines and Fittings. 46. AWWA C219, Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe. 47. AWWA C222, Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe and Fittings. 48. AWWA C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 49. AWWA Manual M11, Steel Water Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation. 50. AWS B2.1, Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. 51. AWS D1.1/D1.1.M, Structural Welding Code —Steel. 52. NACE RP 0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. 53. NACE RP 0274, High-Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings. 54. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components— Health Effects. 55. SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. 56. SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 57. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Commercial Blast Cleaning. 58. SSPC-PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Manufacturer shall have at least five years experience producing steel pipe and fittings for liquid service, and shall be able to document satisfactory service in at least five installations for at least five years. b. Lining and coating products shall be manufactured by company with at least five years successful experience in protecting pipelines exposed to specified service conditions, and shall be able to provide documentation of at least five installations in satisfactory operation in the United States that are similar applications to the specified service. 2. Welders: a. Shop welding and field welding(where allowed by ENGINEER) of steel pipe and components shall be by certified welders, each having valid certificates conforming to the ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, demonstrating qualifications under Section IX, Welding Qualifications,of the ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or AWS B2.1. 3. Weld Inspectors: a. Inspection of shop welds and field welds (where allowed by ENGINEER) of steel pipe and components shall be by certified weld inspectors, each having valid certificates conforming to ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section V, or AWS D1.1, as applicable for type of inspection required. 416 104-1901 15054-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER, obtain all pipe,fittings, and appurtenances included in this Section from a single steel pipe manufacturer. 2. Steel pipe manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all pipe,fittings,and appurtenances furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be suitable for specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall piping system by steel pipe manufacturer. 4. Steel pipe manufacturer shall be responsible for all products and all factory-applied linings and coatings. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Pipe and fittings, including linings and coatings, that will convey potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall be certified by an accredited organization in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 as being suitable for contact with potable water, and shall meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings:Submit the following with submittals required under Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation: a. Detailed drawings and data for pipe, fittings, joint types, gaskets, appurtenances, linings, and coatings. b. Laying schedules and detailed plan and profile drawings for all steel piping showing full details of piping, valves, hangers, supports, restraints, couplings, accessories, and specials. c. Written welding procedures for each type of weld and weld position. d. Calculations verifying strength of pipe joints within spans between pipe supports for exposed steel pipe on supports. e. Calculations verifying design of blind flanges, access manholes, and small diameter branch connections. f. Calculations for pipe wall thickness, demonstrating compliance with the Contract Documents. g. Design of specials and AWWA C208 fittings, including dimensional calculations and wall thickness calculations, in accordance with AWWA C208. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's literature, including materials of construction, dimensions, weights, specifications and other engineering data. 3. Testing Procedures: a. Quality control, inspection and testing procedures.Obtain ENGINEER's approval prior to performing tests. 104-1901 15054-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: Cr 1. Certificates: a. Certificate signed by manufacturer of each product that product conforms to the Contract Documents and applicable standards referenced in this Section. b. Certificates of suitability of elastomers used for gaskets with specified service conditions. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Pipe and fittings shop tests, including inspection and test reports,shop fit tests and required non-destructive tests. b. Results of specified tests for linings and coatings of pipe and fittings. c. ASTM Conformance Test Reports:For pipe and fittings manufactured outside of the United States,submit test and inspection reports verifying certification with ASTM standards referenced in this Section. 3. Procedure Submittals: a. Surface preparation and application reports and procedures as required for lining and coating of pipe and fittings. Steel pipe and fitting manufacturer and manufacturer of lining and coating, as specified, shall mutually determine recommended surface preparation and application methods, and submit written verification of mutually selected method. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Pipe Manufacturer: When requested by ENGINEER, submit list of existing • installations with contact names and telephone numbers for each. b. Welders:Submit qualifications for automatic and manual welding operators and procedures to demonstrate conformance to specified qualification requirements. c. Weld Inspectors: For each, submit certified weld inspector's QC-1 certification and qualifications. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. B. Handling: 1. Handling of Pipe:To maintain circular shape and prevent distortion,temporarily brace each end of each length of pipe with pipe manufacturer-approved internal spider device, where recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2. Handling of Lined Pipe and Fittings: Lifting devices shall not contact lined surfaces. Use hooks,forks,chains,straps,and other lifting devices only on exterior of pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings with damaged lining shall be replaced regardless of cause of damage. 3. Handling of Coated Pipe and Fittings: Hooks, forks, chains, straps, and other lifting devices shall be rubber-coated and used on exterior of pipe and fittings only in ® manner that does not damage the coating. If coating is damaged, notify pipe and coating manufacturer to determine if repair of damaged area or re-coating is 104-1901 15054-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement required. Perform repairs using manufacturer's recommended procedures and materials provided by manufacturer, as accepted by ENGINEER. Pipe and fittings requiring re-coating shall be removed from the Site and returned to pipe manufacturer's facility. Repaired or re-coated pipe and fittings shall conform to the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. General: 1. Piping systems and components shall conform to the Contract Documents and be suitable for their intended use. 2. Joint types, linings, and coatings shall be as specified in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. If not specified, provide flanged joints for exposed piping and welded joints for buried piping. B. ASTM Conformance: 1. Pipe and fittings manufactured outside of the United States shall conform to ASTM standards referenced in this Section. Physical tests and chemical analyses shall be performed as required on pipe and fittings being furnished to verify ASTM conformance. Tests and analyses shall be performed by an independent testing agency approved by ENGINEER and paid by CONTRACTOR. Select test samples in conformance with ASTM requirements. 2.02 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS, CARBON STEEL PIPE IN LIQUID SERVICE A. Design shall be in accordance with the recommended procedures in AWWA Manual M11, and as specified herein. B. Pipe shall be designed for an external live loading, including impact,equal to AASHTO, H2O truck loading with earth cover as shown on the Drawings and shall conform with the service conditions as presented in the buried piping schedule. C. Steel pipe shall be designed, constructed and installed for the services intended and shall conform to the following design requirements: 1. Liquid Service: Water 2. Temperature 120°F 3. Joint Design: a. Restrained: Lap or butt strap welded. b. Flanges shall be Class D rated pressure of 150 psi. 4. Cement mortar liner thickness shall be 3/8-inch, as specified in AWWA C205. 5. Special sections and fittings shall have the same minimum wall thickness as pipe. 104-1901 15054-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 6. Deflection at joints of the pipe shall not exceed 75% of manufacture's recommendation. 7. Allowable stress not to exceed 50% of steel yield stress. 8. Maximum working pressure: 85 psi. 9. Maximum Transient Pressure: 200 psi (In Addition to Working Pressure). 10. External pressure shall be equal to the maximum depth of bury with a soil density of 120 lb/cf. 11. Modulus of soil reaction (E') shall be 1,400 psi. 12. Deflection Lag Factor shall be 1.0 13. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 3% of pipe diameter. 14. Temperature Control Joint: Where restrained joints are indicated, a special longer butt strap joint (temperature control joint)shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 250 feet to account for movement of the installed pipe due to temperature changes.The pipe manufacturer shall determine the length required for the longer butt strap as defined by the CONTRACTOR'S pipe laying procedures and the location of the special joint. D. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following: 1. American SpiralWeld Pipe Company. 2. Ameron International Corporation. 3. Northwest Pipe Company. 4. Or equal. E. Steel pipe shall conform to AWWA C200. Pipe intended for use on potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall be listed in NSF/ANSI 61. F. Pipe Wall Thickness: Unless otherwise specified in the piping schedules at the end of Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, minimum pipe wall thickness shall be as specified in Table 40 05 24-B and manufactured in conformance with the applicable ASTM standards listed in Table 40 05 24-B: TABLE 40 05 24-B STEEL PIPE WALL THICKNESS Nominal Diameter Wall Thickness ASTM Standard Six to 12 inch Schedule 5 A53, Type E or S, Grade B 14 to 24 inch Schedule 10 A53, Type E or S, Grade B 30 to 36 inch Schedule 10 A139, Grade C 42 to 54 inch 5/16-inch A139, Grade C 60 to 66 inch 3/8-inch A139, Grade C 72 to 92 inch 1/2-inch A139, Grade C G. Minimum Length: Pipe shall be fabricated in lengths of at least 20 feet unless otherwise (b. shown or indicated on the Drawings,or limited by transportation and handling restrictions, 104-1901 15054-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement including Site conditions. Do not provide lengths less than 20 feet unless approved by ENGINEER in the Shop Drawings. H. Welds: 1. All spiral, longitudinal, and girth seams used in manufacturing pipe shall be full- penetration welded butt-joints. 2. Fabricate pipe with no more than two longitudinal seams. 3. Circumferential welds in straight pipe shall be no closer than seven feet apart. 4. Use girth welds for pipe sections and mitered joints in specials and fittings only when approved by ENGINEER in the steel pipe submittals. Shop-test girth welds for pipe sections and mitered joints in specials and fittings in accordance with AWWA C200. I. Pipe Ends: Prepare ends of pipe in the shop in conformance with AWWA C200 for the specified joint type. Ends shall be free of notches, weld splatter, and burrs. J. Steel Pipe Joints and Fittings: 1. Shop-welded Joints: a. Welded joints shall conform to AWWA C200 and AWWA C206. b. Fabricate ends of pipe for the specified type of welded joint. c. Welded joint type shall be of one of the following: 1) Lap-welded joint, with minimum lap of one inch. 2) Butt strap joint. 3) Single-welded butt joint. 4) Double-welded butt joint. 2. Mechanical Coupling Joints: a. Mechanical coupling joints shall conform to AWWA C200 and AWWA C219. b. Fabricate ends of pipe to allow installation of required type of mechanical coupling joint. Exterior surfaces of pipe ends shall be free from surface defects. Longitudinal or spiral welds shall be ground flush with plate or sheet surface for sufficient distance from pipe ends to allow coupling's gaskets to create a watertight seal. Shop-applied coatings shall be held back from pipe ends if required for field assembly. Interior linings shall be continuous to ends of pipe sections. c. Mechanical coupling joints shall be restrained unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. Size of harnessing rods shall be sufficient for the greater of the following: specified test pressure, or transient pressure. d. Conform to Section 15100, Couplings,Adapters and Specials for Process Piping. 3. Grooved or Shouldered End Coupling Joints: a. Grooved or shouldered end coupling joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Couplings are specified in Section 15100, Couplings, Adapters and Specials for Process Piping. b. Fabricate ends of pipe to allow installation of the associated grooved or shouldered end coupling joint. Exterior surfaces of pipe ends shall be free from surface defects. Longitudinal or spiral welds shall be ground flush with plate or 104-1901 15054-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement sheet surface for sufficient distance from pipe ends to allow the coupling's 41, gaskets to create a watertight seal. 4. AWWA Steel Pipe Specials and Fittings: a. Specials and fittings shall be the same material as adjoining pipe. Materials and fabrication methods shall conform to AWWA C200. b. Dimensions of specials and fittings shall conform to AWWA C208 unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. c. Radius of fabricated elbows shall be at least 2.5 pipe diameters, unless the wall thickness of elbow section is provided based on formulas included in Chapter 9 of AWWA Manual M11. d. Length of reducers shall be four times the difference in pipe diameters at each end of reducer. Reducers fabricated to the above dimensional requirement resulting in a half-apex angle of seven to 7.5 degrees or less shall have wall thickness equal to the wall thickness of the larger diameter pipe section connecting to reducer. Fabricate reducers that have half-apex angles greater than eight degrees in accordance with ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division I. K. Steel Pipe Coatings and Linings: 1. Linings for Steel Water Pipe: a. Linings, General: • 1) Lining types are specified in the piping schedules in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 2) Linings shall be held back at ends of pipe as required for specified joint types. b. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommended method. c. Liquid Epoxy Lining: Where specified in piping schedules in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, pipe and fittings shall be lined with liquid epoxy lining, minimum 16 mils dry film thickness, shop-applied by airless spray or centrifugal wheel equipment. Pipe and fittings shall be cleaned according to SSPC-SP 1 and abrasive blast-cleaned according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2. Linings shall be shop tested in accordance with source quality control requirement of this Section and shall conform to applicable requirements of AWWA C210. 2. Coatings for Steel Pipe: a. Coatings, General: 1) Coating types are specified in piping schedules in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 2) Coatings shall be held back at ends of pipe as required for specified joint types. b. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface in accordance with method specified in this Section for the associated coating system. c. Exposed Pipe and Fittings: 104-1901 15054-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. 4 City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1) Surface Preparation: Pipe and fittings shall be cleaned according to SSPC-SP 1 and abrasive blast cleaned according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2. 2) After surface preparation, primer-coat exterior ferrous metal surfaces of pipe and fittings in the shop with coating system conforming to AWWA C218 and Section 09900, Painting. 3) Pipe with beveled ends or lap-joint ends intended for field welding shall not be shop-coated within two to six inches of weld area. d. AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for Buried or Submerged Pipe and Fittings: 1) Surface Preparation: Pipe and fittings shall be cleaned according to SSPC-SP 1 and abrasive blast cleaned according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2. 2) Shop-apply liquid epoxy coating, minimum of 16 mils dry film thickness, to pipe and fittings, using airless spray or centrifugal wheel equipment. Epoxy coating shall be two-part, chemically cured system. 3) Source Quality Control: Liquid epoxy coatings shall be shop tested in accordance with source quality control requirement of this Section,and shall conform to AWWA C210. 4) Coat threads of threaded pipe and connections that will be field assembled with rust-inhibiting compound. After field assembly, remove compound and coat exposed areas with liquid epoxy in accordance with same procedures and methods specified for shop-coated pipe and fittings. 2.03 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS, SMALL-DIAMETER, THREADED STEEL PIPE FOR NATURAL GAS SERVICE A. General Requirements 1. Test requirements: 1) Test medium: Cylinder Nitrogen. 2) Pressure: 150 psig. 3) Duration: 6 HRS. 2. System components: a. Pipe size through 26 IN: 1) Exposed service: a) Material: Steel, Grade B, black, Schedule 40. b) Reference: ASTM A53. c) Lining: None. d) Coating: Paint. e) Fittings: Malleable iron meeting ASTM A197, ASME B16.3, Class 150. f) Joints: Threaded, ASME B16.9 steel butt- or socket-welded joints. 104-1901 15054-10 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2) Buried service: (lib a) Materials: Steel, Grade B, black, Schedule 40. b) Reference: ASTM A53. c) Linings: None. d) Coatings: Factory coating-mill wrapped with 3-M "Scotchkote," or Energy Coating Company "Encoat" with fittings and uncoated portions fully wrapped after testing with 3-M "Scotchkote" tape. e) Fittings: Malleable iron meeting ASTM A197, ASME 816.3, Class 150. f) Joints: Threaded, ASME B16.9 steel butt- or socket-welded joints. B. Natural Gas Piping Installation: 1. Install piping in accordance with NFPA, local gas company regulations, codes and local ordinances, complete with necessary appurtenances. 2. Install buried pipe at approximately 30 IN deep. 3. Gas cocks: a. Install before gas utilization equipment connected to system, at each branch main and at connection to meter. b. Design to operate safely under pressures indicated. (1111, c. Install ground joint unions at intervals to facilitate repairs. d. Cocks shall be of type and lubricant recommended by manufacturer for this class of service, and as approved by local gas company. 4. Pipe drainage: a. Drain horizontal piping to risers. b. Locate drains where required for system drainage. c. Install tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or provide with threaded, capped nipple at bottom of risers or in accordance with applicable codes. 5. Make piping connections with shellacked joints or ground joint unions. 6. Provide vents from gas regulators, pressure reducing valves, and other vented devices to the outdoors and terminate in accordance with applicable codes. 7. Connect piping to pressure reducing valve outside each building as shown on drawings and schedule. 8. Provide flexible connections to vibration isolated equipment suitable for pressures, local and national codes and intended application. 9. Remove cutting and threading burrs. 104-1901 15054-11 KIT Professionals, Inc. I City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 10. Plug each gas outlet (including valves) with threaded plugs or caps immediately after installation and retain until the piping or equipment connections are completed. 11. Continuously ground gas piping electrically, bond tightly to the grounding connection. 12. Install piping parallel to other piping, but maintain a minimum 12 IN clearance between gas piping and any piping that could reach 200 DegF. 13. All gas piping in air plenums to be all-welded and encased in a Schedule 40 pipe sleeve. a. Ends of the sleeve open to atmosphere or sealed with the annullus vented (gas pipe size) to atmosphere. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION A. All pipeline materials shall be stamped, marked, or identified on interior and exterior with the following: 1. Manufacturer's name or trademark. 2. Pipe class and reference standard designation. 3. Size and length dimensions. 4. Date and place of manufacture. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspections: All pipe and fittings, shop applied linings and coatings, shop welds, and related Work performed in the shop shall be inspected by manufacturer in accordance with applicable reference standards and as specified in this Section. Submit inspection reports to ENGINEER prior to shipment from the shop. 2. Tests: Perform shop tests on the following in conformance with applicable standards referenced in this Section: a. Pipe: 1) Pressure Test: Test each length of pipe of each diameter and working pressure to the greater of the following test pressures:at least 80 percent of pipe's yield strength, or according to the pressure testing formula in AWWA C200. Maintain test pressure for minimum of two minutes. 2) Welds: All fillet welds shall be examined using magnetic particle method or dye penetrant method. All welds shall be visually inspected by welding inspector certified by AWS. Welds for segmented flanges shall be radiographically or ultrasonically tested in the shop. 3) Shop Fit Tests: For all pipe with lap joints, perform shop fit test on at least five joints of each pipe size and joint type manufactured in each production run. 104-1901 15054-12 KIT Professionals. Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement b. Fittings and Specials: Test each fitting and special using at least one of the 410' following nondestructive testing methods: visual inspection, dye penetrant examination, magnetic particle testing, radiographic testing, or ultrasonic testing. c. Linings and Coatings: 1) Liquid Epoxy Lining: Linings shall be shop tested for adhesion in accordance with ASTM D3359 Method A and ASTM D4541, holiday tested in accordance with NACE RP0188, and cure tested in accordance with ASTM D4752 and D3363. Linings shall meet the applicable requirements of AWWA C210. 2) Polyurethane Lining: Linings shall be shop tested for adhesion by V-cut method, holiday tested in accordance with NACE RP0188, cure tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure, visually inspected, and dry-film thickness tested in accordance with SSPC-PA 2, and shall meet applicable requirements of AWWA C222. 3) AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for Buried or Submerged Pipe and Fittings: Coatings shall be shop-tested for adhesion in accordance with ASTM D3359 Method A and ASTM D4541, holiday tested in accordance with NACE RP0188, and cure tested in accordance with ASTM D4752 and D3363, and shall conform to AWWA C210. 4) AWWA C222 Polyurethane Coating Systems for Buried or Submerged Pipe • and Fittings: Coatings shall be shop tested for adhesion by the V-cut method, holiday tested in accordance with NACE RP 0188, cure tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure, visually inspected, and dry-film thickness tested in accordance with SSPC-PA 2, and shall conform to AWWA C222. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. For exposed piping installation, refer to Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. C. Field-welded joints shall conform to requirements for shop-welded joints specified in this Section. D. Repairs to linings and coatings shall be made as recommended by the manufacturer of pipe and coating or lining (as applicable), and as accepted by ENGINEER. END OF SECTION (81.0 104-1901 15054-13 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Steel Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement IR) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 15054-14 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Ductile Iron Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15062 ILDUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish exposed ductile iron pipe and fittings. 2. Extent of piping is shown on the Drawings. Piping schedules in Section 15051, Buried Piping Installation and Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, specify pipe service, diameter, material, lining, coating, pressure rating, joint type, and testing required. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before ductile iron pipe Work. C. Related Divisions: 1. Division 01, General Requirements 2. Division 09, Finishes 3. Division 31, Earthwork 4. Division 33, Utilities ® 5. Division 40, Process Interconnections 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI B18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series. 2. ANSI B18.2.2, Square and Hex Nuts. (Inch Series). 3. ASTM A193, Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A194, Specification for Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both. 5. ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 6. ASTM A354, Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. 7. ASTM A563, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 8. ASTM 8117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)Apparatus. 0 104-1901 15062-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Ductile Iron Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 9. ASTM C283, Test Methods for Resistance of Porcelain Enameled Utensils to Boiling Acid. 10. ASTM D714, Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints. 11. ASTM D792, Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. 12. ASTM D5162, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Non-Conductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates. 13. ASTM E96, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 14. ASTM G14, Test Method for Impact Resistance of Pipeline Coatings (Falling Weight Test). 15. ASTM G62, Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings. 16. ASTM G95, Test Methods for Cathodic Disbondment Test of Pipeline Coatings (Attached Cell Method). 17. ANSI/AWWA C104, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 18. ANSI/AWWA C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water. 19. ANSI/AWWA C111, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 20. ANSI/AWWA C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray Iron Threaded Flanges. 21. ANSI/AWWA C116, Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water Service. 22. ANSI/AWWA C151, Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. 23. ANSI/AWWA C153, Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 inch through 24 inch and 54 inch through 64 inch for Water Service. 24. ANSI/AWWA C606, Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. 25. MSS-SP 60, Connecting Flange Joint Between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves. 26. NACE RP0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. 27. NAPF 500-03, Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings. 28. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 29. SSPC PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 30. SSPC Painting Manual, Volume 1 , Para. XIV. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years successful experience producing ductile iron pipe and fittings and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation in the United States that are similar applications to the specified service. 104-1901 15062-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Ductile Iron Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement b. Lining and coating products shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years successful experience in protecting pipelines exposed to the specified service conditions , and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation in the United States that are similar applications to the specified service. c. When not applied by the manufacturer, lining and coating Subcontractor shall have a minimum of five years successful experience in the application of the specified linings and coatings for similar applications for the specified service, and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation in the United States. B. Supply and Compatibility: 1. Unless otherwise approved, obtain all pipe, fittings, and appurtenances included in this Section from a single ductile iron pipe manufacturer. 2. Ductile iron pipe manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for pipe,fittings,and appurtenances furnished under this Section. 3. Pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be suitable for the specified service and shall be integrated into overall piping system by ductile iron pipe manufacturer. 4. Ductile iron pipe manufacturer shall be responsible for all products and all factory- applied linings and coatings,whether installed at pipe manufacturer's facility or at manufacturer's Supplier's facility. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Pipe and fittings, including linings and coatings,that will convey potable water or water that will be treated to become potable, shall be certified by an accredited organization • in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 as being suitable for contact with potable water,and shall comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following with Shop Drawings required under Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Detailed drawings and data for pipe, fittings, gaskets, appurtenances, linings, and coatings. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Submit certificate signed by manufacturer of each product that product conforms to applicable referenced standards and the Contract Documents. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of specified shop tests for pipe, fittings, linings, and coatings. b. Lining and coating test coupons. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. • 104-1901 15062-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Ductile Iron Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PART 2— PRODUCTS ,•••) 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Piping systems shall be suitable for their intended use. 2. Joints shall be as specified in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. If not specified, provide flanged joints for exposed piping and restrained push-on joints for buried piping. Provide couplings on pipe with plain or grooved ends where shown or where approved by ENGINEER. B. Ductile Iron Pipe, Joints, and Fittings: 1. Flanged Pipe: Fabricate in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C115. a. Pressure Rating: As specified in piping schedule in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. If not otherwise specified, use Special Thickness Class 53. 2. Non-Flanged Pipe: Conform to ANSI/AWWA C151 for material, pressure,dimensions, tolerances, tests, markings, and other requirements. a. Pressure Class: As specified in piping schedules in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. If not otherwise specified, use Pressure Class 350. b. Special Thickness Class: As specified in piping schedules in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 3. Pipe Joints: a. Flanged Joints: Conform to ANSI/AWWA C110 and ANSI/AWWA C111 capable of meeting the pressure rating or special thickness class, and test pressure specified in piping schedule in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 1) Gaskets: Unless otherwise specified,gaskets shall be at least 1/8-inch thick, ring or full-face as required for the pipe, of synthetic rubber compound containing not less than 50 percent by volume nitrile or neoprene, and shall be free from factice, reclaimed rubber, and other deleterious substances. Gaskets shall be suitable for the service conditions specified, specifically designed for use with ductile iron pipe and fittings. 2) Bolts: Comply with ANSI 818.2.1. a) Exposed: ASTM A307, Grade B. b) Buried or Submerged: ASTM A193, Grade B8M, Class 2, Heavy hex, Type 316 stainless steel. 3) Nuts: Comply with ANSI B18.2.2. a) Exposed: ASTM A563, Grade A, Heavy hex. b) Buried or Submerged: ASTM A194, Grade B8M, Heavy hex, Type 316 stainless steel. b. Grooved End Joints: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C606. 1) Gaskets: Flush seal type designed for ductile iron that complies with or exceeds requirements of ASTM D2000 2) Bolts and nuts: As specified for flanged joints. 3) Unless otherwise specified, grooved end couplings shall be rigid joint for exposed service and flexible joint for buried service. 4) Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a) Victaulic, Style 31. b) Or equal. c. Restrained Joints: Restrained push-on joints shall be capable of being deflected after full assembly. Field cuts of restrained pipe are not allowed without 104-1901 15062-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Ductile Iron Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement approval of ENGINEER. 1) Products and Manufacturers: Provide restrained joints for mechanical joint piping by one of the following: a) Megalug, Series 1100, by EBBA Iron Sales, Inc. b) MJ Coupled Joint, by American Cast Iron Pipe Co. c) MJ Field Lok, by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co. d) Or equal. 2) Products and Manufacturers: Provide restrained joints for push-on joint piping by one of the following: a) Super-Lock Joint Pipe, by Clow Water Systems, a division of McWane, Inc. b) Lok-Ring Joint,or Flex-Ring Joint, by American Cast-Iron Pipe Company. c) TR Flex Joint, by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. d) Snap-Lok, by Griffin Pipe Products Company. e) Or equal. 4. Flanged and Push-On Joint Fittings: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C110 and ANSI/AWWA C111. a. Material: Ductile iron. b. Pressure rating, gaskets, bolts, and nuts shall be as specified for flanged joints. Pressure rating of fittings shall meet, but not exceed,specified pressure rating or special thickness class of the connected pipe. 5. Mechanical Joint Fittings: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C110 and ANSI/AWWA C111. a. Material: Ductile iron. b. Glands: Ductile iron. c. Pressure rating, gaskets, bolts, and nuts shall be as specified for mechanical • joints. Pressure rating of fittings shall meet, but not exceed, specified pressure rating or special thickness class of connected pipe. C. Lining, General: 1. Surface Preparation: a. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface in accordance with recommended method. D. Cement-mortar Lining: 1. Where specified in piping schedules included with Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, pipe and fittings shall be lined with cement-mortar lining in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104. E. Couplings: 1. Refer to Section 15100, Coupling, Adapters and Specials for Process Pipe F. Specials: 1. Transition Pieces: a. Provide suitable transition pieces (adapters)for connecting to existing piping. b. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, expose existing piping to determine material, dimensions, and other data required for transition pieces. 2. Taps: a. Provide taps where shown or required for small-diameter piping or instrumentation connections. (tio, b. Provide corporation stops where shown or required. c. Where pipe wall thickness or tap diameter will not allow engagement of the 104-1901 15062-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Ductile Iron Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement number of full threads recommended by the Ductile Iron Pipe Association, provide tapping saddle with outlet joints conforming to requirements of Paragraph 2.1.6.3.a of this Section for 12-inch diameter pipe, and Paragraph 2.1.B.3.b. for 14-inch through 30-inch diameter pipe. d. For flanged connections on tapping saddle outlet branch, counterbore flange in accordance with MSS SP-60 dimensions. Inside diameter of outlet shall be 1/4- inch greater than nominal diameter. 3. Tapping Sleeves a. Provide full-diameter tapping sleeves as shown on Drawings. Tapping Sleeves shall be Romac Industries Model #STS420 Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeve or equal. b. Utilize dielectric gaskets when connecting dissimilar metals. 4. Tangential Outlets: a. Provide tangential outlet fittings where shown or indicated. b. Flanged and grooved end joints are not allowed. 2.02 MARKING FOR IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to identification markings specified in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, also stamp, mark, and identify push-on joint pipe with: 1. Name or trademark of manufacturer. 2. Weight, class or nominal thickness, and casting period. 3. Country where cast. 4. Year the pipe was produced. 5. Letters "DI" or"Ductile" shall be cast or metal stamped B. In addition to identification markings specified in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, also stamp, mark, and identify flanged pipe with: 1. Flange manufacturer's mark, size, and letters "DI" cast or stamped on the flanges. 2. Fabricator's mark if other than flange manufacturer. 3. Length and weight. C. In addition to identification markings specified in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation, also stamp, mark, and identify fittings with: 1. Manufacturer's identification. 2. Pressure rating. 3. Nominal diameters of openings. 4. Country where cast. 5. Number of degrees or fraction of the circle on bends. 6. Letters "DI" or"Ductile" cast on them. 2.03 EXTERIOR SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATINGS A. General Coating Requirements: 1. Coating types are specified in piping schedules in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. B. Exposed Pipe and Fittings: 1. Surface Preparation: a. Initial Surface Inspection: Pipe and fitting manufacturer and coating applicator shall inspect surface to be coated and mutually determine recommended NAPF 104-1901 15062-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Ductile Iron Process Pipe Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 500-03 surface preparation method. 41, b. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface in accordance with recommended NAPF 500-03 method. c. Finished Surface Inspection: Prepared surfaces shall be inspected by coating applicator prior to application to determine acceptability of finished surface. If surface is unacceptable, repeat surface preparation and re-application as necessary. d. Exposed pipe and fittings shall not be asphalt-coated. 2. After recommended surface preparation, prime coat exterior ferrous metal surfaces of pipe and fittings in the shop in accordance with Section 09900, Painting. 3. Field painting shall comply with Section 09900, Painting. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect piping to assure that piping is free from defects in material and workmanship. Verify compatibility of pipe, fittings, gaskets, linings, and coatings. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. For exposed piping installation and testing, refer to Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. B. For buried piping installation and testing, refer to Section 15051, Buried Piping Installation. END OF SECTION (ir 104-1901 15062-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. 4 City of Pearland Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15100 (111r' COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install all couplings, adapters, and specials for process piping. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before couplings, adapters, accessories, and specials for process piping Work. C. Related Divisions: 1. Division 09, Finishes. 2. Division 15, Process Interconnections 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: ® 1. ANSI B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ANSI 616.39, Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions. 3. ASME B31, Standards of Pressure Piping. 4. ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 5. ASTM A105/A105M, Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings and Piping Applications. 6. ASTM B169/B169M Specification for Aluminum Bronze Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. 7. ASTM B650, Specification for Electro-Deposited Engineering Chromium Coatings of Ferrous Substrates. 8. ASTM F593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs 9. AWWA C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have at least five years' experience producing substantial similar products to those specified and shall be able to provide documentation of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years each. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each type of coupling,adapter,and special for process piping product included in this Section, regardless of component manufacturer, from a single couplings, adapters, and specials manufacturer. 2. Supplier shall prepare,or review, and approve all submittals for components furnished (60 under this Section. 104-1901 15100-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. I City of Pearland Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3. Components shall be suitable for specified service conditions and be integrated into overall assembly by the Supplier. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit piping layout Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 2. Product Data: a. Submit product data on each type of coupling, expansion joint, and other piping specialties and accessories, including gaskets, hardware, and appurtenances sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. When requested by ENGINEER submit certificate attesting to compliance with standards referenced in this Section, signed by manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Provide instructions for handling, storing, installing, and adjusting of products. 3. Source Quality Control: a. When requested by ENGINEER, submit results of source quality control tests. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Submit qualifications of manufacturer when requested by ENGINEER. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 COUPLINGS A. Sleeve-type, Flexible Couplings: 1. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Style 38, as manufactured by Dresser Piping Specialties, part of Dresser, Inc. b. Style 411, by Smith Blair, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Material: Steel. 4. Gaskets: Suitable for specified service, as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, primer-coated. For buried or submerged applications, provide stainless steel bolts complete with washers complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316 and with nitrided stainless nuts. 6. Harnessing: a. Harness couplings to restrain pressure piping. For pipelines that will be under pressure, test pressures are specified in piping schedules in Section 15051, Buried Piping Installation, and Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. b. Tie adjacent flanges with bolts of corrosion-resistant alloy steel. Provide flange- mounted stretcher bolt plates to be designed by manufacturer, unless otherwise approved. For buried or submerged applications, provide external bolting and 104-1901 15100-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement other hardware of Type 316 stainless steel, including tie bolts, bolt plates, lugs, 4101' nuts, and washers. c. On plain-end piping, for harnessing couplings, provide anchor restraint system such as Dresser Piping Specialties STAR Anchor Style 443, or equal. d. Conform to dimensions, size, spacing, and materials for lugs, bolts, washers, and nuts as recommended by manufacturer and approved by ENGINEER for pipe size,wall thickness, and test pressure required. Provide minimum 5/8-inch diameter bolts. 7. Remove pipe stop(s) if used, unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Flanged Coupling Adapters: 1. Description: One end of adapter shall be flanged and opposite end shall have sleeve- type flexible coupling. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Style 128, as manufactured by Dresser Piping Specialties, part of Dresser, Inc. b. Style 913, by Smith Blair, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping. 4. Material: Steel. 5. Gasket: Recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, primer-coated. For buried or submerged applications, provide stainless steel bolts complete with washers complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316 and nitrided stainless nuts. 7. Harnessing: a. Harness adapters to restrain pressure piping. For pressure pipelines, test ID pressures are included in piping schedules in Section 15051, Buried Piping Installation, and Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. b. For flanged adapters 12-inch diameter and smaller, provide 1/2-inch diameter (minimum) Type 316 stainless steel anchor studs installed in pressure-tight anchor boss. For buried or submerged applications, provide external bolting and other hardware of Type 316 stainless steel, including tie bolts, bolt plates, lugs, nuts, and washers. Provide number of studs required to restrain test pressure and service conditions. Harness shall be as designed and recommended by flanged adapter manufacturer. Provide the following minimum anchor studs unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER. 1) Six-inch Diameter and Smaller: Two 2) Eight-inch Diameter and Smaller: Four 3) Ten-inch Diameter and Smaller: Six 4) Twelve-inch Diameter and Smaller: Eight 5) On pump discharge outlets, conform to Hydraulic Institute standards for allowable nozzle loads. c. For adapters larger than 12-inch diameter, provide split-ring harness clamps with minimum of four corrosion-resistant alloy steel bolts. For buried or submerged applications, provide external bolting and other hardware of Type 316 stainless steel, including tie bolts, bolt plates, lugs, nuts,and washers. Harness assembly shall be as designed and recommended by flanged adapter manufacturer. Dimensions, sizes, spacing and materials shall be suitable for service and conditions encountered and shall be approved by ENGINEER. C 1 104-1901 15100-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. Al City of Pearland Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement C. Split-type Grooved or Shouldered End Couplings: 1. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping. Use shouldered end where required by pressure rating. 2. Products and Manufacturers: a. For coupling of ductile iron pipe, provide products of one of the following: 1) Style 31, as manufactured by Victaulic Company. 2) Series 500, as manufactured by Tyler Pipe, Gustin Bacon Division. 3) Gruvlok Figure 705, as manufactured by Grinnell Mechanical Products, division of Tyco. 4) Or equal. b. For coupling of stainless steel pipe, provide products of one of the following: 1) Style 77-S, as manufactured by Victaulic Company. 2) Or equal. c. For coupling of aluminum pipe, provide products of one of the following: 1) Style 77A, as manufactured by Victaulic Company. 2) Series 101, as manufactured by Tyler Pipe, Gustin Bacon Division. 3) Or equal. d. For coupling of thermoplastic pipe, provide products of one of the following: 1) Style 774, as manufactured by Victaulic Company. 2) Or equal. 3. Couplings shall conform to applicable requirements of AWWA C606. 4. Housing Material: a. For coupling of ductile iron pipe and thermoplastic pipe: Malleable iron or ductile iron. b. For coupling of stainless steel pipe: Type 304 stainless steel, or equal. 5. Gaskets: Recommended by the manufacturer. .1) 6. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel track bolts, plated. For buried or submerged applications, provide stainless steel bolts complete with washers complying with ASTM F593, AISI Type 316 and with nitrided stainless nuts. 2.02 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Rubber-type Expansion Joints: 1. General: a. Use rubber-type expansion joints at all expansion joint locations, except where other types of expansion joints are shown or specified. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Mercer Rubber Company. b. U.S. Rubber Supply Company, USA c. Or equal. 3. Liquid Service: a. Construct expansion joints of neoprene or Buna-N suitable for temperatures up to 180 degrees F. b. Expansion joints shall be filled arch type. Provide backup or retaining rings as recommended by expansion joint manufacturer. c. Expansion joints shall be yoked in manner to provide transmission of tension loading to which expansion joint may be subjected during system operation. Compressive or lateral movement of expansion joint shall not be impaired by yoking system. Details of expansion joint yoking shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval. -gm) 104-1901 15100-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement tp, 4. Harnessing: a. Harness each expansion joint against thrust for test pressure in piping, as specified in piping schedules in Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. b. Harnessing shall be by control units consisting of two or more tie rods connected between flanges, set for maximum allowable elongation of expansion joint. c. Provide epoxy-coated triangular plates to connect tie rods to flanges. Tie rods shall be Series 300 stainless steel. Rubber washers shall be used between triangular plates and tie rods. d. Provide control units in accordance with recommendations of expansion joint manufacturer. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES A. Dielectric Unions: 1. General:Where copper pipe connects to steel pipe, cast-iron pipe,or ductile iron pipe, provide either dielectric union or an insulating section of rubber or plastic pipe. When used, insulating section shall have minimum length of 12 pipe diameters. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Epco Sales, Inc. b. Watts Regulator Company. c. Capitol Manufacturing Company. d. Or equal. 3. Dielectric Unions: Rated for 250 psi, ANSI B16.39. 4. Insulating Sections: Rated for same pressure as associated piping test pressure. Material shall be suitable for the application and service. B. Quick Connect Couplings - Chemical Service: 1. Type: Dual cam and groove, male end dimensionally similar to MIL-C-27487, with dust cap, Type 316 stainless steel chain and lock. 2. Body: Polypropylene. 3. Cam Arms: Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Gaskets: Ethylene Propylene Dienne Terpolymer(EPDM). 5. End Connections: Solvent socket welded. C. Service Saddles: 1. General: Tapping Saddles shall be corrosion resistant, dual strap stainless steel, epoxy coated ductile iron saddles. 2. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Ford. b. Power Seal. c. James Jones. 2.04 PAINTING A. Shop Painting: 1. Clean and prime-coat ferrous metal surfaces of products in the manufacturer's shop in accordance with Section 09900, Painting, unless otherwise specified in this Section 2. Coat machined, polished and non-ferrous surfaces bearing surfaces and similar ® unpainted surfaces with corrosion prevention compound that shall be maintained during storage and until products are placed into operation. 104-1901 15100-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement B. Field painting shall conform to Section 09900, Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect materials for defects in material and workmanship. Verify compatibility of products with pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation: 1. Install piping specialties in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions. 2. For exposed installations, refer to Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. B. Adjust expansion joints as required to ensure that expansion joints will be fully extended when ambient temperature is at minimum operating temperature, and fully compressed at maximum operating temperature for the system in which expansion joints are installed. END OF SECTION I 104-1901 15100-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15140 (lik PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND RESTRAINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Equipment bases and supports. C. Sleeves and seals. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in Contract prices bid for items of which this work is a component part. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Technical Specification Section 01350 — 'Submittals" B. Related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications Sections. 1.04 REFERENCES ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, Sections 120 and 121 of ASME B31.1. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Technical Specification Section 01350 —"Submittals". B. As a minimum, submit the following items: 1. A layout of the systems including location on fixed and movable joints. 2. Details of design and fabrication of joints. 3. Details of support brackets, cradles, pads, thrust resisting elements, and other supporting elements. 4. Other pertinent elements necessary for a complete installation. 5. Design calculations for submitted items. PART 2 PRODUCT 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 104-1901 15140-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement A. For uninsulated lines 2 inches and less and for drainage and downspout lines provide hangers which are adjustable swivel ring type fabricated of malleable iron. B. For uninsulated lines larger than 2 inches and for insulated lines, except drainage and downspout piping, provide adjustable clevis type hangers. Size hangers to allow insulation to extend unbroken through the hanger. C. Fabricate hangers installed in valve vaults, wet wells, and other below grade areas of cadmium plated or stainless steel. 2.02 INSERTS A. Make inserts for individual hangers of galvanized malleable iron; include removable nuts held in place by V-type teeth on the insert body and nut. Make continuous-slotted channel inserts of galvanized steel with integral anchors at 6- inch centers. Provide factory finished steel snap-on cover plates on channel inserts between support attachments. 2.03 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Use expansion bolts for support which are stainless steel wedge type. Do not use expansion bolt anchors with lead. 2.04 PIPE SADDLES A. Fabricate pipe saddles of hot dip galvanized steel. Saddles for supporting pipe from the floor shall be at least 9 inches in length and as wide as the outside diameter of the pipe. Make a bearing support of 120 degrees. Mount saddles on concrete pads at least 2 inches high. 2.05 FRAMING HANGERS A. Use factory fabricated metal framing systems with factory applied primer paint as framing for wall type hangers, trapeze hangers, and tunnel stanchions. Attach supports to structures with inserts for new concrete, with surface mounting methods for masonry or existing concrete, and with welding or clamps for structural steel. Make pipe supports fabricated on the site of structural steel members with raw edges ground and dressed. Rest floor supports in areas with uncovered concrete floors on concrete pads not less than 2 inches high. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Hang piping inside structures supported from the floor or racked adjacent to walls. B. Provide inserts cast in concrete walls or slabs for hanging and supporting pipe. If materials not galvanized or cadmium plated, paint them with primer before installation. 104-1901 15140-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4 C. Design fabricate, and install support components in general conformance with Sections 120 and 121 of ANSI B31.1, Power Piping, except as modified in this Section. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support, brace, and anchor interior piping to prevent movement in any direction because of pressure, temperature, flow, or water hammer, except at properly located expansion joints and fittings. B. Provide two pipe guides on each side of expansion joints at which pipe movement occurs. The first guide shall be not more than 4-pipe diameters from the joint and the second not more than 14 diameters. Provide additional guides as required to maintain pipe alignment, spaced as required for the pipe size, fluid pressure and temperature inside the pipe, and as recommended by the expansion joint manufacturer or as shown. C. Maximum support spacing and hanger rod sizes for metal pipe containing liquids are as follows: Nominal Pipe Support Spacing Rod Diameter in Inches Size (Inches) (Feet) One Rod Two Rods 1 and Smaller 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 8 3/8 3/8 110 2 10 3/8 3/8 2-1/2 11 1/2 3/8 3 12 1/2 3/8 4 and 5 14 1/2 3/8 6 and 8 17 1/2 3/8 10 17 5/8 1/2 12 17 3/4 1/2 14 17 3/4 5/8 16 17 7/8 5/8 18 and 20 17 1 3/4 24 17 1-1/8 7/8 D. For valves 4 inches and larger in unburied horizontal lines support the valve on both sides when located within 18 inches of the valve or meter. Provide additional supports where required so that piping loads do not place damaging stresses on supports, valves, and equipment. Where necessary, block up pipe at supports to permit installation of insulation. E. Support unburied horizontal runs of rubber hose and non-metallic pipe for the Cr entire length by means of troughs consisting of structural steel channels or angles supported at not more than 10-foot intervals. 104-1901 15140-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. 1 City of Pearland Pipe Hangers, Supports and Restraints Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement F. Support piping not included in the foregoing tabulation as indicated or in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations, if not indicated. G. Anchor buried pressure pipe at each fitting causing a change in direction of 10 degrees or more. Concrete thrust blocks or other restraining devices in any satisfactory combination may be used. Submit the details of the method proposed for use, together with design calculations, to the City Engineer before installation. END OF SECTION 104-1901 15140-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Pipe Insulation —Water and Chemical Service Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15261 �r PIPE INSULATION -WATER AND CHEMICAL SERVICE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This Section includes the furnishing and the installation of insulation for water piping, chemical piping, instrument tubing containing water, and piping subject to condensation. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment for work performed under this Section. Include cost of same in Contract prices bid for items of which this work is a component. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Technical Specification Section 01350— "Submittals" C. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified in other Technical Specification Sections. 1.04 SUBMITTALS • Submit the following in accordance with Technical Specification Section 01350— "Submittals": Submit bulletins and certified data describing materials to be used for insulation. Include manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING All insulation components to be delivered, stored, and handled per manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER(S) A. Insulation: Owens Corning Fiberglass, Kraut Fiber Glass, or Certainteed B. Exterior Service Weather Jacket: Premetco or Childers Products Co. 2.02 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT A. General: All insulation system components to be asbestos free. 104-1901 15261-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Pipe Insulation —Water and Chemical Service Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement B. Pipe Insulation: Molded heavy density one-piece insulation made from inorganic glass fibers bonded with a thermo-setting resin. Insulation to include an all service jacket (ASJ)with vapor barrier, a self sealing lap (SSL) for longitudinal joint, and similar factory furnished butt joint sealing strip. Minimum insulation thickness to be 1- inch for pipes 2-inch and smaller, 2 inches for lines 2-1/2 inches and larger. C. Weather Jacket: All exterior insulation to be protected by minimum 0.016-inch thick aluminum jacket with laminated vapor barrier of polyethylene-surlyn or polyethylene-Kraft paper thermally bonded to the inside surface. Valve, fittings, and flanges to have equal jacketing and moisture barrier protection. D. Vapor Barrier Sealant: Non-shrinking permanently flexible vapor barrier sealant, Childers CP-70 or equal. E. Strapping: Stainless steel bands, minimum 0.020 inches thick by 3/4 inches wide with 0.34- inch thick wing seals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Pipes and tubing 8 inches and smaller to be insulated when exposed to outside temperatures. All hot water lines 1/2 inch and larger to be insulated. See PLANS for piping to be insulated for prevention of condensation. B. Furnish all accessories required to complete the work. 3.03 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. Install insulation after piping has been installed, tested, and painted. Install in neat manner, following manufacturer's printed instructions. All fittings and valves to be carefully insulated and sealed. All joints to be completely waterproof. Use only workman skilled in this trade. B. Pipe Insulation: Butt all joints firmly together and secure self seal lap in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ends of pipe insulation to be sealed with vapor barrier sealant at all fittings, valves, and intervals not exceeding 21 feet on straight run pipe. ..0014 104-1901 15261-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Pipe Insulation — Water and Chemical Service Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement C. Valves and Fittings: Preformed insulation and fitting covers to be used where possible. Where necessary, segments of pipe insulation to be carefully fitted, secured by 20 gauge corrosion resistant wire, and finished with vapor barrier sealant, so as not to interfere with operation of valve actuator. D. Weather Jacket: Piping, valves, and fittings to be protected by preformed aluminum jacketing with vapor barrier installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All joints to be made watertight with sealant. E. Termination: Insulation to extend 6 inches below finish grade and terminate flush with all walls and slabs. All termination points to be completely waterproof. F. Wall Penetrations: Seal all voids between wall penetrations and completed pipe insulation system. END OF SECTION 104-1901 15261-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 15500 PROCESS VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install process valves, four-inch diameter and larger, and appurtenances, complete and operational. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before process valves Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500, Metals. 2. Section 09900, Painting. 3. Section 15051, Buried Piping Installation 4. Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 1.02 REFERENCES (11Pv A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. ANSI B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 3. ANSI B16.34, Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding end. (ASME B16.34). 4. ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water Components— Health Effects. 5. API STD 594, Check Valves, Flanged Lug, Wafer and Butt-Welding. 6. API STD 598, Valve Inspection and Testing. 7. API STD 609, Butterfly Valves: Double Flanged, Lug-Type and Wafer-Type. 8. ASTM A126, Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings. 9. ASTM A193/A193M, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 10. ASTM A194/A194M, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service, or Both. 11. ASTM A240/A240M, Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 12. ASTM A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 13. ASTM A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 14. ASTM A351/A351M, Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts. 15. ASTM A380, Practice for Cleaning, Descaling and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment and Systems. 16. ASTM A536, Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 17. ASTM A564/A564M, Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age- Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 104-1901 15500-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 18. ASTM A743/A743 M, Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium- Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. 19. ASTM B62, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 20. ASTM B98/B98M, Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. 21. ASTM B138/B138M, Specification for Manganese Bronze Rod, Bar and Shapes. 22. ASTM B265, Specification for Titanium and Titanium Alloy Strip, Sheet and Plate. 23. ASTM B584, Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 24. ASTM D429, Test Methods for Rubber Property - Adhesion to Rigid Substrates. 25. AWWA C504, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 26. AWWA C540, Power-Actuating Devices for Valve and Slide Gates. 27. AWWA C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 28. AWWA Manual M49, Butterfly Valves: Torque, Head Loss, and Cavitation Analysis. 29. FS TT-C-494, Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid-Resistant. 30. NEMA MG 1, Motors and Generators. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have minimum of five years of experience producing substantially similar materials and equipment to that required and be able to provide evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each type of equipment and appurtenances included in this Section, regardless of the component manufacturer, from a single manufacturer of the type of process valve. For each type of valve, do not furnish valves of more than one manufacturer. 2. Supplier of each type of equipment specified shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components associated with the type of process valve Supplier is furnishing. 3. Components shall be suitable for use in the specified service conditions. Components shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the process valve manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Installation drawings showing orientation of valve in both plan and elevation view. Drawings shall clearly identify valve and its appurtenances, including controls, actuators, valve stems, and other components. Show dimensions of valves and appurtenances in relation to piping and structural and architectural components, where applicable. b. Controls for and control characteristics of modulating valves, including closing times. c. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals numbers for electric- motor actuators. d. Calculations for sizing of electric actuators. e. Calculations for sizing of hydraulic actuators. 104-1901 15500-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement f. Calculations for sizing of operating mechanism with extension stems. 41, g. Calculations for sizing of gear actuators. 2. Product Data: a. Product data sheets. b. Complete catalog information, including dimensions, weight, specifications, and identification of materials of construction of all parts. c. Corrosion resistance information to confirm suitability of valve materials for the application. Furnish information on chemical resistance of elastomers from elastomer manufacturer. d. Cv values and hydraulic headloss curves. 3. Testing Plans: a. Submit plan for shop testing of each valve for which shop testing is specified, including testing plan's and test facility's limitations proposed. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certificates of compliance with referenced standards, where applicable, including those of AWWA, NSF, and others required by ENGINEER. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Submit manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and installing valves and appurtenances. Provide templates and setting drawings for valves and appurtenances that require anchor bolts or similar anchorages. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit copies of shop test results and inspection data, certified by manufacturer. (ior 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit results of field tests required. 5. Supplier's Reports: a. When requested by ENGINEER, submit written report of results of each visit to Site by Supplier's serviceman, including purpose and time of visit, tasks performed and results obtained. 6. Qualifications Statements: a. When requested by ENGINEER, submit manufacturer's qualifications demonstrating compliance with the Specifications, including list of existing installations with contact names and telephone number(s)for each. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: a. Furnish operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01782, Operations and Maintenance Data. b. Furnish in operation and maintenance manuals complete nameplate data for each valve and electric actuator. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Spare Parts, Extra Stock Materials, and Tools: a. Spare Parts and Extra Stock Materials: Furnish as specified for each valve type. b. Tools: Furnish two sets of special tools (excluding metric tools, if applicable) for each size and type of valve furnished. 104-1901 15500-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials and equipment to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage products that are to be embedded in concrete in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. 2. Inspect boxes, crates, and packages upon delivery to Site and notify ENGINEER in writing of loss or damage to materials and equipment. Promptly remedy loss and damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Keep products off ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Store equipment in covered storage and prevent condensation and damage by extreme temperatures. Store in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect steel, packaged materials, and electronics from corrosion and deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Valves, General: 1. Provide each valve with manufacturer's name and rated pressure cast in raised letters on valve body. 2. Provide valves with brass or Type 316 stainless steel nameplate attached with Type 316 stainless steel screws. Nameplates shall have engraved letters displaying the following minimum information: a. Valve size. b. Pressure and temperature ratings. c. Date of manufacture. d. Manufacturer's name. 3. Provide valves to turn clockwise to close, unless otherwise specified. 4. Provide valves with permanent markings for direction to open. 5. Manually operated valves, with or without extension stems, shall require not more than 40-pound pull on manual operator to open or close valve against specified criteria. Gear actuator and valve components shall be able to withstand minimum pull of 200 pounds on manual operator and input torque of 300-foot pounds to actuator nut. Manual operators include handwheel, chainwheel, crank, lever, and T-handle wrench. B. Valve Materials: 1. Valve materials shall be suitable for the associated valve's service or application, as shown. 2. Protect wetted parts from galvanic corrosion caused by contact of different metals. 3. Wetted components and wetted surfaces of valves used with potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall conform to ANSI/NSF 61. 4. Clean and descale fabricated stainless steel items in accordance with ASTM A380 and the following: a. Passivate all stainless steel welded fabricated items after manufacture by immersing in pickling solution of six percent nitric acid and three percent hydrofluoric acid. Temperature and detention time shall be sufficient for removing oxidation and ferrous contamination without etching surface. 104-1901 15500-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement Perform complete neutralizing operation by immersing in trisodium phosphate rinse followed by clean water wash. b. Scrub welds with same pickling solution or pickling paste and clean with stainless steel wire brushes or by grinding with non-metallic abrasive tools to remove weld discoloration, and then neutralize and wash clean. C. Valve Joints: 1. Unless otherwise specified, provide with flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.1. Pressure class of flanges shall be equal to or greater than specified pressure rating of the associated valve. 2. For stainless steel bolting, except where nitrided nuts are required, use graphite- free anti-seize compound to prevent galling. Strength of joint shall not be affected by using anti-seize compound. 2.02 RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. M&H Valve Company 2. US Pipe and Foundry. 3. Crane 4. Mueller 5. Or equal. B. General: 1. Provide valves conforming to AWWA C509 and as specified in this Section. • 2. Sizes: Four-inch through 12-inch diameter, 16-inch and 20-inch diameter. 3. Type: a. Provide non-rising stem (NRS) valves for buried service. b. For interior and exposed service, provide outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) rising-stem valves, unless otherwise specified. c. Provide position indicators for NRS valves used in exposed service. 4. Minimum Rated Working Pressure: a. Valves 12-inch Diameter and Smaller: 200 psig. b. Valves 16-inch and 20-inch Diameter: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 150 degrees F. 6. Provide valves with fully encapsulated resilient wedges, unless otherwise specified. C. Materials of Construction: Shall conform to AWWA C509 and shall be as follows: 1. Valve Body, Bonnet, and Stuffing Box: Cast-iron. 2. Wedge: Cast-iron, symmetrically and fully encapsulated with molded rubber having minimum 1/8-inch thickness. 3. Stem: Manganese bronze. 4. Rubber Items: Buna-N or other synthetic rubber suitable for the application. 5. Internal and external bolting and other hardware including pins, set screws, plug, studs, bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel. D. Interior Coating: 1. Valves shall be coated inside. Steel, cast-iron and ductile iron surfaces, except Cor machined surfaces, shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C550. 104-1901 15500-5 KIT Professionals, Inc. d City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement E. Testing: 1. Test valves in valve manufacturer's shop in accordance with AWWA C509. 2.03 SILENT CHECK VALVES (SCV) A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Val-Matic. 2. Dezurik. 2. Or equal. B. General: 1. Check valves shall be of the silent operating type that begins to close as the forward flow diminishes and fully closes at zero velocity preventing flow reversal. 2. Type: wafer-style including raised faces for installation between ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanges valve without disc interference. 3. Rated Working Pressure: 200 psi 4. A Buna-N seal shall be provided on the seat when specified to provide zero leakage at both high and low pressures without overloading or damaging the seal. The seal design shall provide both a metal-to-metal and a metal-to-Buna-N seal. 5. The valve design shall incorporate a center guided, spring loaded disc, guided at opposite ends and having a short linear stroke that generates a flow area equal to the nominal valve size. 6. The operation of the valve shall not be affected by the position of installation. The valve shall be capable of operating in the horizontal or vertical positions with the flow up or down. Heavy duty springs for vertical flow down installations shall be provided when specified on 14 in. and larger valves. 7. All component parts shall be field replaceable without the need of special tools. A replaceable guide bushing shall be provided and held in position by the spring. The spring shall be designed to withstand 100,000 cycles without failure and provide a cracking pressure of 0.5 psi. 8. The valve disc shall be concave to the flow direction providing for disc stabilization, maximum strength, and a minimum flow velocity to open the valve. C. Materials of Construction: 1. Body: cast iron or ductile iron. 2. Disc: bronze. 3. Disc stem: bronze. 4. Spring: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Bushing: bronze. 6. Seat: bronze, with Buna-N seal. 7. Screws: Type 316 stainless steel. D. Interior Coating: 1. Valves shall be coated inside. Steel, cast-iron and ductile iron surfaces, except machined surfaces, shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C550. E. Testing: 1. The valves shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times their rated cold working pressure and seat tested at the valve cold working pressure. The manufacturer shall provide test certificates. 2. Allowable Leakage at Rated Pressures: Zero. 104-1901 15500-6 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 2.04 APPURTENANCES FOR EXPOSED METALLIC VALVES A. General: 1. For valves located less than five feet above operating floor, provide handwheels, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2. For valves located five feet or more above operating floor, provide chain operators. B. Handwheels: 1. Conform to applicable AWWA standards. 2. Material of Construction: Ductile iron, or cast aluminum. 3. Arrow indicating direction of opening and word "OPEN" shall be cast on trim of handwheel. 4. Maximum Handwheel Diameter: 2.5 feet. 2.05 ANCHORAGES AND MOUNTING HARDWARE A. General: 1. Comply with Section 05500, Metal Fabrications, except as modified in this Section. 2. Obtain bolts, nuts, and washers for connection of valve and appurtenances to concrete structure or other structural members from valve Supplier. 3. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of ample size and strength for purpose intended. Anchorages in concrete shall be at least 5/8-inch diameter. 4. Provide stem guide anchorages of required strength to prevent twisting and sagging of guides under load. 5. Materials: Provide bolts and washers of Type 316 stainless steel and nitrided nuts. Bolts shall have rolled threads. Bolts and nuts shall be electropolished to remove burrs. 2.06 TOOLS, LUBRICANTS, AND SPARE PARTS A. Lubricants: For valves, actuators, and appurtenances requiring lubricants, provide suitable lubricants for initial operation and for first year of use following Substantial Completion. Lubricants for equipment associated with conveying potable water or water that will be treated to become potable shall be food-grade and ANSI/NSF 61-listed. 2.07 PAINTING OF EXPOSED VALVES, HYDRANTS, AND APPURTENANCES A. Exterior steel, cast-iron, and ductile iron surfaces, except machined surfaces of exposed valves and appurtenances, shall be finish painted in manufacturer's shop. Surface preparation, priming, finish painting, and field touch-up painting shall conform to Section 09900, Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which materials and equipment are to be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the (k. Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 104-1901 15500-7 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install valves and appurtenances in accordance with: a. Supplier's instructions and the Contract Documents. b. Requirements of applicable AWWA standards. c. Applicable requirements of Section 15052, Exposed Piping Installation. 2. Install valves plumb and level. Install all valves to be free from distortion and strain caused by misaligned piping, equipment, and other causes. 3. Position butterfly valves so that, when valve is fully open, valve disc does not conflict with piping system elements upstream and downstream of valve. B. Exposed Valves: 1. Provide supports for large or heavy valves and appurtenances as shown or required to prevent strain on adjoining piping. 2. Operators: a. Install valves so that operating handwheels or levers can be conveniently turned from operating floor without interfering with access to other valves, piping, structure, and equipment, and as approved by ENGINEER. b. Avoid placing operators at angles to floors or walls. c. Orient chain operators out of way of walking areas. d. Install valves so that indicator arrows are visible from floor level. e. For motor-operated valves located lower than five feet above operating floor, orient motor actuator to allow convenient access to pushbuttons and handwheel. 3. Floor Stands and Stems: a. Install floor stands as shown and as recommended by manufacturer. b. Provide lateral restraints for extension bonnets and extension stems as shown and as recommended by manufacturer. c. Provide sleeves where operating stems pass through floor. Extend sleeves two inches above floor. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Adjust all parts and components as required to provide correct operation of valves. 2. Conduct functional field test on each valve in presence of ENGINEER to demonstrate that each valve operates correctly. 3. Verify satisfactory operation and controls of motor operated valves. 4. Demonstrate satisfactory opening and closing of valves at specified criteria requiring not more than 40 pounds effort on manual actuators. 5. Test ten percent of valves of each type by applying 200 pounds effort on manual operators. There shall be no damage to gear actuator or valve. B. Supplier's Services: 1. Provide services of qualified factory-trained service technicians to check and approve installation of the following types of valves: a. Cone valves. 2. Supplier's serviceman shall perform the following: a. Supervise unloading of the following equipment: Cone valves. b. Instruct CONTRACTOR in installing equipment. c. Supervise installation of equipment. 104-1901 15500-8 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement d. Inspect and adjust equipment after installation and ensure proper operation. e. Instruct OWNER's personnel in operating and maintaining the equipment. 3. Manufacturer's representative shall make a minimum of 4 visits, with a minimum of 4 hours onsite for each visit. First visit shall be for unloading supervision and instruction of CONTRACTOR in installing equipment; second visit shall be for assistance in installing equipment; third visit shall be for checking completed installation and start-up of system; fourth visit shall be to instruct operations and maintenance personnel. Representative shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until installation is acceptable. 4. Training: Furnish services of Supplier's qualified factory trained specialists to instruct OWNER's operations and maintenance personnel in recommended operation and maintenance of equipment. 5. All costs, including expenses for travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, and cost of travel time, for visits to the Site shall be included in the Contract Price. 3.04 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section" designation, are a part of this Specification Section: 1. Table 15500-A, Schedule of Valves. END OF SECTION • 104-1901 15500-9 KIT Professionals, Inc. • Q,) v (3 vi > _, (i) CS_, CD 4) O 0 O d am n -0 a) a) 0 c Z m Y L v Z a) a) a a./ ai a./ N f' 3 .9 3 3 3 3 3 3 W cu 'd "6 "6 "6 a ` C C C C C C C J O ro a1 (0 (0 (0 (0COCOJ = O S 2 2 2 2 2 > LL a) _ O 2 N_C kD N N N ri ,--I 4-1 i--1 00 t..0 00 t.0 t.0 t.0ra W tel I J D 0 a, W 3 U N in Ce *Mill p as > > > > > > > > > > o o ›. 00000 (.900 ,-, , o � in c 40 c OA w J o i O '- Q03 ra .- ra a1 aJ C u u U u l-1 N 1— 0 _IT= C ra �, �, Q Q C i.+ C \ c-I (Ni E E C c .0 c \ a a N a s 11 m = 3 E a E o u . — _o 7 E 7 E v a, 4) 0 E " n. = rz , � Y., E t- > v a. v Cl- °o 0 CD O m m U 0 v O v • C13o 0 0 0 m o m o m m CC H c (v CL L a) 03 D c C O R3 0 C d O ♦.. O D 4 CU 0 _ City of Pearland Process Valves Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement The following abbreviations are used in Table 15500-A. A. Valve Type Abbreviations Valve Type Abbrev Valve Type Abbrev. Resilient Wedge Gate GV Silent Check Valve SCV B. Service Abbreviations Service Abbrev Service Abbrev. Groundwater GW Drain DR Potable Water PW 104-1901 15500-11 KIT Professionals, Inc. CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 16 • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 16 0 ELECTRICAL 0 04/2008 City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL— GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required and install complete and make operational electrical and process instrumentation systems at the City of Pearland's Southdown Groundwater Facility, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The work shall include furnishing, installing, and testing the equipment and materials detailed in the following Sections: Section No. Title 16000 Electrical - General Provisions 16010 Basic Electrical Requirement 16015 Electrical Systems Analysis 16060 Electrical Demolition 16110 Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports 16120 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum) 16141 Wiring Devices • 16165 16191 Disconnect Switches Miscellaneous Equipment 16195 Electrical identification 16200 Emergency Standby Generator Set 16470 Panelboards 16481 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Modifications 16482 Variable Frequency Drive Controllers 16492 Automatic Transfer Switches 16502 Lightning Protection System 16510 Lightning Fixtures 16600 Underground System 16610 Cathodic Protection Systems for Steel Water Tanks 16660 Grounding System C. The work shall include the following: 1. Provide conduit, wire, and field connections for all motors, motor controllers, control devices, control panels, and electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions. 2. Provide conduit, wiring, and terminations for all field-mounted instruments furnished and mounted under other Divisions including process instrumentation primary elements, transmitters, local indicators, control panels, and lightning and surge protection equipment. Install vendor-furnished cables specified under other Divisions. (., 104-1901 16000-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS 3. Provide conduit, wiring, and terminations for variable frequency drives, reactors, harmonic filters, and transformers furnished and mounted under other related Divisions. 4. Installation of variable frequency drives furnished under other Divisions. 5. Provide power wiring for all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment furnished under other related Divisions, including power wiring for 120 Volt unit heater motors and thermostats. Refer to Drawings for the locations of 120 Volt unit heater thermostats and provide a 3/4-in C, 2 No. 12 and 1 No. 12 GRD between each heater and its respective control thermostat. 6. Provide precast manholes, handholes, and cast-in-place light pole bases where shown on the drawings. 7. Provide manhole and handhole frames and covers. 8. Provide modifications to existing control systems including installation of auxiliary motor starter contacts, relays, switches as required to provide the control functions or inputs as shown on the Drawings. Verify all existing wiring and connections for correctness. Trace the circuits in the field and develop the wiring diagrams necessary for completion of the work. Document all changes made to the wiring diagrams and return a marked-up set of Record Drawings to the Owner after the work is complete. 9. Coordinate the sequence of demolition with the sequence of construction to maintain plant operation in accordance with Division 1 Remove and demolish equipment and materials in such a sequence that the existing and proposed plant will function properly with no disruption of treatment. 10. Provide modifications to existing motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards and motor controllers including the furnishing and installing of circuit breakers or disconnection of circuits as required to provide power to new and existing equipment to maintain the plant in operation. 11. Provide Seismic Restraints for electrical equipment and systems requiring restraints. 12. Perform testing of the electrical equipment in accordance with the requirements of the individual specification sections and in accordance with Section 16950. 13. Set the electrical protective devices in accordance with NETA standards and in accordance with the protective coordination study. 14. Provide Short Circuit, System Protective Device Coordination Analysis and Arch Fault Analysis in accordance with Section 16015. D. Each bidder or their authorized representatives shall, before preparing their proposal, 104-1901 16000-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL— GENERAL PROVISIONS fhiv visit all areas of the existing buildings and structures in which work under this sub-bid is to be performed and inspect carefully the present installation. The submission of the proposal by this bidder shall be considered evidence that their representative has visited the buildings and structures and noted the locations and conditions under which the work will be performed and that he/she takes full responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his/her work. E. Provide electrical demolition work associated with the removal of equipment from the existing facilities. The work shall include disconnecting and removing electrical disconnect switches, electrical wiring and conduit to equipment. Make equipment scheduled for removal free of electrical shock hazard. F. Provide electrical relocation work associated with the relocation of equipment for the existing and new facilities, including disconnecting all existing wiring and conduits and providing new wiring and conduit to the relocated equipment. Make equipment scheduled for relocation free of electrical shock hazard in accordance with OSHA and local plant electrical safety requirements. G. Review the electrical underground system and the civil yard piping. Install the electrical underground system in a manner that avoids conflicts with manholes, catch basins, etc. provided under other Divisions of the specifications. H. Sequencing and Scheduling II/ 1. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other trades. 2. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in the building structures during the progress of construction to allow for the electrical installation. 3. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. 4. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the installation of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate the installation of large equipment requiring position prior to closing in the building. 5. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. I. Excavation, bedding material, forms, concrete and backfill for underground raceways; forms and concrete for electrical equipment furnished under Division 16. The work shall be in accordance with Divisions 2 and 3. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. C,. 104-1901 16000-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Excavation and backfilling, including gravel or sand bedding for underground electrical work is included in Division 2. B. Cast-in-place concrete work, including concrete encasements for electrical ductbanks, equipment pads, light pole bases and reinforcing steel, is included in Division 3.Except for directly controlled, single-phase, unit heater thermostat wiring and all interlocking and termination wiring within the motor starter/motor control centers, all automatic temperature control wiring for heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment (thermostats, duct switches, P-E switches, dampers, automatic temperature control panels, etc.) will be furnished and installed under Division 15, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Motors and variable frequency drive controllers are included under other Divisions. D. Instrumentation and control equipment is included under Division 13. E. Standby generators are included under Division 11. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, shop drawings for equipment, materials, and other items furnished under Division 16. B. As a minimum, all equipment specified in each Section of Division 16 shall be submitted at one time. As an example, all lighting fixtures shall be submitted together, all motor control centers shall be submitted together, etc. Submittals that do not comply will be returned disapproved. C. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following equipment: 1. Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Hangers 2. Wires and Cables 3. Miscellaneous Equipment (as specified in Section 16191) 4. Switchboard modification components 5. Automatic Transfer Switches 6. Panelboards 7. Motor Control Centers 8. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps 9. Switches, Receptacles and Covers 104-1901 16000-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL— GENERAL PROVISIONS 10. Lightning Protection System 11. Precast Manholes and Handholes, Frames and Covers 12. Grounding Hardware and Connections 13. Preliminary Short Circuit and Coordination Analysis (to be submitted with initial switchgear shop drawing submittal). 14. Final System Short Circuit, Coordination and Arc Flash Analysis. D. The manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog numbers shall be submitted for the products submitted under 1.04.0 (above). E. The following shall be submitted for record. 1. Ground System Test Results. 2. Electrical System Test Results 3. Seismic Restraint Calculations and Details F. Mark submittals to clearly identify proposed equipment including accessories, options, and features and to exclude parts not applicable to the project. When manufacturers' cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submittal piece of literature and each submittal drawing shall clearly reference the Project Specification and/or Contract Drawing that the submittal is to cover. General catalogs will not be accepted as cut sheets to fulfill submittal requirements. G. Check shop drawings for accuracy prior to submittal. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to this Section and the Drawings. This statement shall also list all exceptions to this Section and the Drawings. Mark submittals to identify proposed equipment including accessories, options and features being proposed for approval and exclude parts not to be used. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned marked NOT APPROVED. H. The Engineer's check shall be for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with this Section and the Drawings. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by this Section and the Drawings. I. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades. J. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been 104-1901 16000-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS approved. No material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED - CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED - RESUBMIT", or "NOT APPROVED". K. In addition to manufacturer's equipment shop drawings, submit electrical installation working drawings containing the following: 1. Concealed and buried conduit layouts, shown on floor plans drawn at not less than 1/4-in.= 1-ft.-0-in. scale. The layouts shall include locations of process equipment, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, control panels and equipment, motors, switches, motor starters, large junction or pull boxes, instruments, and any other electrical devices connected to concealed or buried conduits. 2. Plans shall be drawn on high-quality reproducible, double-sided mylar, size 36- in. by 24- in. and shall be presented in a neat, professional manner. 3. Concrete floors and/or walls containing concealed conduits shall not be poured until conduit layouts are approved. L. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Submit operations and maintenance data for equipment furnished under this Division, in accordance with Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include catalog data sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, parts lists including replacement part numbers, to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. Manuals shall include the following as a minimum: a. A comprehensive index. b. A complete "As-Built" set of approved shop drawings. c. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges and pertinent data. d. A table listing of the "as left" settings for all timing relays and alarm and trip setpoints. e. System schematic drawings "As-Built," illustrating all components, piping and electric connections of the systems supplied under this Section. f. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied. g. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. h. The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entire system, with references to the systems schematic drawings and instructions. i. Complete parts list with stock numbers, including spare parts. M. Exceptions for Submittals 1. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined by the 104-1901 16000-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL—GENERAL PROVISIONS 4110' Electrical Subcontractor in a separate section of each submittal package. The submittal shall contain the reason for the exception, the exact nature of the exception, and the proposed substitution so that a proper evaluation may be made by the Engineer. The acceptability of any device or methodology submitted as an "or equal" or"exception" to the Specifications shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer. 2. Submittals for certain major items such as low voltage motor control centers, dry type transformers, shall include a complete copy of their specification section with each paragraph and sub-paragraph noted with the comment "compliance", "deviation", or"alternate". a. By noting the term "compliance", it shall be understood that the manufacturer is in full compliance with the item specified and will provide exactly the same with no deviations. b. By noting the term "deviation", it shall be understood that the manufacturer prefers to provide a different component in lieu of the one specified and, in so doing, takes full responsibility for making the equipment work as specified and will provide any and all ancillary components to make the equipment work at no extra cost to the Owner. c. By noting the term "alternate", it shall be understood that the manufacturer proposes to provide the same operating function but prefers to do it in a different manner and in so doing, takes full responsibility for making the equipment work as specified and will provide any and all ancillary components to make the equipment work at no extra cost to the Owner. The alternate method shall be fully described with schematic diagrams and one-line diagrams as applicable. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Electric equipment, materials, and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC)and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code(NESC) 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 5. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association(ICEA) 7. The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society(ISA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories(UL) ta, 104-1901 16000-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. International Electrical Testing Association(NETA) 11. International Building Code (IBC) 12. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 13. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code (BOCA) 14. ASTM International 15. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 16. Joint Industrial Council (JIC) B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 PRIORITY OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error, or discrepancy between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among one or more Sections and the Drawings, furnish the higher performance requirements. The higher performance requirement shall be considered the equipment, material, device, or installation method which represents the most stringent option, the highest quality, or the largest quantity. B. In all cases, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, but work not dimensioned shall be as directed by the Engineer and work not particularly shown, identified, sized, or located shall be the same as similar work that is shown or specified. C. Detailed Drawings shall govern over general drawings, larger scale Drawings take precedence over smaller scale Drawings, Change Order Drawings shall govern over Contract Drawings, and Contract Drawings shall govern over shop drawings. D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization, or association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be binding on the Contractor unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor accepts the fact that compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in 104-1901 16000-8 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL— GENERAL PROVISIONS fir Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time, nor limit in any way the Contractor's responsibility to comply with all Laws and Regulations at all times. 1.7 SERVICE AND METERING A. The power company serving this project is CenterPoint Energy. Service will be obtained at 480 Volts, three-phase, four-wire, 60 Hz from a pad-mounted transformer furnished and installed by by the power company. B. The power company will be responsible for the following work: 1. Furnishing and installing the primary overhead conductors and pole line. 2. Furnishing and installing the first riser pole on the property, primary cutouts, lightning arresters, and grounding. 3. Furnishing and installing primary cables. 4. Furnishing and installing transformer with integral metering. 5. Termination of underground primary cables at riser pole. 6. Termination of underground primary cables at the transformer. 7. Furnishing and installing metering current transformers (C.T.'s), meter, and meter wiring. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following work: 1. Obtain an estimate from the power company for the work described in Paragraph 1.06.B above and include the cost of the power company work in the Bid Price. 2. Furnishing and installing the transformer pad. The installation of the pad shall be in accordance with the power company's installation requirements. Preliminary power company installation details are included in the electrical drawings for reference only. Contractor shall verify with the power company and comply with all installation requirements. 3. Make all arrangements with the power company for obtaining electrical service, pay all power company charges, and furnish all labor and material required for the electrical service. 4. Furnishing and installing the primary ductbank from transformer to the riser pole. 5. Furnishing and installing secondary conduits and cables. 6. Termination of utility-supplied secondary cables at the service entrance equipment. Cw, 104-1901 16000-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.8 ENCLOSURE TYPES A. Unless otherwise required, electrical enclosures shall be NEMA Types as follows: 1. NEMA 1 in dry, non-process indoor above grade locations (i.e., administration areas, laboratories, control rooms, storage rooms). 2. NEMA 12 in "DAMP" locations shown on the Drawings and maintenance shops. 3. NEMA 4X in "CORROSIVE" and "WET" locations shown on the Drawings. 4. NEMA 7 in hazardous classified indoor locations. 5. NEMA 7 (gasketed) in hazardous classified outdoor locations. Provide enclosures labeled for such use. 1.9 HAZARDOUS AREAS A. Equipment, materials, and installation in areas designated as hazardous on the Drawings shall comply with NEC Articles 500, 501, 502, and 503. B. Equipment and materials installed in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for the appropriate hazardous area classification. 1.10 CODES, INSPECTION, AND FEES A. Equipment, materials, and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections. 1.11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS A. Provide the electrical system analyses in accordance with Section 16015. 1. Service entrance switchgear exists. Provide a preliminary short circuit and coordination analysis prior to the initial submittal of the electrical distribution equipment submittal to confirm the equipment being provided new and the existing equipment are appropriately rated for the short circuit duty available and to ensure that the protective devices being provided properly coordinate among themselves and with the existing installed equipment. 2. Provide a final short circuit, protective devices coordination and arc flash analysis to be used for setting the protective devices and for providing the appropriate safety arc flash labeling on all equipment, existing and new. In addition, the final analysis report will be used by the owner as a benchmark for setting and testing protective devices in the future. 1.12 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TESTING AND SETTINGS 104-1901 16000-10 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS fir A. Test and provide settings for systems and equipment furnished under Division 16 in accordance with Section 16950 "Electrical Testing and Settings" and the individual equipment sections for additional specific testing requirements. If the testing results are not within acceptable limits, repair or replace all defective work and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Make adjustments to the systems furnished under Division 16 in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's requirements/recommendations and the system coordination study specified in Section 16015. 1.13 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, the Drawings do not show exact locations of conduit runs. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment. B. Install each three-phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch circuit conduits exposed in process/industrial type spaces and concealed in finished spaces. • D. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs", all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. Where home-runs indicate conduit is to be installed concealed or exposed, the entire branch circuit shall be installed in the same manner. E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches, and receptacles prior to installation. F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant to the placing of electrical work and, in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner. G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings or other installation details. Furnish all labor and materials to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting, and other electrical systems shown. H. Re-design of electrical or mechanical work which is required due to the Contractor's use of an alternate item, arrangement of equipment, and/or layout other than specified herein shall be done by the Contractor at his/her own expense. Re-design and detailed plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the work, either his/her own or others, caused by such re-design. 104 1901 16000-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS I. Raceways and conductors for low voltage (120 Volts) thermostats controlling HVAC unit heaters, exhaust fans, and similar equipment are not shown on the Drawings. Provide raceways and conductors between the thermostats, the HVAC equipment, and the motor starters for a complete and operating system. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished space and may be installed concealed or exposed in process spaces. Refer to the HVAC drawings for the locations of the thermostats. J. Raceways and conductors for the fire alarm, sound, and page party systems are not shown on the Drawings. Provide raceways and conductors as required by the system manufacturer for a complete and operating system. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished spaces and may be installed exposed or conducted in process spaces. K. It is the intent of these Specifications that the Electrical Systems shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All materials and all work that may be implied as being incidental to the work of this Section shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner. L. Raceways and conductors for lighting, switches, receptacles, and other miscellaneous low voltage power and signal systems as specified are not shown on the Drawings. Raceways and conductors shall be provided as required for a complete and operating system. Home runs, as shown on the Drawings, are to assist the Contractor in identifying raceways to be run exposed and raceways to be run concealed. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished spaces and may be installed exposed or concealed in all process spaces. Raceways installed exposed shall be near the ceiling or along walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, cranes hoists, monorails, equipment hatches, doors, windows, etc. Raceways installed concealed shall be run in the center of concrete floor slabs, above suspended ceilings, or in partitions as required. M. Provide separate neutral conductors for each lighting branch circuit and outlet branch circuits in all areas. 1.14 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT A. Investigate each space in the structure through which electrical equipment furnished under Division 16 must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure. B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment. 1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings, hereinafter called the "Record Drawings". 104-1901 16000-12 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL—GENERAL PROVISIONS 40, B. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items: 1. One-line Diagram(s). 2. Raceways and pull boxes. 3. Conductor sizes and conduit fills. 4. Panel Schedule(s). 5. Control Wiring Diagram(s). 6. Lighting Fixture Schedule(s). 7. Lighting fixture, receptacle, and switch outlet locations. 8. Underground raceway and ductbank routing. 9. Plan view, sizes and locations of switchgear, distribution transformers, substations, motor control centers, and panelboards. 10. Lightning protection system. 11. Grounding system. 4111, 12. Point-to-point connection diagrams: a. Provide detailed point-to-point interconnection wiring diagrams for all equipment furnished under Division 16 other Divisions requiring an electrical connection; either control, signal, or power, as indicated. All communication system wiring shall be included. b. Point-to-point connection diagrams shall be produced with AutoCad software. A separate drawing shall be provided for each diagram. One complete diagram shall be included on a drawing. c. Submit detailed PTP connection diagrams for each system. The diagram shall show all components of the circuit, both analog, digital, and discrete, including all relays, switches, and starters which are being provided for proper operation. Mnemonic designations used shall correspond to the loop numbers indicated in the contract Documents. The format shall be the International Society of Automation, Standard for Instrument Loop Diagrams, ISA-S5.4 plus the following requirements: 1) Show all interconnecting wiring between equipment, panels, terminal junction boxes, and field-mounted components. The diagrams shall show all components and panel terminal board identification numbers and all wire numbers. This diagram shall include all intermediate terminations between field elements and panels (e.g., terminal junction boxes). The diagrams shall be coordinated with the work to be performed under other O Divisions. 104-1901 16000-13 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL— GENERAL PROVISIONS 2) Show locations of all devices. 3) Show all power back to termination on terminal block or panelboard, including circuit breaker size, as applicable. 4) Show all grounding points with cabinets and panels and identify the connection point of individual components. 5) Each PTP connection diagram shall be submitted on an 11-inch by 17- inch sized sheet with all the information needed for installation, checkout, startup, and maintenance. Each diagram shall contain the following information: a) All devices or items with clear labeling and identification. b) Each component of the circuit, including wire numbers and connections. The wires shall be tagged at every device, piece of equipment, and in every junction box, pull box terminal cabinet, manhole, and handhole. Tagging of the wires or cables shall agree with the P&ID, Loop Diagrams, Equipment Lists and Section 01080. The nomenclature system consists of four levels. These four levels are compiled in a hierarchy. An example of the four level is as follows: Level I Facility Code— PT (Post Treatment Building) Level 2 System Code - CO2(G) (Carbon Dioxide Gas) Level 3 Tag Type - BFV(Butterfly Valve) Level 4 Tag Number- 01 (Number 01) Level 5 Subcomponent - 01 (If req'd Number 01 and/or Letter A) c) Word descriptions of circuit functions. The title should be adequate, but if not, a supplemental note shall be added. A description of special features or functions which are not obvious or implied in the title, especially safety and shutdown circuits, is required. The identification of safety and shutdown circuits is especially important. d) All interconnections with identifying numbers for electrical cables and conductor pairs. This identification of connections includes junction boxes, computer input/output (I/O) connections, grounding system, and grounding connections. e) Locations of devices, such as but not limited to: field, panels, auxiliary equipment, termination cabinets, local control panels, switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboards. I) Electrical power supply requirements designation voltage and other applicable requirements. g) Identifying numbers for equipment, including devices, panels, terminal boxes, junction boxes, motor control centers, switchgear and panelboards h) The PTP connection diagrams shall be produced on reproducible vellum (11-in. by 17-in.)with 1/8-in. letter size which can be reduced to (half size) for field use and still be legible. i) Each PTP connection diagram shall contain only one circuit or loop. Care must be used to prevent overcrowding and space left for future additions and circuit data. j) A consistent pattern (horizontal or vertical) shall be developed for presentation. The drawing shall be divided into section for relative 104-1901 16000-14 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS COPlocation of devices. k) The symbols used shall be consistent with the symbols shown on the contract drawings and symbol sheets. The symbols in ANSI Y32.20 (ISA S5.1) are suitable for instrumentation devices. However, these symbols shall be expanded to include connection points and power sources to clarify certain connection and operation details required on the diagrams. C. Submit the record drawings and the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers (or the point-to-point connection diagram) to the Owner. 1.16 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS A. Review shop drawings of equipment furnished under other Divisions and prepare coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams. Submit copies of wiring diagrams or tables with Record Drawings. B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections. 1.17 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new. B. Material and equipment of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be UL listed. C. Provide Quality Control in accordance with Division 1. D. Warrant all equipment furnished under Division 16 in accordance with Section 01740. Refer to individual equipment sections for additional warranty items. 1.18 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify equipment, disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations, etc., furnished under Division 16 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal boxes, transfer switches, etc., shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings. B. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated plastic, not less than 1/16-inch thick by 3/4- inch by 2- 1/2-inch with 3/16-inch-high white letters on a black background. C. Nameplates shall be screw mounted to NEMA 1 enclosures. Nameplates shall be bonded to all other enclosure types using an epoxy or similar permanent waterproof adhesive. Two-sided foam adhesive tape is not acceptable. Where the equipment size does not have space for mounting a nameplate, the nameplate shall be permanently fastened to the adjacent mounting surface. 1.19 DEMOLITION 104-1901 16000-15 Gupta & Associates. Inc. I I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Survey the existing electrical systems and equipment identified for removal with representatives from the other trades prior to performing any demolition work. Identify all conduit and equipment to be removed with tags or paint. B. Where a piece of equipment is to be removed, all associated ancillary components (e.g., solenoid valves, pressure switches, etc.) and associated wiring and conduit shall also be removed. C. Equipment, building, or structures scheduled for complete demolition shall be made safe from electrical shock hazard prior to demolition. Disconnect all electrical power, communications, alarm and signal system. D. Equipment scheduled to be turned over to the Owner shall be carefully disconnected, removed, and delivered to the Owner at the existing site. All other miscellaneous electrical materials, devices, etc., associated with the equipment being turned over shall be demolished and removed from the site. The equipment to be turned over to the Owner is identified on the drawings. E. Remove electrical work associated with equipment scheduled for demolition except those portions indicated to remain or be reused. F. Unless otherwise specifically noted, remove unused exposed conduit and support systems back to point of concealment including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Remove unused wiring back to source (or nearest point of usage). G. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned or being removed. Provide blank covers for abandoned outlets which are not removed. H. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards, disconnect switches, control stations, distribution equipment, etc. I. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. J. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. K. Where electrical systems pass through the demolition areas to serve other portions of the premises, they shall remain or be suitably relocated and the system restored to normal operation. L. Coordinate electrical power outages to the electrical systems and equipment with the Owner. Where duration of proposed outage cannot be allowed by the Owner, phase the retrofit work to allow the system or equipment to be re-connected to the electrical power system within the time frame allowed by the Owner or provide temporary power connections as required to maintain service to the systems or equipment. The temporary power can be from a generator or another part of the facility not affected by 104-1901 16000-16 Gupta & Associates. Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS 411, the outage provided there is sufficient spare capacity. M. Continuous service is required on all circuits and outlets affected by these changes, except where the Owner will permit an outage for a specific time. Obtain Owner's consent before removing any circuit from continuous service. N. The electrical and process equipment to be removed or relocated under this contract has been identified on the Drawings. The removal and or relocation of existing conduit, wire, and equipment have not been detailed on the Drawings. Survey the affected equipment and building areas before submitting bid proposal. O. Trace out existing wiring that is to be relocated or removed, and perform the relocation or removal work as required for a complete operating and safe system. P. Remove exposed conduits, wireways, outlet boxes, pull boxes and hangers made obsolete by the alterations, unless specifically designated to remain. Patch surfaces and provide blank covers for abandoned outlets which are removed. Q. All equipment, materials, controls, motor starters, branch and feeder breakers, panelboards, transformers, wiring, raceways, etc., furnished and installed to temporarily keep circuits energized shall be removed when the permanent installation is fully operational. 1.20 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES (6_ A. When engineering services are specified to be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall retain a licensed professional engineer to perform the services. The engineer shall be licensed at the time the work is done and licensed in the State of Texas. If the State issues discipline- specific licenses, the engineer shall be licensed in the applicable discipline. In addition, the engineer shall be experienced in the type of work being provided. B. All engineering work shall be done according to the applicable regulations for professional engineers to include signing, sealing and dating documents. When submittals are required by a professional engineer, in addition to state required signing and sealing, a copy of the current wallet card or wall certificate indicating the date of expiration shall be included with the submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured. B. Exact locations are required for stubbing up and terminating concealed conduit. Obtain shop drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other t,. 104-1901 16000-17 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS subcontractors, and locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured. C. Where setting drawings are not available in time to avoid delay in scheduled floor slab pours, the Engineer may allow the installations of such conduit to be exposed. Requests for this deviation must be submitted in writing. No additional compensation for such change will be allowed. D. Seal all openings, sleeves, penetration, and slots as specified in Section 16110. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner and be in compliance with modifications and repair to concrete as specified in Section 01045. Saw cut concrete and masonry prior to breaking out sections. B. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required. C. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching. D. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, columns, or any other structural members. E. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit. F. Patching to be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed. G. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better. H. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed. I. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises. J. When existing conduits are cut at the floor line of wall line, they shall be filled with grout of suitable patching material. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Work not installed according to the Drawings and Specification shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer at Contractor's expense. B. Electrical equipment shall be protected against mechanical and water damage. Store all electrical equipment in dry permanent shelters. Do not install electrical equipment in place until structures are weather-tight. C. Damaged equipment shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the Engineer's discretion and at the Contractor's expense. D. Repaint any damage to factory-applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by 104-1901 16000-18 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL— GENERAL PROVISIONS 41110 the equipment manufacturer. The entire damaged panel or section shall be repainted in accordance with the field painting requirements specified in Section 09900 at the Contractor's expense. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and startup of the following equipment: 1. Automatic Transfer Switches (one day, one trip minimum) 2. 480 Volt Motor Control Centers (three days, one trip minimum) B. Testing and startup shall not be combined with training. Testing and start-up time shall not be used for manufacturer's warranty repairs. 3.5 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment furnished under Division 16. 1. Automatic Transfer Switches (one day, one trip minimum) 2. 480 Volt Motor Control Centers (three days, one trip minimum) B. The cost of training programs to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be 411, included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. C. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. D. The training program shall represent a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the operation and maintenance of each system. E. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule. F. Within 120 days of contract award to the Contractor, submit an overview of the proposed training plan. This overview shall include, for each course proposed: 1. An overview of the training plan. 2. Course title and objectives. 3. Pre-requisite training and experience of attendees. 4. Recommended types of attendees. 104-1901 16000-19 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS 5. Course Content - A topical outline. 6. Course Duration. 7. Course Location - Training center or job site. 8. Course Format - Lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc. 9. Schedule of training courses including dates, duration and locations of each class. 10. Resumes of the instructors who will actually implement the plan. G. The Engineer will review the training plan submittal with the Owner. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16000-20 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic requirements specifically applicable to the work of Division 16 - Electrical Requirements. B. The Contractor shall furnish equipment, materials, and labor for assembly and installation plus check-out and start-up of the complete electrical system as shown on the Drawings and stipulated in the Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As a minimum requirement, the electrical system shall be constructed in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). The contractor shall provide all electrical work / installations based on the latest addition of the NEC. 2. City of Pearland Building Code. 40, 3. Other applicable Codes and Standards as referenced in other Master Specifications. B. Comply with local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase. C. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. D. Equipment and materials shall conform to requirements of specification and to the criteria provided in data sheets for the project. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Conformance Certificate and Quality Assurance Release. Submit an overall conformance certificate for electrical components signed by the person responsible for product quality. Specifically identify the purchased material or equipment by project name and location, purchase order number, supplements, and item number where applicable, including materials and services provided by others. Indicate that all requirements have been met and identify any approved deviations. B. Field Inspection 1. Electrical work shall be inspected and approved by the local code inspectors, the wastewater inspectors, and the Project Manager prior to starting the 7-day test or scheduling training. 105-1901 16010-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Contractor shall give a minimum of two days notice to the Inspectors that the installation is ready for inspection and two days notice to the Project Manager. 3. Concealed work shall be inspected and approved by code inspectors and wastewater inspectors before it is covered: a) Conduit with stub-ups, underground in duct banks before concrete is poured. Conduit in slabs, walls and ceilings, complete with boxes. 4. Electrical equipment and materials shall be inspected upon arrival by the Project Manager for compliance with specifications. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Take the following site conditions into consideration when fabricating, erecting, installing and wiring electrical equipment under this contract: 1. Plant Location Pearland, Texas 2. Plant Type and Size 3. Plant Site Elevation 4. Seismic Zone Zone 0 5. Wind Velocity 90 mph 6. Temperature, Min./Max.: a. Coldest Winter Month High 60 degrees F Low 41 degrees F b. Warmest Summer Month High 94 degrees F Low 73 degrees F c. Lowest Expected 11 degrees F d. Highest Expected 107 degrees F 7. 8. Rainfall: a. Annual45 inches b. Design 3.4 inches/hour, 8.4 inches/24 hours 9. Design Relative Humidity:98% 10. Station Barometric Pressure: a. Average Annual 29.5 inches Hg Absolute. 11. Utility Water Systems: Design Pressure Design Temp. a. River Water PSI degrees F b. Well Water PSI degrees F c. City Water PSI degrees F 12. Electric Power Supply Characteristics (Available to Contractor): 105-1901 16010-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Voltage Phase Hz Wire Delta or Wye 1 2 • 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENT DESIGN A. Components utilized in the construction of the material or equipment shall be of the latest proven design, new and in current production. Do not use obsolete components or components to be phased out of production. 2.02 FACTORY INSPECTION A. Provide free access with prior notice for the Project Manager at all times to the shop where the material or equipment is being fabricated or tested. Provide reasonable facilities for inspection, witnessing tests, and examining records. Give 7-days notice 411, prior to starting tests which are scheduled for factory inspection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify dimensions and ratings of equipment and materials to ensure proper fit and performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. If field conditions necessitate changes in electrical installation, obtain approval from the City Engineer. B. Conductor voltage drop shall not exceed 2 percent for feeders and 3 percent for branch circuits. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Test the electrical system to specification requirements and to demonstrate correct installation and operation of equipment. 0 & M Manual shall be furnished prior to testing for reference during testing and corrections for final 0 & M. (h. 105-1901 16010-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS B. Before 7-days test, demonstrate the system to the wastewater inspectors and the Project Manager. Show the system to be fully operational. All alarms, safeties, and �+ communication points to central and locally must operate in both full-automatic and back-up modes. Use fresh water in the test medium. C. Operate the system continuously for a period of 7 days in full automatic, without failure, to qualify as acceptable. "Failure" is considered any problem that requires correction by process control instructions, maintenance personnel, such as: high or low water level, any motor alarm, power failure, phase failure, communication failure, PLC failure, process control software failure, requiring rewriting or transducer failure. This would exclude conditions not under the control of Contractor, such as: evident lightning strikes, 25-year rains, local power utility power failure longer than the specified duration of service. Failures due to uncontrollable situations would allow the 7-day test to continue, as soon as test conditions are restored and the City Engineer is notified. D. The existing station shall remain in service during this test. END OF SECTION 105-1901 16010-4 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 41YSECTION 16015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide both a preliminary and a final short circuit; selective coordination and arc flash study of the complete electrical distribution system as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. The study shall include motor starting/running calculations. B. Provide both a preliminary and final harmonic study of the complete electrical distribution system as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. C. Obtain and pay for the services of the independent engineering specialty firm, subject to the approval of the Engineer, to provide a complete fault current, device evaluation, protective devices selective coordination, arc flash study, harmonic study and motor starting study. The selective coordination study shall begin with the utility company's feeder protective device and include all of the electrical protective devices down to and including the largest feeder circuit breaker and motor starter in the low voltage motor control centers and power distribution panelboards, including the existing switchboards, MCCs and power distribution panels. The study shall also include variable frequency drives, harmonic filters, Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS), power factor correction equipment, transformers and protective devices associated to, with emergency and standby generators, and the associated paralleling equipment and distribution switchgear. The arc flash study shall begin with the utility company's feeder protective device and include all of the electrical distribution equipment down to and including low voltage motor control centers and power distribution panelboards and lighting panels. All information required to perform the study shall be obtained by the entity performing the study. D. Submit the preliminary short circuit, selective coordination and motor starting/running study prior to submittal of 480 Volt motor control centers and 480 Volt panelboards shop drawings. The aforementioned shop drawings will not be reviewed until the preliminary power system study is approved by the Engineer. No exceptions will be allowed. The preliminary study shall include but not be limited to: 1. Short circuit, and protective device coordination studies shall be performed on nationally recognized computer software such as SKM System Analysis, EDSA, ETAP, or approved equal. 2. Obtain and verify with the utility company all information needed to conduct the study. Obtain and verify with the Owner ratings of existing electrical equipment that shall be included in the study. 3. Current transformers' ratio and burden calculations shall be based on a 10 percent maximum ratio error per ANSI C57.13. Identify current transformers that will not allow the protective devices to operate within acceptable ANSI error margins and recommend corrective action. 104-1901 16015-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. 1 City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 4. The preliminary study shall verify equipment is being applied within their design ratings and electrical protective devices will coordinate. 5. Recommend changes and/or additions to equipment as required providing adequate protection and coordination based on the actual equipment supplied and the results of the short circuit and protective device selective coordination studies. Submit any such changes and additions as a part of the study. Field settings of devices, adjustments, and minor modifications to equipment that are required to accomplish conformance with the approved short circuit and protective device selective coordination studies shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. After release of electrical equipment by the manufacturer, but prior to energizing the electrical equipment, submit the final short circuit and selective coordination study including all calculations, tabulations, protective devices coordination graphs, etc. as specified herein. 1. Provide a complete short circuit study and protective device selective coordination study for both the utility power distribution system and the emergency/standby power distribution system under the scope of this study. The study shall include but shall not be limited to: a. Full compliance with applicable ANSI and IEEE Standards. b. Performed on nationally recognized computer software such as EDSA, SKM System Analysis, ETAP, or equal. 2. Provide a report summarizing the selective coordination and motor starting/running study including: one-line diagram of the system, relay and breaker setting tabulation, coordination curves, relay curves, circuit breaker curves, motor starting/running curves, protective device coordination and short circuit calculation, all prepared by the specialty firm. 3. Recommend changes and/or additions to equipment as required providing adequate protection and coordination based on the actual equipment supplied and the results of the short circuit and protective device selective coordination studies. Submit any such changes and additions as a part of the study. Field settings of devices, adjustments and minor modifications to equipment that are required to accomplish conformance with the approved short circuit and protective device selective coordination studies shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Motors are included under other Divisions and are specified in Division 1. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 104-1901 16015-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS • A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, the following: 1. The number of years the specialty firm has been in the business of performing coordination studies. 2. Identification of each of the three qualifying projects for each of the past three years including: a. A brief description of each study. b. Name of owner of installation on which study was performed with address, telephone number, and contact person. c. Date of study. d. Any other information indicating the firm's experiences and ability to perform the work and business status. B. Preliminary Short Circuit and Coordination Study Report shall include but not be limited to: 1. The coordination study report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2-in. by 11- in. size report. • 2. Electrical distribution system one-line diagram. One line diagrams shall be legible on printed paper and shall not exceed 11-in. by 17-in. in size unless required to clearly illustrate the system and related data. 3. Provide detailed "Input Data" report that identifies all input parameters associated with the equipment depicted on the system one line diagrams including but not limited to Utility data, conductor sizes and lengths, protective device sizes and rating, transformer sizes and ratings, motor types and sizes, etc. 4. Provide current transformers' ratio and burden calculations to confirm that the current transformers will not saturate prior to operation of the protective relays and confirming the current transformers used with differential protection will not saturate under any fault condition. 5. Tabulation of each protective device, its short circuit rating, the fault current available at the device, and an indication whether or not the device is adequately rated for the available fault current and voltage at which it is applied. 6. Preliminary graphic time-current curves showing how the protective devices proposed by the equipment suppliers will coordinate as being applied. TCCs shall be produced and printed in color to assist the reviewing engineer in the graphical analysis of the protective device coordination. Each device on a TCC shall be a different color and, where devices are shown on multiple TCCs, the color for the device shall be 104-1901 16015-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS constant on each TCC that the devices are shown on. C. Final Short Circuit and Selective Coordination Study Report shall include but not be limited to: 1. The coordination study report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2-in. by 11-in. size report. The selection of all protective relays types, current transformers, fuse types and ratings shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer and shall be based on the preliminary coordination study, which shall be submitted prior to the equipment shop drawings in accordance with Section 01350. The complete study shall be approved by the Engineer before any equipment is shipped. The report shall include the following sections and information: a. An executive summary outlining the distribution system, the information received from the power company, assumptions made to complete the report, statement of the adequacy of the distribution equipment to safely clear any fault currents, the adequacy of the distribution equipment to close in on a fault, identify any problem areas with recommendations for resolving the problem. b. Electrical distribution system one-line diagram. One line diagrams shall be legible on printed paper and shall not exceed 11-in. by 17-in. in size unless required to clearly illustrate the system and related data. c. Provide detailed "Input Data" report that identifies all input No) parameters associated with the equipment depicted on the system one-line diagrams including but not limited to Utility data, conductor sizes and lengths, protective device sizes and rating, transformer sizes and ratings, motor types and sizes, etc. d. Provide current transformers' ratio and burden calculations to confirm that the current transformers will not saturate prior to operation of the protective relays and to confirm the current transformers used with differential protection will not saturate under any fault condition. e. Transformer differential protection calculations including current transformer mismatch relay setting and charts. Provide differential current transformer wiring schematics including polarity and wiring connections based on the winding configuration of the actual power transformers being supplied. f. Tabulation of all protective devices, circuit breakers, fuses, current transformers, etc. The tabulation shall indicate the device, manufacturer, catalog number, recommended setting, etc. g. Industry standard graphic time current, protective relay and protective device curves, showing equipment and material damage curves, relay, circuit breaker, fuse curves, available fault currents at the equipment, transformer inrush currents, etc., for each piece of equipment. TCCs shall be produced and printed in color to assist the 104-1901 16015-4 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS reviewing engineer in the graphical analysis of the protective device • coordination. Each device on a TCC shall be a different color and where devices are shown on multiple TCCs the color for the device shall be constant on each TCC that the devices are shown on. h. Tabulation of each protective device, its short circuit rating, the fault current available at the device, and an indication whether or not the device is adequately rated for the available fault current and voltage at which it is applied. i. Calculations and required documentation including copies of correspondence with involved entities such as utility fault contribution coordination. D. Preliminary Arc Flash Study shall include but not be limited to: 1. The Arc Flash study report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2-in. by 11-in. size report. 2. An executive summary outlining the distribution system, the information received from the power company, assumptions made to complete the report, and recommendations to reduce the arc flash values. 3. Specific recommendations to reduce the arc flash incident energy levels in the plant. The recommendations shall not propose general and widely ® applied arc flash mitigation measure such as arc-resistant gear, but shall detail specific equipment or setting adjustments of new or existing equipment that could be applied to the system and the mitigation that could be realized from such an application. E. The Final Arc Flash Study report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2-in. by 11-in. size report. The report shall include the following sections and information: 1. An executive summary outlining the distribution system, the information received from the power company, assumptions made to complete the report and recommendations to reduce the arc flash values. 2. Provide a single detailed, customized bus label for each fault location. Each label shall include a listing of the protective device settings and incident energy at several different working distances. Labels shall contain all information required by NFPA 70E for arc flash hazard and shock protection calculations. 3. Where arc flash reduction maintenance settings are available and utilized on protective devices to reduce incident energy levels while operating at temporary set points, the report shall include an additional table that provides the Owner with detailed information resulting from the reduced arc flash hazard category. The table should include all of the information • required by NFPA 70E on a standard arc flash label for both the normal operating protection settings and with the maintenance mode engaged on the device. 104-1901 16015-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 4. Provide a customized NFPA 70 E work permit form for the client and specific installation. 5. PPE Table — Provide a PPE table that defines the Personal Protective Equipment classes and clothing descriptions identified in the reports and labels. F. Preliminary Harmonic Study Report shall include but not be limited to: 1. The harmonic study report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2-in. by 11-in. size report. 2. Electrical distribution system one-line diagram. 3. Provide the minimum available fault current available from the utility and show the calculations of plant load vs. available fault current to determine the appropriate THD threshold as defined in IEEE 519. 4. Provide the harmonic parameters assumed for use in the study for the harmonic generating equipment, i.e., VFD units, UPS units, static inverters, Ozone units,etc. G. Final Harmonic Study Report shall include but not be limited to: 1. The harmonic study report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2-in. by 11-in. size report. The selection of the harmonic mitigation equipment shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer and shall be based on the preliminary harmonic study, which shall be submitted prior to the equipment shop drawings in accordance with Section 01350. The complete study shall be approved by the Engineer before any equipment is shipped. The report shall include the following sections and information: a. An executive summary outlining the distribution system, the information received from the power company, assumptions made to complete the report, document harmonic profile for all harmonic producing equipment. b. Electrical distribution system one-line diagram. c. Recommended parameters for harmonic mitigation equipment, if required. Recommendations shall detail the projected effects of the mitigation effects and shall prove them via a revised harmonic study. d. Calculations and documentation indicated. H. Submittal of Digital Data and System Model 1. Following final approval of any of the above-mentioned studies, the Contractor shall provide a digital copy of all reports submitted as part of the project. Reports shall not be password protected. Owner and engineer shall have unrestricted right to manipulate or edit the report. 2. Following final approval of any of the above studies, the Contractor shall 104-1901 16015-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS provide the complete digital system model and system library used to build • the model and complete the studies. All files needed to accurately recreate the study completed by the Contractor must be furnished, and a backup of the system library used to define all system components must be provided. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 1. Standard 141, Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial Plants 2. Standard 241, Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Systems in Commercial Buildings 3. Standard 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Systems 4. Standard 399, Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis 5. IEEE Std. 519- Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems 6. IEEE Std. 1584- IEEE Guide for Arc Flash Hazard Calculations 7. NFPA 70E. 8. IEEE Std. 242 B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 1. Standard C37.90, IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus 2. Standard C37.91, IEEE Guide for Protective Relay Applications to Power Transformers 3. Standard C37.95, IEEE Guide for Protective Relaying of Utility-Consumer Interconnections 4. Standard C37.96, IEEE Guide for AC Motor Protection 5. Standard C57.12.59, IEEE Guide for Dry-Type Transformer Through-Fault Current Duration 6. Standard C57.13, IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrumentation Transformers 7. Standard C57.109, IEEE Guide for Liquid-Immersed Transformer (b. Through-Fault-Current Duration 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 104-1901 16015-7 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS A. Independent Engineering Specialty Firm's Experience 1. Specialty firm shall have been in the business of the type of work specified, for at least the past five years. 2. The specialty firm shall have a minimum of three projects of equal or greater size,service, with the type of equipment specified for each of the past three years. B. Specialty firm shall be incorporated in the State of Texas and shall have a licensed, in the same jurisdiction, professional engineer as a full-time employee, to supervise and seal the report. C. The specialty firm shall be an independent organization which can function as an unbiased authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment or systems evaluated by the specialty firm. D. All electrical studies shall be stamped and signed by a professional electrical engineer. The engineer shall be registered in the State, Commonwealth, or District in which the equipment will finally reside. 1.7 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. Perform a short circuit study in accordance with ANSI Standards C37.010 and C37.13 to check the adequacy and to verify the correct application of circuit protective devices and other system components within the construction package. The study shall address the case when the system is being powered from the utility source as well as from the on-site generating facilities, normal and alternate (bus tie closed) modes of operation. Minimum and maximum possible fault conditions shall be covered in the study. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor performing the study to determine the operating parameters of the system and to derive the worst case fault conditions. Assumptions of plant operation shall not be allowed. B. Consider the fault contribution of all motors operating during the maximum demand condition of the motors. C. Calculate short-circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties on the basis of an assumed bolted three-phase short circuit at each high and medium voltage switchgear bus and controller, low voltage switchgear bus, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelboard and other significant locations throughout the systems. The short circuit tabulations shall include X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, KVA and symmetrical fault-current. Provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas. Include in tabulations fault impedance, X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor contribution, short circuit KVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault-currents. D. The studies shall include representation of the site power system, the base quantities selected, impedance source data, calculation methods and tabulations, one-line diagrams, conclusions and recommendations. 104-1901 16015-8 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS • E. Provide the following: 1. The available fault current at each bus within the limits of the study shall be identified and listed. 2. The momentary and interrupting rating of all elements of the distribution system shall be listed. The maximum available fault current available at each element shall be calculated. 3. Determine the adequacy of the electrical protective devices to withstand the maximum available fault at the terminals of the equipment. Provide an equipment list, the equipment rating (both momentary and withstand), the maximum available fault rating, and the adequacy of the equipment to withstand the fault. The results shall be tabulated in the form of a PASS/FAIL device evaluation table Equipment that does not have adequate ratings shall be identified immediately and brought to the attention of the Engineer. 4. The short circuit portion of the report shall include: a. Executive summary describing the distribution system, the procedures used to develop the study, utility related information furnished by the utility company including the name and telephone number of the individual supplying the information; identify all 4100 assumptions made in the preparation of the study, identify any problem areas,and provide a definitive statement concerning the adequacy of the distribution system to interrupt and withstand the maximum possible fault current. b. Computer printout of the input data. c. Computer printouts for the three-phase and ground fault studies. Printouts shall indicate the fault current available at each major equipment, distribution bus within the high, medium and low voltage distribution systems. d. Table listing all the electrical distribution and utilization equipment (including VFDs), the equipment interrupting and withstand ratings, the available fault current at the terminals of the equipment, and the ability of the equipment to interrupt and/or withstand the fault. e. The short circuit study shall be prepared using approved computer software and must include complete fault calculations as specified herein for each proposed and ultimate source combination. Source combinations may include present and future Power Company supply circuits, large motors, or generators. 1.8 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION (10 A. Provide a protective device time-current coordination study in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Std. 242, with coordination plots of protective devices plus tabulated data, including ratings and settings selected. In the study, balance 104-1901 16015-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. r City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS shall be achieved between the competing objectives of protection and continuity of service for the system specified, taking into account the basic factors of sensitivity, selectivity and speed. •/ B. Provide separate plots for each mode of operation: (1) "single-ended mode" (single incoming utility feeder energized all switchgears single ended with bus ties closed); (2) "stand-by mode" (on-site generation solely providing power to the system; (3) "peak shaving modes" (a.) (double-ended substation with bus tie open with on-site generation paralleled) and (b) (single- ended with bus ties closed with on-site generation paralleled). Show maximum and minimum fault values in each case. Multiple power sources shown in one plot is not acceptable. C. Each primary protective device required for a delta-to-wye-connected transformer shall be selected so the characteristic or operating band is within the transformer parameters, which, where feasible, shall include a parameter equivalent to 58 percent of the ANSI C37.91 withstand curve to afford protection for secondary line-to-ground faults. Separate low voltage power circuit breakers from each other and the associated primary protective device, by a 16 percent current margin for coordination and protection in the event of line-to-line faults. Separate the protective relays by a 0.3-second time margin for the maximum three-phase fault conditions to assure proper selectivity. The protective device characteristics or operating bands shall be terminated to reflect the actual symmetrical and asymmetrical fault-currents sensed by the device. Provide the coordination plots for three-phase and phase-to-ground faults on a system basis. Include at least all devices down to largest branch circuit and largest feeder circuit breaker in-each motor control center and/or .11) power distribution panelboard. Include all adjustable setting ground fault protective devices. D. Select relay types (i.e., inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, over current with or without voltage restraint, timers, etc.), current transformer ratings and types, fuse, residually or zero sequence connected ground faults protection, etc., that will allow the system to be protected to within the equipment fault ratings and provide the maximum possible coordination between the protective devices. E. Multi-function Solid State Relays 1. Where multi-function solid state relays are already installed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the current and complete list of software setpoints programmed into the device. These setpoints shall be evaluated for potential impacts on the protective device coordination. 2. Where multi-function solid state relays are being installed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all setpoints needed for the specified operation of the relay. These settings include but are not limited to: a. The complete pickup settings of all protective elements specified by the designer and shall not be limited to only the overcurrent pickup settings. Settings for protective elements such as reverse power, synchronization, frequency and voltage control, etc., shall be 104-1901 16015-10 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS provided in full. • b. Differential pickup and zone settings necessary for the relay to operate as specified and designed and to protect the zone it is intended for. Zone of protection calculations and balance equations shall be completed entirely by the Contractor based on the equipment as furnished and designed. c. The complete protective relay logic map and logic equations. The relay logic is responsible for translating the pickups of the protective elements into relay output events and device trips. All logic necessary to create the specified output of the relay based on the specified protective elements shall be furnished with the protective device coordination report. d. Any and all miscellaneous settings necessary for the relay to communicate with the installation systems and the mirroring of data to other installation systems as specified or designed. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for the programming of relays prior to the field testing and start up requirements of this contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for all time needed to complete the relay settings in order to furnish a completely functional system as specified and required by the approved protection device settings. IIIF. Arc Flash Mitigation and Reduction Modes 1. Where devices are furnished with alternative trip settings intended to mitigate arc flash hazards, the Contractor shall coordinate these alternative pickup settings and provide representation of their tripping characteristics via TCCs. The alternative pickup settings shall be coordinate with the associated load and shall be set to provide the fastest device response time while avoiding nuisance trips during normal plant operation. G. Generator Protective Devices 1. The study shall address all of the protective devices provided for generator protection. 2. Protective relays requiring settings shall be included. 3. The Electrical Contractor shall obtain all necessary generator information to perform this study. H. Motor Protection and Coordination 1. Provide a complete and independent set of current-time characteristic curves for all motors 50 HP and above indicating coordination between the IDprotective relays and the thermal and starting characteristics of the motor. 2. The Contractor shall obtain from the motor supplier the necessary information to perform the study. Certified curves for"Safe Time vs. 104-1901 16015-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS Current at 100% Voltage" and "Accelerating Time vs. Current at 100% Voltage" are necessary and shall become part of the final report. I. Call discrepancies to the attention of the Engineer in the conclusions and recommendations of the report. J. The time current characteristic curves shall include: 1. The coordination plots shall graphically indicate the coordination proposed for the several systems centered on full-scale log forms. The coordination plots shall include complete titles, representative one-line diagrams and legends, associated upstream power system relays, fuse or system characteristics, significant motor starting characteristics, significant generator characteristics, complete parameters for power, and substation transformers, complete operating bands for low voltage circuit breaker trip devices, fuses, and the associated system load protective devices. The coordination plots shall define the types of protective devices selected, together with the proposed coil taps, time-dial settings and pick-up settings required. The short-time region shall indicate the relay instantaneous elements, the magnetizing inrush, and ANSI transformer damage curves, the low voltage circuit breaker and instantaneous trip devices, fuse manufacturing tolerance bands, and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault-currents. 2. No more than six devices shall be shown on one coordination plot. Of these six curves, two (the largest upstream device and the smallest downstream device) shall repeat curves shown on other coordination plots in order to provide cross-reference. Give each curve in the study a study- unique number or letter identifier to permit cross-reference between plots. 3. The coordinating time interval between primary and back-up protective devices shall be as per Table 15-3, Section 15.6, IEEE Std. 242-2001. 4. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings. A tabulation shall include settings for every overcurrent protective device, timer, power system relays (e.g., ANSI 25, 27, 32, 67, 87, etc.), circuit breaker, recommended fuse and current transformer ratings, etc. Include C.T. ratio, burden and all other calculations required for the determination of settings. Provide recommended settings for all protective devices furnished under Division 16 and furnished with those furnished with Variable Frequency Drives and associated transformers, generators and associated paralleling and distribution switchgear. 1.9 ARC FLASH A. Provide an arc flash study that utilizes the fault current values calculated in the short circuit study and the minimum clear times of the upstream protective device selected in the coordination study to calculate the incident energy at each fault location. 104-1901 16015-12 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS B. The Arc Flash study shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined in IEEE ® Standard 1584. C. Calculate the incident energy levels at each faulted bus for each mode of operation: (1) "single- ended mode" (single incoming utility feeder energized all switchgears single ended with bus ties closed); (2) "stand-by mode" (on-site generation solely providing power to the system; (3) "peak shaving modes" (a.) (double-ended substation with bus tie open with on-site generation paralleled) and (b) (single-ended with bus ties closed with on-site generation paralleled). Determine arc flash incident energy values for both maximum and minimum fault values in each case. D. Extent of Study 1. The arc flash study shall include analysis for all equipment that would normally be serviced while energized and cannot be easily shut down during maintenance periods. The contractor shall coordinate with the owner to ensure that all equipment that is expected to be analyzed is included in the study. The extent of the analysis includes but is not limited to: a. Switchboard, MCCs, and distribution equipment b. Low voltage lighting panels, even those covered by certain calculation exceptions must be modeled and provided with a unique device label ® c. Low voltage control equipment such as 120-600V control panels. E. Arc Flash Labels 1. The arc flash study shall produce a single set of label templates that shall not be printed until the final arc flash study has been approved. 2. A single set of labels shall be printed and affixed to the equipment analyzed if the equipment is continuous. Double-ended equipment shall have individual labels for each side of the gear. Equipment that is not continuous shall have a single label placed on each piece of continuous gear. 3. Where applicable, LINE and LOAD labels shall be produced for equipment. Examples of equipment that require these labels include the main breakers of switchgear and MCCs. In these cases, the LINE side breakers shall be affixed to indicate the hazard associated with the line side of the equipment and the LOAD label shall be affixed to indicate the hazard associated with the rest of the gear. 4. Labels shall be affixed where they are clearly identifiable with the equipment they depict. Labels shall not obscure any other signage on the equipment unless they are used to completely cover a previous arc ® flash label. 5. Labels shall meet the following requirements: 104-1901 16015-13 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS a. Labels shall be indoor/outdoor rated weather-resistant vinyl or polyester with a UV- resistant overlaminate. The label shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mil. Labels shall be backed with pressure sensitive permanent cold temperature adhesive rated for a minimum five-year life in the environment in which they are installed. b. All lettering shall be black and printed via thermal transfer. Backgrounds shall be orange for hazard risk categories 1-4 and red for -Dangerous"areas. c. Where subjected to degrading or corrosive environments, the labels shall be provided with a tinted fiber glass cover. d. The label shall match any pre-existing facility or client specified formatting. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining this formatting information prior to submitting label templates. e. A single label for equipment is acceptable where equipment is continuous. In the event of split busses or equipment not arranged in a continuous fashion, multiple labels shall be provided. f. Line side labels for equipment main breakers shall be included in addition to load side labels. g. Labels shall be DANGER/WARNING type conforming to the NFPA 70E and ANSI Z534.4 standards. Labels are required to have the minimum information specified by these standards printed on them. Labels shall be legible and standard throughout the plant. h. Labels templates shall be provided to the engineer and client for final approval and shall be printed and affixed by the contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for all work required to print and affix the labels to the equipment. Labels shall be affixed in accordance with the direction of the client. 6. Contractor shall produce all arc flash labels and coordinate affixing them onto all equipment. F. Arc Flash Mitigation and Reduction Devices 1. Where devices are furnished with alternative trip settings intended to mitigate arc flash hazards, the Contractor shall provide an alternative arc flash lookup table associated with these alternative settings. 2. Labels shall have only the worst case hazard risk category (without the arc flash reduction settings) depicted. Multiple labels for different device settings shall not be accepted. 3. Devices such as differential protection relays which limit incident energy by limiting the magnitude of the available fault and/or minimizing the fault clearing time may be used to calculate hazard risk categories. The use of these devices in the calculations shall only be permitted where permitted by the standards and code guidelines used to complete the arc flash 104-1901 16015-14 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS analysis. If not explicitly stated by the standard as an acceptable method ® for calculating arc flash hazard, it shall not be permitted. G. Arc Flash Hazard Mitigation 1. Acceptable hazard risk categories shall be coordinated by the contractor between the owner and engineer. Where there are no guidelines determining acceptable arc flash levels, the Contractor shall actively attempt to reduce all hazard risk categories greater than 2. Contractor shall list all areas greater that category 2 in the conclusion of the report and shall give reasons for the high incident energy. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for proposing and evaluating arc flash mitigation measure including but not be limited to: a. Adjustment of protective devices in an attempt to better balance the system coordination and the incident energy available to an arcing fault. b. Equipment that could be used to physically remove the operator from the arc flash hazard boundary (mimic panels, remote switching/racking). c. Equipment that could be used to limit the amount of incident energy or reduce the protective device pickup time (maintenance ® mode bypass, differential relaying). 3. Proposing and evaluating these arc flash mitigation measures shall include evaluating the cost and implementation of the options as well as reevaluating and reporting the hazard risk category associated with their installation. 1.10 HARMONIC STUDY A. Provide a harmonic study for all harmonic producing equipment to determine the harmonic currents and voltages of the electrical distribution system. B. The harmonic study shall provide a harmonic current and voltage profile for the complete electrical distribution system. At a minimum, the voltage profile shall include voltage values at the utility service point, each switchgear/switchboard and motor control center bus. C. A complete Harmonic current and voltage profile shall be provided for the minimum anticipated fault current available from the utility and the standby generator for each of the following operating conditions: 1. All tie circuit breakers open with electrical distribution system operating double-ended. IIIa. One profile for all equipment running (full speed condition for VFD units). 104-1901 16015-15 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS b. One profile for all equipment running (70 percent of full speed condition for VFD units). 2. All tie circuit breakers closed with the electrical distribution system operating single-ended. a. One profile for all equipment running (full speed condition for VFD units). b. One profile for all equipment running (70 percent of full speed condition for VFD units). D. The Contractor shall obtain from the harmonic generating equipment suppliers the necessary information to perform the study. Certified harmonic information is absolutely necessary and shall become part of the final report. E. The harmonic study shall contain, as a minimum, the following: 1. Explanation of method used to perform the study. 2. Explanation of study results with specific recommendations on filters and/or other measures that will be implemented to meet the specified limits. 3. All calculations and/or computer printouts used to arrive at the recommendations. 4. Individual drive voltage and current harmonic content up to the fiftieth harmonic, and the combined total of all the drive harmonic contents reflected in the system source supply voltage and current as a percent of the 60 Hz fundamental under actual load conditions from 0 to 60 Hz at 10 Hz increments. F. If the harmonic distortion for voltage and current distortion levels and line notching do not meet the requirements of IEEE 519. The contractor shall specify the appropriate filter traps that provide the filtering required to meet the requirements of IEEE 519 as specified herein. G. The contractor shall be responsible to provide all data necessary to perform the study. This includes nonlinear load producing equipment signature, feeder cable sizes, approximate feeder length, motor data, switchgear data, utility data, alternate source data, existing field data (if required) and any other information relevant to the study. PART 2 - PRODUCTS— NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values established by coordination study. Setting shall be made in accordance with Section 16950. 104-1901 16015-16 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish (by conformance with the short circuit and protective device coordination studies. C. Notify Consulting Engineer in writing of any required major equipment modifications. END OF SECTION S • 104-1901 16015-17 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 16015-18 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ® Section 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Temporary wiring of systems to maintain operation of facilities while undergoing modifications and demolition shall be provided in accordance with: 1. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article No. 590 - Temporary Wiring 2. City of Pearland Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Annotate existing drawings to sequence the demolition of systems, equipment removal and temporary hook-ups. ® B. Schedule with Project Manager for required shut-downs to accommodate system demolition and installation of temporary facilities. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to City Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. By beginning demolition, installer accepts existing conditions and warrants that he will maintain service to equipment and items not scheduled or indicated for removal, and that he will return to the City all items and systems in good operating condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. 2.02 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 104-1901 16060-1 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. The temporary electrical wiring and facilities shall be designed and constructed in strict compliance with NEC - Article No. 590 and the City of Pearland Electrical Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company to provide continuous service to operating equipment. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, notify City of Pearland Utility Operations and get approval. Use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the City Engineer at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. E. Adding Load to Existing Electrical System: Perform a load analysis to assure that the existing power distribution system (MCC, service, conductors, panel, breakers, feeders, branch circuits, etc.) is not overloaded if additional load is added to existing equipment. F. Existing electrical conduit and wire may not be reused to feed new equipment except by written authorization from the City of Pearland. 3.02 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. This includes all associated support and anchoring systems. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. F. Disconnect and remove electrical wire, conduits, devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 104-1901 16060-2 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ® G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Repairs to include matching material type and color. H. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. Cut abandon conduits in floors or slabs flush to surface, fill with concrete and path to match surface type and color. I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified for new work. 3.03 DISPOSAL AND SALVAGE A. Salvage and remove electrical and instrumentation equipment as well as wiring of size four and larger from existing facilities for City's reuse. B. Material and equipment which can be reused or salvaged remains the property of the City of Pearland. Equipment to be retained by the City of Pearland shall be delivered to a specified location by the Contractor. C. Materials and equipment which cannot be reused or salvaged will be removed and disposed by the Contractor. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. ® B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Section 02220 - Demolition. B. Electrical installations and materials shall conform to the current issue of the following standard and codes: American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), City of Pearland Electrical Code, and material and workmanship. C. All material shall be free of defects and in safe working condition which will meet electrical classification and functional requirements. D. Testing shall be made during construction or at the completion of the job. These tests shall be made by the electrical contractor. The contractor shall furnish all test equipment. E. The job will not be complete until work has been inspected and trial startup has been successfully completed. • 104-1901 16060-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION END OF SECTION 104-1901 16060-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS 41. SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS, BOXES, FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Raceways and conductors are not shown completely on the Drawings, including but not limited to raceways and conductors: between lighting, switches, receptacles, other miscellaneous low voltage and signal systems, except where they are required to pass through a restricted or designated spaces. Conduit and wiring descriptions are indicated on the riser diagrams for the Instrumentation Systems. Raceways and conductors shall be provided for complete and operating systems. Raceways indicated to be run exposed on the Drawings shall be run near the ceilings or along the walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, cranes and hoists, lighting fixtures, doors and hatches, etc. Raceways indicated to be run concealed shall be run in the center of concrete floor slabs, in partitions, or above hung ceilings, as required. C. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, and components and install a complete seismic restraint and support system for raceway systems as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Wires and Cables (600 Volt maximum) are included in Section 16120. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, the manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers with marked cut sheets of all materials specified. B. Submittals shall include type of hanger and/or support, location, support reaction transmitted to the structure, and type of anchor and other supporting appurtenance including structural fasteners. • 104-1901 16110-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Steel Conduit and Fittings 1. Rigid metal conduit (GRS), couplings, factory elbows and fittings shall be heavy wall steel tubing with a hot-dipped galvanized finish inside and out after threading and shall comply with ANSI C 80.1 and UL/6. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. b. Wheatland Tube. c. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. d. Or equal. 3. Rigid metal conduit fittings shall be of the threaded type, and shall be steel or malleable iron, with a hot-dipped galvanized finish. Threadless fittings and split couplings are not allowed except in specific applications as approved by the Engineer. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Appleton Electric Co. b. O-Z Gedney Co. c. RACO Inc. d. Gould/Efcor e. Steel City f. Or equal B. Aluminum Conduit and Fittings 1. Rigid Aluminum conduit, couplings, factory elbows and fittings shall be 6063 alloy and shall comply with ANSI C80.5. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers a. American Conduit by SAPA b. AFC Co. c. Wheatland Tube. d. Or equal. 104-1901 16110-2 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS 1 c C. PVC-coated Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings 1. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall be heavy wall steel tubing with a hot- dipped galvanized finish inside and out after threading with a minimum 0.040- inch-thick, polyvinyl chloride coating permanently bonded to it and an internal chemically cured urethane or enamel coating. The rigid steel conduit shall comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL/6 prior to coating 2. PVC-coated couplings, factory elbows, and fitting shall be furnished with a PVC coating bonded to steel the same thickness as used on the PVC-coated conduit. The ends of all couplings, fittings, etc., shall have a minimum of one pipe diameter in length of PVC overlap. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers a. "Ocal" as manufactured by Thomas & Betts b. "Plasti-Bond Red" as manufactured by Robroy Industries c. Perma-Cote d. Or equal D. Non-metallic Conduit and Fittings 1. PVC conduit shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride Schedule 40. Rigid PVC conduit shall comply with NEMA TC-2 and UL/651 and shall be sunlight resistant, rated for use with 90 degree C conductors in exposed and direct or concrete-encased ® applications. 2. Connectors, couplings, fittings, and ancillary materials shall be supplied by the conduit manufacturer. Connectors, fittings, and ancillary materials shall be rated for the environment for which they are installed. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Carlon Corp. b. Certained Corp. c. Conux Pipe Systems, Inc. d. Or equal. E. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Couplings and Fittings 1. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be square locked, galvanized steel flexible conduit with a moisture-proof, flame-resistant, polyvinyl chloride jacket, for use with rigid metal conduit systems. Sealtite, Type UA, manufactured by the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.; Anaconda American Brass Co.; American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.; Universal Metal Hose Co.; or equal. 2. Liquid-tight conduit fittings shall be hot-dipped mechanically galvanized, positive 411,0 grounding, screw in type. Provide external bonding lugs on sizes 1-1/4-inch and 104-1901 16110-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS larger. Box connectors shall have insulated throats as manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Co., Crouse-Hinds Co., or equal. •.� 3. Acceptable Manufacturers a. American Flexible Conduit Co. b. Anaconda Metal Hose/ANAMET Inc. c. Electri-flex Co. d. Thomas & Betts e. O-Z Gedney f. Or equal F. Flexible Metallic Tubing 1. Flexible metallic tubing shall be for use under the provisions of NEC Article 360. 2. Flexible metallic tubing shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel strips shaped into interlocking convolutions firmly joined to one another assuring a complete lock. 3. Flexible metallic tubing shall be used only indoors for connection to lighting fixtures in NEMA 1 administration and office areas. 4. Furnish and install insulated bushings at terminations for conductor protection. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Tristeel as manufactured by Triangle - PWC, Inc. b. Or equal G. Non-metallic Flexible Conduit and Fittings 1. Non-metallic flexible conduit shall be seamless, liquid-tight UL 1660 listed, Type B conduit with rigid non-metallic reinforcing embedded in integral flexible PVC lining and jacket wall and shall be oil, acid, ozone and alkaline resistant, rated 105 degree C, 60 degree C wet, 70 degree Coil resistant. 2. Non-metallic conduit fittings shall be dustight, liquid-tight, chemical resistant thermoplastic/nylon construction with tapered thread hub and neoprene 0- ring gasket. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Thomas and Betts "XTRACFLEX LTC" b. CARLON "CARFLEX" 104-1901 16110-4 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS c. Hubel/Kellems "PolyTuff I" d. Or equal H. Inner Ducts 1. Inner duct shall be polyethylene, oscillating wave or straight longitudinal internally ribbed, Type 11 standard duty with longitudinal external ribs Type 9 heavy duty, orange color. 2. Approved Manufacturers a. Arnco Corporation b. Carlon c. Edot Industries, Inc. d. Or equal 2.2 BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Dry and Damp Location Boxes and Fittings 41101 1. Outlet boxes shall be zinc-galvanized, extra depth, pressed steel with knockouts and of size and type suitable for the intended application. 2. Boxes that are less than 100 cubic inches in size used for junction or pull boxes shall be aluminum not less than 14 USS gauge with appropriate blank covers, minimum size 4- 11/16-inch square by 2-1/8-inch deep. 3. Boxes that are 100 cubic inches and larger shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel without knockouts. Covers shall be secured with round head 316 stainless steel matching screws. All joints shall be welded and ground smooth. 4. Terminal cabinets shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Welds shall be ground smooth. Box bodies shall be flanged and shall not have holes or knockouts. Box bodies shall not be less than 14 gauge metal and covers shall not be less than 12 gauge metal. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with latching hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets. Terminal blocks shall be rated not less than 20A, 600V. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Appleton b. Raco c. Steel City 104-1901 16110-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS d. Hoffman e. Electromate Division of Robroy Ind. f. Wiegmann B. Wet Location Boxes and Fittings 1. NEMA 4X terminal boxes,junction boxes, pull boxes, etc., shall be sheet Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Boxes shall have continuously welded seams and mounting feet. Welds shall be ground smooth. Boxes shall be flanged and shall not have holes or knockouts. Box bodies shall not be less than 14 gauge metal and covers shall not be less than 12 gauge metal. Covers shall be gasketed and fastened with stainless steel clamps. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets. Terminal blocks shall be NEMA type, not less than 20 Amps, 600 Volt. 2. Cast or malleable iron device boxes shall be Type FD. Boxes and fittings shall have cadmium-zinc finish with cast covers and stainless steel screws. 3. Cast aluminum device boxes shall be Type FD. Boxes and fittings shall be copper-free aluminum with cast aluminum covers and stainless steel screws. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Appleton b. Crouse-Hinds c. Steel City d. Hoffman e. Electromate - Division of Robroy Ind. f. Or equal C. Corrosive Location Boxes 1. NEMA 4X PVC-coated outlet boxes shall be used with PVC-coated conduit shall be furnished with a PVC coating bonded to the metal, the same thickness as used on the coated steel. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers a. "OCAL" as manufactured by Thomas & Betts b. "Plasti-Bond Red" as manufactured by Robroy Industries 104-1901 16110-6 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS c. Triangle PWC Inc. d. Or equal 3. NEMA 4X terminal boxes,junction boxes, and pull boxes shall be fiberglass reinforced plastic with stainless steel hardware and gasketed covers. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets. Terminal blocks shall be NEMA type, not less than 20 Amps, 600 Volt. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Hoffman b. Stahlin - Division of Robroy Ind. c. English Electric d. Or equal D. Hazardous (Classified) Location Boxes 1. Explosion-proof boxes shall be designed for Class 1, Group D, Division 1 hazardous locations. They shall be cast iron with cadmium-zinc or hot-dipped 4111, galvanized finish, stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized bolts; Type EJB as manufactured by the Crouse- Hinds Company; Appleton Electric Co.; The Pyle- National Co., or equal. 2. Explosion-proof boxes shall be designed for Class 1, Group D, Division 1 hazardous locations, and shall also have 0-ring seals to meet NEMA 4 requirements. Boxes and covers shall be aluminum, with stainless steel hinges and stainless steel bolts; Type EJB- N4 as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; Adalet-PLM; or equal. E. Miscellaneous Fittings 1. Flexible couplings shall be type ECGJH as manufactured by the Crouse- Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.; or equal 2. Conduit hubs shall be as manufactured by Myers Electric Products, Inc.; or equal. 3. Conduit wall seals for new concrete walls below grade shall be O.Z./Gedney Co., Type WSK; Linkseal; Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co., Type WDP; or equal. 4. Conduit wall seals for cored holes shall be Type CSMC as manufactured by the O.Z./Gedney Co., or equal. 5. Conduit wall and floor seals for sleeved openings shall be Type CSMI as manufactured by the O.Z./Gedney Co., or equal. 104-1901 16110-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS 6. Pre-coated combination expansion-deflection fittings embedded in concrete shall be pre- treated Type XD as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Type DX as manufactured by O.Z./Gedney Co.; Type DF as manufactured by Appleton Electric Co.; or equal. 7. Combination expansion-deflection fittings installed exposed shall be Type XD as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Co.; Type DX as manufactured by O.Z. Gedney Co.; Type DF as manufactured by Appleton Electric Co., or equal. 8. Explosion-proof fittings shall be as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co., Appleton Electric Co., O.Z./Gedney Co., or equal. 9. Conduit sealing bushings shall be stainless steel by O.Z./Gedney, or equal. 10. Grounding bushings shall be 316 stainless steel with integral insulated throat rated for 150 degrees C, with solderless lugs as manufactured by Crouse Hinds/Cooper, Series HGLL; Appleton, Series GIB; O.Z./Gedney, Type HBLG; or equal. 11. Multi-outlet Assembly a. Assembly enclosures shall consist of two-piece, all steel or anodized aluminum raceways which shall allow for field installation of wiring and standard receptacles as shown on the Drawings. b. Multi-outlet assemblies shall be UL Listed as a multi-outlet assembly. c. Raceway bases and removable covers shall be .040-inch steel, minimum of 2-1/8-inch high by 1-5/8-inch deep. Entrance fittings shall be sized for 3/4- inch conduit. d. Raceways shall include all fittings, couplings, etc., for the complete installation of a finished system. e. Device covers shall be the 1702 Series by Walker, similar by Isoduct; Wiremold; or equal. f. The multi-outlet assembly shall be the 1700 Series by Walker, similar by Isoduct; Wiremold; or equal. 12. Pedestal boxes for laboratory bench receptacles shall be cast aluminum, polished finish, single face with 1/2-inch NPT tapped inlet, single gang: J.A. Pink Catalog No. 800-A; double gang: J.A. Pink Catalog No. 801-A, similar by Hubbell, or equal. 13. Floor boxes shall be of the adjustable single gang, concrete tight type for installation in concrete fill, Walker 800 Series, similar by Hubbell; Thomas & Betts Co.; or equal. 104-1901 16110-8 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS 14. 120 Volt fittings for floor boxes shall be Walker Catalog No. 523AL, similar to Hubbell; Thomas & Betts or equal and shall have a 20 Amps, two-pole, three-wire duplex receptacle as specified in Section 16141. 15. Carpet plates for use with floor box fittings where required shall be Walker Catalog No. 825CP, similar by Hubbell; Thomas & Betts Co.; or equal. 16. Telephone fittings for floor boxes shall have rubber, grommeted holes, Walker Catalog No. 501AL, similar by Hubbell; Thomas & Betts; or equal. 17. Poke-Thru Service Fittings a. Poke-thru service fittings shall install in 2-inch core drilled hole, fit floor thicknesses of 2-1/2-inch to 7-inch, and be fire rated. b. Poke-thru service fittings shall be barriered to handle both high and low tension services and be designed for both new construction and building retrofit. c. Service fitting heads shall each contain a 20 Amps, 125 Volt, two-pole, three-wire duplex receptacle on one side and provisions for up to 2-25 pair telephone cables on the remaining side. �,. d. Complete poke-thru service fitting shall be as manufactured by Raceway Components, similar by Walker; Square D; or equal. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Conduit Mounting Equipment 1. In dry indoor areas, hangers, rods, backplates, beam clamps, channel, etc., shall be steel. 2. PVC-coated steel channel with stainless steel hardware shall be used in areas designated "WET" or"CORROSIVE" on the Drawings and in outdoor locations. 3. Fiberglass channel, if used, shall be resistant to the chemicals present in the area in which it is used. 4. Furnish any and all necessary supports, brackets, conduit sleeves, racks, and bracing as required. All boxes and hardware in dry locations shall be galvanized zinc-plated steel. B. Conduit Identification Plates 1. Conduit identification plates shall be embossed stainless steel with stainless steel band, permanently secured to the conduit without screws. 104-1901 16110-10 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS 2. Identification plates shall be as manufactured by the Panduit Corp., or equal. C. Wall and Floor Slab Opening Seals 1. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with a UL-approved expanding material which equals or exceeds the fire rating of the wall or floor construction as manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Corp.; Pro Set Systems; Neer Mfg. Co.; Specified Technologies, Inc.; or equal. D. Cold Galvanizing Compound 1. Cold galvanizing compound shall be as manufactured by ZRC Products Company, a Division of Norfolk Corp.; or equal. E. Sealing fittings: 1. Construction: a. 40 percent wire fill capacity. b. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. c. Crouse-Hinds Type EYD where drains are required. d. Crouse-Hinds Type EYS where drains are not required. ,q) e. UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Divisions 1 and 2; Groups E, F, and G. 2. Sealing compound: a. Fiber filler and cement as recommended by the sealing fitting manufacturer. b. Approved for the conditions and use. 1) Not affected by surrounding atmosphere or liquids. c. Melting point shall be 200 degrees Fahrenheit minimum. F. Conduit Supports 1. Trapezes a. In dry indoor areas, beams, channels, struts, hangers, bracing, rods, beam clamps, accessories, and components shall be 316 stainless steel. b. 316 stainless steel channels and stainless steel hardware shall be used except in chemical areas, where steel subject to corrosion fiber glass shall be used. Fiberglass channels shall be resistant to the chemicals present in the 'ma) 104-1901 16110-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS area in which they are used. 2. Flush-mounted Supports a. In dry indoor areas, channels, struts, accessories, and components shall be galvanized steel. b. PVC-coated steel channels, struts or fiberglass channels, struts with stainless accessories and components shall be used in areas designated "WET", "DAMP", and "CORROSIVE" where indicated and in outdoor locations. Fiberglass channels, struts shall be resistant to the chemicals present in the area in which they are used. 3. Conduit Racks a. In dry indoor areas, conduit racks, accessories, and components shall be galvanized steel. b. PVC-coated steel conduit racks or fiberglass conduit racks with stainless accessories and components shall be shall be used in areas designated "WET", "DAMP", and "CORROSIVE" where indicated and in outdoor locations. Fiberglass channels shall be resistant to the chemicals present in the area in which they are used. 4. Conduit Hangers ® a. dryIn indoor areas, conduit clamps, rods, beam clamps, bracing, 9 accessories, and components shall be galvanized steel. b. Stainless steel conduit clamps, rods, beam clamps, bracing, accessories, and components shall be shall be used in areas designated "WET", "DAMP", and "CORROSIVE" where indicated and in outdoor locations. 5. Adjustable steel and plastic band hangers, adjustable band hangers, adjustable swivel ring hangers and J-hangers shall not be allowed. 6. All hangers, bracing, rods, beam clamps, accessories, and components shall be as manufactured by the Carpenter & Paterson Inc., Grinnell Corporation, B- Line Systems Inc., or equal. 7. Design of supplemental structural steel required for attachment to the building structural support system shall be the full responsibility of the Support Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Refer to Table 16110-1 for specific raceway application requirements. B. All conduit of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 104-1901 16110-12 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS C. Refer to Section 16600 for underground applications. 3.2 BOX APPLICATIONS A. Unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings, all boxes shall be metal. B. Exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes and condulet fittings shall be cast or malleable iron, except that cast aluminum shall be used with aluminum conduit and non- metallic PVC shall be used with PVC. C. Concealed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes shall be pressed steel. D. Terminal boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the location in which they are installed, as specified in Section 16000. E. Boxes flush in block, brick or tile walls shall be located at a course line and provided with square tile covers. Flush boxes shall not project beyond the finished surfaces nor shall surfaces project more than 1/8-inch beyond the box enclosure. Wiring devices located in close proximity to each other shall be installed in one solid gang box with single cover. F. All conduit bodies and pulling outlets shall comply with NEC wire bending space requirements. Mogul type fittings shall be used for sizes 2-1/2-inch and larger. 104-1901 16110-13 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS TABLE 16110-1 Raceway Application Location/Circuit Type Raceway All locations Exposed - Rigid Aluminum conduit. Use PVC- coated rigid steel conduit in corrosive areas. Class 2 and 3 signal wiring and 4-20 Concealed - Galvanized rigid steel (GRS) mA instrumentation cables, non-fiber conduit. Underground - Galvanized rigid steel (copper) data highway. (GRS) conduit in concrete-reinforced ductbank. Use PVC-coated steel conduit for single All locations Exposed - Rigid Aluminum conduit. Concealed - Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Fiber Optic wiring systems Underground - Schedule 40 PVC conduit in concrete-reinforced ductbank. Direct Burial applications (where specifically Clean, dry non-finished areas - electrical Exposed conduit for power wiring, lighting, rooms, mechanical rooms, shops, dry switch, and receptacle circuits– Rigid storage, etc. Aluminum. Concealed conduit for power wiring, lighting, switch, and receptacle circuits - Schedule 40 PVC conduit when embedded within concrete Process areas - non-corrosive, non- Exposed conduit for power wiring, lighting, hazardous locations designated as DAMP switch, and receptacle circuits - Rigid or WET on the Drawings. aluminum. Concealed conduit for power wiring, lighting, switch, and receptacle circuits - Schedule 40 PVC conduit when embedded within concrete Corrosive areas - chemical storage and Exposed conduit for power wiring, lighting, handling areas, underground vaults, switch, and receptacle circuits — PVC coated within tanks or clearwells, filter pipe rigid steel. galleries and locations where Concealed conduit for power wiring, lighting, designated corrosive on the Drawings. switch, and receptacle circuits - Schedule 40 PVC conduit when embedded within concrete Hazardous areas - all locations - Exposed conduit for power wiring, lighting, Class 1, Division 1 and 2. switch, and receptacle circuits– Rigid Aluminum. Concealed conduit for power wiring, lighting, switch, and receptacle circuits - Galvanized Outdoor areas - all locations. Exposed conduit for power wiring, lighting, switch, and receptacle circuits - rigid aluminum. PVC conduit shall not be used exposed. Concealed conduit for power wiring, lighting, switch, and receptacle circuits - Schedule 40 4110 104-1901 16110-14 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS 3.3 FITTINGS APPLICATIONS A. Combination expansion-deflection fittings shall be used where exposed conduits cross structure expansion joints or in straight runs where expansion is anticipated. Combination expansion- deflection fittings shall be installed where embedded conduits cross structural expansion joints. Refer to Structural Drawings for expansion joint locations. Provide bonding jumpers around fittings. B. All underground conduit penetrations at walls or other structures shall be sealed watertight. Conduit wall seals and sleeves shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and the details shown on the Drawings. C. Conduit sealing bushings shall be used to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather and at other locations shown on the Drawings. D. Gas Containment Area Sealing 1. Internally and externally seal each conduit entering or leaving any area containing noxious gases to prevent contamination into clean areas via the conduit system. Areas requiring this protection are rooms where chlorine, ammonia and ozone are stored, generated or handled. Caulking material for conduit internal use shall be synthetic elastomer type, 3M, Series CP25 or equal. External sealing shall be in accordance with the typical details shown on the Drawings. E. Insulated throat grounding bushings shall be used where specified herein, in Section -- 16660, and where conduits stub up into electrical equipment such as MCCs, switchgear,etc. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. No conduit smaller than 3/4-inch electrical trade size shall be used, nor shall any have more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any one run. Pull boxes shall be provided as required by the NEC after every 270 degrees of bends, and for straight run not to exceed 200 feet or as directed. B. No wire shall be pulled until the conduit system is complete in all details; in the case of concealed work, until all rough plastering or masonry has been completed; in the case of exposed work, until the conduit system has been completed in every detail. C. All conduit which may under any circumstance contain liquids such as water, condensation, liquid chemicals, etc., shall be arranged to drain away from the equipment served. If conduit drainage is not possible, conduit seals shall be used to plug the conduits. The ends of all conduits shall be temporarily plugged to exclude dust, moisture and debris from entering during construction. D. Conduit ends exposed to the weather shall be sealed with conduit sealing bushings. E. Conduits noted as spare shall be capped or plugged at both ends with easily removable 104-1901 16110-15 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS ty fittings. F. Conduit terminating in NEMA 3R, 4X enclosures shall be terminated with Myers type conduit hubs. G. Conduit terminating in pressed steel boxes shall have double locknuts and insulated bushings. H. Conduits containing equipment grounding conductors and terminating in sheet steel boxes shall have insulated throat grounding bushings. I. Conduits shall be installed using threaded fittings except for PVC or EMT. J. The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, a three- piece union shall be used. K. All conduits entering or leaving a motor control center, switchboard, or other multiple- compartment enclosure shall be stubbed up into the bottom horizontal wireway or other manufacturer's designated area, directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated. The 3-inch extension of conduit above the floor slab or concrete equipment pad may be reduced to a dimension that suits the equipment manufacturer's installation requirements if the 3-inch stub-up interferes with the equipment being provided. ® L. Rigid galvanized steel conduits buried in earth shall be completely painted with bitumastic. M. Rigid galvanized steel conduits which have been field cut and threaded shall be painted with cold galvanizing compounds. N. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used for elbows at risers at the utility pole for electrical and telephone service conduits. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used at utility pole for electrical and telephone service and fire alarm conduits to a height of 10-ft. above finished grade. Furnish and install weather heads at service pole riser if required by utility company. O. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and elbows shall be used for pad- mounted transformer stub-ups. P. In hazardous locations, conduits terminating at boxes enclosing circuit opening equipment shall be sealed at the entrance to the enclosure with approved compound filled sealing fittings to prevent passage of explosive or combustible gases through the conduits. All conduits leading from or entering hazardous locations shall be similarly sealed at points of exit or entrance. Exposed conduits passing through hazardous locations shall be sealed at both the entrance to and the exit from the hazardous locations. A sealing compound installation schedule shall be presented to the resident engineer(RE)for approval. Each installation shall be signed off by the Contractor and the RE and each fitting shall be legibly marked with red paint to indicate that the sealing compound has been installed. , (10, Q. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed in all hazardous (classified) areas I104-1901 16110-16 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS designated Class 1, Division 1, and Class 1, Division 2. R. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed on all conduits entering and leaving �1 any area containing noxious gases to prevent contamination into clean areas via the conduit system. Areas requiring this protection are: rooms where chlorine, ammonia, and ozone are stored, generated or heated. A sealing compound installation schedule shall be presented to resident engineer(RE)for approval. Each installation shall be signed off by the Contractor and the RE and each fitting shall be legibly marked with red paint to indicate that the sealing compound has been installed. S. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for all motor terminations, the primary and secondary of transformers, generator terminations and other equipment where vibration is present or may require removal. The length of liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall not exceed 36-inch when used for vibration isolation, and shall not exceed 72-inch in length when attaching to luminaires. Non-metallic flexible conduit shall only be allowed for use with rigid PVC conduit systems. T. Flexible couplings shall be used in hazardous locations for all motor terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. U. Aluminum fittings and boxes shall be used with aluminum conduit. Aluminum conduit shall not be imbedded in concrete. Aluminum conduit shall be isolated from other metals with plastic sleeves or plastic-coated hangers. Strap wrenches shall be used for tightening aluminum conduit. V. Flexible metallic conduit (Type MC cable) shall be used for recessed fluorescent fixtures in hung ceilings to connect fixtures to the conduit system. W. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall be used as a transition section where concrete embedded conduit stubs out of floor slabs or through below grade walls or where conduit installed under building slabs on grade stub out of floors. The PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall extend a minimum of 3-inch into and out of the floor slab, concrete pad, or wall to allow for proper threading of the conduit. X. PVC conduit to non-metallic box connections shall be made with PVC socket to male thread terminal adapters with neoprene 0-ring and PVC round edge bushings. Y. PVC conduit shall be supported with non-metallic clamps, PVC-coated steel racks, and stainless steel hardware. Z. Expansion fittings shall be used on exposed runs of PVC conduit where required forthermal expansion. Installation and number of fittings shall be as recommended by manufacturer. AA. PVC boxes, conduit fittings, etc., with integral hubs shall be solvent welded directly to the PVC conduit system. BB. Non-metallic boxes with field drilled or punched holes shall be connected to the PVC conduit system with threaded and gasketed PVC Terminal Adapters. 104-1901 16110-17 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS CC. Conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding the distance required by the NEC to obtain rigid construction. DD. Single conduits shall be supported by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination with one- screw back plates, to raise conduits from the surface. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported on fabricated channel trapeze type racks with steel horizontal members and threaded hanger rods. The rods shall be not less than 3/8-inch diameter. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be supported by spacers to provide a minimum of 1/2-inch clearance between wall and equipment. EE. Conduit Supports (Other than Underground Raceways) 1. Trapezes a. Conduit support trapezes shall be vertically supported every 10-ft. or less, as required to obtain rigid conduit construction. b. Lateral seismic restraints (Sway Bracing) shall be spaced 30-ft. or less. c. Horizontal seismic restraints shall be spaced at 40-ft. or less. There shall be at least one horizontal restraint per horizontal run. d. Attachment to structural steel shall be by beam clamps or welded beam attachment. C- clamps will not be allowed for vertical hangers. Side beam clamps with beam hooks shall be used for seismic restraint only. e. Attachment to concrete shall be cast-in-place inserts, cast-in place welded plates with welded studs or stainless steel adhesive anchors. 2. Flush-mounted Supports a. Support shall be spaced 10-ft. or less, as required to obtain rigid conduit construction. b. Attachment to concrete shall be with cast-in-place inserts, cast-in place welded plates with welded studs or stainless adhesive anchors. 3. Conduit Racks a. Support shall be spaced 10-ft. or less, as required to obtain rigid conduit construction. b. Horizontal seismic restraints shall be spaced at 30-ft. or less. c. Attachment to concrete shall be with cast-in-place inserts, cast-in- place welded plate with welded studs or stainless adhesive anchors. 4. Conduit Hangers 104-1901 16110-18 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS a. Conduit hangers shall be vertical supported 10-ft. or less, as required to obtain rigid conduit construction. b. Lateral seismic restraints (Sway Bracing) shall be spaced 20-ft. or less. c. Horizontal seismic restraints shall be spaced at 30-ft. or less. There shall be at least one horizontal restraint per horizontal run. d. Attachment to structural steel shall be by beam clamps or welded beam attachment. C- clamps will not be allowed for vertical hangers. Side beam clamps with beam hooks shall be used for seismic restraint only. e. Attachment to concrete shall be cast-in-place inserts, cast-in-place welded plates with welded studs or stainless steel adhesive anchors. 5. All reinforcing bars shall be located by the Electrical Subcontractor with the use of a rebar locator prior to installing adhesive capsule type anchors. Mark the location of all reinforcing bars in an area bounded by a line drawn at least 18-inch from the edge of the support bearing/weld plates on all four sides of the bearing/weld plates prior to fabricating and installing bearing/weld plates. 6. Where interference occurs, adjust anchor locations to clear reinforcing bars and alter support configuration at no additional cost to the Authority. FF. Miscellaneous steel for the support of fixtures, boxes, transformers, starters, contactors, panels, and conduit shall be furnished and installed. Channel supports shall be ground smooth and fitted with plastic end caps. GG. Steel channels, flat iron, and channel iron shall be furnished and installed for the support of all electrical equipment and devices, where required, including all anchors, inserts, bolts, nuts, washers, etc., for a rigid installation. Channel supports shall be ground smooth and fitted with plastic end caps. HH. Provide sway braces for cable trays and busducts. Sway braces shall be U-channel supports installed at a 45-degree angle from the tray or busduct and anchored to the concrete ceiling structure or structural support system. Braces shall be provided on 20-ft. spacing centers. Alternate the direction of the bracing supports. II. Conduits terminating at a cable tray or busduct shall be supported independently from the busduct or cable tray. Provide a conduit support within 1-ft. of the cable tray or busduct. The weight of the conduit shall not bear on the cable tray or busduct. JJ. All conduits on exposed work, within partitions, and above suspended ceilings shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding wall and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. All conduits shall be run perfectly straight and true. 104-1901 16110-19 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS • KK. Where conduits pass through openings in walls or floor slabs, the remaining openings shall be sealed against the passage of flame and smoke in accordance with UL requirements and the details shown on the Drawings. The sealing method shall have a UL fire rating which equals or exceeds the fire rating of the wall or floor construction. LL. Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, access hatches, or vent duct openings. They shall be routed to avoid such present or future openings in floor or ceiling construction. MM. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces, cold air plenums, etc., shall be sealed with "Duxseal" as manufactured by Manville or seal fitting to prevent the accumulation of condensation. NN. Conduits shall be located a minimum of 3-inch from steam or hot water piping. Where crossings are unavoidable, the conduit shall be kept at least 1-inch from the covering of the pipe crossed. 00. Mandrels shall be pulled through all existing conduits which will be reused and through all new conduits 2-inch in diameter and larger prior to installing conductors. PP. 3/16-inch polypropylene pull lines shall be installed in all new conduits noted as spares or designated for future equipment. Conduit noted as spare shall be capped or plugged at both ends with easily removable fittings. QQ. Emergency (generator) source and normal (power company) source feeders shall not be run through the same pull box. RR. Where no type or size is indicated for junction boxes, pull boxes, or terminal cabinets, they shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 314. Enclosure type and material shall be as specified herein. SS. Pull or junction boxes shall be furnished and installed where shown on the Drawings, in every 200 feet of straight conduit runs, or in runs where more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends occur or at any point necessary for wire pulling and splicing. Splices shall not be made in pulling elbows. TT. A conduit identification plate shall be installed on all power, instrumentation, alarm and control conduits at each end of the run and at intermediate junction boxes, manholes, etc. Conduit plates shall be installed before conductors are pulled into the conduits. Exact identification plate location shall be coordinated with the Engineer at the time of installation to provide uniformity of placement and ease of reading. When a master conduit numbering system is used, the conduit tag numbers shall be exactly as shown on the drawings, if a master conduit numbering system is not used the conduit identification tags shall provide detailed "to" and "from" information. UU. Place inner duct in the conduit and allow to rest in place for a minimum of 72 hours prior to cutting each end to length. W. Place the correct number of maximum sized inner ducts for the conduit with 104-1901 16110-20 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland RACEWAYS, BOXES, Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS minimum 1/8-inch clearance. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16110-21 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish, install, and test all wire, cable, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Install data highway fiber optic, coaxial, and I/O cables furnished under Division 13. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Conduits are included in Section 16110. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 411P' A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, samples of proposed wire. Each sample shall have the size, type of insulation, and voltage stenciled on the jacket. B. Approved samples will be sent to the project location for comparison by the Resident Engineer with the wire actually installed. C. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Carefully handle all conductors to avoid kinks and damage to insulation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant the cable against defects for a period of one year from date of installation and shall remove and replace defective cables at his own expense during this warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Wires and cables shall be of annealed, 98 percent conductivity, soft drawn tinned copper. B. All conductors shall be stranded. Use lugs on receptacles. 104-1901 16120-1 Gupta & Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) C. Except for control, signal, and instrumentation circuits, wire smaller than No. 12 AWG shall not be used. D. Wire shall have 600 Volt insulation except where indicated otherwise. E. Conductors installed in plenums shall be marked PLENUM RATED. F. All wire of a given type shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2.2 BUILDING WIRE A. Wire for lighting, receptacles, and other circuits not exceeding 150 Volts to ground shall be NEC type THHN/THWN as manufactured by General Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp., Southwire Co., or equal. B. Wire for circuits over 150 Volts to ground within buildings and structures shall be NEC type XHHW-2 as manufactured by General Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp., Southwire Co., or equal. C. Wire for circuits over 150 Volts to ground used underground or for service entrance shall be NEC type RHH-RHW-2/USE-2, flame retardant, and CT rated per IEEE 1202 as manufactured by The Okonite Co., General Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp., or equal. D. Wire for direct burial outdoor lighting circuits shall be NEC type RHH-RHW-2/USE-2 as manufactured by The Okonite Co., General Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp., or equal. The RHH-RHW-2 or USE-2, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger shall be marked "sunlight resistant for use in cable tray". Cable shall meet all requirements of ICEA S- 95-658, NEMA WC-70, UL 44, UL 854, and UL 1581 (for use in cable tray). E. Bare copper ground wire shall be stranded, annealed copper wire ASTM-B3. F. Multi-conductor power cables shall have stranded conductors with type THHN/THWN insulated, nylon conductor covering, and an overall PVC jacket covering over the individual wires. The number of conductors shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Cable shall be TC rated meeting UL 1277 and IEEE 383 Standards. Cable shall be flame-resistant, non-propagating and shall be suitable for installation in a Class I, Division II hazardous location and for direct burial in earth. Multi-conductor power cables, sizes #12 AWG and larger, shall be furnished with a green ground conductor and a white neutral conductor where required to serve phase to neutral loads. Cable shall be as manufactured by The Okonite Co., Southwire Co., General Cable Co., or equal. G. Aluminum sheath cable shall have multi-conductor copper conductors rated 90 degrees C for use in wet or dry locations, cable tray, embedded in concrete, areas subjected to corrosive atmospheres, or direct burial applications. Insulation shall be listed UL Type XHHW-2. Sheath shall be close fitting, impervious, continuous, welded, corrugated aluminum per UL 1569. Cable shall be as manufactured by The Okonite Co., General Cable, Southwire Co., or equal. 104-1901 16120-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) H. Equipment grounding conductors shall be NEC Type THW green and sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-122. Ground grid conductors shall be insulated unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2.3 CONTROL, STATUS, AND ALARM WIRE A. Wire shall be No. 14 AWG NEC type THHN/THWN, stranded as manufactured by The Okonite Co., General Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp., Southwire Co., or equal. B. Multi-conductor control cable, where shown on the Drawings, shall be stranded, No. 14 AWG, 600 Volt, polyvinyl chloride insulated, nylon jacket over insulation, polyvinyl chloride jacket overall, Type TC as manufactured by The Okonite Co., General Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp., or equal. The number of conductors shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2.4 INSTRUMENTATION WIRE A. Wire for process instrumentation signals (i.e., 1-5 VDC, 4-20 mADC), R.T.D., potentiometer and similar signals shall be tinned copper rated for use in wet location. 1. Single Pair Cable a. Conductors: 2 No. 16 stranded and twisted on 2-in. lay b. Insulation: PVC with 600 Volt, 105 degrees C rating c. Shield: 100 percent aluminum/polyester foil with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with UL Subject 13, UL 1581 and manufacturers' identification e. Miscellaneous: UL Listed as Instrument Tray Cable/Power Limited Tray Cable (PLTC) for use in accordance with Article 727 and Article 725 of the NEC. f. Manufacturers: Belden; Manhattan; General Cable; The Okonite Co.; or equal. 2. Three Conductor (Triad) Cable a. Conductors: 3 No. 16 stranded and twisted on 2-in. lay b. Insulation: PVC with 600 Volt, 105 degrees C rating c. Shield: 100 percent aluminum/polyester foil with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with UL Subject 13, UL 1581 and manufacturers' identification e. Miscellaneous: UL Listed as Instrument Tray Cable/Power Limited Tray Cable (PLTC) for use in accordance with Article 727 and Article 725 of the NEC. 104-1901 16120-3 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) f. Manufacturers: Belden; Manhattan; General Cable; The Okonite Co.; or equal. 3. Multiple Pair Cables (Where Shown on the Drawings) a. Conductor: Multiple 2 No. 22 stranded and twisted on a 2-in. lay. b. Insulation: PVC with 600 Volt, 105 degrees C rating. c. Shield: Individual pairs shielded with 100 percent mylar tape and drain wire. d. Jacket: PVC with UL Subject 13, UL 1581 manufacturers' identification. e. Miscellaneous: UL Subject 13, Type PLTC f. Manufacturers: Belden; Manhattan; General Cable; or equal. 2.5 SPLICES (POWER CONDUCTORS) A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, splices shall not be made in the cables without prior written approval of the Engineer. Where splicing is approved by the Engineer, splicing materials for all 600 Volt splices shall be made with long barrel, tin-plated copper compression (hydraulically pressed) connectors and insulated with heavy wall heat shrinkable tubing. The conductivity of all completed connections shall be not less than that of the uncut conductor. The insulation resistance of all completed connections of insulated conductors shall be not less than that of the uncut conductor. B. Wire lugs shall be tin-plated copper, long barrel compression type (hydraulically pressed) for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger. Lugs for No. 10 AWG and smaller wire shall be locking spade type with insulated sleeve. Lugs shall be as manufactured by the Thomas and Betts Co., Burndy, Amp, or equal. C. Compression type connectors shall be insulated with a heat shrink boot or outer covering and epoxy filling. Splice kits shall be as manufactured by Raychem (Tyco), Ideal Industries, 3M Co., or equal. D. Solderless pressure connectors shall be self-contained, waterproof, and corrosion-proof units incorporating prefilled silicone grease to block out moisture and air. Connectors shall be sized according to manufacturer's recommendations. The connectors shall be UL listed and CSA approved, as manufactured by King Innovation; Ideal Industries, Inc.; or equal. 2.6 MOTOR CONNECTIONS A. Motor connections shall be ring type mechanical compression terminations installed on the branch circuit wires and the motor leads and secured with bolt, nut, and springwasher. Connections shall be insulated with a Raychem Type RVC, roll-on stub insulator; Thomas & Betts, Shrink-Kon MSCV20; or equal. For wire sizes No. 8 and larger, long barrel, tin-plated copper compression (hydraulically pressed) type connections (Burndy Co., or equal) shall be installed on the branch circuit wires and the motor leads. 104-1901 16120-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) Connections shall be insulated with heavy duty heat shrinkable material tr (Raychem Corp., or equal). 2.7 TERMINATION AND SPLICES (CONTROL, STATUS, AND ALARM CONDUCTORS) A. Termination connectors shall be of the locking fork-end (upturned leg ends) type as manufactured by Ideal Industries, 3M Co., Panduit Corp., or equal. B. Insulated compression type connectors shall be of the expanded vinyl insulated parallel or pigtail type as manufactured by Ideal Industries, 3M Co., Panduit Corp., or equal. C. Solderless pressure connectors shall be self-contained, waterproof, and corrosion-proof units incorporating prefilled silicone grease to block out moisture and air. Connectors shall be sized according to manufacturer's recommendations. The connectors shall be UL listed and CSA approved, as manufactured by King Innovation; Ideal Industries, Inc.; or equal. D. Splicing of conductors shall not be allowed unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. 2.8 TERMINATIONS (INSTRUMENTATION CABLES) A. Termination connectors shall be of the locking fork-end (upturned leg ends)type as manufactured by Ideal Industries, 3M Co., Panduit Corp., or equal. 2.9 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Wire and cable markers shall be "Omni-Grip" as manufactured by the W.H. Brady Co.; Thomas & Betts Co., SMS; 3M Co., STD-TAG; or equal. B. Wire and cables with diameters exceeding the capacity of the "Omni-Grip" shall be marked with pre-printed, self-adhesive vinyl tapes as manufactured by the W.H. Brady Co., Panduit Corp., 3M Co., or equal. 2.10 DIRECT BURIED CABLE WARNING TAPE A. Tape shall be 6-inch-wide, red polyethylene not less than 0.0035-inch-thick. Tape shall be W.H. Brady Co., Catalog No. 91296; Harris Industries Inc., VT Series; Seton; or equal. 2.11 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with UL-approved expanding material which equals or exceeds the fire rating of the wall or floor construction such as "FLAME-SAFE" as manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Corp.; Pro Set Systems; Neer Mfg. Co.; Specified Technologies, Inc.; or equal. 2.12 TERMINAL CONNECTORS (FIBER OPTIC) 104-1901 16120-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) A. Terminal connectors shall be Type ST2 compatible design with ceramic ferrule and strain relief boot. The epoxy used to attach connectors to the individual fibers shall be a heat cure type featuring an accelerated cure cycle •.) and color change upon cure completion. Connector specifications shall be as follows: 1. Insertion loss (typical): 0.5 dB 2. Durability (mating cycles): 1,000(minimum) 3. Repeatability: Less than 0.2 dB 4. Operating Temperature: minus 40 to plus 80 degrees C PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 (NOT USED) 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Uniquely identify all wires, cables, and each conductor of multi-conductor cables (except lighting and receptacle wiring) at each end and in all manholes, handholes, and pull boxes with wire and cable markers. B. Use lubrications to facilitate wire pulling. Lubricants shall be UL approved for use with the insulation specified. C. Provide multi-conductor control and signal cables within the underground system. Cables shall be installed continuous from building to building without splices. Individual control conductors and twisted shielded pairs signal cables will not be allowed in underground systems. D. The crimping tools used in securing the conductor in the compression type connectors or terminal lugs shall be those made for that purpose and for the conductor sizes involved. The crimping tool shall be the ratchet type which prevents the tool from opening until the crimp action is completed. Such tools shall be a product of the connector manufacturer. E. Install an equipment grounding conductor in all raceways. F. Seal openings in slabs and walls through which wires and cables pass. G. Pull cables from the direction that requires the least tension. Use a feed-in tube and sheave designed for cable installation. Use sheaves with radii that exceed the cable manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radius. Use a dynamometer and constant velocity power puller. Velocity should not be less than 15-ft./min. or more than 50-ft./min. Do not exceed the cable manufacturer's maximum recommended tension. H. If cable cannot be terminated immediately after installation, install heat- shrinkable end caps. I. Fireproof exposed cables in manholes, vaults, pullboxes, switchgear, and other areas not protected by conduit where medium voltage cables are present. Use fire-proofing tape and glass tape in accordance with the 104-1901 16120-6 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) manufacturer's instructions. Fire-proofing tape shall be installed with one half- Car lapped layer of Scotch Brand 77 Electric Arc and Fireproofing Tape (3M Corp., or equal). Tape shall be secured with a two-layer band of Scotch Brand 69 Glass Electrical Tape (3M Corp., or equal) over the last wrap. J. Fiber Optic Cables 1. Provide all material, equipment, and labor to install the fiber optic cables indicated and as specified herein. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC. 3. Install cables in the raceway systems as indicated. Inspect raceways prior to pulling in the cables. Notify the Engineer of any conditions which would prevent installation of the specified cables before proceeding with the installation. 4. Lubricate cables with lubricants specially formulated for fiber cabling jackets during installation. Do not exceed cable manufacturers' specifications for tensile strength and bending radius. Pulleys used to aid in the installation of the fiber optic cable must be sized according to the minimum bending radius. The pulling tension of all fiber cables during installation shall be recorded using a strip recorder. The printout of the strip recorder shall be submitted to the Engineer. ® 5. Splices shall be made in designated enclosures above ground only. Provide adequate put- up lengths on cable reels to make termination-to- termination runs without splices. Where splices are indicated, provide mechanical splices with attenuation losses of 0.3 dB or less. Make splices watertight and provide mechanical protection equal to the cable jacket. 6. Support cables in riser conduits at intervals as required by the NEC. 7. Installation tools and materials shall be approved by the cable manufacturer. 8. The polishing process of terminal connectors shall be a two-stage wet process using 3.0 micron lapping film for an initial polish followed by 0.3 micron lapping film for the final polish. 9. Label each termination point. 10. Tag each cable in junction boxes, manholes, and handholes. Provide permanent nylon/plastic tie-wrap type tags with waterproof markings. 11. Make the following field tests after cable installation: a. Visually inspect terminal connectors for out-of-round conditions and surface defects such as micro-chips and cracks using a 100X (610 (minimum) inspection microscope. b. Check optical continuity of each fiber from terminal to terminal. c. Verify the calculated attenuation power losses of each fiber from the transmit and receive terminals at the source of each data communications loop. The light source and operating wavelength 104-1901 16120-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) of the test equipment shall be representative of the actual operating equipment. 3.3 WIRE COLOR CODE A. All wire shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes where colored insulation is not available. Where tape is used as the identification system, it shall be applied in all junction boxes, manholes, and other accessible intermediate locations as well as at each termination. B. The following coding shall be used: Syste Wire Color 240/120 Volts Neutral White Single-Phase, 3 Wire Line 1 Black Line 2 Red 208Y/120, Volts Neutral White 3 Phase, 4_Wire Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue 240/120 Volts Neutral White 3 Phase, 4 Wire Phase A Black delta, center tap Phase B (High) Orange ground on phase Phase C Blue coil A-C 480Y/277 Volts Neutral White 3 Phase, 4 Wire Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow C. Neutral or ground wires that terminate in a Panelboard and require color tape shall have the color tape extend at least 6-in. from the termination point. 3.4 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES A. Power conductors: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, no splices may be made in the cables without prior written approval of the Engineer. Where splicing is approved, terminations shall be die type or set screw type pressure connectors as specified. Splices (where allowed) shall be die type compression connector and waterproof with heat shrink boot or epoxy filling for copper conductors # 4 AWG and larger. Splices shall be solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductors # 6 AWG and smaller. Aluminum conductors (where specified) shall employ terminations and splices specifically designed for aluminum conductors. B. Control Conductors: Termination on saddle-type terminals shall be wired directly with a maximum of two conductors. Termination on screw type terminals shall be made with a maximum of two spade connectors. Splices (where allowed by written permission) shall be made with 104-1901 16120-8 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) insulated compression type connectors. C. Instrumentation Signal Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low and high level signals): terminations same as for control conductors. Splices allowed at instrumentation terminal boxes only. D. Except where permitted by the Engineer, no splices will be allowed in manholes, handholes, or other below-grade located boxes. E. Splices shall not be made in push button control stations, control devices (i.e., pressure switches, flow switches, etc.), conduit bodies, etc. 3.5 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES A. Instrumentation cables shall be installed in raceways as specified. All circuits shall be installed as twisted pairs or triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are required. B. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junction and all circuits shall be identified at such junctions. C. Shielded instrumentation wire, coaxial, data highway, I/O and fiber optic cables shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or fir panels. D. Ground shielding on instrumentation wires at one end only as recommended by the instrument manufacturer and isolated at all other locations. Terminal blocks shall be provided for inter- connecting shield drain wires at all junction boxes. Where individual circuit shielding is required, each shield circuit shall be provided with its own block. E. Install shielded instrumentation wire in conduit and pull boxes that contain only shielded instrumentation wire. Instrumentation cables shall be separated from all other (i.e., power, control, etc.) cables in manholes by enclosing them within rigid steel raceways and boxes. F. Shielded cable terminations at each end shall be provided with heat shrinkable tubing placed over the exposed shield and conductors. The tubing shall extend 1-in. minimum over the jacket end and extend 0.5-in. minimum from the jacket end over the exposed conductors. 3.6 FIELD TESTING A. Test all 600 Volt wire insulation with a Megohm meter after installation and prior to termination. Make tests at not less than 1000 Volts DC. Test duration shall be one minute. Submit a written test report of the results to the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing 48 hours prior to testing. Lir B. Field testing and commissioning shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of the "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems" published by the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA Standards) unless otherwise modified by this 104-1901 16120-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland WIRES AND CABLES Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) Section. Minimum wire insulation resistance shall not be less than 250 Megohms. END OF SECTION 3 104-1901 16120-10 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement WIRING DEVICES C SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and install wiring devices as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide all interconnecting conduit and branch circuit wiring for receptacle circuits in accordance with the NEC. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Outlet boxes are included in Section 16110. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 46, A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Sections 16000 and 01350. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Wiring devices shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) and shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL)labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wall switches shall be heavy duty, specification grade, toggle action, flush mounting quiet type. All switches shall conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification WS 896. Wall switches shall be suitable for the area classification indicated on the drawings and shall be of the following types and manufacturer: 1. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices- Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 2. Double pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt- Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices- Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 3. Three way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Cooper Wiring Devices, Hubbell Wiring (12. Devices- Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 104-1901 16141-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. 4 City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement WIRING DEVICES 4. Four way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices- Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 5. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt- key operated, Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 6. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120 Volt- red pilot-lighted handle, Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 7. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120 Volt, clear lighted handle, Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 8. Momentary contact, three position, 2 circuit, center off- Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. B. Fluorescent wall box dimmer switch for 120/277 Volt control of rapid start fluorescent lamps with a dimming range of 100 percent to 0.5 percent light for 120 Volt and 100 to 1 percent light for 277 Volt shall be compatible with dimming ballast. Dimmer switch controls shall be as manufactured by Lutron Electronics Inc.; Lithonia Lighting; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. C. Explosion-proof single pole factory sealed switches shall be for 20 Amps, 120/277 volts, mounted in copper free aluminum or malleable iron cast boxes and be similar and equal to Crouse-Hinds EDS Series, Appleton Electric Co. EDS; Hubbell HBL; or equal. D. Receptacles shall be heavy duty, specification grade of the following types and manufacturer or equal. Receptacles shall conform to Fed Spec WC596-F. 1. Duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 2. Weatherproof/corrosion-resistant single, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, with cover; Crouse-Hinds Co., Catalog No. WLRS-5-20; Appleton Electric FSKJ520; Pass & Seymour; or equal. 3. Corrosion-resistant duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2-pole, 3-wire, high visibility yellow nylon face, nickel-plated brass or copper alloy power contacts, Cooper-Arrow/Hart Catalog No. 5362CRY; Hubbell Catalog No. HBL53CM62; Bryant-Electric Catalog No. BRY5362CR; or equal. 4. Weather and tamper-resistant ground fault interrupter, duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2-pole, 3-wire, gray nylon face, Cooper Wiring Devices Catalog No. TWRVG2OGY; Hubbell Catalog No. GFTR2OGY; Bryant-Electric Catalog No. GFTR2OGY; or equal. 5. Ground fault interrupter, duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, GFCI feed-thru type with "test" and "reset" buttons. Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 104-1901 16141-2 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement WIRING DEVICES 4100 6. Duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, transient voltage surge suppressor and audio alarm or indicating light to indicate bad ground or failed MOV. Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 7. Clock hanger single, 15 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, with hanging hook on device plate. Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 8. Single, "power lock", 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 9. Single, 20 Amp, 250 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices-Kellems; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 10. Single twist-lock, 30 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices; Arrow Hart, Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 11. Single twist-lock with matching plug, 20 Amp, 250 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper Wiring Devices; Hubbell Wiring Devices; Arrow Hart, Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 4110 12. Single twist-lock with matching plug, 30 Amp, 250 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Arrow- Hart, or similar by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc.; or equal. 13. Explosion-proof and factory sealed Class 1, Divisions 1&2, Groups C&D; wet location rated; delayed action; minimum 115—230Vac; 2-wire; 3-pole; angle receptacle with spring cover and cast or malleable iron back box; matching plug: a. Single gang (singlex): Cooper Crouse-Hinds CPS152-xx1 (receptacle); CPP516 (plug); Appleton Electric; Hubbell-Killark; or equal. b. Two gang (duplex): Cooper Crouse-Hinds CPS152-xx2 (receptacle); two (2) CPP516 (plugs); Appleton Electric; Hubbell-Killark; or equal. 14. Explosion-proof and factory sealed Class 1, Divisions 1&2, Groups C&D; wet location rated; interlocked circuit breaking; minimum 125— 250Vac; 2-wire; 3- pole; angle receptacle with spring cover and cast or malleable iron back box (receptacle shall NOT accept non-explosion proof standard NEMA configuration plugs); matching plug (plug shall fit any non-explosion proof receptacle (NEMA 5-20R,6-20R)). a. Single gang (singlex): Cooper Crouse-Hinds ENRxx1201 (receptacle); ENP5201 (plug); Appleton Electric; Hubbell-Killark; or equal. b. Two gang (duplex): Cooper Crouse-Hinds ENRxx2201 (receptacle); two (2) ENP5201 (plugs); Appleton Electric; Hubbell-Killark; or equal. E. Device Plates 104-1901 16141-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement WIRING DEVICES 1. Plates for indoor flush-mounted devices shall be of the required number of .1) gangs for the application involved and shall be as follows: a. Administration type buildings: Smooth, high impact nylon of the same manufacturer and color as the device. Final color shall be as selected by the Engineer. b. Where permitted in other areas of the plant, flush-mounted devices in cement block construction shall be Type 302 high nickel (18-8) stainless steel of the same manufacturer as the devices. 2. Plates for indoor surface-mounted device boxes shall be cast metal of the same material as the box, Crouse-Hinds No. DS23G and DS32G; Appleton FSK1 DRC, FSK1TSEC; Pass & Seymour; or equal. 3. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard plates do not fully cover the wall opening. 4. Device plates for switches mounted outdoors or indicated as weatherproof shall be gasketed, cast aluminum with provisions for padlocking switches "On" and "Off', Crouse Hinds No. DS185; Appleton FSK1VS; Pass & Seymour; or equal. 5. Multiple surface-mounted devices shall be ganged in a single, common box and provided with an adapter, if necessary, to allow mounting of single gang device plates on multi-gang cast boxes. 6. Engraved device plates shall be provided where required. 7. Weatherproof, gasketed cover for GFI receptacle mounted in a FS/FD box shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds; RACO (Hubbell); Pass & Seymour, Inc., or equal. 8. Weatherproof non-metallic 'Not Attended/While-In-Use' cover, UV& corrosion resistant polycarbonate back & cover, deep cover, gasketed, horizontal or vertical mounting as required, single or double gang as required, lockable hasp, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts (Red Dot); Cooper Wiring Devices (Arrow Hart); Carlon; or equal. 9. Weatherproof metallic 'Not Attended/While-In-Use' cover, UV & powder die-cast metal construction, minimum 3-1/2-inch deep cover, gasketed, horizontal or vertical mounting as required, single or double gang as required, lockable hasp, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts (Red Dot); TayMac; Orbit Electric; or equal. 10. Weatherproof(with plug NOT inserted) cover, lift-lid, single or double gang as required, corrosion resistant die-cast construction, self-closing stainless steel spring doors, screw attach to FS, FD or other device boxes, EPDM gasket on base of cover(not in lid) surrounding receptacle providing protection while plug is installed, as manufactured by Cooper Crouse-Hinds WLRS (or WLRD), Appleton FSK-WR1 (or—WRD); Arrow-Hart; or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 104-1901 16141-4 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement WIRING DEVICES 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Switch and receptacles outlets shall be installed flush with the finished wall surfaces in areas with stud frame and gypsum board construction, in dry areas with cement block construction or when raceways are shown as concealed on the Drawings. B. Do not install flush-mounted devices in areas designated DAMP, WET, or WET/CORROSIVE on the Drawings. Provide surface-mounted devices in these areas. C. Where individual ground fault interrupter type receptacles are shown on the Drawings connected to the same circuit, the Contractor shall provide all ground fault interrupter type receptacles. Use of one ground fault interrupter type receptacle to protect downstream conventional receptacles is unacceptable. D. Provide corrosion-resistant receptacles and 'While-In-Use' weatherproof covers in areas designated CORROSIVE on the Drawings. E. Convenience outlets shall be 18-inch above the floor unless otherwise required or shown on the Drawings. F. Convenience outlets installed in rooms designated as WET or where equipment may be hosed down shall be mounted minimum 48-inch above deck or grade (or as 4110 shown on the Drawings) and shall be weather and tamper-resistant, ground fault circuit interrupter type, installed within a 'While-In-Use' weatherproof cover. G. Convenience outlets mounted outdoors shall be mounted minimum 48-inch above deck or grade (or as shown on the Drawings)and shall be weather and tamper- resistant, ground fault circuit interrupter type, installed within a 'While-In-Use' weatherproof cover. H. Switches and dimmer controls for lighting shall be mounted 48-inch above the finished floor unless otherwise noted or required. I. The location of all devices is shown, in general, on the Drawings and may be varied within reasonable limits so as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without extra cost, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Coordinate the installation of the devices for piping and equipment clearance. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16141-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement WIRING DEVICES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 16141-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement DISCONNECT SWITCHES • Section 16165 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specifications for disconnect switches including: 1. Fusible disconnect switches 2. Non-fusible disconnect switches 3. Circuit breaker type disconnect switches 4. Fuses 5. Circuit breakers 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA) • 1. NEMA AB1: Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. NEMA KS1: Enclosed Switches B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. UL 98: Standard for safety enclosed switches and Dead Front Switches 2. UL 198C: High Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting type 3. UL 198E: Class R Fuses C. Current edition of American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA), NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Chapter 4. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of Section 01330 —Submittal Procedures: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Switch internal arrangement • 3. Breaker or fuse characteristic curves 104-1901 16165-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement DISCONNECT SWITCHES 4. Instructions for handling and storage 5. Installation instructions 6. Dimensions and weights 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Have disconnect switches packed and crated to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers: 1. Eaton — Cutler Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens Energy and Automation 4. Schneider Electric B. Fuses 1. Eaton - Bussman Division, Eaton/ Cooper Industries 2. Ferraz Shawmut Fuses 3. Littlefuse Incorporated 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Disconnect Switches 1. Characteristics: Horsepower rated, 600-volt, heavy-duty type with an interlocked door, positive quick-make, quick-break mechanism and visible blades. 2. Use switches and components designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA AB1, NEMA KS1, UL 98, and NEC Chapter 4. 3. Enclose switch in a NEMA 12 type enclosure for indoor, air-conditioned applications and NEMA 4X (type 316 stainless steel) in outdoor locations, non-air-conditioned areas, or other wet or corrosive areas. 104-1901 16165-2 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement DISCONNECT SWITCHES • 4. Provide switches with provisions for padlocking the operating lever in OFF position and door in closed position. 5. Select switches having the number of poles and general size conforming to the Drawings. 6. Conform to fusible, non-fusible or circuit breaker type switch requirements as shown on Drawings and required by the NEC, or one-line diagrams. 7. Provide an auxiliary contact, shown on the Drawings. 8. Select fuses or circuit breakers with current interrupting duty as calculated for the points of switch application or as indicated on the Drawings or one-line diagrams. B. Fuses. Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, for fuses used in disconnect switches, provide the dual-element, time-delay type with the maximum interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes, conforming to the NEC. C. Circuit Breakers. When circuit breakers are used in disconnect switches, provide the thermal-magnetic type with current interruption ratings as required at the point of application. D. Conduit Connectors: Watertight as manufactured by Myers Hubs, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Review the Drawings and verify that the disconnect switches are correct for the applications. B. Make sure that the correct fuses or breakers are being used regarding size and short circuit interrupting capability. C. Prepare adhesive labels on the inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size or breaker type and size for replacement. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the disconnect switches in accordance with and NEC Chapter 4. Disconnect switches shall be mounted in sight of or within 25' of motors and rotating equipment. B. Mount switches 6'-6" (to top of cabinet) above finished floor or grade. C. In wet and corrosive areas, including outdoor locations, install switches on spacers to provide a space of approximate 1/4-inch between the back of cabinet and the mounting surface. 104-1901 16165-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pea rland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement DISCONNECT SWITCHES D. In wet and corrosive areas, including outdoor locations, connect conduit to the bottom of enclosure and to the lower 30 percent of the sides using watertight connectors. E. Disconnect shall be labeled as required in Section 16195. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16165-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Cv SECTION 16191 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous equipment as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 EQUIPMENT LIST A. This Section provides the requirements for miscellaneous equipment typically employed in a facility; however, not all components specified in this Section are necessarily utilized on this project. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 411 A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, detailed catalog information or drawings describing electrical and physical characteristics of all equipment specified in sufficient detail to show compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Equipment enclosures shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the location in which they are installed, as specified in Section 16000. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Disconnect Switches 1. Disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, visible blades, 600 Volt, three-pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange- mounted operating handle. All current carrying parts shall be copper 2. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel. 3. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 4. Switches shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co., General Electric, Eaton 41110 Electrical, or equal. 104-1901 16191-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 5. Disconnect switches installed in hazardous classified locations (class I division 1 or class I division 2) shall have NEMA 7 enclosure. 6. All disconnect switches provided for the HVAC equipment shall be fused, regardless of how they are shown on the electrical drawings. The fused disconnect switches shall meet the requirements specified herein below and the fuse setting shall be as recommended by the HVAC equipment manufacturer. B. Fused Disconnect Switches 1. Fused disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, visible blades, 600 Volt, three-pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange-mounted operating handle. All current carrying parts shall be copper. 2. Fuses shall be rejection type, 600 Volts, 200,000 A.I.C., dual element, time delay, Bussman Fusetron, Class RK-5, or equal. 3. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel. 4. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 5. Switches shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co., General Electric, Eaton Electrical, or equal. 6. Fused disconnect switches installed in hazardous classified locations (class I division 1 or class I division 2) shall have NEMA 7 enclosure. C. Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Motor starters shall be 2 or 3 Pole, single or 3 Phase as required, 60 Hz, 600 Volt, magnetically operated, full voltage non-reversing except as shown on the Drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horsepowers shown on the Drawings. Minimum size shall be NEMA size 1. 2. Two speed starters shall be for single or two winding motors as shown on the Drawings. 3. Each motor starter shall have a 120 Volt operating coil, and control power transformer. Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts shown on the Drawings. 4. Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. 5. Control power transformers shall be sized for additional load where required. Transformer primaries and secondaries. Transformer shall have two primary fuses and one fuse in the ungrounded side of the secondary. 6. Built-in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown 104-1901 16191-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT on the Drawings. 7. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel. 8. NEMA Type 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 9. Magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co., General Electric, Eaton Electrical, or equal. D. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Motor starters shall be a combination motor circuit protector and contactor, 2 or 3 Pole, single or 3 Phase as required, 60 Hz, 600 Volt, magnetically operated, full voltage non- reversing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horsepowers shown on the Drawings. Minimum size shall be NEMA size 1. Motor circuit protectors shall be molded case with adjustable magnetic trip only. They shall be specifically designed for use with magnetic motor starters. Motor circuit protectors shall be current limiting type, with additional current limiters if required. Combination motor starters shall be fully rated for 65,000 Amps RMS symmetrical. 2. Multi-speed and reversing starters shall include two motor rated contactors mechanically and electrically interlocked so that only one device may be energized at anytime. 3. Each motor starter shall have a 120 Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Transformer primaries and secondaries. Transformer shall have two primary fuses and one fuse in the ungrounded side of the secondary. Three- phase starters shall have three overload relays. One normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact shall be provided as spares in addition to contacts shown on the Drawings. 4. Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. 5. Furnish built-in control stations and indicating lights where shown on the Drawings. 6. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel. 7. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 8. Combination magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co., General Electric, Eaton Electrical, or equal. E. Unit Heater Combination Contactors 1. Combination contactors shall be a fused switch and contactor, 600 Volt, three- pole, 60 Hz, magnetically operated. NEMA size shall be as required for the kilowatt ratings shown on the Drawings, but shall be not less than NEMA size 1. • 104-1901 16191-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 2. Contactors shall have a 120 Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Transformer shall have two primary fuses and one fuse in the ungrounded side of the secondary. Furnish the control power transformer with extra capacity for the unit heater fan. 3. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel. 4. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 5. Combination contactors shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co., General Electric, Eaton Electrical, or equal. F. Control Stations 1. Control stations shall be heavy-duty type, with full size (30mm) operators. Stop buttons shall have a lockout latch that can be padlocked in the open position. 2. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel. 3. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum. 4. Control stations shall be Square D Class 9001, similar by Eaton Electrical; General Electric Co.; or equal. G. General Purpose Dry Type Transformers 1. Transformers shall be dry type, two-winding with kVA and voltage ratings as shown on the Drawings. Transformer shall incorporate a 220 degree C insulation system and be designed not to exceed 115 degrees C temperature rise above a 40 degree C ambient full load 2. Four full capacity taps shall be furnished, two 2-1/2 percent above and two 2-1/2 percent below rated primary voltage. 3. Windings shall be copper. 4. Transformers shall be built in accordance with ANSI C89.2, and shall be UL listed and suitable for non-sinusoidal current loads with a K-factor of 4. 5. Transformers shall be energy efficient type, meeting the efficiency levels specified in NEMA Standard TP1-2002. Efficiency shall be tested in accordance with TP1-2002. 6. Transformers shall be furnished in NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or as required by Section 16000. Areas where a NEMA 4X and/or 316 stainless steel enclosure is required, the transformer shall be of the TENV type. 7. Transformers shall be furnished with hot-dipped galvanized mounting hardware. In NEMA 4X areas or where stainless steel enclosures are required, hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 104-1901 16191-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT (iPe 8. Transformers shall have common core construction with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. The core flux density shall be below the saturation point to prevent overheating caused by harmonic distortion. 9. Transformer impedance shall be a minimum of 3 percent and a maximum of 5 percent. 10. Provide vibration isolators for transformers rated 112.5 kVA and higher. 11. Provide ground lug on frame and strap ground core assembly to frame of enclosure. 12. The neutral bus shall be sized and configured for 200 percent of secondary full load current. 13. Transformers shall be manufactured by Square D Co.; General Electric Co.; Eaton Electrical, or equal. H. Surge Protective Devices(SPD) 1. SPDs shall be UL 1449, 3rd Edition listed. 2. Each protection device shall have a capacitive filtering system connected in each Line to Neutral (L-N)(Wye) mode or Line to Line (L-L)(Delta) mode to provide EMI/RFI noise attenuation. 3. Protection modes: The SPD shall provide Line to Neutral (L-N)(Wye), Line to Ground (L- G)(Wye or Delta), Line to Line (L-L)(Delta) and Neutral to Ground (N- G)(Wye) protection. 4. SPD shall contain a technology that utilizes multiple thermally protected metal oxide varistors (MOV) per mode. 5. All primary transient paths shall utilize copper wire, aluminum bus bar and lugs of equivalent capacity to provide equal impedance interconnection between phases. No plug- in module or components shall be used in surge carrying paths. 6. Service Entrance and MCC SPDs a. SPD shall be a multi-stage parallel protector. Refer to one-line diagram and panelboard schedule to confirm voltages. SPD's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200kA per phase (L-N plus L-G) and 200 kA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G). b. SPD shall be modular design with field replaceable modules per phase. Each protection module shall have a visual indicator that signifies that the protection circuitry is powered. The unit shall not be taken off line to verify integrity of system. Redundant status indicators shall be mounted on the front of the door that monitors the system protection circuitry. c. SPD shall be labeled as minimum Type 2. Every component of every mode, 104-1901 16191-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT including N-G, shall be protected by internal thermal protection. SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety overcurrent protection do not meet the intent of this specification. d. SPD shall provide the following monitoring features: dry contacts, digital surge counter and audible alarm with alarm disable switch. Equipment shall utilize a NEMA 12 enclosure. e. SPD shall be provided with an integral disconnect switch. f. SPDs shall be as manufactured by LEA International Inc. — PV Series, Current Technology - SL2 Series, Liebert — SI Series or equal. 7. Panelboard SPDs a. SPD shall be a multi-stage non-parallel protector. Please see one-line diagram and panelboard schedule to confirm voltages. SPD's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200 kA per phase (L-N plus L-) and 200 kA per mode (L-N, L-G, L-L and N-G). b. SPD shall be non-modular design. SPD shall provide the following monitoring features: dry contacts and audible alarm. SPD shall utilize a NEMA 1 enclosure or better. c. SPDs shall be as manufactured by LEA International Inc. — SP Series, Current Technology — CGP Series, Liebert ACV-III Series, or equal. I. Wireway 1. NEMA 1 wireway shall be painted steel with screw covers. 2. NEMA 4 and 4X wireway shall be 316 stainless steel with gasketed screw covers and stainless steel screws. 3. NEMA 1 wireway shall be Square-Duct as manufactured by the Square D Co.; NEMA 4 and 4X shall be Bulletin F-22 as manufactured by the Hoffman Engineering Co.; Appleton; Killark, or equal. J. Control Relays 1. Control relays shall be heavy duty machine tool type, with 10 Amp, 300 Volt convertible contacts. Number of contacts and coil voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. General use relays shall be General Electric Co., Catalog No. CR120B; similar by Square D Co.; Allen-Bradley Co., or equal. Latching relays shall be General Electric Co., Catalog No. CR120BL; similar by Square D Co.; Allen-Bradley Co., or equal. 2. Time delay relays shall be pneumatic, 600 Volt, 20 Amp contacts, with calibrated knob operated adjustment. On delay and off delay types and timing ranges shall be as shown on the Drawings. Relays shall be Agastat Model 7012 or 7022; 104-1901 16191-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 4100 similar by Square D Co., Eaton Electrical, or equal. K. Detectable Warning Tape 1. Each ductbank section shall be marked by means of a detectable warning tape (tracer tape) as shown on the Drawings. The detectable warning tape shall be capable of being detected or located by either conductive or inductive location techniques. 2. The detectable warning tape shall consist of 5 mil (.005-in.) overall thickness; five- ply composition; ultra-high molecular weight; virgin polyethylene; acid; alkaline and corrosion resistant; with 150 pounds of tensile break strength minimum per 6-in width. 3. The top side of the tracer tape shall be color banded red for electrical and high voltage lines, and orange for signal, communication, telephone and fire alarm lines. Tracer tape shall be 4-in wide with four color bands. The tape shall be inscribed with the warning message for the utility such as "CAUTION — ELECTRICAL LINED BURIED BELOW". Tape shall be as manufactured by Mutual Industries, Inc.; Terra Tape, Div. of Reef Industries Inc.; or equal. L. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminal blocks shall be NEMA type rated at 20 amperes minimum, 600 Volt, • channel mounted, with tubular screw and pressure plate. 2. Terminal blocks shall be Bulletin 1492 as manufactured by the Allen-Bradley Co., ABB, Kukla, or equal. M. Intrinsically Safe Relays 1. Intrinsically safe relays shall be solid state type with 5 Amp output contacts, suitable for use on a 120 Volt, 60 Hz power supply and shall be FM approved for pilot devices in Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous atmospheres. 2. Intrinsically safe relays shall be Gems Solid State Safe-Pak as manufactured by Gems Sensors, Division of Transamerica Delaval, Inc.; R. Stahl, Inc.; MTL Inc.; or equal N. Heat Tracing (if Shown on the Drawings) 1. Heat trace tape shall be temperature self-limiting type rated 5 watts per foot at 50 degrees F, 120 Volt, 60 Hz and shall be Raychem, Catalog No. 5BTV1-CT with tinned copper overbraid and fluoropolymer outer jacket; Nelson; Chromalox; or equal. 2. Ambient air temperature sensing thermostat shall be adjustable from 15 to 150 degrees F, mounted in NEMA 4X enclosure, and shall be Chemelex, Catalog No. AMC-1A; Nelson; Chromalox, or equal. 3. Aluminum heat transfer tape shall be 2 mil thickness, 2-1/2-inch wide and 104-1901 16191-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT shall be Chemelex, Catalog No. AT-150; Nelson; Chromalox; or equal. O. Photocells 1. The photocells shall be suitable for power duty with individual fixtures or for pilot duty with contactors as detailed on the Drawings. Enclosure shall be NEMA 3R or 4. Contacts shall be rated for 2,000 watts continuous at 120 Volts. The unit shall turn on at 1.5 footcandles and off at 5.5 footcandles. 2. Photocells shall be Tork, Model 2101; Intermatic; Paragon; or equal. P. Corrosion Inhibitors 1. All equipment enclosures, terminal boxes, etc., located in a corrosive rated area (where shown on the Drawings)that contains electrical or electronic equipment or terminal strips shall be furnished with an internally mounted, chemically treated corrosion inhibitor pad. 2. The corrosion inhibitor pads shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co., 3M, AGM Container Controls, or equal. Q. Equipment Identification Nameplates 1. All field-mounted electrical equipment such as disconnects, push button stations, etc., shall be provided with a weather resistant engraved laminoid equipment identification nameplate screwed or bolted adjacent to the device. Nameplate shall identify the mechanical equipment controlled exactly as shown on the electrical single-line drawings (i.e., P-95 Cooling Water Pump No. 1). R. Equipment Mounting Stands 1. Equipment mounting stands shall be custom fabricated from 1/4-in. steel plate and 4-in. steel channel, as shown on the Drawings. For NEMA 4X areas or where stainless steel enclosures are required mounting stands and channels shall be Type 316 stainless steel. S. Lighting Contactor 1. Lighting contactor shall be of the electrically operated, mechanically held type mounted in NEMA 1, enclosures (except where noted otherwise on the Drawings) with number of poles as noted on the Drawings. Operating coils shall be rated for 120 Volts unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and shall be for momentary operation. Provide with "Hand Off-Auto" switch on cover where shown on the Drawings. 2. Contactors shall be rated for 20 Amps, 600 VAC and shall be Automatic Switch Co., Bulletin 917 RC, similar by Square D Co.; Eaton Electrical, or equal. T. Beacon Alarm Light 104-1901 16191-8 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 4111, 1. Beacon alarm light for building exterior mounting shall be flush mounted, weatherproof construction and have a 750,000 candlepower xenon strobe tube and red polycarbonate lens. Beacon alarm light shall be Federal Signal, Model 371 DST; similar by Edwards, Wheelock, or equal. U. Gas DetectionNentilation Failure (GD/VF) Alarm System 1. The GD/VF Alarm panel shall be an electronically operated, double supervised, control panel consisting of control unit, standby battery unit and charger, with a minimum of two zones of initiation. All components shall be new, manufacturer's current model, and UL Listed for fire alarm signaling use. Control unit shall be microprocessor based, 24 VDC, with alarm silence and trouble silence switches, SPD protection and ground fault detection. Control unit enclosure shall be surface mounted. A minimum of two 2-wire class B power limited initiating circuits/zones shall be provided. A minimum of two 2-wire class B power limited signaling circuits shall be provided; however, extra capacity shall be provided to accommodate the quantity and type of signaling devices shown on the Drawings. Alarm silence shall silence the signal horns, but the alarm strobes shall remain lit until the Reset switch is depressed. The panel shall be provided with status LEDs for: AC Power on, system alarm, and supervisory system trouble. Batteries shall be sized to provide 24 hours of supervision followed by 5 minutes of alarm, minimum. GD/VF Alarm Panel shall be Edwards Signaling Co. E-FSC Series Three Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel, Notifier Series SGL or equal. 2. Combination alarm horn/strobe units shall be installed in unclassified locations as shown on the Drawings. Unit shall be electronic, diode polarized type, rated 24 VDC for operation from the alarm panel supervised signal circuit, low current draw, high dB output, 75-110 candela strobe with amber or white lens, with gasketed, weatherproof back box. Unit shall be UL 1638 and UL 464 and the strobe and horn shall be operated independently. Unit shall be Edwards Signaling Co. Model 2452 THS with 2459-WPB back box; AMSECO Model SHB 24-75C, or equal. 3. Alarm indicating units installed in Hazardous locations shall be UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups C&D locations. Visual unit shall be 24 VDC, diode polarized type, bracket mounted rotating light, with blue glass dome and dome guard, Edwards Signaling Co. Model 116 DEXSTM-FJ Series or equal having a current draw of 0.9 Amps at 24 VDC or less. Horn unit shall be corrosion resistant, low current draw, heavy-duty, high decibel (95dBA), vibrating horn, Edwards Signaling Co. Model 889D-AW or equal having a current draw of 0.2 Amps at 24 VDC, diode polarized type. 4. Provide a red nameplate with 1/2-in high white letters indicating "GAS DETECTION/ VENTILATION FAILURE ALARM" for each horn/strobe unit. Nameplate shall be permanently secured to the wall directly beneath the horn/strobe unit with 316 stainless steel fasteners. The nameplates for the alarm signaling devices shall read as follows based on the initiating device: Cor Initiating Device Nameplate 104-1901 16191-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Combustible Gas Detector COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTION ALARM Continuous Ventilation System CONTINUOUS VENTILATION Flow Switch SYSTEM FAILURE ALARM Both Combustible Gas Detector COMBUSTIBLE GAS & Continuous Ventilation System DETECTION/ CONTINUOUS Flow Switch VENTILATION SYSTEM FAILURE 5. Non-audible dual light signaling units shall be located where indicated on the drawings. Each dual light signaling unit shall consist of one "green" LED type light fixture and one "red" LED type light fixture. The green lamp shall be illuminated when its respective combustible gas detector or ventilation failure alarm system is not in alarm. The red lamp shall be illuminated when its respective combustible gas detector or ventilation failure alarm system is in alarm. Visual units shall be 24 Volt DC, bracket-mounted Steady-On LED type, with red/ green lens with lens guard, Edwards Signaling Co. Model 103 Series LED multi-status indicator or equal having a current draw of 0.062 amperes or less at 24 VDC. In addition to providing the nameplate indicated above below the two fixtures; provide a red nameplate with 1/2-inch-high white letters below each lamp. The nameplate below the GREEN lamp shall read "Go" and the nameplate below the RED lamp shall read "NO GO". The nameplates shall be permanently secured to the wall, with 316 stainless steel fasteners, directly beneath the visual units but above the nameplate indicated specified in item 4 above. V. Terminal Cabinets 1. Each cabinet shall be furnished with a minimum of 50 spare terminals. 2. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with terminal blocks and insulating barriers. All 120 volt AC and DC terminal blocks shall be isolated from each other by insulating barriers or separate enclosures. Interiors shall be designed so that terminal blocks or control relays can be replaced or added without disturbing adjacent units. 3. All wiring within the cabinets shall be grouped together in harnesses and secured to the structure. 4. All shielded cables shall terminate in separate cabinets. A third terminal shall be provided for each twisted shield pair and the shield for each connected thereto, unless otherwise noted on manufacturer's shop drawings. 5. Terminal blocks shall be molded plastic, tubular screw type with pressure plates and shall be rated 600 Volts. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers. Terminal blocks shall be Allen Bradley, ABB, Kukla, or equal. 6. Boxes shall be made from 14 gauge galvanized steel and shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum of 6-inch of wiring space on all sides and between adjacent terminal blocks. A minimum of four mounting studs shall be provided on each cabinet. Cabinets shall be furnished without knockouts. Holes for 104-1901 16191-10 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT raceways shall be drilled on the job. 7. A single hinged door shall cover the front of each terminal cabinet. Doors shall have a neoprene gasket, vault type handle, three point hatch and lock. Two keys shall be supplied for each lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. A terminal block schedule shall be provided with each terminal point numbered and identified (typewritten) as to function. 8. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the cabinets shall be properly cleaned and finished with white over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating conforming to ANSI A55.1. The finish paint shall be of a type to which field-applied paint will adhere. 9. Cabinets shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Company, Hennessy Products, Lee, or equal; with latch kit hardware. 10. Boxes in wet, damp, corrosive, and all outdoor locations shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel. W. Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs 1. Provide field-affixed arc flash warning labels on all switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers in accordance with National Electrical Code Article 110.16. • 2. As a minimum, warning signs shall state "WARNING: Arc Flash and Shock Hazard, Appropriate PPE required", and shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998. Where available from the equipment manufacturer, additional information including Flash Hazard boundary, incident energy, voltage shock hazard, PPE required, etc. shall be provided. X. Electric Warning Sign 1. Provide and install using 316 stainless steel fasteners a total of 4 restrictive signs that conform with OSHA regulations for accident prevention. Size of sign: 10-inch- high by 14- inch-wide. Sign shall state "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE". Sign shall be constructed of High Performance Plastic(HPP) by the Seton Name Plate Corp., Global Equipment Co., World-wide Sign Co., or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Stands 1. Field-mounted disconnects, pushbutton control stations, alarm panels, enclosed starters and circuit breakers, transformers, automatic transfer switches, wireways, contactors, terminal boxes,junction and pull boxes shall be mounted on galvanized or stainless steel stands as specified. Where clearance requirements for stands may not be maintained, the Engineer may direct electric control equipment to be wall-mounted adjacent to the driven equipment, but in no case shall the distance from the drive motor to the control station exceed 3-ft., all at no 104-1901 16191-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT additional cost to the Owner. 2. All floor mounting stands, bracing, anchor bolts and appurtenances furnished to support equipment loads, dynamic loads, wind loads and seismic forces shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of the State Building Code in effect at the time of Bid. 3. All wall-mounted brackets, bracing, bolts and appurtenances to support equipment loads dynamic loads, wind loads and seismic forces shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of the State Building Code in effect at the time of Bid. 4. Channel supports shall be ground smooth and fitted with plastic end caps. B. All panelboards located in pedestal cabinets or outdoors and panelboards that have branch circuits feeding exterior to the building shall be equipped with lightning arresters and surge capacitors. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Before supplying power to the alarm panels, the following tests shall be done: Verify that all wiring connection interfaces that are required are present. Check for secure connections. Using a continuity device, verify that all discrete inputs and output to and from the control panel are wired in correct polarity and are operating in the correct state of operation (normally open or closed state). Check for any direct short circuits across all voltage supply sources. As each of the above tests are performed, the Electrical Contractor shall highlight and initial each circuit that is tested. This set of 'gm) prints shall be signed and left inside the enclosure. B. Check mechanical interlocks for intended operation. Make any adjustments required. C. In the event of an equipment fault in the panel, notify the Engineer immediately. After the cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor and Engineer. Repair or replace the equipment as directed by the Engineer prior to placing the equipment back into service, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16191-12 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16195 • ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specification for electrical identification including: 1. Nameplates and labels 2. Wire and cable markers 3. Conduit markers 4. Cable tray markers 5. Underground warning tape 6. Warning labels 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. UNIT PRICES ID1. This item will be measured and paid for as a lump sum for each lift station site. 2. Payment will be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and supervision for the demolition, cleanup and other related work necessary for construction as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 3. Refer to Section 01270— Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA) 1. No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) a) Article 110 - Requirements for Electrical Installation b) Article 430 - Transformers and Transformer Vaults B. City of Pearland Building Code C. Other applicable Codes and Standards as referenced in other Sections. IID. Underwriters Laboratories. U.L. Standards No. 224 - Extruded Insulated Tubing 105-1901 16195-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01330 Submittal Procedure: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and catalog data 2. Description of materials used 3. Label or nameplate dimensions 4. Engraving or imprint legends 5. Instruction for handling and storage 6. Installation instructions 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack materials to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Almetek Industries Incorporated B. Brady U.S.A. Incorporated C. Ideal Electric Company D. Raychem Corporation E. 3M Electrical Products Division F. Thomas & Bett G. Hellermann Tyton 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Nameplates and Labels 1. Provide an identification tag for each item of electrical and instrumentation equipment showing its item number and service or application. Use the description shown on the electrical Drawings. 2. For nameplates, use 3-ply phenolic material engraved to show black lettering on a white background. Size the nameplates approximately 1 inch wide and 3 inches long for 3 lines of 3/16 inch - 16 letters with a 0.8 condensed factor. 105-1901 16195-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION • 3. Generally, provide large pieces of equipment with engraved nameplates; provide additional nameplates at pushbuttons and other local devices; as detailed. Provide identification for all other electrical and instrumentation equipment, devices, or enclosures, such as MCC's, panelboards, disconnect switches, capacitors, relays, and dedicated receptacles not furnished with readily noticeable tag, nameplates, or other means of identification. Provide fault current nameplate per NEC requirements. 4. Install nameplates on the front cover of transformers stating the transformer service location number or identification number, the panelboard or device served, and main breaker feeding the transformer(MCC No. and compartment), and the drawing number on which the transformer schematic is shown. 5. Furnish equipment, such as motor starters, safety switches, welding receptacles and circuit breakers, with 1" x 3" plastic nameplates stating description of item served. 6. Provide nameplates for motors giving the driven equipment description, the service location number, and the MCC number with compartment number when applicable. Nameplates will normally be mounted adjacent to the motor at the motor pushbutton when one is furnished. 7. Install nameplates on the outside and inside of doors to circuit breaker • panelboards (i.e., lighting, instrument or receptacle panels). State the panelboard name, the drawing number on which the panelboard schedule shows, and the main breaker feeding the panel (MCC No. and compartment). 8. Type panelboard directories and insert them inside the panelboard doors. Text shall be 12pt-Arial font. 9. Place a large nameplate no less than 3"x5" on control panels, relay panels, junction boxes, or enclosures with electrical devices mounted inside or on the outside of the enclosure indicating the purpose of the cabinet. 10. Provide a nameplate on MCC motor starter doors duplicating motor nameplate data. B. Wire and Cable Markers 1. Use pre-printed tubular heat-shrink type wire and cable markers at each end of all conductors. 2. Select markers manufactured so that the heat-shrink process makes the imprint permanent and solvent-resistant. 3. Use markers that are self-extinguishing, conforming to U.L. Standard No. 224 for print performance, heat shock, and flammability. Coy 4. Provide marker material that is flexible, radiation cross-linked polyolefin with 3 to 1 shrink ratio, rated 600 volts, and white in color. 105-1901 16195-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION C. Conduit Markers 1. Provide conduit markers made of stainless steel tags approximately 2 inches x 1 inch x 19 gage. 2. Stamp the caption on the tag and have it black filled. 3. Punch tags for tie fasteners. Fasten tags to the conduits with stainless steel braided wire. D. Cable Tray Markers 1. For high visibility and contrast, use cable tray markers that are yellow with black legend. 2. Use markers made of vinyl impregnated cloth, suitable for exposure to corrosive, wet, and abrasive environments. 3. Make markers of pre-cut individual letters or numbers with pressure sensitive adhesive backing. 4. Size legend characters to 4 inches high on a total marker height of approximately 5 inches, suitable for applying to 6-inch side rails of a cable tray. E. Underground Warning Tape 1. Provide warning tape made of 4 mil thick polyolefin film, 3 inches wide, suitable for direct burial and resistant to alkalis, acids, and other common soil substances. 2. Use red tape with black legend printed in permanent ink. F. Warning Labels 1. Place OSHA safety labels on enclosures and boxes 100 cubic inches or more containing electrical equipment or terminations. 2. Provide OSHA color codes for the labels. Use labels made from 4 mil vinyl with pressure sensitive adhesive backing. 3. The warning label caption is DANGER - 480 VOLTS or as indicated on the drawings 4. Size labels either 5 inches x 3-1/2 inches or 10 inches x 7 inches, as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 105-1901 16195-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces where adhesive labels will be applied. B. Drill holes for nameplates to be fastened with stainless screws. C. Prepare the cable ends for termination and conductor markings. D. Identify conduits at terminating points and select tags accordingly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates and labels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the Drawings. B. Apply wire and cable markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using a heat gun with properly sized nozzle for the application. Tag the wires at both ends with the same notation. C. Tag conduits at junction boxes, pull boxes, and at other termination points. D. Identify cable trays at the time of installation with the alphanumeric number shown on the Drawings. Label cable trays on the outside rail. Place the tray identifier at each point where the tray designation changes and at 200 foot intervals in between, but not less than two per run. E. Identify underground conduits, cables, or duct banks using the underground ® warning tape. The underground grounding grid, including the laterals. Also use underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 12 inches below grade or as indicated on the Drawings. For wide trenches or duct banks, install one warning tape per 24 inch width. F. Apply the 5 inches by 3-1/2 inches warning labels to disconnect switches, panelboards, terminal boxes, and similar devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and the Drawings. Apply the 10 inches x 7 inches warning labels to larger control panel enclosures, motor control centers, and to entrance doors to buildings containing electrical power and control equipment. END OF SECTION C 105-1901 16195-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 411) 105-1901 16195-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET Cir SECTION 16200 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install Standby Generator Sets with all appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Each generator size as shown on the drawings is a minimum size around which the electrical conductors and circuit breakers have been sized. The Contractor shall provide each engine-generator set that meets all the performance criteria, and shall increase the size of the engine generator, if necessary, to meet the specified criteria. If the generator size increases, the Contractor shall increase the breakers, conductors, and all associated equipment, including the automatic transfer switch, to accommodate the larger generator size. All sizing of associated equipment shall be in accordance with the NEC. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 16000 Electrical—General Provisions B. Structural and Concrete Divisions— Concrete pads • C. Section 16105 Power System Study E. Section 16196 Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000, and as specified herein. B. Provide systems engineering with coordination curves, to demonstrate coordination between existing or proposed breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned unreviewed. D. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering Department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturer's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the III following: 104-1901 16200-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET 1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions, weight, anchor details, and required operating clearances. 2. Conduit entrance drawings. 3. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for the engine, AC generator, battery charger, generator set control system, electronic governor system, control stations, meters, relays, pilot lights, circuit breaker, etc. List all options and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 4. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 5. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each Generator Set, with dimensions, exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc. 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. UL Listing of the completed assembly. 9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 10. Conduit entry/exit locations 11. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 13. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 14. Service and feeder lugs and connectors. 15. Instruction and renewal parts books. F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. G. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 104-1901 16200-2 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following (hr information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. e. Operating instructions, including periodic generator set operational testing. f. Automatic and manual startup and shutdown sequences. The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.04 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 —2000 Industrial Control and Systems • 2. 3. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70E — Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 110 for Level 1 Systems. 5. OSHA for rotating parts. 6. NEMA MG1 temperature limits. 7. UL508A 8. CSA282-M 1989 9. IEC 8528 part 4 10. Mil — Std 461Cpart 9 11. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, 801.5 12. IEEE587 13. ASTM D2794-93 14. ASTM D2247-92 B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a 41iF minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an 104-1901 16200-3 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.06 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. D. Equipment shall be immediately installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings, upon delivery to the jobsite. If the equipment cannot be immediately installed, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. E. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer of the alternator shall assume Manufacturer's responsibility for the Generator Set in its entirety, and warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 3 years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment 104-1901 16200-4 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET shall be performed by the Manufacturer at no expense to the Owner. ihr PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cummins 2. Kohler 3. Caterpillar 4. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.02 RATINGS A. The service voltage shall be the same as shown on the Drawings. B. Power: Standby, minimum size as shown on the Drawings, at 0.8 PF, based on site elevation of 3300 feet and ambient temperatures up to 50 degrees C. C. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. 2.03 GENERATOR-SET PERFORMANCE A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1.0 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. B. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 14 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 2 seconds. On application of a 100% load step the generator set shall recover to stable voltage within 10 seconds. C. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. D. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. E. Transient Frequency Performance: Not more than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 3 seconds. On application of a 100% load step the generator set shall recover to stable frequency within 10 seconds. F. Output Waveform: At full load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for any single harmonic. I tv, Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50. 104-1901 16200-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET G. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 8 seconds without damage to generator system components. For a 1-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall regulate both voltage and current to prevent over-voltage conditions on the non-faulted phases. H. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1, Type 10, system requirements. Ambient Condition Performance: Engine generator shall be designed to allow operation at full rated load in an ambient temperature under site conditions, based on highest ambient condition. Ambient temperature shall be as measured at the air inlet to the engine generator for enclosed units, and at the control of the engine generator for machines installed in equipment rooms. 2.04 ENGINE A. Fuel: Natural Gas B. Engine Displacement: 1709 cubic inches C. Rated Engine Speed: 1800RPM. D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Lube oil pump: shall be positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure pump. 2. Filter and Strainer: Provided by the engine manufacturer of record to provide adequate filtration for the prime mover to be used. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily .No) removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. E. Engine Fuel System: The engine fuel system shall be installed in strict compliance to the engine manufacturer's instructions. F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity and performance. 1. Designed for operation on a single 120 VAC, Single phase, 60Hz power connection. Heater voltage shall be shown on the project drawings. 2. Installed with isolation valves to isolate the heater for replacement of the element without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. 3. Provided with a 24VDC thermostat, installed at the engine thermostat housing. G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. The governing system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying engine operating temperature conditions. The control system shall actively control the fuel rate as appropriate to the state of the engine generator. Fuel rate shall be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, accelerating to rated speed, and operating in various isochronous states. 104-1901 16200-6 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled 410 1. The generator set manufacturer shall provide prototype test data for the specific hardware proposed demonstrating that the machine will operate at rated standby load in an outdoor ambient condition of 40 deg C. 2. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 3. Size of Radiator overflow tank: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 4. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 5. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. Muffler/Silencer: Selected with performance as required to meet sound requirements of the application, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. For generator sets with outdoor enclosures the silencer shall be inside the enclosure. J. Air-Intake Filter: Engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and restriction indicator. • K. Starting System: 12 or 24V, as recommended by the engine manufacturer; electric, with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine- cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for level 1 systems. 3. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length as required. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 4. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish. 5. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation. The battery charging alternator shall have sufficient capacity to recharge the batteries with all parasitic loads connected within 4 hours after a normal engine starting sequence. 6. Battery Chargers: Unit shall comply with UL 1236, provide fully regulated, constant voltage, current limited, battery charger for each battery bank. It will include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate based on generator set manufacturer's recommendations shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically 104-1901 16200-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 20 deg C to plus 40 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. e. Provide LED indication of general charger condition, including charging, faults, and modes. Provide a LCD display to indicate charge rate and battery voltage. Charger shall provide relay contacts for fault conditions as required by NFPA110. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet. 2.05 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Engine generator control shall be microprocessor based and provide automatic starting, monitoring, protection and control functions for the unit. B. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator- set shutdown. (Switches with different configurations but equal functions are acceptable.) When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of the local (generator set-mounted)and/or remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set. C. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of the local (generator set-mounted) and/or remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set. D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, system controls, engine gages and associated equipment shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. AC output power circuit breakers and other output power equipment shall not be mounted in the control enclosure. E. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following: 104-1901 16200-8 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET 1. AC voltmeter(3-phase, line to line and line to neutral values). 2. AC ammeter(3-phases). 3. AC frequency meter. 4. AC kVA output (total and for each phase). Display shall indicate power flow direction. 5. Ammeter-voltmeter displays shall simultaneously display conditions for all three phases. 6. Emergency Stop Switch: Switch shall be a red "mushroom head" pushbutton device, complete with lock-out/tag-out provisions. Depressing switch shall cause the generator set to immediately stop the generator set and prevent it from operating. 7. Fault Reset Switch: Supply a dedicated control switch to reset/clear fault conditions. 8. DC voltmeter(alternator battery charging). 9. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 10. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 11. Running-time meter. 12. Generator-voltage and frequency digital raise/lower switches. Rheostats for these functions are not acceptable. The control shall adjustment of these parameters in a range of plus or minus 5% of the voltage and frequency operating set point (not nominal voltage and frequency values.) 13. AC Protective Equipment: The control system shall include over/under voltage, over current, short circuit, loss of voltage reference, and over excitation shut down protection. There shall be an overload warning, and overcurrent warning alarm. 14. Status LED indicating lamps to indicate remote start signal present at the control, existing alarm condition, not in auto, and generator set running. 15. A graphical display panel with appropriate navigation devices shall be provided to view all information noted above, as well as all engine status and alarm/shutdown conditions (including those from an integrated engine emission control system). The display shall also include integrated provisions for adjustment of the gain and stability settings for the governing and voltage regulation systems. 16. Panel lighting system to allow viewing and operation of the control when the generator room or enclosure is not lighted. 17. DC control Power Monitoring: The control system shall continuously monitor DC power supply to the control, and annunciate low or high voltage conditions. It shall also provide an alarm indicating imminent failure of the battery bank based on degraded voltage recover on loading (engine cranking). F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level (1.„ 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. 104-1901 16200-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET 1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low-voltage alarm. G. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 110. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. H. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation. 2.06 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Generator Overcurrent Protection: The generator set shall be provided with a UL Listed/CSA Certified protective device that is coordinated with the alternator provided to prevent damage to the generator set on any possible overload or overcurrent condition external to the machine. The protective device shall be listed as a utility grade protective device under UL category NRGU. The control system shall be subject to UL follow-up service at the manufacturing location to verify that the protective system is fully operational as manufactured. Protector shall perform the following functions: 1. Initiates a generator kW overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms. 2. Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions, or on overload conditions, indicates an alarm conditions when the current flow is in excess of 110% of rated current for more than 10 seconds. 3. Under single phase or multiple phase fault conditions, operates to switch off alternator excitation at the appropriate time to prevent damage to the alternator. 4. The operator panel shall indicate the nature of the fault condition as either a short circuit or an overload. 5. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot greater than 120% of nominal voltage. 6. The protective system provided shall not include an instantaneous trip function. 2.07 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall 104-1901 16200-10 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET be rotated integrally with generator rotor. 41110v C. Electrical Insulation: Class H D. Temperature Rise: 125 degree environment. E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, over speed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. F. Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) shall provide excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. G. Enclosure: Drip-proof. H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. The voltage regulation system shall be microprocessor-controlled, 3-phase true RMS sensing, full wave rectified, and provide a pulse-width modulated signal to the exciter. No exceptions or deviations to these requirements will be permitted. I. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. J. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent maximum, based on the rating of the engine generator set. 2.08 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE A. Description: Sound Attenuated Aluminum housing. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. (ii Instruments, control, and battery system shall be mounted within enclosure. B. Construction: 1. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen to permit air circulation when engine is not running while excluding birds and rodents. 2. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. Restraint/Hold back hardware to prevent door to keep door open at 180 degrees during maintenance. Rain lips over all doors. 3. Exhaust System: a. Muffler Location: Within enclosure. 4. Hardware: All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. 5. Wind Rating: Wind rating shall be 150 mph 6. Mounting Base: Suitable for mounting on sub-base fuel tank or housekeeping pad. 7. A weather protective enclosure shall be provided which allows the generator set to operate at full rated load with a static pressure drop equal to or less than 0.5 inches of water. 8. Inlet ducts shall include rain hoods C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 40 deg (61., D. Sound Performance: Reduce the sound level of the engine generator while 11 104-1901 16200-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. p City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET operating at full rated load to a maximum of 76 dBA measured at any location 7 m from the engine generator in a free field environment. E. Site Provisions: 1. Lifting: Complete assembly of engine generator, enclosure shall be designed to be lifted into place as a single unit, using spreader bars. 2.09 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Vibration Isolation: Generators installed on grade shall be provided with elastomeric isolator pads integral to the generator, unless the engine manufacturer requires use of spring isolation. 2.10 FINISHES A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Powder-coated and baked over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. Manufacturer's standard color or as directed on the drawings. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters. In addition, the equipment engine, skid, cooling system, and alternator shall have been subjected to actual prototype tests to validate the capability of the design under the abnormal conditions noted in NFPA110. Calculations and testing on similar equipment which are allowed under NFPA110 are not sufficient to meet this requirement. B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine- generator set manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test engine generator set manufactured for this Project to demonstrate compatibility and functionality. 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Simulated safety shutdowns. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 104-1901 16200-12 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation, application, and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. B. Equipment shall be installed by the contractor in accordance with final submittals and contract documents. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the listing or labeling of UL listed products. C. Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting wiring between all major equipment provided for the on-site power system. The contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections (when required), under the supervision of the equipment supplier. D. Equipment shall be installed on concrete housekeeping pads. Equipment shall be permanently fastened to the pad in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and seismic requirements of the site. E. Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the manufacturer. All protective settings shall be adjusted as instructed by the consulting engineer. F. All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and construction debris prior to initial operation and final testing of the system. G. On completion of the installation by the electrical contractor, the generator set supplier shall conduct a site evaluation to verify that the equipment is installed per manufacturer's recommended practice. 3.02 ON-SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST A. The complete installation shall be tested to verify compliance with the performance requirements of this specification following completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. The generator set manufacturer shall provide a site test specification covering the entire system. B. Prior to start of active testing, all field connections for wiring, power conductors, and bus bar connections shall be checked for proper tightening torque. C Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on site shall include a "cold start" test, a two hour full load (resistive) test, and a one-step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test, if necessary. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 3.04 SERVICE AND SUPPORT (00 A. The generator set supplier shall maintain service parts inventory for the entire 104-1901 16200-13 Gupta &Associates, Inc. 4 City of Pearland EMERGENCY STANDBY Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GENERATOR SET power system at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The inventory shall have a commercial value of$3 million or more. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain a central parts inventory to support the supplier, covering all the major components of the power system, including engines, alternators, control systems, paralleling electronics, and power transfer equipment. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical power system replacement parts in the local service location. Service vehicles shall be stocked with critical replacement parts. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The service organization shall be physically located within 100 of the site. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the Standby Generator Sets furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one (1)eight hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, engine, alternator, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training session for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16200-14 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS (kw SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install panelboard(s) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all panelboards, except as indicated otherwise. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 16000, and as specified herein. B. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished 41, under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned unreviewed. C. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Bill of Material 3. Front view elevation with dimensions 4. Top view 5. Nameplate schedule 6. UL Listing 7. Conduit entry/exit locations 8. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating ‘i (so, b. Voltage 105-1901 16470-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS c. Continuous current 9. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 10. Descriptive bulletins. 11. Product data sheets. 12. Cable terminal sizes I). Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. c. Field Test Reports 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The low voltage panelboard assembly and all components in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. UL 67 — Panelboards 2. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes 3. NEMA PB-1 2006 - Panelboards 4. NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their application 5. Fed. Spec. W-P-115C 6. Fed. Spec. W-C-375 13. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 105-1901 16470-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS GP" 1. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided in accordance with Section 16000. 2. Instruction books and/or leaflets. 3. Recommended renewal parts list. 4. Drawings and information required by the SUBMITTALS part of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 or later certified. B. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. C. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. B. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. C. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the Owner/Engineer. Equipment must be installed in its permanent location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, in an air conditioned, bonded warehouse of the Contractor's choice and at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. D. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage; and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.7 WARRANTY C A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a minimum of two years beginning after completion of the initial 105-1901 16470-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS operation period as defined in Section 01650 STARTING SYSTEMS. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable. 1. General Electric 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Siemens 4. Square D B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 GENERAL A. Rating 1. Panelboard ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. All panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage. 2. Circuit breaker panelboards shall be fully rated for the specified circuit breaker fault current interrupting capacity. Series connected short circuit ratings will not be acceptable. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Interiors 1. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with circuit breakers, wire connectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the anti- turn solderless type and all shall be suitable for tinned copper wire of the sizes indicated. 2. Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. 105-1901 16470-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS L 3. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except 11�r, when narrow column panels are indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered by the manufacturer. 4. A nameplate shall be provided listing manufacturer's name, panel type and rating. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. B. Busses 1. All bus bars shall be tin-plated copper. Full-size tin-plated neutral bars shall be included. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be tin-plated copper. 2. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 3. Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that can be fitted into them. 4. Equipment ground bars of tin-plated copper shall be furnished. C. Boxes 1. Boxes and trims shall be made from steel having multiple knockouts, unless otherwise noted. Boxes for use indoors in an air conditioned space shall be NEMA 1 steel construction, without knockouts. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of 4-inch on all sides. 2. At least four studs for mounting the panelboard interior shall be furnished. D. Trim 1. Hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles shall be included in all panel trims. 2. Doors shall have semi flush type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over 48-inch in height shall have a vault handle and three-point catch, complete with lock, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed. Furnish two keys for each lock. All locks shall be keyed alike; directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished on each door. 3. Indoor NEMA 1 trims shall be factory painted in the manufacturer's standard color. 4. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box by at least 3/4-inch all around. Surface trims shall have the same width and height as the box. 2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS LA. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers with frame size and trip settings as shown on the Drawings. 105-1901 16470-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS B. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated molded case, bolt-in type. C. Each circuit breaker used in 208Y/120 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 22,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. D. Each circuit breaker used in 480Y/277 Volt and 480 Volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 65,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical. E. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. F. Single pole circuit breakers serving fluorescent lighting loads shall have the SWD marking. Circuit breakers serving air conditioning branch loads shall be U.L. listed as type HACR. 2.5 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 4. Liebert Corporation. 5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid- state, parallel-connected, modular(with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine- wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short- circuit current rating matching or exceeding the panelboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 1. Accessories a. Fuses rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. b. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. c. Integral disconnect switch. d. Redundant suppression circuits. e. Redundant replaceable modules. f. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. g. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. ,.11) 105-1901 16470-6 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS h. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. i. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. j. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. 2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase. 3. Minimum single-impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec. waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2. a. Line to Neutral: 70,000A. b. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A. 4. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20- mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277; 208Y/120- V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows a. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120. b. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120 c. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120. 6. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 480-V, three-phase, three-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows: a. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V; 1000 V for 240 V b. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount boxes for surface-mounted panelboards so there is at least 1/2-inch air space between the box and the wall. B. Connect panelboard branch circuit loads so that the load is distributed as equally ta,ti as possible between the phase busses. 105-1901 16470-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS C. Type circuit directories giving location and nature of load served. Install circuit directories in each panelboard. D. Install the panelboard in accordance with applicable codes at each location indicated on the plans. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in the panelboard. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports. a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of ] deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action. ',Go) 105-1901 16470-8 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS C END OF SECTION C 105-1901 16470-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PANELBOARDS THIS SECTION INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK J 105-1901 16470-10 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS C SECTION 16481 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MODIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Modify the existing motor control centers as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, shop drawings and product data as follows: 1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this Project. • 2. Provide individual bucket elementary drawings showing internal wiring and interlocking with remotely-mounted devices. Show wire and terminal number. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Motor control centers shall be modified and tested in accordance with the latest editions and revisions of NEMA Standard ICS-2 and Underwriters Laboratories Standard No. UL-845. Equipment shall conform to ANSI C19.3 test standards and the requirements of the National Electric Code. B. Circuit breakers shall be designed, built, and tested in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories UL 489 and shall be so labeled. Installation shall comply with NEMA Standard for Panelboards and the National Electrical Code. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where possible, new circuit breakers, fused switches and motor starters shall be the product of the original manufacturer of the motor control center in which they are being installed. B. Modifications shall maintain UL listing of the equipment. C. Modifications shall be made by a Contractor specializing in this type of work. 105-1901 16481-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS Qualifications and experience on past similar projects shall be submitted for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. New or replacement starter units shall be furnished complete with new circuit breakers, control transformers, and overload relays. No existing parts shall be re-used unless noted otherwise. B. Rewire the control circuits to provide the control schemes shown on the Drawings. 2.2 RATING A. Rating 1. Component short circuit ratings shall be not be less than minimum rated device in the motor control center. The overall short circuit rating of the existing motor control center shall be maintained. Components shall be rated 600 Volts. 2. The integrity of series rated devices shall be maintained. Series combinations shall be UL listed. B. Motor starter units shall be tested and UL labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. C. New devices installed in existing motor control centers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature. Follow the manufacturer's recommended clearances and ventilation practices to prevent overheating and to maintain UL listing. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Enclosure 1. Provide new sheet metal cubicles and doors to match existing equipment enclosure as required. New cubicles shall be supplied by the original equipment manufacturer where possible. Where existing units are obsolete, new cubicles may be supplied by a third party vendor. 2. Provide individual, flange formed, pan type door with concealed hinges and quarter turn latches for each device compartment as required. Doors shall be removable. Door removal shall not be required to withdraw starter units or feeder tap devices. B. Unit Compartments 1. Provide individual compartments for each removable combination starter and feeder tap device unit. Steel barriers shall isolate the top, bottom and sides of each compartment from adjacent units and wireways. Removable units shall 105-1901 16481-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS (pv connect to the vertical bus in each section with tin-plated, self-aligning, pressure type copper plug connectors. Size 5 and larger starter units may be wired directly to the bus. Removable units shall be aligned in the structure on guide rails or shelves and secured with a cam latch mechanism or racking screw. 2. Provide individual, isolated compartments for fixed mounted devices such as circuit breakers, cable lugs, metering, relaying and control devices. Main and bus tie circuit breakers shall be wired directly to the main horizontal bus. All bus connections shall be fully rated. 3. Provide the following features: a. Provision to padlock removable units in a partially withdrawn TEST position, with the bus stabs disengaged. b. Provision to padlock unit disconnect handles in the OFF position with up to three padlocks. c. Mechanical interlock with bypass to prevent opening unit door with disconnect in the ON position, or moving disconnect to the ON position while the unit door is open. d. Mechanical split-type terminal blocks for disconnecting external control wiring. Csoe. Auxiliary contact on unit disconnect to isolate control power when fed from an external source. f. Disconnect operating handles and control devices mounted on the removable units. g. Compartments containing motor starters shall have wiring diagrams and heater tables fastened to the compartment door. Compartments containing panelboards shall have circuit directories fastened to the compartment door. C. Buses 1. Horizontal buses: non-tapered, tin-plated copper. Neutral bus, where required, shall be fully rated and tin-plated. 2. Vertical buses: non-tapered, tin-plated copper, minimum rating of 300 amperes, securely bolted to the horizontal main bus. Vertical bus shall be completely isolated and insulated by means of a labyrinth design barrier, effectively isolating the vertical buses to prevent any fault-generated gases to pass from one phase to another. A shutter mechanism shall isolate the vertical bus when a unit is removed. 3. Bus bracing: exceed the specified equipment short circuit current rating, but not less than 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. 105-1901 16481-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS 4. Bus joints: use high-tensile strength, zinc-plated hardware with front- accessible connections for ease of maintenance. 5. Horizontal ground bus: provide a tin-plated copper ground bus extending throughout the entire length of the motor control center, firmly secured to each vertical section structure and equipped with lugs for external ground connections, sized for cables shown on the Drawings. 6. Vertical ground bus: provide a tin-plated vertical ground bus rated 300 amperes in each structure, directly connected to the horizontal ground bus via a tin-plated copper connector. Units shall connect to the vertical bus via a tin-plated copper stab. D. Wiring 1. Wiring: Stranded tin-plated copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90 degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device. 2. Identification: Numbered sleeve type wire markers at each termination point, color coding per NEMA Standards and the NEC. Foreign voltage control wiring shall be yellow. E. Nameplates 1. Provide 1-inch by 3-inch engraved nameplates for new units of two-ply laminated plastic, black face, white core, screw fastened to each door with stainless steel screws. Equipment names shall be as shown on the single-line diagrams. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. General 1. The Drawings indicate the approximate horsepower and intended control scheme of the motor driven equipment. Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, control power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and control equipment actually supplied, in compliance with the National Electrical Code and the manufacturer's heater selection tables. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as actually furnished shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Branch Circuit Feeder Breakers (Non-motor Loads) 1. Molded case circuit breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip type, 600 Volt, two- or three- pole as required, labeled in accordance with UL Standard 489. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated to meet the specified equipment short circuit rating. Provide independently adjustable magnetic trips on 225A frame breakers and larger. C. Fusible Switches 1. Fused switches: Heavy duty, quick make, quick break, three-pole, 600 Volt with 105-1901 16481-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS visible break contacts, equipped with Class R fuse clips and current limiting thr fuses. D. Combination Starter Units 1. Combination starters shall include a motor circuit protector(MCP) in series with a motor controller and an overload protective device. The MCP shall have an adjustable magnetic trip range up to 1000 percent of rated continuous current and a trip test feature. MCPs shall be labeled in accordance with UL 489. 2. Motor starters: Three-pole, 600 Volt, electrically operated, of the types shown on the Drawings. Provide NEMA sizes as required for the horsepowers shown on the Drawings.Minimum size shall be NEMA Size 1. Fractional size starters are not acceptable. IEC rated starters shall have continuous current ratings equal to or greater than the continuous current ratings listed in Table 2-321-1 of NEMA Standard Publication ICS 2-1978. Starters shall have 120 Volt encapsulated operating coils, individual control power transformers with primary and secondary fuses, and silver cadmium oxide renewable line contacts. 3. Multi-speed and reversing starters shall include two motor rated contactors mechanically and electrically interlocked so that only one device may be energized at anytime. 4. Reduced voltage starters: Solid state, six SCR, full wave type with adjustable current limit and voltage ramp to control starting torque, automatic load sensing circuit to minimize energy consumption, line and load side surge protection and noise suppression and controlled deceleration adjustment to reduce the effects of surges caused by centrifugal pump loads. Provide heat sinks and ventilation to remove heat from the structure. Each starter shall include a motor horsepower rated isolation contactor to positively disconnect the line voltage when the SCR control is off. Starters shall be UL listed. 5. Contactors: Electrically held, 120 VAC coil operator, suitable for tungsten, ballast, or resistive non-motor loads, with over current protection, control transformer, and contact ratings and poles as shown on the Drawings. 6. Motor overload protection: Ambient compensated, adjustable, three-pole, thermal bi- metallic type, with push-to-test feature. Overload relays for submersible pump motors shall be ambient compensated, quick trip, Class 10. Overload relays shall be manually reset from outside the enclosure by means of an insulated pushbutton. Provide auxiliary alarm contacts where shown on the Drawings. 7. Auxiliary contacts: Form C, NEMA A600 rating, as required by the control schemes on the Drawings. Provide one normally open and one normally closed spare contacts on each starter. Additional auxiliary contacts shall be furnished as shown on the Drawings or as required by the control schematic and this Section. 8. Control power transformers: Two winding type, 120 VAC secondary, with two 1 to fuses in the primary and one fuse in the ungrounded circuit of the secondary. Provide extra capacity as required or where shown on the Drawings. 105-1901 16481-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS E. Relays and Timers 1. Control relays and timers: IEC industrial type with 10 Ampere, 600 Volt, fixed contacts, modular design, DIN rail mounted, Square D Type PH; Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse Type DSL9 or equal. Provide transient suppressors on coils and pneumatic timing or latching attachments as required by the control schemes on the Drawings. F. Pilot Devices 1. Control operators: Heavy duty, full size, oiltight, with NEMA A600 contact rating. Types and quantities as shown on the Drawings. 2. Indicator lights: Full size, oiltight, low voltage, with push-to-test feature. Colors and quantities as shown on the Drawings. 2.5 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. New metal parts of the control center assembly shall be cleaned of all weld spatter and other foreign material and given a phosphatized chemical pre-treatment and two coats of primer to inhibit rust. B. New equipment shall be finish painted with one coat of polyurethane enamel to match existing color. C. Unpainted non-current carrying parts shall receive a protective zinc plating to prevent corrosion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Modifications to existing motor control centers shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Provide all hardware necessary for installation. B. Field-installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. C. Touch up damaged paint finishes. D. Make wiring interconnections between units. E. Cable connections to existing bus shall be made with two-hole NEMA lugs. Remove busbar sections for shop drilling and re-install. Re-torque all connections. Fabricate and install any custom bus extensions 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Make the following minimum tests and checks before energizing modified equipment. 105-1901 16481-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS 1. Megger buses, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after disconnecting devices sensitive to megger voltage. 2. Install overload heaters or adjust relays for actual motor nameplate currents. If capacitors are installed between starter and motor, use overload relay heaters based on measured motor current. 3. Check mechanical interlocks for proper operation. 4. Test ground connections for continuity and resistance. 5. Adjust unit compartment doors. 6. Check control circuit interlocking and continuity with starters in the TEST position. Provide external source of control power for this test. 7. Adjust motor circuit protectors and voltage trip devices to their correct settings. B. In the event of an equipment fault, notify the Owner immediately. After the cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor, the Engineer, and the equipment manufacturer's factory service technician. Repair or replace the equipment as directed by the Engineer prior to placing the equipment back into service. • 3.3 ADJUSTMENT A. Test all operational features of the installed equipment to the satisfaction of the Owner. Submit a certified copy of the field inspection to the Engineer. No equipment shall be energized without the approval of the Engineer. B. Make the following inspection, tests, and adjustments: 1. Calibrate and test circuit breaker trip devices per the coordination study specified in Section 16015. 2. Inspect the installation for compliance with the manufacturer's recommended installation practices, and report all deviations to the Engineer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the control center. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION C 105-1901 16481-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I I City of Pearland LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CENTER MODIFICATIONS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 105-1901 16481-8 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) SECTION 16482 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CONTROLLERS (PWM) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, equipment, supervision, and materials for the installation, testing, and startup of the variable frequency drive(s) (VFD) as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide a factory-trained technician to start-up each VFD. The technician shall be present during the field acceptance testing. Start-up service shall include overtime charges, travel and living expenses, and replacement parts. C. Provide eight hours of on-site instructions on VFD operation for the Owner's personnel. D. The VFD manufacturer shall verify that the motor to be used is suitable for use with the VFD. • 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Instrumentation work is included in Division 13. B. Squirrel cage motors are specified in Section 01171. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, shop drawings and product data for the following: 1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from the specifications. 2. Power and control schematics including external connections. Show wire and terminal numbers and color coding. 3. Drive performance specifications. 4. Instruction and replacement parts books. 5. As-built final drawings. 104-1901 16482-1 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) 6. Field test and inspection reports. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE Standard 519 - "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters". B. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Variable frequency drives shall utilize a field-proven design. The VFD manufacturer shall demonstrate at least three years of continuous field operating experience with equipment of similar size and design. B. A factory-authorized service and parts organization shall be located within 100 miles of the project location. Provide the name and address of the factory-authorized service and parts organization nearest to the project location at the time of the bid. C. Equipment shall be UL or ETL labeled. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to the driven equipment specifications for description of system operation. B. Refer to the Instrument Loop Diagrams in Division 13 and the control schematic diagrams on the Electrical Drawings for control system operation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package the equipment for maximum protection during delivery and storage. B. Store the equipment indoors in a clean, dry, heated storage facility until ready for installation. Do not install the equipment in its final location until the facilities are permanently weather tight. Furnish, install, and wire temporary electric space heaters in the equipment until the permanent heating equipment is operational. Protect the equipment at all times from exposure to moisture, chemicals, hydrogen sulfide, and chlorine gas. C. If required in the driven equipment specifications, the VFD manufacturer shall ship equipment to the driven equipment manufacturer's testing facility for use during the factory acceptance test. 1.9 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Under normal operating conditions, harmonic currents introduced into the power system supply network from the variable frequency drives shall not exceed the distortion limits for a general system as defined in IEEE Standard 519. B. The VFD shall not produce motor noise in excess of the manufacturer's 104-1901 16482-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) published noise standards for 60 Hz operation. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Provide the following spare parts for each size drive in the quantities specified: 1. Two power diodes. 2. One pair power transistors. 3. 50 percent replacement fuses, all types and sizes. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long-term storage. Identify each item with manufacturer's name, description and part number on the exterior of the package. 1.11 QUALIFICATION A. The VFD supplier shall furnish with their bid on this project a statement verifying that they will furnish a system for this project which will meet the specified requirements for harmonics and line notching. 1.12 OPERATING INSTRUCTION A. After approval, during and after construction, operating manuals covering 400 instruction and maintenance on each type of equipment shall be furnished in accordance with Section 16000. B. The instructions shall be bound and shall provide at least the following as a minimum: 1. A comprehensive index. 2. A complete "as-built" set of approved shop drawings. 3. Detailed service, maintenance, and operation instructions for each item supplied. 4. A table listing of the "as left" drive set up parameters and alarm and trip settings. 5. The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entire system, with references to the systems schematic drawings and instructions. 6. Complete parts list with stock numbers, including spare parts. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Provide a minimum of two years' warranty in accordance with Section 01740. �„. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RATING 104-1901 16482-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) A. Service Conditions 1. Input power: 460 VAC, plus 10 percent, minus 5 percent, three-phase, 60 Hz. 2. Input frequency: 57 to 63 Hz. 3. Ambient temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C. 4. Elevation: Up to 1000-ft. above mean sea level. 5. Relative humidity: Up to 90 percent non-condensing. B. Minimum drive efficiency: 97 percent or better at 4/4 motor base speed and rated torque. C. Displacement power factor: 95 percent or higher throughout the entire speed range, measured at drive input terminals. D. Drive output: 100 percent rated current continuous, suitable for operation of the driven equipment over the required speed range without overloading. Drives shall be capable of a continuous overload up to 110 percent rated current for variable torque loads and 150 percent rated current for constant torque loads. Starting torque shall be matched to the load. E. Voltage regulation: plus or minus 1 percent of rated value, no load to full load. F. Output frequency drift: No more than plus or minus 0.5 percent from setpoint. G. Drives shall withstand five cycle transient voltage dips of up to 15 percent of rated voltage without an under-voltage trip or fault shutdown, while operating a variable torque load. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. The general arrangement of the equipment is shown on the Drawings. All drives shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Variable frequency drives shall be by one of the following manufacturers. a. Allen Bradley b. Toshiba Corporation c. Schneider Electric d. Or approved equal 2. The VFDs shall utilize a digital pulse width modulated (PWM) design to convert the fixed AC input to a variable voltage, variable frequency AC output. Construction shall be modular, using plug-in type component mounting or keyed ribbon cable connections 104-1901 16482-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) wherever possible to minimize downtime during repair. 3. The VFD operate satisfactorily when connected to a bus supplying other solid state power conversion equipment which may be causing up to 10 percent total harmonic voltage distortion and commutation notches up to 36,500 Volt microseconds, or when other VFDs are operating from the same bus. The drive shall include transient voltage suppression to allow reliable operation on a typical commercial power distribution system. 4. The VFD shall consist of a full-wave diode bridge converter to convert incoming fixed voltage/frequency to a fixed DC voltage. Provide a DC link choke smoothing reactor to limit fault throughput. The PWM strategy shall be of the space-vector type implemented through a microprocessor which generated a sine-coded output voltage. 5. The output shall be generated by power transistors which shall be controlled by six identical, optically isolated base driver circuits. The VFD shall have an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output Volt/Hz despite incoming voltage variations. The VFD shall have a continuous output current rating equal to or greater than the motor full load nameplate current. B. Features and Options 1. Each stand-alone VFD shall have a molded case, circuit breaker type • main power disconnect switch, with an external operating handle. The circuit breaker shall have a short circuit rating of 65,000 Amps, RMS symmetrical and shall be labeled in accordance with UL 489. 2. Provide the following safety features: a. Provision to padlock main disconnect handle in the OFF position. b. Mechanical interlock to prevent opening cabinet door with disconnect in the ON position, or moving disconnect to the ON position while the unit door is open. c. Barriers and warning signs on terminals that are energized with the power disconnect OFF. 3. Provide an equipment ground bus or lug connectors in each enclosure, suitable for connection to the copper grounding conductors shown on the Drawings. C. Operator Interface 1. Provide a door-mounted digital keypad/display, capable of controlling the drive and setting drive parameters. The digital display shall normally display: a. Speed demand in percent (tio b. Output current in amperes c. Frequency in Hz 104-1901 16482-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) d. Control mode - manual or automatic 2. The digital keypad shall allow operators to enter exact numerical settings in English engineering units. A user menu shall be provided as a guide to parameter settings. Code messages on keypad will not be acceptable. Parameters are to be factory set in EEPROM and resettable in the field. Parameters shall be password protected. The EEPROM stored variables shall be transferable to new and spare boards. 3. The keypad/display module shall have a key switch to control operation of the keypad. The key shall be removable in either the "Enabled" or "Disabled" positions. The keypad module shall contain a "self-test" software program that can be activated to verify proper keypad operation. The keypad display shall contain a full alphanumeric character set. 4. The following controls and indicators shall be provided, either separately or as part of the keypad/display: a. POWER ON, RUN AND FAULT indication. b. FAULT RESET control. c. MANUAL-AUTO control mode selector. d. Manual START/STOP controls. e. Manual speed adjust capability. D. Auxiliary Contacts 1. Provide one set of Form C auxiliary dry contacts for remote indication of VFD running status. 2. Provide one set of Form C auxiliary dry contacts for remote indication of VFD fault. E. Marking and Identification 1. Provide 1-inch by 3-inch, nominal, engraved lamicoid equipment nameplates on each VFD fastened with stainless steel screws or rivets. Nameplates shall be black with white core, 3/8-inch-high lettering. 2. Provide permanent warning signs as follows. a. "Warning-Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect power before opening or working on this unit" on main power disconnect. 2. PROTECTIVE AND OPERATIONAL FEATURES A. Make provisions for field adjustment of the following parameters through the keypad/display: 1. Current limit and boost. 2. Voltage (Volts/Hz) 104-1901 16482-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) 3. Frequency(Minimum/Maximum) 4. Independently adjustable acceleration and deceleration rates. 5. Auto restart delay. B. Make provisions to accept a remote dry contact closure to start and stop the drive(s) with the drive control system in the AUTO mode. C. Make provisions to accept a 4-20 mADC input signal for remote speed control. Input shall be isolated at the drive and active with the drive control system in the AUTO mode. Zero and span adjustability shall be provided. D. Provide a 4-20 mADC isolated output signal proportional to speed for remote speed indication. E. Provide the following short circuit and input protective features: 1. High speed current limiting input fuses and line reactors. 2. Solid state instantaneous overcurrent trip. 3. Undervoltage protection with automatic restart. 4. Ground fault protection. F. Provide the following internal protective features: 1. Transient surge protection. 2. Transistor overcurrent protection. 3. Current limit, inverse time type. 4. DC bus fuse protection and discharge circuit. 5. DC bus overvoltage trip. G. Provide the following output protective features: 1. Inverse time motor overload protection. 2.4 DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT CAPABILITY A. The following conditions shall cause an orderly drive shutdown and lockout. 1. Incorrect phase sequence. 2. Blown input fuse or single phasing of supply. Cy, 3. Control power supply failure. 4. Instantaneous overcurrent. 104-1901 16482-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. a City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) 5. Sustained overload. 6. Transistor overcurrent. B. Provide complete built-in diagnostic and test capability to enable maintenance personnel to rapidly and accurately identify the cause of equipment failure. 2.5 CONSTANT SPEED BYPASS A. Where shown on the Drawings, provide a full voltage constant speed, contactor type motor starter to bypass the variable frequency drive during maintenance or fault conditions. The bypass starter shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure with a hinged front door, interlocked with a main line input circuit breaker. A contactor shall also be provided on the VFD output and electrically interlocked with the motor bypass starter to prevent parallel operation. B. The constant speed bypass starter shall include a 120 Volt fused control power transformer and motor overload protection. C. Transfer from VFD to line shall be initiated automatically after a VFD fault. The following control devices shall be mounted on the bypass cabinet door: 1. POWER ON indicator light, white, push-to-test. 2. Bypass AUTO-OFF-MANUAL selector switch. 3. BYPASS OFF indicator light, green, push-to-test. 4. BYPASS ON indicator light, red, push-to-test. 5. MOTOR FAULT indicator light, amber, push-to-test. 6. BYPASS START and BYPASS STOP push buttons. 2.6 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. All non-current carrying metal parts of the equipment cabinet shall be cleaned of all weld spatter and other foreign material and given a heat cured, phosphatized chemical pre-treatment to inhibit rust. B. Equipment shall be finish painted with one coat of manufacturer's standard electro-coated, heat- cured enamel. C. Unpainted non-current carrying parts shall receive a protective zinc plating to prevent corrosion. Printed circuit boards shall be coated with a protective conformal epoxy. All device contacts shall be silver cadmium plated. 2.7 SHOP TESTING A. Perform manufacturers' standard production testing and inspection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 104-1901 16482-8 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove temporary lifting angles, lugs, and shipping braces. Touch up damaged paintfinishes. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Make the following minimum test and checks before the manufacturer's representative is called in for testing and adjustment. 1. Verify that all connections are completed in accordance with shop drawings. 2. Verify supply voltage and phase sequence are correct. 3. Check mechanical interlocks for proper operation. 4. Test ground connections for continuity and resistance. 5. Check control circuit interlocking and continuity. B. The manufacturer's service technician shall perform startup and adjustment of the drive(s). C. In the event of an equipment fault, notify Owner immediately. After the cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor, the Owner, and the equipment manufacturer's factory service technician. Repair or replace the equipment as directed by the Owner. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT A. Make all VFD internal adjustments and all adjustments necessary for manual and automatic operation of the entire system of driven equipment. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION C 104-1901 16482-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement CONTROLLERS (PWM) 3 104-1901 16482-10 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES Car SECTION 16492 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish, install, test, and place into operation the service entrance rated automatic transfer switch with features, accessories, enclosure, number of poles, amperage, voltage, and withstand current ratings as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with these Specifications. Provide bypass/isolation if so indicated on the drawings. B. Each automatic transfer switch shall consist of an inherently double throw power transfer switch unit and a controller interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. All transfer switches and controllers shall be the product of the same manufacturer. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Electrical work not herein specified is included in other Sections of Division 16. B. A 480 Volt, three-phase, three-wire, grounded-wye, 60 Hz power supply will be provided under Division 16 to the automatic transfer switch. C. Power system studies are included in Section 16015. The completed study shall be approved by the Engineer before the automatic transfer switch submittal will be reviewed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data, in accordance with Section 01350, as follows: 1. Equipment outline drawings and master drawing index showing elevation, plan and interior views, dimensions, weight, anchor bolt pattern and front panel layouts. 2. Provide a list of all options, special features, ratings, and deviations from the Specifications. 3. Conduit entrance drawings. 4. Furnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturers' part numbers. 5. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for over current protective devices, motor starters, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. List all 104-1901 16492-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. 4 City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this Project. 6. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interwiring and interlocking between units and remotely-mounted devices. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Contract Drawings. 7. Assembly ratings including short circuit rating, voltage, and continuous current. 8. Major component ratings including voltage, continuous current rating, and interrupting ratings. 9. Cable terminal sizes. 10. Instruction and renewal parts books. 11. Itemized list of spare parts furnished specifically for this Project, including part numbers. 12. Certified shop test reports. 13. As-built final drawings. 14. Field test and inspection reports. 15. Seismic certification. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The automatic transfer switches shall be UL listed for use in standby systems in accordance with Sections 517, 700, 701, and 702 of the National Electrical Code and shall be designed, built, and tested in accordance with the latest editions and revisions of the following standards and codes: 1. UL 1008 - Transfer Switches 2. UL 891 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 4. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems 5. NEMA ICS 2-477 6. NEMA ICS 10 - AC Transfer Switch Equipment 7. IEEE 446 - Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems 8. IECC 947-6-1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear; Multifunction Equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment 104-1901 16492-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES Nor 9. NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems of Health Care Facilities 10. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment 11. International Standards Organization ISO 9001 12. IEC 801 -2,3,4,and 5 13. CISPR 11 14. Compliant with FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A factory-authorized service and parts organization shall be able to respond to any service call for the project within eight hours. Provide the name and address of the factory-authorized service and parts organization nearest to the project location at the time of the bid. B. Equipment components and devices shall be UL listed to the extent possible wherever UL standards exist for such equipment. C. The automatic transfer switch manufacturer shall demonstrate at least 10 years of continuous field operating experience in automatic transfer switch design and fabrication within the last 15 years. Submit customer/user list with telephone numbers, addresses, and names of customer/user representatives. D. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of major components and control modules installed within the assembly. E. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic requirements of Uniform Building Code (UBC)for zone 4 applications. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switch manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5 percent minimum- damping factor, UBC peak of 2.15g's (3.2-11 Hz), and APA of 0.8g's applied at the base of the equipment. The tests shall fully envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. F. The automatic transfer switch shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third-party certification verifying quality assurance in design, development, production, installation, and servicing. G. The manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all the requirements of this specification. The certification shall identify, by serial number, the equipment involved. No exceptions to this specification, other than those stipulated at the time of submittal, shall be included in the certification. 1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 104-1901 16492-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES 01730. B. The manuals shall be bound and shall also include: 1. A list of"as left" settings for all timing relays. 2. System schematic drawings "As Built," illustrating all components and electrical connections of the systems supplied under this Section. 3. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component. 1.8 MANUFACTURERS A. The general arrangement of each automatic transfer switch is shown on the Drawings. The total width of the ATS shall not exceed 38 inches. Automatic transfer switch shall be one of the following products or approved equal: 1. Russ electric, Inc. Type RTS-30 2. GE/Zenith, Type ZT3DT 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package the automatic transfer switch for maximum protection during delivery and storage. The ATS shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. B. Store the automatic transfer switch indoors in a clean, dry, heated storage facility until ready for installation. Do not install the automatic transfer switch in its final location until the facilities are permanently weather tight. Protect the automatic transfer switch at all times from exposure to moisture, chemicals, hydrogen sulfide, and chlorine gas. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide a two-year minimum warranty on all parts and labor upon startup and customer acceptance of the automatic transfer switch. 1.11 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts in the quantities specified: 1. One dozen each size of cover bolts, cage nuts and door fasteners. 2. Two cans of aerosol touch-up paint. 3. 100 percent replacement fuses, all types and sizes. 4. One dozen replacement lamps for pilot lights. ,4,) 104-1901 16492-4 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES 41/ 5. Two of each color replacement lens caps for pilot lights. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long-term storage. Identify each item with manufacturer's name, description and part number on the exterior of the package. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLICATIONS A. Large Motor Applications 1. The transfer switch shall be of inherently three-pole, double throw construction and the time of load transfer from normal to standby or standby to normal shall not exceed 1/6 of one second. 2. Furnish the following accessories: a. Adjustable time delay on engine starting 0 to 30 seconds. b. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal and 5 minutes unloaded running time of generator. • c. Auxiliary contact to close when normal fails (for engine start). d. Close differential relay protection on normal. e. One auxiliary contact to close on standby (combustion air damper control). f. Two auxiliary contacts to open on standby. g. Auxiliary contacts to open 0 to 10 seconds (adjustable) before transfer to either normal or standby source and to close after transfer has occurred. These contacts are to cause the pumps to come to a complete stop before transfer to either source and allow re-start after transfer has occurred. Five contacts are required. 3. Automatic transfer switches shall have the following 1.5 cycle withstand/closing ratings with any over-current protective device upstream: a. Switch Rating Withstand Rating b. 30 to 150 Amps: 10,000 Amps at 480 Volts RMS SYM c. 225 to 800 Amps: 35,000 Amps at 480 Volts RMS SYM d. 600 to 1,200 Amps: 50,000 Amps at 480 Volts RMS SYM e. 1,600 to 4,000 Amps: 100,000 Amps at 480 Volts RMS SYM 4. The automatic transfer switch shall be the model specified in Paragraph 1.07 above as manufactured by the Automatic Switch Company, Russ electric Inc., GE/Zenith, Lake Shore Electric Corp., or equal. 104-1901 16492-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES B. Automatic Transfer Switches (Center Off Applications) or (In-Phase Sync Applications) 1. The automatic transfer switch shall be designed for a standby and normal source of 480 Volt, three-phase, four-wire, grounded-wye 60 Hz. Current ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2. The transfer switches shall be of inherently three-pole, double throw construction and shall have three-position operation: closed to normal source, open, closed to standby source. Time delay between opening of the closed contacts and closing of the open contacts shall be a minimum of 400 milliseconds to allow for voltage decay before transfer is complete. 3. The following accessories shall be furnished: a. Close differential adjustable phase sensing relay set to drop out at 80 percent of rated voltage and pick up at 90 percent of rated voltage. b. Adjustable 0.5 to 6.0 second time delay to override normal source power outages (set at 2 seconds). c. Two auxiliary contacts to open on normal source failure (for combustion air damper control). d. Two auxiliary contacts to close on normal source failure (for remote alarm and engine start). e. Neutral (off) position adjustable time delay 0.1 to 10 seconds. f. Auxiliary contacts to open 0 to 30 seconds (adjustable) before transfer to either normal or standby source and to close after transfer has occurred. These contacts are to allow large motors to come to a controlled stop before transfer to either source and allow re-start after transfer has occurred. Five contacts are required. g. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal (1 to 300 seconds) with 0 to 25 minute adjustable unloaded engine running time after retransfer. h. An in-phase monitor or an acceptable equal system shall be provided on ATS switches. The monitor shall control transfer/retransfer operation between live sources so that closure on the alternate source will occur only when the two sources approach synchronism and are within 60 electrical degrees maximum so that inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. The monitor shall function over a frequency difference range of up to plus/minus 2.0 Hz with a maximum operating transfer time of one-sixth of a second. If the voltage of the load carrying source drops below 70 percent, the in-phase function shall be automatically bypassed. The monitor shall not require interwiring with the generator controls, or active control of the 104-1901 16492-6 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES (lbw governor. 4. The automatic transfer switch shall be the model specified in Paragraph 1.07 above as manufactured by the Automatic Switch Company, Russ electric Inc., GE/Zenith, Lake Shore Electric Corp., or equal. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION A. The automatic transfer switch shall be designed for a standby and normal source of 480 Volt, three-phase, four-wire, grounded-wye 60 Hz. Current ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. 1. The switch shall initiate transfer of the load to the standby source when any phase of the normal source drops below 90 percent of normal voltage. 2. The transfer switch shall be adequately constructed to carry its full rated current on a continuous 24-hour basis in all approved enclosures and shall not show excessive heating or be subject to derating. The transfer switch shall be capable of withstanding inrush current values to 20 times its full load current rating without mechanical distortion of main contact poles or supports. The transfer switch shall be capable of withstanding all available system fault currents without parting of or damage to contacts during the fault clearing time of the system over-current device. • a. The switch shall be mechanically held and electrically operated by a single- solenoid mechanism energized from the source to which the load is to be transferred. b. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions are possible. c. A time delay between the opening of the closed contacts and the closing of the open contacts shall allow for voltage decay before transfer. d. Automatic transfer switches incorporating linear drive motor mechanisms will not be acceptable. 3. The automatic transfer switch shall be three pole transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and standby power sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and re-transfer operation and remain connected together until power source contacts close on the source to which transfer or re-transfer is being made. 4. If shown on the drawings, the automatic transfer switch shall be furnished with a fourth pole for switching the neutral conductor. 5. Ampere ratings for total system transfer shall include motor, electric-discharge lamp, electric heating and tungsten-filament lamp loads in accordance with Paragraph 38.13 of UL-1008. Cov 6. The automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer switch and a 104-1901 16492-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES control module, interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. 7. Automatic switch construction and packaging shall be such that all servicing can be accomplished from the front without removal of the switch from the cabinet. A manual- operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The handle shall permit the operator to manually stop the contacts at any point throughout their entire travel to inspect and service the contacts when required. 8. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade, plug-in type with dust covers. 9. All timers shall be fully adjustable throughout their complete range, without affecting operation. It shall not cause an infinite time delay because of a setting anywhere on their scale. 10. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings and/or the Area Classification Plan. Paint color shall be ANSI Z55.1 No. 61 light gray. Control wiring shall be rated for 600 Volts, UL 1015. Wires shall be placed in wire duct or harnessed, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or breakage from weight or vibration. All wiring to hinged doors shall be run through door terminal blocks or connection plugs. 11. Identification: All wiring shall be numbered with typewritten heat-shrinkable wire markers at each termination point. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 30 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals, factory set at 3 seconds. B. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal shall be provided. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the generator fails and the normal source is available. Time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes. (Set at 30 minutes.) C. An unloaded running time delay for generator cooldown shall be provided. Time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. In addition, factory set at 5 minutes. D. A time delay on transfer to standby shall be provided, factory set at 5 seconds but field adjustable up to 5 minutes. E. Auxiliary contact to close when normal fails (for engine start). F. Close differential adjustable relay under voltage protection on all three phases of the normal and standby sources, set to drop out at 80 percent of rated voltage and pick up at 90 percent of rated voltage. Over voltage relay protection shall drop out at 104 percent of rated voltage and pick up at 2 percent below trip. G. Close differential adjustable relay under frequency sensing on all three phases of the generator source, set to drop out at 85 percent of rated frequency and pickup at 90 percent rated frequency. Over frequency relay protection shall drop out at 104 percent of rated frequency and pick up at 2 percent below trip. 104-1901 16492-8 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES H. Voltage unbalance relay shall be set to drop out at 5 percent and pick up at 1 percent below drop out. I. Auxiliary Contacts 1. One to close when normal fails (status to computer) 2. One to open on standby (combustion air damper control) 3. One to close on standby (status to computer) 4. One to close on standby(spare) 5. One to open on standby(spare) 6. One to close on normal (status to computer) 7. One to open on normal (spare) J. Timed auxiliary contacts to open 0 to 10 seconds (adjustable) before transfer to either normal or stand-by source and to close after transfer has occurred. These contacts are to cause the pumps to come to a complete stop before transfer to either source and allow restart after transfer has occurred. Five contacts are required. K. A green pilot light to indicate when the automatic transfer switch is connected to the normal source. A red pilot light to indicate when the automatic transfer switch is connected to the stand-by source. L. An AL-CU listed solderless screw type equipment ground lug. M. An in-phase monitor to control transfer/retransfer operation between live sources so that closure on the alternate source will occur only when the two sources are approaching synchronism and are within 15 electrical degrees maximum so that inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. The monitor shall function over a frequency difference range of up to plus/minus 20 Hz with a maximum operating transfer time of one-sixth of a second. If the voltage of the load carrying source drops below 70 percent, the in-phase function shall be automatically bypassed. The monitor shall not require interwiring with the generator controls, or active control of the governor. N. A maintained contact TEST-AUTO-RESET switch, NORMAL and STAND-BY pilot lights shall be mounted on the enclosure door. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test type. The TEST position shall simulate a normal source failure. The RESET position shall by-pass the time delays on retransfer to normal source. 2.4 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER (my A. The controller's sensing and logic shall be provided by a built-in microprocessor and shall have the ability to communicate serially through an optional serial 104-1901 16492-9 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES communication module. B. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to plus/minus 1 percent of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to plus/minus 0.2 percent. The panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of minus 20 to plus 60 degrees C and storage from minus 55 to plus 85 degrees C. C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade, plug-in type with dust covers. The panel shall be mounted separately from the transfer switch. D. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block. E. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for electromagnetic compatibility as follows: 1. IEEE 472 (ANSI C37.90A) Ring Wave Test 2. ENC 55011 19 91 Class A Conducted and Radiated Emission 3. EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity, Direct Contact & Air Discharge 4. EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Immunity 5. EN 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient Immunity 6. EN 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity 7. EN 50141 HF Conducted Disturbances Immunity 2.5 WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATINGS A. Automatic transfer switches shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the ATS terminals with the type of over current protection shown on the plans. B. The automatic transfer switch shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance with that standard's 1.5 and 3 cycle (any breaker up stream), long-time ratings. WITHSTAND RATING (Available RMS SYM Amps) ATS MAX FUSE MOLDED 1.5/3 RATING FUSE CLAS CASE CYCLES S AMPS AMP S CB* ** 30 60 100,000 (J) 10,000 10,000 70,100,150 200 200,000 (J) 22,000 10,000 260 600 200,000 (J) 42,000 35,000 400 600 200,000 (J) 42,000 35,000 104-1901 16492-10 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES (kw800 1200 200,000 (L) 65,000 50,000 1000, 1200 2000 200,000(L) 65,000 50,000 1600, 2000 3000 200,000(L) 100,000 100,000 3000, 4000 4000, 200,000(L) 100,000 100,000 6000 *With specific manufacturer's molded case circuit breaker. See switch manufacturer's catalog. ** For use with any over current device. (1.5 cycles for 30-150 Amp switches). 1. The automatic transfer switch shall have a momentary rating of 65000 amperes RMS symmetrical when connected to the load side of a molded case circuit breaker. 2.6 SIGNAGE A. Each automatic transfer switch shall be furnished with a sign on all doors marked DANGER - 480 VOLTS - KEEP OUT. Letters shall not be less than 1-inch-high, 1/4- inch stroke. Signs shall be laminated plastic, engraved white letters with a red background. B. Provide a 2-inch by 6-inch nominal engraved master nameplate, of two-ply laminated 410, plastic, black face, 1/2-inch-high by 1/8-inch stroke white letters, screw fastened to the top of the door. Include ATS designation shown on the Drawings (e.g., ATS-1, ATS-2, etc.), service and short circuit ratings. C. Furnish on the external side of the front door marked WARNING - DO NOT OPERATE TRANSFER SWITCH WITH INTERNAL MANUAL HANDLE UNLESS BOTH POWER SOURCES ARE DISCONNECTED. Sign shall be of laminated plastic, at least 3/32- inch-thick, with 1/2-inch-high white letters on a red background. 2.7 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER/BY-PASS ISOLATION SWITCH A. The automatic transfer/by-pass isolation switch shall comply with the following, in addition to all the provisions of the automatic transfer switch specification. B. Furnish and install an automatic transfer and by-pass isolation switch system with the number of poles, amperage, voltage and withstand ratings as shown on the Drawings. Each system shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall consist of two elements, an automatic transfer switch and a two-way bypass-isolation switch. The system shall be listed to the latest requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL-1008 and rated for total system load. C. The units shall be interlocked both electrically and mechanically to prevent cross connection of sources when operated either automatically or manually. All power interconnections shall be rigid bus bars as opposed to cabling. taw D. Bypass-Isolation Switch 104-1901 16492-11 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES 1. An externally operable, two-way by-pass isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to either source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. Bypass and isolation shall be accomplished without the necessity of opening enclosure doors. All main contacts shall be manually driven. Arrangements utilizing electrically driven contacts shall not be acceptable. a. The permanently affixed, external, bypass handle shall provide three operating modes: "BYPASS TO NORMAL", "AUTOMATIC", and "BYPASS TO STANDBY". Bypass to the load-carrying source shall be accomplished without any interruption of power to the load (make before break contacts). The operating speed of the bypass contacts shall be the same as that of the associated automatic transfer switch and shall be independent of speed at which the manual bypass handle is operated. In the "automatic" mode, the bypass contacts shall be out of the power circuit so that they will not be required to carry fault currents to which the system might be subjected. b. The permanently affixed, external, isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: "CLOSED", "TEST", and "OPEN". The "test" mode shall permit testing of the entire stand-by power system and automatic transfer switch without any interruption of power to the load. The "open" mode shall completely isolate the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. When in the "open" mode, it shall be possible to withdraw the automatic transfer switch for inspection or maintenance without removal of power conductors. When in the "test" or "open" modes, the externally operated bypass switch shall function as a manual transfer switch allowing transfer and retransfer of the load between sources without load regenerating voltage feedback to the transfer switch. This operation shall comply with paragraph 45.7 of UL-1008. E. Construction 1. The automatic transfer and bypass-isolation switch system shall be supplied in a common enclosure. The complete system shall be factory assembled and tested prior to shipment. Power interconnections shall be silver-plated copper buss bar. The only field-installed power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the bypass-isolation switch. All control interwiring shall be provided with disconnect plugs. a. An external visual position indicator shall be provided to indicate bypass- isolation switch positions. Pilot lights shall indicate availability of power sources and automatic transfer switch position. A prominent and detailed instruction plate shall be furnished. b. The transfer switch unit shall be constructed with a draw-out mechanism and mechanically interlocked to allow complete removal of the transfer switch after the load has been bypassed. c. Provide a means to padlock the isolation handle in the "open" position. 104-1901 16492-12 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES 46,,„ F. Electrical and Mechanical Performance 1. The switch shall comply with UL-1008 and NEMA Standard Publication ICS 2- 447. In addition, the switch shall meet or exceed the following requirements and be verified by certified laboratory test report. a. Temperature rise measurements shall be made after the overload and the endurance test. b. The switch shall withstand the UL listed magnitude of fault current available at the switch terminals when coordinated with respective protective devices as shown on the Drawings at an X/R ratio of 6.6 or less. The main contacts of the transfer switch shall not trip open or weld when subjected to fault currents. c. The dielectric test following the withstand current rating test shall be performed at 1,960 VAC RMS, minimum. 2. The control panel shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) as follows: a. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) - IEC 801-2 b. Electrical fast transients (EFT) - IEC 801-4 and NEMA ICS-1-109 • c. Surge withstand - IEC 801-5 and IEEE 472 (ANSI C37.90A) d. Electromagnetic Interference - Mil Std. 461, Class 3 2.8 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. All non-current carrying metal parts of the control center assembly shall be cleaned of all weld spatter and other foreign material and given a heat-cured, phosphatized chemical pre-treatment to inhibit rust. B. Indoor equipment shall be finish painted with one coat of manufacturer's standard electro- coated, heat-cured enamel. C. Outdoor equipment shall be finish painted with two coats of polyurethane or epoxy enamel, 2 to 3 mil thickness. Exterior color shall be light gray. D. Unpainted non-current carrying parts shall receive a protective zinc plating to prevent corrosion. E. All printed circuit boards shall have a conformal coating for environmental protection against fungus. F. All current carrying contacts shall be silver plated or made of silver alloy to provide resistance to welding, sticking, and low voltage drop. 2.9 SHOP TESTING 104-1901 16492-13 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Perform manufacturer's standard production testing and inspection in accordance with NEMA and ANSI standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Automatic transfer switch floor sills shall be bolted directly to the finished floor or equipment pad. Structure shall be leveled and plumb. Anchor bolts shall be 1/2-in. Provide hardware and shims for installation. B. Field-installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. C. In general, all conduit entering or leaving the automatic transfer switch shall be stubbed into the section in which the conductors are to be terminated. D. Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. E. Remove temporary lifting angles, lugs, and shipping braces. Touch up damaged paint finishes. F. Torque all connections. G. Seal all seams, cracks, or openings in outdoor enclosures. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Make the following minimum tests and checks before the manufacturer's representative is called in for testing and adjustment. 1. Megger incoming line terminals and buses, phase-to-phase and phase-to- ground after disconnecting devices sensitive to megger voltage. 2. Check polarity and continuity. 3. Check mechanical interlocks for proper operation. 4. Test ground connections for continuity and resistance. 5. Adjust unit doors. 6. Check control circuit interlocking and continuity. Provide external source of control power for this test. 7. Adjust timing devices to their correct settings. B. In the event of an equipment fault, notify the Engineer immediately. After the cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor, the Engineer and the equipment manufacturer's factory 104-1901 16492-14 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES L service technician. Repair or replace the equipment as directed by the Engineer prior to placing the equipment back into service. C. The manufacturer's representative, together with the Contractor and engine- generator field service technician, shall test and demonstrate satisfactory operation of the stand-by power system as follows: 1. Simulate power failure and demonstrate that the engine-generator automatically starts and the electrical load is transferred to standby power. 2. Simulate restoration of normal power. Demonstrate that: a. The transfer switch goes into the neutral off position to allow inductive load decay. b. The electrical load is transferred to normal power. c. The engine runs unloaded for the cool-down period. d. The engine stops automatically. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT, STARTUP, AND TRAINING A. The automatic transfer switch manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory- trained service technician for startup and training of the Owner's personnel. The first trip shall be coordinated with the equipment startup. The second trip shall include any necessaryfollow-up or punch list work, and shall also include instructions to the Owner or to his or her designated personnel. The manufacturer's service technician shall demonstrate and test all operational features of the installed equipment to the satisfaction of the Owner. Submit a certified copy of the field inspection to the Engineer. No equipment shall be energized without the approval of the Engineer. B. The automatic transfer switch manufacturer's factory service technician shall make the following inspection, tests, and adjustments: 1. Ensure proper operation of the individual components and overall sequence of operation. 2. Ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency, and time delay settings comply with the specification requirements. 3. Inspect the installation for compliance with the manufacturer's recommended installation practices, and report all deviations to the Engineer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the switch. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. 41) 104-1901 16492-15 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland AUTOMATIC Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement TRANSFER SWITCHES END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 16492-16 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LIGHTNING Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PROTECTION SYSTEM SECTION 16502 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a complete lightning protection system for City of Pearland John Hargrove Environmental Complex Water Reclamation Facility Expansion (all new buildings shown on the drawings). The system shall be UL labeled and shall be designed and installed in compliance with provisions of UL-96A and NFPA-780. B. Employ the services of a licensed lightning protection systems engineering company to design and install the lightning protection system and prepare detailed installation drawings and material specifications. The Drawings and this Section shall be submitted for review in accordance with Section 01350. C. The lightning protection system shall be checked by a UL field inspector upon completion of the installation. Assume full responsibility for the correctness of the installation and make any and all corrections and additions deemed necessary by the UL inspector. Pay for all costs of the UL inspection and any subsequent re-inspections as required. 4611, D. The lightning protection system for the building shall consist of an aluminum ground wire with air terminals which shall be grounded to the building structural steel or ground grid at regular intervals. The Contractor has the option of submitting alternate methods of lightning protection for consideration in his/her proposal, provided they offer an equal or greater degree of protection than those specified. E. The grounding systems for the building shall be provided under Section 16660. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Underwriters Laboratories(UL) 1. UL 96A - UL Standard for Safety Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection System. B. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 1. NFPA 780 - Lightning Protection Code (00 C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 104-1901 16502-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LIGHTNING Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and shall comply in weight, size, and composition with the requirements of UL and NFPA. B. Grounding materials and methods shall be equal to those specified under Section 16660. C. The following is a brief description of the various items of material: 1. Air Terminals a. Air terminals shall be 5/8-inch by 18-inch minimum solid aluminum and shall extend at least 18-inch above the object to be protected. All air terminal bases shall be cast bronze with stainless steel bolt pressure cable connectors. The air terminals should be spaced so as not to exceed 20-ft. apart around the outside perimeter of the roof or the ridge and not over 50-ft. apart through the center of flat roof areas. The air terminals in the center roof area shall be 5/8-inch by 48-inch solid aluminum with a proper brace. All air terminal bases for flat roof areas shall be of the adhesive type. 2. Conductors a. Conductors shall consist of UL listed 37 strands of 13 gauge aluminum wire weighing 200 lbs. per 1000-ft. and installed in accordance with the UL Code. Conductors on the flat roof areas may be run exposed. Ground connections shall be made to the main down conductor at a maximum of 60-ft.-0-in. on centers. 3. Fasteners a. Conductor fasteners shall be an approved type of non-corrosive metal, have ample strength to support conductors and shall be spaced not to exceed 3-ft.-0-in. centers. Masonry type cable fasteners spaced every 3- ft.-0-in. on masonry. Adhesive type cable fasteners spaced every 3-ft.-0-in. on flat roofs. 4. Cable Connectors a. All cable connectors shall be cast bronze with screw-pressure type stainless steel bolts and nuts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All materials shall be installed by experienced workmen that specialize in this type of 104-1901 16502-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LIGHTNING Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PROTECTION SYSTEM work. The lightning protection system shall be installed per approved shop drawings and UL and NFPA recommended practices. B. The lightning protection system engineering company shall provide job site assistance and supervision of the installation as required, and shall be present during the UL inspection. C. The structural steel columns on the outside perimeter of the building may be utilized as the main down conductor from roof to ground for the lightning protection system. No other parts of the structural steel structure will be accepted to substitute for lightning conductors. The steel columns around the outside perimeter of the building shall be grounded at every other column and in no case shall average over 60-ft. apart. Where the steel columns are used, a connection to the top of each steel column shall be made through the roof and connected to the roof conductor. A thru-the-roof connector shall be installed by the lightning protection contractor where a conductor penetrates the roof. The thru-the-roof connector will be 1/2-inch stainless steel threaded rod equipped with the necessary lead or neoprene washers and stainless nuts for a watertight seal. Also, copper pitch pans shall be furnished under this Section and installed by the roofing contractor. D. All concealed conductors shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC conduit. E. All metal bodies within 6-ft. of the conductor shall be bonded to the system with approved fittings and conductor. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be • made with approved bimetallic connections. END OF SECTION 46, 104-1901 16502-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland LIGHTNING Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement PROTECTION SYSTEM THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 16502-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement LIGHTING FIXTURES 411. Section 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specification for: 1. LED lighting fixtures 2. High intensity discharge (HID) lighting fixtures 3. Emergency lighting fixtures 4. Exit fixtures 5. Incandescent lighting fixtures 6. Photo cells 1.02 REFERENCES • A. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA) 1. No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) a. Article 410 - Lighting Fixtures, Lampholders, Lamps and Receptacles b. Article 500 - Hazardous (classified) locations c. Article 700 - Emergency Systems 2. No. 101 - Life Safety Code B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High Intensity discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns. 2. C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). C. American National Standards Institute/Illuminating Engineering Society(ANSI/IES): The IES Handbook shall be used as a basis for design and construction of lighting systems. tre 104-1901 16510-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement LIGHTING FIXTURES D. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc./Illuminating Engineering Society(ASHRAE/IES): ASHRAE/IES 90.1 - 1989 - Energy Efficient Design of new Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. E. American National Standards Institute/Underwriters Laboratories (ANSI/UL). 1. UL8750 - LED Lighting Fixtures. 2. UL1571 - Incandescent Lighting Fixtures. 3. UL1572 - High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures. 4. UL844 - Fixtures for Hazardous Areas. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures: 1. Outline dimensions, support points and unit weight. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Complete test report with photometric curves. 4. Storage, handling, and installation recommendation. 5. Connection diagrams. 6. Catalog data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests. Run manufacturer's tests on lighting fixtures in accordance with applicable Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) Standards 1570, 1571 and 8750 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Have lighting fixtures individually packed to permit ease of handling and to provide protection from damage during shipping, handling and storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Crouse-Hinds, Div. of Cooper Industries B. G.E. Lighting System C. Holophane Company, Inc. D. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. 104-1901 16510-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement LIGHTING FIXTURES • E. Killark-Hubbell Mfg. Company F. Lithonia Lighting G. Pauluhn Electric/Eaton H. Wide-Lite/Philips Dual-Lite-Hubbell Mfg. Company 2.02 REQUIREMENTS A. Provide lighting fixtures in accordance with the lighting plan Drawings and Lighting Fixture Schedules. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NEC Articles 410, 500 and 700 as applicable, and the Drawings. B. Wire up fixtures in accordance with the Drawings and ensure proper switching, circuiting and balanced loads. • C. Make sure proper grounding and bonding are provided for fixtures and raceways. D. Install specified lamps in each fixture. E. When applicable, aim and adjust fixtures in accordance with directions as indicated on the Drawings. F. Energize and test fixtures for proper operation. G. Check the illumination level with a light meter and ensure that sufficient light is reaching areas where tasks are performed and that egress paths are properly illuminated during emergency situations. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16510-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement LIGHTING FIXTURES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 16510-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM • SECTION 16600 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install a complete underground system of raceways, manholes, and handholes as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Where referred in this Section, raceways are underground conduits; ductbanks are a collection of underground raceways. Underground system is the collection of underground raceways, manholes, and handholes. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting manholes and handholes at the proper elevation such that the pitch of raceways will be towards manholes and handholes and away from structures, vaults, and buildings. D. Ductbanks shall be encased in steel reinforced concrete up to the building, structure, vault, manhole, and handhole unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. 1. Ductbank, manhole, and handhole depths vary. Coordinate with other utilities, yard piping, yard structures, and field conditions to determine • required depths and install raceways, manholes, and handholes at that required depth at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Ductbank routing and manhole/handhole locations shown on the Drawings are diagrammatically depicted. Coordinate with other utilities, yard piping, yard structures, and field conditions to determine required paths and depths at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment will be made for this Work. Include payment in the lump sum base bid. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Excavation and backfilling, including gravel and sand bedding, are included in Division 2. B. Concrete and reinforcing steel are included in Division 3. C. All concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 3, but the responsibility of furnishing and installing the material shall be that of this Section. D. All trenching and surface restoration shall be as specified in Division 2, but the responsibility of furnishing and installing the material shall be that of this Section. 104-1901 16600-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01350, shop drawings and product data for the following: 1. Manholes and handholes 2. Plastic duct spacers 3. Manhole and handhole frames, covers, and chimney rings 4. Buoyancy calculations PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Raceways shall be polyvinyl chloride conduit encased in steel- reinforced concrete, except that rigid steel conduit shall be used for shielded signal wiring, analog I/O and copper or non-fiber optic data highway wiring. Refer to Section 16110 and detail drawings for material requirements. B. Cable racks, supports, pulling-in irons, manhole steps and hardware shall be non-metallic as manufactured by Line Materials Co.; Underground Devices, Inc.; Chance; or equal. C. Precast manholes and handholes shall be designed as specified below for precast concrete structures. Manufacturer shall provide buoyancy calculations to the Engineer for approval. 1. Refer to the drawings for inside dimensions, headroom requirements, and minimum thickness of concrete for precast reinforced concrete structures. 2. Manholes shall be furnished with sump pits and sump pumps as indicated on the drawings. 3. Structural design calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. 4. Design Criteria a. Precast Concrete 1) Minimum compressive strength shall be 5,000 psi at 28 days. 2) Maximum water to concrete ratio shall be 0.40 by weight. 3) Minimum cement content shall be 600 lbs. of cement per cubic yard of concrete. b. Manufactured Products 104-1901 16600-2 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM coy1) Conform to ACI 318. 2) Products shall support their own weight, weight of soil above at 130 pcf and a live load equal to AASHTO H2O applied to top slab. Depth of soil will be calculated from finished grade. 3) Cast base slab and walls together to form a monolithic base section. 4) Structure walls shall be designed for an equivalent lateral fluid pressure of 90 pcf. Originate pressure diagram at finished ground surface. Include lateral pressure from vehicles in accordance with AASHTO. 5) Consider discontinuities in structure produced by openings and joints. Provide additional reinforcing around openings. Frame openings to carry full design loads to support walls. 6) Prevent flotation, with ground water level at finished ground surface, by dead weight of structure and soil load above structure. Do not consider skin friction, soil friction, or weight of equipment or contents in structure. Factor of safety against • buoyancy shall be 1.15. If a concrete slab is required to prevent flotation, design the slab and provide anchorage of the structure to the slab. 7) Design structure with a minimum number of joints. 8) Provide lifting hooks for the top slab. 9) Locate access openings, knockouts, and penetrations as indicated. 5. The date of manufacture, name and trademark of manufacturer shall be marked on the inside of each precast section. 6. Provide integrally cast knock-out panels in precast concrete manhole and handhole sections at locations indicated and with sizes indicated. Knock- out panels shall have no steel reinforcing. 7. Seal tongue and groove joints of precast manhole and handhole sections with rubber 0-ring gasket. 0-ring gasket shall conform to ASTM C443. In lieu of the 0-ring gasket, a flexible joint sealant may be used. Sealant shall be Kent Seal No. 2, ConSeal No. 2, Ram-Nek, or equal. Completed joints shall withstand 15 psi internal water pressure without leakage or displacement of gasket or sealant. 8. Dampproofing shall be Hydrocide 648 by Sonneborn Building Products; C Dehydratine 4 by A.C. Horn, Inc.; RIW Marine Liquid by Toch Brothers; or equal. 104-1901 16600-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM D. Precast manholes and handholes shall be as manufactured by Chase Precast Corp.; Rotondo Company, Inc.; American Precast Co.; or equal and constructed to dimensions as shown on the Drawings. E. Manhole and handhole frames and covers shall be cast iron, heavy duty type for Class H-20 wheel loading as manufactured by Neenah, LeBaron, Vulcan, or equal. Covers shall be marked and sized as shown on the Drawings. F. Ground rods and other grounding materials and methods shall be as specified in Section 16660. G. Bell ends and plastic duct spacers shall be as manufactured by Carlon, Underground Devices Inc., or equal. H. Pull line for spare conduits shall be 1/8-inch nylon rope. I. Lighting Handholes (for Site Lighting Systems) 1. Lighting handholes shall be constructed of polymer concrete and reinforced with heavy weave fiberglass, green finish, open bottom and minimal dimensions of 32-inch-long by 19-inch-wide by 30-inch-deep. 2. Lighting handhole cover shall be heavy duty type, green finish with stainless steel penta head bolts. Covers shall be marked "Roadway Lighting". Covers shall have a service load of 15,000 pounds over a 10- inch square. 3. Lighting handholes and covers shall be as manufactured by Quazite, Oldcastle, Easton Pre- Cast, or equal. J. Detectable Warning Tape 1. Each ductbank section shall be marked by means of a detectable warning tape (tracer tape) as shown on the Drawings. The detectable warning tape shall be capable of being detected or located by either conductive or inductive location techniques. 2. The detectable warning tape shall consist of 5 mil (.005-in.) overall thickness; five-ply composition; ultra-high molecular weight; virgin polyethylene; acid; alkaline- and corrosion-resistant; with 150 pounds of tensile break strength minimum per 6-in.width. 3. The top side of the tracer tape shall be color banded red for electrical and high voltage lines; and orange for signal, communication, telephone, and fire alarm lines. Tracer tape shall be 4-inch-wide with four color bands. The tape shall be inscribed with the warning message for the utility such as "CAUTION — ELECTRICAL LINED BURIED BELOW". Tape shall be as manufactured by Mutual Industries, Inc.; Terra Tape, Div. of Reef Industries Inc.; or equal. K. Bricks for raising manhole and handhole frames to finished grade shall conform to ASTM C62. Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland cement, two parts sand and hydrated lime not to exceed 10-lbs. to each bag 104-1901 16600-4 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM of cement. 1. Portland cement shall be ASTM C150, Type II. 2. Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207. 3. Sand shall be washed, cleaned, screened, well graded with all particles passing a No. 4 sieve and conform to ASTM C33. L. Sidewalk boxes and boxes for concrete slabs shall be cast iron intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain, sleet and external ice formation (NEMA 3R). Boxes shall be manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, Killark, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION —NOT USED 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install raceways to drain away from buildings. Raceways between manholes or handholes shall drain toward the manholes or handholes. Raceway slopes shall not be less than 3-inch per 100-ft. B. Steel reinforce and concrete encase all ductbanks. See ductbank detail on the • Drawings. C. Lay raceway lines in trenches on mats of bank gravel not less than 6-inch thick and graded as per Paragraph 3.02.A. D. Use plastic spacers located not more than 4-ft. apart to hold raceways in place. Spacers shall provide not less than 2-inch clearance between raceways and edge of concrete envelope. Power system raceways shall be separated by 7.5-inch center-to-center. Non-power system raceways shall be separated by 4.5-inch center-to-center. E. The minimum cover for raceway banks shall be 24-inch unless otherwise indicated on the detail drawings. F. Make raceway entrances to buildings, structures and vaults (except manholes and handholes) with rigid steel conduit not less than 10-ft. long. G. Conduits run below floor slabs in slab-on-grade construction shall be steel. H. Raceway terminations at manholes shall be with end bells for PVC conduit and insulated throat grounding bushings for steel conduit. I. Where bends in raceways are required, use long radius elbows, sweeps, and offsets. Elbows and sweeps are to be rigid steel or PVC-coated rigid steel where shown on the drawings. J. Swab all raceways clean before installing cable. 104-1901 16600-5 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM K. Plug and seal spare raceways watertight at all manholes, buildings, and structures. L. Seal the ends of raceways and make watertight at all manholes, buildings, and structures. M. Install pulling-in irons opposite all raceway entrances to manholes. N. Train cables in manholes and handholes and support and restrain them on racks and hooks. Furnish inserts on all manhole and handhole walls for mounting future racks as well as racks required for present installation. O. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel elbows shall be used for pad-mounted transformer stub-ups and all stub-ups through concrete floors, walls, and slabs. P. A pull line shall be installed and left in all spare raceways. Q. Install detectable warning tape in all ductbanks as shown on the Drawings. Where trench exceeds 24-inch width, provide additional detectable tape runs to mark each side of the ductbank in addition to the one in the center. R. Manhole and Handhole Installation 1. Place bases on 12-inch bed screened gravel or crushed stone as shown on the drawings. Set base grade so that a minimum grade adjustment of 4-inch of grade ring is required to bring the manhole and handhole frame and cover to final grade. a. Use HDPE grade rings to adjust frame and cover to final grade. 2. Set precast sections plumb with a 1/4-inch maximum out-of-plumb tolerance. Seal joints of precast sections with either a rubber 0-ring set in a recess or a flexible joint sealant used in sufficient quantity to fill 75 percent of the joint cavity. Fill the outside and inside joint with non-shrink grout and finished flush with the adjoining surfaces. Caulk the inside of leaking barrel section joints with non-shrink grout. If leaks appear in the manholes or handholes, the inside joints shall be cleaned out and remade in a manner that will result in a watertight joint. 3. Allow joints to set for 24 hours before backfilling. Backfilling shall be performed by bringing the fill up evenly on all sides. 4. Plug holes in concrete with non-shrink grout or non-shrink grout in combination with concrete plugs. Finish flush on the inside. 5. Cut holes in precast sections to accommodate conduits prior to setting manhole and handhole sections in place. S. Brickwork 1. Mix mortar only in such quantity as may be required for immediate use and use before initial set takes place. Anti-freeze mixtures shall not be 104-1901 16600-6 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM included in the mortar. Install masonry when the outside temperature is Cy above 40 degrees F unless provisions are made to protect the mortar, brick, and finished work from frost by heating and enclosing the work with tarpaulins other equivalent material. 2. Set manhole and handhole covers and frames in a full mortar bed. Utilize bricks or HDPE grade rings, a maximum of 8-inch-thick, to assure frame and cover are set to the finished grade. T. Dampproofing 1. Coat outer surfaces of precast manholes and handholes with two coats of dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 CLEANING A. All new manholes and handholes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt, debris, and foreign matter prior to final inspection. 3.4 REHABILITATION OF EXISTING MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND DUCTBANKS A. Dewater existing manholes and handholes in accordance with Section 02140. Maintain dry conditions while repairs and modifications are made. • B. Remove existing cable tray supports and replace with new cable racks, supports, and insulators. C. Modifications and repairs to cracks shall be made in accordance with Section 03740. D. After removing old cables, clean out existing ducts to be reused with a duct rodder before installing new cables. E. Remove all debris from manholes and handholes after the work is completed. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16600-7 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement UNDERGROUND SYSTEM THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 104-1901 16600-8 Gupta & Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Cathodic Protection System for Steel Water Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement SECTION 16610 4111, CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STEEL WATER TANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION Design, furnish, install, test, and place in service a complete automatic voltage cathodic protective system for steel water storage tanks, as shown on PLANS and specified herein. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment for work performed under this Item. Include same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component part. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Special Provision to this Item designates tank size, source of water, electrical requirements, and other special features. B. Technical Specification Section 01350 — "Submittals" C. Technical Specification Sections 01782 — "Operation and Maintenance Data." D. Other related work as called for on PLANS or specified elsewhere in this or other TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 1.04 REFERENCES This specification references the following publications in their current editions. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CORROSION ENGINEERS (NACE INTERNATIONAL) NACE SP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems 1.05 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Technical Specification Sections 01300 — "Submittals" and 01782 — "Operation and Maintenance Data." A. Shop Drawings: Data to include as a minimum: 1. Location, size, and arrangement of electrodes and handholes. ® 2. System wiring diagram with sizes. 3. Electrode suspension fixture and access detail. 104-1901 16610-1 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Cathodic Protection System for Steel Water Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement 4. Rectifier description, data, and drawing. 5. Material and total weight of electrodes. 6. Design life of anodes. B. Operation and maintenance manuals. C. Certificate of conformance, as required under `Quality Assurance." 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier: Supplier-manufacturer to have permanent service organization within 200 miles of tank location. B. Set tank-to-water potentials in accordance with criteria of protection of steel, as established by NACE SP0169. C. Engineering Survey: Make an engineering survey, if necessary, to provide for design of an adequate system. D. All computations and drawings to be prepared by or under the direct supervision of a professional engineer registered in the state where site of project is located. Provide certificate signed and sealed by same engineer stating that computations and drawings are in conformance with design criteria. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver to jobsite in protective covering. Store equipment in manner which will protect it from the elements and physical damage. Include the use of heat lamps and protective covering when needed to prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Cathodic Protection System 1. Control unit to consist of necessary automatic electronic regulating circuitry in conjunction with transformer, rectifier stack, instruments, wiring, and terminal board; all mounted in suitable cabinets. 2. Provide following features and accessories a. Overall efficiency of the power unit to exceed 65 percent. Power factor to exceed 90 percent at full load and rated voltage of the power unit in the conversion of AC to DC. Power factor to be greater than 85 percent at outputs exceeding 25 percent of rated capacity. 104-1901 16610-2 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Cathodic Protection System for Steel Water Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement b. Control unit to have ability to regulate its direct current output as follows. 1) Manual operation to permit uniform adjustment over the full rectifier capacity from 0 to 100 percent. 2) Automatic operation using potentiostat or other potential comparator control, wherein current output is automatically adjusted to maintain structure at a preselected potential with reference to a single copper-copper sulfate half-cell positioned contiguous to the structure. 3) Automatic operation using potentiostat or other potential comparator control, wherein current output is automatically adjusted to maintain structure polarized potential, free of I.R. Drop, at a preselected value utilizing standard reference electrodes positioned at considerable distance from structure. Automatic controller to be capable of automatically maintaining tank-to-water potential at(-) 900 millivolts with respect to copper-copper sulfate reference electrode within accuracy of 25 millivolts. c. Rectifier to be air-cooled, dry-plate, selenium-cell type manufactured by evaporation process and having sufficient units to provide full wave rectification within manufacturer's ►, recommended ratings. Rectifier to have adequate cooling fins so normal temperature rise at rated capacity will not exceed that specified by NEMA and by manufacturer. Rectifier to have a minimum output capability of 2 milliamperes per square foot of submerged surface area. d. Transformer to have a primary winding of proper design for AC voltage available. Isolation transformer to be air cooled and housed to provide adequate air-cooled environment. Cover transformer with at least 3 coats of moisture- and atmospheric- resistant electric varnish. Transformer to conform to standards published by UL and NEMA for specialty transformers. Protect AC power input side of unit with lighting arrester. e. Mount rectifier output DC ammeter and voltmeter on panel board. f. Provide metal cabinet to enclose entire power unit and automatic potential control circuitry suitable for outdoor use, adequately ventilated, with hinged door and provision for locking. Openings to be weatherproof screened, with copper, bronze, or stainless steel insect screen. g. Include circuit breaker for AC supply as part of rectifier unit. h. Provide terminal board of electrical insulating material having suitable thickness and mechanical strength for connection of all 104-1901 16610-3 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Cathodic Protection System for Steel Water Tanks Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement leads. Provide sufficient electrodes of required number, diameter, and length positioned to equally distribute current to contact water surfaces. Each electrode to be suspended from wire or cable connected to suitable fixtures attached to tank roof. Supporting fixture to be of electrical insulating material construction. Electrodes to be easily removable for replacement and inspection through handholes of ample size. Provide handholes with gasketed cover plates bolted in place. Make connections of copper wire to electrodes above highwater line; connection joints to be permanently sealed with insulating material. j. Electrodes to be high-silicon cast iron as shown on PLANS and with designed configuration of electrodes as required to provide protection for a minimum of 10 years. Manufacturer: Harco "Duriron Anode," Wallace and Tiernan "Hi-Si Anode," or equal. k. System to be equipped with either a copper-copper sulfate or silver chloride reference electrode design for a minimum five-year life. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Work to be performed by skilled personnel and to conform to regulating - codes and ordinances. Workmanship to be in accordance with best practices of the trade. Work to be performed by personnel engaged full time in installation and servicing of cathodic protection equipment. B. Energizing, Testing, and Instructions 1. Check all electrical work before energizing. 2. Energize and adjust for optimum operation. 3. Take measurements of tank-to-soil potential using copper-copper sulfate half-cell as referenced electrodes. 4. Furnish written report in triplicate, including all test results, bound in Maintenance Manual. 5. Instruct designated employees of the OWNER in operation and maintenance of system. END OF SECTION 104-1901 16610-4 KIT Professionals, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GROUNDING SYSTEM SECTION 16660 GROUNDING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.), as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All raceways, conduits and ducts shall contain equipment grounding conductors sized in accordance with the N.E.C. Minimum sizes shall be No. 12 AWG. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300, as follows: 1. Manufacturer's name and catalog data for ground rods and exothermic welding methods and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conduit shall be as specified under Section 16110. B. Wire shall be as specified under Section 16120. C. Ground rods shall be 3/4-in by 10-ft copper clad steel and constructed in accordance with UL-467. The minimum copper thickness shall be 0.25 mm. Ground rods shall be Copperweld or equal. D. Grounding conduit hubs shall be malleable iron type similar to Thomas & Betts Co.; Cat. No. 3940 (3/4-in conduit size) by Burndy; O.Z. Gedney Co. or equal, and of the correct size for the conduit. E. Waterpipe ground clamps shall be cast bronze saddle type, similar to Thomas & Betts Co. Cat. No. 2 (1/2-in, 3/4-in, or 1-in size)or equal by Burndy; O.Z. Gedney Co. or equal, and of the correct size for the pipe. F. Buried grounding connections shall be by Cadweld process, or equal exothermic welding system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Run grounding electrode conductors in rigid steel or PVC coated conduits. Bond the protecting conduits to the grounding electrode conductors at both ends. Do not allow water pipe connections to be painted. If the connections are painted, 104-1901 16660-1 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GROUNDING SYSTEM id) dis-assemble them and re-make them with new fittings. B. Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. C. Bond all steel building columns in new structures together with ground wire in rigid conduit and connect to the distribution equipment ground bus, as shown on the Drawings. D. Ground wire connections to structural steel columns shall be made with long barrel type one-hole heavy duty copper compression lugs, bolted through 1/2-in maximum diameter holes drilled in the column web, with stainless steel hex head cap screws and nuts. E. Metal conduits stubbed into a motor control center shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connect to the motor control center ground bus. Bond boxes mounted below motor control centers to the motor control center ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with Table 250-95 of the National Electrical Code, except that a minimum No. 12 AWG shall be used. F. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2-in and larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run parallel (not spiralled)and fastened with plastic tie wraps. G. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with Article 250-94 of the N.E.C. H. Drive grounding electrodes as shown on the Drawings. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduits systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the N.E.C. to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the N.E.C. J. Seal exposed connections between different metals with No-Oxide Paint Grade A or equal. K. Care shall be taken to ensure good ground continuity, in particular between the conduit system and equipment frames and enclosures. Where necessary, jumper wires shall be installed. L. All grounding type receptacles shall be grounded to the outlet boxes with a No. 12 THWN/THHN green conductor connected to the ground terminal of the receptacle and fastened to the outlet box by means of a grounding screw. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent test instrument to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. 104-1901 16660-2 Gupta &Associates, Inc. City of Pearland Southdown Groundwater Plant GST Replacement GROUNDING SYSTEM car C. All test equipment shall be provided under this Section and approved by the Engineer. D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. END OF SECTION to 104-1901 16660-3 Gupta &Associates, Inc. I